IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Drive 3590


Maintenance Information
Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A

SA37-0301-05
IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Drive 3590


Maintenance Information
Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A

SA37-0301-05
 Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under “Notices” on
page C-1.

The revision character | found in this document identifies the information that has been added or changed since the previous
| release of this document. This release includes information to support the following enhancements:
| v Addition of information that supports Model H11/H1A
| v Rebranding or name change of Magstar to TotalStorage
| v Inclusion of Linux operating system information

| Nineteenth Edition (July 2002)

| This publication obsoletes and replaces P/N 19P1595 at EC H28177.
| The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
| INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT
| WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
| IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
| Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement
| may not apply to you.
| Order publications through your IBM® representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality. Publications are
| not stocked at the address given below.
| IBM Storage Subsystems Division home page:
| http://www.ibm.com/storage
| A readers’ comments form is provided at the back of this publication. Either mail the form or fax it to (520) 799-2230.
| If the form has been removed, address your comments about this document to:
| IBM Corporation
| RAS Package Development
| Department 4WUA
| 9000 South Rita Road
| Tucson, AZ 85747-9108
| U.S.A.
| When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any
| way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1997, 2002. All rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System® Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
RISC pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
9076 SP2® Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Device Driver Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Fibre Channel Attachment Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Web Site Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii

Chapter 1. Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Maintenance Starting Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
FID Entry Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Attention Drive Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Attention ACF Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

Chapter 2. MAPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operator/CE Panel Problems . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pneumatic Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pneumatic Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Chapter 3. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3590 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
RAS Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3590 Maintenance Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3590 FID Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Host Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Device Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
SCSI Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Fibre Channel Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
System Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Media Type Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Servo Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Erasing Data from Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Description of Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3590 Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Microprocessors and Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Read/Write Functional Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Head Guide and Brush Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Pantocam Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Loader Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 iii

 Fiducials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Operator/CE Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Operator Panel Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Pneumatic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Pneumatic System Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Operation – LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Power Switch and Power Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Automatic Cartridge Facility and Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Transport Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Subsystem Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Initial Microprogram Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Power Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Subsystem Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3590 Drive Model and Feature Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
| Identifying Feature Code Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Drive Model and Level Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
System Prerequisites for Proper Operation of Ultra Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Field Microcode Support (FMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Download Microcode from Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Field Microcode Support Using FMR Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Leader Block Replacement Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
ESD Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Pressure/Vacuum Gauge Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
SCSI Wrap Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Library Attachment Wrap Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
| Library Attachment Wrap Tool Interposer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Gap Set Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
ACF Motor Adjustment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
ACF Transport Position Adjustment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Tape Unit Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Potentiometer Adjusting Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Tape Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Hook and Loop Fastener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
| Fibre Wrap Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
| Fibre Wrap Duplex Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Inline SCSI Terminator for Open System Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Chapter 4. Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 4-1 . . . . . . . . . .
Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and MIMs) . . . . .
. 4-2 . . . . . . . . . .
Statistical Analysis and Reporting System . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 4-6 . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining 3590 Drive Error Information at Host . . . . . . . . . .
. 4-6 . . . . . . . . . .
3590 Drive Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 4-7 . . . . . . . . . .
Message Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 4-8 . . . . . . . . . .
MIM Exception Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 4-9 . . . . . . . . . .
SIM Exception Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 4-9 . . . . . . . . . .
SIM Service Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 4-9 . . . . . . . . . .
SIM/MIM Severity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Sense Key – ASC and ASCQ Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

iv IBM 3590 MI
 Sense Key 0 (No Sense) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Sense Key 1 (Recovered Error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Sense Key 2 (Not Ready). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Sense Key 3 (Medium Error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Sense Key 4 (Hardware Error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Sense Key 5 (Illegal Request) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Sense Key 6 (Unit Attention) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Sense Key 7 (Data Protect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Sense Key 8 (Blank Check) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Sense Key B (Aborted Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Sense Key D (Volume Overflow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
| Error Log Analysis – pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Running Tapeutil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Using SMIT/ERRPT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Error Log Analysis – iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
| iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System with CICS Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System with RISC Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
| Error Log Analysis – LINUX System — —. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Obtaining Error Information from Sun (Solaris) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Obtaining Error Information from HP/UX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Obtaining Error Information from Windows NT or Windows 2000 System . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Running NTUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
NTUTIL Symbolic Error and Error Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Chapter 5. Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Operator/CE Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Indicators and Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Operator/CE Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
| Operator and CE Panel Flow Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Operator Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
| CE Online Mode Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
CE Offline Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

ACF Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
ACF Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
ACF Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Cartridge Magazine Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Inserting and Removing Cartridges from Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
ACF Door and Lock Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Inserting and Removing Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Inserting Magazine Into 3590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Removing Magazine From 3590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Priority Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Transport Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
ACF and Drive Loader Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
ACF Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
ACF Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Initiator Control of ACF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Accumulate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Random Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Contents v
 Random 2-LUN Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Cell Status Indicator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Cell Status: Flashing Yellow – Attention Indicator LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Cell Status: Steady Yellow – Alert Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Cell Status: Steady Green – In-Use Indicator LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

Chapter 7. Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Materials Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
| Laser Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Safety Inspection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Sécurité. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Inspection de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Procedimiento de inspección de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Segurança . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Procedimentos Para Inspeção de Segurança . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Device Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Older Drive Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Newer Drive Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Rack Slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Completion Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Chapter 8. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Before Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Choosing Correct Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Model B11/E11/H11 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Install Model B11/E11/H11 in Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Install Model B11/E11 Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3191), or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200) 8-21
Install Rack That Contains Model B11/E11/H11 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Model B1A/E1A/H1A Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Install Model B1A/E1A/H1A Into 3494 Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Install Model B1A/E1A Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3190) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Installation Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Operator/CE Panel Setup and Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
| Model B11/E11 Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3191), or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200) . . . 8-41
| Model B1A/E1A Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3190) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
SCSI Bus Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
SCSI Bus Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
SCSI Bus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Examples of SCSI Bus Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
SCSI Host Attachment Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
| SCSI Cables to Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
SCSI Cables – Model B11/E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
SCSI Cables – Model B1A/E1A/H1A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
SCSI System Cable at Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Fibre Channel Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
Supported Host Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
Fibre Channel Cabling Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
Fibre Cables to Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
| Fibre Cables – Model E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
Fibre Cables – Model E1A/H1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74

vi IBM 3590 MI
 Fibre Cable at Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
Online Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78
Post Installation Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
Removing 3590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
Remove or Relocate Model B11/E11/H11 in Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
Remove or Relocate Model B1A/E1A/H1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
Repack Instructions for 3590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81

Chapter 9. Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Excessive Clean Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Prepare Tape Drive for Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Powering Device ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
End of Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Verify Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Setting Device Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Service Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Front Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Rear Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (A14 Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Rear Serviced without ACF, Model B1A/E1A/H1A (3494 Library) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Prepare Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, or H11/H1A in Desk Side Sleeve for Service . . . . . . . . 9-14
Prepare Model B11/E11 in Desk Side Cover for Service (RPQ 8B3191), or Model B11/E11/H11
(FC 2200). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Return Model B11/E11/H11 Drive to Desk Side Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Prepare Model B1A/E1A in Desk Side Cover for Service (RPQ 8B3190) . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Return Model B1A/E1A Drive to Desk Side Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Prepare Model B11/E11 in Desk Side Sleeve (Removable Top Cover) for Service (RPQ 8B3191),
or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Reinstall Sleeve Top Cover to Desk Side Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Prepare Model B1A/E1A in Desk Side Sleeve (Removable Top Cover) for Service (RPQ 8B3190) 9-22
Reinstall Sleeve Top Cover to Desk Side Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Operator/CE Panel Service Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Deck Enclosure Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
ACF Decorative Cover (Rack Mount Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
ACF Side Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
ACF Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Bezel (Model B11/E11/H11 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Display Sensors Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Manual Cartridge Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Identifying Cartridge and Tape Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Leader Block and Threader Pin in Machine Reel Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in Tape Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Leader Block and Threader Pin at Loader Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Leader Block Separated From Magnetic Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Magnetic Tape Attachment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Magnetic Tape Broken in Data Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Manual Unloading Loader or Transport (Model B11/E11/H11). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Drive Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Serial Number Change Procedure Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Serial Number Change (Current Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Serial Number Change (Former Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
FMR Tape Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Contents vii
 Converting FMR Tape to Scratch Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Updating FMR Tape from Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Making FMR Tape from Scratch Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Updating Microcode from FMR Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
History Log Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Microcode EC Level History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Fibre Channel World Wide Name History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Dump Maintenance Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Off-loading Dumps to Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Off-loading Dumps to iSeries (OS/400) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Off-loading Dumps to pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Off-loading Dumps to Sun System by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Off-loading Dumps to HP-UX System by Using TAPEUTIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Off-loading Dumps to SP2 by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
Off-loading Dumps to Windows NT or Windows 2000 System by Using NTUTIL. . . . . . . . 9-73
| Off-loading Dumps to Linux System by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Microcode Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76
Updating Microcode from iSeries (OS/400) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76
Updating Microcode from pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . 9-76
| Updating Microcode from LINUX by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Updating Microcode from Sun System by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Updating Microcode from HP-UX System by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82
Updating Microcode from Windows NT or Windows 2000 System by Using NTUTIL . . . . . . 9-83
Updating Microcode From SP2 by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83
Starting NT UTILITY (ntutil) from Windows NT or Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
Exercising Drive Attached to Windows NT or Windows 2000 by Using NTUTIL . . . . . . . . 9-88
Host Attachment Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
Checking Channel Attachment – iSeries (OS/400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
Checking Channel Attachment – AIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
| Checking Channel Attachment – Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
Checking Channel Attachment – Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
Checking Channel Attachment – HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-102
Checking Channel Attachment – Windows NT or Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-103
Checking Channel Attachment using NTUTIL under Windows NT or Windows 2000 . . . . . . 9-104
SCSI Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Setup SCSI Ports Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
SCSI Ports Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-106
SCSI Cable Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-107
SCSI Bus Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
Library Manager Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-111
Setup Library Manager Port Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-111
Library Manager Port Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-111
Fibre Channel Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-112
Fibre Channel Ports Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-112
Fibre Channel Problem Determination Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-113
Checking 3494 Control Path by Using MTLIB Command from pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System 9-116
FID E5 – Microcode Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-118
FID E6 or E7– Isolate Fault Between Microcode and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-120
FID E6, E7– Normal FID Display Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-120
FID E6 – Small Letters (Abnormal Display Condition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-122
FID FE – Isolate Fault Between Media and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-123
FID FF – Operator Action or Host Program Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125
FID FF Displayed on Drive Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125
FID FF Displayed at Host Only – Not at Drive Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125
Suspected Microcode Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125
Error Log Analysis Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-126

viii IBM 3590 MI

 Set Error Match Trap (To Get Dump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-130
Remove Error Match Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-131
Remove NORMAL Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-131
Remove SAVED Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-132
No Response from Operator/CE Panel and No Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-133

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements . . . . . . . . 10-1

Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
| ACF Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
FID 90: Operator/CE Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
FID 91: Operator/CE Panel Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
FID 92: Leadscrew Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
FID 95: Elevator Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
FID 96: Pinch Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
FID 97: Motor Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
FID 98: Transport Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
FID 99: Transport Cable (Former Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
FID 99: Transport Cable (Current Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
FID 9A: Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
FID 9B: Global/Interference Sensor Assembly (Upper and Lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
FID 9E: Priority Cell Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
FID A0: Magazine-Present Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
FID A1: Motor Cable Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
FID A4: LED Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
FID A5: Sensor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
FID A6: LED Cards and Random Lock Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
FID A9: Feed Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
FID AA: Transport Pinch Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
FID AB: Leadscrew Drive Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
FID B1: Pneumatic Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
FID B2: Pneumatic Hose Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
FID BF: Fan (Card Pack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
FID C1: Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
FID E3: Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
FID E4: Card Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
FID B5: Tape-Lifter Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
FID B6: Decoupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
FID B7: Tension Transducer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
FID BB: Pantocam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
FID BC: Loader Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
FID C6: Machine Reel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
FID C7: File Reel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
FID C8: File-Protect Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
FID C9: Door-Open Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
FID CA: Tray-Up Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
FID CC: Cartridge-Type Sensor Card Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
FID CD: Cartridge-Present Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
FID CE: Tape Path A Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
FID CF: Tape Path B Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
FID D0: Head Guide and Brush Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
Cleaner Blade Removal (Model B11/B1A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112
FID D4: Head Cleaning Brush Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-114
FID D6: Motor Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117

Contents ix
 FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-118
FID DB: Power Supply Cable (New Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120
FID DC: ACF and Operator/CE Panel Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-121
Locations and Removal Procedures – Model B1A/E1A/H1A (Library) Components . . . . . . . 10-123
FID 93: Library Interface Cover (Model B1A/E1A/H1A Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-124
FID 94: Operator Panel Cable (Model B1A/E1A/H1A Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-126

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 11-1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Use This Parts Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 11-1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly 1: Cover Assembly (Sample) . . . . . . . . . .
. 11-1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assemblies List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 11-2 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual Index, Model B11/E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 11-2 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual Index, Model B1A/E1A/H1A . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 11-3 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly 1: ACF Final Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 11-4 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly 2: Model B1A/E1A/H1A Final Assembly . . . . . . .
. 11-8 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly 3: Deck Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Assembly 4: Cable List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Assembly 5: Installation Parts and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24

Part Number Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Appendix A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. B-1 . . . . . . . .
TAPEUTIL in a Sun (Solaris) System Environment . . . . . . . . . . .
. B-2 . . . . . . . .
TAPEUTIL in HP-UX System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. B-7 . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. B-7 . . . . . . . .
Interactive Menu-Driven Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. B-7 . . . . . . . .
Command-Line Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. B-8 . . . . . . . .
TAPEUTIL in Windows NT or Windows 2000 System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
NT Utility Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
| TAPEUTIL in Linux System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16

Appendix B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Communication Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Laser Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1

x IBM 3590 MI
 Tables
1. Information Web Site URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
1-1. Start Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-3. ATTN DRV Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1-4. ATTN ACF Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
3-1. 3590 Model Conversion Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
| 3-2. 3590 Cable Feature Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-3. 3590 Feature Codes for Fibre Channel Attachment with SC/SC Cables . . . . . . . . . 3-11
| 3-4. 3590 Feature Codes for Fibre Channel Attachment with LC/SC . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-5. Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
| 3-6. 3590 Drive Model and Feature Level Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
| 3-7. Model Read/Write or Read-Only Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
| 3-8. Microcode Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3-9. Cartridge Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
| 3-10. Fibre Wrap Tools and Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
| 3-11. Fibre Wrap Tools and Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
| 4-1. SIM Format Example Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
| 4-2. MIM Format Example Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3. Message Code Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-4. Exception Message Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-5. SIM Exception Message Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-6. SIM Service Message Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-7. SIM/MIM Severity Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-8. ASC and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 0 (No Sense) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-9. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 1 (Recovered Error) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-10. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 2 (Not Ready) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-11. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 3 (Medium Error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-12. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 4 (Hardware Error) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-13. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 5 (Illegal Request) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-14. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 6 (Unit Attention) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-15. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 7 (Data Protect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-16. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 8 (Blank Check) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-17. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key B (Aborted Command) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-18. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key D (Volume Overflow) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-19. Hex to ASCII Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-20. Device Driver to AIX ERRNO Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-21. Hex to ASCII Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-22. Hex to ASCII Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
| 5-1. Drive Type Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-2. Options and Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-3. Intervention Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-4. Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5-5. Set ACF Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5-6. Services Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5-7. Set Online Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-8. Set Offline Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-9. Confirm Offline Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5-10. Set Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5-11. Set Port 0 Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-12. Set Port 1 Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-13. Fibre Addresses Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5-14. Show Node Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5-15. Show Port Names Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 xi

 5-16. Set Port 0 Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-17. Set Port 1 Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5-18. Set Hard Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5-19. Use Soft Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5-20. Change Language Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5-21. Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5-22. Show Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5-23. Confirm Mode Change Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
| 5-24. CE Online Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
| 5-25. CE Logs Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
| 5-26. CE DRV Serial No Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
| 5-27. CE DRV Ser No Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
| 5-28. CE VPD Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
| 5-29. CE Save Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
| 5-30. CE Disp Sensors Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
| 5-31. CE Show Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
| 5-32. Show Drive Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
| 5-33. Show Tape Statistics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5-34. CE Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5-35. CE Verify Fix Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5-36. FRU Replaced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5-37. CE Loop Diag Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5-38. CE Main Dump Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5-39. CE Dump Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5-40. CE Object Alias Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5-41. CE Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5-42. CE FMR Tape Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5-43. CE Select EC Level Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5-44. CE Load Scratch Tape Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5-45. CE Load FMR Tape Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5-46. CE Config/Install Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
| 5-47. CE Drive Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5-48. CE SCSI Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5-49. CE Align ACF Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5-50. CE Fibre Names Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5-51. Show Node Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5-52. Show Port Names Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
5-53. Set Node Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
5-54. Set Port 0 Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5-55. Set Port 1 Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5-56. CE Save Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
5-57. CE Fibre Wrap Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5-58. CE Logs Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5-59. CE Error Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5-60. CE FID FE Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5-61. CE FID FF Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5-62. CE Temp Error Log Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
5-63. CE Utilities Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
| 5-64. CE Disp Sensors Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5-65. CE Disp/Alt VPD Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
5-66. CE Group Name Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
5-67. CE VPD Field Offset Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5-68. CE VPD Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5-69. CE Verify Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
5-70. CE Control Store Select Address Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
5-71. CE Control Store Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

xii IBM 3590 MI

 5-72. CE Microcode Trap Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5-73. CE Saved Traps Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
5-74. CE Read Tape Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
5-75. CE Process Tape Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5-76. Space Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
5-77. Read Block Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
5-78. Next Block ID Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
5-79. Password Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
5-80. (CE) Engr Use Only Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
| 5-81. H SARS Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
| 5-82. V SARS Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
5-83. Media Test Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
5-84. OEM Use Only Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
5-85. Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
5-86. Control Store Select Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
5-87. Control Store Alter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
5-88. CE Drive Features Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
5-89. CE B1A/E1A/H1A C12/C14 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
5-90. CE DRV Emulation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
5-91. Saved FSC Trap List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
5-92. Remove Saved FSC Trap Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
5-93. FSC Trap List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
5-94. CE Remove FSC Trap Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
6-1. ACF Drive and Loader Sensor Names and Key Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6-2. ACF Sensor Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6-3. Cell Status Indicator LEDs - Flashing, Yellow Attention Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6-4. Cell Status Indicator LEDs - Steady, Yellow, Alert Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6-5. Cell Status Indicator LEDs - Steady, Green, In-Use Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
8-1. Choosing Your Correct Installation Procedure.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
| 8-2. Drives 0 and 1 Slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-3. Drives 0 and 1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-4. Drives 2 and 3 Slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-5. Drives 2 and 3 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-6. 3590 SCSI Bus Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
8-7. Interposers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
8-8. 3590 Feature Codes for Fibre Channel Attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
9-1. ACF and Drive Sensors Menu Display, Meanings, and Test Methods . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
9-2. Serial Number Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
9-3. Hex to ASCII Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
9-4. Microcode EC Level History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
9-5. WWID Log Form Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
9-6. DRV Serial No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
9-7. Node Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
9-8. Port Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
9-9. Alter Serial No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
9-10. Alter Serial No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
9-11. CE Set Node Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
9-12. Set Port 0 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
9-13. CE Set Port 1 Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
9-14. WWID Log Form Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
9-15. Part Numbers for the 3590 SCSI Bus Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109
| 10-1. Pneumatic System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10-2. Card Pack Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
B-1. Service Commands and Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B-2. Basic SCSI Commands and Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B-3. Medium Changer Commands and Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Tables xiii
B-4. Tape Drive Commands and Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. B-4 . . . . . . .
B-5. Service Commands and Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. B-8 . . . . . . .
B-6. Basic SCSI Commands and Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. B-9 . . . . . . .
B-7. Medium Changer Commands and Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . .
. B-9 . . . . . . .
B-8. Tape Drive Commands and Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

xiv IBM 3590 MI

 Figures
2-1. Pneumatic Motor Cable to Card Pack Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2. Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, or H11/H1A Cable Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
3-1. Serpentine Interleaved Track Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-2. 3590 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-3. SCSI, ESCON, and FICON Attached Host Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-4. Library-Attached Host Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-5. Typical Fibre Channel Host Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-6. A60 Control Unit Fibre Channel Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-7. SAN Failover Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-8. Interleaved Longitudinal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3-9. Magnetic Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-10. Tape Drive Schematic Comparison (3490, SCSI and Fibre) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-11. Fiducial for IBM Model 3494 Tape Library Dataservers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-12. Operator/CE Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-13. Pneumatic System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3-14. New and Old Level Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3-15. Left View of the 3590 Magazine Cartridge Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-16. Automatic Cartridge Facility and Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-17. Cleaning Cartridge - Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3-18. ESD Grounding Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-19. Pressure/Vacuum Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3-20. SCSI Wrap Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
| 3-21. Library Attachment Wrap Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-22. Library Attachment Wrap Tool Interposer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-23. Gap Set Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3-24. ACF Motor Adjustment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3-25. ACF Transport Position Adjustment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3-26. Tape Unit Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3-27. Potentiometer Adjusting Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3-28. Hook and Loop Fastener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
| 3-29. SC Fibre Wrap Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
| 3-30. LC Fibre Wrap Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
| 3-31. SC/SC Fibre Wrap Duplex Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
| 3-32. LC/SC Fibre Wrap Duplex Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3-33. Inline SCSI Terminator for Open System Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
4-1. SIM Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2. MIM Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3. Error Log Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-4. AIX TAPEUTIL and DIAG Commands Error Log Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-5. AIX TAPEUTIL and DIAG Commands SIM Error Log Example . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-6. AIX TAPEUTIL and DIAG Commands MIM Error Log Example . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-7. AIX TAPEUTIL and DIAG Commands Error Log Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-8. Tapeutil Error Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-9. AIX SMIT and ERRPT Command Error Log Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-10. Error Log Example of SIM Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-11. Error Log Example of MIM Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-12. AIX SMIT and ERRPT Command Error Log Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-13. AIX SMIT and ERRPT Commands Error Log Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-14. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Example Error Log of SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-15. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Hexadecimal Error Log (Display) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-16. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Hexadecimal Error Log (Printout). . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4-17. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Example Error Log of SIM Message . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4-18. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Example Error Log of SIM Message . . . . . . . . . 4-30

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 xv

 4-19. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Hexadecimal Error Log (Display) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-20. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Product Activity Log (Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4-21. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Hexadecimal Error Log (Printout). . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-22. Tapeutil Error Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
5-1. Operator/CE Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-2. Options and Status Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3. Intervention Screen, Mount Screen, and Abend Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-4. Error Message Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-5. Example of Selection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
| 5-6. Operator Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
| 5-7. Verify Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
| 5-8. CE Panel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-9. Microcode Level Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-10. Confirmation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-11. Confirm Mode Change-Proceed Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5-12. Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5-13. Loop Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5-14. Final Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5-15. Loop Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5-16. Final Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5-17. Final Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5-18. Final Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
6-1. 3590 ACF and Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-2. ACF and Deck Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-3. 3590 Magazine Cartridge Positions – Left View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
| 6-4. Grasping Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-5. Inserting and Removing Magazine from ACF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-6. Transport Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6-7. ACF and Drive Loader Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-8. Transport Assembly at Priority Cell Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-9. Transport Stops at First Cartridge in Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-10. Cartridge is Pulled Into Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-11. Transport Moves to Priority Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-12. Transport Moves Cartridge Into Loader Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-13. Loader Moves Cartridge In and Down Onto File Reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
| 7-1. Laser Safety Label Class I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2. AC Grounding Diagram (50 Hz and 60 Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-3. Schéma de mise à la terre c.a. (50/60 Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-4. Diagrama de toma de tierra CA (50 Hz y 60 Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-5. Diagrama de Aterramento AC (50 Hz e 60 Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-6. Covers for Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-7. Label Locations (Older Drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7-8. Label Locations (Newer Drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7-9. Rack Slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
8-1. Drive Numbering in Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-2. EIA Unit Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-3. EIA Unit Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-4. EIA Unit Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
| 8-5. Slides (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-6. Cover Mounting Hardware (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-7. Drive Shelf (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8-8. Cable Guide (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-9. Drives 2 and 3 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8-10. Deck Enclosure Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8-11. ACF Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8-12. ACF Thumbscrew and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

xvi IBM 3590 MI

 8-13. View of Desk Side Lower Sleeve Installed on Base Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8-14. Desk Side Sleeve Installation for Model B11/E11 (RPQ 8B3191) or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC
2200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8-15. Shipping Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
8-16. 3494 Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8-17. 3494 Slides (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8-18. Front Cover and Deck Enclosure Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8-19. View of Desk Side Lower Sleeve Installed on Base Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
8-20. Desk Side Sleeve Installation for B1A/E1A, RPQ 8B3190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
8-21. Operator/CE Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
8-22. Desk Side Sleeve Installation for Model B11/E11/H11, RPQ 8B3191 (or Model B11/E11/H11,
FC 2200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
| 8-23. Desk Side Sleeve Installation for Model B1A/E1A (RPQ 8B3190) or Model B1A/E1A/H1A (FC
| 2200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8-24. Rack Cabling Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8-25. 3494 Cabling Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
8-26. pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
8-27. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
8-28. Sun Solaris 7 Open System Support Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8-29. HP-UX Open System Attach Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
8-30. Windows 2000 Open System Support Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
8-31. Open System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
8-32. Installing SCSI System Cable into 3590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8-33. Cable Retainers for SCSI (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
8-34. Internal Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8-35. ACF Decorative (2-Drive) Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
8-36. Cable Brackets (Bottom View of Drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
8-37. Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
8-38. Installing SCSI System Cable at Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
8-39. Installing Open System Cable at Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
8-40. Typical Fibre to Host Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
8-41. Cable Retainers for Fibre (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
8-42. Internal Panel Model E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8-43. ACF Decorative (2-Drive) Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72
8-44. Typical Model E11/E1A/H11/H1A Fibre Channel Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
8-45. Cable Brackets (Bottom View of Drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
| 8-46. Fibre Channel Cable Routing for E1A/H1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
9-1. Subsystem Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9-2. Front Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9-3. Rear Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (A14 Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9-4. Rear Serviced without ACF - Model B1A/E1A/H1A (3494) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9-5. Side View of Model B11/E11/H11 Drive and ACF on Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
9-6. Desk Side Cover Installation for Model B11/E11 ( RPQ 8B3191), or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC
2200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9-7. Desk Side Cover Installation for Model B1A/E1A, RPQ 8B3190 . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
| 9-8. Desk Side Sleeve Configuration for Model B11/E11 (RPQ 8B3191), or Model B11/E11/H11
| (FC 2200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9-9. Desk Side Sleeve Configuration for Model B1A/E1A, RPQ 8B3190 . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9-10. Static-Sensitive Device Attention Symbol and Grounding Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9-11. Operator/CE Panel (Model B11/E11/H11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9-12. Operator/CE Panel (Model B1A/E1A/H1A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
9-13. Deck Enclosure Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9-14. Deck Enclosure Back Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9-15. ACF Decorative Cover (Rack Mount Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9-16. ACF Side Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9-17. ACF Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Figures xvii
9-18. ACF Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9-19. ACF and Deck Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9-20. Example of Leader Block Separated From Magnetic Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9-21. Example of Magnetic Tape Pulled Out of Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9-22. Example of Leader Block and Threader Pin in Machine Reel Hub . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
9-23. Example of Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in Tape Path . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
9-24. Example of Leader Block and Threader Pin at Cartridge Loader Assembly. . . . . . . . 9-40
9-25. Example of Operation Stopped with Tape on Machine Reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
9-26. Example of Magnetic Tape Broken Somewhere in Data Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
9-27. Example of Cartridge Jammed in Loader or Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
9-28. Leader Block and Threader Pin in Machine Reel Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
9-29. Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in Tape Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
9-30. Leader Block and Threader Pin at Loader Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9-31. Removing Cartridge Exhibiting Separated Leader Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
9-32. Attaching Magnetic Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
9-33. Removing Tape from Tape Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
9-34. Removing Jammed Cartridge from Drive Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
9-35. Removing Jammed Cartridge from ACF Transport. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
9-36. Card Pack Drive Serial Number Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
9-37. Microcode Level Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
9-38. Base Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87
9-39. Host Attachment Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
9-40. Device SCSI Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
9-41. Device Fibre and SCSI Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
9-42. Device Fibre Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
9-43. SCSI Bus Cable Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109
9-44. Tape Library Control Path Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-116
9-45. Flow Diagram for FID E6 in Small Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-122
9-46. Blank Error Log Analysis Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-128
9-47. Example – Error Log Analysis Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129
10-1. Deck Enclosure Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10-2. Measuring and Adjusting Pneumatic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10-3. ACF Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10-4. Operator/CE Panel, Model B11/E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10-5. Operator/CE Panel, Model B1A/E1A/H1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10-6. Operator/CE Panel Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10-7. Gear-driven and Belt-driven Leadscrew Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10-8. Differentiating Between Former Level and Current Level Leadscrew. . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10-9. Leadscrew, Nut, and Retainer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10-10. Gear-driven Leadscrew, Gears, and Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10-11. Belt-driven Leadscrew, Gears, Belt, and Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10-12. Elevator Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10-13. Gear-driven and Belt-driven Leadscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10-14. Intermediate Gear and Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10-15. Differentiating Between Former Level and Current Level Elevator Motor . . . . . . . . 10-22
10-16. Motor Wires and Pinch Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
10-17. Intermediate Gear and Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10-18. Motor Control Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10-19. Transport Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10-20. Transport Position Check (Using ACF Transport Adjust Tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
10-21. Transport Cable (Former Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
10-22. Transport Cable (Current Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
10-23. Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
10-24. Global/Interference Sensor Assembly (Upper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
10-25. Global-Interference Sensor Assembly (Lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
10-26. Priority Slot Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

xviii IBM 3590 MI

10-27. Magazine Present Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
10-28. Motor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
10-29. Drive/ACF Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
10-30. LED Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
10-31. Sensor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
10-32. LED Cards (Rear View of Bezel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
10-33. Feed Motor, Feed Shaft, and Pinch Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
10-34. Intermediate Gear and Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
10-35. Pinch Roller Arm Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
10-36. Transport Pinch Roller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
10-37. Front Transport Pinch Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
10-38. Leadscrew and Leadscrew Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
10-39. Leadscrew Drive Belt Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
10-40. Deck Enclosure Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
10-41. Pneumatic Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
10-42. Pneumatic Hose Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
10-43. Fan (Card Pack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
10-44. Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
10-45. Power Supply (Former Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
10-46. Power Supply Cable Spiral Wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
10-47. Power Supply (New Level only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
10-48. Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
10-49. Card Pack Showing SCSI and Fibre Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
10-50. SCSI Card Mode Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
10-51. Deck Locations (Part 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
10-52. Deck Locations (Part 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
10-53. Tape Lifter Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
10-54. Decoupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
10-55. Tension Transducer Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
10-56. Tension Transducer Plastic Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
10-57. Machine Reel Hub Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
10-58. Pantocam Motor Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
10-59. Pantocam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
10-60. Pantocam Motor Leads Ferrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
10-61. Loader Assembly (Former Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
10-62. Loader Assembly (Newer Cable). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
10-63. Cartridge-Present Loader Spring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92
10-64. Machine Reel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
10-65. File Reel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
10-66. File-Protect Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
10-67. Door-Open Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
10-68. Tray-Up Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
10-69. Cartridge-Type Sensor Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
10-70. Cartridge-Present Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
10-71. Tape Path A Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
10-72. Tape Path B Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
10-73. Head Protector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
10-74. Head Cable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-107
10-75. Tape Guides, Tape-Lifter Solenoid, Hoses, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
10-76. Pantocam Assembly, and Head Guide and Brush Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-109
10-77. Cleaner Blade Removal – During Head Guide and Brush Removal . . . . . . . . . 10-110
10-78. Cleaner Blade Removal – Models B11/B1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113
10-79. Head Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-114
10-80. Head Cleaning Brush (In-Place) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-115
10-81. Head Cleaning Brush (Detail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-116
10-82. Motor Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117

Figures xix
10-83. Tach, Motor, and Loader Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-119
10-84. Power Supply Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120
10-85. ACF and Operator/CE Panel Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-122
10-86. Locations for Model B1A/E1A/H1A Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-123
10-87. Library Interface Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-125
10-88. Operator Panel Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-126
B-1. TAPEUTIL Program Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B-2. TAPEUTIL Program Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B-3. Base Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
B-4. Library Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
C-1. Laser Safety Label – Class I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

xx IBM 3590 MI
 Preface
This manual is intended for use by service personnel who install, remove, diagnose, repair, or test the IBM
3590 Models B11, B1A, E11, E1A, H11, H1A, Deskside, and to support the Ultra drives, FC 9790/5790.

Related Information
Additional information related to the subsystem is available in the following publications:
v IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0329
v IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Operator Guide, GA32-0330
v IBM 3590 Operator’s Quick Reference Guide, GA32-0354
v IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Hardware Reference Guide, GA32-0331
| v IBM TotalStorage Silo Compatible Tape Drive Frame 3590 Introduction, Planning, and User’s Guide,
| GA32-0366
v IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Maintenance Information, SA37-0270
v IBM Care and Handling of the IBM Magnetic Tape Cartridge, GA32-0047
v IBM TotalStorage Silo Compatible Tape Drive Frame 3590 Maintenance Information, SA37-0405
v IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Model A00 and A50 Controller Models Maintenance
Information, SA37-0420
| v IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Controller 3590 Model A60 Maintenance Information, SA37-0421

iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System® Information

For additional information about the iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System subsystems and software, see:
v IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver User’s Guide: Media Library Device Driver for Application
System/400®, GC35-0153
v
v Application System/400 Service Functions, SY44-3902
v Application System/400 System Operation, SC41-3203
v Application System/400 Physical Planning Reference, SA41-3109
v Application System/400 Physical Planning Summary, SA41-3108
v Application System/400 Control Language Reference, SC41-0030
v Application System/400 Security Concepts and Planning, SC41-8083
v IBM 9309 Rack Enclosure Setup and Operation Guide (Models 1 and 2), GA24-4039

RISC pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Information

For additional information about the RISC System/6000 subsystems and software, see:
v RISC System/6000®Getting Started: Using RISC System/6000, GC23-2377
v RISC System/6000 Getting Started: Managing RISC System/6000, GC23-2378
v RISC System/6000 Problem Solving Guide, SC23-2204
v RISC System/6000 System Overview and Planning, GC23-2406
v RISC System/6000 Planning for System Installation, GC23-2407
v 7202 Install and Service Guide, SA23-2670
v 7015 Install and Service Guide, SA23-2628
v pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Enterprise Servers S70 and S7A Installation and Service Guide,
SA38-0548

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 xxi

9076 SP2® Information
v Scalable POWERparallel Systems®: System Planning, SC233864 PACKAGE on MKTTOOLS
v Scalable POWERparallel® Systems: Installation Guide, SH23-3865
v Scalable POWERparallel Systems: High-Performance Technical Computing Solutions, GH23-2485
v Scalable POWERparallel Systems: Business Solutions, GA23-2475
v IBM 9076 Scalable POWERparallel Systems: SP2 Administration Guide, SH26-2486
v IBM 9076 Scalable POWERparallel Systems: SP2 Diagnosis and Messages, SC23-3866
v IBM 9076 Scalable POWERparallel Systems: SP2 Command and Technical Reference, SC23-3867
v IBM 9076 Scalable POWERparallel Systems: Maintenance Information, Volume 1, SY66-0294
v IBM 9076 Scalable POWERparallel Systems: Maintenance Information, Volume 2, SY66-0295

Device Driver Information

v IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver User’s Guide: Media Library Device Driver for Application
System/400, GC35-0153
v IBM SCSI Tape Drive, Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide,
GC35-0154

Fibre Channel Attachment Information

v IBM Fibre-Optic Channel Link Planning and Installation, GA32-0367
v Fibre Channel Storage Hub IBM 2103 Model H07 Installation, Service, and User’s Guide, SC26-7289
v IBM 2109 S08 Switch User’s Guide, SC26-7349
v IBM 2109 S08 Switch Service Guide, SC26-7350
v IBM 2109 S16 Switch User’s Guide, SC26-7351
v IBM 2109 S16 Switch Service Guide, SC26-7352

Web Site Information

Table 1. Information Web Site URLs
IBM RMSS Products Manuals http://www.storage.ibm.com/hardsoft/tape/pubs/pubs3590.html
Fibre Support Information http://www.storage.ibm.com/hardsoft/tape/3590/3590opn.html
Open System Support Information http://www.storage.ibm.com/hardsoft/tape/3590/3590opn.html
Statistical Analysis and Reporting System http://www.storage.ibm.com/hardsoft/tape/pubs/pubs3590.html
User Guide (SARS)
IBM Storage Area Network (SAN) Guide http://www.storage.ibm.com/ibmsan/director.htm
Minimum microcode requirements http://www.storage.ibm.com/hardsoft/tape/3590/3590attach.html
Device Driver Information ftp://ftp.software.ibm.com/storage/devdrvr/

xxii IBM 3590 MI

Chapter 1. Start
Contents
Maintenance Starting Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
FID Entry Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Attention Drive Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Attention ACF Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 1-1

Maintenance Starting Point
Begin all maintenance action here. Most drive failures result in a FID (FRU identifier) error code on the
drive operator/CE panel. Some load or unload problems may also result in ATTN DRV or ATTN ACF
messages. All of these error codes and messages are recorded in the drive CE Error Log for your
convenience. See “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 for details.

Table 1-1 lists possible reasons for service and the associated service action. Find the reason you are
here in the left column and perform the stated action in the right column. After determining the failing
hardware, remove and replace the FRU as directed. After any hardware replacement or other maintenance
action is performed, go to “End of Call” on page 9-8.

Note: If the service call is on a status 3 machine, see “General Instructions” on page 7-2, then return here
to continue the service call.

If you are unable to determine the cause of the problem (No Defect Found), or the problem is
intermittent, or the symptoms change and you need further assistance, go to “Problem
Determination” on page 9-4.

If the next level of support is needed, it is important that the full details of the error are understood prior to
calling support. Information related to the position and condition of the cartridge, media and mechanical
assemblies is important. Consider the condition or status of items, such as:
v Location of cartridge and transport assembly
v Position of loader assembly (up or down), and is the cartridge fully seated?
v Position of the pantocam pin and tape leader block
v Is the tape leader block attached to the pantocam pin and/or the tape?
Table 1-1. Start Here
If You Are Here For This Reason Perform This Action
3590 Model Axx Control Unit Problem Go to START section of IBM TotalStorage Enterprise
Tape System 3590 Model Axx Controller Maintenance
Information.
3590 Model B11/B1A attached to a Model Axx Control Go to START section of IBM TotalStorage Enterprise
Unit Tape System 3590 Model Axx Controller Maintenance
Information.
3590 E11/E1A and H11/H1A attached to either a A50 Go to START section of IBM TotalStorage Enterprise
Controller or a A60 Controller Tape System 3590 Model Axx Controller Maintenance
Information.
3590 Model C12/C14 Problem Go to START section of IBM TotalStorage Enterprise
Tape System 3590 Models C12/C14 Maintenance
Information.
Problem with Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, or H11/H1A in “Prepare Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, or H11/H1A in Desk
Desk Side Sleeve, RPQ 8B3191 or 8B3190 Side Sleeve for Service” on page 9-14
Install the 3590 Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, or H11/H1A or “Before Installation” on page 8-3
Deskside
FID message from the operator/CE panel, the CE Error “FID Entry Point” on page 1-8
Log in the device, or from the host
Attention (ATTN) message on the operator/CE panel or “Attention Drive Messages” on page 1-32 or “Attention
from the CE Error Log ACF Messages” on page 1-37.
Analyze 3590 CE Error Log “Error Log Analysis Procedure” on page 9-126

1-2 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-1. Start Here (continued)
If You Are Here For This Reason Perform This Action
SIM Message Use MSG section to get Message Code and FID. See
“Message Codes” on page 4-8 which contains SIM and
MIM messages. See Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 for the
location of the FID in the SIM record. Perform the stated
action in the Message Code or from the displayed FID.
SIM Service Message See “SIM Service Messages” on page 4-9. Read and
understand the meaning of the service message. Use the
MSG section to get message code and FID. See also
“Message Codes” on page 4-8. SIM format is shown on
Figure 4-1 on page 4-3. Perform the stated action in the
Message Code or from the displayed FID.
MIM Message See “Message Codes” on page 4-8. For MIM format, see
Figure 4-2 on page 4-5. Use this information to obtain the
message code. Perform the stated action in the Message
Code.
MIM Exception Message See “MIM Exception Messages” on page 4-9. Read and
understand the meaning of the exception message, then
use the MSG section to get the message code from the
MIM record. See also Figure 4-2 on page 4-5 and
“Message Codes” on page 4-8, and perform the action
stated by the message code.
Fibre channel Messages displayed on the operator/CE “Fibre Channel Problem Determination Procedure” on
panel page 9-113
Operator/CE Panel problems such as a blank display or “Operator/CE Panel Problems” on page 2-2
partial characters are indicated
Drive operator panel is hung/frozen “No Response from Operator/CE Panel and No Message”
on page 9-133
Drive does not power ON “Operator/CE Panel Problems” on page 2-2
Stuck tape or cartridge 1. If tape is loaded in the tape path, go to “Manual
Cartridge Removal” on page 9-37.
2. If the cartridge is stuck in the loader or transport
(Model B11/E11/H11), go to “Manual Unloading
Loader or Transport (Model B11/E11/H11)” on
page 9-49.
3. If the cartridge is stuck in the loader (Library models),
check the tension of the Cartridge Present Loader
spring. See Figure 10-63 on page 10-92, and refer to
step 1 on page 10-92 for the loader spring
replacement procedure. Ensure that the correct spring
is installed. See the Parts Catalog, “Assembly 3: Deck
Enclosure” on page 11-10.
Remove a cartridge by hand “Manual Cartridge Removal” on page 9-37
Replace a leader block “Leader Block Separated From Magnetic Tape” on
page 9-45
Broken or damaged tape “Manual Cartridge Removal” on page 9-37
Broken or damaged cartridge “Manual Cartridge Removal” on page 9-37

Chapter 1. Start 1-3

Table 1-1. Start Here (continued)
If You Are Here For This Reason Perform This Action
Clean messages on operator/CE panel, or reported to the Insert the cleaning cartridge in the drive. Cleaning is
host performed automatically
Notes:
1. If there was an excessive number of Clean
messages, go to “Excessive Clean Messages” on
page 9-5.
2. If there has been a recent part replacement in the
tape path or head guide assembly, go to “FRU
Replaced Menu” on page 5-41 and select one of the
menu functions to reset the drive statistical data.
Excessive temporary errors reported to the host 1. Go to “Error Log Analysis Procedure” on page 9-126.
If the drive has code level D0IE_2C3, use the
Temporary error log. Otherwise, use the Error Log,
FID FE error log and FID FF error log. See “CE Logs
Menu” on page 5-60 for a description of the error logs.
2. Go to “Error Log Analysis – pSeries/RS6000 (AIX)
System” on page 4-15.
a. Review “Message Codes” on page 4-8.
b. Review “Sense Key – ASC and ASCQ
Information” on page 4-10.
3. Ensure that the Force Error Log option is OFF. Go
to “CE Config/Install Menu” on page 5-51.
Media surface errors reported by pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) 1. Go to “Error Log Analysis – pSeries/RS6000 (AIX)
System System” on page 4-15. Analyze the error log for media
surface errors.
2. Contact your next level of support if further assistance
is needed.
Media surface errors reported by Linux system 1. Go to “Error Log Analysis – pSeries/RS6000 (AIX)
System” on page 4-15. Analyze the error log for media
surface errors.
2. Contact your next level of support if further assistance
is needed.
Tape write protected errors If the operator/CE panel shows the file protect icon, the
tape is either physically write protected, or the customer
has used a SCSI command to logically write protect the
tape.
1. Inform the customer that this is normal operation.
If the operator/CE panel does not show the file protect
icon, the drive had a problem reading the tape at the load
point.
1. The wrong format tape may be loaded. These 3590
Models have the following limitations:
v Model Exx drives cannot write on 128- or 384-track
tapes.
v Model Bxx drives cannot write on 256- or 384-track
tapes.
v Model Hxx drives cannot write on 128 or 256.
2. There may be something wrong with the cartridge. Try
writing on a different cartridge. If the failure occurs on
multiple cartridges, go to FID entry point on page
1-30 F0 or F1.
No Defect Found (NDF), intermittent, or symptoms “Problem Determination” on page 9-4
changing

1-4 IBM 3590 MI

 Table 1-1. Start Here (continued)
If You Are Here For This Reason Perform This Action
Processor Check light remains ON after power-on reset “Operator/CE Panel Problems” on page 2-2
Operator panel displays the CE menu rather than the 1. Remove the wrap tool from a SCSI port or the library
Operator menu after a power-on sequence manager port. See “SCSI Ports Wrap Test” on
page 9-106 and “Setup Library Manager Port Wrap
Test” on page 9-111.
2. If step 1 does not fix the problem, go to “FID E4: Card
Pack” on page 10-67.
The Diags Failed message appears on the operator/CE 1. Select Unload drive.
panel without a FID displayed 2. Select Cancel.
3. Select Verify Fix.
4. When the request for scratch tape appears, try
another tape cartridge. If the drive still fails, go to
Reported FID F0 F1 F2 F3 in 1-30 and follow the
FRU procedure there. The Logs can be analyzed
using the “FID FE – Isolate Fault Between Media and
Hardware” on page 9-123 procedure.
| Use diagnostic tape This message appears when the tape that contains data
| is loaded. Use a scratch tape, an unlabeled tape, or a
| diagnostic tape that does not contain data.
Media Test Mode (MTM) message on the operator/CE Call your next level of support.
panel
Host-reported SCSI problems (selection time-outs, “SCSI Bus Problem Determination” on page 9-108
command time-outs, parity errors, and similar errors)
Host-reported fibre channel interface problems (errors “Fibre Channel Problem Determination Procedure” on
processing requests/responses, loop up/down/parity page 9-113
errors, LIP condition, time-outs, and similar errors)
Host-reported problem during Install. Can not get the Ensure the Control Unit Mode option is Disabled. See the
drive online to the Host in a non-Control Unit, non-Virtual “CE Drive Options Menu” on page 5-52 for details.
Tape Server (VTS) environment
Host-reported FID FE (media/drive problems) “FID FE – Isolate Fault Between Media and Hardware” on
page 9-123
Host-reported FID FF (Operator Action or Host “FID FF – Operator Action or Host Program Error” on
Programming Error) page 9-125
Interface problem between the 3494 or 3495 library You were sent here from the 3494 or 3495 MI.
manager and the 3590
Perform “Library Manager Port Wrap Test” on page 9-111.
If no error occurs, the problem could be the cable
between the 3590 and the library manager.

Also see “Checking 3494 Control Path by Using MTLIB

Command from pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System” on
page 9-116.
ACF indicator lights problem ACF indicator or indicators will not light. Replace the
following FRUs:
1. “FID A6: LED Cards and Random Lock Sensor” on
page 10-48
2. “FID A4: LED Cable” on page 10-45
3. “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
Microcode problem suspected “Suspected Microcode Problem” on page 9-125
Set Error Match Trap “Set Error Match Trap (To Get Dump)” on page 9-130
Remove Error Match Trap “Remove Error Match Trap” on page 9-131

Chapter 1. Start 1-5

Table 1-1. Start Here (continued)
If You Are Here For This Reason Perform This Action
Microcode dump to SCSI or fibre channel Go to one of the following:
v “Off-loading Dumps to pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System
by Using TAPEUTIL” on page 9-67
v “Off-loading Dumps to Sun System by Using
TAPEUTIL” on page 9-69
v “Off-loading Dumps to HP-UX System by Using
TAPEUTIL” on page 9-70
v “Off-loading Dumps to SP2 by Using TAPEUTIL” on
page 9-71
OR
v “Off-loading Dumps to Windows NT or Windows 2000
System by Using NTUTIL” on page 9-73
Microcode dump to 3591 Go to the Procedures section of the 3591 Maintenance
Information
Microcode dump to cartridge “Off-loading Dumps to Tape Cartridge” on page 9-67
Microcode update via SCSI or fibre channel Go to one of the following:
v “Updating Microcode from pSeries/RS6000 (AIX)
System by Using TAPEUTIL” on page 9-76
v “Updating Microcode from Sun System by Using
TAPEUTIL” on page 9-81
v “Updating Microcode from HP-UX System by Using
TAPEUTIL” on page 9-82
v “Updating Microcode From SP2 by Using TAPEUTIL”
on page 9-83
v “Updating Microcode from Windows NT or Windows
2000 System by Using NTUTIL” on page 9-83
OR
v “Updating Microcode from LINUX by Using TAPEUTIL”
on page 9-79

Microcode update via 3591 Go to the Procedure section of the 3591 Maintenance
Information
Microcode update via cartridge “Updating Microcode from FMR Cartridge” on page 9-58
Update microcode cartridge with drive microcode “Updating FMR Tape from Drive” on page 9-58
Convert microcode cartridge to scratch cartridge “Converting FMR Tape to Scratch Tape” on page 9-58
Create microcode cartridge from a scratch cartridge “Making FMR Tape from Scratch Tape” on page 9-58
Obtain and analyze error log and sense information data “Error Log Analysis – pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System” on
from pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System®. page 4-15
Obtain and analyze error log and sense information data “Error Log Analysis – iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System” on
from iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System page 4-26
Obtain and analyze error information from Sun System “Obtaining Error Information from Sun (Solaris) System”
on page 4-35
Obtain and analyze error information from HP/UX System “Obtaining Error Information from HP/UX System” on
page 4-35
Obtain and analyze error information from Windows® “Obtaining Error Information from Windows NT or
System Windows 2000 System” on page 4-36
EREP information for 3590s attached to 3591 Go to the Message Section of the 3591 Maintenance
Information
Locate FRUs or replace defective FRUs Chapter 10, “Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals,
and Replacements” on page 10-1

1-6 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-1. Start Here (continued)
If You Are Here For This Reason Perform This Action
Run verification tests Select Verify Fix on “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
Vary (take) the device offline Have the customer vary (take) the device offline
Power OFF the 3590 “Powering Device ON and OFF” on page 9-6
Relocate or remove the 3590 “Removing 3590” on page 8-79
Inspection for maintenance agreement qualification See “General Instructions” on page 7-2, for the safety
inspection procedures

Chapter 1. Start 1-7

FID Entry Point
Table 1-2 on page 1-9 lists the FRU identifiers (FIDs) and the field replaceable units (FRUs) that you can
change. The reported FID is displayed on the operator/CE panel in a FID message, in the CE Error Log,
and reported to the host. For example, if the message is FID1 90, 1 is the severity and 90 is the FID.
“Intervention Messages” on page 5-10 describes the different types of messages and their impact on 3590
availability. The service information message (SIM) record, which the 3590 sends to the host, also has the
reported FID information. See “Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and MIMs)” on page 4-2.

Table 1-2 on page 1-9 also contains the FRU name and a page reference to the removal and replacement
procedure for the FRU. Each FRU is identified by a one-byte identifier (FID). The FID relates to the FRUs
that have the highest probability of causing the problem. Always replace the FRU with the highest
probability of failure first. Use the technical area code (TAC), provided here and in Chapter 10, “Locations,
Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements” on page 10-1, to assist you with call reporting.

Provided with the Reported FID is a display of twelve hex characters of support data. This support data
will be needed when contacting your next level of support, and should also be included in your call
reporting data.

At the start of your service call, write down the reported FID and the twelve hex characters of support data
for use in your call reporting when the service call is complete.
v If the FID is displayed in the operator/CE panel, see Figure 5-4 on page 5-11. The twelve characters of
support data are shown below the “CALL FOR SERVICE” message.
v If the FID was reported in one of the Error Logs, see Table 5-59 on page 5-61. The twelve characters of
support data are shown below the reported FID.

At the end of the service call, record the FID in the COMMENT field of the call record, and record the
twelve hex characters of support data in the FAULT SYMPTOM CODE (FSC) field.

This detailed call reporting will help Engineering and Field Support to quickly identify, understand, and
resolve field problems.

See Table 1-2 on page 1-9 for the complete list of FIDs and associated FRUs.

If the FID has cable FRUs in the FRU list, reseat the cable FRUs before replacing any FRU in the
list.

1-8 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
00 Drive serial number is the default value
— Invalid drive serial number — — Enter valid drive serial number (go to “Drive
Serial Number” on page 9-51)
01 Card pack serial number is the default value
E4 Invalid card pack serial number 100% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
03 Invalid setup detected
— Configuration problem — — Ensure config/install options are correct (see
“Set Customer Options” on page 8-35)
04 Incorrect pneumatic pressure detected
— Pneumatic pressure is adjusted — — Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of
automatically by the microcode Pneumatic System” on page 10-4
after each cleaning cartridge
cycle and when requested by
the CE via the Adjust
Pressure option of the CE
panel CE Config/Install menu.
At the time of the error, the
pneumatic pressure was not
correct.
07 Incorrect Card Pack or HGA installed
— The Card Pack and HGA FRUs — — See the Parts Catalog, “Assembly 3: Deck
are not interchangeable Enclosure” on page 11-10 to ensure the correct
between the E11/E1A and FRU is installed. The E11/E1A and H11/H1A
H11/H1A drives and the Model HGA serial number on the bar code label starts
B11/B1A drives. with a “T”, and the Model B11/B1A serial
number starts with a “B”.
08 Incorrect switch setting on Card Pack
— The Card Pack for the Model — — See “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67 for
B11/B1A with Common Card the correct switch setting. For the E11/E1A and
Pack or Model E11/E1A drives H11/H1A card pack or the Model B11/B1A with
has a rotary switch on one of Common Card Pack, the switch should be set
the logic cards. See to “F.”
Figure 10-50 on page 10-71
The switch setting is not correct
for the Model of the 3590.
09 World Wide ID on fibre card pack could not be read
E4 Replace Card Pack 100% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
90 Electronic fault (see also “Operator/CE Panel Problems” on page 2-2)
90 Operator/CE panel 88% V08 “FID 90: Operator/CE Panel” on page 10-12
DC ACF and operator/CE panel 5% C09 “FID DC: ACF and Operator/CE Panel Cable”
cable on page 10-121
91 Operator/CE panel cable 5% C09 “FID 91: Operator/CE Panel Cable” on
(Model B11/E11/H11) page 10-14
94 Operator/CE panel cable 5% C09 “FID 94: Operator Panel Cable (Model
(Model B1A/E1A/H1A) B1A/E1A/H1A Only)” on page 10-126
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

Chapter 1. Start 1-9

 Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
93 Gripper-present sensor did not change state
1. This error applies only to drives in a library subsystem. It does not apply to Model B11/E11/H11. If this
drive is not in a library, then change the config/install options to indicate that the drive is not in a
library. See “Set Drive Options” on page 8-36.
2. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the gripper-present sensor is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
93 Library Interface Cover 80% T03 “FID 93: Library Interface Cover (Model
B1A/E1A/H1A Only)” on page 10-124
E4 Card pack 15% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
DC ACF and operator/CE panel 5% C09 “FID DC: ACF and Operator/CE Panel Cable”
cable on page 10-121
95 Did not detect elevator movement
1. Attempt to perform “Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor” on page 10-28 before
replacing any FRUs.
2. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the transport-position sensors A & B (FID 98) are operating
correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP
SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
| Note: When the power is cycled, the elevator should move. If it does move, suspect one of the
| transport position sensors (A or B). If the elevator does not move, suspect the hardware that is used
| to move the elevator.
92 Leadscrew assembly 30% T03 “FID 92: Leadscrew Assembly” on page 10-15
95 Elevator motor assembly 30% T03 “FID 95: Elevator Motor Assembly” on
page 10-20
AB Leadscrew drive belt 15% T03 “FID AB: Leadscrew Drive Belt” on page 10-54
99 Transport cable 8% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former Style)” on
page 10-31 or “FID 99: Transport Cable
(Current Style)” on page 10-33
9A Transport 6% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
98 Transport-position sensor 5% T01 “FID 98: Transport Position Sensor” on
page 10-26
A1 Motor cable assembly 2% T04 “FID A1: Motor Cable Assembly” on
page 10-42
97 Motor control card 2% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
A2 Drive/ACF cable 2% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on page 10-44

1-10 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
96 Did not detect pinch motor movement
1. Check that the pinch arms are not bent. If the arms are bent, replace the transport FID 9A.
2. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the pinch 1 and 2 sensors are operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
99 Transport cable 40% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former Style)” on
page 10-31 or “FID 99: Transport Cable
(Current Style)” on page 10-33
96 Pinch motor assembly 35% T03 “FID 96: Pinch Motor Assembly” on page 10-23
9A Transport 10% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
A1 Motor cable assembly 5% T04 “FID A1: Motor Cable Assembly” on
page 10-42
97 Motor control card 5% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
A2 Drive/ACF cable 5% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on page 10-44
E4 Card pack 5% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
97 Electronic-detected fault
1. Error applies only to drives with an ACF. If this drive does not have an ACF, then change the
config/install options to indicate that the drive is not a Model B11/E11/H11. See “Set Drive Options” on
page 8-36.
2. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the priority cell sensors are operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
A2 Drive/ACF cable 80% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on page 10-44
97 Motor control card 12% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
9E Priority cell sensor (pair) 6% T01 “FID 9E: Priority Cell Sensor” on page 10-39
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
98 Transport-position sensor did not change state
1. Attempt to perform “Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor” on page 10-28 before
replacing any FRUs.
2. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the transport-position sensors A & B (FID 98) are operating
correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP
SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
98 Transport-position sensor 35% T01 “FID 98: Transport Position Sensor” on
page 10-26
99 Transport cable 25% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former Style)” on
page 10-31 or “FID 99: Transport Cable
(Current Style)” on page 10-33
95 Elevator motor assembly 15% T03 “FID 95: Elevator Motor Assembly” on
page 10-20
AB Leadscrew drive belt 10% T03 “FID AB: Leadscrew Drive Belt” on page 10-54
97 Motor control card 10% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
9A Transport 5% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35

Chapter 1. Start 1-11

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
9A One of the sensors in the transport did not change state.
1. Ensure customer is using correct cartridge. (3590 Only).
2. This failure may be caused by a dirty cartridge. Look for any contamination on the sides of the
cartridge that could cause the pinch rollers to slip. Have the customer clean or replace the cartridge or
magazine, if necessary. Use ONLY Tape Unit Cleaner, IBM P/N 05H3929 and a lint-free cloth. See
“Tape Unit Cleaner” on page 3-46 for details.
Note: Ensure that the customer does not ship magazines with cartridges loaded. The cartridges will
vibrate in the magazine slots resulting in contamination on the sides of the cartridges that may cause
this failure.
3. Check that the pinch rollers are not binding, and that the arms are not bent. If the rollers are binding
or the arms are bent, replace the transport FID 9A. Check the pinch rollers for contamination. If they
are dirty, clean or replace the rollers. Use ONLY Tape Unit Cleaner, IBM P/N 05H3929 and a lint-free
cloth. See “Tape Unit Cleaner” on page 3-46 for details.
4. This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (transport-position A & B, Limit 1 & 2, Pinch 1 & 2,
Import, or Export). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly.
See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP
SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
5. Attempt to perform “Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor” on page 10-28 before
replacing any FRUs.
Note: If the failure only occurs when accessing a cartridge from the bottom slot of the magazine, try
another magazine in the ACF.
99 Transport cable 40% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former Style)” on
page 10-31 or “FID 99: Transport Cable
(Current Style)” on page 10-33
9A Transport 30% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
AA Transport pinch rollers 20% T03 “FID AA: Transport Pinch Rollers” on
page 10-51
FD Magazine 5% Q05 Customer-purchased
97 Motor control card 5% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
9B The global/interference sensor did not change state.
1. Check the position of all cartridges to ensure they are properly positioned in the magazine and in the
priority cell. A cartridge that extends too far into the magazine in the import position or a damaged
cartridge can cause this error.
2. Remove the magazine and look for any obvious obstructions.
3. Try another magazine in the ACF.
4. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the Global Interference sensor (FID 9B) is operating
correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP
SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
9B Global/interference sensor 84% T01 “FID 9B: Global/Interference Sensor Assembly
(Upper and Lower)” on page 10-38
97 Motor control card 8% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
A5 Sensor cable 8% T01 “FID A5: Sensor Cable” on page 10-46

1-12 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
9C 3590 Model C12/C14 Electronic-detected fault
1. This error applies only to drives in a Model C12/C14 (library) subsystem. If this drive is not in a Model
C12/C14 subsystem, then change the config/install options to indicate that the drive is not in a Model
C12/C14 subsystem. See “Set Drive Options” on page 8-36.
9C STL0 library interface card 90% T02 See the CARR section of IBM TotalStorage
Enterprise Tape System 3590 Models C12/C14
Maintenance Information.
A3 STL0 card to ACF port ribbon 10% T04 See the CARR section of IBM TotalStorage
cable Enterprise Tape System 3590 Models C12/C14
Maintenance Information.
9E Sensor failed to change state
Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the priority cell sensors are operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS from
the CE UTILITIES Menu.
9E Priority cell sensor (pair) 92% T01 “FID 9E: Priority Cell Sensor” on page 10-39
97 Motor control card 5% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
A5 Sensor cable 3% T01 “FID A5: Sensor Cable” on page 10-46

Chapter 1. Start 1-13

 Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
9F Load or unload error when moving tape between the deck loader and the ACF transport.
1. Ensure customer is using the correct cartridge (3590 Only).
2. This failure may be caused by a damaged cartridge. Before replacing any FRUs below, inspect the
cartridge that was being used when the error occurred for physical defects. Have the customer
replace the cartridge if it is damaged.
3. This failure may be caused by a dirty cartridge. Look for any contamination on the sides of the
cartridge that could cause the pinch rollers to slip. Have the customer clean or replace the cartridge or
magazine, if necessary. Use ONLY Tape Unit Cleaner, IBM P/N 05H3929 and a lint-free cloth. See
“Tape Unit Cleaner” on page 3-46 for details.
Note: Ensure that the customer does not ship magazines with cartridges loaded. The cartridges will
vibrate in the magazine slots resulting in contamination on the sides of the cartridges that may cause
this failure.
4. Check that the pinch rollers are not binding, and that the arms are not bent. If the rollers are binding
or the arms are bent, replace the transport FID 9A. Check pinch rollers for contamination. If they are
dirty, clean or replace the rollers. Use ONLY Tape Unit Cleaner, IBM P/N 05H3929 and a lint-free
cloth. See “Tape Unit Cleaner” on page 3-46 for details.
5. Attempt to perform “Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor” on page 10-28 before
replacing any FRUs.
6. This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (door-open, tray up, cartridge present, limit 1 & 2,
transport-position A & B). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating
correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP
SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
| Note: Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in the
| area of the strain relief clamp (see item
6 in Figure 10-70 on page 10-102). Verify the sensor
| operation by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If the cable is
| bad, replace the loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
AA Transport pinch rollers 23% T03 “FID AA: Transport Pinch Rollers” on
page 10-51
BC Loader assembly 23% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
9A Transport 23% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
99 Transport cable 5% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former Style)” on
page 10-31 or “FID 99: Transport Cable
(Current Style)” on page 10-33
C9 Door-open sensor 5% T33 “FID C9: Door-Open Sensor” on page 10-97
CA Tray up sensor 5% T33 “FID CA: Tray-Up Sensor” on page 10-98
CD Cartridge-present sensor (in the 3% T33 “FID CD: Cartridge-Present Sensor” on
loader) page 10-101
A9 Feed motor assembly 3% T03 “FID A9: Feed Motor Assembly” on page 10-49
A1 Motor cable assembly 3% T04 “FID A1: Motor Cable Assembly” on
page 10-42
97 Motor control card 3% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

1-14 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
A0 Sensor did not change state
Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the magazine-present sensor is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS from
the CE UTILITIES Menu.
A0 Magazine-present sensor asm 94% T01 “FID A0: Magazine-Present Sensor Assembly”
on page 10-41
A5 Sensor cable 4% T01 “FID A5: Sensor Cable” on page 10-46
97 Motor control card 2% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
A6 Microcode did not detect current flow through ACF LED
A6 LED cards 80% T02 “FID A6: LED Cards and Random Lock
Sensor” on page 10-48
A4 LED cable 10% T01 “FID A4: LED Cable” on page 10-45
97 Motor control card 4% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
A5 Sensor cable 2% T01 “FID A5: Sensor Cable” on page 10-46
A2 Drive/ACF cable 2% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on page 10-44
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
A7 Load or unload error to priority slot
1. This failure may be caused by a damaged cartridge. Before replacing any FRUs below, inspect the
cartridge that was being used when the error occurred for physical defects. Have the customer
replace the cartridge if it is damaged.
2. Ensure that the customer is using the correct cartridge (3590 Only).
3. This failure may be caused by a dirty cartridge. Look for any contamination on the sides of the
cartridge that could cause the pinch rollers to slip. Have the customer clean or replace the cartridge or
magazine, if necessary. Use ONLY Tape Unit Cleaner, IBM P/N 05H3929 and a lint-free cloth. See
“Tape Unit Cleaner” on page 3-46 for details.
Note: Ensure that the customer does not ship magazines with cartridges loaded. The cartridges will
vibrate in the magazine slots resulting in contamination on the sides of the cartridges, which may
cause this failure.
4. Check that the pinch rollers are not binding, and that the arms are not bent. If the rollers are binding
or the arms are bent, replace the transport FID 9A. Check the pinch rollers for contamination. If they
are dirty, clean or replace the rollers. Use ONLY Tape Unit Cleaner, IBM P/N 05H3929 and a lint-free
cloth. See “Tape Unit Cleaner” on page 3-46 for details.
5. Attempt to perform “Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor” on page 10-28 before
replacing any FRUs.
6. This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (priority cell, limit 1 & 2, import, or export). Before
replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See Figure 5-8 on
page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS from the CE
UTILITIES Menu.
AA Transport pinch rollers 40% T03 “FID AA: Transport Pinch Rollers” on
page 10-51
9A Transport 40% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
99 Transport cable 10% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former Style)” on
page 10-31 or “FID 99: Transport Cable
(Current Style)” on page 10-33
A9 Feed motor asm 6% T03 “FID A9: Feed Motor Assembly” on page 10-49
97 Motor control card 2% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
A1 ACF motor cable 2% T04 “FID A1: Motor Cable Assembly” on
page 10-42

Chapter 1. Start 1-15

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
A8 Load or unload error to magazine
1. This failure may be caused by a damaged cartridge. Before replacing any FRUs below, inspect the
cartridge that was being used when the error occurred for physical defects. Have the customer
replace the cartridge if it is damaged.
2. Ensure that the customer is using the correct cartridge (3590 Only).
3. This failure may be caused by a dirty cartridge. Look for any contamination on the sides of the
cartridge which could cause the pinch rollers to slip. Have the customer clean or replace the cartridge
or magazine, if necessary. Use ONLY Tape Unit Cleaner, IBM P/N 05H3929 and a lint-free cloth. See
“Tape Unit Cleaner” on page 3-46 for details.
Note: Ensure that the customer does not ship magazines with cartridges loaded. The cartridges will
vibrate in the magazine slots resulting in contamination on the sides of the cartridges that may cause
this failure.
4. Check that the pinch rollers are not binding, and that the arms are not bent. If the rollers are binding
or the arms are bent, replace the transport FID 9A. Check the pinch rollers for contamination. If they
are dirty, clean or replace the rollers. Use ONLY Tape Unit Cleaner, IBM P/N 05H3929 and a lint-free
cloth. See “Tape Unit Cleaner” on page 3-46 for details.
5. Attempt to perform “Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor” on page 10-28 before
replacing any FRUs.
6. This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (magazine present, magazine lock, limit 1 & 2, import,
or export). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
AA Transport pinch rollers 40% T03 “FID AA: Transport Pinch Rollers” on
page 10-51
9A Transport 40% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
A9 Feed motor assembly 10% T03 “FID A9: Feed Motor Assembly” on page 10-49
FD Magazine 6% Q05 Customer-purchased
99 Transport cable 2% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former Style)” on
page 10-31 or “FID 99: Transport Cable
(Current Style)” on page 10-33
97 Motor control card 1% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
A1 Motor cable assembly 1% T04 “FID A1: Motor Cable Assembly” on
page 10-42

1-16 IBM 3590 MI

 Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
A9 Failure when loading or unloading tape to or from the magazine or the priority cell.
1. This failure may be caused by a damaged cartridge. Before replacing any FRUs below, inspect the
cartridge that was being used when the error occurred for physical defects. Have the customer
replace the cartridge if it is damaged.
2. Ensure that the customer is using the correct Cartridge (3590 Only).
3. This failure may be caused by a dirty cartridge. Look for any contamination on the sides of the
cartridge that could cause the pinch rollers to slip. Have the customer clean or replace the cartridge or
magazine, if necessary. Use ONLY Tape Unit Cleaner, IBM P/N 05H3929 and a lint-free cloth. See
“Tape Unit Cleaner” on page 3-46 for details.
Note: Ensure that the customer does not ship magazines with cartridges loaded. The cartridges will
vibrate in the magazine slots resulting in contamination on the sides of the cartridges, which may
cause this failure.
4. Check that the pinch rollers are not binding, and that the arms are not bent. If the rollers are binding
or the arms are bent, replace the transport FID 9A. Check the pinch rollers for contamination. If they
are dirty, clean or replace the rollers. Use ONLY Tape Unit Cleaner, IBM P/N 05H3929 and a lint-free
cloth. See “Tape Unit Cleaner” on page 3-46 for details.
5. Attempt to perform “Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor” on page 10-28 before
replacing any FRUs.
6. This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (loader tray up, door open, cartridge present, priority
cell, magazine present, magazine lock, limit 1 & 2, import, or export). Before replacing FRUs below,
ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES
from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
| Note: Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in the
| area of the strain relief clamp (see “FID CD: Cartridge-Present Sensor” on page 10-101
6). Verify
| the sensor operation by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If
| the cable is bad, replace the loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
AA Transport pinch rollers 23% T03 “FID AA: Transport Pinch Rollers” on
page 10-51
9A Transport 23% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
BC Loader assembly 23% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
99 Transport cable 10% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former Style)” on
page 10-31 or “FID 99: Transport Cable
(Current Style)” on page 10-33
A9 Feed motor assembly 9% T03 “FID A9: Feed Motor Assembly” on page 10-49
FD Magazine 5% Q05 Customer-purchased
A1 Motor cable assembly 5% T04 “FID A1: Motor Cable Assembly” on
page 10-42
97 Motor control card 2% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
B0 Did not detect pressure
B0 Pneumatic system — T63 “Pneumatic Problems” on page 2-3
B1 Excessive current or speed is not correct
B1 Pneumatic supply 98% T63 “Pneumatic Problems” on page 2-3
E4 Card Pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

Chapter 1. Start 1-17

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
B3 Thread or unthread failure at machine reel (no current detected in pantocam motor or a sensor did not
change state)
1. This failure may be caused by a damaged cartridge. Before replacing any FRUs below, inspect the
cartridge that was being used when the error occurred for physical defects. Have the customer
replace the cartridge if it is damaged.
2. This failure may also be caused by the plastic shield over the tension transducer assembly interfering
with the travel of the pin on the pantocam arm. Before replacing any FRUs below, ensure that the
plastic shield is adjusted correctly. See “Adjustment of Tension Transducer Plastic Shield” on
page 10-83.
3. Ensure that the Machine Reel hub is assembled so that it is flat against the bottom flange, with no
gaps between the two parts. Also, use the gap set tool, P/N 05H4671, to check the adjustment of the
gap in the Machine Reel hub. See “Replace Pantocam” on page 10-86 for details.
4. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the tape path B sensor is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
BB Pantocam 85% T45 “FID BB: Pantocam” on page 10-84
CF Tape path B sensor 10% T33 “FID CF: Tape Path B Sensor” on page 10-104
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
B4 Thread or unthread failure at loader (no current detected in pantocam motor or a sensor did not change
state)
1. This failure may be caused by a damaged cartridge. Before replacing any FRUs below, inspect the
cartridge that was being used when the error occurred for physical defects. Have the customer
replace the cartridge if it is damaged.
2. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the tape path A sensor is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
BB Pantocam 83% T45 “FID BB: Pantocam” on page 10-84
CE Tape path A sensor 10% T33 “FID CE: Tape Path A Sensor” on page 10-103
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
B6 Decoupler assembly 2% T41 “FID B6: Decoupler” on page 10-79
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
B7 Air pressure loss in transducer
1. This failure may be caused by a loose screw in the tension transducer assembly. Before replacing any
FRUs below, ensure that the hex screw in the center of the tension transducer is tight.
Note: If the plastic shield over the tension transducer is moved for any reason, it must be readjusted.
See “Adjustment of Tension Transducer Plastic Shield” on page 10-83.
2. If this error occurs after replacing an Ultra Card Pack with a Common Card Pack, replace the tension
transducer also.
B7 Tension transducer assembly 89% T41 “FID B7: Tension Transducer Assembly” on
page 10-81
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
B1 Pneumatic supply 3% T63 “FID B1: Pneumatic Assembly” on page 10-57
B2 Pneumatic hose kit 3% T64 “FID B2: Pneumatic Hose Kit” on page 10-58
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

1-18 IBM 3590 MI

 Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
B9 Cartridge is not fully seated in the loader, or Cartridge present not detected
1. On Model B1A/E1A/H1A loaders, this problem may be caused by the picker failing to insert the
cartridge all the way into the loader. Ensure that the loader spring engages with the lip of the cartridge
and that the correct spring is installed. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89 and see the
Parts Catalog, “Assembly 3: Deck Enclosure” on page 11-10.
2. This failure may be caused by a damaged cartridge. Before replacing any FRUs below, inspect the
cartridge that was being used when the error occurred for physical defects. Have the customer
replace the cartridge if it is damaged.
3. This failure also may be caused by a sensor failure (cartridge present, door open, tray up, or gripper
present). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
| Note: Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in the
| area of the strain relief clamp (see item
6 in Figure 10-70 on page 10-102). Verify the sensor
| operation by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If the cable is
| bad, replace the loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
4. On Model B1A/E1A/H1A loaders, this problem may be caused by an alignment problem between the
fiducial and the loader. If the loader has been replaced or the fiducial moved, it will be necessary to
run the Teach Selected Drive routine from the Teach pull-down on the library controller.
Note: Fiducials are called targets in the silo. They are the white target used to electronically align
the accessor to the drives and cartridge storage units.

To get the silo to “reteach”, the CE can open the silo door. The next time the robot tries to mount a
tape, it will automatically readjust.
5. On Models B11/E11, the problem may be caused by the ACF transport. Ensure that the gears in the
transport are not broken or missing teeth. Attempt to perform “Check and Adjustment of Transport
Position Sensor” on page 10-28 before replacing any FRUs.
BC Loader assembly 50% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
— Either FID 9A, the ACF 35% — “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35 or if in a
transport (Model B11/E11/H11), library, see the library maintenance documents
or the library cartridge accessor (i.e., 3494).
(Model B1A/E1A/H1A)
BB Pantocam (intermittent failures) 10% T45 “FID BB: Pantocam” on page 10-84
93 Library interface cover (if 5% T03 “FID 93: Library Interface Cover (Model
present) B1A/E1A/H1A Only)” on page 10-124
BA Cannot pick leader block from tape
1. This failure may be caused by a damaged cartridge. Before replacing any FRUs below, inspect the
cartridge that was being used when the error occurred for physical defects. Have the customer
replace the cartridge if it is damaged.
2. This failure may also be caused by a sensor failure (cartridge present, door open, tray up, or tape
path A sensor). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these four sensors are operating correctly.
See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP
SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
BC Loader assembly 40% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
C7 File reel motor 25% T54 “FID C7: File Reel Motor” on page 10-94
BB Pantocam 20% T45 “FID BB: Pantocam” on page 10-84
CE Tape path A sensor 10% T33 “FID CE: Tape Path A Sensor” on page 10-103
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

Chapter 1. Start 1-19

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
BB Pantocam thread or unthread failure.
1. This failure may be caused by a damaged cartridge. Before replacing any FRUs below, inspect the
cartridge that was being used when the error occurred for physical defects. Have the customer
replace the cartridge if it is damaged.
2. This failure may also be caused by the plastic shield over the tension transducer assembly interfering
with the travel of the pin on the pantocam arm. Before replacing any FRUs below, ensure that the
plastic shield is adjusted correctly. See “Adjustment of Tension Transducer Plastic Shield” on
page 10-83.
3. This failure may be caused by the pantocam arm hitting the deck enclosure back cover. If the top
cover is loose or missing, the sides of the back cover can bend in toward the center of the drive and
interfere with the pantocam arm. Ensure that the top cover is in place and that the screws are tight.
See Figure 9-13 on page 9-28.
4. Ensure that the Machine Reel hub is assembled so that it is flat against the bottom flange, with no
gaps between the two parts. Also, use the gap set tool, P/N 05H4671, to check the adjustment of the
gap in the Machine Reel hub. See “Replace Pantocam” on page 10-86 for details.
— — — — Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of
Pneumatic System” on page 10-4 before
replacing any FRUs.
BB Pantocam 70% T45 “FID BB: Pantocam” on page 10-84
C7 File reel motor (binding) 10% T54 “FID C7: File Reel Motor” on page 10-94
C6 Machine reel motor 10% T54 “FID C6: Machine Reel Motor” on page 10-93
B0 Pneumatic assembly 3% T63 “FID B1: Pneumatic Assembly” on page 10-57
B2 Pneumatic hose kit 3% T64 “FID B2: Pneumatic Hose Kit” on page 10-58
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 2% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
BC Load or unload failure or loader motor failed to turn
1. This failure may be caused by a damaged cartridge. Before replacing any FRUs below, inspect the
cartridge that was being used when the error occurred for physical defects. Have the customer
replace the cartridge if it is damaged.
2. This failure may be caused by the metal plate on the bottom of the cartridge sticking to the magnet in
the file reel motor clutch. Examine the metal plate on the bottom of the cartridge to ensure that it is
not loose. Try the cartridge in another drive. Have the customer replace the cartridge if the metal plate
is loose or if it fails in another drive.
BC Loader assembly 84% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
C7 File reel motor 10% T54 “FID C7: File Reel Motor” on page 10-94
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 4% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
BD Failure to detect fan motion electronically
C1 Power supply 90% P04 “FID C1: Power Supply” on page 10-62 (2
levels available)
DB Power supply cable (new level) 8% P04 “FID DB: Power Supply Cable (New Level)” on
page 10-120
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

1-20 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
BE Failure to detect fan motion electronically
C1 Power supply 90% P04 “FID C1: Power Supply” on page 10-62 (2
levels available)
DB Power supply cable (new level) 8% P04 “FID DB: Power Supply Cable (New Level)” on
page 10-120
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
BF Failure to detect fan motion electronically
BF Card pack fan 94% A03 “FID BF: Fan (Card Pack)” on page 10-61
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 4% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
C0 Sensors are in an invalid combination (usually tape path A and B sensors ON together)
Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the appropriate sensors are operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS from
the CE UTILITIES Menu.
CE Tape path A sensor 47% T33 “FID CE: Tape Path A Sensor” on page 10-103
CF Tape path B sensor 47% T33 “FID CF: Tape Path B Sensor” on page 10-104
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 4% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
C1 12- or 36-volts not within specification.
— This FID is also reported when — — Power OFF and power back ON.
the drive detects a power
outage.
C1 Power supply 80% P04 “FID C1: Power Supply” on page 10-62 (2
levels available)
DB Power supply cable (new level) 12% P04 “FID DB: Power Supply Cable (New Level)” on
page 10-120
E4 Card pack 8% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

Chapter 1. Start 1-21

 Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
C2 Sensors are in an invalid combination
Notes:
1. This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (File protect, Door open, Tray up, Cartridge present, or
Cartridge type sensor card). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating
correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP
SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
| 2. Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in the area
| of the strain relief clamp (see item
6 in Figure 10-70 on page 10-102). Verify the sensor operation
| by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If the cable is bad,
| replace the loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
CA Tray up sensor 45% T33 “FID CA: Tray-Up Sensor” on page 10-98
CD Cartridge-present sensor (in the 44% T33 “FID CD: Cartridge-Present Sensor” on
loader) page 10-101
BC Loader assembly 6% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
C3 Sensors are in an invalid combination
Notes:
1. This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (file protect, door open, tray up, cartridge-present, or
cartridge-type sensor card). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating
correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP
SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
| 2. Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in the area
| of the strain relief clamp (see item
6 in Figure 10-70 on page 10-102). Verify the sensor operation
| by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If the cable is bad,
| replace the loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
CC Cartridge-type sensor card 45% T33 “FID CC: Cartridge-Type Sensor Card
assembly Assembly” on page 10-99
CD Cartridge-present sensor (in the 44% T33 “FID CD: Cartridge-Present Sensor” on
loader) page 10-101
BC Loader assembly 6% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
C4 Sensors are in an invalid combination
Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the cartridge-type sensor card and the tray-up sensor
are operating correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu
and DISP SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
CA Tray up sensor 45% T33 “FID CA: Tray-Up Sensor” on page 10-98
CC Cartridge-type sensor card asm 44% T33 “FID CC: Cartridge-Type Sensor Card
Assembly” on page 10-99
BC Loader assembly 6% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

1-22 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
C5 Cartridge type sensed as invalid
Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the cartridge-type sensor card is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS from
the CE UTILITIES Menu.
FE Cartridge 84% D07 “FID FE – Isolate Fault Between Media and
Hardware” on page 9-123
CC Cartridge-type sensor card asm 7% T33 “FID CC: Cartridge-Type Sensor Card
Assembly” on page 10-99
BC Loader assembly 4% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
C6 Machine reel motor failed to move or its speed is not correct
Notes:
1. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the motor connectors are seated properly.
2. If the machine reel motor hub has been replaced recently, ensure all shims were removed from under
the hub during the procedure.
C6 Machine reel motor 92% T54 “FID C6: Machine Reel Motor” on page 10-93
D6 Motor power cable 3% C09 “FID D6: Motor Power Cables” on page 10-117
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
C7 File reel motor failed to move or its speed is not correct
Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the motor connectors are seated properly.
C7 File reel motor 90% T54 “FID C7: File Reel Motor” on page 10-94
D6 Motor power cable 3% C09 “FID D6: Motor Power Cables” on page 10-117
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
FE Cartridge 2% D07 “FID FE – Isolate Fault Between Media and
Hardware” on page 9-123
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
C8 File protect sensor failed to change state
Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the File protect sensor is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS from
the CE UTILITIES Menu.
C8 File protect sensor 90% T32 “FID C8: File-Protect Sensor” on page 10-96
BC Loader assembly 5% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

Chapter 1. Start 1-23

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
C9 Door-open sensor failed to change state
Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the door open sensor is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS from
the CE UTILITIES Menu.
C9 Door-open sensor 92% T33 “FID C9: Door-Open Sensor” on page 10-97
BC Loader assembly 3% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
CA Tray-up sensor failed to change state
Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the tray up sensor is operating correctly. See Figure 5-8
on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS from the CE
UTILITIES Menu.
CA Tray up sensor 92% T33 “FID CA: Tray-Up Sensor” on page 10-98
BC Loader assembly 3% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
CB Sensor failed to change state
Note: This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (file protect, door open, tray up). Before replacing
FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select
UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
C8 File protect sensor 30% T32 “FID C8: File-Protect Sensor” on page 10-96
C9 Door-open sensor 30% T33 “FID C9: Door-Open Sensor” on page 10-97
CA Tray-up sensor 30% T33 “FID CA: Tray-Up Sensor” on page 10-98
BC Loader assembly 5% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
CC Cartridge-type sensor failed to change state or sensors are in an invalid combination
Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the cartridge type sensor is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP SENSORS from
the CE UTILITIES Menu.
CC Cartridge-type sensor card 90% T33 “FID CC: Cartridge-Type Sensor Card
assembly Assembly” on page 10-99
BC Loader assembly 3% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
FE Cartridge 2% D07 “FID FE – Isolate Fault Between Media and
Hardware” on page 9-123

1-24 IBM 3590 MI

 Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
CD Cartridge-present sensor failed to change state
Notes:
1. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the tray up and cartridge-present sensors are operating
correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP
SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
| 2. Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in the area
| of the strain relief clamp (see item
6 in Figure 10-70 on page 10-102). Verify the sensor operation
| by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If the cable is bad,
| replace the loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
CD Cartridge-present sensor (in the 92% T33 “FID CD: Cartridge-Present Sensor” on
loader) page 10-101
BC Loader assembly 3% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
CE Tape path A sensor failed to change state
Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the tape path A sensor is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP SENSORS from
the CE UTILITIES Menu.
CE Tape path A sensor 93% T33 “FID CE: Tape Path A Sensor” on page 10-103
DA Motor, pantocam, loader, and 5% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
sensor cable page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
CF Tape path B sensor failed to change state
Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the tape path B sensor is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP SENSORS from
the CE UTILITIES Menu.
CF Tape path B sensor 93% T33 “FID CF: Tape Path B Sensor” on page 10-104
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 5% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

Chapter 1. Start 1-25

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
D0 D1 D0 Read failure, write failure, track following error, or initial position sensor (IPS) calibration failure
D2 D1 Calibration error; possible interface problem between the head guide and the card pack.
D2 The head did not move
1. Before replacing FRU ‘D0’ below, inspect the cleaning brush for full head coverage or any noticeable
debris. If either condition appears unsatisfactory, go to “FID D4: Head Cleaning Brush Assembly” on
page 10-114 first.
2. Before replacing FRU ‘D0’ below, ensure that the HGA cable connectors are seated and locked into
the receptacles in the card pack. See “FID D0: Head Guide and Brush Assembly” on page 10-105
3. If this is a new install or the card pack has been recently replaced, unplug and reseat all of the
connectors on the card pack before replacing any FRUs below. See “FID E4: Card Pack” on
page 10-67. Ensure that the metal tab on top of the card pack is not bent forward and preventing the
connectors from seating correctly.
4. Intermittent read and write data errors may be caused by electrical noise from the pneumatic
motor-control cable in the rear of the card pack, if the cable is not routed correctly. Inspect the cable
routing to ensure that it is always outside of the card pack metal enclosure.
5. Before replacing FRU ‘D0’ below, perform the following diagnostic procedure to determine if the
problem is being caused by the head guide and brush assembly or the card pack/cable FRUs.
a. Power OFF the drive and disconnect the IPS connector (
2 in “FID DC: ACF and Operator/CE
Panel Cable” on page 10-121).
b. Power ON and measure voltages on the IPS connector (cable end) as follows:
Note: Pin 2 is empty.
1) Pin 1 (-) to Pin 3 (+) 2.24 V dc ±10%
2) Pin 1 (-) to Pin 4 (+) 5.10 V dc ±10%
3) Pin 1 (-) to Pin 5 (+) 2.24 V dc ±10%
c. If any of the voltages are not correct, the problem is being caused by the Card Pack (FRU E4) or
the ACF and operator/CE panel cable (FRU DC).
If all of the voltages are correct, the problem is being caused by the HGA (FRU D0) or the head
cleaning brush assembly. (FRU D4).
d. Attention: DO NOT connect the IPS connector with power ON.
Damage to the HGA can occur.
Power OFF the drive and connect the IPS connector.
D0 Head guide and brush asm 77% D08/ “FID D0: Head Guide and Brush Assembly” on
(D08 = clean only, T22 = T22 page 10-105
replace)
D4 Head cleaning brush asm 8% T49 “FID D4: Head Cleaning Brush Assembly” on
page 10-114
B5 Tape lifter solenoid 5% T41 “FID B5: Tape-Lifter Solenoid” on page 10-77
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 4% C09 “FID DC: ACF and Operator/CE Panel Cable”
(FID D0 only) on page 10-121
DC ACF and operator/CE panel 4% C09 “FID DC: ACF and Operator/CE Panel Cable”
cable on page 10-121
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

1-26 IBM 3590 MI

 Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
D3 Track following error while moving tape
1. Before replacing FRU ‘D0’ below, ensure that the HGA cable connectors are seated and locked into
the receptacles in the card pack. See “FID D0: Head Guide and Brush Assembly” on page 10-105
2. If this drive is using the Extended High Performance tape cartridge, ensure the correct HGA is
installed. The Extended High Performance tape cartridge HGAs have a ’2X’ label on the top of the ’D’
bearings.
FE Cartridge 70% D07 “FID FE – Isolate Fault Between Media and
Hardware” on page 9-123
D0 Head guide and brush asm 20% D08/ “FID D0: Head Guide and Brush Assembly” on
(D08 = clean only, T22 = T22 page 10-105
replace)
DC ACF and operator/CE panel 5% C09 “FID DC: ACF and Operator/CE Panel Cable”
cable on page 10-121
E4 Card pack 5% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
D8 Read/write error.
1. Before replacing FRU ‘D0’ below, ensure that the HGA cable connectors are seated and locked into
the receptacles in the card pack. See “FID D0: Head Guide and Brush Assembly” on page 10-105
2. If this error occurs after replacing an Ultra Card Pack with a Common Card Pack, ensure that the
HGA cable connections are seated correctly on the card pack. If that is not the problem, replace ‘D0’
(head, guide and brush assembly) also.
E4 Card pack 54% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
D0 Head guide and brush 45% D08/ “FID D0: Head Guide and Brush Assembly” on
assembly (D08 = clean only, T22 page 10-105
T22 = replace)
DC ACF and operator/CE panel 1% C09 “FID DC: ACF and Operator/CE Panel Cable”
cable on page 10-121
DD Fault detected in loader sensors or the sensors are in an invalid combination
Notes:
1. This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (file protect, door open, tray up, cartridge present, or
cartridge type sensor card). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating
correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP
SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
| 2. Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in the area
| of the strain relief clamp (see item
6 in Figure 10-70 on page 10-102). Verify the sensor operation
| by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If the cable is bad,
| replace the loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
C8 File protect sensor 19% T32 “FID C8: File-Protect Sensor” on page 10-96
C9 Door-open sensor 19% T33 “FID C9: Door-Open Sensor” on page 10-97
CA Tray-up sensor 18% T33 “FID CA: Tray-Up Sensor” on page 10-98
CD Cartridge-present sensor (in the 18% T33 “FID CD: Cartridge-Present Sensor” on
loader) page 10-101
CC Cartridge-type sensor card asm 18% T33 “FID CC: Cartridge-Type Sensor Card
Assembly” on page 10-99
BC Loader assembly 3% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

Chapter 1. Start 1-27

 Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
DE Sensors are in an invalid combination
Note: This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (door open sensor, or cartridge type sensor card).
Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See Figure 5-8 on
page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP SENSORS from the CE
UTILITIES Menu.
C9 Door-open sensor 44% T33 “FID C9: Door-Open Sensor” on page 10-97
CC Cartridge-type sensor card asm 43% T33 “FID CC: Cartridge-Type Sensor Card
Assembly” on page 10-99
BC Loader assembly 3% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
DF Sensors are in an invalid combination
Notes:
1. This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (file protect, door open, tray up, cartridge present, or
cartridge-type sensor card). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating
correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP
SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
| 2. Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in the area
| of the strain relief clamp (see item
6 in Figure 10-70 on page 10-102). Verify the sensor operation
| by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If the cable is bad,
| replace the loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
C8 File protect sensor 30% T32 “FID C8: File-Protect Sensor” on page 10-96
CD Cartridge-present sensor (in the 30% T33 “FID CD: Cartridge-Present Sensor” on
loader) page 10-101
CC Cartridge-type sensor card asm 30% T33 “FID CC: Cartridge-Type Sensor Card
Assembly” on page 10-99
BC Loader assembly 5% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 3% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
E4 Card pack 2% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

1-28 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
E0 Tape motion error (velocity or tape slipping error).
— — — — Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of
Pneumatic System” on page 10-4
FE Tape cartridge 30% D07 “FID FE – Isolate Fault Between Media and
Hardware” on page 9-123
— Pneumatic problem 30% T63 “Pneumatic Problems” on page 2-3
C7 File reel motor 15% T54 “FID C7: File Reel Motor” on page 10-94
C6 Machine reel motor 15% T54 “FID C6: Machine Reel Motor” on page 10-93
CF Tape path B sensor 6% T33 “FID CF: Tape Path B Sensor” on page 10-104
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 1% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
D6 Motor power cable 1% C09 “FID D6: Motor Power Cables” on page 10-117
B7 Tension transducer assembly 1% T54 “FID B7: Tension Transducer Assembly” on
page 10-81
E4 Card pack 1% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
E3 Pressure sensor failed to actuate
E3 Pressure sensor assembly 100% T62 “FID E3: Pressure Sensor” on page 10-65
E4 Electronic-detected fault
v If this is a new install or the card pack has been recently replaced, unplug and re-seat all of the
connectors on the card pack before replacing any FRUs below. See “FID E4: Card Pack” on
page 10-67. Ensure that the metal tab on top of the card pack is not bent forward and preventing the
connectors from seating correctly.
v If you were running SCSI or fibre wrap test, check the following before you replace the card pack:
1. If you were running the Wrap Test at the drive itself, make sure wrap plug is making a good
connection or try a different Wrap Plug. Rerun the test to make sure the card pack is at fault.
2. If you were running the wrap test through the cable when you received this error, try wrap test at
drive. If the test runs without error at the drive, then replace the cable. If test still provides FID E4
then replace the card pack.
E4 Card pack 85% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
C1 Power supply 10% P04 “FID C1: Power Supply” on page 10-62 (2
levels available)
BB Pantocam (binding) 3% T45 “FID BB: Pantocam” on page 10-84 See
(Microcode D0IA and “Microcode EC Level History Log” on
D0IB only) page 9-61 to determine what level of code you
are at.
B7 Tension transducer asm 1% T54 “FID B7: Tension Transducer Assembly” on
page 10-81
DB Power supply cable (new level) 1% P04 “FID DB: Power Supply Cable (New Level)” on
page 10-120
E5 Microcode detected a fault with the microcode
v If this is a new install or the card pack has been recently replaced, unplug and reseat all of the
connectors on the card pack before replacing any FRUs below. See “FID E4: Card Pack” on
page 10-67
E5 Microcode (known or new) 100% M01/ “FID E5 – Microcode Problem” on page 9-118
(M01 = known, M02 = new) M02

Chapter 1. Start 1-29

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
E6 Timing problem in the microcode or the electronics, or multiple check-1 errors occurred
v If this is a new install or the card pack has been recently replaced, unplug and reseat all of the
connectors on the card pack before replacing any FRUs below. See “FID E4: Card Pack” on
page 10-67
E5 Microcode (known or new) 49% M01/ “FID E6 or E7– Isolate Fault Between
(M01 = known, M02 = new) M02 Microcode and Hardware” on page 9-120
E4 Card pack 40% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
C1 Power supply 8% P04 “FID C1: Power Supply” on page 10-62 (2
levels available)
DB Power supply cable (New 2% P04 “FID DB: Power Supply Cable (New Level)” on
Level) page 10-120
97 Motor Control Card 1% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
E7 Timing problem in the microcode or the electronics
E5 Microcode (known or new) 60% M01/ “FID E6 or E7– Isolate Fault Between
(M01 = known, M02 = new) M02 Microcode and Hardware” on page 9-120
E4 Card pack 40% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
E8 Timing problem in the hardware or microcode
— Timing problem in drive occurs — — See “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to set a
while writing and/or reading microcode trap based on support data, get a
tape. dump and contact your next level of support.
EF Fault in pantocam or electronics while threading or unthreading
BB Pantocam 80% T45 “FID BB: Pantocam” on page 10-84
E4 Card pack 15% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 5% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable” on
page 10-118
F0 F1 F2
F0 or F1 Read error
F3
F2 Read error while writing
Note: Reported FID F2 with FSC 3541 may be caused by an intermittent file protect
switch or a faulty cable in the loader. Install a new loader assembly, FID BC, before
replacing any of the FRUs listed below.
F3 Track-following error
— Note: If this drive is using the Extended High Performance tape cartridge, ensure the
correct HGA is installed. The Extended High Performance tape cartridge HGAs have a
’2X’ label on the top of the ’D’ bearings.
FE Cartridge 60% D07 “FID FE – Isolate Fault Between Media and
Hardware” on page 9-123
D0 Head guide and brush asm 30% D08/ “FID D0: Head Guide and Brush Assembly” on
(D08 = clean only, T22 = T22 page 10-105
replace)
E4 Card pack 10% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
F4 RS-422 bus error
F4 RS-422 interface problem — — Run the RS-422 wrap test (see “Library
Manager Port Wrap Test” on page 9-111). If
problem re-occurs, get a microcode dump and
contact your next level of support.

1-30 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-2. FIDs, FRUs, and TACs (continued)
Reported FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
FID ability
F5 SCSI bus or Fibre Channel error
F5 SCSI interface, operator — — “SCSI Bus Problem Determination” on
procedural, or host problem page 9-108 or “Fibre Channel Problem
Determination Procedure” on page 9-113
F6 Informational message—Cleaning required due to performance.
Notes:
1. Informational FID F6 or FF with FSCs 7036, 7037, 7038 or C559 are normal. These FSCs are
generated when a drive requires cleaning or has been cleaned.
2. If this FID continues to be posted, check to see if the head guide and brush assembly cleaner blade
has been removed. Refer to Figure 10-78 on page 10-113 for the location of the cleaner blade. If the
cleaner blade is present, remove it using the procedure at “Cleaner Blade Removal (Model B11/B1A)”
on page 10-112. Refer to “Excessive Clean Messages” on page 9-5.
F6 Operator, procedural, or host 100% — —
problem
F7 SCSI or Fibre Wrap Test Failure
v If this is a new install or the card pack has been recently replaced, unplug and re-seat all of the
connectors on the card pack before replacing any FRUs below. See “FID E4: Card Pack” on
page 10-67. Ensure that the metal tab on top of the card pack is not bent forward and preventing the
connectors from seating correctly.
v If you were running SCSI or fibre wrap test, check the following before you replace the card pack:
1. If you were running the wrap test at the drive itself, make sure wrap plug is making a good
connection or try a different wrap plug. Rerun the test to make sure the card pack is at fault.
2. If you were running the wrap test through the fibre cable when you received this error, try wrap test
at drive. If the test runs without error at the drive, then replace the cable. If test still provides FID
F7 then replace the card pack.
E4 Card Pack 100% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
FE Cartridge problem
FE Cartridge — D07 “FID FE – Isolate Fault Between Media and
Hardware” on page 9-123
FF Informational or non-hardware related status or error
Note: Informational FID FF with FSCs 7036, 7037, 7038 or C559 are normal. These FSCs are generated
when a drive requires cleaning or has been cleaned.
— Operator procedural or host — — “FID FF – Operator Action or Host Program
problem Error” on page 9-125

Chapter 1. Start 1-31

Attention Drive Messages
If the ATTN DRV message is displayed on operator/CE panel (not from CE Error Log).
1. If ATTN is displayed, press the Enter pushbutton. If a FID appears, go to Table 1-2 on page 1-9.
2. If no FID is presented, use the ATTN DRV message and follow the error log procedure below.

If the ATTN DRV message is from the CE Error Log, (Figure 5-18 on page 5-50):
1. Go to “Error Log Analysis Procedure” on page 9-126 and analyze the error log for any FIDs with a time
stamp close to the time of the ATTN DRV message. If a FID appears to be associated with the ATTN
DRV message, go to Table 1-2 on page 1-9.
2. If the error log does not help identify a FID, run CE DIAGS, (“CE Verify Fix Menu” on page 5-39, Test
Drive function).
3. If the CE DIAGS do not identify a FID, use the ATTN DRV message and Table 1-3 on page 1-33 to find
the fault.

At the start of your service call, write down the supplemental message associated with the Attention
message. (For example: Load Error or Tension Dropped.)

At the end of the service call, record the first 12 characters of the Attention message data in the FAULT
SYMPTOM CODE (FSC) field of the call report.

This detailed call reporting will help Engineering and Field Support to quickly identify, understand, and
resolve field problems.

1-32 IBM 3590 MI

 Table 1-3. ATTN DRV Messages
ATTN DRV FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
ability
Load Error 1. Ensure that the cartridge is not broken and the leader block is intact. See “Damaged Cartridges” in
3590 High Performance Tape Subsystem User’s Guide.
2. Ensure that the cartridge is a 3590 compatible-type cartridge. Also, check the location of the tape
and the leader block.
3. This failure also may be caused by the plastic shield over the tension transducer assembly
interfering with the travel of the pin on the pantocam arm. Before replacing any FRUs below, ensure
that the plastic shield is adjusted correctly. See “Adjustment of Tension Transducer Plastic Shield”
on page 10-83.
4. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the motor connectors are seated properly.
5. If the machine reel motor hub has been replaced recently, ensure all shims were removed from
under the hub during the procedure.
6. Check Machine Reel Hub Gap, see “Replace Pantocam” on page 10-86.
7. This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (tape path A & B, loader tray up, door open, file
protect, cartridge present, or cartridge type sensor card). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that
these sensors are operating correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the
CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
| Note: Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in
| the area of the strain relief clamp, see item
6 in Figure 10-70 on page 10-102. Verify the sensor
| operation by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If the cable
| is bad, replace the loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
8. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4 before replacing any
FRUs.
BB Pantocam 44% T45 “FID BB: Pantocam” on page 10-84
BC Loader assembly 30% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on
page 10-89
C7 File reel motor 20% T54 “FID C7: File Reel Motor” on
page 10-94
D6 Motor power cable 1% C09 “FID D6: Motor Power Cables” on
page 10-117
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 1% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor
Cable” on page 10-118
B7 Tension transducer asm 1% T54 “FID B7: Tension Transducer
Assembly” on page 10-81
C6 Machine reel motor 1% T54 “FID C6: Machine Reel Motor” on
page 10-93
D0 Head guide and brush asm (D08 = 1% D08/ “FID D0: Head Guide and Brush
clean only, T22 = replace) T22 Assembly” on page 10-105
E4 Card pack 1% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

Chapter 1. Start 1-33

 Table 1-3. ATTN DRV Messages (continued)
ATTN DRV FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
ability
| Unload 1. Ensure that the cartridge is not broken and the leader block is intact. See “Damaged Cartridges” in
| Error IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 User’s Guide.
2. Ensure that the cartridge is a 3590 compatible-type cartridge. Also, check the location of the tape
and the leader block.
3. This failure also may be caused by the plastic shield over the tension transducer assembly
interfering with the travel of the pin on the pantocam arm. Before replacing any FRUs below, ensure
that the plastic shield is adjusted correctly. See “Adjustment of Tension Transducer Plastic Shield”
on page 10-83.
4. Check Machine Reel Hub Gap, see “Replace Pantocam” on page 10-86.
5. This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (tape path A & B, loader tray up, door open, file
protect, cartridge present, or cartridge type sensor card). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that
these sensors are operating correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the
CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
| Note: Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in
| the area of the strain relief clamp, see item
6 in Figure 10-70 on page 10-102. Verify the sensor
| operation by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If the cable
| is bad, replace the loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
6. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4 before replacing any
FRUs.
BB Pantocam 45% T45 “FID BB: Pantocam” on page 10-84
BC Loader assembly 30% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on
page 10-89
C7 File reel motor 20% T54 “FID C7: File Reel Motor” on
page 10-94
D6 Motor power cable 1% C09 “FID D6: Motor Power Cables” on
page 10-117
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 1% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor
Cable” on page 10-118
C6 Machine reel motor 1% T54 “FID C6: Machine Reel Motor” on
page 10-93
D0 Head guide and brush asm (D08 = 1% D08/ “FID D0: Head Guide and Brush
clean only, T22 = replace) T22 Assembly” on page 10-105
E4 Card pack 1% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
FSC Trap The microcode encountered the trap address set from a CE panel menu.
Taken
— Not a fault — — —
Tension Tape motion error (velocity or tape slipping error).
Dropped Note: If the machine reel motor hub has been replaced recently, ensure all shims were removed from
under the hub during the procedure.
— Pneumatic system or tape cartridge — — See FID E0 on page 1-29.
fault

1-34 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-3. ATTN DRV Messages (continued)
ATTN DRV FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
ability
Invalid 1. Ensure that the cartridge is not damaged or broken and that the cartridge is a 3590 cartridge.
Cartridge
2. If this failure is being caused by an Extended High Performance Cartridge (green label), determine
if the Extended High Performance Cartridge hardware and microcode are installed. If the hardware
is installed there will be a 2X label on the back cover and on the Head Guide Assembly. If the
microcode is at or above level EC F23256 (D0IA_4D9), EC F23091 (D0IB_8A4), or EC F23207
(D0IC_A9A), the Extended High Performance Cartridge microcode is installed.
If this drive has the Extended High Performance Cartridge tape hardware and microcode installed,
ensure the CE Drive Options Menu is set for Hdwr Present for double length tape. See “CE Drive
Options Menu” on page 5-52.
3. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the cartridge type sensors are operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
FE Cartridge 96% D07 See “Damaged Cartridges” in IBM
TotalStorage Enterprise Tape
System 3590 User’s Guide.
CC Cartridge type sensor card asm 2% T33 “FID CC: Cartridge-Type Sensor
Card Assembly” on page 10-99
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 1% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor
Cable” on page 10-118
E4 Card pack 1% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
Temp AC The microcode encountered a Temp AC Power dip condition or power surge.
Power Dip
— Customer Power 90% — If this condition continues, have the
customer verify that his power
source is adequate for the load.
Note: Electrical weather conditions
may be the cause of this problem.
C1 Power supply 8% P04 “FID C1: Power Supply” on
page 10-62 (2 levels available)
DB Power supply cable (New Level) 1% P04 “FID DB: Power Supply Cable (New
Level)” on page 10-120
E4 Card pack 1% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
Head Calib Head failed to position correctly.
Failed
D0 Head guide and brush assembly 90% T22 “FID D0: Head Guide and Brush
Assembly” on page 10-105
DC ACF and operator/CE panel cable 6% C09 “FID DC: ACF and Operator/CE
Panel Cable” on page 10-121
E4 Card Pack 4% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

Chapter 1. Start 1-35

 Table 1-3. ATTN DRV Messages (continued)
ATTN DRV FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
ability
ERP 1. Ensure that the cartridge is not broken and the leader block is intact. See “Damaged Cartridges” in
Reload IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System User’s Guide.
Failure 2. This failure also may be caused by the plastic shield over the tension transducer assembly
interfering with the travel of the pin on the pantocam arm. Before replacing any FRUs below, ensure
that the plastic shield is adjusted correctly. See “Adjustment of Tension Transducer Plastic Shield”
on page 10-83.
3. Check Machine Reel Hub Gap, see “Replace Pantocam” on page 10-86.
4. This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (tape path A and B, loader tray up, door open, file
protect, cartridge present, or cartridge type sensor card).
Notes:
a. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP
SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
| b. Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in the
| area of the strain relief clamp (see item
6 in Figure 10-70 on page 10-102). Verify the sensor
| operation by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If the
| cable is bad, replace the loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
5. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4 before replacing any
FRUs.
BB Pantocam 64% T45 “FID BB: Pantocam” on page 10-84
C7 File reel motor 35% T54 “FID C7: File Reel Motor” on
page 10-94
D6 Motor power cable 2% C09 “FID D6: Motor Power Cables” on
page 10-117
DA Motor, loader, and sensor cable 2% C09 “FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor
Cable” on page 10-118
B7 Tension transducer asm 2% T54 “FID B7: Tension Transducer
Assembly” on page 10-81
C6 Machine reel motor 2% T54 “FID C6: Machine Reel Motor” on
page 10-93
D0 Head guide and brush asm (D08 = 2% D08/ “FID D0: Head Guide and Brush
clean only, T22 = replace) T22 Assembly” on page 10-105
E4 Card pack 1% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
Clean The drive is fenced and cannot be used until the drive is cleaned. This usually occurs when the
Required customer ignores requests for a cleaning cycle.
— Load cleaner cartridge. — — “Cleaning Cartridge” on page 3-41
Wipe Failed The drive attempted to recover by unloading and reloading the tape and failed during the process.
— Reformat of the tape failed — — FID entry point 1-30 F0 or F1.

1-36 IBM 3590 MI

Attention ACF Messages
If the ATTN ACF message is displayed on operator/CE panel (not from CE Error Log).
1. If ATTN is displayed, press the Enter pushbutton. If a FID appears, go to Table 1-2 on page 1-9.
2. If no FID is presented, use the ATTN ACF message and follow the error log procedure below.

If the ATTN ACF message is from the CE Error Log, (Figure 5-18 on page 5-50):
1. Go to “Error Log Analysis Procedure” on page 9-126 and analyze the error log for any FIDs with a time
stamp close to the time of the ATTN ACF message. If a FID appears to be associated with the ATTN
ACF message, go to Table 1-2 on page 1-9.
2. If the error log does not help identify a FID, run CE DIAGS, (“CE Verify Fix Menu” on page 5-39, Test
ACF function).
3. If the CE DIAGS do not identify a FID, use the ATTN ACF message and Table 1-4 on page 1-38 to find
the fault.

Special note about cartridges. If a 3480 or a 3490 cartridge is inserted in the ACF, unpredictable results
can occur because the cartridges are transparent, making it difficult for the sensors to detect the position
of the cartridge.

At the start of your service call, write down the supplemental message associated with the Attention ACF
message. (For example: Move Error or Transport Full.)

At the end of the service call, record the first 12 characters of the Attention ACF message data in the
FAULT SYMPTOM CODE (FSC) field of the call report.

This detailed call reporting will help Engineering and Field Support to quickly identify, understand, and
resolve field problems.

Chapter 1. Start 1-37

 Table 1-4. ATTN ACF Messages
ATTN ACF FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
ability
Move Error Ensure that the cartridge is not damaged or broken and that the cartridge is a 3590 cartridge.
Notes:
1. This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (file protect, door open, tray up, cartridge present, or
cartridge type sensor card). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating
correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and
DISP SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
| 2. Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in the
| area of the strain relief clamp (see item
6 in Figure 10-70 on page 10-102). Verify the sensor
| operation by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If the cable
| is bad, replace the loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
— — — — Attempt to perform “Check and
Adjustment of Transport Position
Sensor” on page 10-28 before
replacing any FRUs.
9A Transport 40% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
BC Loader assembly 15% T42 “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on
page 10-89
92 Leadscrew assembly 10% T03 “FID 92: Leadscrew Assembly” on
page 10-15
AB Leadscrew drive belt 10% T03 “FID AB: Leadscrew Drive Belt” on
page 10-54
99 Transport cable 5% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former
Style)” on page 10-31 or “FID 99:
Transport Cable (Current Style)” on
page 10-33
95 Elevator motor assembly 4% T03 “FID 95: Elevator Motor Assembly”
on page 10-20
A9 Feed motor assembly 3% T03 “FID A9: Feed Motor Assembly” on
page 10-49
96 Pinch motor assembly 3% T03 “FID 96: Pinch Motor Assembly” on
page 10-23
FD Magazine 3% Q05 Customer-purchased
97 Motor control card 2% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
A1 Motor cable assembly 2% T04 “FID A1: Motor Cable Assembly” on
page 10-42
98 Transport-position sensor 1% T01 “FID 98: Transport Position Sensor”
on page 10-26
A2 Drive/ACF cable 1% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44
C9 Door-open sensor 1% T33 “FID C9: Door-Open Sensor” on
page 10-97

1-38 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-4. ATTN ACF Messages (continued)
ATTN ACF FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
ability
Clear The device detected the presence of a possible blockage in the cartridge path, such as in the magazine
Picker Path or in the priority cell.
1. Check the position of all cartridges to ensure they are properly positioned in the magazine and in
the priority cell. A cartridge that extends too far into the magazine in the import position or a
damaged cartridge can cause this error.
2. Remove the magazine and look for any obvious obstructions.
3. Try another magazine in the ACF.
4. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the interference sensors are operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
9B Global/ interference sensor 85% T01 See Clear Picker Path Note, then go
to “FID 9B: Global/Interference
Sensor Assembly (Upper and
Lower)” on page 10-38
97 Motor control card 6% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
A5 Sensor cable 5% T01 “FID A5: Sensor Cable” on
page 10-46
A2 Drive/ACF cable 4% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44
Lock Lock the magazine by pressing the lock button on the front of the ACF.
Magazine Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the magazine lock sensor is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
A6 LED cards 84% T02 “FID A6: LED Cards and Random
Lock Sensor” on page 10-48
A4 LED cable 10% T01 “FID A4: LED Cable” on page 10-45
97 Motor control card 4% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
A2 Drive/ACF cable 2% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44
Lock Error Try locking and unlocking the magazine. Try another magazine.
Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the magazine lock sensor is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
A6 LED cards 84% T02 “FID A6: LED Cards and Random
Lock Sensor” on page 10-48
A4 LED cable 10% T01 “FID A4: LED Cable” on page 10-45
97 Motor control card 4% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
A2 Drive/ACF cable 2% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44

Chapter 1. Start 1-39

Table 1-4. ATTN ACF Messages (continued)
ATTN ACF FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
ability
Magazine If this is a problem, try unlocking the magazine. Try another magazine.
Locked Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the magazine lock sensor is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
A6 LED cards 84% T02 “FID A6: LED Cards and Random
Lock Sensor” on page 10-48
A4 LED cable 10% T01 “FID A4: LED Cable” on page 10-45
97 Motor control card 4% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
A2 Drive/ACF cable 2% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44
Unlock Ensure that the magazine is unlocked. Try another magazine.
Magazine Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the magazine lock sensor is operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
A6 LED cards 84% T02 “FID A6: LED Cards and Random
Lock Sensor” on page 10-48
A4 LED cable 10% T01 “FID A4: LED Cable” on page 10-45
97 Motor control card 4% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
A2 Drive/ACF cable 2% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44
Extra The device loaded a cartridge from the magazine and detected that another cartridge was placed in its
Cartridge home position. The device attempts to place the cartridge in the priority cell to await operator action. If
the priority cell is full, it ejects the cartridge when the priority slot is unloaded or when the Enter
pushbutton is pressed.
1. Ensure that no cartridge has been inserted into an ‘in use’ cell (green LED on).
2. Visually check the transport ribbon cable for damage at the folds.
Note: This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (priority cell, limit 1 & 2, import, export) Before
replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17
and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES
Menu.
99 Transport cable 80% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former
Style)” on page 10-31 or “FID 99:
Transport Cable (Current Style)” on
page 10-33
9A Transport 9% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
9E Priority cell sensor (pair) 4% T01 “FID 9E: Priority Cell Sensor” on
page 10-39
97 Motor control card 3% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
A5 Sensor cable 2% T01 “FID A5: Sensor Cable” on
page 10-46
A2 Drive/ACF cable 2% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44

1-40 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-4. ATTN ACF Messages (continued)
ATTN ACF FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
ability
No Ensure that the magazine is properly installed and latched in place. Try a different magazine.
Magazine Note: Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the magazine present sensor is operating correctly.
See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
A0 Magazine-present sensor asm 88% T01 “FID A0: Magazine-Present Sensor
Assembly” on page 10-41
97 Motor control card 6% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
A5 Sensor cable 4% T01 “FID A5: Sensor Cable” on
page 10-46
A2 Drive/ACF cable 2% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44
No The device cannot find a cartridge in the import position in the magazine or the priority cell.
Cartridge 1. Check the position of all the cartridges to ensure they are properly positioned in the import position
of the magazine and the priority cell. If this condition is not cleared, remove and replace the
magazine.
2. Press Start.
Note: This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (priority cell, global interference, limit 1 & 2,
import, export). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
9E Priority cell sensor (pair) 48% T01 “FID 9E: Priority Cell Sensor” on
page 10-39
9B Global/Interference sensor 16% T01 See Clear Picker Path Note, then go
to “FID 9B: Global/Interference
Sensor Assembly (Upper and
Lower)” on page 10-38
9A Transport 14% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
99 Transport cable 12% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former
Style)” on page 10-31 or “FID 99:
Transport Cable (Current Style)” on
page 10-33
A5 Sensor cable 10% T01 “FID A5: Sensor Cable” on
page 10-46
97 Motor control card 5% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
A2 Drive/ACF cable 3% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44

Chapter 1. Start 1-41

Table 1-4. ATTN ACF Messages (continued)
ATTN ACF FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
ability
Priority The cartridge is not positioned in the correct export position (either too far in or not far enough in the
Export ER cell).
1. The sensor detected that the cartridge was not delivered far enough into the cell or too far into the
cell.
2. Remove the tape cartridge.
Note: This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (priority cell, limit 1 & 2, import, export) Before
replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17
and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES
Menu.
— — — — Attempt to perform “Check and
Adjustment of Transport Position
Sensor” on page 10-28 before
replacing any FRUs.
FD Magazine 55% Q05 Customer-purchased
9A Transport 26% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
99 Transport cable 10% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former
Style)” on page 10-31 or “FID 99:
Transport Cable (Current Style)” on
page 10-33
9E Priority cell sensor (pair) 5% T01 “FID 9E: Priority Cell Sensor” on
page 10-39
97 Motor control card 4% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
Magazine The cartridge is not positioned in the correct export position (either too far in or not far enough in the
Export ER cell).
1. The sensor detected that the cartridge was not delivered far enough into the magazine or too far
into the magazine.
2. Remove the magazine and check that the cartridges are in the correct export position.
Note: This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (limit 1 & 2, import, export). Before replacing
FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, and
select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
— — — — Attempt to perform “Check and
Adjustment of Transport Position
Sensor” on page 10-28 before
replacing any FRUs.
FD Magazine 56% Q05 Customer-purchased
9A Transport 35% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
97 Motor control card 5% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
99 Transport cable 4% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former
Style)” on page 10-31 or “FID 99:
Transport Cable (Current Style)” on
page 10-33

1-42 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-4. ATTN ACF Messages (continued)
ATTN ACF FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
ability
Magazine The magazine is full of cartridges.
Full 1. The sensor detected that the magazine cannot hold any more cartridges.
2. Remove the magazine and replace the cartridges or insert another full magazine.
Note: This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (limit 1 & 2, import, export). Before replacing
FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select
UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
FD Magazine 56% Q05 Customer-purchased
9A Transport 35% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
97 Motor control card 5% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
99 Transport cable 4% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former
Style)” on page 10-31 or “FID 99:
Transport Cable (Current Style)” on
page 10-33
ACF Not Ensure there are cartridges in the ACF and that they are seated in the import position.
Enabled Note: This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (priority cell, global interference, cartridge
present, import). Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP SENSORS
from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
9E Priority cell sensor (pair) 33% T01 “FID 9E: Priority Cell Sensor” on
page 10-39
9B Global/Interference sensor 25% T01 See Clear Picker Path Note, then go
to “FID 9B: Global/Interference
Sensor Assembly (Upper and
Lower)” on page 10-38
9A Transport 20% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
A5 Sensor cable 10% T01 “FID A5: Sensor Cable” on
page 10-46
97 Motor control card 5% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
99 Transport cable 4% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former
Style)” on page 10-31 or “FID 99:
Transport Cable (Current Style)” on
page 10-33
A2 Drive/ACF cable 3% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44
Feed Over- An over-current condition was detected in the ACF feed motor circuitry.
current
97 Motor control card 60% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
A9 Feed motor assembly 20% T03 “FID A9: Feed Motor Assembly” on
page 10-49
A2 Drive/ACF cable 15% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44
E4 Card pack 5% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67

Chapter 1. Start 1-43

Table 1-4. ATTN ACF Messages (continued)
ATTN ACF FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
ability
Pinch Over- An over-current condition was detected in the ACF pinch motor circuitry.
current
97 Motor control card 60% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
96 Pinch motor assembly 20% T03 “FID 96: Pinch Motor Assembly” on
page 10-23
A2 Drive/ACF cable 15% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44
E4 Card pack 5% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
Picker An over-current condition was detected in the ACF elevator motor circuitry.
Over-
97 Motor control card 60% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
current
page 10-25
95 Elevator motor assembly 20% T03 “FID 95: Elevator Motor Assembly”
on page 10-20
A2 Drive/ACF cable 15% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44
E4 Card pack 5% T21 “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
Transport The drive attempted to unload a cartridge, but had no place to put it.
Full Note: Also follow instructions for any other messages that are presented, such as extra cartridge,
magazine full, no magazine.
— The magazine handle was moved — — Do not remove the magazine while
while the drive was unloading a the status area on the operator/CE
cartridge, or, a tape was present in panel is displaying Transferring.
the slot where ACF transport tried to
unload, so tape cartridge is still left
in transport.
Wrong The ACF is operating in the wrong mode for the requested command.
Mode
— The ACF is operating in the — — Determine the correct ACF mode
incorrect ACF mode. One of five and set it by going to the operator
ACF modes can be selected from Options Menu on the operator/CE
the Set ACF Mode Menu on the panel and selecting option Set ACF
operator/CE panel. Mode

1-44 IBM 3590 MI

Table 1-4. ATTN ACF Messages (continued)
ATTN ACF FRUs FRU Name or Description Prob- TAC Page Reference or Instruction
ability
Pinch1 or ACF detected an error when grasping (pinching) the cartridge
Pinch2 1. This failure may be caused by a dirty cartridge. Look for any contamination on the sides of the
Error cartridge that could cause the pinch rollers to slip. Have the customer clean or replace the cartridge
or magazine, if necessary. Use ONLY Tape Unit Cleaner, IBM P/N 05H3929 and a lint-free cloth.
See “Tape Unit Cleaner” on page 3-46 for details.
Note: Ensure that the customer does not ship magazines with cartridges loaded. The cartridges will
vibrate in the magazine slots resulting in contamination on the sides of the cartridges that may
cause this failure.
2. Check that the pinch rollers are not binding, and that the arms are not bent. If the rollers are
binding or the arms are bent, replace the transport FID 9A. Check the pinch rollers for
contamination. If they are dirty, clean or replace the rollers. Use ONLY Tape Unit Cleaner, IBM P/N
05H3929 and a lint-free cloth. See “Tape Unit Cleaner” on page 3-46 for details.
3. Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that the pinch 1 and pinch 2 sensors are operating correctly.
See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu, and DISP
SENSORS from the CE UTILITIES Menu.
FE Cartridge 50% D07 “FID FE – Isolate Fault Between
Media and Hardware” on
page 9-123
AA Transport pinch rollers 20% T03 “FID AA: Transport Pinch Rollers” on
page 10-51
9A Transport 20% T03 “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35
97 Motor control card 6% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
99 Transport cable 4% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former
Style)” on page 10-31 or “FID 99:
Transport Cable (Current Style)” on
page 10-33
ACF IRQ Continuous ACF electronic interrupt signals are being detected.
Fault Note: This failure may be caused by a sensor failure (priority cell, magazine present, magazine lock,
global interference, cartridge present, pinch 1 & 2, limit 1 & 2, transport position A & B, import, export).
Before replacing FRUs below, ensure that these sensors are operating correctly. See Figure 5-8 on
page 5-17, and select UTILITIES from the CE OPTIONS Menu and DISP SENSORS from the CE
UTILITIES Menu.
99 Transport cable 80% T04 “FID 99: Transport Cable (Former
Style)” on page 10-31 or “FID 99:
Transport Cable (Current Style)” on
page 10-33
97 Motor control card 10% T02 “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on
page 10-25
A2 Drive/ACF cable 6% T04 “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on
page 10-44
9E Priority cell sensor (pair) 4% T01 “FID 9E: Priority Cell Sensor” on
page 10-39
ACF Msg Microcode not able to provide correct ACF message.
Missing
E5 Microcode (known or new) (M01 = 100% M01/ “FID E5 – Microcode Problem” on
known, M02 = new) M02 page 9-118

Chapter 1. Start 1-45

1-46 IBM 3590 MI
Chapter 2. MAPs
Contents
Operator/CE Panel Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Panel Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Step Pnl01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Pneumatic Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Pneumatic Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Step Pnu01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Step Pnu02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Step Pnu03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Step Pnu04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Step Pnu05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Step Pnu06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Step Pnu07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Step Pnu08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Step Pnu09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Power Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Step Pwr01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Step Pwr02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Step Pwr03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Step Pwr04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Step Pwr05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Step Pwr06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Step Pwr07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Step Pwr08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Step Pwr09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Step Pwr10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Step Pwr11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Step Pwr12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Step Pwr13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Step Pwr14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Step Pwr15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Step Pwr16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Cable Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 2-1

Operator/CE Panel Problems
This procedure helps you isolate Operator/CE panel failures.
1. See 10-1 for procedures.
2. See Chapter 5, “Operator Panel” on page 5-1 for a description of the Operator/CE panel.
3. Unless otherwise directed, run Verify Fix, “End of Call” on page 9-8 and Test Panel from the CE
Options Menu to test the drive after a FRU replacement.
4. If the recommended repair actions do not fix the problem, call your next level of support.

Panel Maps
Note: Have the customer vary the drive offline, if it was not already done.

View the LEDs on the rear of the device (on the power supply).

Step Pnl01
Are the ac and dc LEDs ON and is the TH LED OFF?
Yes The 3590 power supply is OK.
Power the drive OFF and check that all operator/CE panel cable connectors from the operator/CE
panel to the card pack assembly are seated. Power the drive ON.
After the power ON diagnostics have completed, select Verify Fix from the CE Options menu.
Select Test Panel and visually check the panel display during the test.
If all of the cable connectors are seated correctly, and you still have a problem with the
operator/CE panel, replace the following FRUs, as necessary:
1. “FID 90: Operator/CE Panel” on page 10-12
2. “FID 91: Operator/CE Panel Cable” on page 10-14 or “FID 94: Operator Panel Cable (Model
B1A/E1A/H1A Only)” on page 10-126
3. “FID DC: ACF and Operator/CE Panel Cable” on page 10-121
4. “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
No Go to “Power Problems” on page 2-7.

2-2 IBM 3590 MI

Pneumatic Problems

Pneumatic Maps
v This procedure helps you isolate pneumatic system failures.
v See Chapter 10, “Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements” on page 10-1 for
procedures. Replacement of pneumatic system FRUs requires you to perform “Measurement and
Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4.
v See “Pneumatic System” on page 3-25 for a description of the pneumatic system.
v Unless otherwise directed, run Verify Fix from the CE Options Menu to test the drive after a FRU
replacement, “End of Call” on page 9-8.
v If the recommended repair actions do not fix the problem, call your next level of support.

Step Pnu01
If you have not already done so, perform the following procedures and return here:
v Perform “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6.
v Remove the power cord from its source and then from the power supply at the back of the 3590.
v Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
v Connect the power cord to the back of the 3590 and to the source outlet. Then, power ON the 3590.

A broken tape may result in a loss of pressure, which may cause a FID that points to a pneumatic system
failure.

Check the tape path for a broken tape.

Was the pneumatic system error caused by a broken tape?

Yes If the edge of the tape gets nicked or damaged, it may not break right away. The damage may
occur in the tape path of one drive, while the tape-break failure may occur later in a different drive.
The most likely place for tape damage to occur is at the tension transducer during a load
operation.
1. Check the teeth on the lower flange of the tension transducer. See “Adjustment of Tension
Transducer Plastic Shield” on page 10-83 for details.
2. Check the adjustment of the gap in the machine reel hub to ensure that it is not too tight. See
the procedure in “Replace Pantocam” on page 10-86.
3. Ensure that the latest level of microcode is installed. Call your next level of support, if
necessary.
No Continue at “Step Pnu02”.

Step Pnu02
Load a scratch tape into the drive. This should cause the pneumatic compressor motor to run.

Is the compressor motor running?

Yes Go to “Step Pnu07” on page 2-5.
No Go to “Step Pnu03” on page 2-4.

Chapter 2. MAPs 2-3

Step Pnu03
Perform the following:
1. Power OFF the 3590.
2. Remove the deck enclosure back plate. See “Removing Deck Enclosure Back Plate” on page 9-27.
3. Check that the connector of the pneumatic assembly motor cable, CD1, is seated and latched into the
rear of the card pack assembly.

Is the pneumatic assembly compressor motor cable connector, CD1, seated and latched into the
rear of the card pack assembly?
Yes Continue to “Step Pnu04”.
No Reseat the connector, switch power ON, and test. Run verify fix “End of Call” on page 9-8.

Step Pnu04
Perform the following:
1. Ensure that power is OFF.
2. Unplug the pneumatic motor cable connector, CD1, from the card pack.
3. On the card pack connector, measure the resistance from ground (pin 4) to pins 5, 9, and 10. The
resistance should be greater than 9K ohms at all three pins. See Figure 2-1 on page 2-4.

Is the resistance greater than 9K ohms at all three pins?

Yes The card pack resistance measurements are OK and the connector CD1 was seated and latched
properly. If the compressor motor still does not run when a tape is loaded:

Replace the “FID B1: Pneumatic Assembly” on page 10-57.

No The card pack is defective and will have to be replaced, but the problem may have been caused
by a short circuit or bind in the pneumatic compressor or motor.
Continue to “Step Pnu05”.

Figure 2-1. Pneumatic Motor Cable to Card Pack Cabling

Step Pnu05
Perform the following steps to determine if the pneumatic assembly needs to be replaced also:

On the pneumatic motor cable plug, CD1, measure the resistance from ground (pin 4) to pins 5, 9, and 10.
The resistance should be infinity at all three pins. If the resistance is less than infinity, the pneumatic
assembly is defective also. See Figure 2-1 on page 2-4.

2-4 IBM 3590 MI

Is the resistance infinity at all three pins?
Yes Continue to “Step Pnu06”.
No The compressor is shorted, causing the card pack to fail also.
Replace both of the following FRUs:
1. “FID B1: Pneumatic Assembly” on page 10-57.
2. “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67.

Step Pnu06
Check the compressor for mechanical binds. With power OFF, you should be able to rotate the
compressor with finger pressure on the end of the shaft.

Is the compressor binding?

Yes The compressor is binding, causing the card pack to fail also.
Replace both of the following FRUs:
1. “FID B1: Pneumatic Assembly” on page 10-57
2. “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67
No The compressor is okay.
Replace the “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67.

Step Pnu07
The compressor motor is running. Perform the following:
1. Check that the pneumatic pressure sensor (FID E3) cable is connected correctly.
2. Check for loose or broken hoses. If the cleaner blade has been removed, the cleaner blade vacuum
hose must be either removed or plugged to prevent vacuum system leaks. See “Cleaner Blade
Removal (Model B11/B1A)” on page 10-112 for details.
3. Clean the decoupler assembly.
4. Measure the pneumatic system vacuum and make adjustments if needed. See “Measurement and
Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4. This procedure also adjusts the pneumatic system
pressure and displays error messages on the operator/CE panel if the pressure set point cannot be
maintained.
5. Then return to this MAP.

Was the pneumatic system vacuum in adjustment?

Yes Go to “Step Pnu09” on page 2-6.
No Go to “Step Pnu08”.

Step Pnu08
Were you able to bring the pneumatic system vacuum into adjustment?
Yes The vacuum and pressure adjustments to the pneumatic system may have fixed the problem.
Run Verify Fix from the CE Options Menu, “End of Call” on page 9-8.
No Check that all pneumatic system hoses are seated on their connectors or fittings and that there
are no leaks. See “FID B2: Pneumatic Hose Kit” on page 10-58 for hose routing and replacement.
If the cleaner blade has been removed, the cleaner blade vacuum hose must be either removed or
plugged to prevent vacuum system leaks. See “Cleaner Blade Removal (Model B11/B1A)” on
page 10-112 for details.
If the hoses are OK, replace the following FRUs, as necessary:
1. “FID E3: Pressure Sensor” on page 10-65
2. “FID B1: Pneumatic Assembly” on page 10-57

Chapter 2. MAPs 2-5

Step Pnu09
The pneumatic system vacuum and pressure were in adjustment. The problem must be related to tape
tension.

With a tape cartridge loaded in the tape drive, check that the tape is drawn into the curvature of the
decoupler. See “FID B6: Decoupler” on page 10-79.

Is the tape drawn into the curvature of the decoupler?

Yes Check that the tape tension transducer cable is seated in its connector.
Check that all of the pneumatic system pressure hoses are seated on their connectors or fittings
and that there are no leaks.
If the hex screw in the center of the tension transducer is loose it will cause a pressure leak in the
transducer assembly. Check that the plastic shield is seated correctly on top of the tension
transducer and that the hex screw is tight.

Note: If the plastic shield is moved for any reason, it must be adjusted. See “Adjustment of
Tension Transducer Plastic Shield” on page 10-83.

If all of the above items are OK, and you still have a tape tension problem, replace the “FID B7:
Tension Transducer Assembly” on page 10-81.
No Check that the pneumatic system hoses going to the decoupler are seated on their connectors or
fittings and that there are no leaks.
If the hoses are OK, replace the “FID B6: Decoupler” on page 10-79.

2-6 IBM 3590 MI

Power Problems

Power Maps
v This procedure helps you isolate power failures.
v See Chapter 10, “Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements” on page 10-1 for
procedures.
v See “Power Supplies” on page 3-28 for a description of 3590 power.

Note: There are two levels of power supplies used on the 3590. See Figure 3-14 on page 3-29. The
New Level is used on all E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives and also on the new built Model B11/B1A
drives with Common Card Pack. The Old Level is used on all Base Model B11/B1A drives and
on the Model B11/B1A drives with the Ultra Card Pack (P/N 35L0818) or older.
v Unless otherwise directed, run Verify Fix from the CE Options Menu to test the drive after a FRU
replacement.
v If the recommended repair actions do not fix the problem, call your next level of support.

Have the customer vary the drive offline, if it was not already done.

Step Pwr01
Is the ac LED at the rear of the 3590 power supply ON?
Yes Go to “Step Pwr04” on page 2-8
No Perform the following:
1. Unplug the 3590 power cord from the source outlet.
2. Measure the ac voltage at the source outlet.
3. Go to “Step Pwr02”

Step Pwr02
Is ac voltage at the source outlet correct?
Yes Disconnect the power cord from the 3590.
Go to “Step Pwr03”
No If the source outlet is in a rack or library, see the rack or library documentation for power
problems.
Otherwise, inform the customer that ac power is unavailable at the customer-provided outlet.

Step Pwr03

Check the power cord for continuity.

Is the power cord OK?

Yes Replace the following FRUs, as necessary:
1. “FID C1: Power Supply” on page 10-62
2. “FID DB: Power Supply Cable (New Level)” on page 10-120
No Replace the 3590 power cord (no FID).

Chapter 2. MAPs 2-7

Step Pwr04
Is the TH LED at the rear of the 3590 power supply ON?
Yes The TH LED can be caused by one of the following:
v A thermal sensor in the power supply or card pack assembly is indicating a thermal condition.
v FA fan motor fault has caused the dc voltages to be turned OFF and the TH LED to be turned
ON.

Perform the following:

1. Power OFF the 3590 power supply, and check the LEDs, as described below:
a. The ac LED should remain ON.
b. The TH LED should remain OFF.

Note: On the Old Level power supplies the TH LED comes ON for about 10 seconds and
then remains OFF.
2. Perform “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6.
3. Remove the power cord from its source and then from the power supply at the back of the
3590.
4. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
5. Disconnect the 3590 power supply cable to isolate the power supply from the card pack.
a. On Old Level disconnect the cable from the card pack.
b. On New Level disconnect the cable from the back of the power supply.
6. Connect the power cord to the back of the 3590 and then to the source outlet.
7. Power ON the 3590 power supply, wait 20 seconds, then check the LEDs as described below:
a. The ac LED should remain ON.
b. The TH LED should remain OFF.
c. About 1 or 2 seconds after the power switch is set to the ON position the dc LED should
come ON and remain ON.
d. Go to “Step Pwr06”.
No Go to “Step Pwr05”

Step Pwr05
Is the dc LED at the rear of the 3590 power supply ON?
Yes The power supply LED indicators do not indicate an error condition. The power supply appears to
be OK, but there may be an intermittent failure or a failure in the cable from the power supply to
the card pack assembly. Repair or replace, as necessary.
No Go to “Step Pwr09” on page 2-9.

Step Pwr06
Did the TH LED remain OFF after 20 seconds?
Yes This is correct machine operation with the card pack disconnected. The card pack may be causing
the thermal condition or the machine may have cooled enough to reset the thermal sensor.
Go to “Step Pwr07” on page 2-9.
No The TH LED indicator is still ON indicating an error condition.
Replace the “FID C1: Power Supply” on page 10-62.

2-8 IBM 3590 MI

Step Pwr07
Check the power supply cooling fans to ensure they are operating correctly.

Are the fan(s) operating correctly?

Yes Leave the power ON long enough for the power supply to warm up to determine if the thermal
failure will happen again.
Go to “Step Pwr08”.
No Replace the “FID C1: Power Supply” on page 10-62.

Step Pwr08
Did the TH LED come ON after the power supply warmed up?
Yes Replace the “FID C1: Power Supply” on page 10-62.
No The card pack may be causing the failure.
1. Switch the power OFF.
2. Reconnect the power cable to the card pack.
3. Switch the power ON.

If the TH LED comes ON and stays ON, replace the “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67.

Step Pwr09
The power supply dc LED indicator is OFF, indicating an error condition.

Perform the following:

1. Power OFF the 3590 power supply, and check the LEDs as described below:
a. The ac LED should remain ON.
b. The TH LED should remain OFF.

Note: On Old Level power supplies, the TH LED comes ON for about 10 seconds and then
remains OFF.
2. Perform “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6.
3. Remove the power cord from its source and then from the power supply at the back of the 3590.
4. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
5. Disconnect the 3590 power supply cable to isolate the power supply from the card pack.
a. On Old Level disconnect the cable from the card pack.
b. On New Level disconnect the cable from the back of the power supply.
6. Connect the power cord to the back of the 3590 and then to the source outlet.
7. Power ON the 3590 power supply and check the LEDs as described below:
a. The ac LED should remain ON.
b. The TH LED should remain OFF.
c. About 1 or 2 seconds after the power switch is set to the ON position, the dc LED should come ON
and remain ON.

Did the dc LED come ON and stay ON?

Yes The failure is being caused by something in the power distribution circuit through the card pack to
the rest of the 3590.
Go to “Step Pwr10” on page 2-10
No The power supply dc LED indicator is still OFF, indicating an error condition.
Replace the “FID C1: Power Supply” on page 10-62.

Chapter 2. MAPs 2-9

Step Pwr10
Perform the following:
1. Power OFF the 3590 power supply.
2. Reconnect the power cable from the power supply to the card pack.
3. Refer to “Cable Diagram” on page 2-13 and “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67 for cable locations.
Disconnect the following power cables:
v Pneumatic supply cable (CD1)
v Machine Reel Motor and File Reel Motor cable (CD121) at the card pack
v Loader cable (CLC).
4. Power ON the 3590 power supply and check the LEDs again.

Did the dc LED come ON and stay ON?

Yes One of the components disconnected is causing the failure.
Go to “Step Pwr11”.
No The power supply dc LED indicator is still OFF, indicating an error condition.
Go to “Step Pwr12”.

Step Pwr11
Perform the following to determine which of the disconnected components is causing the failure:
1. Power OFF the 3590 power.
2. Reconnect the components that were disconnected in “Step Pwr10”, one at a time.
3. Switch ON the power to test each of the components.
4. Repeat this procedure until the failure returns.

When the failure returns (dc LED stays OFF), the last component that was reconnected is causing the
failure.
1. If the failure returns when the pneumatic cable (CD1) is reconnected:
Replace “FID B1: Pneumatic Assembly” on page 10-57.
2. If the failure returns when the machine reel motor or file reel motor cable (CD121) is reconnected:
Replace “FID C6: Machine Reel Motor” on page 10-93 or “FID C7: File Reel Motor” on page 10-94, as
necessary.
3. If the failure returns when the loader cable (CLC) is reconnected, use the following list and the “Cable
Diagram” on page 2-13 to isolate the failure. Remove cables to isolate each component until you can
identify the failing FRU.
a. “FID C8: File-Protect Sensor” on page 10-96
b. “FID CD: Cartridge-Present Sensor” on page 10-101
c. Loader Motor “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89
d. “FID CA: Tray-Up Sensor” on page 10-98
e. “FID C9: Door-Open Sensor” on page 10-97
f. “FID CC: Cartridge-Type Sensor Card Assembly” on page 10-99

Step Pwr12
Perform the following:
1. Power OFF the 3590 power supply.
2. Reconnect all of the power cables that were disconnected in “Step Pwr10”.
3. Remove the card pack retaining screw and carefully pull the card pack out far enough to disconnect
the two docking connectors (CD115 and CD124) on the front of the card pack.

Note: Be careful not to pull it out too far. The Head cables may be damaged.
4. Power ON the 3590 power supply.

Did the dc LED come ON and stay ON?

Yes The failure is caused by one of components connected through the Docking Cables.

2-10 IBM 3590 MI

 Go to “Step Pwr13”.
No The power supply dc LED indicator is still OFF, indicating an error condition.
Go to “Step Pwr14”.

Step Pwr13
Perform the following to determine which of the docking cables has the failing component:
1. Power OFF the 3590 power supply.
2. Reconnect the Card Pack Docking Cables CD115 and CD124.
3. Disconnect the following cables. This will isolate the ACF from the rest of the device.
a. Operator Panel cable connector on front of the device.
b. ACF cable connector on front of the device (if installed).
c. IPS cable connector.
4. Power ON the device.

Did the dc LED come ON and stay ON?

Yes One of the components disconnected above is causing the problem.
Go to “Step Pwr15”.
No The power supply dc LED indicator is still OFF, indicating an error condition.
Go to “Step Pwr16” on page 2-12.

Step Pwr14
Perform the following to determine if the failure is being caused by the Card Pack or the Read Write Head:
1. Power OFF the 3590 power supply.
2. Reconnect the Card Pack Docking Cables CD115 and CD124.
3. Disconnect the R/W cables (J1 and J2) from the card pack.
4. Power ON the device.
a. If the dc LED indicator is still OFF, replace the “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67.
b. If the dc LED indicator stays ON, replace the “FID D0: Head Guide and Brush Assembly” on
page 10-105.

Step Pwr15
Perform the following to determine if the problem is being caused by the Operator Panel, ACF or Head
IPS:
1. Power OFF the 3590, and reconnect the components disconnected in “Step Pwr13”, one at a time.
2. Switch ON the power to test each of the components.
3. Repeat this procedure until the failure returns.

When the failure returns (dc LED stays OFF), the last component that was reconnected is causing the
failure.
1. If the failure returns when the Operator Panel is reconnected:
Replace “FID 90: Operator/CE Panel” on page 10-12.
2. If the failure returns when the Head IPS is reconnected:
“FID D0: Head Guide and Brush Assembly” on page 10-105.
3. If the failure returns when the ACF is reconnected, use the following list and Figure 2-2 on page 2-13
to isolate:
a. “FID 97: Motor Control Card” on page 10-25
b. “FID 96: Pinch Motor Assembly” on page 10-23
c. “FID A9: Feed Motor Assembly” on page 10-49
d. “FID 95: Elevator Motor Assembly” on page 10-20
e. “FID A6: LED Cards and Random Lock Sensor” on page 10-48
f. “FID 9E: Priority Cell Sensor” on page 10-39
g. “FID A0: Magazine-Present Sensor Assembly” on page 10-41
h. Magazine Locked Sensor. “FID A6: LED Cards and Random Lock Sensor” on page 10-48

Chapter 2. MAPs 2-11

 i. “FID 9B: Global/Interference Sensor Assembly (Upper and Lower)” on page 10-38
j. “FID 98: Transport Position Sensor” on page 10-26
k. Elevator Card and Assembly. “FID 9A: Transport” on page 10-35

Step Pwr16
The failure is being caused by one of the components connected through the Card Pack Docking Cable
CD124.

Perform the following to determine which component is causing the failure:

1. Power OFF the 3590 power supply.
2. Reconnect the Card Pack Docking Cables CD115 and CD124, if necessary.
3. Disconnect the components in the following list, one at a time, and power ON the power supply to test.

When the dc LED comes ON, with one of the components disconnected, the disconnected component is
causing the failure.

Repair or replace the failing component, as necessary.

1. Card pack cooling fan (bottom) (see “FID BF: Fan (Card Pack)” on page 10-61)
2. Pressure transducer — “FID E3: Pressure Sensor” on page 10-65
3. Tension transducer — “FID B7: Tension Transducer Assembly” on page 10-81
4. Head solenoid (puffer) — “FID B5: Tape-Lifter Solenoid” on page 10-77
5. Tape A sensor — “FID CE: Tape Path A Sensor” on page 10-103
6. Tape B sensor — “FID CF: Tape Path B Sensor” on page 10-104
7. Pantocam cable — “FID BB: Pantocam” on page 10-84
8. Head VPD cable — “FID B5: Tape-Lifter Solenoid” on page 10-77
9. Machine reel motor — “FID C6: Machine Reel Motor” on page 10-93
10. File reel motor — “FID C7: File Reel Motor” on page 10-94

2-12 IBM 3590 MI

Cable Diagram

Figure 2-2. Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, or H11/H1A Cable Diagram

Chapter 2. MAPs 2-13

2-14 IBM 3590 MI
 Chapter 3. Introduction
Contents
3590 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
RAS Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3590 Maintenance Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3590 FID Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Host Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Device Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
SCSI Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
| Cable Feature Codes – SCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Fibre Channel Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Fibre Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Fibre Channel World Wide Identification (Names) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3590 Feature Codes for Fibre Channel Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
System Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
SCSI Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
SCSI Direct- and Control Unit-Attached 3590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Library – SCSI-Attached 3590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Fibre Channel Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Media Type Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Servo Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Erasing Data from Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Description of Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3590 Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Microprocessors and Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Read/Write Functional Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Head Guide and Brush Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Pantocam Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Loader Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Automatic Loading and Unloading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Manual Loading and Unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Fiducials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Operator/CE Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Operator Panel Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Pneumatic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Pneumatic System Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Operation – LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Power Switch and Power Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Automatic Cartridge Facility and Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Transport Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Subsystem Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Initial Microprogram Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 3-1

 Power Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Subsystem Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
POR Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3590 Drive Model and Feature Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
| Identifying Feature Code Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Drive Model and Level Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Hardware Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
SCSI Adapter/Port Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
SCSI Cabling and Terminator Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Fibre Channel Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Functional and R/W Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Drive Microcode Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
System Prerequisites for Proper Operation of Ultra Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Field Microcode Support (FMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Download Microcode from Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Field Microcode Support Using FMR Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Leader Block Replacement Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
ESD Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Pressure/Vacuum Gauge Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
SCSI Wrap Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Library Attachment Wrap Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
| Library Attachment Wrap Tool Interposer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Gap Set Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
ACF Motor Adjustment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
ACF Transport Position Adjustment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Tape Unit Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Potentiometer Adjusting Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Tape Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Hook and Loop Fastener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
| Fibre Wrap Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
| Fibre Wrap Duplex Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Inline SCSI Terminator for Open System Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

3-2 IBM 3590 MI

 3590 Introduction
The IBM 3590 High Performance Tape Subsystem provides high capacity, performance, reliability, and a
wide range of host connectivity. The IBM 3590 High Performance Tape Subsystem, which features the
3590 tape drive, introduces a new technology for longitudinal recording. The new technology can
significantly increase the performance of longitudinal recording while considerably improving reliability.

| These 3590 models tape drives read and write in the following formats:
| Model B11/B1A 128-track format
| Model E11/E1A 256-track format
| Model H11/H1A 384-track format

| While reading or writing 16 tracks at a time, the 3590 tape drive uses serpentine interleaved, longitudinal
| recording technology to make a total of four (Model B11/B1A), eight (Model E11/E1A), or twelve (Model
| H11/H1A) round trips from the physical beginning of the tape to the physical end and back again. The tape
| read/write head will index, or move vertically, when it completes each round trip so that the recorded
| tracks will be interleaved across the width of the tape. The IBM 3590 High Performance Tape Cartridges
| are the same physical size as the enhanced capacity cartridge system tape (ECCST) of the IBM 3480 and
| the cartridge system tape (CST) of the IBM 3490, and can be placed in the IBM 3494 and 3495
| Automated Tape Library Dataservers. The 3590 cartridges are not compatible with, and can not
| interchange with the 3480 or 3490 cartridges.

The IBM 3494 Tape Library can use either Model B1A, Model E1A, or Model H1A drives.

The IBM 3495 Tape Library can use only the Model B1A drive.

See Figure 3-1 on page 3-4.

| In the 3590, data is written in blocks of 384 KB of user data using a 16-track format. The first set of 16
| tracks is written to the physical end of the tape and then, using the electronic head switch, 16 interleaved
| tracks are written while the tape moves back to the beginning. The head is then indexed (physically moved
| a fraction of a millimeter) to the next set of 16 tracks. In this way eight (Model B11/B1A), sixteen (Model
| E11/E1A), or twenty four (Model H11/H1A) sets of interleaved tracks are written for a total of 128 tracks
| (Model B11/B1A), or 256 tracks (Model E11/E1A), or 384 tracks (Model H11/H1A).

| The IBM 3590 High Performance Tape Subsystem uses a metal particle tape in the IBM 3590 High
| Performance Tape cartridge that can store 10 GB (Model B11/B1A), 20 GB (Model E11/E1A), or 30 GB
| (Model H11/H1A) of non-compacted data. The 3590 tape drive uses a 3-to-1 compaction algorithm which
| can increase the storage capacity of these cartridges to 30 GB (Model B11/B1A), 60 GB (Model E11/E1A),
| or 90 GB (Model H11/H1A).

| With the IBM Extended High Performance Cartridge, the above capacities are all doubled. The Model
| B11/B1A drives can store 20 GB of non-compacted data, or 60 GB of compacted data. The Model
| E11/E1A drives can store 40 GB of non-compacted data, or 120 GB of compacted data. And the Model
| H11/H1A drives can store 60 GB of non-compacted data, or 180 GB of compacted data.

The IBM Extended High Performance Cartridge is the same physical size as the IBM High Performance
Tape and can be used in both the IBM 3494 and 3495 Automated Tape Library Dataservers.

The 3590 improved compression algorithm (IBMLZ1) provides highly-efficient compression. The IBMLZ1
algorithm furnishes hardware execution efficiency by using as few machine cycles as possible to compress
or decompress a byte, achieving good coding efficiency for broad applications, and performing
compression without performance loss.

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-3

 Figure 3-1. Serpentine Interleaved Track Sets

Overview
There are four models of the 3590.
v Model B11/E11/H11 is a frame-mounted or rack-mounted unit with an Automatic Cartridge Facility
(ACF).
v Model B11/E11 (RPQ 8B3191) and Models B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200) can be mounted in the Deskside
cover.
v Model B1A/E1A/H1A, SCSI attached drive, is a 3494 library-mounted unit in a D12/L12 or D14/L14
frame.
v Model B1A/E1A/H1A also can be mounted in a 3590 Model C12/C14 frame for library attachment.
v Model B1A/E1A also can be mounted in the Deskside cover, RPQ 8B3190 or FC 2200.
v Model E1A/H1A (fibre channel) is a 3494 Library mounted unit in D12/L12 only.
v Model Axx is an ESCON® controller, upper interface to the host.

| Note: The interface between the controller and the drive is SCSI or Fibre, but A60 also offers a FICON
| interface.

See IBM TotalStorage 3590 Tape Subsystem Axx Controller Models Maintenance Information and IBM
TotalStorage 3590 Tape Subsystem Models C12/C14 Maintenance Information for further information
| about these specific models.
| Notes:
| 1. 3590 Model A00 controllers support Models B11/B1A drives, only.
| 2. 3590 Model A50 controllers support Models B11/B1A, E11/E1A drives.
| 3. 3590 Model A60 controllers support Models B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A drives.

There are several levels of the 3590 Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A in the field.
v Base 3590 Model B11/B1A drives
v Ultra 3590 Model B11/B1A drives
v 3590 Model E11/E1A drives
v 3590 Model H11/H1A drives
See “3590 Drive Model and Feature Levels” on page 3-34 for more information.

| Table 3-1 shows the twelve model conversions available.

Table 3-1. 3590 Model Conversion Available
From To
B11 E11 H11 B1A E1A H1A
B11 N/A Yes Yes Yes No No
E11 No N/A Yes No Yes No

3-4 IBM 3590 MI

 Table 3-1. 3590 Model Conversion Available (continued)
From To
B11 E11 H11 B1A E1A H1A
H11 No No N/A No No Yes
B1A Yes No No N/A Yes Yes
E1A No Yes No No N/A Yes
H1A No No Yes No No N/A
| Note: Model B11/E11 can be converted incrementally to Model H1A, as follows: Model B11 to B1A , then B1A to
| H1A , or Model E11 to E1A, then E1A to H1A.

Two-ported SCSI-2, SCSI-2+, or SCSI-3 attachment

v The 3590 can be integrated with any host system that supports a SCSI-2 (or SCSI-2+) attachment and
has the proper software drivers installed. They can attach to separate SCSI initiators and can access
the same 3590 drive.
v All earlier production 3590 Model B11/B1A drives may be updated to the Ultra SCSI feature by
installation of Field FC 5790.
v 3590 drives can attach to various SCSI adapters:
– Fast/wide SCSI-2 channel adapter for all 3590 drives
| – Ultra/wide SCSI-2+ adapter for Ultra Models B11/B1A drives or all Models of E11/E1A/H11/H1A
| drives
| – Ultra/wide SCSI-3 adapter for Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives

For details, see “SCSI Adapter/Port Compatibility” on page 3-36.

Dual port, fibre channel attachment

The dual port fibre channel attachment is available only on Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives. (Two or
more open system servers can access the same 3590 Model E11/E1A or H11/H1A drive.)

The 3590 Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A drive can be attached directly to any of the open systems servers
that support fibre channel connection. All earlier production 3590 Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives can
be upgraded to fibre channel by installation of FC 3510.

| Note: Models E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives with fibre channel attachment are supported by the Model
| A60 Controller.

Consider these additional facts about the 3590:

v The drive ac power, pneumatic system, and dc power are contained in the drive frame.
v The Model B11/E11/H11 is rack or frame mounted for the iSeries/AS400 (OS/400)®, pSeries/RS6000
(AIX), and Linux systems. These models have front service capabilities for the rack-mounted devices
and rear service capabilities for the frame-mounted devices.
v The Model B1A is mounted in 3494 and 3495 library systems with rear service capability.
v The Model E1A/H1A is mounted in the 3494 library systems, but is not supported in the 3495 library
systems.
v The Model B1A/E1A/H1A is mounted in a 3590 Model C12/C14 drive frame (for library attachment), with
rear service capability.
v The Model B11/E11/H11 has an Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF) that contains a 10-cartridge
magazine that can be pre-mounted with cartridges by an operator. The ACF can be controlled as a
sequential loader or as a random access cartridge loader.
v The operator/CE panel on all drive models is a liquid crystal display (LCD) used by the operator or
service representative for certain operations.
v The Deskside RPQ provides a 3590 drive in a deskside configuration.

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-5

 Figure 3-2. 3590 Models

RAS Characteristics
maintenance strategy

| RAS is an abbreviated term for the product design characteristics of Reliability, Availability, and
| Serviceability.

Reliability
v Data reliability improved by 100 times over 3490
v Longer life R/W head
v New metal particle (MP) media is less abrasive
v New binder formulation to improve shelf life.

3-6 IBM 3590 MI

 v Enhanced cartridge construction with more robust shell design to improve shelf life
v Drive/cartridge designed to minimize operator errors
v Magazine with indicators on processed/unprocessed cartridge
v Magazine priority slot makes manual mode easier to use
v Fewer cables
v Fewer parts in ACF
v Menu-driven operator functions in some native languages with action-specific messages
v Model E11/E1A and Model H11/H1A drives use digital read/write channel and second-generation
electronics

Availability
v Designed for first-time fix
v Built-in hardware/microcode error detection and isolation
v Captured error recorded in expanded nonvolatile vital product data
v Reduced number of FRUs (approximately 1/2 of 3490)
v Service information message/Media information message (SIM/MIM) clearly indicate impact of failures
and FRUs affected, impact of service
v No planned down time for preventive maintenance
v Designed for quick FRU replacement
v High level of integration, fewer subassemblies
v Minimum number of cables
v Predictive maintenance (catches hardware and media problems before they are evident) via SIM/MIM
v Sophisticated algorithm to keep track of error statistics to isolate between drive and media problems.
This is the SARS (Statistical Analysis Reporting System) algorithm
| v Possible warning message for degraded hardware or media
v Pneumatic and power are dedicated to each drive
v Allow only failing drive to be taken down for service
v When in a library, a drive is designed for rear service (maintenance concurrent with library operations)

Serviceability
v No host resources or support is required for service
v All service actions are initiated from the drive panel
v Wrap tools are provided to test all external interfaces (SCSI, fibre channel, RS-422)
v Supported by microcode levels listed in “Drive Microcode Compatibility” on page 3-37
v Non-disruptive microcode update via SCSI for all 3590 models, or via fibre channel on E11/E1A and
H11/H1A
v New level of drive microcode can be written into the flash memory without affecting the current
microcode in DRAM. The new level of code is written to DRAM when the drive is IMLed.
v No error recreation
v Error is captured and recorded in vital product data
v Error information (SIM/MIM) is sent to the host
v Error indicators for microcode type problems
v Error records are retained in drive error log.
v Predictive failure analysis through SARS (Statistical Analysis and Reporting System)
v Electronic isolation
v All drive electronic cards in one pack (one FRU)
v ACF designed for quick disconnect from drive
v Number of drive FRUs are significantly less than 3490
v Special utilities for IBM support service built into drive
v Tools to help development engineers provide on-site support

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-7

 3590 Maintenance Strategy
The 3590 maintenance strategy does not use diagnostics for problem recreation. The hardware and
microcode are designed to capture and isolate failures when they occur. The fault symptom code (FSC)
generated either by the functional microcode or diagnostic microcode is converted into a FRU identifier
(FID) and displayed to the operator and/or the CE by sending service information messages (SIMs) or
media information messages (MIMs) in systems where these functions are supported. If the host system
does not support SIMs and MIMs, sense data is available if the subsystem is able to present it. In addition,
the FID is displayed on the 3590 display panel and placed into the drive error log. The FID and component
identifiers are stored in the vital product data (VPD) at the plant of manufacture.

Each level of microcode has an FSC to FID conversion table. This table is unique for each microcode load
and contains every FSC that is in this specific EC level. When a permanent error occurs or an error is
detected by the diagnostics, a SIM is generated and a flag is set in the SCSI sense data. This flag informs
the host system that additional information about the error should be read from the drive and displayed to
the operator. Only a permanent error causes a FID to be displayed on the operator/CE panel.

The maintenance strategy described is for all drive models of the 3590.
v Concurrent maintenance is possible even when the 3590 is part of a string on the SCSI bus. As the CE
can remove both cables without breaking the connection of the bus. fibre channel attached drives do
not have this concurrent maintenance capability.
v Each 3590 drive can have power removed without powering OFF any other 3590 drives.
v The 3590 is installed by the CE. The drive is not designed for customer set up (CSU).
v No remote support via a direct connection to the 3590.
| v The maintenance package for the 3590 uses the operator/CE panel for maintenance. Also, many of the
| maintenance functions for the drive can be accessed via the SCSI or fibre channel port from the host or
| controller.
v The maintenance information (MI) is contained in one volume.
v Selecting Verify Fix from the CE Options menu on the drive operator/CE panel causes all of the drive
diagnostics to be executed including the motion and read/write diagnostics.
v The error log contains up to thirty error entries for a record of machine errors.
v The FID FE and FID FF logs contain up to ten entries for a record of sense data sent to the host with a
FID of FE or FF.
v The Temp Error log contains up to ten entries for a record of sense data sent to the host with a sense
key of 1.

3590 FID Strategy

The 3590 FID strategy was developed to prevent down-level maintenance documentation. Previously,
when a new EC level of microcode was released, maintenance documentation would become down level
because of additions and deletions of FSC codes.

With the newer FID code concept, the maintenance documentation no longer lists FSC codes, only FID
codes. Each microcode EC level has a conversion table that reflects any additions or deletions in the FSC
codes. The FSC-to-FID conversion table is always correct for that specific code level, thus eliminating the
need to update documentation.

Host Messages
Service information messages (SIM) and media information messages (MIM) are incorporated into the
3590. These messages provide the customer and the CE with diagnostic and repair information before the
call, which eliminates unnecessary service calls.

3-8 IBM 3590 MI

 The MIM makes the 3590 media self-diagnosing. The customer’s media maintenance activity is specifically
directed to reduce the time required to separate hardware from media problems. The operator’s media
maintenance and CE’s service activity is based on failure events occurring in the customer’s functional
environment. This eliminates the need to use time-consuming machine checkout procedure to recreate the
failure.

The SIM and MIM functions are a primary factor in the 3590 maintenance plan for improved product
availability. See “Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and MIMs)” on page 4-2 and “Statistical
Analysis and Reporting System” on page 4-6 for details.

Device Characteristics
| See IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning Guide, for program support
| and the physical characteristics.

SCSI Connectivity
| Note: The 3590 is an HVD device and does not support LVD.

3590 drives have two SCSI ports. The type of ports in the drive is determined by the level and model of
the drive, as follows:
v Base Model B11/B1A drives have Fast/Wide Differential SCSI ports with a speed of 20 MB/s.
v Ultra Model B11/B1A drives with FC 9790/5790, all E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives have Ultra/Wide
Differential SCSI ports with a speed of 40 MB/s.
For more information on important changes in 3590 models with FC 9790/5790, see “3590 Drive Model
and Feature Levels” on page 3-34.

All SCSI cable features are compatible with all drive levels. Connectivity is supported for iSeries/AS400
(OS/400), pSeries/RS6000 (AIX), Linux, IBM POWERparallel SP2, Sun (Solaris), HP-UX and Windows
NT® or Windows 2000 attached systems.

| Cable Feature Codes – SCSI

| Table 3-2 shows the cable feature codes for the cable of the appropriate length.
| Table 3-2. 3590 Cable Feature Codes. For pSeries/RS6000 (AIX), iSeries/AS400 (OS/400), Sun (Solaris), HP-UX,
| Windows NT, Windows 2000, 3494, 3591, and Linux System Attachment
| Feature Code Cable Length Part Number System Application
| (FC)
| 5106 0.6 m (2 ft) 05H4644 A, E
| 5112 12 m (39 ft) 05H4649 A, B, C, E
| 5118 18 m (59 ft) 05H4650 A, B, C, E
| 5125 25 m (82 ft) 05H4651 A, B, C
| 5128 2.8 m (9 ft) 05H4647 A, B, C, E
| 5129 2.8 m (9 ft) 05H3221 B
| 5134 3.4 m (11 ft) (notes 4 & 6) 05H4645 D, E
| 5138 4 m (13 ft) (notes 4 & 6) 05H4646 D, E
| 5145 4.5 m (15 ft) 05H4648 A, B, C, E

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-9

| Table 3-2. 3590 Cable Feature Codes (continued). For pSeries/RS6000 (AIX), iSeries/AS400 (OS/400), Sun
| (Solaris), HP-UX, Windows NT, Windows 2000, 3494, 3591, and Linux System Attachment
| Feature Code Cable Length Part Number System Application
| (FC)

| Notes:
| 1. The 0.6 m (2 ft) SCSI cable (FC 5106) can be used when two 3590s are immediately adjacent to each other and
| are attached to the same SCSI I/O controller on a pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System.
| 2. Conversions from meters to feet are approximate and rounded to the nearest foot.
| 3. A cable that is used with FC 2420 cannot exceed 18 m (59 ft) in length.
| 4. FC 5134 is for horizontal use, FC 5138 is for vertical use.
| 5. The 3590 Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A can be attached to all iSeries/AS400 Systems capable of
| running OS/400 Version 4, Release 1 and later software.
| 6. Cable feature codes 5134 and 5138 can be used to connect multiple 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A drives on the
| same SCSI bus in a 3494 Model D12, D14, L12, and L14.
| 7. The characters in the last column identify the system with which these cables can be used. The alphabetic
| characters apply, as shown:
| pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) A
| iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) and Sun B
| HP/UX, Windows, and Linux C
| 3494 D
| 3591 E

|
|

| Addressing
The SCSI unit address or fibre channel port addresses are set during installation by selecting the address
menus on the operator/CE panel.

Fibre Channel Connectivity

Fibre Addressing
The 3590 Exx and Hxx must have a fibre address to communicate over the fibre channel interface. The
3590 allows both hard and soft addressing. Most fibre hosts (initiators) support hard addressing and do not
support soft addressing. Have the customer reference their device driver documentation for more
information.

Selecting the hard addressing option allows drive selection of the Arbitrated Loop Physical Address
(AL_PA). The higher the number, the lower the priority. Most hosts will try to have the lowest AL_PA
number (highest priority). The drives should have a higher AL_PA (lower priority). When multiple drives are
connected in an arbitrated loop, the drive closest to the host should have a lower AL_PA number (higher
priority) than the next drive. Follow this protocol through the loop.

The soft address feature allows the drive to arbitrate the AL_PA number with other fibre devices. When
sharing a drive between different systems, be sure two hosts do not attempt to use the same drive at the
same time. See “Fibre Channel Attachment” on page 3-13.

Fibre Channel World Wide Identification (Names)

Each fibre channel card has three names (Node, Port 0, and Port 1) that are hard coded into the
electronics of the card. These names are similar to a serial number and are unique world wide. Some
customer fibre channel networks that have switches with the “zoning”function will use these names, in
addition to using the Port Addresses for communications between the host and the drive.

3-10 IBM 3590 MI

| When a 3590 drive is first powered on with a new card pack, the Node, and Port 0 and Port 1 names are
| stored into the VPD memory. These names can be displayed or changed using the operator/CE panel.
| See “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56 and “Fibre Channel World Wide Name History Log” on
| page 9-63.

The fibre name and the fibre address must not be confused. The fibre name is a World Wide Identification
number assigned to the card at the time of build. The number is sixteen-characters long; the first ten are
assigned to IBM and will usually be 5005076300. Character 11 is either a ″0″ for the node name, or ″4″
and ″8″ for Port 0 and Port 1 respectively. If the card is replaced, the name from the original card will have
to be stored into VPD memory to keep the subsystem from getting confused.

See “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56 and “Fibre Channel World Wide Name History Log” on
page 9-63.

3590 Feature Codes for Fibre Channel Attachment

3590 Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives with the fibre channel Attachment FC 9510 or FC 3510 have
two fibre channel ports. A fibre optic cable is required for attaching a Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A drive to
host fibre channel adapters, the Storage Area Network (SAN) fibre channel switch, or other storage area
fibre channel components. The attaching fibre optic cable must be 50.0/125 micrometers for distances up
to 500 meters. The connection is a duplex SC/SC or LC/SC connector type.
Table 3-3. 3590 Feature Codes for Fibre Channel Attachment with SC/SC Cables
Feature Code (FC) Cable Length Part Number
5805 5 m (16 ft) 03K9201
5813 13 m (43 ft) 54G3386
5825 25 m (82 ft) 03K9203
5861 61 m (201 ft) 54G3390

| Table 3-4. 3590 Feature Codes for Fibre Channel Attachment with LC/SC
| Feature Code (FC) Cable Length Part Number
| 5907 7 m (23 ft) 11P3895
| 5913 13 m (43 ft) 11P3896
| 5922 22 m (72 ft) 11P3897
| 5961 61 m (201 ft) 11P3900
|

A 500-m (1640-ft) cable also is available. See IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction
and Planning Guide.

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-11

System Attachment
The Subsystem provides a SCSI system attachment or a fibre channel attachment (Model E11/E1A and
H11/H1A only).

SCSI Attachment
In this configuration the device attaches to a 2-byte-wide differential P-cable conforming to the SCSI-2 and
SCSI-3 standard. The connectors are shielded, high density, 68-pin, D-shell connectors. This type of
attachment allows cable lengths of up to 25 m (82 ft).

Asynchronous or synchronous transfers are supported. Each initiator can establish its own mode and rate
of transfer independently of other initiators. In synchronous mode, the target can support transfer periods
of 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, or 400 nanoseconds as established by the exchange of Synchronous
Data Transfer Request messages.

SCSI Direct- and Control Unit-Attached 3590

Note: For ESCON, all drives must be either Extended High Performance Cartridge or Non-Extended High
Performance Cartridge. ESCON can not handle mixed pools.

Figure 3-3 shows the SCSI, ESCON and FICON attachments from the host to the 3590.

Direct-Attached
Channel-Attached Host Channel-Attached Host
Host

SCSI SCSI ESCON FICON/ESCON

T
3591 or 3590 Axx 3590 A60
Control Unit Control Unit
3590 Drive
SCSI SCSI/FIBRE
T T

3590 Drive 3590 Drive 3590 Drive 3590 Drive

a14m0021

T - Terminator on last 3590 in daisy-chained SCSI string

Figure 3-3. SCSI, ESCON, and FICON Attached Host Connections

Library – SCSI-Attached 3590

Figure 3-4 shows the SCSI and RS-232 or LAN connections from the host to the 3590 and the library
manager when the device is direct-attached.

Figure 3-4. Library-Attached Host Connections

3-12 IBM 3590 MI

Fibre Channel Attachment
Supported Topologies: The 3590 Exx and Hxx models support switched fabric and point-to-point loop
topologies.

Switched Fabric: Two or more fibre channel end points interconnect through a switch. The fibre channel
architecture supports up to 256 ports through each switch. The 3590 supports a single, fabric router
(switch).

Switches include a function called “zoning.” This function allows the user to partition the switch ports into
port groups. It then assigns group access to other groups. This prevents group interferences. This allows
or prevents drive sharing.

Switched fabrics allow all of its ports simultaneous use of the full fibre channel architecture bandwidth.

Drive sharing is not allowed when attaching 3590 fibre channel drives to an A60 Control Unit through a
switch. See Figure 3-6 on page 3-14. In this configuration the switch must be connected to Port 0. Port 1
is not used.

Point-to-Point Loop: Point-to-Point Loop is similar to point-to-point topology. Both have two fibre channel
end points connected together. The difference is in the protocol.

When only two fibre channel end points connect together, either protocol is usable. Both end points must,
however, use the same protocol. The 3590 supports Point-to-Point Loop; SAN Data Gateway will utilize
either protocol. Most fibre channel adapters default to the Loop Protocol when not directly connected to a
fabric.

Direct-Attached Direct-Attached
Host Server-1 Host Server-2 Host Server-n
Host Host

Fibre Fibre
Storage Area Network (SAN)
3590 Fibre Channel Switch,
Hub or Hub and Fibre Channel Switch

a14m0053

3590 Drive-1 3590 Drive-2 3590 Drive-n

Figure 3-5. Typical Fibre Channel Host Connections

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-13

 Channel Attached Host

FICON/ESCON

A60 Control Unit

FIBRE LAN

Fibre Channel Switch HUB

FIBRE FIBRE FIBRE

a14m0076
3590 Drive-1 3590 Drive-2 3590 Drive 12

Figure 3-6. A60 Control Unit Fibre Channel Attachment

Supported Host Attachments: The 3590 Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives with fibre channel
attachment 9510 or 3510 support attachment to the following host systems:
| v IBM pSeries/RS6000 or IBM pSeries (AIX)
| v IBM iSeries/AS400 or IBM iSeries (OS/400)
| v IBM Linux (supported in Intel-based Linux operating environment)
v Hewlett-Packard (HP-UX)
v Windows (NT and 2000)
v Sun PCI/S-bus
| v Compaq Tru64 Unix
Notes:
| 1. See the IBM TotalStorage Device Driver Installation and User’s Guide for detailed information
| regarding the supported host attachments.
2. IBM xSeries (NUMA-Q) ONLY supports the 3590 Model E11/E1A drives with fibre channel attachment
FC 9510 or FC 3510.

| Note:

The drives also support attachment to the following fibre channel fabric components:
v IBM 2103 Fibre Channel Storage Hub (for distance only)
v IBM 2109 SAN Fibre Channel Switch
v IBM 2031 McData ES-1000 Fibre Channel Loop Switch
v IBM 2032 McData ED-5000 Fibre Channel Switch (connected through ES/1000 or SAN)
v IBM 2042 InRange FC/9000 Fibre Channel Director

The host system and fabric component attachments above all have unique hardware and software
requirements. Also, new systems and components may be added to the lists from time to time.

Refer to a URL for the latest Fibre Support Information. : “Web Site Information” on page xxii.

SAN Failover Capability: The Atape device driver, (FC 9200), provides redundant path failover capability
for 3590 fibre channel drives attached to a pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) and Linux systems through a SAN
(Storage Area Network) connection.

The device driver can configure up to 16 alternate paths between the drive and the host systems. (See
Figure 3-7 on page 3-15.) If a permanent path error occurs, the failover function provides automatic error
recovery and path switching, and is transparent to the running application.

3-14 IBM 3590 MI

Refer to the URL information in “Web Site Information” on page xxii to acquire the latest device driver
information.

Figure 3-7. SAN Failover Capability

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-15

 Tape Cartridge
| The 3590 uses the IBM High Performance Tape or the Extended High Performance Cartridge. This media
| is not compatible with the IBM Cartridge System Tape or the IBM Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System
| Tape, and cannot be used on 3480, 3490, or 3490E tape products. For additional information on the
| cartridge, see IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 User’s Guide.

See Figure 3-8 on page 3-17.

The 3590 uses a serpentine longitudinal recording technology called interleaved-longitudinal recording.
This type of recording spreads the bits of a unit of information along the tape, making data on damaged
tapes more recoverable. Tape media is commonly damaged in two ways; vertical damage, which can
occur if the tape is folded for some reason, and horizontal damage, such as a scratch along the length of
the tape, which can occur during tape movement. The probability of being able to recover from either
vertical or horizontal damage is increased, because no whole unit of information (a byte) is unrecoverable.
Only a few bits within many bytes are damaged, and having only a few bit errors simplifies error recovery
and considerably improves the probability of being able to read a damaged tape. IBM has chosen this
technology to meet three critical factors; performance, reliability, and cost. Other characteristics include:

Mechanical simplicity:
v Few moving parts
v Proven durability
v Simple loading mechanism

Start-stop operation:
v Complete back-hitch cycle in approximately 100 milliseconds
v Hundreds of millions of cycles possible

Data integrity:
v Numerous concurrent data channels offer several advantages:
v Lower head wear
v Low degree of contact between head and tape minimizes head wear
v Lower media wear

| The 3590 High Performance Tape has a capacity of 10 GB of non-compacted data on the Model B11/B1A
| drives, 20 GB of non-compacted data on the Model E11/E1A drives, or 30 GB of non-compacted data on
| the Model H11/H1A. With the 3 to 1 data compression algorithm, the capacity is increased to 30, 60 or 90
| GB.

| With the IBM Extended High Performance Cartridge, the above capacities are all doubled. The Model
| B11/B1A drives can store 20 GB of non-compacted data, or 60 GB of compacted data. The Model
| E11/E1A drives can store 40 GB of non-compacted data, or 120 GB of compacted data. The Model
| H11/H1A drives can store 60 GB of non-compacted data, or 180 GB of compacted data

An additional feature includes the implementation of an improved error correction code (ECC). A portion of
the tape within each cartridge is reserved for error history; it is updated after each use (read or write) to
provide statistics that can be used to identify problems with a particular tape as early as possible.

3-16 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 3-8. Interleaved Longitudinal Recording

Media Type Indicator

The High Performance Tape cartridges have a blank (Model Cxx), or a J, and the Extended High
Performance Cartridges have a K, on the bar code label to identify the type of media. The library manager
software uses this information to manage the different types of media in an automated library (3494 and
3495).

Servo Tracks
The media has servo tracks, which are prerecorded at the plant of manufacture. These tracks allow the
3590 to position the read/write head accurately with respect to the tape while the tape is in motion. If these
servo tracks are damaged or are removed, the cartridge cannot be written to until the servo tracks are
restored. Degaussing a 3590 cartridge requires use of a special metal particle degausser. After the tape is
degaussed, it cannot be used again.

Erasing Data from Tape

The Erase command from the host overwrites the original data so the original data is obscured sufficiently
for data security erase purposes.

Description of Tape Cartridge

The following is a brief description of the magnetic tape cartridge used in the 3590 High Performance Tape
Subsystem. The cartridge contains:
v A single reel of magnetic tape
v A leader block
v A clutch mechanism
v A cartridge file protect mechanism
See the magnetic tape cartridge in Figure 3-9 on page 3-18.

The leader block
1 is attached to the end of the magnetic tape. During a threading operation, the leader
block
3 is pulled out of the cartridge by the threader pin and moved along the tape path to the machine
reel.

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-17

At the same time the leader block is engaging the threader pin, the tape clutch gear
6 on the bottom of
the cartridge engages the file reel gear. This action engages the clutch surface inside the tape cartridge,
allowing the file reel motor to rotate the tape reel.

The cartridge file-protect mechanism is a thumbwheel that is moved by hand to either the file-protected

2 or the ’not file-protected’
4 position. A closed-lock symbol on the face of the thumbwheel indicates
that the cartridge is file-protected.

The outside of the cartridge housing has:

v Space for the volume identification
5, which is at the front of the cartridge housing.
v The clutch mechanism
6 in the center of the cartridge housing.
v Cartridge-type sensor notches
7.
The cartridge-type sensor notches allow the 3590 to recognize cartridges designed for its use and to
reject all other cartridges not designed for the 3590.

Figure 3-9. Magnetic Tape Cartridge

The 3590 uses two different data storage cartridges and a cleaning cartridge. When viewed from the front,
the sensor notches for the data storage cartridges are oriented to the left
8 for the High Performance
Tape and to the outside
9 for the Extended High Performance Cartridge. The sensor notches for the
cleaning cartridge are oriented to the right
10.

3-18 IBM 3590 MI

 3590 Tape Drive
The 3590 tape drive can be configured in a rack or in an automated tape library dataserver. Either SCSI or
fibre channel attachments are supported.

The 3590 tape drive is a modular drive unit that measures 221 mm (8.8 in.) wide, 750 mm (29.8 in.) deep,
and 262 mm (10.5 in.) high. The 3590 tape drive contains the read/write head, the mechanical
components, the sensors, the head servo system, and the motors necessary to thread and move the tape
forward or backward.

| Each SCSI drive has two external SCSI ports for attachment to pSeries/RS6000 (AIX), Linux ,
| POWERparallel SP2, iSeries AS400 (OS/400), Sun (Solaris), Hewlett-Packard (HP-UX), Windows NT, or
| Windows 2000 attached systems. The drive can be attached to the control unit which is attached to the
| host Via ESCON or FICON. The 3590 can be integrated with any host system that supports the correct
| SCSI attachment and has the proper software drivers installed.

| Each fibre channel drive has two external fibre channel ports for attachment to any iSeries AS400
| (OS/400), pSeries/RS600 (AIX), xSeries (NUMA-Q) , Hewlett-Packard (HP-UX), Windows NT/2000, Sun,
| or other host system that supports the fibre channel attachment and has the proper software drivers
| installed.

Figure 3-10 on page 3-20 shows the IBM 3590 drive unit with its own integrated Data Channel control unit
function with two channel interfaces, SCSI or fibre channel. The integrated control unit function includes
buffering and compaction for multi-host attachment or availability, and eliminates drive contention, thus
enhancing performance.

| The 3590 Model B11/B1A tape drive can read and write data at a rate of 9 MB/second and the E11/E1A
| and H11/H1A drive can read and write data at a rate of 14 MB/second. The IBM 3590 can transfer data
| between the host and the tape subsystem at a rate of 17 MB/second for hosts attached through Enterprise
| System Connection (ESCON) channels, 20 MB/second when attached through fast/wide small computer
| systems interface (SCSI), and 40 MB/second if the Ultra/wide SCSI feature is installed. With the fibre
| channel attachment, 3590 Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives can transfer data at the rate of 100
| MB/second burst data rate.

Microprocessors and Control Storage

The 3590 contains three microprocessors in the card pack. One processor controls all of the buffers,
read/write data flow, operator/CE panel, and the ACF. This processor executes microprograms that control
and monitor the 3590. The other two processors control the track-following servo system and the
reel-to-reel motors.

The control storage consists of nonvolatile storage where:

v Microcode for the 3590 is stored
v DRAM where the microcode resides following a power-ON sequence or a reset

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-19

 Figure 3-10. Tape Drive Schematic Comparison (3490, SCSI and Fibre)

Read/Write Functional Areas

See Figure 3-10 (SCSI) or (Fibre).

The read/write functional areas provide the data paths to transfer data between the host system and the
3590 subsystem. The data handling areas include:
v SCSI/fibre channel buffer
v LZ1 compactor
v Data buffer
v Read data flow
v Write data flow

| The microprocessor on the logic card controls data movement between the tape subsystem and the host
| system. The data flow sends commands and receives status from the reel-to-reel digital signal processor
| (DSP) and the track, following DSP.

The data buffer area contains the customer data. Components of the logic process data in and out of the
data buffer.

When a buffered write operation occurs, data is transferred from the SCSI/fibre channel buffer and the
data buffer. The 3590 signals the host that the data has been written on tape. However, the data is still in
the buffer. When the 3590 workload permits, the data is transferred to the analog card and is written on
tape.

During read operations, the 3590 pre-reads data from the drive into the data buffer. When the host
requests the data from the subsystem, the 3590 unit responds immediately and transfers the data.

Head Guide and Brush Assembly

The head guide assembly (HGA) is a FRU which can be removed from the 3590 deck. The HGA is a
bidirectional read/write head with 16 elements and a recording format of 128 tracks (Model B11/B1A), 256
tracks (Model E11/E1A), or 384 tracks (Model H11/H1A). The bidirectional head writes 16 tracks from the

3-20 IBM 3590 MI

 load point to the physical end of tape and then writes 16 tracks from the physical end of tape back to the
load point. Therefore, fully written tapes are positioned at the load point and eliminate the rewind
operation.

| The only visual difference between the three HGA assemblies is the serial number on the barcode label on
| top of the R/W head. The Model E11/E1A serial numbers all begin with a “T”, the Model B11/B1A serial
| numbers all begin with a “B” and the Model H11/H1A serial numbers all begin with an “M”.

The HGA Assemblies for the Extended High Performance Cartridge have a ’2X’ label on top of the ’D’
bearings.

The principal purpose of the HGA assembly is to:

1. Guide the tape across the recording head with a pair of hydrodynamic bearings located on either side
of the recording head. The compliant guide assembly which helps tape track on air bearing is located
on top of each of the air bearing block.
2. Perform recording with the head via the flexible head cable.
3. Position the read/write head against the moving tape with the aid of the integrated actuator and optical
sensor components.
4. Maintain cleanliness of the R/W head by using a head cleaner brush.
5. Provide vital product data (VPD) for the performance parameters of the HGA, such as head reference
positions and actuator performance parameters.
6. Provide a location for the vital product data card (VPD). The card contains a serial nonvolatile
read/write memory component, which is used to store and transmit various actuator/head position data
to the drive microcode during functional operation. This erasable programmable read-only memory
(EPROM) is programmed by manufacturing during HGA assembly with position data and head module
current data from the high speed generic component tester (HSGCT). The card also provides
connection to the actuator coil on the HGA. This connection is a direct connector pass through.

Drives with the Extended High Performance Cartridge feature require an HGA assembly with the 2X label.
The 2X HGAs are downward compatible and will work on drives without the Extended High Performance
Cartridge feature.

Attention:

HGA-Specific Notes
v Due to the delicate nature of the HGA, do not touch the head modules.
v Always unplug the head cable before removing the HGA from the drive. The head cable is extremely
fragile; do not touch or pull the cable under any circumstances.
v Handle the HGA only by the HGA casting. Set the HGA on its feet with the head cable outwardly
spread. Always use the HGA cover. When the HGA is not in use, put it in the packing box.
v It is important that you do not push down on the head.
v Do not use magnetized tools near the head; they can destroy the head.

Pantocam Assembly
The pantocam assembly carrier pin engages with the leader block that is attached to the end of the
magnetic tape. During a threading operation, the leader block is pulled out of the cartridge by the threader
pin and moved along the tape path to the machine reel. At the same time the leader block is engaging the
threader pin, the tape clutch gear on the bottom of the cartridge engages the file reel gear. This action
engages the clutch surface inside the tape cartridge, allowing the file reel motor to rotate the tape reel.

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-21

Loader Assembly
The loader assembly is similar to a front loading video cassette recorder (VCR). A light push causes the
cartridge to go into the loader assembly where it is lowered onto the tape deck hub/clutch assembly to
commence tape threading. The reverse takes place at the end of the recording or reading cycle. The tape
cartridge is lifted and then ejected horizontally into the unload position.

The loader has a manually-operable compound gear that acts as a thumbwheel to assist and facilitate
manual loading and unloading of a tape cartridge.

Automatic Loading and Unloading

The step-by-step cartridge loading sequence is:
1. The cartridge is inserted into the loader opening until resistance occurs.
2. During the insertion process, the loader door is tilted inward to interrupt a door-open sensor.
3. The cartridge goes into the loader in a horizontal motion for about 15 mm (0.59 in.) until the cartridge
present sensor detects the cartridge. The loader motor is then turned ON.
4. With the aid of a cam follower, the cartridge is lowered a vertical distance of about 11.5 mm (0.45 in.)
5. The loader motor is turned OFF after the tray-down condition is detected by the cartridge type sensors.
6. The file-protect button in the cartridge activates the file-protect sensor, which is located in the back of
the loader.
7. In the final loaded position, there are 4 cartridge media identification sensors, that distinguish 16
different types of media. These 4 sensors are interruptive (break light beams) type. The four cartridge
type ID sensors also are used to detect if a cartridge is seated (tray down).

In the unloading operation, the process is reversed. The cartridge is returned to its initial position,
described in step 1.

Manual Loading and Unloading

Without the aid of the loader motor, you can load the cartridge in essentially the same manner described
for automatic loading. Using the protruding gear on the left side of the assembly, turn the gear towards you
for loading, and turn the gear away from you for unloading.

To repeat loading and unloading cartridges, turn the gear all the way in each direction and remove the
cartridge completely out of the loader before each reloading operation.

3-22 IBM 3590 MI

Fiducials
Fiducials are used by cartridge handling devices to locate where and what type of tape drive device is
installed. Do not cover or modify the fiducials.

The 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A has one white fiducial
1 for 3590 devices installed in IBM Model 3494
Tape Library Dataservers.

Figure 3-11. Fiducial for IBM Model 3494 Tape Library Dataservers

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-23

Operator/CE Panel
The operator/CE panel is a menu-driven display used by the CE and the operator to display and set
different options such as:
v Device status
v Error conditions (FID)
v Drive setup
v Mount activities
Figure 3-12 shows the display panel. Chapter 5, “Operator Panel” on page 5-1 describes the functional
description of panel operations.

Figure 3-12. Operator/CE Panel

The operator/CE panel on a Model B11/E11/H11 can be used to set one of the following ACF modes:
v Manual
v Accumulate
v Automatic
v System
v Random or Random 2-LUN

See “Modes of Operation” on page 6-19 for a complete description of these modes.

3-24 IBM 3590 MI

Operator Panel Messages
The 3590 message display has 6 message types:
v FID 1 messages
v Attention messages
v Routine messages
v FID 2 messages
v FID 3 messages
v FID 4 messages
See “Intervention Messages” on page 5-10 for details.

Pneumatic System
Unlike the earlier 3480/3490 tape systems, the 3590 has a centralized pneumatic supply system to either
2 or 4 drive units. The 3490E utilizes an individual pneumatic supply system for each drive with air
distribution remaining as originally designed for 3480 with improvements to the air filtration and regulation.
The 3590 pneumatic supply system has a 3490E compressor with size reduction to the filters and
pressure/vacuum control devices. It is a closed loop control system with pressure feedback. There is a
pressure transducer for pressure feedback and a low pressure shut off. The 3590 pneumatic system has
no pneumatic reservoir such as the one in the 3480/3490/3490E. The 3590 has an enhanced puffer
solenoid and a complete rerouting of the air distribution system from the previous designs.

Functions
The principal function of the pneumatic supply system is to provide pressurized sources of air to the
following areas:
v The hydrodynamic air bearing to guide the tape across the magnetic head.
v The tension transducer bearing to monitor the tape tension and to provide feedback to maintain reel to
reel tape velocity and position control during tape acceleration and deceleration.
v The decoupler, which behaves like a mini vacuum column to buffer the dramatic changes in tape
tension profile. It provides a smoothing affect on the tape tension. Both the pressure and vacuum lines
go to the decoupler.
v The pressure sensor for the closed loop pneumatic control system.
v The tape lifter which is located in the magnetic head. The tape lifter prevents the tape from sticking to
the head when there is no relative motion between the tape and the head. The tape lifter is normally
OFF when the tape is running.

See Figure 3-13 on page 3-26 for the components of the pneumatic system.

Note: The cleaner blade is no longer used in the 3590 tape path.

Operation
The following is a description of the pneumatic system components (FRUs):

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-25

Figure 3-13. Pneumatic System Components

Pneumatic Assembly
10

The pneumatic assembly contains the pneumatic motor/compressor
11 and separate filters for
pressurized air
15 and vacuum
14 in a single housing. There are test ports for the pressurized air
16
and vacuum
12 and an adjustable bleed valve
13 for adjusting the vacuum.

Pressure Sensor
1

The pressure sensor is used to measure the air pressure in the pressurized air supply from the
motor/compressor. The pressure sensor and its small integrated circuit board controls pressurized air by
varying the speed of the compressor motor.

Tension Transducer
3

The tension transducer assembly uses pressurized air to form an air bearing for the tape path and to
measure tape tension. The tension transducer and its small integrated circuit board controls tape tension
by varying the speed of the file and machine reel motors.

Head Guide Assembly
5

The head guide assembly contains three pneumatic system components:

v The right
9 and left
6 D-bearings are on either side of the read/write head. They use pressurized air
to create air bearings on which tape is guided over the head.
v The tape lifter
7 is a slot in the read/write head through which pressurized air is blown when tape
movement stops.

Note: The cleaner blade is no longer used in the 3590 tape path.

Tape-Lifter Solenoid
4

3-26 IBM 3590 MI

The tape-lifter solenoid is a solenoid-activated air valve. When tape movement stops, the microprogram
activates this solenoid, which causes pressurized air to blow through the slot
7 in the read/write head
and to push the tape away from the head.

Decoupler
2

The decoupler is a pocket-shaped guide in the tape path that is a mini-vacuum column to buffer the drastic
changes in tape tension. Both vacuum and pressure lines go to the decoupler.

The vacuum inside the pocket causes the tape to be pulled into the pocket. Pressurized air goes to both
surfaces outside the pocket to create air bearings for the tape path.

Pneumatic Hose Kit

The pneumatic hose kit consists of tees, crosses, elbow, and hoses, to connect the components of the
pneumatic system. When one hose needs to be replaced, the entire hose kit is installed.

The small hose from the tape-lifter solenoid
4 to the tape lifter
7 is part of the head guide assembly

5 and is not replaced with the hose kit. It is replaced only with the head guide assembly.

Pneumatic System Adjustments

Pressure and vacuum are adjusted when vacuum and pressure related FRUs are replaced. Pressure is
adjusted by the microcode from the CE Config/Install menu or when the cleaner cartridge is run. Vacuum
is adjusted manually by the CE. See “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4.

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-27

 Power Supplies
Power in the 3590 is supplied by a single integrated dc power supply. The ac power cord of this supply is
plugged into the ac power distribution of the rack or library in which the 3590 is mounted.

The power supply is packaged in a metal housing for structural and safety purposes and to meet the
mechanical requirements for mounting. Cooling air flow is provided by fan(s) attached to the power supply.
The power supply assembly is an ac/dc converter that generates the dc voltages necessary for operation
of the 3590. The power supply is designed to accept a single phase 50 or 60 Hz, ±5%, 100-127 or
200-240 V ac. Status indicators are located on the rear cover of the supply. When single phase ac power
is supplied to the power supply the ac indicator turns ON. When the power switch is turned ON, the power
supply begins operation, the dc voltages turn ON, and the dc indicator turns ON. The power supply
provides over-current and over-voltage protection on all outputs.

The 3590 dc power supply is a single FRU. No serviceable components are contained within the power
supply. The power supply has no adjustments.

The 3590 drive does not provide remote power control. If required, remote power control is provided by
the enclosure or a higher level subassembly.

Function
| There are two levels of power supplies used on the 3590. See Figure 3-14 on page 3-29. The New Level
| is used on all Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives and also on the new built Model B11/B1A drives with
| common card pack . The Old Level is used on all Base Model B11/B1A drives and on the Model B11/B1A
| drives with the Ultra card pack (P/N 35L0818) or older.
| v The Old Level B11/B1A power supply converts ac input to +36, +12, +5.3, +5.2, +5.1 and −5.1 V dc.
| This power supply has two cooling fans, and provides dc power to the 3590 through an integral
| (non-removable) cable that connects to the card pack.
| v The New Level E11/E1A and H11/H1A power supply converts ac input to +36, +12, +5.1 and −5.1 V dc.
| This power supply has only one cooling fan, and provides dc power to the 3590 through a separate
| (removable) cable that connects to the card pack.

Both levels of power supply have over-voltage, over-current and thermal protection circuits. The
operational status of the power supply is indicated by three LEDs; AC, DC, and TH (thermal) on the rear
cover of the power supply.

An over-voltage or over-current condition on the +36 V dc output will cause all of the output voltages to
turn OFF. An over-voltage or over-current condition on any of the other dc outputs will turn OFF all output
voltages except the +36 V dc. Either of the above conditions will cause the dc LED to turn OFF also. The
power supply will resume operation when the fault is removed and the supply is cycled OFF/ON.

The thermal protection circuits are activated when a thermal condition is sensed in the power supply or in
the card pack, or when a fan failure in the power supply is detected. The power supply must be cycled
OFF and then back ON before the LED will go OFF.

3-28 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 3-14. New and Old Level Power Supplies

Operation – LED Indicators

The three LEDs on the rear of the 3590 power supply indicate the power status, as follows:
LED Indicates
AC Presence of ac voltage at the input to the power supply regardless of the position of the
power switch.
DC dc voltages are being supplied. This LED goes ON several seconds after the power switch
is switched to the ON position. The LED goes OFF when:
v The switch is set to the OFF position
v An over-voltage or over-current condition is detected on one of the dc outputs
v A thermal sensor is activated in the card-pack assembly or inside the power supply
TH The thermal LED can be turned ON under any of the following conditions:
1. If a thermal error is detected in the card pack, the microcode will send a signal to the
power supply that will turn ON the TH LED and also turn OFF all of the dc voltages
and the dc LED.
2. If a thermal error is detected in the power supply, the power supply will turn ON the TH
LED and also turn OFF all of the dc voltages and the dc LED.
3. A power supply fan failure.
v New Level Power Supply: If the power supply detects that the power supply fan is
rotating too slowly or is stopped, the power supply will turn ON the TH LED and
send a signal to the card pack. When the card pack detects the fan failure signal it
will send a signal back to the power supply. This causes all of the dc voltages to
turn OFF, and turns OFF the dc LED.
As an aid to failure isolation, the New Level power supply can be turned ON while
the power supply to card pack cable is disconnected. If the circuits in the power
supply detect that the fan has failed, the TH LED will be turned ON within 20
seconds. This indicates that the fault is in the power supply and not in the card
pack.
v Old Level Power Supply: The Old Level fan failure detection is the same as the
New Level, except for the TH LED control. The TH LED on an Old Level power
supply is controlled by the microcode, not by the power supply. If an Old Level
power supply with a failing fan is turned ON while the power supply to card pack
cable is disconnected, the TH LED will not turn ON.

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-29

 Power Switch and Power Sequence
A description of the power-ON sequence follows:
1. When the 3590 power cord is plugged into the power source, the ac LED on the back of the power
supply goes ON.
2. About one or two seconds after the 3590 is powered ON, the following occurs:
v The dc LED goes ON and remains ON.
v The cooling fans begin operating.
v The operator/CE panel backlighting goes ON and the Processor Check LED goes ON.
3. About 15 seconds after the 3590 is powered ON, the Panel Initialized message displays on the
operator/CE panel, and the Processor Check LED goes OFF.
4. About 20 seconds after the power switch is switched ON, the automatic cartridge facility (ACF) is
initialized. The ACF elevator is moved up and down during this initialization.
5. The power-ON self-test (POST) runs for approximately 2½ minutes after the 3590 is powered ON.
6. Power-ON is successful if the operator/CE panel display is not blank and does not have an error
message displayed.

Power Specifications
Table 3-5 shows the power specifications of the 3590.

AC power to the Model B11/E11/H11 is supplied from the rack power supply or the frame power supply.
The Model B1A/E1A/H1A receives its ac power from the ac box in the tape library. The 3590 has an
integrated ac to dc supply.

The 3590 accepts a variety of input voltages and frequencies. The 3590 automatically adjusts itself for
proper operation with any combination of these voltages and frequencies.
Table 3-5. Power Specifications
Item Old Level Power Supply New Level Power Supply
Nominal Input Voltage 100–127 V ac 200–240 V ac 100–127 V ac 200–240 V ac
Input Frequency 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz
Inrush Current 30 Amps 20 Amps
Typical Power Consumption 300 Watts 225 Watts

Power Cords
The ship group provides the necessary power cord for all electrical environments. All power cords are
suitable for 10 amperes, 50 or 60 Hz, with one- or two-phase power plus ground.

The most common application uses a 3 m, 220 V ac, 50/60Hz cable that plugs into the Power Control
Compartment (PCC).

| See IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning Guide, for details.

3-30 IBM 3590 MI

Automatic Cartridge Facility and Magazine
The Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF) magazine loads and retrieves tape cartridges to and from the tape
drive. Figure 3-16 on page 3-32 shows the magazine mounted in the ACF.

See Chapter 6, “Automatic Cartridge Facility” on page 6-1 for location and functional description of the
ACF.

Figure 3-15. Left View of the 3590 Magazine Cartridge Positions

Figure 3-15 shows the magazine from the left side. The magazine
1 provides the following functions:
v Holds 10 tape cartridges
v Has a carrying handle
v Can be loaded and removed from the ACF
v Has two cartridge positions
2
v Has an import position
5 or
7 where the cartridge is positioned for access by the transport
v Has an export position
6 where the cartridge is positioned by the transport for removal by the operator
v Has a locking bar
3 to hold the cartridge in the magazine
v Has a latch
4 to lock and release the locking bar
v Has 3 white fiducials that are recognized by a machine vision system when the drive is in an automated
tape library

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-31

Figure 3-16. Automatic Cartridge Facility and Magazine. (Shown with Cover Removed)

Transport Mechanism
See Figure 3-16.

The transport within the ACF moves the cartridges between the drive, the magazine, and the priority cell.

When a mount is requested, the cartridge is moved (imported) from the magazine into the ACF, where it is
elevated to the opening of the drive and mounted. The elevation of the cartridge from the lowest position
in the magazine to the drive takes approximately 2 seconds. When the tape is unloaded and demounted,
the elevator returns (exports) the cartridge to the designated (mode dependent) slot in the magazine.

3-32 IBM 3590 MI

Subsystem Initialization
Subsystem initialization includes initial microprogram load (IML), power sequencing, and subsystem
diagnostics.

Initial Microprogram Load

During an initial microprogram load (IML), a microcode image that permits the subsystem to become
functional is loaded into the RAM.

Anytime the unit is powered ON, the 3590 attempts to perform an IML from nonvolatile storage.

Power Sequencing
When power is applied, internal diagnostic tests check the voltages. After the voltages have been checked,
a general reset of the logic is performed. Finally, a basic function test of the logic is performed. Errors
detected during the power-ON sequence are displayed on the operator/CE panel. See “Power Switch and
Power Sequence” on page 3-30 for additional details about the power supply and sequencing.

Subsystem Diagnostics
Subsystem diagnostics are divided into two sections:
v Power-ON reset (POR)
v Self-Test

POR Diagnostic
Drive power-ON reset diagnostic tests are initiated when a drive is powered up or when the “Device
Reset” switch on the operator panel is activated. Any write data in the drive (buffers, compactor, and so
on) that has not yet been transferred to the media is lost. Drive power-ON reset does not directly affect the
initiator other than the device is offline to the initiator during the reset. The device begins executing
microcode from its own nonvolatile storage providing a comprehensive test of the unit logic.

Errors detected during execution of POR are posted to a table in control store and depending on the
severity of the error, errors may also be displayed in the operator/CE panel and can be cross-referenced
to a FID in Table 1-2 on page 1-9. The table provides the FIDs, the FRU name, the TAC code, and the MI
page for repairing the failure.

This set of diagnostics verify that the machine performs as intended. It may be invoked at any time either
to verify a fix or to exercise the subsystem. See Verify Fix in “CE Verify Fix Menu” on page 5-39.

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-33

 3590 Drive Model and Feature Levels
Four different levels of 3590 drives are available:
v Base Model B11/B1A 3590 Drives
v Ultra Model B11/B1A 3590 Drives
v Model E11/E1A 3590 Drives
v Model H11/H1A 3590 Drives

These drive levels have important differences which affect service, installation, and operations. The
following section outlines these important differences. All three of the above models can be equipped with
the Extended High Performance Cartridge tape feature.

| Identifying Feature Code Level

| Refer to Table 3-6 and Table 5-1 on page 5-6 to determine the 3590 drive Model and Feature level.
| Table 3-6. 3590 Drive Model and Feature Level Identification
| Parameter Model H11/H1A Model E11/E1A Ultra Model B11/B1A Base Model B11/B1A
| Rear cover label Model H label on rear Model E label on rear Ultra label on rear Serial number label
| cover near power cover near power cover near power only. 2X label on rear
| switch, below serial switch, below serial switch, below serial cover when Extended
| number label. 2X number label. 2X number label. 2X High Performance
| label on rear cover label on rear cover label on rear cover Cartridge feature is
| because Extended when Extended High when Extended High installed.
| High Performance Performance Performance
| Cartridge feature is Cartridge feature is Cartridge feature is
| installed. installed. installed.
| Op Panel display When SCSI is Displays the word Displays the word Blank or displays the
| installed it displays E11 or E1A on top Ultra, B11–U or word B11 or B1A on
| H11–X or H1A–X right of display when B1A–U on top right of top right of display
| when Extended High powered ON or display when powered when powered ON or
| Performance operating; E11–F or ON or operating: operating: B11–X or
| Cartridge feature is E1A–F when fibre B11UX or B1AUX B1A–X when
| installed; H11FX or channel feature is when Extended High Extended High
| H1AFX with both fibre installed; E11–X or Performance Performance
| channel and E1A–X when Cartridge feature is Cartridge feature is
| Extended High Extended High installed. installed.
| Performance Performance
| Cartridge features Cartridge feature is
| installed. installed; E11FX or
| E1AFX with both fibre
| channel and
| Extended High
| Performance
| Cartridge features
| installed.

3-34 IBM 3590 MI

| Table 3-6. 3590 Drive Model and Feature Level Identification (continued)
| Parameter Model H11/H1A Model E11/E1A Ultra Model B11/B1A Base Model B11/B1A
| Microcode level From the operator From the operator From the operator From the operator
| panel, select panel, select panel, select panel, select
| Services, then Services, then Services, then Services, then
| Microcode Level to Microcode Level to Microcode Level to Microcode Level to
| display the code level. display the code level. display the code level. display the code level.
| Model Hxx drives use Model Exx drives use Ultra drives with Base drives use
| D0IF_xxx, microcode. D0IC_xxx, D0ID_xxx, common card pack D0IA_xxx microcode.
| D0IE_xxx, or D0IF use D0ID_xxx,
| microcode. D0IE_xxx, or D0IF.
| Ultra Drives with Ultra
| card pack (P/N
| 35L0818) use
| D0IB_xxx.
| Inquiry Data page ‘00’ Bytes 32-35 show the Bytes 32-35 show the Bytes 32-35 show the Bytes 32-35 show the
| microcode revision microcode revision microcode revision microcode revision
| level. Model Hxx level. Model Exx level. Ultra drives will level. Base drives will
| drives will show Fxxx. drives will show Cxxx, show Bxxx with Ultra show Axxx. Example:
| Example: F640 Dxxx, Exxx, or Fxxx. card pack (P/N A640
| Example: C640 35L0818) or Dxxx,
| Exxx, or Fxxx with
| common card pack.
| Example: B640
| Inquiry Data page ‘03’ Bytes 8-11 show the Bytes 8-11 show the Bytes 8-11 show the Bytes 8-11 show the
| Load ID, eight hex Load ID, eight hex Load ID, eight hex Load ID, eight hex
| digits that are unique digits that are unique digits that are unique digits that are unique
| for each EC level. For for each EC level. For for each EC level. For for each EC level. For
| Model Hxx, Load ID = Model Exx, Load ID = Ultra 3590, Load ID = Base 3590, Load ID =
| A0B00E26. A0B00E26. A0B00E25 with Ultra A0B00E22.
| card pack or
| A0B00E26 with
| common card pack.
| Note
| Note: The ’X’ in designations like ’H1A–X’ indicates SCSI, and the FX in designations like ’H1A–FX’ indicates Fibre.

Drive Model and Level Differences

The four different level drives are all designed to operate in a compatible manner. However, there are
some important differences which require changes in the service and maintenance procedures. Some of
these differences also require the application of system prerequisites in some installations. This section
describes the key differences between the drive levels.

Hardware Differences
Each of the four different level drives all has unique card-pack, electronic requirements. There are
differences in the logic cards inside the packs, but the outside metal cases are all very similar. The only
way to determine the difference is by the part number label on top of the metal case. See the Parts
Catalog, “Assembly 3: Deck Enclosure” on page 11-10, for the correct part number information. Be sure to
order the correct replacement card-pack when ordering a spare part.

| The Model H11/H1A Read/Write Head Guide Assembly (HGA) is different from the Model E11/E1A and
| B11/B1A. The Model H11/H1A HGA is designed to write 384-track tape format. The Model E11/E1A
| Read/Write Head Guide Assembly (HGA) is different from the Model H11/H1A and B11/B1A. The Model
| E11/E1A HGA is designed to write 256-track tape format. The Models B11/B1A Read/Write Head Guide
| Assembly (HGA) is different from the Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A. The Model B11/B1A HGAs are
| designed to write 128 tracks. The only visual difference between the three HGA assemblies is the serial

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-35

| number on the bar-code label on top of the R/W head. The Model E11/E1A serial numbers all begin with a
| T,” the Model B11/B1A serial numbers all begin with a B, and the Model H11 and H1A serial numbers all
| begin with an M. Be sure to order the correct replacement HGA when ordering a spare part.

Note: The HGA will have a ’2X’ label on the ’D’ Bearings if the Extended High Performance Cartridge is
installed. The 2X HGAs are downward compatible and will work on drives without the Extended
High Performance Cartridge feature.

The Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A Power Supply is different from the Model B11/B1A. The Model E11/E1A
and H11/H1A (New Level) power supply has a separate, removable cable and only one cooling fan. The
Model B11/B1A (Old Level) power supplies have a built-in, non-removable cable and two cooling fans. Be
sure to order the correct replacement power supply when ordering a spare part.

SCSI Adapter/Port Compatibility

| Base 3590 drives have two Fast/Wide Differential SCSI ports with a maximum data rate of 20MB/s. All
| Model Ultra B11/B1A, E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives have two Ultra/Wide FAST-20 differential SCSI ports
| with a maximum data rate of 40MB/s.

The faster 40MB/s Ultra SCSI data-rate is only achievable if the customer Host Adapter also supports the
Ultra SCSI data-rates (such as the FC 6207 pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System and Linux system adapter). If
the host adapter does not support the Ultra data-rate, the 3590 drive will operate at the slower speed
determined by the Host Adapter.

| Ultra Model B11/B1A, Model E11/E1A and Model H11/H1A drives will operate properly with the existing
| adapters that are used to operate Base 3590 drives, as long as all of the required prerequisites are met.
| The Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives support attachment to SCSI-3 adapters also, or fibre channel
| adapters (with FC 9510 or 3510).

SCSI Cabling and Terminator Compatibility

The Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives are fully compatible with all IBM part number SCSI cabling and
terminators that are used with the base 3590 drives. Non-IBM supplied cabling used in customer
installations should be reviewed by the customer for Ultra SCSI compatibility.

Fibre Channel Cabling

The fibre channel attachment feature (FC 9510 or FC 3510) is available only on the 3590 Model E11/E1A
and H11/H1A drives. This feature requires a fibre cable for attachment to the host or the fibre supported
control unit. The attaching fibre cable must be 50.0/125 micrometers for distances up to 500 m (1640 ft).
The connection is a duplex SC connector type.

Functional and R/W Compatibility

The Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives support the identical SCSI command and functions that the base
3590 drives support.

| The various levels of 3590 drives are not fully R/W compatible. Table 3-7 depicts the capabilities:
| Table 3-7. Model Read/Write or Read-Only Capabilities. These models can read/write or read-only cartridges that
| were created with these formats.
| Track format
| 128-Track 256-Track 384-Track
| Base 3590 Read/Write
| Ultra Model B1A/B11 Read/Write
| E1A/E11 Read Read/Write
| H1A/H11 Read Read Read/Write

3-36 IBM 3590 MI

 Drive Microcode Compatibility
Each of the 3590 drive models have a unique microcode requirement as shown in Table 3-8. When a
microcode update to the drive is required, it is important to determine the level of the drive and select the
proper microcode image. The drives will only accept valid microcode images for the specific drive model
and installed card pack type.
| Table 3-8. Microcode Level Diagram
| Microcode Level
| Drive Model
| D0IA_xxx D0IB_xxx D0IC_xxx D0ID_xxx D0IE_xxx D0IF_xxx
| Base Model B11/B1A Yes No No No No No
| Model B11/B1A with Ultra
| No Yes No No No No
| card pack (P/N 35L0818)
| Model B11/B1A with
| No No No Yes Yes Yes
| common card pack
| Model E11/E1A with SCSI No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
| Model E11/E1A with fibre
| No No No No Yes Yes
| channel
| Model H11/H1A with SCSI No No No No No Yes
| Model H11/H1A with fibre
| No No No No No Yes
| channel
|

System Prerequisites for Proper Operation of Ultra Drives

Ultra level drives require some prerequisite system microcode updates to install and operate properly in
some environments. These requirements are summarized, as follows:
v iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Attachment:
V4R1, V4R2, and V4R3 systems with adapters FC 2729 or FC 6534 require a PTF for proper operation
with Ultra drives. Please refer to Informational APAR ii11472 for more information.
This PTF may be loaded from the CUM tape.
Also, if the Ultra drive is used as an alternate load device (boot manager), a new SLIC CD is required.
See Informational APAR ii11472 for more information.
v 3494 B16 Virtual Tape Server:
3494 B16 system code must be at system level 2.11.20.12 (PGA4) or greater for proper operation of
Ultra. Use the following procedure to determine the system microcode level of the B16 system:
| 1. From the Service menu, select 3494 VTS Maintenance.
2. Select Microcode Maintenance.
3. Select Display Active Code Level and Status.
When the command completes, the system will display a message that is similar to the following:
| IBM TOTALSTORAGE 3494 VIRTUALTAPE SERVER S/N 13-0011876...
| Level 2.11.20.12 (cadd 4.9.0.0, Atape 4.2.8.0).

If the displayed level is not 2.11.20.12 or greater (as above), a subsystem microcode update will be
required using the 3494 B16 subsystem microcode CD. (This CD may be provided with the Ultra
drive.) Refer to IBM 3494 Model B16 Virtual Tape Server Maintenance Information PROC section for
procedures to copy and activate the new B16 microcode. If update is necessary, inform the
customer that additional install time will be required and subsystem availability will be affected. Plan
the install in conjunction with customer requirements.

Attention: Never down-level the currently activated B16 system microcode level if it is greater than
the level supplied on the CD.
v 3494 B18 Virtual Tape Server:

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-37

 3494 B18 system microcode must be at system level 2.13.7.00 or greater for proper operation of Ultra.
Use the following procedure to determine the system microcode level of the B18 system:
| 1. From the Service menu, select ® 3494 VTS Maintenance
2. Select Microcode Maintenance.
3. Select Display Active Code Level and Status.
When the command completes, the system will display a message that is similar to the following:
| IBM TOTALSTORAGE 3494 VIRTUAL TAPE SERVER S/N 13-1007780:
| Level 2.13.7.4 (cadd 4.9.0.0, Atape 4.2.9.0).

If the displayed level is not 2.13.7.00 or greater (as above), a subsystem microcode update will be
required using the 3494 B18 subsystem microcode CD. (This CD may be provided with the Ultra
drive.) Refer to IBM 3494 Model B18 Virtual Tape Server Maintenance Information PROC section for
procedures to copy and activate the new B18 microcode. If update is necessary, inform the
customer that additional install time will be required and subsystem availability will be affected. Plan
the install in conjunction with customer requirements.

Attention: Never down-level the currently activated B18 system microcode level if it is greater
than the level supplied on the CD.
v A60/A50/A00 Controllers:
A60/A50/A00 system microcode must be at system level 1.9.20.00 or greater for proper operation of the
3590 drive. Refer to IBM 3590 Subsystem AXX Controller Models Maintenance Information PROC
Section for procedures to determine the current system microcode level. If update is necessary, use the
A60/A50/A00 microcode diskettes. (These diskettes may be provided with the Ultra drive.)
Attention: Never down-level the currently activated A60/A50/A00 system microcode level if it is greater
than the level supplied on the floppy disks.
v SUN (Solaris) system Attachment:
For SUN attach, an external terminator MUST be used somewhere on the bus. In some multi-host
systems this may require the removal of internal terminators from one of the host adapters to allow the
addition of an external terminator. If required, inform the customer that this change must be made. DO
NOT perform this change on non-IBM equipment without customer approval.

3-38 IBM 3590 MI

Field Microcode Support (FMR)
The 3590 subsystem can accept microcode updates by either of two methods:
v Download from the host
v Microcode (FMR) cartridge

Download Microcode from Host

The 3590 subsystems allow the initiator to provide microcode to the device across the SCSI/fibre channel
bus. This process could be required because of new microcode or engineering debug activities.

Note: When a microcode update to the drive is required, it is important to determine the level of the drive
and to select the proper microcode image.

Refer to Table 3-8 on page 3-37 for microcode requirements for each of the 3590 Models.

The microcode download sequence follows:

1. The initiator should reserve the device before proceeding with the microcode download. Any
interference during the download causes a check condition with a resulting discard of all the
microcode downloaded to that point.
2. The device must be synchronized by either a Rewind or Unload command before beginning the
download sequence.
3. Disconnect privilege should be allowed, as the final processing of the microcode data takes
approximately 30 seconds.
4. The microcode is a single image. The initiator can download the microcode with a single Write Buffer
command or with multiple Write Buffer commands to break the image up into convenient packets.
5. When multiple Write Buffer commands are used, the initiator must divide the microcode into packets
and send each packet with Write Buffer commands. The packets may be sent in any order, but all
packets must be sent. All Write Buffer commands must have the same buffer ID and mode.
6. No gaps or overlaps of the data are allowed in the buffer. If a gap or an overlap exists, when the host
indicates that all data has been downloaded, the device returns a check condition. Also, if the
parameter list is longer than 1 MB, the 3590 returns a check condition.
7. When the device receives the last Write Buffer command with the last of the code image data, the
device begins validation of the microcode image, such as checking for correct length and the correct
CRC. If this check of the microcode image reveals any problems, the device returns a check
condition. If no problems exist in the image, the device begins loading the microcode into nonvolatile
storage. This process takes up to 30 seconds.
8. The device responds to resets or selections during the loading of nonvolatile storage, but these
events do not disrupt nonvolatile storage alteration. Because of the duration of the loading process, a
command time-out may occur.
9. The completion of the check and save process is indicated by good status returned to the initiator for
that last Write Buffer command. At this point the device is automatically reset and the new microcode
is activated. The device creates a pending unit attention condition to the initiators that indicates the
microcode has been changed.
10. If a reset has occurred while loading nonvolatile storage, the device will have a pending unit attention.
This process will complete the transfer to nonvolatile storage and perform final checking. If a problem
is found, a deferred error appropriate to the problem will be presented. If the error is such that the
transferred microcode is bad, any reset can cause an unrecoverable error requiring a service call.
The initiator should retry the entire download process immediately.
11. If the reset occurred after the process was completed but before status was returned to the initiator,
the device will have activated the new microcode and will have a pending unit attention with
associated sense indicating that microcode has been changed.

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-39

 Field Microcode Support Using FMR Cartridge
There are three different levels of FMR cartridge available for 3590 drives:
v 128-track format FMR cartridge has microcode levels for the Base and Ultra Model B11/B1A drives.
v 256-track format FMR cartridge has microcode for the Model E11/E1A drives.
| v 384-track format FMR cartridge has microcode for Model H11/H1A drives.

ATTENTION
The label on the FMR cartridge should clearly state which drive models the cartridge will support.

If an FMR tape with the wrong track format is loaded, a Tape write prot’d message will be
displayed.

A 128-track format FMR cartridges that is ordered as a FRU, contains multiple microcode images for
support of different levels of the 3590 Model B11/B1A drives, as follows:
v D0IA_xxx = Base 3590 Model B11/B1A drives
v D0IB_xxx = Ultra 3590 Model B11/B1A drives
v D0IF_xxx = Ultra 3590 Model B11/B1A drives with Common Card Pack

The 256-track format FMR cartridges ordered as a FRU now contain microcode images for support of the
3590 Model E11/E1A drives.
| v D0IE_xxx or D0IF_xxx = For all 3590 Model E11/E1A drives.

| The 384-track format FMR cartridges ordered as a FRU now contain microcode images for support of the
| 3590 Model H11/H1A drives.
| v D0IF_xxx = For all 3590 Model H11/H1A drives.

| Here are some sources for additional information:

| v Microcode compatibility, see Table 3-8 on page 3-37
| v Microcode load process, see “Updating Microcode from FMR Cartridge” on page 9-58
| v 3590 feature levels, see “3590 Drive Model and Feature Levels” on page 3-34

3-40 IBM 3590 MI

Special Tools
Special tools are shipped, purchased, or ordered; they are used to repair or maintain the device.

Cleaning Cartridge
The 3590 cleaning cartridge P/N 05H4435 (or P/N 05H7540 for tape libraries) is for use only in a 3590.
Figure 3-17 shows a cleaning cartridge, which is used to clean the head guide assembly.

To use the cartridge, load it in a drive and the cleaning procedure occurs automatically. The cartridge
unloads when the cleaning procedure is done. This tool is part of the ship group.

The cleaning cartridge should be replaced after 100 uses. It should be undamaged and clean when it is
inserted into a tape drive. You can keep track of the number of uses by marking the label provided with
each cartridge.

Attention: Do not use a china-marking (grease) pencil on the label.

The 3590 cleaning cartridge is identified by its physical characteristics. The black case has two gray
plastic inserts
1 and identifier notches
2 that are unique to the 3590 cleaning cartridge. The leader
block
3 is also gray. The 3590 cleaning cartridge, like the 3590 data cartridge, has a finger notch
4
that is used to grasp the cartridge.

Figure 3-17. Cleaning Cartridge - Bottom View

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-41

Leader Block Replacement Kit
The leader block replacement kits are a customer-purchased item. See Table 3-9 on page 3-47 for part
numbers and descriptions. Replacing the leader block is the customer’s responsibility.

The leader block replacement kit, P/N 05H4868, contains the necessary tools to reattach the leader block
to the tape. It does not include the leader blocks. P/N 05H3869 provides 10 leader blocks (blue) for the
3590 High Performance Tape. P/N 34L2666 provides 10 leader blocks (Green) for the 3590 Extended High
Performance Cartridge tape.

Note: Replacing the leader block is used only as a temporary measure to retrieve the data from the tape;
it is not a permanent fix.

ESD Kit
The ESD kit (P/N is available in the General CE Tools Reference Summary, 5131-0075) is used to prevent
damage when you work with electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive parts. See “Working with Electrostatic
Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23 for information on using the ESD grounding wrist strap and
mat. This tool (Figure 3-18) is not shipped with the subsystem and must be ordered.

Figure 3-18. ESD Grounding Strap

3-42 IBM 3590 MI

Pressure/Vacuum Gauge Kit
The kit P/N 6857823 (Figure 3-19) contains hoses, fittings and a pressure/vacuum gauge to measure the
pneumatic system pressure or vacuum. This kit is not shipped with the subsystem and must be
ordered separately.

See “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4 for instructions on how to use the
pressure/vacuum gauge P/N 6850747.

Adapter hose
1, P/N 05H9895 is part of the ship group. This adapter is used to adapt the existing
pressure/vacuum gages currently in the field.

Figure 3-19. Pressure/Vacuum Gauge

SCSI Wrap Tool

The Customer Engineer uses the SCSI wrap tool P/N 62G1324 (black) or P/N 05H9163 (gray) during
installation and diagnostic check out of the 3590. These tools (Figure 3-20) are specific for this
application and cannot be swapped with other wrap tools.

Figure 3-20. SCSI Wrap Tool

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-43

 Library Attachment Wrap Tool
| The library attachment wrap tool P/N 39F3884, which is one of the 3494 special tools, is used to verify the
| library attachment facility in the Model B1A, E1A, and H1A. This tool (Figure 3-21) is a unique part and
| cannot be swapped with other wrap tools.
|

Figure 3-21. Library Attachment Wrap Tool

| Library Attachment Wrap Tool Interposer

The library attachment wrap tool interposer P/N 05H3895, which is in the 3494 ship group, connects to the
library manager connector on the back of the drive. The interposer (Figure 3-22) is a 9-pin male–to–25-pin
female connector.

Figure 3-22. Library Attachment Wrap Tool Interposer

3-44 IBM 3590 MI

Gap Set Tool
The gap set tool P/N 05H4671, which is in the ship group, adjusts the gap in the hub of the machine reel
motor. This tool (see Figure 3-23) must be used when the upper flange on the machine reel motor is
removed.

Figure 3-23. Gap Set Tool

ACF Motor Adjustment Tool

The ACF motor adjustment tool P/N 05H4724, which is in the ship group, sets the gear mesh gap between
the motor gear and the intermediate gear. This tool (see Figure 3-24) is used when any of the ACF motors
are replaced or reinstalled.

Figure 3-24. ACF Motor Adjustment Tool

ACF Transport Position Adjustment Tool

The ACF transport position adjustment tool P/N 05H3388, which is in the ship group, measures the
distance between the priority cell floor and the top of the transport rails. This tool (see Figure 3-25) is used
to verify and adjust the alignment of the ACF transport position sensors.

Figure 3-25. ACF Transport Position Adjustment Tool

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-45

Tape Unit Cleaner
The IBM Tape Unit Cleaner (P/N 05H3929) is the only cleaning solution that is approve to clean the 3590
tape cartridge, magazine, and tape path (excluding the head guide assembly). See Figure 3-26.

Attention: Do NOT wet clean the head guide assembly. The cleaning process will damage the head
surfaces and actuator mechanism.

Figure 3-26. Tape Unit Cleaner

Potentiometer Adjusting Tool

The potentiometer adjusting tool P/N 1864853 (see Figure 3-27) is used to set the mode switch in the
Model E11/E1A and H11/H1A card pack.

Figure 3-27. Potentiometer Adjusting Tool

3-46 IBM 3590 MI

 Tape Supplies
The customer should possess items listed in Table 3-9 to maintain cartridges.
Table 3-9. Cartridge Maintenance
Part Number Description
Leader Block Replacement Kit. This kit contains the necessary tools to reattach the
05H4868
leader block to the tape. It does not include leaderblocks.
05H3869 Quantity of 10 Leader Blocks for the 3590 High Performance Tape
34L2666 Quantity of 10 Leader Blocks for the 3590 Extended High Performance Cartridge
461621 Lint-free, nylon gloves
2108930 Lint-free cloth
05H3929 IBM Tape Unit Cleaner

Hook and Loop Fastener

The hook and loop fastener P/N 19P0362 is used during installation of fibre cables on the 3590. This part
is necessary to minimize damage to the fibre cables.

Figure 3-28. Hook and Loop Fastener

| Fibre Wrap Tool

| There are several fibre wrap tools available for 3590 drives. These tools are used only by the Customer
| Engineer during fibre cable installation and diagnostic checkout. They can be attached at the back of the
| drive or at the end of the cable.
| Table 3-10. Fibre Wrap Tools and Part Numbers
| Fibre Cable Connector Type Part Number
| SC fibre wrap tool 34L2629 or 08L9459
| LC fibre wrap tool 11P3847
|

Figure 3-29. SC Fibre Wrap Tool

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-47

|
|

|
| Figure 3-30. LC Fibre Wrap Tool

| Fibre Wrap Duplex Adapters

| There are several fibre wrap duplex adapters available for 3590 drives. These adapters are used only by
| the Customer Engineer to connect the cable with the wrap tool. They are attached at the end of the cable
| during cable installation and diagnostic checkout.

| Use one of the following fibre wrap tools with a fibre wrap duplex adapter during fibre cable diagnostic
| checkout.
| Table 3-11. Fibre Wrap Tools and Adapters
| Use this fibre wrap tool P/N... ...with this fibre wrap duplex adapter ...on this cable type.
| P/N...
| 34L2629 or 08L9459 19P0913 SC/SC
| 11P3847 05N6766 LC/SC
|

Figure 3-31. SC/SC Fibre Wrap Duplex Adapter

|
| Figure 3-32. LC/SC Fibre Wrap Duplex Adapter

Inline SCSI Terminator for Open System Attachment

The Inline Terminator P/N 19P0378 (AMP 869682-1) is used for a terminator for all specified operations of
the 3590. This terminator (Figure 3-33 on page 3-49) is unique and cannot be used with other
terminators. This terminator is FC 9798 for HP9000 V-Class system attachment.

3-48 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 3-33. Inline SCSI Terminator for Open System Attachment

Chapter 3. Introduction 3-49

3-50 IBM 3590 MI
 Chapter 4. Messages
Contents
Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and MIMs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Statistical Analysis and Reporting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Obtaining 3590 Drive Error Information at Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
3590 Drive Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Message Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
MIM Exception Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
SIM Exception Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
SIM Service Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
SIM/MIM Severity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Sense Key – ASC and ASCQ Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Sense Key 0 (No Sense) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Sense Key 1 (Recovered Error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Sense Key 2 (Not Ready). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Sense Key 3 (Medium Error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Sense Key 4 (Hardware Error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Sense Key 5 (Illegal Request) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Sense Key 6 (Unit Attention) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Sense Key 7 (Data Protect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Sense Key 8 (Blank Check) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Sense Key B (Aborted Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Sense Key D (Volume Overflow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
| Error Log Analysis – pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Running Tapeutil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Using SMIT/ERRPT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Error Log Analysis – iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
| iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System with CICS Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System with RISC Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
| Error Log Analysis – LINUX System — —. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Obtaining Error Information from Sun (Solaris) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Obtaining Error Information from HP/UX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Obtaining Error Information from Windows NT or Windows 2000 System . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Running NTUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
NTUTIL Symbolic Error and Error Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 4-1

 Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and MIMs)
The SIM and MIM functions are a primary factor in the 3590 maintenance plan for improved product
availability.
v A SIM alerts the customer when an abnormal 3590 condition requires attention. Information in the SIM
identifies the affected drive and the failing component. Information highlights the severity of the fault
condition and the expected operational impact of the pending service action.
| A SIM contains the machine type, machine serial number, and FID which allows service personnel to
| arrive with the correct replacement parts.
Physical location identifiers in the SIM direct the CE to the failing unit. The SIM FID code specifies the
parts to be replaced and directs the CE to appropriate service procedures. This allows the machine fault
to be repaired without first looking in log records and without having to try to recreate the failure by
using diagnostic procedures.

Use Table 4-1 on page 4-3 with Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 to review a sample SIM.

4-2 IBM 3590 MI

| Table 4-1. SIM Format Example Data
| Locator Number Field Name Field Selections
|
+1 SIM/MIM Present
| 00 No SIM or MIM present
| 01 SIM present
| 02 MIM present
|
2 Microcode and Link Level —
|
3 Message Code See “Message Codes” on page 4-8.
|
4 Exception Message “MIM Exception Messages” on page 4-9
|
5 Service Message “SIM Exception Messages” on page 4-9
|
6 Severity “SIM/MIM Severity” on page 4-10
|
7 FRU Identifier (FID) —
|
8 First FSC —
|
9 Last FSC —
|
10 Sequence Number —
|
11 Device Model Number
| 423141 B1A (No ACF)
| 423131 B11 (ACF)
| Note:
7,
8, and
9 are presented in hexadecimal format. Use Table 4-19 on page 4-18 to convert this field to
| ASCII values.
|

Figure 4-1. SIM Format

v A MIM identifies problems with the media (tape), and provides the volume number of the bad cartridge.
This MIM number allows the customer to identify faulty media that may prevent unnecessary service
calls.
v
If the bad cartridge cannot be identified at the time of failure, the VOLSER field of the MIM will be blank
and the VOLSER Valid Flag will be 00; VOLSER not Valid.

Chapter 4. Messages 4-3

The detailed information within SIMs and MIMs is for use by the dispatcher or the CE in the branch office.
This individual is responsible for decoding the information and scheduling for service based on data
content within the SIM or MIM.

Depending on the software they possess, the customer can select the severities that they wish to see. For
example, one customer may only want to see the Acute SIM/MIM and another customer may want to see
all the SIMs and MIMs that are sent to the host. There are four severity codes:
v Severity 0 (FID4) code means that the device needs service, needs cleaning or has been cleaned.
v Severity 1 (FID3) code means that the problem is moderate.
v Severity 2 (FID2) code means that the problem is serious.
v Severity 3 (FID1) code means that the problem is acute.

A service message within the SIM also informs the customer what the service impact will be. For example,
impact unknown disables access to the drive or requires the interface to be disconnected. A MIM specifies
what is wrong with the cartridge that is indicated.

There are three MIM severity codes:

v Severity 1 indicates moderate high temporary read/write errors were detected.
v Severity 2 indicates serious permanent read/write errors were detected.
v Severity 3 indicates acute block 0, cartridge type, or vol label errors were detected.

Use Table 4-2 on page 4-5 with Figure 4-2 on page 4-5 to review a sample MIM.

4-4 IBM 3590 MI

| Table 4-2. MIM Format Example Data
| Locator Number Field Name Field Selections or Data
|
1 SIM/MIM Present
| 00 No SIM or MIM present
| 01 SIM present
| 02 MIM present
|
2 Microcode and Link Level —
|
3 Message Code “Message Codes” on page 4-8.
|
4 Exception Message “MIM Exception Messages” on page 4-9
|
5 Service Message “SIM Exception Messages” on page 4-9
|
6 Severity “SIM/MIM Severity” on page 4-10
|
7 First FSC —
|
8 VOLSER Volume serial number
|
9 VOLSER Valid Flag
| 00 VOLSER not valid
| 01 VOLSER valid
|
10 Sequence Number —
|
11 Device Model Number
| 433141 B1A (No ACF)
| 433131 B11 (ACF)
| Note:
7 is presented in hexadecimal format. Use Table 4-19 on page 4-18 to convert the information in this field to
| ASCII values.
|

Figure 4-2. MIM Format

Chapter 4. Messages 4-5

 Statistical Analysis and Reporting System
The statistical analysis and reporting system (SARS) assists in determining whether read and write errors
are caused by the media (tape) or the hardware in the drive, and provides SIMs and MIMs. To analyze
errors, the 3590 microcode contains a volume SARS (VSARS) algorithm and a hardware SARS (HSARS)
algorithm.

Note: For more information on SARS reporting, visit these websites to obtain online documentation.

For general use:

http://www.storage.ibm.com/hardsoft/tape/3590/index.html

For internal use:

http://snjlnt02.sanjose.ibm.com/rmss/home.nsf/3590

The algorithms are executed in the 3590 just before a tape is unloaded. The HSARS data is stored in
nonvolatile storage in the drive and the VSARS data is stored in the volume control region (VCR) on the
tape.

To distinguish error patterns and trends, the SARS volume algorithms require the tape to be mounted on
different drives while the SARS hardware algorithms require different volumes to be mounted on one drive.
As degraded hardware passes through predefined error thresholds, cleaning and service repair messages
and/or error codes are presented. Similarly, if tape volumes continue to perform poorly on different drives,
rewrite or discard-media messages are presented.

The current default value for SARS options is ON for microcode levels D0IA and later. Previous levels of
microcode had the default value as OFF. SARS options must be enabled to take full advantage of media
error isolation via MIMs and some SIMs. You can enable or disable SARS options from “CE Drive Options
Menu” on page 5-52.

Obtaining 3590 Drive Error Information at Host

IBM device drivers for the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System and iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System log service
and media information messages (SIMs and MIMs) when an error occurs on the 3590 drive.

| Note: Linux, Sun, HP-UX and Windows NT or Windows 2000 systems do not log SIM/MIM data.

The SIM includes the following error information:

1. To which drive the SIM refers
2. The FRU identifier (FID) code and FID severity for drive errors. The FID is used to enter the START
section where it specifies the failing FRU group.
3. The message code presented to the customer. See “Message Codes” on page 4-8.
4. The first FSC, second FSC or flag bytes, model and microcode link level are not required to enter the
START section. This support data may be requested by your next level of support.

The MIM includes the following error information:

v The message code presented to the customer. See “Message Codes” on page 4-8.
v The VOLSER Number of the cartridge which is having a problem, if it can be determined from the data
available at the time of failure.
v The first FSC and model and link level are not required to enter the START section. This support data
may be requested by your next level of support.
This information is used to service the 3590 drive and also can be obtained directly from the drive display.
5-1 describes the 3590 display.

4-6 IBM 3590 MI

3590 Drive Display Panel
The following screen is an example of an error log display:

Figure 4-3. Error Log Example

For more information, see “CE Error Log Menu” on page 5-61.

The following text explains how to obtain 3590 error information from the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System,
iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System, and Sun platforms. If the utilities described below are not used on your
system, please refer to the documentation that came with your system drivers.

See “Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and MIMs)” on page 4-2 for additional information on
SIMs and MIMs.

Chapter 4. Messages 4-7

Message Codes
The message codes are intended to explain to the customer what to do under certain conditions. Below is
a table with the codes in hex and in ASCII, and a brief description of what action needs to be taken when
a message code is displayed.
Table 4-3. Message Code Descriptions
Message Message Description: This area tells the customer what to do.
Code: Hex Code:
ASCII
3030 00 No Message: This is the default message indicating that the device does not have an error
to report.
3430 40 Operator Intervention Required: An operator action is required at the device. For
example, a magazine is full and needs to be replaced or emptied. Check the device error
log for possible repair action. See “3590 Drive Display Panel” on page 4-7 and also the
PANEL section describes the 3590 display.
3431 41 Device Degraded: The device is performing in a degraded state, but can be used. A FID is
displayed with the error message. Check the device error log for possible repair action.
See “3590 Drive Display Panel” on page 4-7 and also the PANEL section describes the
3590 display.
3432 42 Device Hardware Failure: The device can not be used. A FID is displayed with the error
message. Check the device error log for possible repair action. See “3590 Drive Display
Panel” on page 4-7 and also the PANEL section describes the 3590 display.
3433 43 Service Circuits Failed, Operations not Affected: This error does not affect the
performance of the device. The failure only affects circuits used for non-operational testing.
A FID is displayed with the error message. Check the device error log for possible repair
action. See “3590 Drive Display Panel” on page 4-7 and also the PANEL section describes
the 3590 display.
3535 55 Clean Device: Load a cleaning cartridge in the device. The drive returns the cleaning
cartridge following the cleaning procedure. If excessive Clean messages are posted, go to
“Maintenance Starting Point” on page 1-2.
3537 57 Device has been cleaned: The drive has been cleaned by a cleaning cartridge.
3630 60 Bad Media, Read Only Permitted: MIM message. Cartridge is logically write protected.
Read only is allowed. A customer who wishes to write to this tape should copy data to
another volume. Remove this volume from the library.
3631 61 Rewrite Data if Possible: MIM message. Data on the tape cartridge is degraded. Attempt
to copy data to a new volume.
3632 62 Read Data if Possible: MIM message. The tape directory is degraded. Attempt to read
tape to rebuild the tape directory.
3634 64 Bad Media, Cannot Read or Write: MIM message. Remove media from the tape library.
Data is likely lost without special tools to recover it.
3732 72 Replace Cleaner Cartridge: MIM message. Have the customer order a new cleaner
cartridge.

4-8 IBM 3590 MI

 MIM Exception Messages
| The following provides descriptions of Exception Messages for your information. Action information can be
| obtained by use of Message Code contained in reported Media Information Messages (MIMs).
Table 4-4. Exception Message Descriptions
Exception Exception Description
Message Message
Hex ASCII
32 2 Data Degraded:
34 4 Medium Degraded:
36 6 Block 0 Error:
37 7 Medium Exception:

SIM Exception Messages

The following provides descriptions of SIM Exception Messages for your information. Action information
can be obtained by use of Message Code and FID contained in reported SIM.
Table 4-5. SIM Exception Message Descriptions
Exception Exception Description
Message Message
Hex ASCII
30 0 Reserved
31 1 Affect of failure unknown
32 2 Dev. Exception - No performance impact
33 3 Dev. Exception on interface
34 4 Dev. Exception on ACF
35 5 Dev. Exception on Operator Panel
36 6 Dev. Exception on Tape path
37 7 Dev. Exception in Drive
38 8 Dev. Preventive Maintenance Required
39 9 Dev. Preventive Maintenance Completed
41-46 A-F Reserved

SIM Service Messages

The following provides descriptions of Service Information Messages (SIMs) for your information. Action
information can be obtained by use of Message Code and FID contained in reported SIM.
Table 4-6. SIM Service Message Descriptions
Service Service Description
Message Message
Hex ASCII
30 0 Reserved
31 1 Repair impact is unknown
32-36 2-6 Reserved
37 7 Repair will disable access to Dev.

Chapter 4. Messages 4-9

 Table 4-6. SIM Service Message Descriptions (continued)
Service Service Description
Message Message
Hex ASCII
38 8 Repair will disable message display ids on Dev.
39 9 Dev. Cleaning Required
41 A Dev. Cleaning Complete
42 B Dev. Cleaning For Performance Reasons is Required
43-46 C-F Reserved

SIM/MIM Severity
Table 4-7. SIM/MIM Severity Descriptions
SIM/MIM SIM/MIM FID Severity FID Description
Severity Severity Algorithm Severity
HEX ASCII Displayed
on Op.
Panel
33 3 4–3 = 1 1 Acute: Device requires immediate attention. Device is
unusable.
32 2 4–2 = 2 2 Serious: Device is usable but is seriously degraded.
31 1 4–1 = 3 3 Moderate: Device is usable but is running degraded.
30 0 4–0 = 4 4 Service: Device needs scheduled maintenance but is
usable.

Sense Key – ASC and ASCQ Information

| The following tables list all possible combinations of Sense Keys, Additional Sense Codes (ASC), and
| Additional Sense Code Qualifiers (ASCQ) that are reported by the 3590. See IBM TotalStorage Enterprise
| Tapes System 3590 Hardware Reference Guide for additional information.

Sense Key 0 (No Sense)

Table 4-8. ASC and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 0 (No Sense)
ASC ASCQ Description Drive Automatic Cartridge
Facility
00 00 No Additional Sense Information – EOM X
00 00 No Additional Sense Information – ILI X
00 00 No Additional Sense Information – FM X
00 01 Filemark Detected X
00 04 Beginning-of-Partition or Medium Detected X

4-10 IBM 3590 MI

Sense Key 1 (Recovered Error)
Table 4-9. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 1 (Recovered Error)
ASC ASCQ Description Drive Automatic Cartridge
Facility
00 00 No Additional Sense Information X X
00 17 Drive Needs Cleaning X
0A 00 Error Log Overflow X
17 01 Recovered Data with Retries X
18 00 Recovered Data with Error Correction Applied X
37 00 Rounded Parameter X
5B 01 Threshold Condition Met X
5B 02 Log Counter at Maximum X

Sense Key 2 (Not Ready)

Table 4-10. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 2 (Not Ready)
ASC ASCQ Description Drive Automatic Cartridge
Facility
04 00 Logical Unit Not Ready, Cause Not Reportable X X
04 01 Logical Unit Is in Process of Becoming Ready X X
04 03 Logical Unit Not Ready, Manual Intervention Required X X
04 04 Logical Unit Not Ready, Format in Progress X
15 01 Mechanical Positioning Error, Manual Intervention Required X
30 03 Cleaning in Progress X
3A 00 Medium Not Present X
3B 12 Medium Magazine Removed X
53 00 Media Load or Eject Failed X

Sense Key 3 (Medium Error)

Table 4-11. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 3 (Medium Error)
ASC ASCQ Description Drive Automatic Cartridge
Facility
03 02 Excessive Write Errors X
09 00 Track Following Error X
0C 00 Write Error X
11 00 Unrecovered Read Error X
11 01 Read Retries Exhausted X
11 08 Incomplete Block Read X
14 00 Recorded Entity Not Found X
14 01 Record Not Found X
14 02 Filemark or Setmark Not Found X
14 03 End-of-Data Not Found X

Chapter 4. Messages 4-11

Table 4-11. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 3 (Medium Error) (continued)
ASC ASCQ Description Drive Automatic Cartridge
Facility
14 04 Block Sequence Error X
30 00 Incompatible Medium Installed X
30 01 Cannot Read Medium, Unknown Format X
30 02 Cannot Read Medium, Incompatible Format X
31 00 Medium Format Corrupted X
31 01 Format Command Failed X
33 00 Tape Length Error X
51 00 Erase Failure X
85 00 Write Protected Because of Tape or Drive Failure X
85 01 Write Protected Because of Tape Failure X
85 02 Write Protected Because of Drive Failure X

Sense Key 4 (Hardware Error)

Table 4-12. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 4 (Hardware Error)
ASC ASCQ Description Drive Automatic Cartridge
Facility
09 00 Track Following Error X
15 01 Mechanical Positioning Error X
3B 00 Sequential Positioning Error X
3B 08 Reposition Error X
40 00 Diagnostic Failure X
44 00 Internal Target Failure X X
4C 00 Logical Unit Failed Self-Configuration X
52 00 Cartridge Fault X
53 00 Media Load or Eject Failed X
53 01 Unload Tape Failure X

Sense Key 5 (Illegal Request)

Table 4-13. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 5 (Illegal Request)
ASC ASCQ Description Drive Automatic Cartridge
Facility
1A 00 Parameter List Length Error X X
20 00 Invalid Command Operation Code X X
21 01 Invalid Element Address X
24 00 Invalid Field in CDB X X
25 00 Logical Unit Not Supported X X
26 00 Invalid Field in Parameter List X X
26 01 Parameter Not Supported X

4-12 IBM 3590 MI

Table 4-13. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 5 (Illegal Request) (continued)
ASC ASCQ Description Drive Automatic Cartridge
Facility
26 02 Parameter Value Invalid X
26 03 Threshold Parameters Not Supported X
2C 00 Command Sequence Error X
39 00 Saving Parameters Not Supported X
3B 0D Medium Destination Element Full X
3B 0E Medium Source Element Empty X
3B 11 Medium Magazine Not Accessible X
3B 80 Medium Transport Element Full X
3D 00 Invalid Bits in Identify Message X X
53 02 Medium Removal Prevented X
5B 03 Log List Codes Exhausted X
80 00 CU Mode, Vendor-Unique X X
85 03 Write Protected Because of Current Tape Position X

Sense Key 6 (Unit Attention)

Table 4-14. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 6 (Unit Attention)
ASC ASCQ Description Drive Automatic Cartridge
Facility
00 02 End-of-Partition/Medium Detected, Early Warning X
28 00 Not Ready to Ready Transition, Medium May Have Changed X X
28 01 Import or Export Element Accessed X
28 80 Not Ready to Ready Transition, Medium Changer X
29 00 Power On, Reset, or Bus Device Reset Occurred X X
2A 01 Mode Parameters Changed X X
2A 02 Log Parameters Changed X
2F 00 Commands Cleared by Another Initiator X
30 00 Incompatible Medium Installed X
3B 12 Medium Magazine Removed X
3B 13 Medium Magazine Inserted X
3B 14 Medium Magazine Locked X
3B 15 Medium Magazine Unlocked X
3F 01 Microcode Has Been Changed X X
3F 02 Changed Operating Definition X X
3F 03 Inquiry Data Has Changed X X
5A 01 Operator Medium Removal Request X
82 83 Cleaning Completed, Cleaning Cartridge Ejected X

Chapter 4. Messages 4-13

Sense Key 7 (Data Protect)
Table 4-15. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 7 (Data Protect)
ASC ASCQ Description Drive Automatic Cartridge
Facility
27 00 Write Protected X

Sense Key 8 (Blank Check)

Table 4-16. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key 8 (Blank Check)
ASC ASCQ Description Drive Automatic Cartridge
Facility
00 05 End-of-Data Detected X
14 01 Record Not Found, Void Tape X

Sense Key B (Aborted Command)

Table 4-17. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key B (Aborted Command)
ASC ASCQ Description Drive Automatic Cartridge
Facility
14 00 Recorded Entity Not Found X
14 01 Record Not Found X
14 02 Filemark or Setmark Not Found X
1B 00 Synchronous Data Transfer Error X X
43 00 Message Error X X
44 00 Internal Target Failure X X
45 00 Select or Reselect Failure X X
47 00 SCSI Parity Error X X
48 00 Initiator Detected Error Message Received X X
49 00 Invalid Message Error X X
4A 00 Command Phase Error X X
4B 00 Data Phase Error X X
4E 00 Overlapped Commands Attempted X X

Sense Key D (Volume Overflow)

Table 4-18. ASC, and ASCQ Summary for Sense Key D (Volume Overflow)
ASC ASCQ Description Drive Automatic Cartridge
Facility
00 02 End-of-Partition/Medium Detected X

4-14 IBM 3590 MI

| Error Log Analysis – pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System
The AIX Tape and Medium Changer Device Driver for the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System provides logging
to the system error log for a variety of errors. You can view the error log in various formats by using one of
the following AIX commands:
v tapeutil command on page 4-15
v diag command on page 4-15
v smit command on page “Using SMIT/ERRPT Commands” on page 4-20
v errpt command on page 4-20
Use the Hex to ASCII conversion in Table 4-19 on page 4-18. Examples of the different error log formats
are shown following this text.

To use the tapeutil command:

Note: The tapeutil command gives you a detailed report by device only.
1. Type tapeutil at the AIX command line.
2. Select Tape Drive Service Aids (listed under General Commands) from the menu.
3. Select Error Log Analysis from the Service Aid menu.
4. Select the device from the Drive Selection menu, and press PF7 to commit. The error log will be
displayed.
5. You can scroll through the log by pressing the Enter key.

To use the diag command:

Notes:
1. You must have root authority to run the AIX diag command.
2. The diag command gives you a detailed report by device only.
a. Type diag at the AIX command line.
b. Select Service aids from the Diagnostic Function Selection menu.
c. Select IBM Tape Drive Service Aids from the Service Aid Selection menu.
d. Select Error Log Analysis from the Service Aid menu.
e. Select the device from the Selection menu, and press PF7 to commit. The error log will be
displayed.
f. You can scroll through the log by pressing the Enter key.

Analyze the sense key and ASC/ASCQ data to determine the type of sense information reported in the
error log. If a hardware failure is indicated, use the FID and go to START-1 for problem determination. For
errors that indicate SCSI adapter or SCSI bus errors, see Figure 4-7 on page 4-17, go to “SCSI Bus
Problem Determination” on page 9-108.

For errors indicating system problems, enter the appropriate maintenance package.

Chapter 4. Messages 4-15

Note: The following example is valid for microcode levels D0IA or later.

IBM Tape Device Error Log Analysis

NAME: rmt1 LOCATION: 00-02-01-20 DEVICE TYPE: 3590

DATE: 10/31/95 07:33:21 SEQUENCE #203274 ERROR ID: HARDWARE ERROR

SCSI CDB: 0A0100001400

SCSI STATUS BYTE: CHECK CONDITION SENSE KEY: 4 ASC/ASCQ: 4400

SCSI SENSE BYTES 0-17:
7100040000000040000000004400B3083106

SCSI EXTENDED SENSE BYTES:

4132030101000000724100000A50053343000E00000000334100000000000000
FFFFFF000000000000000000000000000000000000004438362020202000

Press ENTER for additional entries...

F3=Cancel F10=Exit Enter

--------HEX---------ASCII-------Description-----------------------------------------------------------------------
04 Sense key (Byte 2)
4400 ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/
additional sense code qualifier)
(Bytes 12 and 13)
(See “Sense Key – ASC and ASCQ Information” on page 4-10
for error sense information.)
B3 FID (FRU identification number, Byte 14)
3106 First FSC (fault symptom code, Bytes 16 and 17)
3341 Last FSC (fault symptom code, Bytes 41 and 42)
443836 D86 Microcode level (Bytes 72-78)
(not shown) VOLSER Number in ASCII or EBCDIC (Bytes 83-88)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Figure 4-4. AIX TAPEUTIL and DIAG Commands Error Log Example

IBM Tape Device Error Log Analysis

NAME: rmt1 LOCATION: 00-02-01-20 DEVICE TYPE: 3590

DATE: 10/31/95 07:33:21 SEQUENCE #203274 ERROR ID: 3590 SIM/MIM PAGE

SIM/MIM DATA:
310000440000614001303030303030303144383634313030373732303030303045383338
3039333830393830303049424D31332D3030303030303030303331353033353930423131

Press ENTER for additional entries...

F3=Cancel F10=Exit Enter

Figure 4-5. AIX TAPEUTIL and DIAG Commands SIM Error Log Example

4-16 IBM 3590 MI

 IBM Tape Device Error Log Analysis

NAME: rmt1 LOCATION: 00-02-01-20 DEVICE TYPE: 3590

DATE: 10/31/95 07:33:21 SEQUENCE #203274 ERROR ID: 3590 SIM/MIM PAGE

SIM/MIM DATA:
310000440000614002303030303030303235384136313535363031303030334132415051
5239353001303830303049424D31322D3030303030303054513331353033353930423141

Press ENTER for additional entries...

F3=Cancel F10=Exit Enter

Figure 4-6. AIX TAPEUTIL and DIAG Commands MIM Error Log Example

IBM Tape Device Error Log Analysis

NAME: rmt1 LOCATION: 00-02-01-20 DEVICE TYPE: 3590

DATE: 10/31/95 07:33:21 SEQUENCE #203274 ERROR ID: SCSI ADAPTER ERROR

SCSI CDB: 170000000000

SCSI ADAPTER ERROR: COMMAND TIMEOUT

Press ENTER for additional entries...

F3=Cancel F10=Exit Enter

Figure 4-7. AIX TAPEUTIL and DIAG Commands Error Log Example

Chapter 4. Messages 4-17

Running Tapeutil
If tapeutil is running and an error condition is detected, an error message is displayed. The error sense
data has the format seen in Figure 4-8. The errno, or error number, is explained in Table 4-20 on
page 4-19.

Note: The following example is valid for microcode levels D0IA and later.

Read/Write test terminated, total bytes written 0

Operation failed with errno 5: I/O error
Residual count: 204800

Error Sense Data, Length 80

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0000 - 7100 0400 0000 0040 0000 0000 4400 E403 [q......@....D.õ.]
0010 - AD12 0021 0201 0100 0000 0000 0000 0A00 [!..!............]
0020 - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 [................]
0030 - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 [................]
0040 - 0000 0000 0000 0000 4438 3620 2020 2000 [........D86 .]

HEX ASCII DESCRIPTION

E4 FID (FRU identification number, Byte 14)
AD12 FSC (fault symptom code, Bytes 16 and 17)
443836 D86 Microcode level (Bytes 72-74
(not shown) VOLSER Number in ASCII or EBCDIC (Bytes 83-88)

Figure 4-8. Tapeutil Error Sample

Table 4-19. Hex to ASCII Conversion

Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII
00 Null 30 0 41 A 4A J 54 T
20 Space 31 1 42 B 4B K 55 U
32 2 43 C 4C L 56 V
33 3 44 D 4D M 57 W
34 4 45 E 4E N 58 X
35 5 46 F 4F O 59 Y
36 6 47 G 50 P 5A Z
37 7 48 H 51 Q 5F −
38 8 49 I 52 R
39 9 53 S

Note: All codes are not shown.

4-18 IBM 3590 MI

Table 4-20 shows only the errno values pertaining to tape devices. The complete list of errno values can
be found in the AIX /usr/include/sys/errno.h header file.
Table 4-20. Device Driver to AIX ERRNO Translation
AIX Device Driver Description
errno Error Code
1 EPERM v General: The process does not have adequate permission to perform the desired
function.
5 EIO v Open: An I/O error occurred that indicates a failure to operate the device.
v Write: The physical end of medium was detected, or it is a general error state
indicating a failure to write to device.
v IOCTL: An I/O error occurred during the operation.
v Close: An I/O error occurred during the operation.
6 ENXIO v General: The device has not been configured and is not receiving requests.
v Write: A write operation was attempted after the device had reached end of
medium.
9 EBADF v General: A bad file descriptor was passed.
v Write: A write operation was attempted on a device that was opened for read only.
11 EAGAIN v Read: The device is already opened.
12 ENOMEM v General: Insufficient memory available for some internal memory operation.
v Read: The number of bytes requested in a read of a variable block record was less
than the size of the block. This is referred to as an over-length condition.
14 EFAULT v General: A memory failure occurred due to an invalid pointer or address.
16 EBUSY v General: An excessive busy state was encountered.
v Open: The device is reserved by another initiator or an excessive busy state was
encountered.
22 EINVAL v Open: The operation requested had invalid parameters or an invalid combination of
parameters.
v Write: The operation requested had invalid parameters or an invalid combination of
parameters, or the number of bytes requested in the write was not a multiple of the
block size for a fixed block transfer, or the number of bytes requested in the write
was greater than the maximum block size allowed by the device for variable block
transfers.
28 ENOSPC v Write: A write operation failed because it had reached the early warning mark while
running in label processing mode. This return code is only returned once at the
moment early warning is reached.
46 ENOTREADY v General: The device is not ready for operation or a tape is not in the drive.
v Open: If not opened with the O_NONBLOCK or O_NDELAY, the drive is not ready
for operation or there is no tape in drive. If the non-blocking flags are used, the drive
is not ready for operation.
47 EWRPROTECT v Open: An open operation with the O_RDWR or O_WRONLY flag was attempted on
a write-protected tape.
v Write: A write operation was attempted on a write-protected tape.
v IOCTRL: An operation that would modify the media was attempted on a
write-protected tape or a device that was opened for O_RDONLY.
78 ETIMEDOUT v General: A command has timed out.
110 EMEDIA v General: An unrecoverable media error was detected.

Chapter 4. Messages 4-19

Using SMIT/ERRPT Commands
Follow this procedure to use the smit command.

Note: The smit command has various ways to format the error log.
1. Type smit at the AIX command line.
2. Select Problem Determination from the System Management menu.
3. Select Error Log from the Problem Determination menu.
4. Select Generate Error Report from the Error Log menu.
5. Select filename, then select no from the Single Select list.
6. From the Generate Error Report menu, you can select the type of reports you want to view, then press
the Do icon.
7. You can scroll through the log by using the up or down icons on the menu.

Follow this procedure to use the errpt command.

1. Select errpt |pg at the AIX command line. The summary report displays.
2. You can scroll through the log by pressing the Enter key for the next page.
3. You can type q to quit the error log at any time.

OR
1. Type errpt -a |pg at the AIX command line. The detailed report displays.
2. You can scroll through the log by pressing the Enter key for the next page.
3. You can type q to quit the error log at any time.

Analyze the sense key and ASC/ASCQ data to determine the type of sense information reported in the
error log. If a hardware failure is indicated, use the FID, and go to START-1 for problem determination. For
errors that indicate SCSI adapter or SCSI bus errors, see Figure 4-7 on page 4-17, go to “SCSI Bus
Problem Determination” on page 9-108.

For errors indicating system problems, enter the appropriate maintenance package.

4-20 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 4-9 is valid for microcode levels D0IA and later.

______________________________________________________________________________
ERROR LABEL: Tapper
ERROR ID: 476B351D

Date/Time: Tue Oct 31 07:33:21

Sequence Number: 203274
Machine ID: 000003243700
Node ID: kitt
Error Class: H
Error Type: PERM
Resource Name: rmt1
Resource Class: tape
Resource Type: 3590
Location: 00-02-01-20
VPD:
Manufacturer................IBM
Machine Type and Model......03590B11
Serial Number...............000000000315
Device Specific . (FW) .....4D86

Error Description
TAPE DRIVE FAILURE

Probable Causes
TAPE DRIVE

10
TAPE
TAPE DRIVE

Recommended Actions
PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES

Detailed Data
SENSE DATA
0604 0000 1101 FFFF FE00 0000 0000 0000 0102 0000 7000 0400 0000 0048 0000 0000
4400 E503 3010 004A 1E01 0191 004A 8250 0000 1100 0036 2800 0033 4D00 0033 0600
0000 0000 0190 0000 2700 0000 0020 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 C700 0000 4438 3620
2020 2000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
______________________________________________________________________________

HEX ASCII Description

04 Sense key
4400 ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/
additional sense code qualifier)
(See “Sense Key – ASC and ASCQ Information” on page 4-10
for error sense information.)
E5 FID (FRU identification number)
3010 First FSC (fault symptom code)
3628 Second FSC (fault symptom code)
334D Next to last FSC (fault symptom code)
3306 Last FSC (fault symptom code)
443836 D86 Microcode level
(not shown) VOLSER Number in ASCII or EBCDIC (Bytes 83-88)

Figure 4-9. AIX SMIT and ERRPT Command Error Log Example

Chapter 4. Messages 4-21

 ______________________________________________________________________________
ERROR LABEL: SIM_MIM_RECORD_3590
ERROR ID: 2E2EFDDE

Date/Time: Tue Oct 31 07:33:21

Sequence Number: 203274
Machine ID: 000003243700
Node ID: kitt
Error Class: H
Error Type: UNKN
Resource Name: rmt1
Resource Class: tape
Resource Type: 3590
Location: 00-02-01-20
VPD:
Manufacturer................IBM
Machine Type and Model......03590B1A
Serial Number...............000000000315
Device Specific . (FW) .....B58A

Error Description
UNDETERMINED ERROR

Probable Causes
TAPE DRIVE
TAPE CONTROL UNIT

Failure Causes
TAPE DRIVE

Recommended Actions
REFER TO PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Detailed Data
DIAGNOSTIC EXPLANATION
3100 0044 0000 6140 0130 3030 3030 3030 3235 3841 3432 3030 3737 3330 3030 3030
3937 3530 3031 3530 3031 3830 3030 4942 4D31 322D 3030 3030 3030 3058 5858 5858
3033 3539 3042 3141

HEX ASCII Description

01 01=SIM 02=MIM
3235 3841 258A Model and Microcode level
3432 42 Message code (See “Message Codes” on page 4-8)
33 3 FID severity (See “SIM/MIM Severity” on page 4-10)
3937 97 FID (FRU identification number)
3530 3031 5001 First FSC (fault symptom code)
3530 3031 5001 Last FSC (fault symptom code)
3033 3539 30 03590 Machine Type
42 3141 B1A Model

Figure 4-10. Error Log Example of SIM Message

4-22 IBM 3590 MI

 _____________________________________________________________________________
ERROR LABEL: SIM_MIM_RECORD_3590
ERROR ID: 2E2EFDDE

Date/Time: Tue Oct 31 07:33:21

Sequence Number: 203274
Machine ID: 000003243700
Node ID: kitt
Error Class: H
Error Type: UNKN
Resource Name: rmt1
Resource Class: tape
Resource Type: 3590
Location: 00-02-01-20
VPD:
Manufacturer................IBM
Machine Type and Model......03590B1A
Serial Number...............000000000315
Device Specific . (FW) .....5B8A

Error Description
UNDETERMINED ERROR

Probable Causes
TAPE DRIVE
TAPE CONTROL UNIT

Failure Causes
TAPE DRIVE

Recommended Actions
REFER TO PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Detailed Data
DIAGNOSTIC EXPLANATION
3100 0044 0000 6140 0230 3030 3030 3030 3235 3841 3631 3535 3630 3130 3030 3341
3241 5051 5239 3530 0130 3830 3030 4942 4D31 322D 3030 3030 3030 3058 5858 5858
3033 3539 3042 3141

HEX ASCII Description

02 01=SIM 02=MIM
3235 3841 258A Model and Microcode level
3631 61 Message code (See “Message Codes” on page 4-8)
31 1 FID severity (See “SIM/MIM Severity” on page 4-10)
5051 5239 3530 PQR950 VOLSER (volume serial number)
3033 3539 30 03590 Machine Type
42 3141 B1A Model
_____________________________________________________________________________

Figure 4-11. Error Log Example of MIM Message

Chapter 4. Messages 4-23

 ______________________________________________________________________________
ERROR LABEL: RECOVERED_ERROR
ERROR ID: 0F78A011

Date/Time: Mon Nov 20 07:33:21

Sequence Number: 232646
Machine ID: 000003243700
Node ID: kitt
Error Class: H
Error Type: TEMP
Resource Name: rmt1
Resource Class: tape
Resource Type: 3590
Location: 00-02-01-0,0
VPD:
Manufacturer................IBM
Machine Type and Model......03590B1A
Serial Number...............000000000315
Device Specific . (FW) .....B58A

Error Description
Recovery logic initiated by device

Probable Causes
Undetermined

Failure Causes
TAPE DRIVE
MEDIA

Recommended Actions
THIS ALERT IDENTIFIES THE CAUSE OF A PREVIOUS ERROR WHICH HAS BEEN RECOVERED

Detail Data
SENSE DATA
0602 0000 0A01 0000 1400 0000 0000 0000 0102 0000 7100 0400 0000 0040 0000 0000
4400 B308 3106 4132 0301 0100 0000 7241 0000 0A50 0533 4300 0E33 4D00 0033 4100
0000 0000 0000 FFFF FF00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0002 2200 6000 3538 4120
2020 2000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
______________________________________________________________________________

HEX ASCII Description

04 Sense Key
4400 ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/
additional sense code qualifier)
(See “Sense Key – ASC and ASCQ Information” on page 4-10
for error sense information.)
FE FID (FRU identification number)
3106 First FSC (fault symptom code)
33 43 Second FSC (fault symptom code)
33 4D Next to Last FSC (fault symptom code)
33 41 Last FSC (fault symptom code)
3538 41 58A Microcode level
(not shown) VOLSER Number in ASCII or EBCDIC (Bytes 83-88)

Figure 4-12. AIX SMIT and ERRPT Command Error Log Example

4-24 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 4-13. AIX SMIT and ERRPT Commands Error Log Example

Chapter 4. Messages 4-25

 Error Log Analysis – iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System
To gain access to the iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System problem logs and error logs, sign on at any
available workstation using the QSRV logon and its security password (QSRV). After sign on, the proper
access authorizations is granted and the iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System MAIN MENU displays.

There are two procedures, depending on which version/release of OS/400 you are running.

| iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System with CICS Processor

1. Type STRSST (Start System Service Tools) command on the command entry line on the
iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Main Menu, and press Enter.
2. Select “Start a service tool”.
3. Select “Error log utility”.
4. Select “Analyze error log”.
5. Specify the time period for searching the error log, then select “Magnetic media”.
6. On the Select Analysis Report Options menu, specify a device type of 3590, and press Enter. Leave
all other options at their default value.
7. Use the “Display Report” option to display the desired error log entry.
8. The following figure is a sample iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Error Log display screen showing the
3590 error log data.

Display Detail Report for Resource

Serial
Resource Type Model Number Address
TAP02 3590 B11 13-10063 0270-1700FFFF

Error log ID . . . . . . : 004602D2 Sequence . . . . . . : 178324

Date . . . . . . . . . . : 10/23/95 Time . . . . . . . . : 11:38:02
Reference code . . . . . : 9350 Error code . . . . . : 00000000
Table ID . . . . . . . . : 35900B11 IPL source . . . . . : B
Error type . . . . . . . : Permanent
Description . . . . . . . :
Tape unit failure
SIM/MIM message . . . . . : 00000000137E420077300000B0311531
1580000B013000000000007503590B11
Press Enter to continue.

F3=Exit F6=Display hexadecimal report

F10=Display previous detail report F12=Cancel

-------Hex-----------Description--------------------------------------
137E Model and Microcode Level
42 Message Code (see “Message Codes” on page 4-8)
B0 FID (FRU Identifier)
3115 First FSC (fault symptom code)
3115 Last FSC (fault symptom code)
0000000075 Sequence Number (drive serial number)
03590B11 Device Type and Model Number
----------------------------------------------------------------------

Figure 4-14. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Example Error Log of SIM

4-26 IBM 3590 MI

To display the hexadecimal error report, press F6. The following figure is an example of a 3590
hexadecimal error report which shows a permanent read/write error. This figure is valid for microcode
levels D0IA and later. Press Page Up or Page Down to display offset 0130 to 016C in the error log.

Display Hexadecimal Report for Resource

Serial Resource
Name Type Model Number Name
TAP02 3590 B11 13-10063 DEVICE

Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F EBCDIC
0000C0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ................
0000D0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ................
0000E0 F8807800 65010001 00000270 1700FFFF 8...............
0000F0 35900B11 93500001 00631202 05D8D5E6 .....&.......QNW
000100 F0F0F5F0 40404250 00009200 00000000 0050 .&........
000110 00040000 0000A0B0 0E223444 32440000 ................
000120 0000F000 03000000 00400000 00000900 ..0...... ......
000130 FE2A3118 00010003 01300009 42494280 ................
000140 10001035 42000133 6B050433 54000000 ...............
000150 00000003 00000400 00005A90 00000003 ..........!.....
000160 00000100 00002300 00004438 36202020 ................
000170 20001000 00505152 39353000 00000600 ................
More...
Press Enter to continue.

F3=Exit F12=Cancel

OFFSET HEX ASCII DESCRIPTION

00E4-00E5 6501 IOP Type
00EC-00ED 1700 1 = IOP Port Used
700 = Drive Address
00F0-00F3 35900B11 Device Type and Model
00F4-00F5 9350 SRC (system reference code)
0130 FE FID (FRU identification number)
0132-0133 3118 First FSC (fault symptom code)
0143-0144 3542 Second FSC (fault symptom code)
0147-0148 336B Next to Last FSC (fault symptom code)
014B-014C 3354 Last FSC (fault symptom code)
016A-016C 443836 D86 Microcode level
0175-017A 505152393530 VOLSER Number in ASCII or EBCDIC

Figure 4-15. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Hexadecimal Error Log (Display)

Table 4-21. Hex to ASCII Conversion

Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII

00 Null 30 0 41 A 4A J 54 T
20 Space 31 1 42 B 4B K 55 U
32 2 43 C 4C L 56 V
33 3 44 D 4D M 57 W
34 4 45 E 4E N 58 X
35 5 46 F 4F O 59 Y
36 6 47 G 50 P 5A Z
37 7 48 H 51 Q 5F −
38 8 49 I 52 R
39 9 53 S

Note: All codes are not shown.

Chapter 4. Messages 4-27

The following figure is an example of an iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System hexadecimal error report printout
with an Error Type of Permanent. This figure is valid for microcode levels D0IA and later.

The FID and FSC in the error log are in ASCII, while the microcode level is in hex. Use Table 4-21 on
page 4-27 to convert the numbering system.

Error Log Utility Page . . . : 2

IBM 10/23/95 14:13:10
Partial Report for Resource

From . . : 10/12/95 14:13:10 To . . : 10/23/95 14:13:10

Serial
Resource Type Model Number Address Total Count
TAP02 3590 B11 13-10063 0270-1700FFFF 286

Reference Code Error Type Count

9350 Permanent 3
9355 Permanent 21
FFF6 Statistic 262

Detail Report for Resource

Serial
Resource Type Model Number Address
TAP02 3590 B11 13-10063 0270-1700FFFF

Error Log ID . . . . . . : 004602D2 Sequence . . . . . . : 178324

Date . . . . . . . . . . : 10/23/95 Time . . . . . . . . : 11:38:02
Reference code . . . . . : 9350 Error Code . . . . . : 00000000
Table ID . . . . . . . . : 35900B11 IPL Source . . . . . : B
Error Type . . . . . . . : Permanent
Description . . . . . . :
Tape unit detected a read or write error on tape medium

1
3
00000000 0000 C5D3F0F2 000000F8 007000E0 787BB495 F50000DC 0002B894 20F6F5F0 F1027000
00000000 0020 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 0040 000000E3 C1D7F0F2 40404040 40F3F5F9 F0C2F1F1 00010063 93500046 02D20000
00000000 0060 00000000 00001700 FFFF1100 00000000 F3F5F9F0 F0C2F1F1 40D4C4C4 C3D- - -00
00000000 0080 0000F1F3 40404040 40404040 40404040 07000000 00000000 000000F8 0820E2C9
00000000 00A0 F1F84040 40404040 C4C3F7F3 40404040 4040E3C1 D7F2F540 40404040 00000000
00000000 00C0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00E0 F8807800 65010001 00000270 1700FFFF 35900B11 93500001 00631202 05D8D5E6
QNW*
00000000 0100 F0F0F5F0 40404250 00009200 00000000 000- - -00 0000A0B0 0E223444 324- - -00
00000000 0120 0000F000 03000000 00400000 00000900 FE2A3118 00010003 01300009 42494280
00000000 0140 10001035 42000133 6B050433 54000000 00000003 00000400 00005A90 00000003
00000000 0160 00000100 00002300 00004438 36202020 20001000 00505152 39353000 00000600
00000000 0180 03003900 00000300 00001000 00000000 00013100 03000000 00400000 00000900
00000000 01A0 FE2A3800 00171202 05D80000 00171202 05D81000 00050000 00171202 05D80600
00000000 01C0 10002000 02000000 00171202 05D80600 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040

1 Offset into the error log

2 Hexadecimal error log

OFFSET HEX ASCII DESCRIPTION

00E4-00E5 6501 IOP Type
00EC-00ED 1700 1 = IOP Port Used
700 = Drive Address
00F0-00F3 35900B11 Device Type and Model
00F4-00F5 9350 SRC (system reference code)
0124 03 Sense Key
012E-012F 0900 ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/additional sense code qualifier)
(See “Sense Key – ASC and ASCQ Information” on page 4-10
for error sense information.)
0130 FE FID (FRU identification number)
0132-0133 3118 First FSC (fault symptom code)
0143-0144 3542 Second FSC (fault symptom code)
0147-0148 336B Next to Last FSC (fault symptom code)
014B-014C 3354 Last FSC (fault symptom code)
016A-016C 443836 D86 Microcode level
0175-017A 505152393530 VOLSER Number in ASCII or EBCDIC

Figure 4-16. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Hexadecimal Error Log (Printout)

4-28 IBM 3590 MI

Analyze the sense key and ASC/ASCQ data to determine the type of sense information reported in the
error log. If a hardware failure is indicated, use the FID and go to START-1 for problem determination.

See iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Advanced Series Service Functions for more detailed information on
displaying and printing the error logs.

iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System with RISC Processor

1. Type STRSST (Start System Service Tools) command on the command entry line on the
iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Main Menu, and press Enter.
2. Select “Start a service tool”.
3. Select “Product activity log”.
4. Select “Analyze log”.
5. Specify the time period for searching the error log, then select “Magnetic media” option.
6. On the “Select Analysis Report Options” menu, specify a device type of 3590, and press Enter. Leave
all other options at their default value.
7. Use the “Log Analysis Report” menu to display the desired error log entry.

Note: You may use the PF11 function key which will give you a brief description of the error log entry.
This could be helpful when scanning the error logs.
8. The following figure is a sample iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Error Log display screen showing the
3590 error log data.

Display Detail Report for Resource

Serial Resource
Name Type Model Number Name
TAP02 3590 B11 13-10063 TAP34

Error log ID . . . . . . : 004602D2 Sequence . . . . . . : 178324

Date . . . . . . . . . . : 10/23/95 Time . . . . . . . . : 11:38:02
Reference code . . . . . : 9350 Secondary code . . . : 00000000
Table ID . . . . . . . . : 35900B11 IPL source/state . . : B/3

Class . . . . . . . . . . : Permanent
System Ref Code . . . . . : 35909300
Tape unit failure
SIM/MIM message . . . . . : 00000000137E420077300000B0311531
1580000B013000000000007503590B11

Press Enter to continue.

F3=Exit F4=Additional Information F6=Hexadecimal report

F9=Address Information F10=Previous detail report F12=Cancel

-------Hex-------Description--------------------------------------
137E Model and Microcode Level
42 Message Code (see “Message Codes” on page 4-8)
B0 FID (FRU Identifier)
3115 First FSC (fault symptom code)
3115 Last FSC (fault symptom code)
0000000075 Sequence Number (drive serial number)
03590 Device Type
B11 Device Model Number
------------------------------------------------------------------

Figure 4-17. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Example Error Log of SIM Message

Chapter 4. Messages 4-29

9. Press F4 to display additional information. See the example in Figure 4-18 on page 4-30.

Display Additional Information for Resource

Serial Resource
Name Type Model Number Name
TAP02 3590 B11 13-10063 TAP34
SIM/MIM message . . . . . : 00000000137E420077300000B0311531
1580000B013000000000007503590B11

------Hex------------Description---------------------------------------
137E Link and Microcode Level
42 Message Code (see “Message Codes” on page 4-8)
B0 FID (FRU Identifier)
3115 First FSC (fault symptom code)
3115 Last FSC (fault symptom code)
0000000075 Sequence Number (drive serial number)
03590 Device Type
B11 Device Model Number
-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Figure 4-18. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Example Error Log of SIM Message

To display the hexadecimal error report, press F6. The following figure is an example of a 3590
hexadecimal error report which shows a permanent read/write error. This figure is valid for microcode
levels D0IA and later. Press Page Up or Page Down to display offset 01D0 to 020C in the error log.

4-30 IBM 3590 MI

 Display Hexadecimal Report for Resource

Serial Resource
Name Type Model Number Name
TAP02 3590 B11 13-10063 DEVICE

Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F EBCDIC
000180 F8807800 65010001 00000270 1700FFFF 8...............
000190 35900B11 93500001 00631202 05D8D5E6 .....&.......QNW
0001A0 F0F0F5F0 40404250 00009200 00000000 0050 .&........
0001B0 00040000 0000A0B0 0E223444 32440000 ................
0001C0 0000F000 03000000 00400000 00000900 ..0...... ......
0001D0 FE2A3118 00010003 01300009 42494280 ................
0001E0 10001035 42000133 6B050433 54000000 ........,.......
0001F0 00000003 00000400 00005A90 00000003 ..........!.....
000200 00000100 00002300 00004438 36202020 ................
000210 20001000 00505152 39353000 00000600 ................
000220 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 ................
000230 00001000 0003FFFF FFFC1200 0331D9E2 ..............RS
More...
Press Enter to continue.

F3=Exit F12=Cancel

Note: The above is an example of a typical iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System report. Display contents will
vary by displacement depending on the operating system release. If you do not find either F0, F1,
70, or 71 (locator byte) in Location 1C2, browse around that area and adjust the displacement
accordingly. Remember the first FSC will be directly below the located byte. The typical latest
iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System report is shown on Figure 4-20 on page 4-32.
OFFSET HEX ASCII DESCRIPTION
0184-0185 6501 IOP Type
018C-018D 1700 1 = IOP Port Used
700 = Drive Address
0190-0193 35900B11 Device Type and Model
0194-0195 9350 SRC (system reference code)
01C4 03 Sense Key
01CE-01CF 0900 ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/
additional sense code qualifier)
(See “Sense Key – ASC and ASCQ Information” on page 4-10
for error sense information.)
01D0 FE FID (FRU identification number)
01D2-01D3 3118 First FSC (fault symptom code)
01E3-01E4 3542 Second FSC (fault symptom code)
01E7-01E8 336B Next to Last FSC (fault symptom code)
01EB-01EC 3354 Last FSC (fault symptom code)
020A-020C 443836 D86 Microcode level
0215-021A 505152393530 VOLSER Number in ASCII or EBCDIC

Figure 4-19. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Hexadecimal Error Log (Display)

Chapter 4. Messages 4-31

 Here is what the sense data would look like in the iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System
Product Activity log for a model Exx. The device type is
shown as 63A0 instead of 3590 since 63A0 is the reported type.

----------------------------------------------------------------------
Display Additional Information for Resource

Serial Resource
Name Type Model Number Name
TAPMLB46 63A0 001 13-10016 TAP04

SENSE DATA FOLLOWS. . . . :

DATA OFFSET 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
000000 F0000300 00005058 00000000 3001FF02
000010 3A9F1000 02030191 00091040 00000800
000020 00333D00 00000000 00000000 00000000
000030 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
000040 00000000 49000000 36434220 20202000

F3=Exit F12=Cancel More...

Press Enter to continue.

F3=Exit F12=Cancel

OFFSET HEX ASCII DESCRIPTION

000002 03 Sense key of 3.
000007 X’0A’ or X’58" 18 bytes or 96 bytes
of sense data are returned.
00000C 3001 ASC and ASCQ.
00000E FF FID (FRU identification number)
000010 3A9F 1st error code.
000021 333D 2nd error code.
000048 36434220 20202000 Microcode EC Number (in ASCII).
6 C B bl blblbl ASCII EC level

Figure 4-20. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Product Activity Log (Display)

If more information is necessary on the sense bytes, there is a section contained in the system operation
manual “iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System® Information” on page xxi called Request Sense X’03’.

The following figure is an example of an iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System hexadecimal error report printout
with an Error Type of Permanent. This figure is valid for microcode levels D0IA and later.

The FID and FSC in the error log are in hex, while the microcode level is in ASCII. Use Table 4-22 on
page 4-34 to convert between the two systems.

4-32 IBM 3590 MI

Error Log Utility Page . . . : 2
IBM 10/23/95 14:13:10
Partial Report for Resource

From . . : 10/12/95 14:13:10 To . . : 10/23/95 14:13:10

Serial
Resource Type Model Number Address Total Count
TAP02 3590 B11 13-10063 0270-1700FFFF 286

Reference Code Error Type Count

9350 Permanent 3
9355 Permanent 21
FFF6 Statistic 262

Detail Report for Resource

Serial
Resource Type Model Number Address
TAP02 3590 B11 13-10063 0270-1700FFFF

Error Log ID . . . . . . : 004602D2 Sequence . . . . . . : 178324

Date . . . . . . . . . . : 10/23/95 Time . . . . . . . . : 11:38:02
Reference code . . . . . : 9350 Error Code . . . . . : 00000000
Table ID . . . . . . . . : 35900B11 IPL Source . . . . . : B
Error Type . . . . . . . : Permanent
Description . . . . . . :
Tape unit detected a read or write error on tape medium

1
2
00000000 0000 C5D3F0F2 000000F8 007000E0 787BB495 F50000DC 0002B894 20100103 3C000000
00000000 0020 92100000 11000000 00000000 01720000 F3F5F9F0 C2F1F140 F1F260F0 F0F0F0F0
00000000 0040 4040F6F5 F0F10000 00000001 00010000 00020000 00050001 0002FFFF 0000FFFF
00000000 0060 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 0080 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0000E3C1
00000000 00A0 D7F0F740 40404040 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040
00000000 00C0 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040
00000000 00E0 F3F5F9F0 F0C2F1F1 0000E2D3 C9C3C9D6 4040E5F3 D9F6D4F0 40400000 00000000
00000000 0100 00790000 00000000 00000170 00000000 00000000 01720000 00000000 00000000
00000000 0120 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 0140 E3C1D7F0 F7404040 40400000 00000000 40404040 40404040 40404040 00070001
00000000 0160 00000000 10200003 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0005001E 00000188
00000000 0180 F8807800 65010001 00000120 12F0FFFF 35900B11 92100000 00001202 06240000
00000000 01A0 00000000 00004250 0000920E 00000000 00040000 0000A0B0 0E213234 433800B4
00000000 01C0 0000F000 03000000 00400000 00000900 FE2A3118 00010003 01300009 42494280
00000000 01E0 10001035 42000133 6B050433 54000000 00000003 00000400 00005A90 00000003
00000000 0200 00000100 00002300 00004438 36202020 20001000 00505152 39353000 00000600
00000000 0220 03003900 00000300 00001000 00000000 00013100 03000000 00400000 00000900
00000000 0240 FE2A3800 00171202 05D80000 00171202 05D81000 00050000 00171202 05D80600
00000000 0260 10002000 02000000 00171202 05D80600 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040
00000000 0280 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
1 LINES 00000000 02A0 TO 00000000 02A0 SAME AS ABOVE
00000000 02C0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000D5
00000000 02E0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0000D500
00000000 0300 00000000 00000000 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040

* * * * * E N D O F C O M P U T E R P R I N T O U T * * * * *

1 Offset into the error log

2 Hexadecimal error log

OFFSET HEX ASCII DESCRIPTION

0184-0185 6501 IOP Type
018C-018D 12F0 1 = IOP Port Used
2F0 = Drive Address
0190-0193 35900B11 Device Type and Model
0194-0195 9350 SRC (system reference code)
01C4 03 Sense Key
01CE-01CF 0900 ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/
additional sense code qualifier)
(See “Sense Key – ASC and ASCQ Information” on page 4-10
for error sense information.)
01D0 FE FID (FRU identification number)
01D2-01D3 3118 First FSC (fault symptom code)
01E3-01E4 3542 Second FSC (fault symptom code)
01E7-01E8 336B Next to Last FSC (fault symptom code)
01EB-01EC 3354 Last FSC (fault symptom code)
020A-020C 443836 D86 Microcode level
0215-021A 505152393530 VOLSER Number in ASCII or EBCDIC

Figure 4-21. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Hexadecimal Error Log (Printout)

Chapter 4. Messages 4-33

 Note: The above is an example of a typical iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System report. Display contents will
vary by displacement depending on the operating system release. If you do not find either F0, F1,
70, or 71 (locator byte) in Location 1C2, browse around that area and adjust the displacement
accordingly. Remember the first FSC will be directly below the located byte. The typical latest
iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System report is shown on Figure 4-20 on page 4-32.

Check the Message Code, see “Message Codes” on page 4-8, for all SIM/MIMs before entering the
START section with the FID. Once you have located the FID, go to START-1 for problem determination.

See iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Advanced Series Service Functions for more detailed information on
displaying and printing the error logs.
Table 4-22. Hex to ASCII Conversion
Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII
00 Null 30 0 41 A 4A J 54 T
20 Space 31 1 42 B 4B K 55 U
32 2 43 C 4C L 56 V
33 3 44 D 4D M 57 W
34 4 45 E 4E N 58 X
35 5 46 F 4F O 59 Y
36 6 47 G 50 P 5A Z
37 7 48 H 51 Q 5F −
38 8 49 I 52 R
39 9 53 S
Note: All codes are not shown.

| Error Log Analysis – LINUX System — —

| Linux does not support error logs.

| Note: See the IBM TotalStorage Device Drivers Installation and User’s Guidefor detailed information.

4-34 IBM 3590 MI

 Obtaining Error Information from Sun (Solaris) System
The Sun system does not provide error logs for analysis; therefore, you will have to use the device
diagnostics and Device Error Log for problem determination. See “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 and “Error
Log Analysis Procedure” on page 9-126. When you have located a FID, go to START-1.

Refer to “Appendix A” on page B-1 for additional information concerning host attachment software service
tools for Sun (Solaris), including tapeutil.

See IBM SCSI Tape Drive, Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide for
additional information about Solaris service and diagnostic aids.

Obtaining Error Information from HP/UX System

The HP-UX system does not provide error logs for analysis. Therefore, you will have to use the device
diagnostics and Device Error Log for problem determination. See “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 and “Error
Log Analysis Procedure” on page 9-126. When you have located a FID, go to START-1.

| Refer to “Appendix A” on page B-1 for additional information concerning host attachment software service
| tools for HP-UX systems, including tapeutil.

See IBM SCSI Tape Drive, Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide for
additional information about HP/UX service and diagnostic aids.

Chapter 4. Messages 4-35

Obtaining Error Information from Windows NT or Windows 2000
System
You may refer to “Appendix A” on page B-1 for additional information concerning host attachment software
service tools for Windows NT or Windows 2000 systems, including ntutil.

See IBM SCSI Tape Drive, Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide for
additional information about Windows NT service and diagnostic aids.

Running NTUTIL
If ntutil is running and an error condition is detected, an error message is displayed. The error sense data
has the format seen in Figure 4-22. The err 0 ERROR_SUCCESS>, or error number, is explained in
“NTUTIL Symbolic Error and Error Number” on page 4-37.
For further information on gathering error data, see IBM SCSI Tape Drive, Medium Changer, and Library
enter selection: 39
Scsi status: 02h/Sense information Length 60h
Sense KEY/ASC/ASCQ = 02/3a/00
KEY meaning is: not ready
Sense Info - - - consult SCSI spec for details

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F
------------------------------------------------------------
0000 - 70 00 02 00 00 00 00 58 00 00 00 00 3a 00 FF 02
0010 - C4 08 00 00 00 00 01 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 0A 00
0020 - 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0030 - 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0040 - 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 32 46 31 20 20 20 20 00
0050 - 00 00 00 50 51 52 39 35 30 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

analyze <> called with rc 1 err 0 <ERROR_SUCCESS> data 0

total elapsed time in seconds = 0.00
Return to continue:

HEX ASCII DESCRIPTION

FF FID (FRU identification number) Byte 14
C408 FSC (fault symptom code) Bytes 16 and 17
324631 2F1 Microcode level, Bytes 72-74
505152393530 VOLSER# in ASCII or EBCDIC

Figure 4-22. Tapeutil Error Sample

Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide and the Hardware Reference Manual. For certain errors, an
ntutil test_unit_ready command (39) must be issued to display the sense information. Sense information
also can be retrieved with a Log_sense command (83).

4-36 IBM 3590 MI

NTUTIL Symbolic Error and Error Number
--------------------------------------------------
| Symbolic Error | NT Error Number |
|--------------------------------|-----------------|
| ERROR_SUCCESS | 0 |
| ERROR_INVALID_FUNCTION | 1 |
| ERROR_FILE_NOT_FOUND | 2 |
| ERROR_PATH_NOT_FOUND | 3 |
| ERROR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES | 4 |
| ERROR_ACCESS_DENIED | 5 |
| ERROR_INVALID_HANDLE | 6 |
| ERROR_NOT_ENOUGH_MEMORY | 8 |
| ERROR_BAD_FORMAT | 9 |
| ERROR_INVALID_BLOCK | 10 |
| ERROR_BAD_ENVIRONMENT | 11 |
| ERROR_INVALID_ACCESS | 12 |
| ERROR_INVALID_DATA | 13 |
| ERROR_OUTOFMEMORY | 14 |
| ERROR_INVALID_DRIVE | 15 |
| ERROR_WRITE_PROTECT | 19 |
| ERROR_BAD_UNIT | 20 |
| ERROR_NOT_READY | 21 |
| ERROR_BAD_COMMAND | 22 |
| ERROR_CRC | 23 |
| ERROR_HANDLE_EOF | 38 |
| ERROR_NOT_SUPPORTED | 50 |
| ERROR_DEV_NOT_EXIST | 55 |
| ERROR_ALREADY_ASSIGNED | 85 |
| ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER | 87 |
| ERROR_OPEN_FAILED | 110 |
| ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER | 122 |
| ERROR_INVALID_NAME | 123 |
| ERROR_BUSY_DRIVE | 142 |
| DD_NO_SENSE | 200 |
| DD_DEVICE_DRIVER_FAILURE | 201 |
| DD_EEPROM_FAILURE | 202 |
| DD_MANUAL_INTERVENTION | 203 |
| DD_RECOVERED_ERROR | 204 |
| DD_SCSI_ADAPTER_ERROR | 205 |
| DD_SCSI_ERROR | 206 |
| DD_SCSI_BUSY | 211 |
| DD_ILLEGAL_REQUEST | 207 |
| DD_COMMAND_ABORTED | 208 |
| DD_HARDWARE_MICROCODE | 209 |
| DD_UNIT_ATTENTION | 210 |
| ERROR_MORE_DATA | 234 |
| DD_CARTRIDGE_ENTRY_FAILURE | 300 |
(continued on next page)
--------------------------------------------------

Chapter 4. Messages 4-37

 --------------------------------------------------
| Symbolic Error | NT Error Number |
|--------------------------------|-----------------|
| DD_CARTRIDGE_LOAD_FAILURE | 301 |
| DD_CARTRIDGE_IN_FAILED_DRIVE | 302 |
| DD_CAROUSEL_NOT_LOADED | 303 |
| DD_CHANGER_FAILURE | 304 |
| DD_DRIVE_FAILURE | 305 |
| DD_DRIVE_OR_MEDIA_FAILURE | 306 |
| DD_ENTRY_EXIT_FAILURE | 307 |
| DD_ENTRY_EXIT_NOT_PRESENT | 308 |
| DD_LIBRARY_AUDIT | 309 |
| DD_LIBRARY_FULL | 310 |
| DD_MEDIA_EXPORT | 311 |
| DD_SLOT_FAILURE | 312 |
| DD_SLOT_OR_MEDIA_FAILURE | 313 |
| DD_SOURCE_EMPTY | 314 |
| DD_DESTINATION_FULL | 315 |
| DD_CLEANER_INST | 316 |
| DD_MEDIA_NOT_EJECTED | 317 |
| DD_IOPORT_NOT_CONFIG | 318 |
| DD_FIRST_DEST_EMPTY | 319 |
| DD_END_PHYSICAL_MEDIA | 400 |
| DD_MEDIA_BLANK | 401 |
| DD_MEDIA_CORRUPTED | 402 |
| DD_MEDIA_FAILURE | 403 |
| DD_MEDIA_INCOMPATIBILITY | 404 |
| DD_SECTOR_RELOCATION | 405 |
| DD_SECTOR_OUT_OF_RANGE | 406 |
| DD_WRITE_PROTECT | 407 |
| DD_CLEAN_MEDIA | 408 |
| DD_MEDIA_FAULT | 409 |
| DD_CLEANING_COMPLETE | 410 |
| DD_LOGICAL_END_OF_MEDIA | 411 |
| DD_MEDIA_NOT_PRESENT | 412 |
| DD_BEGINNING_OF_MEDIA | 413 |
| DD_ERASE_FAILURE | 414 |
| DD_WRITE_TO_WRITTEN_WORM | 415 |
| DD_WRONG_LENGTH_BLOCK | 416 |
| ERROR_IO_INCOMPLETE | 996 |
| ERROR_IO_PENDING | 997 |
| ERROR_NOACCESS | 998 |
| ERROR_CANTOPEN | 1011 |
| ERROR_CANTREAD | 1012 |
| ERROR_CANTWRITE | 1013 |
| ERROR_END_OF_MEDIA | 1100 |
| ERROR_FILEMARK_DETECTED | 1101 |
| ERROR_BEGINNING_OF_MEDIA | 1102 |
| ERROR_SETMARK_DETECTED | 1103 |
| ERROR_NO_DATA_DETECTED | 1104 |
| ERROR_PARTITION_FAILURE | 1105 |
| ERROR_INVALID_BLOCK_LENGTH | 1106 |
| ERROR_DEVICE_NOT_PARTITIONED | 1107 |
| ERROR_UNABLE_TO_LOCK_MEDIA | 1108 |
| ERROR_UNABLE_TO_UNLOAD_MEDIA | 1109 |
| ERROR_MEDIA_CHANGED | 1110 |
| ERROR_BUS_RESET | 1111 |
| ERROR_NO_MEDIA_IN_DRIVE | 1112 |
| ERROR_IO_DEVICE | 1117 |
| ERROR_TOO_MANY_LINKS | 1142 |
--------------------------------------------------

4-38 IBM 3590 MI

 Chapter 5. Operator Panel
Contents
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Operator/CE Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Indicators and Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Processor Check Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
File Protected Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Tape Position Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Dump Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Clean Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Drive Type Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Intervention Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
3590 Intervention Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Operator/CE Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
| Operator and CE Panel Flow Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Operator Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Set ACF Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Services Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Set Online Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Set Offline Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Confirm Offline Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Set Address Menu (SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Set Port 0 Address Menu (SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Set Port 1 Address Menu (SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Fibre Addresses Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Show Node Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Show Port Names Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Set Port 0 Address Menu (Fibre) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Set Port 1 Address Menu (Fibre) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Set Hard Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Use Soft Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Change Language Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Show Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Confirm Mode Change Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
| CE Online Mode Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
| CE Online Mode Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
| CE Logs Menu (CE Modes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
| CE DRV Serial No Menu (CE Modes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
| Display Serial No Menu (CE Modes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
| Alter Serial No Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
| CE Save Data (Serial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
| CE Disp Sensors Menu (CE Online Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
| Show Statistics Menu (CE Modes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
| Show Drive Statistics Menu (CE Modes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
| Show Tape Statistics Menu (CE Modes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
CE Offline Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
| CE Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
CE Verify Fix Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
FRU Replaced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
CE Loop Diag Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
CE Main Dump Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
CE Dump Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 5-1

 CE Object Alias Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
CE Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
CE FMR Tape Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
CE Select EC Level Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
CE Load Scratch Tape Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
CE Load FMR Tape Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
CE Config/Install Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
CE Drive Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
CE SCSI Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
CE Align ACF Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
| CE Fibre Names Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
| Show Node Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
| Show Port Names Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
| Set Node Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
| Set Port 0 Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
| Set Port 1 Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
CE Save Data Menu (Node/Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
CE Fibre Wrap Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
CE Logs Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
CE Error Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
CE FID FE Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
CE FID FF Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
CE Temp Error Log Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
CE Utilities Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
CE Disp Sensors Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
CE Disp/Alt VPD Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
CE Group Name Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
CE VPD Field Offset Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
CE VPD Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
CE Verify Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
CE Control Store Select Address Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
CE Control Store Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
CE Microcode Trap Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
CE Saved Traps Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
CE Read Tape Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
CE Process Tape Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Space Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Read Block Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Next Block ID Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Password Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
| Engr Use Only Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
| H SARS Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
| V SARS Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Media Test Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
OEM Use Only Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Control Store Select Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Control Store Alter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
CE Drive Features Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
CE Model B1A/E1A/H1A C12/C14 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
CE DRV Emulation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
CE Saved FSC Trap List Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
CE Remove Saved FSC Trap Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
CE FSC Trap List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

5-2 IBM 3590 MI

CE Remove FSC Trap Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-3

Display

Operator/CE Panel Display

The operator/CE panel provides a menu-driven operator and service interface through a liquid crystal
display assembly. Displays include operator and service menus, device status, activities, error conditions,
and data.

Several languages are available on the 3590. The fonts and translations for all of these languages are
included in each microcode release, regardless of country. Selection of the desired language is through
the operator/CE panel. To change languages, the operator selects the desired language from the “Change
Language Menu” on page 5-31. The CE menus are always in English.

Operator tasks include making selections from the operator menus. For example, Unload Drive is a
selection from the “Options Menu” on page 5-22. This menu selection causes a loaded cartridge to be
rewound and unloaded from the device. The device will not accept any motion commands after you select
Unload Drive. If the device has data in the buffers, the device will synchronize the data (empty the buffers
to tape or the host) before rewinding. If the device cannot synchronize the buffers, status appropriate to
the error is presented to the initiator. The device becomes not ready immediately after Unload Drive is
selected; the operator/CE panel displays “UNLOADED.”

Figure 5-1 on page 5-5 shows the controls and the indicator on the operator/CE panel.

The operator/CE panel for the Model B11/E11/H11 is mounted above the priority cell on the ACF. The
Model B11/E11/H11 is mounted in a rack (front-serviced) or in an A14 frame (rear-serviced).

For the Model B1A/E1A/H1A, which does not have an ACF, the operator/CE panel is mounted in front of
the drive. The Model B1A/E1A/H1A is mounted in the 3494 tape library as a rear-serviced device.

The operator/CE panel has five pushbuttons; three are exposed and two are hidden from view. When the
display is in the normal position, the operator can use the three exposed pushbuttons (up arrow, down
arrow, and Enter).

When the panel is in the service position, the service representative (usually called a CE) can use two
additional pushbuttons (Reset and Change Mode). To put the panel in the service position and expose the
two CE buttons, the CE releases two finger latches on the back of the panel.

5-4 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 5-1. Operator/CE Panel

From left to right, the pushbuttons and indicator are:

Pushbutton/Indicator Description
Reset Allows the CE to perform a device power-ON reset.

Attention: The device runs the diagnostics, which takes approximately

2.5 minutes. Do not insert your hands in the ACF during this time, even if
the panel stops displaying Diags Running because the ACF transport may
move up or down.
Change Mode Allows the CE to toggle between CE mode and Normal mode. CE mode
can be selected at any time, but the mode will not become active until the
device completes all current operations. Normal mode can be selected at
any time. Selecting Normal mode returns the operator/CE panel menu to
the Operator menu (indicating status and conditions). CE mode enables
special menus on the operator/CE panel display not available to the
operator in Normal mode.
Up Arrow Allows the operator or the CE to move the cursor arrow up through the
menu options.
Down Arrow Allows the operator or the CE to move the cursor arrow down through the
menu options.
Enter Allows the operator or the CE to select the menu option at the location of
the cursor arrow.
Processor Check During a normal power-ON or during a power-ON reset, this LED is
switched ON for 10 to 20 seconds, and is switched OFF if no fault is
detected. If the LED remains ON, the 3590 requires service.

See Figure 5-2 on page 5-6 and Table 5-2 for the descriptions of the areas on the panel.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-5

 Figure 5-2. Options and Status Screen

| Table 5-1. Drive Type Indicator

| 3590E
| Drive Type 3590 Base ULTRA 3590E Fibre 3590H SCSI 3590H Fibre
| SCSI
| Non-Extended High Performance ULTRA 3590E N/A N/A N/A
| Cartridge/older microcode
| Non-Extended High Performance B11 B11-U E11 E11–F N/A N/A
| Cartridge/ newer microcode ACF
| Non-Extended High Performance B1A B1A-U E1A E1A-F N/A N/A
| Cartridge/ newer microcode
| Non-ACF
| Extended High Performance
| B11-X B11UX E11-X E11FX H11–X H11FX
| Cartridge ACF
| Extended High Performance
| B1A-X B1AUX E1A-X E1AFX H1A-X H1AFX
| Cartridge Non-ACF
|

5-6 IBM 3590 MI

Table 5-2. Options and Status
Area Description

1 ACF Mode Displays manual, automatic, system, accumulate, random, or when the ACF is installed.

When the operator changes modes, any current ACF operation (cartridges in transit) are
completed before the request is granted.

2 Drive Type v See Table 5-1 on page 5-6 for the drive type indicators.

3 Drive and ACF v Cleaning: A cleaning cartridge is in the device.
Status
v Ready: A ready message is generated by the device when it is ready and other
higher-priority messages do not apply. The ready indicator is displayed only when the
transport is not moving tape. When ready or not ready, the state of the device is the same
to both SCSI busses.
v Ready at load point: The media is at the beginning of tape and the device is ready.
v Accessing: The empty ACF transport is moving to a magazine position to either check for an
unused volume or to get a volume to load.
v Transferring: The device is moving a cartridge from the magazine or the priority cell to the
drive, or from the drive to the magazine or the priority cell.
v Loading: The cartridge is being loaded into the drive.
v Locating: The device is moving the tape to a specific location.
v Reading: The device is reading data from the tape to the device buffer.
v Writing: The device is writing data to the tape from the device buffer.
v Erasing: The device is logically erasing data from the tape.
v Rewinding: The device is rewinding the tape to the beginning of the logical volume.
v Unloading: The cartridge is being removed from the drive.
v Automatic Cartridge Facility Disabled: The ACF cannot perform an operation; for example,
the magazine is not installed or the magazine was filled and the last imported cartridge was
returned to the priority cell.
v Blank Field: The ACF is inactive and the drive is not loaded.

4 Messages and Messages include:

5 Supplemental PORT 0 ADDR=n ONLINE or
OFFLINE
Messages (SCSI
PORT 1 ADDR=n ONLINE or
OFFLINE (‘n’ can be in the range 0–F.)
only attached)
For SCSI port 0 or 1 (PORT 0 or PORT 1), the last assigned SCSI address (ADDR=n) is listed
with each port’s online or offline status (ONLINE or
OFFLINE). This area is a dual-use area
that can be used for prompts and messages.

Supplemental messages appear in the two-line message area of the screens. These
messages include general information, user feedback for control actions, and attention
messages. For example,
DIAGS
RUNNING appears under
5 when the drive is running the
internal diagnostics, and if the drive is loading the microcode,
LOADING
CODE appears in this
area. If
MTM (media test mode) appears, call your next level of support.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-7

Table 5-2. Options and Status (continued)
Area Description

4 Messages and Messages include:

5 Supplemental PORT0 ID=02 14 26 (for example)
Message (Fibre
PORT1 ID:aa bb cd (‘a, b, c and d’ can be in the range 0–f.)
Channel only)
= Indicates a Hard Address is being used.
: Indicates a Soft Address is being used.
v Portn ID=/:aa bb cd
Port0 ID:aa bb cd
Port1 ID=aa bb cd

- where -

aa = Fibre Domain Address or Switch ID (on some switches)

bb = Fibre Area Address or Switch Port (on some switches)
cd = Arbitrated Loop Physical Address or AL_PA
v No connection (No light seen by drive).
Port0 ID:-- -- -- (Soft)
Port1 ID=-- -- cd (Hard)
v Not communicating or did not establish a connection — but does indicate the drive is seeing
light.
Port0 ID:?? ?? ?? (Soft)
Port1 ID=?? ?? cd (Hard)
v AL_PA is being used by another device on the fibre loop.
Port 0 ID=cd CONFLICT.

Note: This condition can be initiated by another device on the loop or via offline menu. The
panel can be used to return the device online if it was bypassed by another device on the
loop.
v Drive AL_PA is bypassed on the loop.
Port 0 ID=cd OFFLINE.

Supplemental messages appear in the two-line message area of the screens. These
messages include general information, user feedback for control actions, and attention
messages. For example,
DIAGS
RUNNING appears under
5 when the drive is running the
internal diagnostics, and if the drive is loading the microcode,
LOADING
CODE appears in this
area.

6 Tape Position A graphic representation of the position of the tape for processing a cartridge or rewinding a
Indicator cartridge. See “Tape Position Indicator” on page 5-9.

7 Status Icons Displays different icons that represent the status of the device. See “File Protected Icons” on
page 5-9 and “Dump Icon” on page 5-9.

8 Cursor (Y) A symbol that moves when the operator presses the up or down arrow. The item that is beside
the cursor is chosen when the operator presses ENTER.

9 Up Arrow (Z) A symbol displayed when the operator has menu choices above the viewing area.

10 Option When the operator presses ENTER, the item by the Y (cursor) is chosen.

If an item is dotted, such as UNLOAD DRIVE in a lighter font, the drive is not available for
use. If the operator presses ENTER, the item is highlighted temporarily and is not activated.

11 Down Arrow ([) A symbol displayed when the operator has menu choices below the viewing area.

5-8 IBM 3590 MI

Indicators and Icons
This section describes the indicators on the 3590.

Processor Check Indicator

This LED indicator is set if the microcode is not following its normal sequence. All activity is stopped; all
data not yet committed to media is lost. The Processor Check indicator is located on the operator/CE
panel and is labeled by a symbol that looks like a wrench.

File Protected Icons

The file-protected icons are displayed in the status icons area of the operator/CE panel (see Figure 5-2 on
page 5-6).

The file-protected icon (physical) is a read only symbol that is displayed when the thumbwheel on the
cartridge is set to the file-protected position.

The file-protected icon (logical) is a read only symbol that is displayed when the 3590 receives the
Mode Select command from a host program that sets the volume to a logically write-protected state. Both
Write Once Read Many (WORM) and Persistent Write Protect status leaves a volume logically
write-protected on subsequent loads. Persistent Write Protection can be turned OFF with a subsequent
Mode Select while write-once, read many (WORM) cannot be turned OFF. Associated Write Protection
persists only while a logical volume is loaded or until a Mode Select changes the protection status.
Associated Write Protection status is lost when a volume is unloaded or the device is powered OFF. File
protection is temporarily inactive (and the icon reverts to file-unprotected) during volume loading and
unloading when the device updates the volume control region (VCR) on the tape.

The file-unprotected icon is a read/write symbol that is displayed when the thumb wheel on the
cartridge is set to the not file-protected position.

Tape Position Indicator

The tape-position indicator provides the operator with a graphical representation of the position of the
device relative to the beginning and end-of-volume (if processing) or the beginning and end-of-tape (if
rewinding).

Dump Icon
The dump icon is located in the status area of the operator/CE panel (see Figure 5-2 on page 5-6).

The dump icon appears when the dump is available, and remains on the screen to indicate that
trace data is stored in the 3590. The icon remains on the screen until the 3590 power is turned OFF, a
dump is taken over a SCSI port, or the dump is written to a tape.

Attention: The dump is lost if you press the Reset pushbutton or switch OFF power to the drive.

Clean Icon
A clean icon is located in the status area of the operator/CE panel (see Figure 5-2 on page 5-6).

The clean icon appears when cartridge cleaning is required. It displays in the same position as the
dump icon and is overlaid by the dump icon until the CLEAN message displays.

This icon alerts the operator that a cleaning operation is requested.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-9

Drive Type Icon
The Drive Type Icon appears in the upper right or lower left part of the display.
See Table 5-1 on page 5-6 for the drive type indicators.

Intervention Messages
Intervention messages are presented on the operator/CE panel in the intervention screen. The intervention
screen consists of an eight-character intervention message displayed in a large font, a prompt indicating
that the Options menu can be accessed by pressing Enter, device status information, and a two-line
message area in the standard font. Figure 5-3 shows the intervention screen followed by an example of a
Mount command that prompts the operator to mount a tape with the volume serial (volser) 123567. In this
example, M means mount and S means scratch The _*______ message indicates an operator mounted a
tape and the job was either cancelled or abended. The Host Software wrote the message as space,
asterisk, space, space, space, space, space, space to the panel.

Figure 5-3. Intervention Screen, Mount Screen, and Abend Screen

Notes:
1. If the Enter key is pressed, the messages are removed from the screen. When a FID message is
displayed and the Enter key is pressed, the FID message will be removed from the screen and
deleted.

5-10 IBM 3590 MI

2. Intervention messages are one-part or two-part messages. Two-part messages consist of two
8-character message parts that alternate. The message types are FID1 messages, attention
messages, routine messages, FID2 messages, FID3 messages, and FID4 messages.

A brief description of each message follows:

v FID1 Messages
A FID1 message is generated by the device when a hardware failure occurs within the device. This
message has priority over all other types of messages, and persists until the error condition is
corrected. The FID code is used by maintenance personnel to identify the failing units within the device.
(FID messages may be temporarily overwritten by menu selections.) Messages are in a bold font.
The format of these messages is ‘FID1 xy’, where ‘FID1’ indicates to the operator that a failure
occurred, and ‘xy’ is the portion of the device to replace. Figure 5-4 shows an example of FID1 C6,
which indicates the machine reel motor has a fault.

Figure 5-4. Error Message Example

When the FRU identifier (FID)
1 and the severity code
2 is presented, the CE uses the FID number

3 to enter the START section. See “Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and MIMs)” on
page 4-2 for a description of the severity codes. The message area
4,
5, and
6 hex data is
support information to help determine if the fault is caused by microcode.
4 represents the first FSC
that caused the FID.
5 represents either the last FSC or the flag data. The first character in
6
represents part of the model number (1 = ACF present, 2 = no ACF); the last three characters represent
the microcode link. A corresponding SIM is transmitted to the initiator.
v Attention Messages
Attention (ATTN) messages indicate error conditions that customer personnel may be able to resolve.
For example, the ATTN ACF message with a supplemental message of Lock Magazine can be
corrected by the operator.
v Routine Messages
Routine Messages consist of messages received from the host through the SCSI Display Message
command (for example, Mount), and messages from the device (for example, *CLEAN).
To generate the Clean message, the device monitors the number of megabytes processed and the
number of nonpermanent errors for each drive. When either of these factors reaches a threshold, the
device displays a Clean message. The clean message is maintained across device power-on reset
conditions.
The routine messages that are received through the Display Message command consist of mount
messages, demount messages, and general (custom) messages.
The routine messages usually refer to the priority cell. Actions that are automatically handled by the
ACF usually occur without the display of an operator message. These messages can be generated by
the initiator; however, if the device microcode detects that the ACF will automatically perform the action
requested, any corresponding message is suppressed.
v FID2 Messages
2
A FID2 message indicates that the drive is in a degraded state. For example, FID2 E4 could indicate
that one SCSI port has a fault. The drive can still be used, but is in a less available state.
v FID3 Messages
2
A FID3 message indicates that the drive is in a degraded state. The drive can still be used, but is in a
more available state than for a FID2 type of fault.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-11

v FID4 Messages
2
A FID4 message indicates that some service circuitry failed. For example, FID4 E4 could indicate that a
parity-check circuit failed.

5-12 IBM 3590 MI

3590 Intervention Messages
Table 5-3 describes messages that may be displayed for the 3590.
Table 5-3. Intervention Messages
Message Message Meaning
FID 1 Messages
FID 1 These messages indicate device errors that require CE action. The device cannot perform any tasks. Go
to the START section with the FID number.
ATTN Messages
Attention These messages indicate error conditions that operators can resolve, such as Lock magazine.
Routine Messages
Mvolser The M prompts the operator to mount volser in the priority cell.
*CLEAN This message prefixed with an asterisk (*) prompts the operator to put a cleaning cartridge in the priority
cell.

If the text
CLEAN_REQUIRED is also present, a cleaning cartridge must be loaded before any other drive
operations can be performed.
Dvolser The D prompts the operator to remove volser from the priority cell.
FID 2 Messages
FID 2 These messages report a degraded device condition. Go to the START section with the FID number.
FID 3 Messages
FID 3 These messages report a degraded device condition. Go to the START section with the FID number.
FID 4 Messages
FID 4 These messages report a service circuitry failure. Go to the START section with the FID number.
Note: The following are informational messages, not intervention conditions.
Device activity or status messages
Device activity These messages are displayed in the supplemental message area. These messages include reading,
writing, and locating.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-13

 Operator/CE Panel Menus
The operator/CE panel allows information to be passed from the device to the operator and back to the
device. The operator and CE can be presented menu-driven options for device operation. Examples
include the display of SCSI port addresses and operator panel languages.

| The remainder of this chapter is divided in the following manner:

| 1. “Operator and CE Panel Flow Charts” on page 5-15
| 2. “Operator Menus” on page 5-22 (available to operator and CE)
| 3. “CE Online Mode Panel Menus” on page 5-34 (available only to CE)
| 4. “CE Offline Mode Menu” on page 5-38 (available only to CE)

| Note: The CE-only menus are accessed by pressing the hidden pushbutton Change Mode . Press
| the Change Mode pushbutton while in CE mode to return the operator/CE panel to operator
| menus.

| Options that are unavailable are displayed in a lighter, dotted font and cannot be selected. The first
example in Figure 5-5 shows the Unload Drive option
1 when there is no cartridge in the device. The
option is displayed in a lighter, dotted font, which indicates it cannot be selected. The second example in
Figure 5-5 shows the Unload Drive option
2 when there is a cartridge in the device. The option is
displayed in a darker font, which indicates it can be selected.

# START

UNLOAD DRIVE
1

# START

UNLOAD DRIVE
2

Figure 5-5. Example of Selection Options

If you move the cursor (Y) to
1 and press Enter, the selection responds with the normal font
2
momentarily and then returns to the lighter font. The 3590 will not perform any action.

The following are common terms. They will be used throughout the panel section.
Table Caption Indicates the Menu Name on the operator panel.
... Indicates the menu is linked to another menu.

5-14 IBM 3590 MI

| Operator and CE Panel Flow Charts
| Figure 5-6 shows the operator panel functions and Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 shows the CE panel functions.
| Bold text in the figures shows the names of the menus.
|

Figure 5-6. Operator Menus

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-15

|

|
| Figure 5-7. Verify Mode Menu
|
|

5-16 IBM 3590 MI

|

|
| Figure 5-8. CE Panel Menu (Part 1 of 5)
|
|

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-17

 |
|
|
|

5-18
CE OPTIONS Menu (continued)

From B

IBM 3590 MI
CE Drive Options Menu

Cancel

Drv Serial No

Drv Features CE Drv Serial No Menu

| Figure 5-8. CE Panel Menu (Part 2 of 5)

Cancel
Wrap Tools
Disp Serial No
No Lrg Disp Attach CE Drive Features Menu Alter Serial No
Cancel
Hdw Not/Present for Double Length Tape
B11/E11/H11 Deskside ACF H
SCSI Config CE SCSI
Config Menu B11/E11/H11 Rack/Frame
(SCSI Models Only)
Autoshare B1A/E1A/H1A 3494 RS422 Att
Clean Mounts Enabled/Disabled
Wide/Narrow SCSI B1A/E1A/H1A C12/C14
Clean Usage Fast/Slow SCSI B1A/E1A/H1A No RS422 Attach
H SARS Enabled/Disabled B1A/E1A/H1A Deskside
CE SCSI H1A C12/C14 Menu
Config Menu B1A/E1A/H1A Interface A Auto Clean On/Off
V SARS Enabled/Disabled (xxx)
B1A/E1A/H1A Interface B Drv Emul
Save And Return
User Dfnd Emul Typer
SARS Trap Enabled/Disabled

SIM Sev Filt On/Off CE Drive Emulation Menu

Cancel
MIM Sev Filt On/Off 4480
CE VPD 4490
Num Repeat SIMS H
Data Menu 9490
Disable CU Mode SD-3
A14M0070

(drive in CU Mode only) 9840

|

|
| Figure 5-8. CE Panel Menu (Part 3 of 5)
|
|

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-19

|

|
| Figure 5-8. CE Panel Menu (Part 4 of 5)
|
|

5-20 IBM 3590 MI

 From F
From G

Password Menu
CE Verify Fix Menu
<Password>
Test Device
Test ACF
OEM Use Only Menu Load Scratch Tape Menu
Fibre Wrap Test (fibre drives only)
Manufacturer
Test Panel
Drive Type

| Figure 5-8. CE Panel Menu (Part 5 of 5)

Test Media
Drive Model Num
Test head
Save Changes
FRU Replaced
CE VPD Field Loop Diag
Offset Menu
<Number>
Cancel CE Loop Diagnostic Menu
HGA Replaced Cancel
H Tape Path Repaired POST
ACF Mech
Read/Write
ACF Load Test
Panel
Model C1X Wrap Test
(C12/C14 Models only)

Fibre Wrap Test

Fibre Wrap Test

Both Ports
Port 0
A14M0073

Port 1

Chapter 5. Operator Panel

5-21
Operator Menus
These menus are available at the successful completion of the power-on self-test (POST).

Options Menu
Table 5-4 shows the Options menu.
Table 5-4. Options Menu
Function Next Menu
Start/Allow Load (Model C12/C14 only) —
Set ACF Mode... “Set ACF Mode Menu” on page 5-23
Unload Drive —
Services... “Services Menu” on page 5-23

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Note: If the STL0 card is detected the Allow Load is displayed.

Start Start enables the ACF on a Model B11/E11/H11. This function cannot be
selected on a Model B1A/E1A/H1A
Allow Load Allow Load allows loading cartridges when the 3590 Model C12/C14 is in
manual mode.
Set ACF Mode Sets the ACF mode for Model B11/E11/H11.
Unload Drive Causes the device to rewind and to unload the cartridge in the device.
Services Allows the operator to perform configuration tasks, such as setting the
SCSI online and offline.

5-22 IBM 3590 MI

Set ACF Mode Menu
Table 5-5 shows the Set ACF Mode menu.
Table 5-5. Set ACF Mode Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Options Menu” on page 5-22
System “Options Menu” on page 5-22
Automatic “Options Menu” on page 5-22
Manual “Options Menu” on page 5-22
Accumulate “Options Menu” on page 5-22
Random ( Model B11 only) “Options Menu” on page 5-22
Random 2-LUN “Options Menu” on page 5-22

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “Options Menu” on page 5-22 to appear.

System Places cartridge feeding under system control.
Automatic Takes the cartridges that are loaded in the import position of the magazine
and automatically feeds one cartridge after another until the entire
magazine is processed.
Manual Feeds a cartridge into the drive.
Accumulate Takes the cartridge from the priority cell and places it in the drive. It
unloads cartridges from the drive to the magazine.
Random Places all the cartridges in the import position. The magazine must be
locked. This option is available on the Model B11 only.
Random 2-LUN Places the ACF in Random mode, as described above, and adds an extra
SCSI Logical Unit (LUN) to control the ACF. See the host software
instructions for attaching to 3590 or a SCSI Medium Changer. This option
is available on the Model B11/E11/H11.

See Chapter 6, “Automatic Cartridge Facility” on page 6-1 for a description of the modes and positions.

Services Menu
Table 5-6 shows the Services menu.
Table 5-6. Services Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Options Menu” on page 5-22
Set Online... “Set Online Menu” on page 5-25
Set Offline... “Set Offline Menu” on page 5-25
Set Address... (SCSI) “Set Address Menu (SCSI)” on page 5-26
Fibre Address... (Fibre) “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28
Change Language... “Change Language Menu” on page 5-31
Statistics... “Statistics Menu” on page 5-31
Refresh Tape...
Microcode Level Figure 5-9 on page 5-24 then after selection, to “Services Menu”
Reset Drive Figure 5-10 on page 5-24 then after selection, to “Services Menu”
Force Error Dump Figure 5-10 on page 5-24 then after selection, to “Services Menu”
Note: Supplemental Message Lines: <none>

Cancel Causes the “Options Menu” on page 5-22 to appear.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-23

Set Online Logically enables the device to communicate on the SCSI bus. Activate
Set Online at the device first, then have the host place the device online
(vary online).
Set Offline Logically disables the device from the SCSI bus. Select Set Offline only
after the host has taken the device offline (vary offline) first.
Set Address SCSI Provides the two SCSI addresses to be selected; one address
associated with each device interface. Each address consists of one
hexadecimal digit that specifies the SCSI address for that interface. After
the address is set, modify the host information to include the correct
addresses.
Fibre Address Fibre Provides the two Fibre addresses to be selected; one address
associated with each device port. Each address consists of two
hexadecimal digits that specifies the Fibre Port address for that interface.
After the address is set, modify the host information to include the correct
addresses. See “Fibre Channel World Wide Name History Log” on
page 9-63.
Change Language Allows the operator to select the operator panel language.
Statistics Displays the number of times certain events occurred.
Microcode Level Displays the microcode EC level that is in DRAM. Figure 5-9 shows an
example.

MICROCODE LEVEL
YCANCEL
EC aaaaaaa
LINK bbcd_ddd

Figure 5-9. Microcode Level Menu

Legend
aaaaaaa = Engineering change level
bb = Productg identifier
c = Link identifier
d_ddd = Link number
Reset Drive Aborts the operation and causes the drive code to restart. If dump data is
in the drive, it is not lost.

Note: Current operation (for example Locate) will be completed before

Reset Drive executes. This may cause a delay before Reset Drive
is executed.
Force Error Dump Aborts the operation, causes a recovery of the functional code, and forces
a microcode dump. After getting the dump, select Reset Drive. This
selection is normally used because of specific requests from support
personnel.

Choosing Reset Drive or Force Error Dump causes the menu shown in Figure 5-10 to appear.

ARE YOU SURE? |

YCANCEL |
PROCEED | Will abort jobs

Figure 5-10. Confirmation Menu

Cancel Causes the microcode to ignore the selection and causes the Services menu to appear.

5-24 IBM 3590 MI

Proceed Causes the microcode to perform the operation chosen (Reset Drive or Force Error Dump)
from the Services menu.

Set Online Menu

Table 5-7 shows the Set Online menu.
Table 5-7. Set Online Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Services Menu” on page 5-23
Port 0 “Options Menu” on page 5-22
Port 1 “Options Menu” on page 5-22
Both “Options Menu” on page 5-22

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “Services Menu” on page 5-23 to appear.

Port 0 Causes SCSI port 0 to be set online.
Port 1 Causes SCSI port 1 to be set online.
Both Causes both SCSI port 0 and port 1 to be set online.

Note: The host must also vary the device online.

Set Offline Menu

Table 5-8 shows the Set Offline menu.
Table 5-8. Set Offline Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Services Menu” on page 5-23
Port 0 “Confirm Offline Menu” on page 5-26 or “Options Menu” on page 5-22
Port 1 “Confirm Offline Menu” on page 5-26 or “Options Menu” on page 5-22
Both “Confirm Offline Menu” on page 5-26

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “Services Menu” on page 5-23 to appear.

Port 0 Causes SCSI port 0 to be set offline.
Port 1 Causes SCSI port 1 to be set offline.
Both Causes both SCSI port 0 and port 1 to be set offline.
Notes:
1. The device should be acquiesced by the host (vary the device offline) before taking
the device offline or before powering OFF the device.
2. If the device interface successfully goes offline, the “Options Menu” on page 5-22
appears, otherwise the operator can proceed to “Confirm Offline Menu” on page 5-26
for further options.
3. The device must complete all activity currently on the interface before it can go offline.
If the device or the initiator cannot complete activity before going offline, “Confirm
Offline Menu” on page 5-26 is displayed to allow the operator an override and force the
ports offline.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-25

Confirm Offline Menu
Table 5-9 shows the Confirm Offline menu.
Table 5-9. Confirm Offline Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Set Offline Menu” on page 5-25
Proceed “Options Menu” on page 5-22

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Caution: Data loss
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: risk

Cancel Cancels the offline request and causes the “Set Offline Menu” on page 5-25 to appear.
Proceed Forces the ports offline. If write activity exists, any write data in the device is lost. The
Proceed option causes the job to terminate.
Notes:
1. The device should be acquiesced by the host (vary the device offline) before taking
the device offline or before powering OFF the device.
2. If the device interface successfully goes offline, the “Options Menu” on page 5-22
appears, otherwise the operator can proceed to “Confirm Offline Menu” for further
options.
3. The device must complete all activity currently on the interface before it can go offline.
If the device or the initiator cannot complete activity before going offline, “Confirm
Offline Menu” is displayed to allow the operator an override and force the ports offline.

Set Address Menu (SCSI)

Table 5-10 shows the Set Address menu.
Table 5-10. Set Address Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Services Menu” on page 5-23
Port 0... “Set Port 0 Address Menu (SCSI)” on page 5-27
Port 1... “Set Port 1 Address Menu (SCSI)” on page 5-27

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Change made after
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: unload and reset

Cancel Causes the “Services Menu” on page 5-23 to appear.

Port 0 Causes the “Set Port 0 Address Menu (SCSI)” on page 5-27 to appear.
Port 1 Causes the “Set Port 1 Address Menu (SCSI)” on page 5-27 to appear.

Note: The address must be defined at the host also.

5-26 IBM 3590 MI

Set Port 0 Address Menu (SCSI)
Table 5-11 shows the Set Port 0 Address menu.
Table 5-11. Set Port 0 Address Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Set Address Menu (SCSI)” on page 5-26
0 “Options Menu” on page 5-22
1 “Options Menu” on page 5-22
... “Options Menu” on page 5-22
F “Options Menu” on page 5-22

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Change made after
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: next power on

Cancel Causes the “Set Address Menu (SCSI)” on page 5-26 to appear.
<value> Allows the operator to set the address of SCSI port 0. The value can be from 0–15 (16
addresses). See “Set Customer Options” on page 8-35 for SCSI Address restrictions.

Note: You must select Reset Drive from the Services menu, press the Reset pushbutton,
or power cycle the device to activate the new address.

Set Port 1 Address Menu (SCSI)

Table 5-12 shows the Set Port 1 Address menu.
Table 5-12. Set Port 1 Address Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Set Address Menu (SCSI)” on page 5-26
0 “Options Menu” on page 5-22
1 “Options Menu” on page 5-22
... “Options Menu” on page 5-22
F “Options Menu” on page 5-22

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Change made after
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: next power on

Cancel Causes the “Set Address Menu (SCSI)” on page 5-26 to appear.
<value> Allows the operator to set the address of SCSI port 1. The value can be from 0–15 (16
addresses). See “Set Customer Options” on page 8-35 for SCSI Address restrictions.

Note: You must select Reset Drive from the Services menu, press the Reset pushbutton,
or power cycle the device to activate the new address.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-27

Fibre Addresses Menu
Table 5-13 shows the Fibre Addresses menu.
Table 5-13. Fibre Addresses Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Services Menu” on page 5-23
Show Node Name... “Show Node Name Menu”
Show Port Names... “Show Port Names Menu” on page 5-29
Set Port 0... “Set Port 0 Address Menu (Fibre)” on page 5-29
Set Port 1... “Set Port 1 Address Menu (Fibre)” on page 5-30

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Port0 ID=aa bb cd
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Port1 ID=aa bb cd

Cancel Causes the “Services Menu” on page 5-23 to appear.

Show Node Name Displays the Node Name assigned to the drive.
Show Port Names Displays the Port Names for both Port 0 and Port 1
Set Port 0 Causes the “Set Port 0 Address Menu (Fibre)” on page 5-29 to appear.
Set Port 1 Causes the “Set Port 1 Address Menu (Fibre)” on page 5-30 to appear.

Note: Refer to “Messages and Supplemental Messages (Fibre Channel Only)” in Table 5-2 on page 5-7
for additional fibre addressing information.

Show Node Name Menu

Table 5-14 shows the Node Name menu.
Table 5-14. Show Node Name Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Fibre Addresses Menu”
Node Name “Fibre Addresses Menu”
0123456789abcdef

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Port0 ID=aa bb cd
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Port1 ID=aa bb cd

Cancel Causes the “Fibre Addresses Menu” to appear.

Node Name Displays the 16 byte Node Name assigned to the drive.

Note: Refer to “Messages and Supplemental Messages (Fibre Channel Only)” in Table 5-2 on page 5-7
for additional fibre addressing information.

5-28 IBM 3590 MI

Show Port Names Menu
Table 5-15 shows the Port Names menu.
Table 5-15. Show Port Names Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28
Port 0 Name “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28
0123456789abcdef
Port 1 Name “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28
0123456789abcdef

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Port0 ID=aa bb cd
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Port1 ID=aa bb cd

Cancel Causes the “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28 to appear.

Port 0 Name Displays the 16 byte Port Name assigned to the Port.
Port 1 Name Displays the 16 byte Port Name assigned to the Port.

Note: Refer to “Messages and Supplemental Messages (Fibre Channel Only)” in Table 5-2 on page 5-7
for additional fibre addressing information.

Set Port 0 Address Menu (Fibre)

Table 5-16 shows the Set Port 0 Address menu.
Table 5-16. Set Port 0 Address Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28
Set Hard Addr... “Set Hard Address Menu” on page 5-30
Use Soft Address “Use Soft Address Menu” on page 5-31

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Port0 ID=aa bb cd
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Port1 ID=aa bb cd

Cancel Causes the “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28 to appear.

Set Hard Addr... Takes you to the Set Hard Address menu. Selecting the hard address
option allows selection of the Arbitrated Loop Physical Address (AL_PA).
The higher the number, the lower the priority.
Use Soft Addr... Allows the port to use the system default value. The soft address feature
allows the drive to arbitrate the AL_PA number with other fibre devices.

Note: Refer to “Messages and Supplemental Messages (Fibre Channel Only)” in Table 5-2 on page 5-7
for additional fibre addressing information.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-29

Set Port 1 Address Menu (Fibre)
Table 5-17 shows the Set Port 1 Address menu.
Table 5-17. Set Port 1 Address Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28
Set Hard Addr... “Set Hard Address Menu”
Use Soft Address “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Port0 ID=aa bb cd
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Port1 ID=aa bb cd

Cancel Causes the “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28 to appear.

Set Hard Addr... Takes you to the Set Hard Address menu. Selecting the hard address
option allows selection of the Arbitrated Loop Physical Address (AL_PA).
The higher the number, the lower the priority.
Use Soft Addr... Allows the port to use the system default value. The soft address feature
allows the drive to arbitrate the AL_PA number with other fibre devices.

Note: Refer to “Messages and Supplemental Messages (Fibre Channel Only)” in Table 5-2 on page 5-7
for additional fibre addressing information.

Set Hard Address Menu

Table 5-18 shows the Set Hard Address menu
Table 5-18. Set Hard Address Menu
Function Next Menu
CANCEL “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28
c —
d —
SAVE DATA “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <PORT n:cd>
v n = the port number. (0 or 1)
v cd = the last AL_PA value saved.
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <ll — Valid Addr/Invalid — hh >
v ll = the next lower valid address.
v Valid Addr/Invalid = indicates the cd address is valid or invalid.
v hh = the next higher valid AL_PA.

Cancel Causes the “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28 to appear.

c Causes the high order number (c) to increment. This hexadecimal number wraps from F to
0.
d Causes the low order number (d) to increment. This hexadecimal number wraps from F to
0.
Save Data Causes the port addresses to be saved and then return to “Fibre Addresses Menu” on
page 5-28.

This menu allows selection of the AL_PA for the port. As the ″c″ and ″d″ options are incremented, the
supplemental message lines indicate whether the new value is valid or not. The lines also indicate the next
higher and lower valid addresses. Select only a valid address for the AL_PA. If the drive can not configure
(LIP) with this AL_PA try a different one.

Note: Refer to “Messages and Supplemental Messages (Fibre Channel Only)” in Table 5-2 on page 5-7
for additional fibre addressing information.

5-30 IBM 3590 MI

Use Soft Address Menu
Table 5-19 shows the Save Data menu
Table 5-19. Use Soft Address Menu
Function Next Menu
Continue... “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Port0 ID=aa bb cd
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Port1 ID=aa bb cd

Continue The action was successful and operation complete. The “Fibre Addresses
Menu” on page 5-28 will appear.

Note: Refer to “Messages and Supplemental Messages (Fibre Channel Only)” in Table 5-2 on page 5-7
for additional fibre addressing information.

Change Language Menu

Table 5-20 shows the Change Language menu.
Table 5-20. Change Language Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Services Menu” on page 5-23
English “Options Menu” on page 5-22
Spanish “Options Menu” on page 5-22
German “Options Menu” on page 5-22

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “Services Menu” on page 5-23 to appear.

<language> Allows the operator to select the operator panel language.

Note: The languages supported are English, German, and Spanish.

The CE menus only display in English.

Statistics Menu
Table 5-21 shows the Statistics menu.
Table 5-21. Statistics Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Services Menu” on page 5-23
Show Statistics... “Show Statistics Menu” on page 5-32
Save “Statistics Menu”

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “Services Menu” on page 5-23 to appear.

Show Statistics Causes “Show Statistics Menu” on page 5-32 to appear.
Save Causes the statistics to be saved in nonvolatile storage.

Note: In later levels of microcode the statistics are displayed in decimal

instead of hexadecimal.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-31

Show Statistics Menu
Table 5-22 is an example of the Show Statistics menu.
Table 5-22. Show Statistics Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Statistics Menu” on page 5-31
Mounts to Drv “Show Statistics Menu”
Priority Mnts “Show Statistics Menu”
Magazine Mnts “Show Statistics Menu”
Clean Mounts “Show Statistics Menu”
Pwr On Hrs “Show Statistics Menu”

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “Statistics Menu” on page 5-31 to appear.

Mounts to Drv Displays the total number of times a cartridge was mounted in the drive.
Priority Mnts Displays the total number of times a cartridge was loaded in the priority
cell.
Magazine Mnts Displays the total number of times a cartridge was loaded in any of the
cells of the magazine.
Clean Mounts Displays the total number of times a cleaning cartridge was loaded in the
device.
Pwr On Hrs Displays the total number of hours the device was powered ON.
Notes:
1. When the card pack is replaced, the Power On Hrs (time stamp) is
reset to day = 0000.
2. In later levels of microcode the statistics are displayed in decimal
instead of hexadecimal.

5-32 IBM 3590 MI

Confirm Mode Change Menu
The following menus are accessed by pressing the Change Mode pushbutton.

Table 5-23 shows the Confirm Mode Change menu.

Table 5-23. Confirm Mode Change Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel Previous menu
Operator Mode “Options Menu” on page 5-22 if no job, or Figure 5-11 if job is in progress.
CE Offline Options “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
CE Online Options “CE Online Mode Options Menu” on page 5-34

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: DATA LOSS RISK
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: none

When the Change Mode pushbutton is pressed, this menu may be displayed when switching from operator
to CE mode or CE to operator mode (dependent on job activity).
Cancel Displays the previous menu that was active before the Change Mode pushbutton is
pressed
Operator Mode
Restores the online status of the ports when changing from CE mode to operator mode
CE Offline Options
Forces the ports offline if going to CE mode and no job was in progress. If a job was
active at the time, a new menu shown below is displayed:
CE Online Options
Forces the ports to CE Online Mode

RESET DRIVE...
YCANCEL
RESET DRIVE...
FORCE ERROR DUMP...

Figure 5-11. Confirm Mode Change-Proceed Menu

The RESET DRIVE option results in job termination.

Attention: The device should be quiesced by the host (vary device offline) before taking the device
offline, powering OFF the device, or entering CE mode.

The online status of the ports is restored when changing from CE mode to operator mode.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-33

| CE Online Mode Panel Menus
| CE Online Mode allows the CE and customer to use the drive concurrently. Only limited operations are
| allowed. Some panels have partial displays, such as display sensors. The CE operations may interfere
| with customer operation.

| Attention: Any accidental operation of the reset pushbutton will severely impact customer operation.

| CE Online Mode Options Menu

| The following menus are accessed by pressing the Change Mode pushbutton.

| Table 5-24 shows the CE Online Mode Options menu.

| Table 5-24. CE Online Options Menu
| Function Next Menu
| Logs... “CE Logs Menu (CE Modes)”
| Display Serial No... “CE DRV Serial No Menu (CE Modes)” on page 5-35
| Display Sensors... “CE Disp Sensors Menu (CE Online Mode)” on page 5-36
| Show Statistics... “Show Statistics Menu (CE Modes)” on page 5-37

| Notes:
| 1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
| 2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>
|
| Logs Allows the CE to view the error logs
| Display Serial No Allows the CE to display the serial number in decimal
| Display Sensors Allows the CE to display the state of some of the sensors
| Show Statistics Allows the CE to display tape and drive statistics and store the status of
| the device in nonvolatile storage

| CE Logs Menu (CE Modes)

| Table 5-25 shows data from the CE Logs menu.
| Table 5-25. CE Logs Menu Items
| Function Next Menu
| Cancel “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
| Error Log... “CE Error Log Menu” on page 5-61
| FID FE Log... “CE FID FE Log Menu” on page 5-63
| FID FF Log... “CE FID FF Log Menu” on page 5-64
| Temp Error Log... “CE Temp Error Log Menu” on page 5-65

| Notes:
| 1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
| 2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>
|
| Cancel Causes the “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38 to appear
| Error Log Allows the CE to view the Error Log
| FID FE Log Allows the CE to view the FID FE log
| FID FF Log Allows the CE to view the FID FF log
| Temp Error Log Allows the CE to view the Temp Error log

5-34 IBM 3590 MI

| CE DRV Serial No Menu (CE Modes)
| This menu appears in both CE Modes.
| Table 5-26. CE DRV Serial No Menu
| Function Next Menu
| Cancel “CE Online Mode Options Menu” on page 5-34
| Disp Serial No... “Display Serial No Menu (CE Modes)”
| Alter Serial No... “Alter Serial No Menu”
|
| Cancel
| Cancels the operation and returns to the previous menu
| Disp Serial
| Causes “Display Serial No Menu (CE Modes)” to appear
| Alter Serial
| Causes “Alter Serial No Menu” to appear

| Display Serial No Menu (CE Modes)

| Table 5-27 depicts the Drive Serial Number menu information.
| Table 5-27. CE DRV Ser No Menu
| Display Next Menu
| Cancel Table 5-24 on page 5-34
| 000000010011 (for example)

| Notes:
| 1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
| 2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>
|
| Cancel Causes the CE Online Options menu to return. Menu has the 12 position
| decimal Drive Serial Number displayed

| Alter Serial No Menu

| Table 5-28 depicts some CE VPD data.
| Table 5-28. CE VPD Data Menu
| CE VPD Data
E11FX
| Y 1 Z Sequence Number
| 0
| 0
| 1
| 1
| SAVE AND CONTINUE
|
| Cancel Causes the “CE DRV Serial No Menu (CE Modes)” to appear
| 0123456789ABCDEF Selecting this option increments the hexadecimal character next to the
| cursor with the enter key. The number wraps from ‘F’ to 0’.
| Save and Continue Causes “CE Save Data (Serial)” on page 5-36 to appear to confirm the
| storing of data

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-35

| CE Save Data (Serial)
| Table 5-29 shows the CE Save Data menu.

| This menu allows the CE to save or abort the saving of the data previously entered.
| Table 5-29. CE Save Data Menu
| Function Next Menu
| Cancel “CE DRV Serial No Menu (CE Modes)” on page 5-35
| Yes “CE DRV Serial No Menu (CE Modes)” on page 5-35
| No “CE DRV Serial No Menu (CE Modes)” on page 5-35

| Notes:
| 1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Sequence Number
| 2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>
|
| Cancel Causes the “CE DRV Serial No Menu (CE Modes)” on page 5-35 to
| appear. The address is not saved.
| Yes Saves the address and returns to “CE DRV Serial No Menu (CE Modes)”
| on page 5-35.
| No Does not save address and returns to “CE DRV Serial No Menu (CE
| Modes)” on page 5-35.

| CE Disp Sensors Menu (CE Online Mode)

| Table 5-30 shows the Disp Sensors menu. This menu allows the CE to view the state of the ACF and drive
| sensors, and to change the states dynamically. A delay of approximately one second is required between
| sensor state changes.
| Table 5-30. CE Disp Sensors Menu
| Function Next Menu
| CANCEL “CE Online Mode Options Menu” on page 5-34
| A:1 B:1 Display pantocam A and B sensor states
| TU:1 DO:1 Display loader tray up and door open states
| CP:1 Display loader cartridge present sensor states
| Note: Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in
| the area of the strain relief clamp, see “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67, item
6. Verify the
| sensor operation by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If
| the cable is bad, replace the Drive FRU assembly. See “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67.
| FP:0 CT:0000 Display loader file protect sensor; cartridge type sensor states
| PS:1 MP:0 ML:0 Model B11/E11/H11 only. Display priority slot, magazine present, and magazine loaded sensor
| states
| GI:0 GCP:1 Model B11/E11/H11 only. Display global interference sensor and global cartridge present sensor
| states
| P1:1 P2:0 IM:0 Model B11/E11/H11 only. Display ACF pinch 1 & 2, import sensor states
| L1:1 L2:0 EX:0 Model B11/E11/H11 only. Display ACF limit 1 & 2, export sensor states
| A1:1 B:1 Model B11/E11/H11 only. Display ACF elevator servo A & B sensor states
| <blank> The above five lines are replaced with one blank line for Model B1A/E1A/H1A.
| SN:0 Model B1A/E1A/H1A with library interface card (LIC) only. Model B1A/E1A/H1A without the library
| interface card or those with STL0 cards. do not display this sensor.
|

| Note: The values shown for each sensor will vary on your machine depending upon whether a cartridge is
| loaded and other conditions. For more information, see “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35.
|

5-36 IBM 3590 MI

| Show Statistics Menu (CE Modes)
| Table 5-31 shows data from the CE Show Statistics menu.
| Table 5-31. CE Show Statistics Menu
| Function Next Menu
| Cancel “CE Online Mode Options Menu” on page 5-34
| Show Drive Statistics... “Show Drive Statistics Menu (CE Modes)”
| Show Tape Statistics... “Show Tape Statistics Menu (CE Modes)” on page 5-38
| Save and Return Causes the statistics to be saved in nonvolatile storage and returns to “Show Statistics
| Menu (CE Modes)”
|
| Cancel Cancels the operation and returns to the CE Online Mode menu
| Show Drive Statistics Causes “Show Drive Statistics Menu (CE Modes)” to appear
| Show Tape Statistics Causes “Show Tape Statistics Menu (CE Modes)” on page 5-38 to appear
| Save and Return Causes the statistics to be saved in nonvolatile storage

| Show Drive Statistics Menu (CE Modes)

| Table 5-32 is an example of the Show Statistics menu.
| Table 5-32. Show Drive Statistics Menu
| Function Next Menu
| Cancel
| DRV Mounts... “Show Statistics Menu” on page 5-32
| CE DRV Mb Writtn... “Show Statistics Menu” on page 5-32
| CE DRV Mb Read... “Show Statistics Menu” on page 5-32
| Magazine Mnts “Show Statistics Menu” on page 5-32
| Clean Mounts “Show Statistics Menu” on page 5-32
| Power On Hours “Show Statistics Menu” on page 5-32

| Notes:
| 1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <Drive status — (READY and at LOAD POINT)>
| 2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>
|
| Cancel Causes the to appear
| CE DRV Mb Writtn Displays the total number of megabytes written by the drive
| CE DRV Mb Read Displays the total number of megabytes read by the drive
| Mounts to Drv Displays the total number of times a cartridge was mounted in the drive
| Priority Mnts Displays the total number of times a cartridge was loaded in the priority
| cell
| Magazine Mnts Displays the total number of times a cartridge was loaded in any of the
| cells of the magazine
| Clean Mounts Displays the total number of times a cleaning cartridge was loaded in the
| device
| Power On Hours Displays the total number of hours the device was powered ON.
| Notes:
| 1. When the card pack is replaced, the Power On Hrs (time stamp) is
| reset to day = 0000.
| 2. In later levels of microcode the statistics are displayed in decimal
| instead of hexadecimal.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-37

| Show Tape Statistics Menu (CE Modes)
| Table 5-33 is an example of the Show Tape Statistics menu.
| Table 5-33. Show Tape Statistics menu
| Function Next Menu
| Cancel
| Tape Mounts “Show Statistics Menu” on page 5-32
| Tape Mb Writtn “Show Statistics Menu” on page 5-32
| Tape Mb Read “Show Statistics Menu” on page 5-32
| Clean Mounts “Show Statistics Menu” on page 5-32

| Notes:
| 1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
| 2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>
|
| Cancel Causes the “Statistics Menu” on page 5-31 to appear
| Tape Mounts Displays the total number of times a tape volume was mounted in a drive
| Tape Mb Writen Displays the total number of megabytes writen on the cartridge
| Tape Mb Read Displays the total number of megabytes read on the cartridge

CE Offline Mode Menu

Attention: Entering CE mode causes the device to immediately go offline to all initiators on both
interfaces; therefore, any current read/write activity results in job termination. In general, the device should
be quiesced by the host (vary device offline) before taking the device offline, powering OFF the device, or
entering CE mode.

The following menus are accessed by pressing the Change Mode pushbutton.

| CE Options Menu
Table 5-34 shows the CE Options menu.
Table 5-34. CE Options Menu
Function Next Menu
Verify Fix... “CE Verify Fix Menu” on page 5-39
Dump... “CE Main Dump Menu” on page 5-44
FMR Tape... “CE FMR Tape Menu” on page 5-47
Config/Install... “CE Config/Install Menu” on page 5-51
Logs... “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
Utilities... “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Verify Fix Allows the CE to check good machine operation

Dump Allows the CE to move dump data
FMR Tape Allows the CE to perform microcode updates
Config/Install Allows the CE to customize the device to meet the customer’s
requirements at installation
Logs Allows the CE to view the Error logs
Utilities Allows the CE to display control store and register data from any valid
address. Use this option with assistance from support personnel.

5-38 IBM 3590 MI

 CE Verify Fix Menu
Table 5-35 shows the CE Verify Fix menu. This menu allows the CE to select tests to run.
Table 5-35. CE Verify Fix Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
Test Device Figure 5-12 on page 5-40 or “CE Load Scratch Tape Menu” on page 5-49
Test ACF “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
Fibre Wrap Test... “CE Fibre Wrap Menu” on page 5-60
Test Panel “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
Test Media “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
Test Head “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
C1x Wrap Test “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
FRU Replaced... “FRU Replaced Menu” on page 5-41
Loop Diag... “CE Loop Diag Menu” on page 5-42

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Load scratch (conditional)
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: magazine (conditional)

Cancel Causes the CE Options menu to appear

Test Device Runs most of the tests that normally occur when power is switched ON to
the drive. Also, the CE is requested to load a tape to run the tape motion
and read/write tests. The test checks motors, sensors, memory, head, and
the card pack.
Notes:
| 1. For Test Media and Test Head: If the message “Use diagnostic tape”
| appears, the customer tape contains data. Instead, use a scratch tape,
| an unlabeled tape, or a diagnostic tape to run this test.
2. At the completion of Test Device microprogram, Test ACF will
automatically run if the drive can sense the ACF is installed.
3. If “Test Device” runs without error, then you should view, analyze and
fix any errors in the error logs. See “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60.
Test ACF Runs tests on the automatic cartridge facility
Fibre Wrap Test Runs tests on the fibre channel through the wrap plug
Test Panel Runs tests on the operator/CE panel. Allows the CE to visually check all
pixels on the operator/CE panel display.
Test Media This test is normally run only at the request of support personnel. Runs
Read/Write tests on the outer tracks of the tape to verify the media
tracking and performance.
Test Head This test is normally run only at the request of support personnel. Runs
Read/Write tests on the inner tracks of the tape to verify the head
performance.
C1x Wrap Test Runs the STL0 wrap test (this test only appears on Models C12/C14)
FRU Replaced Allows the CE to reset some of the drive statistical data after replacing the
HGA or a FRU in the tape path
Loop Diag Allows the CE to loop the diagnostic tests from “CE Loop Diag Menu” on
page 5-42

When a test starts to run, the Status menu shown in Figure 5-12 on page 5-40 appears.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-39

Figure 5-12. Status Menu

When a Loop Diag test starts to run, the Status menu shown in Figure 5-13 appears.

CE WAIT MENU
RUNNING ...
STOP AND
FORCE ERROR DUMP
A14M0047

STOP RUNNING

Figure 5-13. Loop Status Menu

The difference in Figure 5-12 and Figure 5-13 is that the later menu is present when Loop Diag tests are
being run. If single pass diagnostics are being run, Figure 5-12 will display.

Figure 5-14. Final Status Display

When the test needs a tape, “CE Load Scratch Tape Menu” on page 5-49 is displayed.

Attention: It is recommended that when an Extended High Performance Cartridge drive needs a scratch
tape an Extended High Performance Cartridge tape is used. The tests will take more time, but the entire
capability will be tested.

When you load a tape and select Process Loaded Tape, Figure 5-12 is again displayed until the test is
completed or until an error is detected. If the operator/CE panel shows the file protected icon, the tape is
either physically write protected, or the wrong format scratch tape has been loaded.

Allow the tests to run to completion. When a test ends, the results are displayed on Figure 5-14 (the
second screen shows an example of a failure).

5-40 IBM 3590 MI

Attention: Do not select Force Error Dump from the menu when the tests are running unless you are
sure the 3590 is in a hung condition. Also, when the tests are running, do not change to operator mode by
pressing the Change Mode pushbutton. Aborting a test can cause unexpected results.

The CE DIAG BLOCKED menu, the third screen in Figure 5-14 on page 5-40, can occur if the drive goes
through microcode recovery. To recover from this condition, press Reset or power the drive OFF and then
back ON.

The CE DIAG BLOCKED status may also occur when diagnostics are called after a tape is already loaded
or the ACF is unplugged. To recover from this condition, unload the tape or ensure that the ACF is
connected properly, then press Reset or power the drive OFF and then back ON. Use the FID that was
displayed and go to the START section.

FRU Replaced Menu

Attention: DO NOT select any of the functions in this menu unless you have actually replaced the HGA
or repaired the tape path.

This menu resets the statistical data in the drive. The statistical data is used to monitor the drive
performance and call for service when appropriate.
Table 5-36. FRU Replaced Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Verify Fix Menu” on page 5-39
HGA Replaced —
Tape Path Repaired —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel
Causes the CE Verify Fix menu to appear
HGA Replaced
Selecting this function will cause the drive statistical data to be reset. Statistical data is reset
automatically when the drive detects a new head.
Tape Path Repaired
Selecting this function will cause the drive statistical data to be reset

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-41

 CE Loop Diag Menu
Table 5-37 shows the CE Loop Diag menu. This menu allows the CE to select tests to run in loop mode.
Table 5-37. CE Loop Diag Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Verify Fix Menu” on page 5-39
POST “CE Loop Diag Menu”
ACF Mech “CE Loop Diag Menu”
Read/Write “CE Loop Diag Menu”
ACF Load Test “CE Loop Diag Menu”
Panel “CE Loop Diag Menu”
Model C1x Wrap Test “CE Loop Diag Menu”
Fibre Wrap Test “CE Fibre Wrap Menu” on page 5-60

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Please be patient
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: when stopping diag.

Cancel Causes the CE Verify Fix menu to appear

POST (Power On Self Test) Runs most of the tests that normally occur when the
drive is powered ON. The test checks motors, sensors, memory, and the
card pack. This test also includes the ACF Mech test.
ACF Mech Test Runs tests on the Automatic Cartridge Facility mechanism. The test
checks motors, sensors, and the ACF card.
Read/Write Test Runs a Read/Write test. This test takes approximately 10 minutes for each
cycle. A scratch tape must be loaded before selecting this test.

| Note: If the message “Use diagnostic tape” appears, the customer tape
| contains data. Instead, use a scratch tape, an unlabeled tape, or a
| diagnostic tape to run this test.
ACF Load Test Runs tests on the Automatic Cartridge Facility load mechanism. The ACF
should be in random mode, with a cartridge loaded into the import
position of the priority cell.
The test will move the cartridge from the priority cell into every available
empty magazine cell, then back to the priority cell in the export position.
To restart the test, it will be necessary to manually move the cartridge into
the import position.
Panel Test Runs tests on the operator/CE panel. Allows the CE to visually check all
pixels on the operator/CE panel display.
To stop the Panel test, select STOP RUNNING between test cycles.
C1x Wrap Test Runs the STL0 wrap test (this test only appears on Models C12/C14)
Fibre Wrap Test Runs tests on the fibre channel through the wrap plug

| Attention: If the operator/CE panel shows the file-protected icon, the tape is either physically write
| protected or the customer has used a command to logically write protect the tape. If the operator/CE panel
| does not show the file-protected icon, either the wrong format scratch tape has been loaded or the drive
| had a problem reading the tape at the load point. The Base and Ultra Model B11/B1A require a 128-track
| format tape, the Model E11/E1A require a 256-track tape and the Model H11/H1A require a 384-track tape.
| Try writing on a different cartridge. If the failure occurs on multiple cartridges, go to FID F0 or F1 entry
| point on page 1-30.

5-42 IBM 3590 MI

 CE WAIT MENU
RUNNING ...
STOP AND
FORCE ERROR DUMP

A14M0047
STOP RUNNING

Figure 5-15. Loop Status Menu

Figure 5-16. Final Status

When a test starts to run, the Status menu shown in Figure 5-15 appears.

The tests will run continuously. To stop a test, select STOP RUNNING, and allow the test to finish the test
cycle in process.

When a test ends, the results are displayed on Figure 5-16 (the second screen shows an example of a
failure).

Attention: Do not select Force Error Dump from the menu when the tests are running unless you are
sure the 3590 is in a hung condition. Also, when the tests are running, do not change to operator mode by
pressing the Change Mode pushbutton. Aborting a test can cause unexpected results.

The CE DIAG BLOCKED menu, the third screen in Figure 5-16, can occur if the drive goes through
microcode recovery. To recover from this condition, press Reset or power the drive OFF and then back
ON.

The CE DIAG BLOCKED status may also occur when diagnostics are called after a tape is already loaded
or the ACF is unplugged. To recover from this condition, unload the tape or ensure that the ACF is
connected properly, then press Reset or power the drive OFF and then back ON. Use the FID that was
displayed and go to the START section.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-43

CE Main Dump Menu
Table 5-38 shows the CE Main Dump menu. This menu allows the CE to force a dump or to copy a dump
from dynamic random access memory (DRAM) to a cartridge.
Table 5-38. CE Main Dump Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
Force Dump —
Copy Dump to Tape “CE Load Scratch Tape Menu” on page 5-49
Force Error Dump —
Dump Options “CE Dump Options Menu” on page 5-45

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

The Tape Position indicator (see Figure 5-2 on page 5-6) is displayed when the device is writing data on
the tape. The indicator provides a graphical representation of the position of the device relative to the tape.

The dump icon appears when the dump is available, and remains on the screen to indicate that
trace data is stored in the device. The icon is not displayed after the host takes a dump or the dump is
written to tape.

Attention: Trace data is volatile and is lost if you press the Reset pushbutton or power OFF the device.
Cancel Causes the CE Options menu to appear
Force Dump Causes a dump to control store DRAM to occur. The initiator can retrieve
the data via a Read Buffer command to the control store DRAM.

Attention: Do not use this option if a FID1 condition has already caused
a dump to be created. For this case, the dump data of interest is lost if
you execute the Force Dump function. The dump caused by using this
option will write over an existing dump.

Do not use Force Dump if the bus is in a hung state; instead, use Force
Error Dump.
Copy Dump to Tape Copies the dump data to a cartridge. A menu prompts the CE to load a
scratch tape.

Attention: Data on the tape may be overwritten. The Final Status menu
indicates the status of the copy to tape (successful copy or unsuccessful
copy). See Figure 5-17 on page 5-48 for an unsuccessful copy and see
Figure 5-17 on page 5-48 for a successful copy. This option is invalid if no
dump data exists.
Force Error Dump Causes a recovery procedure in which the microcode is reloaded. This
option is used if a microcode-hang condition exists (that is, the host
cannot communicate with the drive and no hardware fault is detected).
When a hang condition exists, the host can attempt to request a
microcode dump through a port, but does not receive it from the drive.
This option is also used if a microcode dump is needed and the Force
Dump option on this menu cannot provide a dump. The host is then able
to successfully request the dump information via the port, or the CE can
use the Copy Dump to Tape option on this menu.

5-44 IBM 3590 MI

 Attention: Using this option will cause an existing dump to be
overwritten.
Dump Options Allows the CE to customize the dump based on Engineering or Support
request

CE Dump Options Menu

Table 5-39 shows the Dump Options menu (see Figure 5-8 on page 5-17.
Table 5-39. CE Dump Options Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Main Dump Menu” on page 5-44
Object Alias... “CE Object Alias Menu”
Address... “CE Address Menu” on page 5-46

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Main Dump Menu” on page 5-44 to appear
Object Alias Allows the CE to enter Object Alias data for dump options
Address Allows the CE to enter Control Store addresses for dump options

CE Object Alias Menu

Table 5-40 shows the Object Alias menu.
Table 5-40. CE Object Alias Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Dump Options Menu”
Object Alias (4 characters displayed
—
vertically)
Add Object Alias —
Remove Object Alias —
List Object Alias... “List Object Alias menu”

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Obj Alias set, Obj Alias removed, or Select Obj Alias
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Dump Options Menu” to appear

Object Alias Allows the CE to select a specific hex value. To change the value of the
nibble, select the nibble, which causes a new menu to appear where you
can select 0–F.
Add Object Alias Allows the CE to add Object Alias data to the dump options
Remove Object Alias Allows the CE to remove Object Alias data from dump options
List Object Alias Allows the CE to list Object Alias data from the dump options

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-45

CE Address Menu
Table 5-41 shows the Address menu.
Table 5-41. CE Address Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Dump Options Menu” on page 5-45
Address (4 characters displayed —
vertically)
Add Address —
Remove Address —
List Address “List Address” menu

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Address set, Address removed, or Select Address
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Dump Options Menu” on page 5-45 to appear
Address Allows the CE to select a specific hex value. To change the value of the
nibble, select the nibble, which causes a new menu to appear where you
can select 0–F.
Add Address Allows the CE to add Address data to the dump options
Remove Address Allows the CE to remove Address data from dump options
List Address Allows the CE to list Address data from the dump options

5-46 IBM 3590 MI

 CE FMR Tape Menu
Table 5-42 shows the FMR Tape menu.
Table 5-42. CE FMR Tape Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
Microcode Update... “CE Load FMR Tape Menu” on page 5-50
Make FMR Tape... “CE Load Scratch Tape Menu” on page 5-49
Unmake FMR Tape... “CE Load FMR Tape Menu” on page 5-50

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <status>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <status>

Cancel Allows the CE to abort an FMR and return to the CE Options menu
Microcode Update Allows the CE to replace the microcode in the device from a field
microcode replacement (FMR) tape and to update the FMR cartridge with
the microcode. A menu prompts the CE to load the FMR tape in the
device. (The FMR tape is in the ship group). When the 3590 reads the
FMR tape, it checks the EC levels on the tape. If the tape does not
contain the EC level of the drive, it automatically writes the microcode to
the FMR tape. It then displays the EC level via the “CE Select EC Level
Menu” on page 5-48.
Make FMR Tape Allows the CE to create a field microcode replacement (FMR) tape from a
scratch tape. The FMR tape contains the current level of microcode that is
active in the device. A menu prompts the CE to load a scratch tape in the
device. After the tape is written, the final status menu indicates whether
the operation was successful.
Unmake FMR Tape Allows the CE to convert an FMR tape to a scratch tape. A menu prompts
the CE to load an FMR tape in the device. After the tape has the header
information changed, the final status menu indicates whether the operation
was successful.

| Attention: If the operator/CE panel shows the file-protected icon, the tape is either physically write
| protected or the customer has used a command to logically write protect the tape. If the operator/CE panel
| does not show the file-protected icon, either the wrong format scratch tape has been loaded or the drive
| had a problem reading the tape at the load point. The Base and Ultra Model B11/B1A require a 128-track
| format tape, the Model E11/E1A require a 256-track tape and the Model H11/H1A require a 384-track tap.
| Try writing on a different cartridge. If the failure occurs on multiple cartridges, go to FID entry point on
| page 1-30 F0 or F1.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-47

 CE Select EC Level Menu
Table 5-43 shows the Select EC menu. This menu is displayed when the device loads an FMR tape. The
device reads all the EC levels and displays them on this menu. The invalid EC levels are displayed in a
lighter font. The message lines display the EC level running in the device. The ECs are displayed in the
same order as they appear on tape. The CE picks which EC level to load into the device.

After the FMR tape is read, a power-on reset or CE reset is needed to activate the microcode that was
just loaded.
Operational Note:
If you insert the FMR cartridge and the EC level of the code is not on the cartridge, the
microcode is automatically copied from the drive to the cartridge.
Table 5-43. CE Select EC Level Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
EC=aaaaaaa LL=bbbb —
EC=ccccccc LL=dddd —
EC=eeeeeee LL=ffff —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Current EC Level:
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <EC Level q>

Cancel Allows the CE to abort an FMR and return to the CE Options menu
EC Level Allows the CE to pick which EC level to load into the device

The latest EC level is determined by the link level (LL), as the EC level may not always increment to a
higher number. The following example shows that the second entry is the latest level microcode.
EC=6C56789 LL=4D0D
EC=3C56789 LL=5B02 (highest EC level)

CE ACTION FAILED CE ACTION SUCCESSFUL

CANCEL CANCEL
UNLOAD DRIVE UNLOAD DRIVE
A14M0048

RESET DRIVE RESET DRIVE

Figure 5-17. Final Status Menu

EC DISPLAY NOTES:
1. If a failure occurs, the final status menu indicates CE ACTION FAILED. This failure can occur if the
drive cannot read the tape.
2. If the process was successful, the final status menu indicates CE ACTION SUCCESSFUL.
| 3. The Base and Ultra Model B11/B1A require a 128-track format FMR tape, the Model E11/E1A require a
| 256-track format FMR tape and the Model H11/H1A require a 384-track format FMR tape.

5-48 IBM 3590 MI

 CE Load Scratch Tape Menu
Table 5-44 shows the menu that prompts the CE to load a scratch tape.

If the scratch cartridge in the drive has a volser written on the tape, it is overwritten.

Attention: Use an Extended High Performance Cartridge when an Extended High Performance
Cartridge needs a scratch tape. The tests will take more time, but the entire range of capabilities will be
tested.
Table 5-44. CE Load Scratch Tape Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel Previous menu
Process Loaded Tape Next menu
Unload Drive “CE Load Scratch Tape Menu”
Start —
Set Pressure to Default See Figure 5-17 on page 5-48

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Use unlabeled tape
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Expected scratch tape
v Tape not at load pt
v Tape write prot’d
v Pump not set

Cancel Allows the CE to return to the CE Options menu

Process Loaded Tape If scratch tape is loaded and at ready point, a new menu will be displayed,
depending on the previous menu. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 for details.
Unload Drive Allows the CE to unload the cartridge from the drive
Start Enables the ACF on a Model B11/E11/H11. This function cannot be
selected on a Model B1A/E1A/H1A.
Set Pressure to Default Sets the pressure of the drive to the default value
See messages appearing on Supplemental Message Line 2:
1. Expected scratch tape - FMR tape was loaded
2. Tape not at load pt - Not at ready point, wait for tape to finish loading. If the Status message says
Rdy at Ld Pt. but the Supplemental message says Tape not at load pt. If the 3590 is attached to a
3494, you may have to wait up to 2 minutes for the 3494 to either acknowledge the Load Point
message or time out. This may indicate a problem with the interface to the 3494.
| 3. Tape write prot’d - If the operator/CE panel shows the file-protected icon, the tape is either physically
write protected or the customer has used a command to logically write protect the tape. If the
operator/CE panel does not show the file-protected icon, either the wrong format scratch tape has
been loaded or the drive had a problem reading the tape at the load point. The Base and Ultra Models
B11/B1A require a 128-track format tape, the Models E11/E1A require a 256-track tape and the Models
H11/H1A require a 384-track tap. Try writing on a different cartridge. If the failure occurs on multiple
cartridges, go to FID entry point on page 1-30 (F0 or F1).
4. Pump not set - Go into “CE Config/Install Menu” on page 5-51 and set/adjust pressure.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-49

 CE Load FMR Tape Menu
Table 5-45 shows the menu that prompts the CE to load the FMR tape.
Table 5-45. CE Load FMR Tape Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel Previous menu
Process Loaded Tape Next menu
Unload Drive “CE Load FMR Tape Menu”
Start —
Set Pressure to Default See Figure 5-17 on page 5-48

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Use FMR tape
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Expected FMR tape
v Tape not at load pt
v Pump not set

Cancel Allows the CE to return to the CE Options menu

Process Loaded Tape If FMR tape is loaded and at ready point, then a new menu will be
displayed, depending on the previous menu. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17
for detail.
Unload Drive Allows the CE to unload the cartridge from the drive
Start Enables the ACF on a Model B11/E11/H11. This function cannot be
selected on a Model B1A/E1A/H1A.
Set Pressure to Default Sets the pressure of the drive to the default value

Note: See messages appearing on Supplemental Message Line 2:

v Expected FMR tape - Scratch tape was loaded
v Tape not at load pt - Not at ready point, wait for tape to finish loading. If the Status message
says Rdy at Ld Pt. but the Supplemental message says Tape not at load pt. and the 3590 is
attached to a 3494, you may have to wait up to 2 minutes for the 3494 to either acknowledge the
Load Point message or time out. This may indicate a problem with the interface to the 3494.
| v Tape write prot’d - If the operator/CE panel shows the file-protected icon, the tape is either
physically write protected or the customer has used a command to logically write protect the
tape. If the operator/CE panel does not show the file-protected icon, either the wrong format
scratch tape has been loaded or the drive had a problem reading the tape at the load point. The
Base and Ultra Model B11/B1A require a 128-track format tape, the Model E11/E1A require a
256-track tape and the Model H11/H1A require a 384-track tape. Try writing on a different
cartridge. If the failure occurs on multiple cartridges, go to FID entry point on page 1-30 F0 or
F1.
v Pump not set - Go to “CE Config/Install Menu” on page 5-51 and set/adjust pressure.

CE WAIT MENU CE FINAL STATUS

RUNNING CANCEL
STOP AND PUMP OK (see note)
A14M0049

FORCE ERROR DUMP PUMP OK (see note)

STOP RUNNING Offline +

Figure 5-18. Final Status Menu

5-50 IBM 3590 MI

CE Config/Install Menu
Table 5-46 shows the Config/Install menu. The default values are in a bold font.

Note: The Force Error Log On/Off option displays the current status. For example, if the option says
‘Forced Error Log Off’, that means that forced error logging is OFF. To turn it ON, select the option.
The option will change to show the new current status, ‘Forced Error Log On’.
Table 5-46. CE Config/Install Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
Drv Options... “CE Drive Options Menu” on page 5-52
Fibre Addresses... “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56
Force Error Log On/Off —
Adjust Pressure Figure 5-18 on page 5-50
Align ACF “CE Align ACF Menu” on page 5-55

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Drive fenced! -or- Loading code
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Fix previous error Try again

Cancel Causes the CE Options menu to appear. If any of the VPD options have
been updated, the CE WAIT message may be displayed momentarily
while the Flash memory is being rewritten.
Drv Options Allows the CE to set items from “CE Drive Options Menu” on page 5-52
Fibre Addresses Allows the CE to view the drive node name and port names. See “Fibre
Channel World Wide Name History Log” on page 9-63.
Force Error Log On/Off Allows the CE to turn error logging ON. When set to On, deferred-check
conditions are reported to the host. Therefore, temporary errors are
reported in the sense data. The default is Off. This selection is normally
used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Adjust Pressure Causes the microcode to set and record the compressor motor speed by
sensing the output from the compressor pressure sensor. In addition to the
time of drive install, this option should be done after replacement of any
drive part that affects the pressure.
When the test is running, the menu in Figure 5-18 on page 5-50 appears.
Choosing Stop Running causes the menu in “CE Logs Menu” on
page 5-60 to appear. Choosing Cancel from “CE Logs Menu” on
page 5-60 causes the “CE Config/Install Menu” to appear. Select Cancel
twice to save the value in nonvolatile storage (once from the CE Final
Status menu and once from the Config/Install menu).
Align ACF Allows the CE to view the state of the transport-position sensors in the ACF from “CE
Align ACF Menu” on page 5-55

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-51

 CE Drive Options Menu
Table 5-47 shows the Drive Options menu.

This menu allows the CE to set specific drive information needed at installation of the drive. The default
values are appear in Table 5-47 in a bold font.

Note: The CE Drive Options menu displays the current status. For example, if the H SARS
Enabled/Disabled option says ‘H SARS Disabled’, that means that H SARS is disabled. To enable
H SARS, select the option. The option will change to show the new current status, ‘H SARS
Enabled’.
| Table 5-47. CE Drive Options Menu
| Function Next Menu
| Cancel “CE Config/Install Menu” on page 5-51
| Drv Serial No... See “Drive Serial Number” on page 9-51
| Drv Features... “CE Drive Features Menu” on page 5-81
| Wrap Tools... —
| (No Lrg/Lrg) Disp Attach —
|| Hdwr Present/Not present for
—
| Double Length Tape
|| Autoshare Enabled/Disabled (Base
—
| Model B11, B1A only)
| SCSI Config (Ultra Model B11/B1A,
| Model E11/E1A and Model H11/H1A “CE SCSI Config Menu” on page 5-55
| SCSI drives only)
| Clean Mounts Clean Mounts menu
| Clean Usage Clean Usage menu
| H SARS Enabled/Disabled —
| V SARS Enabled/Disabled —
| SARS Traps Enabled/Disabled —
| SIM Sev Filt On/Off —
| MIM Sev Filt On/Off —
| Num Repeat SIMs —
| Disable CU Mode —

| Notes:
| 1. Supplemental Message Line 1: When done, select
| 2. Supplemental Message Line 2: CANCEL option
| 3. Highlighted Functions, such as No Lrg, are the default values.
|
Cancel Causes the “CE Config/Install Menu” on page 5-51 to appear. If any of the
VPD options have been updated, the CE WAIT message may be
displayed momentarily while the Flash memory is being rewritten.
Drv Serial No Allows the CE to enter the drive’s serial number (maximum of 12 bytes).
See “Drive Serial Number” on page 9-51.
Drv Features Allows the CE to set items from “CE Drive Features Menu” on page 5-81
Wrap Tools Allows the CE to see what (attached) wrap tools are detected by the drive
during a power-on test. The drive checks for the following wrap tools
before running the respective wrap tests: SCSI Port 0 and SCSI Port 1
wrap tools, RS-422 port wrap tool, and the STL0 silo interface card wrap
tool (the latter for B1A drives in Model C12/C14 only).

5-52 IBM 3590 MI

 The status of the wrap tools will be displayed on the operator/CE panel,
as follows:
SCSI 0: PRESENT/NOT PRESENT (SCSI Models only)
SCSI 1: PRESENT/NOT PRESENT (SCSI Models only)
RS-422: PRESENT/NOT PRESENT
STL : PRESENT/NOT PRESENT (Model C12/C14 only)

Note: This menu does not check for the fibre wrap plug.

A status of “PRESENT” indicates that the particular wrap plug has been
detected.
(No Lrg/Lrg) Disp Attach Allows the CE to specify that a large operator display is attached to the
drive. (The large display is a customer-supplied option.) This option will
not become active until you either select Reset Drive from the operator
Services menu, press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE panel, or
power OFF the drive, after you have returned to the CE Options menu.
The default is No Lrg.
Hdwr present/Not present for Dbl Lngth Tape
Allows the CE to indicate if the hardware required for double-length tape is
present. The default is Hdwr present
| Autoshr Enabled/Disabled Allows the CE to enable the Autoshare option for host application (Base
| Model B11/B1A only) The default is Disabled.
SCSI Config (SCSI drives only) Allows the CE to set items from “CE SCSI Config
Menu” on page 5-55
Clean Mounts Allows the CE to change the quantity specifying the number of mounts
required for the drive before a clean message is posted on the
operator/CE panel

Note: The default value is 0708 (1800 mounts). It is recommended that

this default value not be changed without engineering involvement.
Clean Usage Allows the CE to change the quantity specifying the number of bytes
processed by the drive before a clean message is posted on the
operator/CE panel

Note: The default value is 0002BF20 (150 Gb). It is recommended that

this default value not be changed without Engineering involvement.
H SARS Enabled/Disabled Allows the CE to enable the hardware statistical analysis and reporting (H
SARS) system. Hardware SARS can be enabled or disabled while the
drive is operating. Enabling this option allows the drive to indicate potential
hardware problems. See “Statistical Analysis and Reporting System” on
page 4-6 for details. The default is Enabled.
V SARS Enabled/Disabled Allows the CE to enable the volume statistical analysis and reporting (V
SARS) system. Volume SARS can be enabled or disabled while the drive
is operating. Enabling this option will allow the drive to flag bad tape
media. See “Statistical Analysis and Reporting System” on page 4-6 for
details. The default is Enabled.
SARS Traps Enabled/Disabled
Allows the CE to enable traps used by the statistical analysis and
reporting (SARS) system. A change in SARS Traps to enabled or disabled
status will not become active until you either select Reset Drive from the
operator Services menu, press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE
panel, or power OFF the drive, after you have returned to the CE

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-53

 Options menu. Enabling this option will force an automatic dump in the
drive if a SARS trap is hit. See “Statistical Analysis and Reporting System”
on page 4-6 for details. The default is Disabled.
SIM Sev Filt On/Off Allows the CE to filter the messages sent to the host. When this option is
set to On, only acute and serious severity service information messages
(SIMs) are sent. Moderate and service-related severity SIMs are not sent.
When this option is set to Off, all SIMs are displayed. The default is Off.
MIM Sev Filt On/Off Allows the CE to filter the messages sent to the host. When this option is
set to On, only acute severity media information messages (MIMs) are
sent. Serious, moderate, and service-related severity MIMs are not sent.
When this option is set to Off, all MIMs are displayed. The default is Off.
Num Repeat SIMs Allows the CE to determine how many times to repeat sending the same
SIMs to the host. For example, if you set the value to 3, the SIM is sent to
the host when a SIM is generated eight hours later, then again eight hours
later. You cannot change the time between the presentation of SIMs,
which is eight hours. The default value is zero (do not repeat SIMs). The
maximum value allowed is 255.
Disable CU Mode Allows the CE to disable the Control Unit mode (option displayed in dotted
font) if the drive is not attached to a 3590 Axx Control Unit or Virtual Tape
Server (VTS). If the drive is attached to a 3590 Axx control unit or Virtual
Tape Server (VTS), the control unit will automatically enable the Control
Unit mode and this option will be displayed in the bold font.

5-54 IBM 3590 MI

 CE SCSI Config Menu
Table 5-48 shows the SCSI Config menu. This menu allows the CE to set the SCSI configuration options.
Table 5-48. CE SCSI Config Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
Autoshare Enabled/Disabled —
Wide/Narrow SCSI —
Fast/Slow SCSI “CE FID FF Log Menu” on page 5-64

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>
3. Highlighted Functions, such as Disabled, are the default values.

Cancel Causes the “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38 to appear

| Autoshr Enabled/Disabled Allows the CE to enable the Autoshare option for host applications. (Ultra
| Model B11/B1A only) The default is Disabled.
Wide/Narrow SCSI Allows the CE to set the Wide/Narrow SCSI option. Wide is 2 bytes per
clock cycle. Narrow is 1 byte per clock cycle. The default is Wide.
Fast/Slow SCSI Allows the CE to set the Fast/Slow SCSI option. Fast is Ultra Speed 20
MHz clock. Slow is the normal 10 MHz clock. The default is Fast.

Note: Some SCSI configurations must be set to Slow and Narrow to prevent SCSI timeout errors. Ask the
customer how these options should be set.

CE Align ACF Menu

Table 5-49 shows the Align ACF menu. This menu allows the CE to align the transport-position sensors in
the ACF.
Table 5-49. CE Align ACF Menu
Function Next Menu
Done “CE Config/Install Menu” on page 5-51
Align High —
Align Low —

Notes:
1. The message lines indicate the last adjustment performed.
2. Supplemental Message Line 1: Aligned high or Aligned low <depends on last adjustment>
3. Supplemental Message Line 2: Blank

Done Causes the “CE Config/Install Menu” on page 5-51 to appear

Align High Causes the transport to align to the bottom transport-position sensor
Align Low Causes the transport to align to the top transport-position sensor

When you select Align High or Align Low, the transport moves down three-fourths of the way, moves up to
the priority slot, moves to the bottom slot, then moves up to the priority slot. See “Check and Adjustment
of Transport Position Sensor” on page 10-28 for details.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-55

| CE Fibre Names Menu
Table 5-50 shows the Fibre Names menu.

Note: This menu will be named Fibre Names is the next release of code.
Table 5-50. CE Fibre Names Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Config/Install Menu” on page 5-51
Show Node Name... “Show Node Name Menu”
Show Port Names... “Show Port Names Menu” on page 5-57
Set Node Name... “Set Node Name Menu” on page 5-57
Set Port 0 Name... “Set Port 0 Name Menu” on page 5-58
Set Port 1 Name... “Set Port 1 Name Menu” on page 5-58

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Port0 ID=aa bb cd
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Port1 ID=aa bb cd

Cancel Causes the “CE Config/Install Menu” on page 5-51 to appear

Show Node Name Causes the “Show Node Name Menu” to appear
Show Port Names Causes the “Show Port Names Menu” on page 5-57 to appear
Set Node Name Causes the “Set Node Name Menu” on page 5-57 to appear
Set Port 0 Name Causes the “Set Port 0 Name Menu” on page 5-58 to appear
Set Port 1 Name Causes the “Set Port 1 Name Menu” on page 5-58 to appear

Note: Refer to “Messages and Supplemental Messages (Fibre Channel Only)” in Table 5-2 on page 5-7
for additional fibre addressing information.

| Show Node Name Menu

Table 5-51 shows the Show Node Name CE menu.
Table 5-51. Show Node Name Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Fibre Names Menu”
Node Name “CE Fibre Names Menu”
0123456789abcdef

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Port0 ID=aa bb cd
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Port1 ID=aa bb cd

Cancel Causes the “CE Fibre Names Menu” to appear

Node Name Causes Fibre Node Name to be displayed

Note: Refer to “Messages and Supplemental Messages (Fibre Channel Only)” in Table 5-2 on page 5-7
for additional fibre addressing information.

5-56 IBM 3590 MI

| Show Port Names Menu
Table 5-52 shows the Port Names menu.
Table 5-52. Show Port Names Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56
Port 0 Name
0123456789abcdefPort 1 Name “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56
0123456789abcdef

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Port0 ID=aa bb cd
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Port1 ID=aa bb cd

Cancel Causes the “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28 to appear

Port 0 / Port 1 Name Both Fibre port 0 and Fibre port 1 names are displayed.

Note: Refer to “Messages and Supplemental Messages (Fibre Channel Only)” in Table 5-2 on page 5-7
for additional fibre addressing information.

| Set Node Name Menu

Table 5-53 shows the Set Node Name menu.

This menu allows the drive Node name to be set.

Table 5-53. Set Node Name Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28
0 —
1 —
. . . —
Save and Continue “CE Save Data Menu (Node/Port)” on page 5-59

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Port0 ID=aa bb cd
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Port1 ID=aa bb cd

Note: If you alter any name you must save or alter all the names. For example, if you alter the Node
Name only, at minimum, you must save Port 0 and Port 1.
Cancel Causes the “Fibre Addresses Menu” on page 5-28 to appear
0123456789ABCDEF Selecting this option increments the hexadecimal character. The number
wraps from ‘F’ to 0’.
Save and Continue Causes “CE Save Data Menu (Node/Port)” on page 5-59 menu to appear
to allow/disallow saving data in DRAM

Note: Refer to “Fibre Channel World Wide Identification (Names)” on page 3-10 for more fibre names
information.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-57

| Set Port 0 Name Menu
Table 5-54 shows the Set Port 0 Name menu.

This menu allows the drive Port 0 Name to be set.

Table 5-54. Set Port 0 Name Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56
0 —
1 —
. . . —
Save and Continue “CE Save Data Menu (Node/Port)” on page 5-59

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Port0 ID=aa bb cd
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Port1 ID=aa bb cd

Note: If you alter any name you must save or alter all the names. For example, if you alter the Node
Name only, you have to at least save Port 0 and Port 1.
Cancel Causes the “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56 to appear
0123456789ABCDEF Selecting this option increments the hexadecimal character. The number
wraps from ‘F’ to 0’.
Save and Continue Causes “CE Save Data Menu (Node/Port)” on page 5-59 menu to appear
to allow/disallow saving data in DRAM

Note: Refer to “Fibre Channel World Wide Identification (Names)” on page 3-10 for more fibre names
information.

| Set Port 1 Name Menu

Table 5-55 shows the Set Port 1 Name menu.

This menu allows the drive Port 1 Name to be set.

Table 5-55. Set Port 1 Name Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56
0 —
1 —
. . . —
Save and Continue “CE Save Data Menu (Node/Port)” on page 5-59

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Port0 ID=aa bb cd
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Port1 ID=aa bb cd

Cancel Causes the “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56 to appear
0123456789ABCDEF Selecting this option increments the hexadecimal character. The number
wraps from ‘F’ to 0’.
Save and Continue Causes “CE Save Data Menu (Node/Port)” on page 5-59 menu to appear
to allow/disallow saving data in DRAM

Note: Refer to “Fibre Channel World Wide Identification (Names)” on page 3-10 for more fibre names
information.

5-58 IBM 3590 MI

CE Save Data Menu (Node/Port)
Table 5-56 shows the CE Save Data.

This menu allows the CE to save or abort saving the data entered at the previous menu.
Table 5-56. CE Save Data Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56
Yes “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56
No “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: FC NODE/PORT NAME
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56 to appear. The name is
not saved.
Yes Saves the node or port name and returns to “CE Fibre Names Menu” on
page 5-56
No Does not save name and returns to “CE Fibre Names Menu” on page 5-56

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-59

CE Fibre Wrap Menu
Table 5-57 shows the Fibre Wrap menu. This menu allows the CE to wrap both fibre ports or each
individually.

Note: Fibre Wrap Plugs must be attached to the drive or the end of the cables (with the duplex adapter)
prior to running these tests. Running tests without the wrap plug may cause performance or I/O
problems on the fibre loop.
Table 5-57. CE Fibre Wrap Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Verify Fix Menu” on page 5-39 or “CE Loop Diag Menu” on page 5-42
Both Ports —
Port 0 —
Port 1 —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38 or “CE Loop Diag Menu” on
page 5-42 to appear
Both Ports Runs Port 0 and Port 1 Wrap test. See “Fibre Channel Ports Wrap Test”
on page 9-112.
Port 0 Runs Port 0 Wrap test. See “Fibre Channel Ports Wrap Test” on
page 9-112.
Port 1 Runs Port 1 Wrap test. See “Fibre Channel Ports Wrap Test” on
page 9-112.

CE Logs Menu
Table 5-58 shows the Logs menu. This menu allows the CE to access the CE error logs.
Table 5-58. CE Logs Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
Error Log... “CE Error Log Menu” on page 5-61
FID FE Log... “CE FID FE Log Menu” on page 5-63
FID FF Log... “CE FID FF Log Menu” on page 5-64
Temp Error Log... “CE Temp Error Log Menu” on page 5-65

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38 to appear.

Error Log Allows the CE to view the Error Log
FID FE Log Allows the CE to view the FID FE log
FID FF Log Allows the CE to view the FID FF log
Temp Error Log Allows the CE to view the Temp Error log
Notes:
1. The CE Error Log logs every FID or ATTN message posted to the operator/CE panel.
2. The FID FE Log logs a filtered subset of all sense data sent to the host with a FID of FE.
3. The FID FF Log logs a filtered subset of all sense data sent to the host with a FID of FF.
4. The Temp Error Log logs a filtered subset of all sense data sent to the host with a sense key of 1.

5-60 IBM 3590 MI

CE Error Log Menu
The CE Error Log logs every FID or ATTN message posted to the operator/CE panel.
Table 5-59. CE Error Log Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel or No Entries “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
CLEAR LOG “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
CURRENT TIMESTAMP dddd hh:mm:ss “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
FID1 DD VS:142M95 “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
3130 0030 283A
0001 04:33:32
FID1 CD VS:UNKNOWN “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
311A 311A 283A
0001 05:37:04
ATTN DRV “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
LOAD/UNLOAD ERROR
0001 06:02:10
ATTN ACF 005 “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
CLEAR PICKER PATH
0001 06:34:17

Cancel Causes the “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear

No Entries Indicates that no entries are in the error log. Choosing this option causes
“CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear
CLEAR LOG Allows the CE to erase the error log. This option will only be displayed
when there is at least one entry in error log. Choosing this option causes
“CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear.
CURRENT TIMESTAMP Provides a current time stamp in the form dddd hh:mm:ss. For a full
description of this field, see “Time Stamp for CE Error Log” on page 5-62
FID1 DD Indicates a possible fault with one of the sensors. The Volume Serial
number is 142M95. The fault symptom codes are 3130 and 0030. The
next character (2 in 283A) represents the model number followed by the
microcode link (83A). Choosing this option causes “CE Options Menu” on
page 5-38 to appear.
FID1 CD Indicates a possible fault with the cartridge present sensor. The Volume
Serial number is Unknown. The fault symptom codes are 311A. The next
character (2 in 283A) represents the model number followed by the
microcode link (83A). Choosing this option causes “CE Logs Menu” on
page 5-60 to appear.
ATTN DRV Indicates an error condition with the drive that customer personnel may be
able to resolve. The condition indicated by supplemental message of
LOAD/UNLOAD ERROR could be corrected by the operator. Choosing
this option causes “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear.
ATTN ACF Indicates an error condition with the ACF that customer personnel may be
able to resolve. The condition indicated by supplemental message of
CLEAR PICKER PATH could be corrected by the operator. Choosing this
option causes “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear.

Only the last 30 entries in the log are displayed. If a fault is detected and the log contains 30 entries, the
oldest entry is scrolled off the end and the newest error is put in position 1 (the first position in the list).

Table 5-59 shows an example of the menu when the log contains entries. The format is:

FIDx yy VS:nnnnnn ATTN DRV/ACF ttt

aaaa bbbb cccc -or- (detailed message)
dddd hh : mm : ss dddd hh : mm : ss

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-61

 The volume serial number (or unknown) is listed after the FID number.

Support Data: Twelve hex characters of support data (or a detailed message) are included in the error
log.

aaaa Fault Symptom Code

bbbb Fault Symptom Code (FSC)
cccc Model number (c) and microcode link (ccc)

Time Stamp for CE Error Log: A time stamp accompanies each error log entry. It is not real time but is
relative time, and is associated with the approximate number of power-on hours for the card pack that is
installed in the machine. When the card pack is replaced, the time stamp is reset to dddd=0000. A clock
counter is started with power-on, but is saved each hour in VPD. The times may vary from real “relative
time” depending on the number of power cycles taken, and timing between them.

dddd hh : mm : ss
Days hours mins secs
Time is relative power-on time for the card pack installed in this
machine. It is not real time. Newest entries are at the top.

EXAMPLE
DRV ccc
LOAD/UNLOAD ERROR
0001 05:01:10

| The ‘’ccc’ in the above example is the number of times, if more than once, that the ATTN message was
| called out during a 5-second period of time. The error in this example occurred on the 1st day, 5th hour,
| 1st minute and 10th second in “relative time”.

See “Error Log Analysis Procedure” on page 9-126 for a procedure to assist you in analyzing the error log.

5-62 IBM 3590 MI

CE FID FE Log Menu
The FID FE Log logs a filtered subset of all sense data sent to the host with a FID of FE.

Table 5-60 shows an example of the menu when the log contains entries. See “CE Error Log Menu” on
page 5-61 for format information. The format is:

FID F0 FID FF
aaaa bbbb cccc
dddd hh:mm:ss
VOLSER: nnnnnn

See “Error Log Analysis Procedure” on page 9-126 for a procedure to assist you in analyzing the error log.
Table 5-60. CE FID FE Log Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel or No Entries “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
CLEAR LOG “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
CURRENT TIMESTAMP “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
dddd hh:mm:ss
FID F0 FID FF “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
3601 3335 22B1
0010 13:05:12
VOLSER: 156M95

Cancel Causes the “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear

No Entries Indicates that no entries are in the error log. Choosing this option causes
“CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear.
CLEAR LOG Allows the CE to erase the error log. This option will only be displayed
when there is at least one entry in the error log. Choosing this option
causes “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear.
CURRENT TIMESTAMP Provides a current time stamp in the form dddd hh:mm:ss. For a full
description of this field, see “Time Stamp for CE Error Log” on page 5-62.
FID yy yy This example indicates a possible fault with the device associated with a
FID yy. The 12 characters of support data include the fault symptom codes
(aaaa and bbbb), and the model number (c), followed by the microcode
link (ccc). A time stamp follows. The last entry is the Volume Serial
number. If the Volume Serial number is not known, it will show
“UNKNOWN.” Choosing this option causes “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
to appear.

Only the last 10 entries in the log are displayed. If a fault is detected and the log contains 10 entries, the
oldest entry is dropped from the end and the newest error is put in position 1 (the first position in the list).

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-63

CE FID FF Log Menu
The FID FF Log logs a filtered subset of all sense data sent to the host with a FID of FF.

Table 5-61 shows an example of the menu when the log contains entries. See “CE Error Log Menu” on
page 5-61 for format information. The format is:

FID F0 FID FF
aaaa bbbb cccc
dddd hh:mm:ss

See “Error Log Analysis Procedure” on page 9-126 for a procedure to assist you in analyzing the error log.
Table 5-61. CE FID FF Log Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel or No Entries “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
CLEAR LOG “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
CURRENT TIMESTAMP —
dddd hh:mm:ss
FID A8 FID 96 “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
0062 003D 1AAB
0244 15:34:07

Cancel Causes the “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear

No Entries Indicates that no entries are in the Error log. Choosing this option causes
“CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear.
CLEAR LOG Allows the CE to erase the error log. This option will only be displayed
when there is at least one entry in error log. Choosing this option causes
“CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear.
CURRENT TIMESTAMP Provides a current time stamp in the form dddd hh:mm:ss. For a full
description of this field, see “Time Stamp for CE Error Log” on page 5-62.
FID yy yy Provides the FID identifier (yy yy), 12 characters of support data, and the
current timestamp. The 12 characters of support data include the fault
symptom codes (aaaa, bbbb), the model number (c) and the microcode
link (ccc).

Only the last 10 entries in the log are displayed. If a fault is detected and the log contains 10 entries, the
oldest entry is scrolled off the end and the newest error is put in position 1 (the first position in the list).

5-64 IBM 3590 MI

CE Temp Error Log Menu
The Temp Log logs a filtered subset of all sense data sent to the host with a sense key of 1. The Temp
error log was implemented in EC F25981, code link level D0IE_2C3. Some of the PFE levels with
D0IE_2C3+ do not have this change.

Table 5-62 shows an example of the menu when the log contains entries. See “CE Error Log Menu” on
page 5-61 for format information. The format is:

FID F0 FID FF
aaaa bbbb cccc
dddd hh:mm:ss
VOLSER: nnnnnn

See “Error Log Analysis Procedure” on page 9-126 for a procedure to assist you in analyzing the error log.
Table 5-62. CE Temp Error Log Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel or No Entries “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
CLEAR LOG “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
CURRENT TIMESTAMP “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
dddd hh:mm:ss
FID F1 FID FF “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
3626 3341 22C3
0021 08:00:05
VOLSER: UNKNOWN

Cancel Causes the “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear

No Entries Indicates that no entries are in the Error log. Choosing this option causes
“CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear.
CLEAR LOG Allows the CE to erase the error log. This option will only be displayed
when there is at least one entry in error log. Choosing this option causes
“CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60 to appear.
CURRENT TIMESTAMP Provides a current time stamp in the form dddd hh:mm:ss. For a full
description of this field, see “Time Stamp for CE Error Log” on page 5-62
FID yy yy Provides the FID identifier (yy yy), 12 characters of support data, and the
current timestamp. The 12 characters of support data include the fault
symptom codes (aaaa, bbbb), the model number (c) and the microcode
link (ccc). A time stamp follows. The last entry is the Volume Serial
number. If the Volume Serial number is not known, it will show
“UNKNOWN”. Choosing this option causes “CE Logs Menu” on page 5-60
to appear.

Only the last 10 entries in the log are displayed. If a fault is detected and the log contains 10 entries, the
oldest entry is scrolled off the end and the newest error is put in position 1 (the first position in the list).

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-65

CE Utilities Menu
Table 5-63 shows the Utilities menu.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-63. CE Utilities Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38
Disp Sensors “CE Disp Sensors Menu” on page 5-67
Disp/Alt VPD... “CE Disp/Alt VPD Menu” on page 5-68
Control Store... “CE Control Store Select Address Menu” on page 5-70
Microcode Trap... “CE Microcode Trap Menu” on page 5-71
Read Tape... “CE Read Tape Menu” on page 5-72
Engr Use Only... “Password Menu” on page 5-75
Show Statistics... “Statistics Menu” on page 5-79
OEM Use Only... “Password Menu” on page 5-75

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Options Menu” on page 5-38 to appear

Disp Sensors Causes the “CE Disp Sensors Menu” on page 5-67 to appear which allows
the CE to exercise most of the sensors in the device and observe
feedback as to their operation.
Disp/Alt VPD Allows the CE to display or change the vital product data (VPD). Changing
the VPD should only be done with assistance from support personnel.
Control Store Allows the CE to read any address in nonvolatile storage and control store
Microcode Trap Allows the CE to set a specific FSC trap (error code match) in microcode
to force a microcode dump
Read Tape Allows the CE to display a portion of the data on the tape
Engr Use Only Allows support personnel to access selected utilities
Show Statistics Allow the CE to display internal counts of activities
OEM Use Only Allows OEM support personnel to customize VPD data

5-66 IBM 3590 MI

 CE Disp Sensors Menu
Table 5-64 shows the Disp Sensors menu. This menu allows the CE to view the state of the ACF and drive
sensors, and to change the states dynamically. A delay of approximately one second is required between
sensor state changes.
| Table 5-64. CE Disp Sensors Menu
| Function Next Menu
| CANCEL “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
| A:1 B:1 Display pantocam A and B sensor states
| TU:1 DO:1 Display loader tray up and door open states
| CP:1 Display loader cartridge present sensor states
| Note: Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in
| the area of the strain relief clamp, see “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67. Verify the sensor
| operation by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If the cable
| is bad, replace the Drive FRU. See “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67.
| FP:0 CT:0000 Display loader file protect sensor; cartridge type sensor states
| PS:1 MP:0 ML:0 Model B11/E11/H11 only. Display priority slot, magazine present, and magazine loaded sensor
| states
| GI:0 GCP:1 Model B11/E11/H11 only. Display global interference sensor and global cartridge present sensor
| states
| P1:1 P2:0 IM:0 Model B11/E11/H11 only. Display ACF pinch 1 & 2, import sensor states
| L1:1 L2:0 EX:0 Model B11/E11/H11 only. Display ACF limit 1 & 2, export sensor states
| A1:1 B:1 Model B11/E11/H11 only. Display ACF elevator servo A & B sensor states
| SN:0 Model B1A/E1A/H1A with library interface card (LIC) only. Model B1A/E1A/H1A without the library
| interface card or those with STL0 cards do not display this sensor.
|

Note: The values shown for each sensor will vary on your machine depending upon whether a cartridge is
loaded and other conditions. For more information, see “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-67

CE Disp/Alt VPD Menu
Table 5-65 shows the Disp/Alt VPD menu. This menu allows the CE to select the vital product data (VPD)
group that contains the specific VPD field to be displayed or altered. You can display all the contents in
each of the groups, but can alter some of the contents in only the flash group.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-65. CE Disp/Alt VPD Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
Ucode Grp “CE Group Name Menu”
Head Grp “CE Group Name Menu”
Processor Grp “CE Group Name Menu”
DRAM Grp “CE Group Name Menu”
Flash Grp “CE Group Name Menu”

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Select VPD field
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to appear

Ucode Grp The link level and size of the microcode
Head Grp The initial position sensor (IPS) gain settings, plant of manufacture, and
serial number of the read/write head
Processor Grp The type of processor in the card pack
Dram Grp The EC levels of the module. These fields are only maintained in DRAM,
not in flash EPROM or in the microcode.
Flash Grp The SCSI addresses, the ACF mode, and the other setup choices you can
make from the operator/CE panel (the dynamic information). This
information is in flash EEPROM.

CE Group Name Menu

Table 5-66 shows the Group Name menu. This menu allows the CE to select a VPD field to display or
alter.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-66. CE Group Name Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Disp/Alt VPD Menu”
<VPD field i> “CE VPD Field Offset Menu” on page 5-69 or “CE VPD Data Menu” on page 5-69
<VPD field i+1> “CE VPD Field Offset Menu” on page 5-69 or “CE VPD Data Menu” on page 5-69
... “CE VPD Field Offset Menu” on page 5-69 or “CE VPD Data Menu” on page 5-69
<VPD field i+n> “CE VPD Field Offset Menu” on page 5-69 or “CE VPD Data Menu” on page 5-69

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Select VPD Field
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Disp/Alt VPD Menu” to appear. If any of the VPD options have been
updated, the CE WAIT message may be displayed momentarily while the Flash memory is
being rewritten.
VPD field Causes the selected VPD field to appear. If the VPD field selected is large, the VPD Field
Offset menu is displayed. Otherwise, the VPD data menu is displayed.

5-68 IBM 3590 MI

CE VPD Field Offset Menu
Table 5-67 shows the VPD Field Offset menu. This menu selects the number of bytes to skip (bytes to not
display) in the VPD field chosen at “CE Group Name Menu” on page 5-68.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-67. CE VPD Field Offset Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Group Name Menu” on page 5-68
0 “CE VPD Data Menu”
1 “CE VPD Data Menu”
... “CE VPD Data Menu”

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <VPD Field>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Field Protected (conditional)

Cancel Causes the “CE Group Name Menu” on page 5-68 to appear
<number> Allows the CE to select an offset in the VPD field. After you select a number, “CE VPD
Data Menu” is displayed.

Note: The message Field Protected is informing the CE that the VPD field just selected
is displayed, but cannot be modified.

CE VPD Data Menu

Table 5-68 shows the VPD Data menu. This menu allows the CE to modify any character in the selected
offset for the selected VPD field.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-68. CE VPD Data Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE VPD Field Offset Menu” or “CE Group Name Menu” on page 5-68 or “OEM Use Only
Menu” on page 5-78
<VPD offset high nibble> —
<VPD offset next nibble> —
<VPD offset next nibble> —
<VPD offset low nibble> —
Save and Continue “CE Verify Data Menu” on page 5-70

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <VPD Field> <VPD Offset>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Field protected (conditional)

Cancel Causes the “CE VPD Field Offset Menu” to appear if an offset is required.
If offset is not required, “CE Group Name Menu” on page 5-68 or “OEM
Use Only Menu” on page 5-78 appears. Any changes to VPD Data are not
saved.
<VPD nibble> Shows the data (hex number) contained in the selected VPD field for the
offset selected. The CE can select another value for that nibble.
Save and Continue Causes the “CE Verify Data Menu” on page 5-70 to appear. This option is
invalid if the VPD field is protected.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-69

CE Verify Data Menu
Table 5-69 shows the Verify Data menu. This menu allows the CE to check and verify the VPD entered
before the data is stored in nonvolatile storage.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-69. CE Verify Data Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
Yes “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
No “CE VPD Data Menu” on page 5-69

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <VPD Name> <VPD Offset>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to appear. The VPD data is not modified.
Yes Causes the verified data to be stored in nonvolatile storage, then causes the “CE Utilities
Menu” on page 5-66 to appear
No Causes the “CE VPD Data Menu” on page 5-69 to appear. The VPD data is not modified

CE Control Store Select Address Menu

Table 5-70 shows the Control Store Select Address menu. This menu allows the CE to select an address
in control store. The byte is read from the selected address. The message line indicates that the control
store option was selected on the previous screen.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-70. CE Control Store Select Address Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
CS Adr (8 characters displayed —
vertically)
Continue “CE Control Store Display Menu” on page 5-71

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Control store
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to appear

<CS Adr> Defines the address to be chosen. To change the value of the nibble,
select the nibble, which causes a new menu to appear where you can
select 0–F.
Continue Takes the address displayed and goes to “CE Control Store Display Menu”
on page 5-71

5-70 IBM 3590 MI

CE Control Store Display Menu
Table 5-71 shows the Control Store Display menu. This menu allows the CE to display the byte in the
specified address. The message line indicates the current control store address and value.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-71. CE Control Store Display Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
Scroll Up —
<CS Adr+0> <CS Data> —
<CS Adr+4> <CS Data> —
<CS Adr+8> <CS Data> —
<CS Adr+...><CS Data> —
Scroll Down —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: CS Adrs: <CS Adrs>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: CS Value: <CS Data>

Cancel Causes the “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to appear

Scroll Up Causes previous addresses to be displayed (scrolling up through memory)
<CS Adr> <data> Shows data contained in word starting at the specified address, causes
the “CE Control Store Select Address Menu” on page 5-70 to appear
Scroll Down Causes next address to be displayed (scrolling down through memory)

CE Microcode Trap Menu

Table 5-72 shows the Microcode Trap menu. This menu allows the CE to set a specific trap in microcode
to force a microcode dump.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-72. CE Microcode Trap Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
Trap (4 characters displayed
—
vertically)
Add FSC Trap —
Remove FSC Trap —
List FSC Traps “CE FSC Trap List Menu” on page 5-85
Saved Traps “CE Saved Traps Menu” on page 5-72

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Trap set, Trap removed, or Select FSC
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to appear. Address is not saved.
Trap Allows CE to select a specific hex value. To change value of nibble, select
nibble, which causes a new menu to appear where you can select 0–F.
Add FSC Trap Allows the CE to add an FSC trap
Remove FSC Trap Allows the CE to remove an FSC trap
List FSC Traps Causes all FSC traps to be displayed in “CE FSC Trap List Menu” on
page 5-85
Saved Traps Causes the “CE Saved Traps Menu” on page 5-72 to appear

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-71

CE Saved Traps Menu
Table 5-73 shows the Saved Traps menu.

This menu allows the CE to add, remove or list saved FSC traps.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-73. CE Saved Traps Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Microcode Trap Menu” on page 5-71
Trap (4 characters displayed
—
vertically)
Add Saved FSC Trap —
Rmv Saved FSC Traps —
List Saved FSC Traps “CE Saved FSC Trap List Menu” on page 5-84

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Trap set, Trap remove, or Select FSC
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Microcode Trap Menu” on page 5-71 to appear. The
address is not saved.
Trap Allows the CE to select a specific hex value. To change the value of the
nibble, select the nibble, which causes a pop-up menu to appear where
you can select 0–F.
Add Saved FSC Trap Allows the CE to add a Saved FSC trap
Rmv Saved FSC Traps Allows the CE to remove a Saved FSC trap
List Saved FSC Traps Causes the “CE Saved FSC Trap List Menu” on page 5-84 to be displayed

CE Read Tape Menu

Table 5-74 shows the Read Tape menu. This menu allows the CE to select portions of the tape to be
displayed on the operator/CE panel.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-74. CE Read Tape Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
Show SARS Volser —
Process Loaded Tape “CE Process Tape Menu” on page 5-73
Unload Drive —
Start —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to appear

Show SARS Volser Displays SARS Volser
Process Loaded Tape Allows CE to move and read tape
Unload Drive Allows the CE to unload the cartridge from the drive
Start Enables ACF on a Model B11/E11/H11. Function cannot be selected on a
Model B1A/E1A/H1A.

5-72 IBM 3590 MI

CE Process Tape Menu
Table 5-75 shows the Process Tape menu. This menu allows the CE to select portions of the tape to be
displayed on the operator/CE panel.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-75. CE Process Tape Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
Space “Space Menu” on page 5-74
Locate —
Read Block “Read Block Menu” on page 5-74
Next Block ID “Next Block ID Menu” on page 5-75

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to appear

Space Allows CE to move to different parts of tape
Locate Allows the CE to locate to any block on the tape
Read Block Allows the CE to read data or header info from tape
Next Block ID Displays the next block ID on tape

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-73

Space Menu
Table 5-76 shows the Space menu. This menu allows the CE to select portions of the tape to be displayed
on the operator/CE panel.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-76. Space Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
Space FRWD BLK number of blocks
Space BKWD BLK number of blocks
Space FRWD File number of files
Space BKWD File number of files
Space EOD —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to appear

Space FRWD BLK Allows CE to space forward on tape the number of blocks specified
Space BKWD BLK Allows CE to space backward on tape the number of blocks specified
Space FRWD File Allows CE to space forward on tape the number of files specified
Space BKWD File Allows CE to space backward on tape the number of files specified
Space EOD Allows CE to space to the end of data

Read Block Menu

Table 5-77 shows the Read Block menu. This menu allows the CE to do a read block command.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-77. Read Block Menu
Function Next Menu
Read Blk Data —
Read Blk HDR —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Read BLK Data Displays the first 80 characters of blocks data. At bottom of menu, you can
go to next 80 character and up to 16K.
Read BLK HDR Displays the first 80 characters of blocks header. By scrolling down, you
can display the next 16 characters.

5-74 IBM 3590 MI

Next Block ID Menu
Table 5-78 shows the Next Block ID menu This menu allows the CE to show the next block id.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-78. Next Block ID Menu
Function Next Menu
Next Block ID :xxxxxxxx —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Next Block ID Displays the next blocks ID

Password Menu
Table 5-79 shows the Password menu.

This menu is displayed when Engr Use Only or OEM Use Only is chosen from the “CE Utilities Menu” on
page 5-66. If the correct password is entered, the “Engr Use Only Menu” on page 5-76 or the “OEM Use
Only Menu” on page 5-78 appears.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-79. Password Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel Previous menu
A... —
Z... —
0... —
9 —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Password:
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <password>

Cancel Causes the previous menu to appear (see Figure 5-8 on page 5-17)
<character> Indicates the current character to be entered into the password. When this option is
chosen, the character selected is entered into the password and displayed in the message
area. After the last letter is entered and the password is correct, the “Engr Use Only
Menu” on page 5-76, or “Media Test Mode Menu” on page 5-77, or “OEM Use Only Menu”
on page 5-78 is displayed, depending on which path was used to access this menu. See
Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 for more detail. If the password is not correct, the previous menu
appears. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 for linkage.

The message area indicates that a password is being entered. Every character entered in the password
field is displayed in the message area.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-75

| Engr Use Only Menu
Table 5-80 shows the Engr Use Only menu. This menu allows Engineering to access the menu items, after
entering the password.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-80. (CE) Engr Use Only Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
Control Store... “Control Store Select Address Menu” on page 5-80
Media Test Mode “Password Menu” on page 5-75
Allow Alter PVPD —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Caution:
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: data may be lost

Cancel Causes the “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to appear

Control Store Allows Engineering to read and write any address in nonvolatile store and
in control store DRAM.

Attention: The message area warns that damage can occur to the
machine. The machine can be configured improperly and made inoperable
with this option.
Media Test Mode Causes the password menu to appear. After you enter the password in
“Password Menu” on page 5-75, “Media Test Mode Menu” on page 5-77
allows you to set media mode.
Allow Alter PVPD Conditions the microcode to allow access and altering of the privileged
vital product data

| H SARS Config Menu

| Table 5-81 shows the H SARS Configuration menu. This menu allows service representatives and
| engineering staff to display the H SARS Configuration after entering the password.

| Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
| Table 5-81. H SARS Config Menu
| Function Next Menu
| Cancel Table 5-80
| Disable HSARS —
| Temp and Perm Chk —
| Temp, Perm, Tens Chk —
|
| Cancel Causes the “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to appear
| Media Mode Off/On Allows Engineering to set Media Mode OFF or ON. The default is OFF.
| When this option is set to ON, the drive is placed in a special mode to test
| the media. Any media written in this mode can only be read by a device in
| media mode. If the device reading the media is not in media mode, the
| cartridge appears as a scratch.
| Normal/Short Clean Cycle Allows Engineering to set the cleaning cycle to normal or short
| Allow/Prev Export Tape Allows Engineering to allow or prevent the export of a tape

| V SARS Config Menu

| Table 5-82 on page 5-77 shows the V SARS Configuration menu. This menu allows Engineering, after
| entering the password, to display and configure the V SARS area.

5-76 IBM 3590 MI

| Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
| Table 5-82. V SARS Config Menu
| Function Next Menu
| Cancel Table 5-80 on page 5-76
| Disable V SARS —
| Perm Err Chk Only —
| Temp and Perm Chk —
| WRT Prot Bad Tapes —
|
| Cancel Causes the “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to appear
| Media Mode Off/On Allows Engineering to set Media Mode OFF or ON. The default is OFF.
| When this option is set to ON, the drive is placed in a special mode to test
| the media. Any media written in this mode can only be read by a device in
| media mode. If the device reading the media is not in media mode, the
| cartridge appears as a scratch.
| Normal/Short Clean Cycle Allows Engineering to set the cleaning cycle to normal or short
| Allow/Prev Export Tape Allows Engineering to allow or prevent the export of a tape

Media Test Mode Menu

Table 5-83 shows the Media Test mode menu. This menu allows Engineering, after entering the password,
to initiate special media test algorithms.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-83. Media Test Mode Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
Media Mode Off/On —
Normal/Quick Clean Cycle —
Allow/Prev Export Tape —
Tape Wipe Disabled/Enabled —
Normal/Quick Load Mode —

Cancel Causes the “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to appear

Media Mode Off/On Allows Engineering to set Media Mode OFF or ON. When this option is set
to On, the drive is placed in a special mode to test the media. Any media
written in this mode can only be read by a device in media mode. If the
device reading the media is not in media mode, the cartridge appears as a
scratch. The default is Off.
Normal/Quick Clean Cycle Allows Engineering to set the cleaning cycle to normal or quick. The
default is Normal.
Allow/Prev Export Tape Allows Engineering to allow or prevent the export of a tape. The default is
Allow.
| Tape Wipe Disabled/Enabled Allows Engineering to enable or disable the tape-wipe function.The default
| is Disabled.
| Normal/Quick Load Mode Allows Engineering to choose between a normal load speed or a quick
| load speed. The default is Normal.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-77

OEM Use Only Menu
Table 5-84 shows the OEM Use Only menu. This menu allows OEM support personnel to access the
menu items, after entering the password.
Table 5-84. OEM Use Only Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
Manufacturer “CE VPD Data Menu” on page 5-69
Drive Type “CE VPD Field Offset Menu” on page 5-69
Drive Model Num “CE VPD Data Menu” on page 5-69
Save Changes —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: <none>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66 to appear

Manufacturer Allows OEM support personnel to customize the manufacturer field in the
VPD Data menu
Drive Type Allows OEM support personnel to customize the drive type field, using
the VPD Field Offset menu and the VPD Data menu
Drive Model Num Allows OEM support personnel to customize the drive model number
field in the VPD Data menu
Save Changes Stores the changes into nonvolatile storage (NVS)

5-78 IBM 3590 MI

Statistics Menu
Table 5-85 shows part of the Statistics menu.
Notes:
1. In later levels of microcode the statistics are shown in decimal instead of hexadecimal format.
2. Statistics are valid only if the Save option is selected in “Statistics Menu” on page 5-31.
Table 5-85. Statistics Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Utilities Menu” on page 5-66
See below for complete list “Statistics Menu”
Note: Supplemental Message Lines: <none>

All functions are from the ACF transport. For example, Put Mag Fail is a failure when the cartridge is
moved from the transport to the magazine.
Cancel Causes the “Statistics Menu” on page 5-31 to appear
Mounts to Drv The total number of times a cartridge was mounted in the drive
Priority Mnts The total number of times a cartridge was mounted from the priority cell
Magazine Mnts Total number of times a cartridge was mounted from any cell of the
magazine
Clean Mounts The total number of times a cleaning cartridge was loaded in the device
Pwr On Hrs Displays the total number of hours the device was powered ON

Note: When the card pack is replaced, the Power On Hrs (time stamp) is
automatically reset to dddd = 0000.
ACF Errors The total number of errors that occurred on ACF operations
Put Drive Fail The total number of errors that occurred when a cartridge was inserted in
the drive
Get Drive Fail Total number of errors that occurred when a cartridge was being removed
from drive
Pinch Mtr Err The total number of timeouts on the motor
Feed Mtr Error The total number of timeouts on the motor
Elevator Error The total number of timeouts on the motor
Cell to Cell The total number of times cartridges were moved to or from any cells or to
or from the drive
Recalibrations The total number of times the transport had to be recalibrated
Put Mag Fail Total number of errors that occurred when a cartridge was inserted in
magazine
Get Mag Fail Total number of errors that occurred when a cartridge was being taken
from magazine
Put Pri Fail Total number of errors that occurred when a cartridge was being inserted
in priority cell
Get Pri Fail Total number of errors that occurred when a cartridge was being retrieved
from priority cell
Get Mag Retry The total number of errors that required a retry operation when a cartridge
was being retrieved from a magazine or priority cell (from the front of the
ACF)
Put Mag Retry The total number of errors that required a retry operation when a cartridge
was being put into the magazine or priority cell (from the front of the ACF)
Get Dri Retry The total number of errors that required a retry operation when a cartridge
was being retrieved from the drive
Put Dri Retry The total number of errors that required a retry operation when a cartridge
was being put into the drive

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-79

Control Store Select Address Menu
Table 5-86 shows the Control Store Select Address menu. This menu allows the CE to select an address
in control store. Data is written into the selected address. The message line indicates that the Control
Store option was chosen on the previous screen.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-86. Control Store Select Address Menu
Next Menu
Cancel “Engr Use Only Menu” on page 5-76
CS Adr (8 characters displayed
—
vertically)
Continue “Control Store Alter Menu”

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Utilities
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: Control Store

Cancel Causes the “Engr Use Only Menu” on page 5-76 to appear
CS Adr Defines the hex address to be chosen. To change the value of the nibble,
select the nibble, which causes a pop-up menu to appear where you can
select 0–F.
Continue Takes the address displayed and goes to “Control Store Alter Menu”

Control Store Alter Menu

Table 5-87 shows the Control Store Alter menu. This menu allows a PE to display the byte in the specified
address and to update the data in that address. The message lines indicate the control store address
selected and indicates the value at that address.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-87. Control Store Alter Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “Control Store Select Address Menu”
<CS Addrss><CS Data> —
<CS hi nibble> —
<CS low nibble> —
Save and Return “Control Store Select Address Menu”

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: CS Addr: <CS Addr>
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: CS Val: <CS Data>

Cancel Causes the “Control Store Select Address Menu” to appear. Any
modifications to the byte are canceled.
<address> <data>
Shows the data contained in the word (4 bytes) selected. This display
cannot be selected and is for information purposes only.
<CS nibble> Shows the current nibble (hex number) in the byte selected. To change the
value of the nibble, select the nibble, which causes a pop-up menu to
appear where you can select 0–F.
Save and Return Saves the updated byte in the address and returns to the “Control Store
Select Address Menu”

5-80 IBM 3590 MI

CE Drive Features Menu
Table 5-88 shows the Drive Features menu.

This menu allows the CE to specify the configuration into which the drive is being installed.
Table 5-88. CE Drive Features Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Drive Options Menu” on page 5-52
Model B11/E11/H11 Rack/Frame —
Model B1A/E1A/H1A 3494 RS422 Att —
Model B1A/E1A/H1A C12/C14 “CE Model B1A/E1A/H1A C12/C14 Menu” on page 5-82
Model B1A/E1A/H1A no RS422
—
Attach
Model B11/E11/H11 Deskside ACF —
Model B1A/E1A/H1A Deskside —
Model B1A/E1A/H1A Interface A —
Model B1A/E1A/H1A Interface B —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: When done, select
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: CANCEL option

Cancel Causes the “CE Drive Options Menu” on page 5-52 to appear
Model B11/E11/H11 Rack/Frame
CE must select this option if the drive is a Model B11/E11/H11 being
installed in a rack or frame. Selecting this option also tells the drive what
model number it is. This option will not become active until you either
select Reset Drive from the operator Services menu, press the Reset
pushbutton on the operator/CE panel, or power OFF the drive, after you
have returned to the CE Options menu.
Model B1A/E1A/H1A 3494 RS422 Att
CE must select this option if the drive is a Model B1A/E1A/H1A being
installed in a 3494 tape library. Specifying this option also tells the drive
what model number it is. The drive is attached to the library manager via
the RS422 port. This option will not become active until you either select
Reset Drive from the operator Services menu, press the Reset
pushbutton on the operator/CE panel, or power OFF the drive, after you
have returned to the CE Options menu.
Model B1A/E1A/H1A C12/C14
Go to “CE Model B1A/E1A/H1A C12/C14 Menu” on page 5-82.
Model B1A/E1A/H1A No RS422 Attach
CE must select this option if the drive is a Model B1A/E1A/H1A without
the RS422 hooked up. This could be the case in a 3494 tape library that
contains a ESCON controller in a Model A14 frame. Specifying this option
also tells the drive what model number it is. This option will not become
active until you either select Reset Drive from the operator Services
menu, press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE panel, or power
OFF the drive, after you have returned to the CE Options menu.
Model B11/E11/H11 Deskside ACF
Select this option if the drive is a Model B11/E11/H11 with a deskside
model which has an ACF. This option will not become active until you
either select Reset Drive from the operator Services menu, press the
Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE panel, or power OFF the drive, after
you have returned to the CE Options menu.
Model B1A/E1A/H1A Deskside
Select this option if the drive is a Model B1A/E1A/H1A and is a deskside

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-81

 model. This option will not become active until you either select Reset
Drive from the operator Services menu, press the Reset pushbutton on
the operator/CE panel, or power OFF the drive, after you have returned
to the CE Options menu.
Model B1A/E1A/H1A Interface A
CE must select this option if the drive is a Model B1A/E1A/H1A being
installed in a non-IBM tape library which uses a 3494-like protocol.
Specifying this option will also tell the drive what model number it is. The
drive is attached to the library via the RS422 port. This option will not
become active until you either select Reset Drive from the operator
Services menu, press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE panel, or
power OFF the drive, after you have returned to the CE Options menu.
Model B1A/E1A/H1A Interface B
CE must select this option if the drive is a Model B1A/E1A/H1A being
installed in a non-IBM tape library which uses the OEM protocol for the
RS422 port. Selecting this option will also tell the drive what model
number it is. This option will not become active until you either select
Reset Drive from the operator Services menu, press the Reset
pushbutton on the operator/CE panel, or power OFF the drive, after you
have returned to the CE Options menu.

CE Model B1A/E1A/H1A C12/C14 Menu

Table 5-89 shows the Model B1A/E1A/H1A C12/C14 menu.

This menu allows the CE to specify that the drive is being installed into a C12/C14 environment.
Table 5-89. CE B1A/E1A/H1A C12/C14 Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Drive Features Menu” on page 5-81
Auto Clean On/Off —
DRV Emulation Go to “CE DRV Emulation Menu” on page 5-83

Cancel Causes the “CE Drive Features Menu” on page 5-81 to appear
Auto Clean On/Off CE must set this option to ON if the drive is to be automatically cleaned. If
set to Off, the drive will not be automatically cleaned. For more
information, see IBM TotalStorage Silo—Compatible Tape Frame Model
C12 Introduction, Planning, and User’s Guide, Document Number
GA32-0366, or the Install section of this manual. This option will not
become active until you either select Reset Drive from the operator
Services menu, press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE panel, or
power OFF the drive, after you have returned to the CE Options menu.
DRV Emulation CE must set this option to set the condition to emulate a 4480, 4490,
SD-3 or 9490, or to reset emulation mode. If this option is selected, the
“CE DRV Emulation Menu” on page 5-83 will appear.

5-82 IBM 3590 MI

CE DRV Emulation Menu
Table 5-90 shows the CE DRV Emulation menu.

This menu allows the CE to specify that the drive is to emulate a 4480, 4490, SD-3 or 9490, or no
emulation at all.
Table 5-90. CE DRV Emulation Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Model B1A/E1A/H1A C12/C14 Menu” on page 5-82
No Emulation —
4480 —
4490 —
SD-3 —
9490 —

Cancel Causes the “CE Model B1A/E1A/H1A C12/C14 Menu” on page 5-82 to
appear
No Emulation Do not select this option. The C12/C14 Host microcode does not
interface with the 3590 drive type. All 3590 drives installed in a C12/C14
library must emulate one of the STK drive types.
4480 CE must set this option if the B1A is to emulate a 4480 drive. This option
will not become active until you either select Reset Drive from the
operator Services menu, press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE
panel, or power OFF the drive, after you have returned to the CE
Options menu.
4490 CE must set this option if the B1A is to emulate a 4490 drive. This option
will not become active until you either select Reset Drive from the
operator Services menu, press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE
panel, or power OFF the drive, after you have returned to the CE
Options menu.
SD-3 CE must set this option if the B1A is to emulate a SD-3 drive. This option
will not become active until you either select Reset Drive from the
operator Services menu, press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE
panel, or power OFF the drive, after you have returned to the CE
Options menu.
9490 CE must set this option if the B1A is to emulate a 9490 drive. This option
will not become active until you either select Reset Drive from the
operator Services menu, press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE
panel, or power OFF the drive, after you have returned to the CE
Options menu.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-83

CE Saved FSC Trap List Menu
Table 5-91 shows the Saved FSC Trap List menu.

This menu allows the CE to select a saved FSC to be removed from a list of saved FSC traps.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-91. Saved FSC Trap List Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Saved Traps Menu” on page 5-72
Saved FSC1 “CE Remove Saved FSC Trap Menu” on page 5-85
Saved FSC2 “CE Remove Saved FSC Trap Menu” on page 5-85
Saved FSC3 “CE Remove Saved FSC Trap Menu” on page 5-85

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Trap set, Trap remove, or Select FSC
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Saved Traps Menu” on page 5-72 to appear
Saved FSC1 Selecting this FSC will cause “CE Remove Saved FSC Trap Menu” on
page 5-85 to be displayed. If no saved trap exists, then “SLOT EMPTY”
will be displayed.
Saved FSC2 Selecting this FSC will cause “CE Remove Saved FSC Trap Menu” on
page 5-85 to be displayed. If no saved trap exists, then “SLOT EMPTY”
will be displayed.
Saved FSC3 Selecting this FSC will cause “CE Remove Saved FSC Trap Menu” on
page 5-85 to be displayed. If no saved trap exists, then “SLOT EMPTY”
will be displayed.

Note: Only three saved traps can be active at a time.

5-84 IBM 3590 MI

CE Remove Saved FSC Trap Menu
Table 5-92 shows the Remove Saved FSC Trap menu.

This menu allows the CE to remove a saved FSC trap which was selected in “CE Saved FSC Trap List
Menu” on page 5-84.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-92. Remove Saved FSC Trap Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Saved Traps Menu” on page 5-72
Trap (4 characters displayed
—
vertically)
Rmv Saved FSC Trap —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Trap set, Trap remove, or Select FSC
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Saved Traps Menu” on page 5-72 to appear
Trap Allows the CE to select a specific hex value. To change the value of the
nibble, select the nibble, which causes a pop-up menu to appear where
you can select 0–F.
Rmv Saved FSC Trap Allows the CE to remove the Saved FSC trap which was selected in the
previous menu “CE Saved FSC Trap List Menu” on page 5-84

CE FSC Trap List Menu

Table 5-93 shows the FSC Trap List menu.

This menu allows the CE to select a (normal) FSC to be removed from a list of (normal) FSC traps.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-93. FSC Trap List Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Microcode Trap Menu” on page 5-71
FSC1 (normal trap) “CE Remove FSC Trap Menu” on page 5-86
FSC2 (normal trap) “CE Remove FSC Trap Menu” on page 5-86
.... (normal trap) “CE Remove FSC Trap Menu” on page 5-86

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Trap set, Trap remove, or Select FSC
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Microcode Trap Menu” on page 5-71 to appear
FSC1 Selecting this FSC will cause “CE Remove FSC Trap Menu” on page 5-86
to be displayed
FSC2 Selecting this FSC will cause “CE Remove FSC Trap Menu” on page 5-86
to be displayed
.... Selecting this FSC will cause “CE Remove FSC Trap Menu” on page 5-86
to be displayed
Notes:
1. If no traps exist, then “NO TRAPS SET” is displayed.
2. More than three FSCs may be displayed on this menu.

Chapter 5. Operator Panel 5-85

CE Remove FSC Trap Menu
Table 5-94 shows the Remove FSC Trap menu.

This menu allows the CE to remove a (normal) FSC trap which was selected in “CE FSC Trap List Menu”
on page 5-85.

Note: This menu is normally used because of specific requests from support personnel.
Table 5-94. CE Remove FSC Trap Menu
Function Next Menu
Cancel “CE Microcode Trap Menu” on page 5-71
Trap (4 characters displayed
—
vertically)
Remove FSC Trap —

Notes:
1. Supplemental Message Line 1: Trap set, Trap remove, or Select FSC
2. Supplemental Message Line 2: <none>

Cancel Causes the “CE Microcode Trap Menu” on page 5-71 to appear
Trap Allows the CE to select a specific hex value. To change the value of the
nibble, select the nibble, which causes a pop-up menu to appear where
you can select 0–F.
Remove FSC Trap Allows the CE to remove the (normal) FSC trap which was selected in the
previous menu “CE FSC Trap List Menu” on page 5-85

5-86 IBM 3590 MI

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility
Contents
ACF Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
ACF Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
ACF Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Cartridge Magazine Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Inserting and Removing Cartridges from Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
ACF Door and Lock Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Inserting and Removing Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Inserting Magazine Into 3590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Removing Magazine From 3590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Priority Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Transport Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
ACF and Drive Loader Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
ACF Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
ACF Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Initiator Control of ACF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Accumulate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Random Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Random 2-LUN Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Cell Status Indicator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Cell Status: Flashing Yellow – Attention Indicator LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Cell Status: Steady Yellow – Alert Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Cell Status: Steady Green – In-Use Indicator LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 6-1

ACF Description
The ACF magazine, P/N 39F4762, weighs 0.68 kg (1.5 lb) and each cartridge weighs 0.23 kg (0.5 lb).
Figure 6-1 on page 6-3 shows the automatic cartridge facility with a magazine installed. The ACF is
attached to the tape drive mechanism.

6-2 IBM 3590 MI

ACF Functions
The mechanical functions of the ACF (shown in Figure 6-1) are:
v The operator/CE panel
1 is a located on top of the front bezel above the ACF. The operator/CE panel
is movable for easier viewing by the operator.

Figure 6-1. 3590 ACF and Magazine

v The magazine
3 has a capacity of ten cartridges that can be inserted and removed by hand.
There is also a priority cell
2 in the ACF. A single cartridge may be inserted into the priority cell import
position allowing the ACF to process eleven cartridges.
v The magazine handle
9 is used to insert and to remove the magazine in the ACF. See “Inserting and
Removing Magazine” on page 6-7. The magazine handle also is used for transporting the magazine.

Note: Do not touch the handle during operations. Doing so may cause job interruptions.
v A magazine cartridge lock
5 that the operator can use to open or lock the door
6. The magazine
cartridge lock should be locked (door locked) for random mode and for transportation of the magazine.
The magazine cartridge lock should be in the locked position when cartridges are present and should
be unlocked (door unlocked) when loading cartridges. When the magazine is inserted into the ACF the
cartridges are automatically unlocked and ready to be accessed depending on the operational mode
selected. By pushing in the lock button
7, to the detent/lock position the operator can lock cartridges
in the magazine when the magazine is in the ACF.
v A magazine LED
8 indicates that a cartridge occupies a slot.

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility 6-3

ACF Components
See Figure 6-2.

The ACF
3 attaches to the deck enclosure
2 with two alignment pins, two hooks, and one captive
screw.

The main components of the ACF are the:

v Transport assembly
7. It delivers cartridges from the magazine or priority cell to the loader
1, which
is located in the deck enclosure. After the cartridge is processed, it is returned to the magazine or
priority cell by the transport assembly.
v Magazine assembly
6. Contains ten cells for storing cartridges to be processed.
v Priority cell
5. An additional storage cell for inputting a single cartridge.
v Operator/CE display
4, which is mounted in a holder on top of the ACF.

Figure 6-2. ACF and Deck Enclosure

6-4 IBM 3590 MI

 Cartridge Magazine Positions

Figure 6-3. 3590 Magazine Cartridge Positions – Left View

Figure 6-3 shows a partially loaded magazine. The magazine
1 has two positions for the cartridges
2
to be positioned.
Notes:
1. The magazine lock
4 must be in the unlocked position, as indicated by the icon, to remove or insert
cartridges into the magazine.
2. Always insert the cartridges into the magazine so that the labels are orientated, as shown in
7.
3. A sensing device detects any cartridge position beyond the import position, and prevents operation of
the cartridge transport.
| Import position
5 When the operator inserts a cartridge into the magazine, the cartridge is
| said to be in the import position. In this detent position, the cartridge
| extends out the back of the magazine so it can be grasped by the
| transport and moved into the transport carriage.
| Export position
6 When the device returns the cartridge to the magazine, the cartridge is
| said to be in the export position. In this detent position, the cartridge
| extends out the front of the magazine, so it can be grasped and removed
| by the operator.

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility 6-5

 Inserting and Removing Cartridges from Magazine
Note: The magazine cartridge lock
4 in Figure 6-3 on page 6-5 must be in the unlocked position before
you insert or remove cartridges from the magazine. The door
3 of the magazine
1 will be
damaged if cartridges are moved with the magazine lock in the locked position.

Cartridges are inserted and removed manually.

| Figure 6-4 shows two areas that can be used to grasp the 3590 cartridge. Operators with smaller hands
| may elect to grasp the cartridges on the top and finger notch
2 on the bottom cartridge surface with their
| thumb and index finger. Operators with larger hands may find it more convenient to grasp the sides of the
| cartridge using the finger notches
1 on the side of the cartridge case.
|

Figure 6-4. Grasping Cartridges

The cartridges are removed with the least effort by pressing the label end of the cartridge to the right (to
the side of the magazine opposite the magazine lock) while pulling out.

Note: Always engage the magazine lock
4 (Figure 6-3 on page 6-5) before you transport a loaded
magazine to avoid dropping the cartridges or shifting their position in the magazine.

6-6 IBM 3590 MI

ACF Door and Lock Function
The magazine has a door
3 in Figure 6-3 on page 6-5 that extends along the entire length of the
magazine. The door is located at the front left side of the magazine when viewed from the front. A
hand-operated slider is located in the middle of the magazine frame. The two positions for the magazine
lock are:

Unlocked
The slider is towards the front of the magazine to enable insertion and removal of the
cartridge from the magazine. The magazine door opens toward the left, permitting the
insertion and removal of cartridges.

Locked The slider is towards the back of the magazine. The magazine is now locked for random
mode of operation for the ACF or for transporting the magazine outside of the ACF.
Attention: When a Model A14 is installed in a 3495, the magazine cartridge lock must be

left in the unlocked position.

Inserting and Removing Magazine

Figure 6-5 shows how to insert or remove the magazine from the ACF. Use two hands to load the
magazine in the ACF:

Figure 6-5. Inserting and Removing Magazine from ACF

Inserting Magazine Into 3590

1. Hold the handle with one hand while you hold the body of the magazine at a 45 degree angle with the
other hand.
2. Insert the lower front of the magazine into the ACF, as shown in Figure 6-5 so that the front of the
magazine is inside the ACF lip
1.
3. Pivot the magazine top towards the ACF, until the magazine is flush with the front of the ACF.
4. Push the magazine handle into the ACF lock bar to secure the magazine in the ACF.

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility 6-7

 Note: The ACF automatically unlocks the magazine cartridge lock when the magazine is correctly
inserted. You must manually push the lock button in (see
5 in Figure 6-1 on page 6-3) if the
mode selected requires a locked magazine.

Removing Magazine From 3590

Use two hands to remove the magazine from the Automatic Cartridge Facility, as follows:
1. Pull the magazine handle out of the ACF lock bar to release the magazine from the ACF.
2. Hold the handle with one hand and use your other hand to hold the body of the magazine as you pivot
the magazine top towards you until the magazine is at a 45 degree angle to the ACF.
3. Lift the lower front of the magazine out of the ACF until the magazine is clear of the ACF.
4. Ensure that the magazine door is locked.
Notes:
1. Do not touch the magazine handle while the 3590 is processing tape cartridges. Touching the
magazine handle while the 3590 is operating may result in unexpected job interruptions.
2. Use care when moving or storing magazines. When the magazine is not in storage or loaded in the
ACF, it should be set on its side to prevent it from tipping over or falling.
3. Never ship magazines with cartridges loaded. The cartridges will vibrate in the magazine slots,
resulting in contamination on the sides of the cartridges. This contamination may cause transport or
loader failures.

6-8 IBM 3590 MI

Priority Cell
See Figure 6-6 on page 6-10.

The priority cell
5 is located above the magazine. The priority cell allows the operator to load a cartridge
directly into the ACF when a priority system Mount command occurs. Insert the cartridge into the second
detent position.

Transport Assembly
The transport assembly
2 is mounted to an elevator
13. An elevator motor
3 and leadscrew
12
drive the elevator and transport assembly up or down. The position of the elevator and transport assembly
is controlled by the transport position sensor
8.

Note: Do not attempt to lubricate ACF leadscrew. Lubricants will ruin the leadscrew coating.

The transport assembly can grasp a cartridge from the import position of either a magazine
6, priority
cell
5 or from the loader
1 in the drive enclosure. Two square shafts, the pinch
11 and feed
9 are
mounted vertically and pass through the transport assembly. Thus, rotating the square shafts can turn
gears and transfer mechanical motion to the transport assembly. Each shaft is controlled by a separate
motor; the pinch
4 and feed motors
14. Rotation of the motors will cause the following actions:
v The pinch motor
4 and its square shaft (through gears and linkage) will cause either the front roller
arm
7 or rear roller arm
10 to squeeze against the side of the cartridge.
v The feed motor
14 and its square shaft (through gears) will cause the pinch rollers to rotate
7 and

10. The direction of rotation is dependent on the operation to be performed; either pull a cartridge into
the transport from a cell or the loader or push a cartridge from the transport into a cell or the loader.
v The elevator
3, pinch
4, and feed
14 motors are same type/model.

The position of the transport assembly and the cartridge is controlled by sensors.

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility 6-9

Figure 6-6. Transport Assembly

6-10 IBM 3590 MI

ACF and Drive Loader Sensors

Figure 6-7. ACF and Drive Loader Sensors

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility 6-11

 The following part names refer to Figure 6-7 on page 6-11.
Table 6-1. ACF Drive and Loader Sensor Names and Key Identifiers
Key Name Key Name

1 File-protect sensor (FID C8)
10 Transport-position sensor (FID 98)

2 Cartridge-present sensor (FID CD)
11 Priority-cell sensor (FID 9E)

3 Tray-up sensor (FID CA)
12 Magazine-present sensor assembly (FID A0)

4 Cartridge-type sensor card (FID CC)
13 Global/interference sensor (FID 9B)

5 Door-open sensor (FID C9)
14 Import/export sensors (not a FRU)

6 Limit-2 sensor (not a FRU)
15 Transport-position sensor (FID 98)

7 Pinch sensor (not a FRU)
16 Transport-position bar (not a FRU)

8 Limit-1 sensor (not a FRU)
17 Limit-2 sensor (not a FRU)

9 Global/interference sensor (FID 9B)
18 Limit-1 sensor (not a FRU)

ACF Sensors
| Table 6-2 describes the function of the ACF sensors that are also listed in Table 6-1 and shown in
| Figure 6-7 on page 6-11.
Table 6-2. ACF Sensor Functions
Key Type Function

6
8 Limit 1/Limit 2 sensor (2) Senses cartridge positions in transport within its limits

17
18

7 Pinch sensor Senses if cartridge is pinched or not pinched (located in transport card)

9
13 Global/cartridge present Global/cartridge present sensor assembly senses if a cartridge is
sensor and Global/interference present in the import position. Global/interference sensor senses if a
sensor (top and bottom) cartridge has moved past the import position

10
15 Transport-position sensor Senses vertical position of transport

11 Priority cell Senses cartridge in priority cell

12 Magazine present sensor Senses magazine is loaded in the ACF

14 Import/export sensors Senses cartridges in the import and export positions respectively

6-12 IBM 3590 MI

The following describes the sensor functions as a cartridge is moved from a magazine cell to the loaded
position in the drive loader.

See Figure 6-8.

Assume the transport assembly is initially positioned at the priority cell and the next available cartridge
must be loaded.

The front beam
3 of the global/interference sensors
2 and
4 is broken and the rear beam
5 is not.
The front beam indicates that at least one cartridge is in the import position and the rear beam will indicate
if a cartridge is beyond the import position which will cause interference with the movement of the
transport
1. With cartridge in import position and not beyond import position, elevator motor will begin
rotating the leadscrew
6 to lower the transport.

Figure 6-8. Transport Assembly at Priority Cell Position

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility 6-13

See Figure 6-9.

The transport
1 moves to each cell position, stops, and checks if a cartridge is in the import position. If
not, the transport moves to the next cell and checks, repeating this process until a cartridge is sensed.

The transport-position sensor
6 senses the cell positions. The sensor is U-shaped and fits around the
edge of the transport position bar
7. Elongated slots
3 cut into the bar provide the spacing from one
cell to the next. When the two sensor beams
4 are broken by the solid area between the slots, the
transport stops. The sensor is shown at a cell location.

The cartridge is sensed by the import/export sensors
2 and
9. Again, two beams are used
5. If both
beams are broken, a cartridge
8 is detected in the import position.

Figure 6-9. Transport Stops at First Cartridge in Import

6-14 IBM 3590 MI

See Figure 6-10.

After the cartridge is detected in the import position, the pinch motor rotates and causes the following
action:
v Rotates the square pinch shaft
11.
v Using gears and linkage, rotates the pinch roller arm
7 against the cartridge, squeezing the cartridge
between the rollers and the guide rail bearing
4.
v A cantilever arm
3 is rotated into the magazine detent mechanism, disengaging the detent that holds
the cartridge in the magazine. Before moving the transport assembly, ensure the arm is disengaged.

The pinch motor stops and the feed motor begins rotating to cause the following:
v Rotates the square feed shaft
8.
v Through gears, the rollers
7 on the pinch roller arm are rotated to pull the cartridge out of the
magazine cell and into the transport
6.
v The light beam of the limit-1 sensor
2 and
5 is interrupted by the leading edge of the cartridge. The
cartridge continues to move into the transport until the light beam of limit-2 sensor
1 and
10 is
interrupted/broken, at which time the feed motor stops. The indication that a cartridge
6 is in the
transport is when both limit-1 and limit-2 sensor beams are interrupted/broken.

Figure 6-10. Cartridge is Pulled Into Transport

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility 6-15

See Figure 6-11.

The elevator motor rotates, turning the leadscrew
3 to raise or lower the elevator and transport. Again
the transport-position sensor
4 senses the slots in the transport position bar
5. When the priority cell
position
2 is sensed, the elevator motor stops. This is also the position for the drive loader carriage
1.

Figure 6-11. Transport Moves to Priority Cell

6-16 IBM 3590 MI

See Figure 6-12.

The pinch and feed motors again operate to move the cartridge, this time, into the loader carriage, as
follows:
1. The feed motor rotates its square feed shaft
4 which, in turn, causes the rollers on the rear pinch
roller arm
3 to rotate, pushing the cartridge into the loader carriage
2.
2. When the cartridge is pushed to the end of the carriage, the cartridge-present sensor operates
1 and
the feed motor stops.
3. The pinch motor again rotates, moving the rear pinch roller arm away from the cartridge, and then
stops.

Figure 6-12. Transport Moves Cartridge Into Loader Carriage

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility 6-17

See Figure 6-13.

Finally the loader drive motor
3 rotates to move the loader carriage forward to get the cartridge
2 and
then lowers the cartridge down onto the file reel motor gear clutch
5. The following occurs when the
cartridge is lowered onto the file reel motor gear:
v The cartridge-type sensor
4 indicates if the cartridge is a valid 3590 cartridge.
v The cartridge being completely lowered onto the file reel motor gear clutch is assumed if the
cartridge-type sensor indicates the correct cartridge.
v Lowering the cartridge onto the file reel motor causes the gear clutch within the cartridge to engage the
drive clutch.
v The file-protect sensor
1 indicates if the cartridge is file protected or unprotected.

Figure 6-13. Loader Moves Cartridge In and Down Onto File Reel

6-18 IBM 3590 MI

 Modes of Operation
The ACF has six modes of operation: manual, automatic, system, accumulate, random, and random
2-LUN. The operator can select all the modes.
Manual The device takes the cartridge from the priority cell or the ACF when Start is pressed and
the device returns the cartridge to its original cell.
Accumulate The operator inserts the cartridge in the priority cell and the device returns the cartridge to
the magazine.
Automatic The operator loads the magazine with cartridges and the device automatically feeds the
drive loader until the entire magazine is processed. Cartridges are returned to their original
cells.
System The host program initiates the load from the next cell. Cartridges are returned to their
original cells.
Random The device loads cartridges that are in the import position under host program control.
Cartridges are returned to the cell specified by the host program. The indicator lights are
all green and the magazine must be locked. This mode is supported on Model B11 only.
Random 2-LUN
| Same as Random mode above, but adds an extra SCSI logical unit (LUN) to control the
| ACF. This mode is supported on Model B11, E11, and H11.

ACF Notes
These items are general in nature and cover many or all modes. Rather than repeating these notes in
each mode description, the notes are shown here and referenced from the mode descriptions.
1. When the magazine is removed from the ACF, it is automatically locked.
When the magazine is placed in the ACF, it is automatically unlocked. If ACF random mode is to be
used, the operator must press the magazine lock button into the detent position.
2. In random mode, a cartridge that is returned to the magazine is placed in the import position, to be
available for reuse by the attaching host.
3. In manual, automatic, accumulate, and system mode, a cartridge returned to the magazine is placed
in the export position.
4. In all modes, to reuse a cartridge exported in the priority cell, either remove and re-insert the
cartridge or push the cartridge back to the import position and select Start on the Operator Panel.
5. The feed mechanism for the ACF can access cartridges only in the import position.
6. If the ACF is disabled, the operator presses Start on the operator/CE panel, and there is no magazine
in the ACF or there is no cartridge in the import position in either the magazine or in the priority cell,
the ACF returns to the disabled state without changing the position of any cartridge. This condition is
not an error.
7. If while unloading a cartridge to the magazine, the destination cell is occupied, the ACF tries to
unload the cartridge to the priority cell (also see Note 9).
8. If the ACF is instructed to unload a cartridge to the magazine and the magazine is not installed, the
ACF tries to unload the cartridge to the priority cell (also see Note 9). The cell-status indicator LED is
set to alert (solid yellow) for the priority cell.
9. If the ACF tries to unload the cartridge to the priority cell (in any mode other than random) and the
priority cell is occupied, the ACF sets the cell status indicator LED to attention (flashing yellow) on all
cells and disables the ACF (extra cartridge condition). Additionally the ATTN ACF message is
displayed. In random mode a Move Medium command specifying an already occupied priority cell as
a target will be failed as an illegal request.
For any mode other than random, when the cartridge occupying the priority cell is removed by the
operator, the ACF will automatically transfer the previously blocked cartridge to the priority cell in
export position without further operator intervention. The associated cell status information is reset.

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility 6-19

10. The physical implementation for most modes can be viewed as a medium changer with 11 import and
export ports, no storage elements, a single data transfer element, and a single medium transport
element that cannot be used to permanently store a piece of medium. For random mode, the ACF
contains one import and export port, 10 storage elements, a single data-transfer element and a single
medium-transport element.

Initiator Control of ACF

When the ACF operates in manual, accumulate, or automatic mode, the initiator controls only the unload
of the cartridge from the device; it does not issue any command that causes the ACF to load a cartridge. A
Load/Unload command that requests an unload operation causes a cartridge to be unloaded, as described
in “Modes of Operation” on page 6-19.

If a Load/Unload command with the ‘load’ bit set is received while the ACF is enabled in system mode, the
ACF loads a cartridge. If a Load/Unload command with the ‘load’ bit set is received in any mode other
than system mode, the command is presented check-condition status with associated sense data (70, not
ready, logical unit not ready, cause not reportable). Receiving two Load/Unload commands with the ‘load’
bit set, without an intervening Unload shall also cause the same check condition.

When the ACF operates in system mode, the program has indirect control over the ACF; the program
specifies that a cartridge is to be loaded if possible, but cannot specify from which cell the cartridge is to
be obtained. If no magazine is found and the priority cell is empty, the command check condition status is
presented, and includes associated sense data (70, not ready, no medium present). If a magazine is
present but contains no loadable cartridges and the priority cell also is empty, the command is presented
check condition status, with associated sense data (70, not ready, medium source element empty).

When the ACF operates in random mode, the program can control the ACF through the Prevent/Allow
Medium Removal, Read Element Status, and Move Medium commands. These commands allow the ACF
to access cartridges from cells that are located non-sequentially; to assist the initiator in generating and
maintaining an inventory of the cartridges in the magazine, and to indicate to the operator that these
cartridges can be removed.

The physical implementation for most modes can be viewed as a medium changer with 11 import/export
ports, no storage elements, a single data-transfer element, and a single medium-transport element that
cannot be used to permanently store a piece of medium. Random mode has a different configuration. For
random mode, the ACF contains 1 import/export port, 10 storage elements, a single data-transfer element
and a single medium-transport element. The program should issue the Read Element Status command
when changing ACF modes to assure the correct configuration. The program should assume that it can
request medium to be moved from an import/export port that does not have the ‘ImpExp’ indication set (for
example, an exported medium can be imported again).

6-20 IBM 3590 MI

Manual Mode
Manual mode allows the operator to load a cartridge by operator action. Each time the operator presses
Start, the ACF selects a cartridge from the appropriate cell and mounts it in the device. Only one cartridge
is loaded for each operator action.

Terminology Note: For this and all other modes, the term initial conditions refers to actions the operator
or attaching host must take prior to attempting to initiate ACF activity. Enabling conditions refers to the
actions that begin ACF motion. Similarly, disabling conditions refers to the actions that stop ACF activity.

When the ACF is operating in manual mode, the following applies (see also “ACF Notes” on page 6-19):
v Initial conditions:
Manual mode is selected from the Set ACF Mode menu.
v Enabling conditions: To enable manual mode
– Insert a cartridge into the import position of the priority cell.
v Disabling conditions: The ACF becomes disabled in manual mode when:
– The magazine cartridge was processed and returned to its original cell and there is no cartridge in
the import position of the priority cell.
– The ACF is enabled from the operator choosing Start, but the ACF cannot detect a cartridge in the
import position in the magazine.
– An attention condition is detected in the ACF; for example, an extra cartridge condition.
– The magazine is not installed; choosing Start causes the ACF to return to the disabled state.
v Operation
1. If the ACF is disabled and is in manual mode, and the operator selects Start on the operator/CE panel,
the ACF becomes enabled, then verifies that at least one cartridge is in the import position of the
magazine. If so, the ACF indexes down the magazine until it finds the first cell with a cartridge in the
import position. The ACF sets the cell-status indicator LED for that cell to in-use (steady green) and
moves the cartridge from the cell to the device.
2. If the ACF is disabled and in manual mode, and a cartridge is placed in the import position of the
priority cell, the ACF loads the cartridge in the device and sets the cell-status indicator LED to in-use
(steady green) for the priority cell.
3. If a cartridge is placed in the priority cell while the ACF is enabled and in manual mode, the ACF sets
the cell-status indicator LED of the priority cell to in-use (steady green). When the ACF completes its
current operation, the ACF automatically loads the priority cell as described in step 2.
4. When a cartridge that was loaded while in manual mode is unloaded, it is returned to its original cell if
possible, and the in-use indication is turned off. If the original cell is occupied, the ACF turns off the
in-use indicator LED and puts the cartridge in the priority cell, if possible, and sets the priority cell
status indicator LED to alert (steady yellow). If the priority cell is occupied, the ACF is disabled and it
presents check status (see step 9 on page 6-19). The cell-status indicator LEDs for all cells are set to
attention (flashing yellow). An intervention message is posted on the operator/CE panel.

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility 6-21

Accumulate Mode
Some customers organize their operations so that certain subsystems focus on specific cartridge mounts;
that is, the entire device is dedicated to responding to servicing specific volumes requested by the
attaching host. For this type of operation, the customer needs the ability to easily insert specific cartridges
and to allow processed specific mounts to accumulate in a hopper until it is convenient for the operator to
retrieve a group of cartridges.

In manual, automatic, and system mode, cartridges are always exported to the same ACF cell from which
they were imported, if possible. This makes them conveniently available for processing scratch volumes.
Accumulate mode differs in that cartridges are always imported from the priority cell, and exported to a
magazine cell. This allows the operator to insert specific cartridges into the priority cell, and to accumulate
processed cartridges into the magazine for pickup by the operator.

When the ACF is in accumulate mode, the following applies (see also “ACF Notes” on page 6-19):
v Initial conditions:
– Accumulate mode is selected from the Set ACF Mode menu.
– While not a required condition, IBM recommends that initially the magazine be empty.
– To indicate to the operator that they should not place cartridges in the magazine (only remove
cartridges), all magazine cells have the cell-status indicator LEDs set to in-use (steady green). This
is to remind the operator that the entire magazine is reserved as the accumulate hopper.
v Enabling conditions: Two ways to enable accumulate mode follow:
– Select Start ACF on the operator/CE panel.
– Insert a cartridge into the import position of the priority cell.
v Disabling conditions: The ACF becomes disabled in accumulate mode, as follows:
– The magazine is full and the last imported cartridge is returned to the priority cell.
– An attention condition is detected in the ACF; for example, an extra cartridge condition.
v Operation:
1. If the ACF is disabled and in accumulate mode, and the operator selects Start on the operator/CE
panel, the ACF becomes enabled and waits until a cartridge is inserted in the import position of the
priority cell.
2. When a cartridge is inserted into the priority cell, the cartridge sets the cell-status indicator LED to
in-use (steady green) for the priority cell and waits for the device to become available.
3. When the device is available, the cartridge is loaded in the device and the priority cell indicator LED is
turned off.
4. When a cartridge is unloaded from the drive, it is moved to the magazine. The ACF places the
cartridge in the top cell of the magazine unless that cell is occupied. If the top cell is occupied, the
ACF searches down the magazine for the next available cell. Each cartridge is placed in the export
position.
5. When the last available cell in the magazine is filled, the ACF warns the operator by activating all
magazine cell-status indicator LEDs to alert (steady yellow). If another cartridge is unloaded, it is
placed into the priority cell again, if possible, and the priority cell cell-status indicator LED is set to alert
(steady yellow). See step 9 on page 6-19 if the priority cell is also full.

6-22 IBM 3590 MI

Automatic Mode
Automatic mode provides the operator a means to keep the drive continually fed with cartridges from the
magazine. After enabling, the ACF automatically feeds cartridges to the device until all the cartridges in the
magazine are processed. The operator can supply specific cartridges to an application by inserting the
cartridge into the priority cell. The priority cell cartridge is automatically the next cartridge to be loaded into
the device. When the specific cartridge is loaded, the ACF automatically resumes processing cartridges
from the magazine.

Processed cartridges can be removed from the magazine and unprocessed cartridges can be added,
without disturbing the ACF. The ACF locates each unprocessed cartridge.

When the ACF is in automatic mode, the following applies (see also “ACF Notes” on page 6-19):
v Initial conditions:
– Automatic mode is selected from the Set ACF Mode menu.
– The ACF is initialized so the top of the magazine is considered the current cell.
v Enabling conditions: To enable automatic mode:
– Select Start on the operator/CE panel.
– Insert a cartridge in the import position of the priority cell.
v Disabling conditions: The ACF is disabled in automatic mode when:
– A magazine or a priority cartridge is processed and returned to its original cell, and there is no
cartridge in the import position of the magazine or the priority cell.
– The ACF is enabled because the operator chose Start, but the ACF cannot detect a cartridge in the
import position in either the magazine or the priority cell.
– An attention condition is detected in the ACF; for example, there is an extra cartridge in the
magazine.
v Operation
1. If the ACF is disabled and in automatic mode and the operator selects Start on the operator/CE panel,
the ACF becomes enabled and verifies that there is at least one cartridge in the import position of the
magazine. If so, the ACF indexes down the magazine until it finds the first cell with a cartridge in the
import position. The ACF sets the cell-status indicator LED for that cell to in-use (steady green) and
moves the cartridge from the cell to the device.
2. If the ACF is disabled and in automatic mode and a cartridge is placed in the import position of the
priority cell, the ACF is enabled, it loads the cartridge in the device, and it sets the cell-status indicator
LED to in-use (steady green) for the priority cell.
3. If a cartridge is placed in the priority cell while the ACF is enabled and in automatic mode, the ACF
sets the cell-status indicator LED of the priority cell to in-use (steady green). When the ACF completes
its current operation, it automatically loads the priority cell as described in step 2.
4. When a cartridge that was loaded while in automatic mode is unloaded, it is returned to its original cell,
if possible, and the in-use indicator LED for that cell is turned off. The ACF then searches the
magazine for the next cell in the import position and loads it in the device. This process repeats until
the ACF cannot find another cartridge to load.

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility 6-23

System Mode
System mode provides the operator an additional means to keep the drive continually loaded with
cartridges from the magazine. With the ACF enabled and the first cartridge loaded, subsequent load
commands are under the control of the attaching host. The ACF loads one cartridge in response to each
of these system commands until all the cartridges in the magazine are processed.

System mode does not preclude specific mount requests from the attaching host. The operator can supply
specific cartridges to an application by inserting the cartridge in the priority cell. The priority cell cartridge is
automatically the next cartridge to be loaded in the device. After the cartridge is processed, the ACF
automatically resumes processing cartridges from the magazine, under system control.

Processed cartridges can be removed from the magazine and unprocessed cartridges can be added,
without disturbing the ACF. The ACF locates each unprocessed cartridge.

When the ACF is in system mode, the following applies (see also “ACF Notes” on page 6-19):
v Initial conditions:
– System mode is selected from the Set ACF Mode menu.
– The ACF is initialized so the top cell of the magazine is considered the current cell location.
v Enabling conditions: Two ways to enable system mode follow:
– Select Start ACF on the operator/CE panel.
– Insert a cartridge in the import position of the priority cell.
v Disabling conditions: The ACF becomes disabled in system mode, as follows:
– A magazine or priority cartridge is processed and returned to its original cell, and there is no
cartridge in the import position of the magazine or priority cell.
– The ACF is enabled because the operator chose Start, but the ACF cannot detect a cartridge in the
import position in either the magazine or the priority cell.
– An attention condition is detected in the ACF; for example, extra cartridge condition.
v Operation:
1. If the ACF is disabled and in system mode, and the operator selects Start on the operator/CE panel,
the ACF becomes enabled and verifies that there is at least one cartridge in the import position of the
magazine. If so, the ACF indexes down the magazine until it finds the first cell with a cartridge in the
import position. The ACF sets the cell-status indicator LED for that cell to in-use (steady green) and
moves the cartridge from the cell to the device.
2. If the ACF is disabled and in system mode, and a cartridge is placed in the import position of the
priority cell, the ACF loads the cartridge in the device and sets the cell-status indicator LED to in-use
(steady green) for the priority cell.
3. If a cartridge is placed in the priority cell while the ACF is enabled and in system mode, the ACF sets
the cell-status indicator LED of the priority cell to in-use (steady green). When the ACF completes its
current operation, it automatically loads the priority cell as described in step 2.
4. When the system completes processing a cartridge, it issues a Load command. The ACF unloads the
old cartridge and returns it to its original cell, if possible, and turns off the in-use indicator LED for that
cell. The ACF waits in enabled state until it receives a Load command or until a cartridge is inserted in
the priority cell. In the case of the Load command, the ACF searches the magazine for the next cell in
the import position and loads it to the device. This process repeats until the ACF cannot find another
cartridge to load.

6-24 IBM 3590 MI

Random Mode
Random mode is designed to act as a small, self-contained library of up to 10 cartridges, controlled by the
attaching host. The attaching host uses the SCSI Medium Mover commands to select a cartridge from a
given cell and move it to its destination cell. Control of the source and destination cells are left entirely to
the attaching host.

Random mode is supported on the Model B11 only, but the Random 2−LUN mode is supported on both
Model B11 and E11.

Being in random mode does not preclude attaching host requests for specific mounts. Requests for
specific cartridges to be mounted can be satisfied by inserting the specific cartridge in the priority cell. In
random mode, the priority cell is simply another addressable cell. The ACF notifies the attaching host of
the presence of a cartridge in the priority cell, but the attaching host must specifically address that cell to
access the cartridge.

To ensure the integrity of the library, the magazine contains a lock which prevents the addition or removal
of cartridges from the magazine after the magazine is installed in the ACF and locked. The ACF senses
the state of the magazine lock and does not permit random mode to be enabled unless the magazine lock
is set to the locked position. A sensor on the ACF allows the unit to determine that the magazine is not
installed or was removed. This disables random mode.

Because the magazine must be locked in random mode, the priority cell is used as an I/O port to the
library. This way you can add or remove cartridges from the magazine without having to violate the
integrity of the locked magazine. The attaching host can move cartridges from the priority cell to any
empty magazine cell (or the device), or from a magazine cell (or the device) to the priority cell. The
attaching host is responsible for the library inventory and inventory control.

If a Move Medium or Read Element Status command is issued with no magazine present, or with the
magazine unlocked, the command fails with a permanent error.

When the ACF is in random mode, the following applies (see also “ACF Notes” on page 6-19):
v Initial conditions:
– Random mode is selected from the Set ACF Mode menu.
v Enabling conditions: random mode is enabled if all the following conditions are met:
– The magazine is installed in the ACF.
– The magazine lock is in the locked state.
– A valid Move Medium command is received.
v Disabling conditions: The ACF is disabled in random mode if one of the following conditions are met:
– The magazine is removed from the ACF.
– The magazine is unlocked.
– An attention condition is detected in the ACF; for example, extra cartridge condition.
v Operation:
1. When first enabled in random mode, the ACF waits for attaching host commands.
2. All magazine cell-status indicator LEDs are set to in-use (steady green). The in-use indicator LEDs
remain on unless random mode is disabled. The priority cell cell-status indicator LED is activated as it
is used.
3. All cartridge movement is under control of the attaching host using the Medium Mover commands.
4. The ACF honors the Prevent Allow Media Removal command by not allowing operator-initiated export
of cartridges any time the command has specified Prevent Media Removal.

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility 6-25

5. The priority cell has an assigned element address and can be accessed by the accessor under
attaching host control. If an operator inserts a cartridge in the priority cell, the ACF notifies the
attaching host. The ACF will not access the cartridge in the priority cell unless commanded by the
attaching host.
6. If a cartridge that was loaded while in random mode is unloaded, it may not always be returned to the
same cell where it was previously located. The attaching host controls the cartridge location. When the
cartridge is placed in a magazine cell, it is placed in the import position.

Random 2-LUN Mode

Random 2-LUN mode is identical to the Random mode except that it adds an extra SCSI logical unit
(LUN) to control the ACF.

Note: If this mode is selected when the extra SCSI LUN is not available, the host will not be able to
control the ACF.

Random mode is supported on the Model B11 only, but the Random 2−LUN mode is supported on Model
B11, E11, and H11.

6-26 IBM 3590 MI

Cell Status Indicator LEDs
This section describes the operation of the cell status indicator LEDs for the ACF and the priority cell, and
the conditions identified by the indicator LEDs.

Cell Status: Flashing Yellow – Attention Indicator LED

The device requires operator assistance. Table 6-3 describes the Attention condition. There is a
corresponding operator panel ATTN ACF message when the LEDs indicate attention.
Table 6-3. Cell Status Indicator LEDs - Flashing, Yellow Attention Indicator
Indicator LED State Description of the Condition
All 11 LEDs, which are the Further activity is stopped. Requires operator attention such as installing the
magazine LEDs and the magazine, locking or unlocking the magazine, or clearing a cartridge jam. When the
priority cell LED, are flashing condition is cleared, the LEDs return to normal after Start is chosen on the operator
yellow (accumulate, panel. Typical supplemental messages to ATTN ACF include extra cartridge, picker
automatic, manual, and error, and export error.
system modes) or all 10
magazine LEDs are flashing
yellow (random mode).

Cell Status: Steady Yellow – Alert Conditions

This condition does not immediately preclude machine operation, but may unless the condition is cleared
soon. Table 6-4 describes the alert condition.
Table 6-4. Cell Status Indicator LEDs - Steady, Yellow, Alert Conditions
Indicator LED State Description of the Condition
Indicates that the magazine is not installed or is locked – accumulate, automatic,
manual, or system modes only. LEDs return to normal when the condition is cleared.
The magazine is processed (no cartridges are in the import position in the magazine
All 10 magazine LEDs are or the priority cell) – automatic or system modes only. LEDs return to normal when
steady yellow condition is cleared.
The magazine is full (warns the operator to remove the full magazine and replace it
with one that is not full) – accumulate mode only. LEDs return to normal when Start is
selected.
Priority cell LED is steady Instructs the operator to remove the cartridge from the priority cell.
yellow

Cell Status: Steady Green – In-Use Indicator LED

The indicated cells are in use by the ACF or by the program. Table 6-5 describes the in-use condition.
Table 6-5. Cell Status Indicator LEDs - Steady, Green, In-Use Indicator
Indicator LED State Description of the Condition
One magazine LED or Indicates that the designated cell is reserved for a cartridge that is presently in the
priority cell LED is steady drive – automatic, system, and manual modes only.
green.
Multiple magazine LEDs are Indicates that the designated cells are reserved – random or accumulate modes only.
steady green Do not put a cartridge in a cell that shows a green LED.

Chapter 6. Automatic Cartridge Facility 6-27

6-28 IBM 3590 MI
 Chapter 7. Inspection
Contents
General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Materials Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
| Laser Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Safety Inspection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
3590 Drive AC Grounding Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Sécurité. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Inspection de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Procedimiento de inspección de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Segurança . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Procedimentos Para Inspeção de Segurança . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Device Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Older Drive Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Newer Drive Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Rack Slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Completion Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 7-1

 General Instructions
Use this checklist to ensure that a machine not covered by an IBM Maintenance Agreement has the
necessary safety items installed and no other changes were made that would make it unsafe or
inoperable. Each machine, as it was designed and assembled, had needed safety items installed to
protect the owners, operators, and service personnel from injury.

Note: This equipment is designed for connection to impedance-transformer power subsystems.

Materials Needed
The following items are needed or are useful during the inspection:
v Copies of safety service memorandums (SMs) and engineering change announcements (ECAs) for this
machine type
v Machine history
v Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers, S229-8124

Education
Service personnel must be trained on the new general maintenance agreement qualification (MAQ),
tailored-maintenance agreement qualification, and changed machine safety inspection procedures as part
of an electrical safety course.

Safety
The general caution symbol identifies conditions where caution must be used.

The electrical caution symbol identifies electrical hazards where extreme caution must be used.

| Perform this inspection before the normal inspection for a maintenance agreement. Suspect that the 3590
| is unsafe until you verify that it is safe. If any unsafe conditions are present, decide how serious the
| hazard is and whether you can continue without first correcting the problem. Examples of safety hazards
| are:
Electrical An electrically charged frame can cause serious or lethal electrical shock.
Mechanical Hazards, such as a safety cover missing, are potentially harmful to people.
Chemical Do not use solvents, cleaners, or other chemicals not approved for use on this product.

Any of the problems listed above must be repaired before you use the 3590.
The following notices are translated into selected languages. Each notice contains an identifier (C1 or C2)
that relates to these translated languages, found later in this chapter. Use the English text to understand
the model designation in a non-English notice.
C1 CAUTION: The 3590 Model B11/E11/H11 with the Automatic Cartridge Facility(ACF)
weighs 40.5 kilograms (89 pounds) so remove the ACF before lifting the 3590. The
3590 weighs 28.6 kilograms (63 pounds) without the ACF attached; it takes two
persons to safely lift this unit.
C2 CAUTION: The 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A weighs 28.6 kilograms (63 pounds); it
takes two persons to safely lift this unit.

7-2 IBM 3590 MI

| Laser Information
| These products comply with the performance standards set by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration for
| a Class I Laser Product.
|

Figure 7-1. Laser Safety Label Class I

| This means that these products belong to a class of laser products that do not emit hazardous laser
| radiation. This classification was accomplished by providing the necessary protective housings and
| scanning safeguards to ensure that laser radiation is inaccessible during operation or is within Class 1
| limits. These products have been reviewed by external safety agencies and have obtained approvals to
| the latest standards as they apply to this product type.

Safety Inspection Procedures

Before performing the safety procedures, ensure the existing room and electrical conditions are safe.

Read all Safety information on the label before starting.

See “Device Covers” on page 7-13 and “Labels” on page 7-14 for locations.

3590 Drive AC Grounding Inspection

1. Power off the 3590.
2. Disconnect the channel cables.
3. See Figure 7-2 on page 7-4. Disconnect the power cord
1 from its source.
4. Check that no voltage exists between the housing on the power source and building ground.
5. Check that resistance is less than 0.1 ohm from the building ground to the power supply enclosure

3.
6. Inspect the power cable
1 for visible cracks, wear, or damage.
7. Check that the resistance between the power cable ground and the 3590 frame
2 is less than 0.1
ohm.
8. Inspect the power supply enclosure covers
3 to ensure all screws are installed and tight.

Chapter 7. Inspection 7-3

Figure 7-2. AC Grounding Diagram (50 Hz and 60 Hz)

7-4 IBM 3590 MI

 Sécurité
Le symbole attention indique qu’une attention particulière est nécessaire.

Le symbole risque électrique identifie des risques liés au courant électrique ; il faut en ce cas faire
preuve d’une extrême prudence.

Ces procédures doivent être effectuées avant l’inspection normale pour un contrat de maintenance. Le
sous-système de bande magnétique IBM 3590 doit être considéré comme potentiellement
dangereux tant qu’il n’a pas été vérifié. Si vous détectez la moindre condition d’insécurité, vous devez
évaluer sa gravité et déterminer si vous pouvez continuer ou non sans avoir d’abord corrigé le problème.
Les risques peuvent être de différentes natures :
Risques électriques
Un châssis chargé en électricité peut provoquer un choc électrique grave ou mortel.
Risques mécaniques
L’absence d’un carter de sécurité, par exemple, peut être à l’origine de blessures.
Risques chimiques
Utilisez uniquement les produits de nettoyage et autres produits chimiques recommandés pour ce
matériel.

Assurez-vous que toutes ces conditions de sécurité sont remplies avant d’utiliser le sous-système de
bande magnétique IBM 3590.

Chaque consigne est introduite par un identificateur (Attention=Cn).

| C1 ATTENTION Le sous-système 3590 modèle B11/E11/H11 doté du dispositif ACF (chargeur
| automatique de cartouches) pèse 40,5 kilogrammes. Retirez le dispositif ACF avant de
| soulever le 3590. Sans ce dispositif, le sous-système pèse 28,6 kilogrammes. La présence
| de deux personnes est nécessaire pour le soulever.
| C2 ATTENTION Le sous-système 3590 modèle B1A/E1A/H1A pèse 28,6 kilogrammes. La
| présence de deux personnes est nécessaire pour le soulever.

Chapter 7. Inspection 7-5

Inspection de sécurité
Avant de procéder à l’inspection de sécurité, assurez-vous que la salle ainsi que l’installation électrique
remplissent toutes les conditions de sécurité.

Pour plus de détails sur les emplacements des éléments, reportez-vous aux sections “Device Covers” et
“Labels”. Effectuez les opérations ci-dessous.
1. Mettez le sous-système 3590 hors tension.
2. Débranchez les cordons de transmission.
3. Reportez-vous à la Figure 7-3. Débranchez le cordon d’alimentation
1 du socle de prise de courant.
4. Assurez-vous que la tension est nulle entre le boîtier de la source d’alimentation et la terre du
bâtiment.
5. Vérifiez que la résistance est inférieure à 0,1 ohm entre la terre du bâtiment et le carter du
sous-système
2 .
6. Examinez le cordon d’alimentation
1 et assurez-vous qu’il n’est ni craquelé, ni troué, ni endommagé.
7. Vérifiez que la résistance entre la broche de terre du cordon d’alimentation et le sous-système 3590
est inférieure à 0,1 ohm.
8. Examinez les capots
3 et assurez-vous que les vis sont correctement placées et serrées

Figure 7-3. Schéma de mise à la terre c.a. (50/60 Hz)

7-6 IBM 3590 MI

Chapter 7. Inspection 7-7
7-8 IBM 3590 MI
 Seguridad
El símbolo general de precaución identifica situaciones en las que debe tener precaución.

El símbolo de precaución eléctrica identifica situaciones de riesgo eléctrico en las que debe
extremar la precaución.

Realice esta inspección antes de la inspección normal para un acuerdo de mantenimiento. Considere
que la 3590 no es segura hasta verificar que lo es. Si detecta alguna condición poco segura, decida el
grado de riesgo existente y si puede continuar sin solucionar primero el problema. Posibles condiciones
de riesgo para su seguridad son,
Riesgos eléctricos
Un bastidor cargado eléctricamente puede producir descargas serias o letales.
Riesgos mecánicos
Riesgos, como la falta de la cubierta de seguridad, son potencialmente perjudiciales para la gente.
Riesgos químicos
No use disolventes, artículos de limpieza u otros productos químicos que no hayan sidos
aprobados para ser usados en este producto.

Cualquier problema de los listados anteriormente debe ser corregido antes de usar la 3590.

Los avisos siguientes se han traducido en varios idiomas. Cada aviso contiene un identificador
(Precaución=Cx).
| C1 PRECAUCION La 3590 modelo B11/E11/H11 con el ACF (Dispositivo avanzado de
| comunicaciones) pesa 40.5 kilogramos (89 libras) por tanto, quite el ACF antes de levantar
| la 3590. La 3590 pesa 28.6 kilogramos (63 libras) sin el ACF montado; se necesitan dos
| personas para levantar la unidad sin peligro.
| C2 PRECAUCION La 3590 modelo B1A/E1A/H1A pesa 28.6 kilogramos (63 libras); se necesitan
| dos personas para levantar esta unidad sin peligro.

Chapter 7. Inspection 7-9

Procedimiento de inspección de seguridad
Antes de proceder con esta inspección, asegúrese de que las condiciones eléctricas y de carécter general
existentes son seguras.

Consulte “Cubiertas del dispositivo” (“Device Covers”) y “Etiquetas” (“Labels”) para saber donde se
encuentran. Siga los pasos siguientes:
1. Desconecte la 3590.
2. Desconecte los cables de canal.
3. Consulte la Figure 7-4. Desconecte el cable de alimentación
1 de su fuente de alimentación.
4. Compruebe que no hay voltaje entre el receptéculo de la fuente de alimentación y la toma de tierra del
edificio.
5. Compruebe que la resistencia es menor de 0.1 ohmios desde la toma de tierra del edificio hasta el
recinto del dispositivo
2 .
6. Inspección el cable de alimentación
1 para detectar grietas, desgaste excesivo u otros desperfectos
visibles.
7. Compruebe que la resistencia entre la toma de tierra del cable de alimentación y la 3590 es menor de
0.1 ohmios.
8. Inspección las cubiertas del recinto
3 para comprobar que todos los tornillos estén instalados y
firmes.

Figure 7-4. Diagrama de toma de tierra CA (50 Hz y 60 Hz)

7-10 IBM 3590 MI

 Segurança
O símbolo geral de cuidado identifica condições nas quais é necessário cuidado.

O símbolo de cuidado elétrico identifica riscos elétricos onde é necessário cuidado máximo.

Execute esta inspeção antes da inspeção normal para um contrato de manutenção. Não acredite na
segurança do 3590 até certificar-se de que é seguro. Se houver qualquer condição insegura, verifique
a gravidade do risco e se você pode continuar sem antes corrigir o problema. Os riscos de segurança
possíveis são:
Elétrico
Uma estrutura carregada eletricamente pode causar choque elétrico sério ou letal.
Mecânico
Riscos, tais como a falta de uma tampa de segurança, são potencialmente prejudiciais para as
pessoas.
Químico
Não utilize solventes, produtos de limpeza ou outros produtos químicos não-aprovados para uso
neste produto.

Qualquer um dos problemas acima relacionados deve ser resolvido antes de se iniciar a utilização do
3590.

Os seguintes avisos são traduzidos nos idiomas selecionados. Cada aviso contém um identificador
(Cuidado=Cx).
| C1 CUIDADO O 3590 Modelo B11/E11H11 com o ACF pesa 40,5 quilos (89 libras), portanto
| remova o ACF antes de levantar o 3590. O 3590 pesa 28,6 quilos (63 libras) sem o ACF
| acoplado; são necessárias duas pessoas para levantar esta unidade com segurança.
| C2 CUIDADO O 3590 Modelo B1A/E1A/H1A pesa 28,6 quilos (63 libras); são necessárias duas
| pessoas para levantar esta unidade com segurança.

Chapter 7. Inspection 7-11

Procedimentos Para Inspeção de Segurança
Antes de realizar os procedimentos de segurança, certifique-se de que o local e as condições elétricas
existentes são seguras.

Consulte “Device Covers” e “Labels” para obter informações sobre localizações. Execute os seguintes
passos:
1. Desligue o 3590.
2. Desconecte os cabos de canal.
3. Consulte Figure 7-5. Desconecte o cabo de alimentação
1 da sua fonte.
4. Confirme se não existe voltagem entre o compartimento na fonte de alimentação e o terra do prédio.
5. Confirme se a resistência é menor do que 0,1 ohm entre o terra do prédio e o compartimento do
dispositivo
2 .
6. Inspecione o cabo de alimentação
1 para verificar se existem fissuras, desgastes ou danos.
7. Confirme se a resistência entre o terra do cabo de alimentação e o 3590 é menor do que 0,1 ohm.
8. Inspecione as tampas dos compartimentos
3 para certificar-se de que todos os parafusos estão
instalados e apertados.

Figure 7-5. Diagrama de Aterramento AC (50 Hz e 60 Hz)

7-12 IBM 3590 MI

Device Covers
See Figure 7-6. Ensure that the following items are not damaged and do not have sharp edges:
v Automatic cartridge facility (ACF)
1
v Deck enclosure
2

Figure 7-6. Covers for Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A

Chapter 7. Inspection 7-13

Labels

Older Drive Labels

For older drives, see Figure 7-7. Label
2 is available in multiple languages. For newer drives, see
Figure 7-8 on page 7-15.

Check that the following labels are installed:

v Cleaning label
1
v Caution
2
v Serial plate
3
v Canada EMC
4
v FCC
5
v Manufactured in U.S.A.
6
v Bar code
7 located on both sides
v Power rating UL/CSA
8
v Serial plate
9
v CE
10
v Weight
11 located on both sides

Exchange the labels if they are damaged (not readable), or order new labels if they are missing. See
Chapter 11, “Parts Catalog” on page 11-1 for part numbers.

Figure 7-7. Label Locations (Older Drives)

7-14 IBM 3590 MI

 Newer Drive Labels
See Figure 7-8. Label
2 is available in multiple languages.

Check that the following labels are installed:

v Cleaning label
1
v Caution
2
v Model number
3
| v Bar code
4 (rear) and
7
v 2X cartridge label
5
v Serial plate
6 and
8
v Multi-use label
9
– FCC and other country communication statements
– Weight
– Power rating
– UL/CSA designation
– CE designation

Exchange the labels if they are damaged (not readable) or order new labels if they are missing. See the
“Parts Catalog” chapter for the part numbers.

Figure 7-8. Label Locations (Newer Drives)

Chapter 7. Inspection 7-15

Rack Slides
See Figure 7-9. Ensure that the following items are not damaged and do not have sharp edges:
v Physical stops
1 located under the tray (in front)
v Position locks
2 located under the tray (push tabs inside the slide rail)

Figure 7-9. Rack Slides

7-16 IBM 3590 MI

Completion Report
v Safety inspection for machine type 3590
v General safety inspection
v Maintenance agreement qualification (MAQ)

After the inspection, sign, date, and store the checklist with the Maintenance Agreement inspection.

____________________________ ___________________ ________________

NAME DATE SERIAL NUMBER

SAFETY HAZARDS

LIST ALL SAFETY HAZARDS. IF NONE, SAY NONE.

1. ____________________________________________________________________

2. ____________________________________________________________________

3. ____________________________________________________________________

4. ____________________________________________________________________

5. ____________________________________________________________________

6. ____________________________________________________________________

7. ____________________________________________________________________

8. ____________________________________________________________________

9. ____________________________________________________________________

10. ____________________________________________________________________

This report completes the safety inspection.

1. Reconnect the 3590 power cable into the customer’s power receptacle.
2. Reconnect the channel cables to the subsystem.

Chapter 7. Inspection 7-17

7-18 IBM 3590 MI
 Chapter 8. Installation
Contents
Before Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Choosing Correct Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Model B11/E11/H11 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Install Model B11/E11/H11 in Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Unpack 3590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Drive Numbering and EIA Units for Model B11/E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Hardware for Drives 0 and 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Hardware for Drives 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Install Drives in Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Install ACF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Install Model B11/E11 Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3191), or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200) 8-21
| Parts for RPQ 8B3191 or FC 2200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Continue Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Install Rack That Contains Model B11/E11/H11 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Model B1A/E1A/H1A Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Install Model B1A/E1A/H1A Into 3494 Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Install Model B1A/E1A Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3190) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Parts for RPQ 8B3190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Continue Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Installation Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Operator/CE Panel Setup and Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Check Wrap Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Check EC Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Set Customer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Set Drive Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Run Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Set 3590 Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
| Model B11/E11 Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3191), or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200) . . . 8-41
| Model B1A/E1A Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3190) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
SCSI Bus Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
SCSI Bus Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
SCSI Bus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Examples of SCSI Bus Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
3494 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
SCSI Host Attachment Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Controller and SP2 (FC 2416 and FC 2420) . . . . . . . . 8-48
pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Controller and SP2 Other Available Adapters . . . . . . . . 8-49
iSeries (OS/400) System (FC 6501) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
iSeries (OS/400) System (FC 6534 or 2729) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Sun System Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
| LINUX System Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Sun Solaris 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
HP-UX System Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
HP-UX 11.00 System Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Windows NT System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Windows 2000 System Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Cabling Inline SCSI Terminator for Open System Attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
| SCSI Cables to Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
SCSI Cables – Model B11/E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Cable Guides – Model B11/E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
Rack, Rear Internal Panel – Model B11/E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 8-1

| Decorative Covers (2-Drive Cover) – Rack-Mounted Model B11/E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . 8-59
SCSI Cables – Model B1A/E1A/H1A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Cable Brackets – Model B1A/E1A/H1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Cable Routing – Model B1A/E1A/H1A with SCSI Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
SCSI System Cable at Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Fibre Channel Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
Supported Host Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
Install 'Read-Me' Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
Fibre Channel Cabling Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
Fibre Cables to Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
| Fibre Cables – Model E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
Overview – Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
| Installing Fibre Cables (Model E11/H11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
Cable Guides and Routing – Model E11/H11 (Fibre) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
Rack, Rear Internal Panel – Model E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
Decorative Covers (2-Drive Cover) – Rack-Mounted Model E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72
Fibre Cables – Model E1A/H1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
Fibre Channel Cable Brackets – Model E1A/H1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
Fibre Channel Cable Routing – E1A/H1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
Fibre Cable at Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
Online Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78
Post Installation Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
Removing 3590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
Remove or Relocate Model B11/E11/H11 in Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
Remove or Relocate Model B1A/E1A/H1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
Repack Instructions for 3590 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81

8-2 IBM 3590 MI

 Before Installation
Attention: The 3590 drive may require certain microcode prerequisites if attaching to a control unit or a
library. Read and understand the Read Me instruction sheet that was shipped with the drive. Ensure that
all of the prerequisite conditions are completed, as necessary.

Note: If possible, save the packaging material for future 3590 reshipment or relocation.

Perform the following steps for unpacking the subsystem:

__ 1. Open the shipping container and inventory the parts listed on the 3590 bills of material.
__ 2. Position the shipping container that contains the 3590 near the rack or frame.
__ 3. Check to make sure that you received the following items:
__ a. Correct power cable

Note: The most common power application is where the power cord plugs into the Power
Control Compartment (PCC). This uses a 3 m (10 ft), 220 V ac, 50/60Hz cable, P/N
05H8911.
__ b. SCSI interposer (if required) for attachment to host:
P/N Attachment
05H3834 iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System with FC 9410
61G8323 pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System with FC 9701
50G0460 pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System with FC 9702
| 09L0878 Sun system with FC 9799
| 09P0378 Sun system with FC 9798
| 19P0378 HP V-Class only with FC 9798
__ c. Correct SCSI or fibre cables

This procedure describes installation activities. Read and check off each step after you complete it.

Note: Be aware that you will need assistance when lifting the drive.

| Ensure that the:

| v Installation planning specifications have been met by checking with the branch office or physical
| planning representative
| v Customer has the correct host software levels and correct host PTFs for 3590 attachment.
| v Correct SCSI or fibre channel cables and power cables were ordered.
| v Correct length SCSI or fibre cables were ordered for connection to a host or to a control unit.
| v Correct terminators and interposers are available.

Head Protector
New machines from the factory are shipped without the orange head protector, P/N 45G0145. You
should not have to remove the deck cover to install a new machine.

Relocated machines, however, may have had the head protector installed when they were
discontinued at the previous location.

If this is a relocated machine, do not power ON the drive until the head protector is removed during
the “Installation Checkout” procedure.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-3

 Tools
The following tools are contained in the ship group. For Model B1A/E1A/H1A drives, some tools in the list
are in the 3494 ship group. Not all tools are shipped with all drives.
v Blank scratch cartridge P/N 05H3188 for testing the 3590 when the drive is not in the library. When
the drive is library-attached, P/N 05H7539 is supplied.
v FMR cartridge that contains the EC level of the microcode shipped with this drive. (The P/N of the
cartridge changes with each EC release of the code.)
v Cleaner cartridge P/N 05H4435 (P/N 05H7540 when in a library) for cleaning the tape path.
v Wrap tools P/N 62G1324 or P/N 05H9163 for testing the SCSI hardware or wrap tools P/N 34L2629 or
08L9459 for testing the fibre channel hardware.
v RS-422 wrap tool P/N 39F3884 for testing the library manager port (always a 3494 or 3495 special
tool).
| v Fibre Wrap Duplex Adapter (P/N 19P0913 for SC/SC, or P/N 05N6766 for LC/LC used at the end of
| the fibre cables for testing the connection to the drive. See “Fibre Wrap Duplex Adapters” on page 3-48.
| v Fibre Wrap Tool P/N 34L2629 or 08L9459 for SC, or P/N 11P3847 for LC used for testing the
| connection at the end of the drive and the end of the SC/SC and LC/SC cable. See “Fibre Wrap Tool”
| on page 3-47.
v Tape removal tool P/N 6850663 for rewinding the tape onto the cartridge. Refer to “Magnetic Tape
Attachment Procedure” on page 9-46 for illustration of tool.
v Library attachment wrap interposer tool P/N 05H3895 (9-to-25 pin) for isolating cable problems
(3494 or 3495 special tool).
v CE vacuum gauge adapter P/N 05H9895 for testing the pneumatic system.
v Gap set tool P/N 05H4671 for adjusting the machine reel motor hub.
v ACF motor alignment tool P/N 05H4724 for setting the gear mesh gap.
v ACF transport position adjustment tool P/N 05H3388 for adjusting the transport position sensor.
v Two SCSI terminators P/N 61G8324 for terminating the two SCSI ports (SCSI models only). On newer
drives, terminator P/N 05H4793 is shipped. Uses for the new terminator are:
– Terminating the unused SCSI port in a 3590. Use the two short screws P/N 05H4782 or the two long
screws P/N 05H8983, as required. The two sets of screws are shipped with the terminator
(P/N 05H4793).
– Daisy-chaining a non-IBM drive or an IBM drive that does not have a hammerhead cable to a 3590.
– Using a host cable that does not have a hammerhead in a 3495 to connect the library control unit
frame to a drive unit frame that is at the end of the string (no drive cables are long enough). Use the
short screws P/N 05H4782 that are shipped with the terminator.

The following items, not in the ship group, may be needed to complete the installation:
v Flat-blade screwdriver
v Nut-drivers (5.5 mm, 3/16 in., and 7 mm for rack installation)
v End wrench (11 mm)
v Metal scale or flat ruler at least 125 mm (5 in.) long.
v Pressure/vacuum gauge P/N 6850747.

8-4 IBM 3590 MI

 Choosing Correct Installation Procedure
Use Table 8-1 to select the installation procedure for the 3590 Model that you are installing.
Table 8-1. Choosing Your Correct Installation Procedure.
3590 Models Where to Start
3590 Model B11/E11/H11 only “Model B11/E11/H11 Installation” on
page 8-6
3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A only “Model B1A/E1A/H1A Installation” on
page 8-25
| Model B11/E11 (RPQ 8B3191) or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200) is being “Install Model B11/E11 Within Desk
| installed in a Desk Side sleeve Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3191), or Model
| B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200)” on page 8-21
Model B1A/E1A (RPQ 8B3190) is being installed in a Desk Side sleeve “Install Model B1A/E1A Within Desk
Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3190)” on
page 8-29
3590 Model C12/C14 INSTALL section of IBM 3590 Tape
Subsystem Models C12/C14
Maintenance Information.
Model Axx Control Unit with any Model 3590 drives INSTALL section of IBM 3590 Tape
Subsystem Axx Controller Models
Maintenance Information.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-5

 Model B11/E11/H11 Installation

Install Model B11/E11/H11 in Rack

v If you are installing a rack that has the 3590s already installed, go to “Install Rack That Contains Model
B11/E11/H11 Drives” on page 8-23.
v If you are installing a 3590 Model B11/E11/H11 in a rack, continue with “Unpack 3590”.

pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System 7017 S70 or S7A Only

If you are installing a 3590 Model B11/E11/H11 in a pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System 7017 S70 or S7A I/O
rack, use the I/O rack removal and replacement procedure to remove the I/O rack door. Refer to the
pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Enterprise Servers S70 and S7A Installation and Service Guide for details.

Attention: The door and hinge must be left off the I/O rack to eliminate interference with the tape drive.
End of pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System 7017 S70 or S7A Only

Note: A second person can help you align the holes and level the hardware when you install the rack
shelf hardware.

Unpack 3590
| Each 3590 model has its own set of unpack instructions. Follow the correct procedure for the model you
| are installing; do not mix procedures.

The symbol identifies an ESD-sensitive part. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.

Note: The following notice is translated into selected languages. See C2 in Chapter 7, “Inspection” on
page 7-1.

CAUTION:
The 3590 Model B11/E11/H11 weighs 28.6 kilograms (63 pounds); it takes two persons to safely lift
this unit.
__ 1. Place the 3590 near the rack, frame or cover (sleeve) that will contain the 3590 and unpack the
boxes.
__ 2. Verify the 3590 shipping group parts by checking that you have received all the parts listed on the
3590 bills of material. Do not remove the parts from plastic containers so you can tell the part
numbers of the parts.

8-6 IBM 3590 MI

Drive Numbering and EIA Units for Model B11/E11/H11
During the Model B11/E11/H11 (rack mount) installation procedure, you can locate various components by
hole location and EIA rack units. All hole locations are given from the top, unless otherwise stated.

Figure 8-1 shows how drives in a rack are numbered in an empty rack and the sequence of installation.
Always install the lowest-numbered drives first.

Figure 8-1. Drive Numbering in Rack

__ 1. Position the rack and identify the physical location in the rack where the 3590 is to be installed.
The 3590 Model B11/E11/H11 drive requires 12 EIA units. Each EIA unit consists of three holes in
the rack. EIA unit number 32 (top of rack) only has two holes, all other units have three holes.
Figure 8-2 shows an example of EIA number 20
1 as being allocated to the 3590. When these
procedures prompt you to count starting at hole 1
2, count from the center hole of the first
allocated EIA unit.

Note: The top hole is the center hole of EIA unit 32
3 and is therefore hole number 1.

Figure 8-2. EIA Unit Allocation

Chapter 8. Installation 8-7

 Holes for EIA Units, Model B11/E11/H11: The 3590 Model B11/E11/H11 drive requires 12 EIA units.
Figure 8-3 on page 8-9 shows the hole number and the location of the pins and screws for the hardware.
Start counting at
A hole number 1, which is the second hole in the first allocated EIA unit. Figure 8-2 on
page 8-7 shows an example of EIA unit number 20 as being the first EIA unit allocated to the 3590.

Legend:
(from front of rack)
rr right rear
lr left rear
lf left front
rf right front

Use Figure 8-3 and Table 8-2 with the figures under “Hardware for Drives 0 and 1” on page 8-12. The
figures show the hole numbers and the part numbers for the hardware.

| Figure 8-3 and Figure 8-4 are identical. You can copy (if a photocopier is available) one of these figures, or
| use the one with the blank page on the back of it to make a template. Cut the figure from top to bottom
| into three sections. Tape the three pieces together (locating them by hole number) to make a long, vertical
| strip that will help you locate the hardware mounting locations. The EIA holes may not be in exactly the
| correct location, but you can determine the exact hole location by the spacing between each EIA unit.

Note: Cut only the figure with the blank page on the back Figure 8-3, and use the other, Figure 8-4, as a
master to create future additional copies that you could cut out. Do not cut the master template in
Figure 8-4.

8-8 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 8-3. EIA Unit Holes

Chapter 8. Installation 8-9

Cut out the figure on the other side of this page.

8-10 IBM 3590 MI

Do not cut out the figure on this page. Copy this template, and cut out the copy.

Figure 8-4. EIA Unit Holes. Do not cut out this figure. Copy this template, and cut out the copy.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-11

 Hardware for Drives 0 and 1
| __ 1. Use Table 8-2 and Figure 8-5 to help you install the slides for drives 0 and 1. Install the right slide
|
2 and left slide
1 by using four screws
3 P/N 1624778. Install the slides so that the rail that
| holds the tray is up.

| Note: You can cut out a template to help you locate the holes. See Figure 8-3 on page 8-9.
| Table 8-2. Drives 0 and 1 Slides
| Usage Screw Mounting Pin Locator Hole Part Name, Number
| Hole
| Count the holes from the top EIA unit allocated for the drive. See Figure 8-2 on page 8-7.
|
2 Right slide (1) 23, 26 right front 22, 25 right front and rear Slide, 05H2341
|
1 Left slide (1) 23, 26 left front 22, 25 left front and rear Slide, 05H2340
|

Figure 8-5. Slides (Front View)

8-12 IBM 3590 MI

__ 2. Use Table 8-3 and Figure 8-6 to help you install the hardware for drives 0 and 1. Use six screws
P/N 1624778
1 in the mounts.
Table 8-3. Drives 0 and 1 Hardware
Usage Screw Mounting Hole Pin Locator Hole Part Name, Number

Count the holes from the top EIA unit allocated for the drive. See Figure 8-2 on page 8-7.

2 Rack, rear panel hardware (2) 2 left rear 5 left rear Mount, 05H2347
19 left rear 16 left rear Mount, 05H2347

3 2-drive cover hardware (4), 4 left front 1 left front Mount, 05H2347
(Decorative cover hardware) 4 right front 1 right front Mount, 05H2347
32 left front 35 left front Mount, 05H2347
32 right front 35 right front Mount, 05H2347

4 Rack, rear panel hardware (2) 4 right rear See Note. Nut clip, 74F1823
17 right rear — Nut clip, 74F1823

5 Cable guide hardware (2) 27 right rear See Note. Nut clip, 74F1823
30 right rear — Nut clip, 74F1823

Note: The nut must be inside the frame as you face the frame.

Figure 8-6. Cover Mounting Hardware (Front View)

__ 3. Ensure that the rack stabilizer is installed. See 7202 Install and Service Guide, 7015 Install and
Service Guide, or 9309 Model 1 and 2 Setup and Operator Guide.
__ 4. Extend the slides.
__ 5. See Figure 8-7 on page 8-14. Install the drive shelf
2 P/N 45G0236 by using eight screws
1 P/N
1621308.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-13

Figure 8-7. Drive Shelf (Front View)

See Figure 8-8 on page 8-15.

__ 6. Install the cable pivot arm (cable guide)
2 P/N 45G0188 in hole locations 27 and 30 by using two
screws
3 P/N 1624778.
__ 7. Attach the cable pivot arm to the drive shelf by using screw
1 P/N 1621537.

8-14 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 8-8. Cable Guide (Rear View)

__ 8. If you are not installing the lower shelf for drives 2 and 3, go to “Install Drives in Rack” on
page 8-18.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-15

Hardware for Drives 2 and 3
See Table 8-4 and Figure 8-9 on page 8-17. Count the holes from the top (use the hole locations in the
figure only if the rack has Model B11/E11/H11 drives in the top EIA space). If other than 12 EIA units were
used above the space for drives 2 and 3, count the required 12 EIA units as you did for drives 0 and 1.
See Figure 8-2 on page 8-7 for how to count the holes in the EIA units.
__ 1. Install right slide
6 P/N 05H2341 and left slide
5 P/N 05H2340 by using four screws
11 P/N
1624778. Use pin holes 58 and 61 if drives 0 and 1 are installed in the top position.
Table 8-4. Drives 2 and 3 Slides
Usage Screw Mounting Hole Pin Locator Hole Part Name, Number
Count the holes from the top EIA unit allocated for the drive. See Figure 8-2 on page 8-7.

5Left slide (1) 59, 62 left front 58, 61 left front and rear Slide, 05H2340

6 Right slide (1) 59, 62 right front 58, 61 right front and rear Slide, 05H2341

See Table 8-5 and Figure 8-9 on page 8-17.

__ 2. Install the four mounts
4 P/N 05H2347 by using four screws
3 P/N 1624778.
__ 3. Extend the slides.
__ 4. Attach the drive shelf
2 P/N 45G0236 to the slides by using 8 screws
1 P/N 1621308.
__ 5. Install the two nut clips
9 P/N 74F1823 in the rear mounting holes 63 and 66. Ensure that the
threaded nut is inside the frame as you face the frame.
__ 6. Install the cable guide
7 P/N 45G0188 in the rear hole locations 63 and 66 by using two screws

8 P/N 1624778.
__ 7. Attach the cable guide to the drive shelf by using screw
10 P/N 1621537.
Table 8-5. Drives 2 and 3 Hardware
Usage Screw Mounting Hole Pin Locator Hole Part Name, Number

Count the holes from the top EIA unit allocated for the drive. See Figure 8-2 on page 8-7.

4 Decorative cover hardware (4) 40 left front 37 left front Mount, 05H2347
40 right front 37 right front Mount, 05H2347
68 left front 71 left front Mount, 05H2347
68 right front 71 right front Mount, 05H2347

9 Cable guide hardware (2) 63 right rear See Note. Nut clip, 74F1823
66 right rear — Nut clip, 74F1823

Note: The threaded nut must be inside the frame as you face the frame.

8-16 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 8-9. Drives 2 and 3 Hardware

Chapter 8. Installation 8-17

Install Drives in Rack
Note: The following notice is translated into selected languages. See C2 in Chapter 7, “Inspection” on
page 7-1.

CAUTION:
The 3590 Model B11/E11/H11 (without the ACF) weighs 28.6 kilograms (63 pounds); it takes two
persons to safely lift this unit.

Attention: When lifting drive:

v When picking up the 3590 drive, do NOT use the cartridge feed slot as a handle to lift the 3590
drive! Damage may easily result to the loader door or loader.
v Use the protrusion in the drive enclosure under the cartridge feed slot or the bottom of the drive
enclosure to lift the 3590 drive.
__ 1. Carefully install each drive on a drive shelf by using two screws
4 P/N 1624778.

Hint
Keep the drives close together when securing them on the shelf to allow easy installation of
the decorative cover.

__ 2. Ensure that the loader door moves freely.

__ 3. Go to “Install ACF” on page 8-19.

Figure 8-10. Deck Enclosure Cover

8-18 IBM 3590 MI

Install ACF
__ 1. Unpack the ACF.
__ 2. Pull the 3590 into the service position (see “Service Position” on page 9-11).

Hint
If you are installing two drives on a shelf, install the right-side ACF first so that you can
access the cables easier.

__ 3. Read this step before proceeding with placement of the ACF.

Place the ACF over the tabs on the lower part of the deck enclosure, compress the foam pad,
then slide the ACF down on the tabs. Simultaneously engage the upper alignment pins.

ACF side covers may not be permanently attached. Use other points to lift the ACF.
__ 4. Ensure that the ACF is engaged on the upper alignment pins and tabs (slots) on lower part of
deck enclosure.
__ 5. See Figure 8-12 on page 8-20. Tighten the thumbscrew
1 on the upper left tab of the ACF into
the deck enclosure.
__ 6. Remove the side cover, as follows:

Rack-Mounted Model B11/E11/H11 Only

You cannot remove the left cover if an ACF is mounted to the left of this drive. An alternate
method to plug the cable connectors into the 3590 is to remove the magazine and use that access
rather than removing the side cover. If you do not remove the side cover, go to step 7.
End of Rack-Mounted Model B11/E11/H11 Only
__ a. See Figure 8-11. Remove the two screws
3.
__ b. Insert a screwdriver into the hole
2 at the bottom of the side cover
1.
__ c. Lift the side panel up to disengage the tabs from the frame and pull the panel out at the
bottom.

Figure 8-11. ACF Side Cover

__ 7. See Figure 8-12 on page 8-20. Connect the two cable connectors
2 from the ACF to the drive.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-19

 __ 8. Position the ACF cables to the left side of the ACF and remove any slack in them to ensure the
cables do not interfere with the movement of the ACF elevator or transport. Place them into
retaining clips
5.
__ 9. If removed, reinstall the side cover you removed in 6 on page 8-19.
| __ 10. If you are installing or servicing a desk side Model B11/E11 (RPQ 8B3191) or Model B11/E11/H11
| (FC 2200), return to the procedure that sent you here. Otherwise, continue to the next step.
__ 11. Install the serial number label
3 P/N 44F0904. Ensure that the serial number matches the serial
number of the drive, which has the label on the side panel and on the rear of the drive cover.
__ 12. Install the address label
4 P/N 05H8904.
__ 13. Go to “Installation Checkout” on page 8-32.

Figure 8-12. ACF Thumbscrew and Cables

8-20 IBM 3590 MI

 Install Model B11/E11 Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3191), or Model
B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200)
Note: The following notice is translated into selected languages. See C2 in Chapter 7, “Inspection” on
page 7-1.

CAUTION:
The 3590 Model B11/E11/H11 (without the ACF) weighs 28.6 kilograms (63 pounds); the 3590 Model
B11/E11/H11 with the ACF weighs 40.5 kilograms (89 pounds), so remove the ACF before lifting the
3590. It takes two persons to safely lift this unit (without the ACF).
__ 1. Place the 3590 near the sleeve that will contain the 3590, then unpack the boxes.
__ 2. Verify the 3590 shipping group parts by checking that you have received all the parts listed on the
3590 bills of material. Do not remove the parts from plastic containers so you can tell the part
numbers of the parts.

| Parts for RPQ 8B3191 or FC 2200

Ensure that you have received the following parts:
__ 1. Desk side sleeve top cover, P/N 05H8347.
__ 2. Desk side lower sleeve, P/N 05H8348.
__ 3. Desk side base support plate, P/N 05H9075.
__ 4. ACF cover, P/N 05H3263.
__ 5. Label assembly (ON/OFF) for top of desk side cover, P/N 05H3264.
__ 6. Eight washers, P/N 05H3348, for drive installation in the lower sleeve.
__ 7. Eight screws, M4X16, P/N 1621371, for drive installation in the lower sleeve.
__ 8. Eight additional screws, M4X16, P/N 1621371, to secure the desk side lower sleeve to the desk
side base support (plate).
__ 9. Eight screws, M3X5, P/N 05H2734, to secure the desk side top cover to the desk side lower
sleeve.
__ 10. AC power cable suitable for wall outlet; the P/N varies with the country of destination.

Parts included in 3590 drive ship group are not listed.

Continue Installation
Attention: When lifting the drive:
v Do NOT use the cartridge feed slot as a handle to lift the 3590 drive! Damage may easily result
to the loader door or loader.
v Use the protrusion in the drive enclosure under the cartridge feed slot or the bottom of the drive
enclosure to lift the 3590 drive.

Note: Because of “Installation Checkout” requirements for the Model B11/E11/H11 drive, the installation of
the desk side sleeve top cover,
1 in Figure 8-14 on page 8-23, occurs after “Installation
Checkout”.
__ 1. See Figure 8-13 on page 8-22. Place the desk side lower sleeve
1, P/N 05H8348, over the desk
side base support plate
2, P/N 05H9075.
__ 2. Install the eight screws
3, P/N 1621371, four screws on each side of the lower sleeve
1, to
bolt the lower sleeve to the desk side base support
2. Snug the screws to secure the lower
sleeve to the base support plate.
__ 3. With assistance, lift the 3590 drive and place it on the desk side lower sleeve
1. Ensure that
the front of the drive is placed over the enclosed end
5 of the lower sleeve.
__ 4. Slide the front of the drive forward (toward the front of the lower sleeve) as far as possible to a
position that still allows installation of screws
4.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-21

 Note: Installation of the ACF to the drive will be made easier by having the front of the drive
extend forward as far as possible.
__ 5. Install the eight screws
4, P/N 1621371, and washers
4, P/N 05H3348, four screws and
washers on each side of the lower sleeve, to bolt the drive to the desk side lower sleeve. Do not
snug the screws yet.
__ 6. Ensure that the loader door moves freely.
__ 7. Unpack the ACF.

Figure 8-13. View of Desk Side Lower Sleeve Installed on Base Plate

__ 8. Go to step 3 on page 8-19 to install the ACF. Return here after completing the procedure.
__ 9. Push the drive and the mounted ACF back on the lower sleeve until the ACF is flush to the front of
the sleeve,
5 in Figure 8-13.
__ 10. Snug the screws
4 (Figure 8-13) now to secure the drive to the lower sleeve.
__ 11. Refer to Figure 8-14 on page 8-23. Install the serial number label
10, P/N 44F0904. Ensure that
the serial number matches the serial number of the drive, which has the label on the side panel
and on the rear of the drive enclosure.
__ 12. Install the address label
7, P/N 05H8904, to the ACF.
__ 13. With the ACF install completed, go to “Installation Checkout” on page 8-32.

8-22 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 8-14. Desk Side Sleeve Installation for Model B11/E11 (RPQ 8B3191) or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200)

Install Rack That Contains Model B11/E11/H11 Drives

This procedure is to be used when a Model B11/E11/H11 is shipped already installed in a rack.

See Figure 8-15 on page 8-24.

__ 1. Remove the shipping plates
2 P/N 05H8922 from the cable guide pivots
4 by removing screws

1 and
3.
__ 2. If not installed, install the ACFs and decorative covers. See “Install ACF” on page 8-19.
__ 3. Go to “Installation Checkout” on page 8-32.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-23

Figure 8-15. Shipping Plate

8-24 IBM 3590 MI

Model B1A/E1A/H1A Installation
v If the Model B1A/E1A/H1A is already installed in a 3494 frame, go to “Installation Checkout” on
page 8-32.
v If the Model B1A/E1A/H1A is being installed into a non-IBM library, ensure that all prerequisite activity
needed within the library is completed before you begin to install the drive. After the drive is installed, go
to “Installation Checkout” on page 8-32.
v If you are installing a Model B1A/E1A/H1A in an existing 3494 frame, ensure that the appropriate 3494
feature code or conversion is installed, then continue with “Install Model B1A/E1A/H1A Into 3494
Frame”.

Install Model B1A/E1A/H1A Into 3494 Frame

Be sure to read “Before Installation” on page 8-3 before you start here.

Figure 8-16 shows examples of fully-configured 3494 Models D12, D14, L12, and L14 as viewed from the
front. Install the 3590 in the lowest-numbered available position in the frame.

Figure 8-16. 3494 Frames

Note: The following notice is translated into selected languages. See C2 inChapter 7, “Inspection” on
page 7-1.

CAUTION:
The 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A weighs 28.6 kilograms (63 pounds); it takes two persons to safely lift
this unit.
__ 1. See the START section in IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Maintenance Information, P/N
05H7566 and switch OFF power to the 3494.

Before you start, see how the slides work. The inner slide has a locking mechanism that you press to
release and the outer slides have a locking mechanism that you move to the center position to release.

See Figure 8-17 on page 8-26.

__ 2. Remove the rear door from the 3494 frame.
__ 3. Install the two slides
2 P/N 05H4256 in the 3494 frame by using eight screws
1 P/N 1621197.
v Install the slides so the slide locks (the cables with the screws) are to the rear of the frame. You
may have to extend the slides to access the mounting holes.
v Loosely install the first screw in the front hole, the second and third screws in the rear, the
fourth screw in the front slot, and then tighten the screws.
__ 4. Each slide has three sections. Pull the slides to the rear and remove the inner slide section from
each slide. Do not reverse the inner slides. The slides must be installed in the same position as
they were removed and the tapered ends must be at the front of the drive.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-25

__ 5. Install the inner slide sections
3 on the 3590 by using 8 screws
4 P/N 1621197.

Figure 8-17. 3494 Slides (Rear View)

8-26 IBM 3590 MI

See Figure 8-18.
__ 6. Install the fiducial bracket
8 P/N 05H3143 by using the screw
9 P/N 1621019 and lock washer
P/N 1622332.
__ 7. While holding the front cover
4 P/N 05H4255 near the drive, plug the cables into the connectors

11. Insert the display cable
5 P/N 45G0275 into the lower connector of the 3590 and into the
panel P/N 39F3450.
__ 8. Install the front cover by inserting the right screw
7 P/N 1621197 through the cover and into the
drive.
__ 9. To hold the flat cable in place, fasten the cable retaining bracket
6 P/N 05H4756 to the left side
of the cover by using the left screw
7.
__ 10. Install the serial number label
10 P/N 44F0904. Ensure that the serial number matches the serial
number of the drive, which has the label on the side panel and on the rear of the drive cover.

A1400218

Attention Static-sensitive
Figure 8-18. Front Cover and Deck Enclosure Cover

Chapter 8. Installation 8-27

 Notes for the Next Step:
a. Ensure that the ball-bearing retaining assemblies of the slides are located at the rear of the
center slide when installing the 3590.
b. Ensure that the middle section of the slide is fully extended and locked before you push the
drive in place.

Attention: When lifting the drive:

v When picking up the 3590 drive, do NOT use the cartridge feed slot as a handle to lift the
3590 drive! Damage may easily result to the loader door or loader.
v Use the protrusion in the drive enclosure under the cartridge feed slot or the bottom of
the drive enclosure to lift the 3590 drive.
__ 11. Read this complete step before proceeding. With assistance, lift the 3590 and place it in the slides.
Hold the ball-bearing retainers to the rear while you guide the slides into the ball-bearing retainer
assemblies and then push the 3590 in place. Guide the 3590 onto four or five ball bearings before
you push it forward.
Attention: If you do not have the inner slides aligned in the ball-bearing retainers, you will
damage the slides and they will have to be replaced. Do not force the drive to the front.
__ 12. Ensure that the loader door moves freely.
__ 13. Go to “Installation Checkout” on page 8-32.

8-28 IBM 3590 MI

Install Model B1A/E1A Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3190)
Note: The following notice is translated into selected languages. See C2 in Chapter 7, “Inspection” on
page 7-1.

CAUTION:
The 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A weighs 28.6 kilograms (63 pounds); it takes two persons to safely lift
this unit.
__ 1. Place the 3590 near the sleeve that will contain the 3590, then unpack the boxes.
__ 2. Verify the 3590 shipping group parts by checking that you have received all the parts listed on the
3590 bills of material. Do not remove the parts from plastic containers so you can tell the part
numbers of the parts.

Parts for RPQ 8B3190

Be sure you received the following parts for RPQ 8B3190:
__ 1. 3590 B1A Logo for front cover, P/N 05H9064.
__ 2. Front cover of drive, P/N 05H3260.
__ 3. Desk side sleeve top cover, P/N 05H8347.
__ 4. Desk side lower sleeve, P/N 05H8348.
__ 5. Desk side base support plate, P/N 05H9075.
__ 6. Label assembly (ON/OFF) for top of desk side cover, P/N 05H3264.
__ 7. Two nylon washers, P/N 05H4459, to secure the swivel base to the front cover.
__ 8. Compression spring, P/N 05H4460, to secure the swivel base to the front cover.
__ 9. Screw, P/N 05H4465, to secure the swivel base to the front cover.
__ 10. Eight washers, P/N 05H3348, to install the drive in the lower sleeve.
__ 11. Eight screws, M4X16, P/N 1621371, to install the drive in the lower sleeve.
__ 12. Eight additional screws, M4X16, P/N 1621371, to secure the desk side lower sleeve to the desk
side base support (plate).
__ 13. Eight screws, M3X5, P/N 05H2734, to secure the desk side top cover to the desk side lower
sleeve.
__ 14. Two screws, M5X25, P/N 1621522, to secure the front cover to the front of the drive enclosure.
__ 15. Swivel base for operator/CE panel, P/N 62G2542, which is attached to the front cover.
__ 16. AC power cable suitable for wall outlet; the P/N varies with the country of destination.

Parts included in 3590 drive ship group are not listed.

Continue Installation
Attention: When lifting the drive:
v When picking up the 3590 drive, do NOT use the cartridge feed slot as a handle to lift the 3590
drive! Damage may easily result to the loader door or loader.
v Use the protrusion in the drive enclosure under the cartridge feed slot or the bottom of the drive
enclosure to lift the 3590 drive.

Note: Because of “Installation Checkout” test requirements for the drive, the installation of the desk side
sleeve top cover
1, in Figure 8-20 on page 8-31, occurs after “Installation Checkout”.
__ 1. See Figure 8-19 on page 8-30.
Place the desk side lower sleeve
1, P/N 05H8348, over the desk side base support plate
2,
P/N 05H9075.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-29

__ 2. Install the eight screws
3, P/N 1621371, four screws on each side of the lower sleeve
1, to
bolt the lower sleeve to the desk side base support
2. Snug the screws to secure the lower
sleeve to the base support plate.
__ 3. With assistance, lift the 3590 drive and place it on the desk side lower sleeve
1. Ensure that
the front of the drive is placed over the enclosed end
5 of the lower sleeve.
__ 4. Slide the front of the drive forward (toward the front of the lower sleeve) as far as possible to a
position that will still allow installation of screws
4.

Note: This position will help to prevent any problems during installation of the desk side sleeve
top cover to the lower sleeve after completion of “Installation Checkout”.
__ 5. Install the eight screws
4, P/N 1621371, and washers
4, P/N 05H3348, four screws and
washers on each side of the lower sleeve, to bolt the drive to the desk side lower sleeve. Do not
snug the screws yet.

Figure 8-19. View of Desk Side Lower Sleeve Installed on Base Plate

__ 6. Refer to Figure 8-20 on page 8-31. Install the front cover
3, P/N 05H3260, by hooking it onto the
slots/holes
2 located at the top of the front drive enclosure. Secure the cover by tightening the
screws
7, P/N 1621522, to the front of the drive enclosure.
__ 7. Insert the display cable
4, P/N 45G0275, (large plug) into the lower connector
5 of the B1A
drive. Connect the other end, the smaller connector, of the display cable into the operator/CE
panel
6, P/N 39F3450.
__ 8. Using screw
11, P/N 05H4465, two nylon washers
11, P/N 05H4459, and one spring
11, P/N
05H4460, connect the display swivel base
12, P/N 62G2542, to the front cover
3.
__ 9. Attach the operator/CE panel
6 to the display swivel base
12.
__ 10. Install the IBM label, P/N 05H9064, on the upper left side
8 of the front cover
3.
__ 11. Install the serial number label
13, P/N 44F0904. Ensure that the serial number matches the
serial number of the drive, which has the label on the side panel and on the rear of the drive.
__ 12. Ensure that the loader door moves freely.
__ 13. Go to“Installation Checkout” on page 8-32.

8-30 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 8-20. Desk Side Sleeve Installation for B1A/E1A, RPQ 8B3190

Chapter 8. Installation 8-31

 Installation Checkout

Head Protector
New machines from the factory are shipped without the orange head protector, P/N 45G0145. You
should not have to remove the deck cover to install a new machine.

Relocated machines, however, may have had the head protector installed when they were
discontinued at the previous location.

If this is a relocated machine, remove the deck cover and remove the head protector if it is installed.

__ 1. Ensure that the drive is in its operating position.

__ 2. Install the power cable in the 3590 and plug it into its power source. Proper routing of the power
cable will be handled in later phases of the drive installation.

SCSI Channel Only

__ 3. Go to “Setup SCSI Ports Wrap Test” on page 9-105 to install channel port wrap tools on the drive
being installed, then return here.
End of SCSI Channel Only

Fibre Channel Only

__ 4. The fibre channel ports wrap test is not a part of the Power-on Self Test (POST) diagnostics. It is
part of the Verify Fix diagnostics and will be run at the end of the installation procedure.
__ 5. Continue with the next step in this procedure.
End of Fibre Channel Only

| 3494/3495 Only
|
| __ 6. Go to “Setup Library Manager Port Wrap Test” on page 9-111 to install the Serial (RS-422) port
| wrap tool on the drive being installed, then return here.

| Note: This information applies to 3494/3495 installations.

End of 3494/3495 Only
__ 7. Set the drive power switch to the ON position.
v When you power ON the drive, the power-on self test (POST) diagnostic will run in the drive. The
SCSI communications path(s), Serial communications path and the Model C12/C14 library
communications path will be tested automatically (if wrap tools have been installed) as part of the
POST diagnostics. The drive will come up in CE mode (CE Options menu is displayed) if any of
the wrap tools is detected.

Note: The power-on test takes approximately 2.5 minutes to complete.

v If a failure occurs, a message can be posted in the operator/CE panel, or the operator/CE panel
can be blank. If any of these conditions exist, go to the START section for further analysis of the
failure.
v If the failure message has cable(s) in the FRU list (listed in the START section), check and
reseat cable connections before replacing any FRUs.
__ 8. Continue with “Operator/CE Panel Setup and Tests” on page 8-33.

8-32 IBM 3590 MI

Operator/CE Panel Setup and Tests

Figure 8-21. Operator/CE Panel

When the instructions for using the panel use the term select, use the arrow pushbuttons to move the
cursor to the choice, then press Enter. Pressing Reset causes a power-on reset.

Pressing Change Mode selects either the operator Options menu or the CE Options menu.

If the power-on diagnostics detect a problem, a FRU identifier (FID) is posted in the operator/CE panel. If
an error occurs, note the FID and go to the START section.

See Chapter 5, “Operator Panel” on page 5-1 for details about the operator/CE panel and the meaning of
the menu options.

Continue with “Check Wrap Tools” on page 8-34.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-33

Check Wrap Tools
This procedure will show which of the installed wrap tools were detected. Successful completion of all
tests, including the wrap tests, is indicated if no FIDs or ATTN messages are posted on the operator/CE
panel.

__ 1. Press the Change Mode pushbutton to place the subsystem in CE mode.

__ 2. Select Config/Install from the CE Options menu.
__ 3. Select Drv Options from the CE Config/Install menu.
__ 4. From the CE Drv Options menu, select Wrap Tools.
__ 5. The following output is displayed. The term ‘PRESENT’ means that the particular wrap tool was
detected by the test and the associated wrap test was performed.
SCSI 0: PRESENT or NOT PRESENT (SCSI attached drives only)
SCSI 1: PRESENT or NOT PRESENT (SCSI attached drives only)
RS-422: PRESENT or NOT PRESENT
STL : PRESENT or NOT PRESENT

Note: This procedure can NOT check for the fibre channel port wrap tools.
__ 6. Make sure that ‘PRESENT’ status is indicated for all installed wrap tools. A status of ‘NOT
PRESENT’ indicates that the wrap tool was not recognized and the associated wrap test was not
run.
__ 7. Continue with “Check EC Level”.

Check EC Level
__ 1. If not displaying the operator Options menu, press the Change Mode pushbutton.
__ 2. From the operator Options menu, select Services.
__ 3. From the Services menu, select Microcode Level.
__ 4. Record the EC level and link level in “Microcode EC Level History Log” on page 9-61.
__ 5. Select Cancel twice to return to the Options menu.
__ 6. Continue with “Set Customer Options” on page 8-35.

8-34 IBM 3590 MI

Set Customer Options
__ 1. If not displaying the operator Options menu, press the Change Mode pushbutton.

Model B11/E11/H11 Only

__ 2. From the operator Options menu, select the Set ACF Mode option. Set the ACF mode per the
customer’s direction. See “Modes of Operation” on page 6-19 for details.

Note: The drive tests can not be run correctly if the ACF is set to Random or Random 2–LUN.
Wait until after the drive tests are completed. Temporarily set the ACF to one of the other
modes now. When the drive tests are completed, the ACF mode can be reset to Random or
Random 2–LUN mode.
__ 3. Ensure that the ACF magazine is in the ACF in the locked position. See “Inserting and Removing
Magazine” on page 6-7.
End of Model B11/E11/H11 Only
__ 4. Set the language of the operator screens, if necessary. Select the Change Language option.
__ 5. From the operator Options menu, select Services.
__ 6. Set the SCSI or fibre channel port addresses, as follows:

SCSI Channel Only

a. Select the Set Address option.

Addressing Restrictions:
1) When attaching to iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System with system FC 6501, the drive must be
set to address ‘0’. The iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System will recognize the drive as address
‘7’ due to system design. When a 3590 drive is attached to an iSeries/AS400 (OS/400)
System it is a point to point connection only.
2) The pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System host will recognize the drive as address ‘0’ if the
attached drive’s address is set to ‘0’. The pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System allows multiple
3590s to be attached to a single port via a SCSI string. In this case, different 3590 drives
on the same SCSI string cannot have the same address. Each 3590 must have a
unique address.
3) When attaching to a RISC/SP2, the RISC adapter is assigned SCSI address 7. Therefore,
the drive can NOT be set to address 7.

Model C12/C14 Only

If you are installing Model B1A/E1A/H1A in a 3590 Model C12/C14, the addresses must be set
according to the feature code:

FC 5200 or FC 5400

Consult the site planning representative or the customer for the correct SCSI addresses to be
set in each of the four drives. Any address (‘0’ to ‘F’) may be set for SCSI Port 0 and Port 1, as
long as the addresses are unique and non-conflicting within each SCSI string. Refer to the
INSTALL section of IBM 3590 Tape Subsystem Models C12/C14 Maintenance Information for a
description of feature code FC 5200 or FC 5400.

FC 5201 or FC 5401

The drives’ SCSI addresses must be set sequentially from ‘0’ to ‘3’ starting at the top drive to
the bottom drive in the Model C12/C14 drive frame. Set SCSI Port 0 addresses only. Port 1 is

Chapter 8. Installation 8-35

 unused. Refer to the INSTALL section of IBM 3590 Tape Subsystem Models C12/C14
Maintenance Information for a description of FC 5201 or FC 5401.

FC 5202 or FC 5403

Set addresses to ‘0’ to ‘1’, and ‘0’ to ‘1’ sequentially from the top to the bottom drive. Set SCSI
Port 0 addresses only. Port 1 is unused. Refer to the INSTALL section of IBM 3590 Tape
Subsystem Models C12/C14 Maintenance Information for a description of FC 5202 or FC 5403.

FC 5402

SCSI addresses are set for both SCSI Port 0 and Port 1. The drives’ SCSI addresses must be
set sequentially from ‘0’ to ‘3’ starting at the top drive to the bottom drive in the Model C12/C14
drive frame for SCSI Port 0 only. For SCSI Port 1, set the drives’ SCSI addresses sequentially
from ‘6’ to ‘3’ starting at the top drive to the bottom drive. Refer to the INSTALL section of IBM
3590 Tape Subsystem Models C12/C14 Maintenance Information for a description of FC 5402.

Feature Code FC 5404

SCSI addresses are set for both SCSI Port 0 and Port 1. Set addresses to ‘0’ to ‘1’, and ‘0’ to
‘1’ sequentially from the top to the bottom drive for SCSI Port 0 only. For SCSI Port 1, set the
drives’ SCSI addresses to ‘6’ to ‘5’, and ‘6’ to ‘5’ sequentially from the top to the bottom drive.
Refer to the INSTALL section of IBM 3590 Tape Subsystem Models C12/C14 Maintenance
Information for a description of FC 5404.

Note: The SCSI address will not become active until you either select Reset Drive from the
operator Services menu, press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE panel, or power
OFF the drive.
End of Model C12/C14 Only

End of SCSI Channel Only

Fibre Channel Only

a. Select the Fibre Address option.

b. From the Fibre Address menu, set both Port 0 and Port 1 to either Set Hard Address or Use
Soft Address.

Note: Soft Address is not recommended and is not supported by most adapters.
c. If the Set Hard Address option is selected, use the Set Hard Address menu to set the
Arbitrated Loop Physical Address (AL_PA) that the Customer has selected. Then select SAVE
DATA to save the new address.

Note: Refer to “Messages and Supplemental Messages (Fibre Channel only)” in Table 5–2 on
5-8 for more fibre addressing information.
End of Fibre Channel Only
__ 7. Continue with “Set Drive Options”.

Set Drive Options

__ 1. Press the Change Mode pushbutton to place the subsystem in CE mode.
__ 2. Select Config/Install from the CE Options menu.
__ 3. Select Drv Options from the CE Config/Install menu.

8-36 IBM 3590 MI

 __ 4. Check the settings of the Disable CU Mode option.
v If the drive is attached to a 3590 Axx Control Unit or Virtual Tape Server (VTS), you can skip to
the next step because the control unit will automatically set this option.
v If the drive is attached in any way other than to a 3590 Axx Control Unit or VTS, continue with
this step to ensure Control Unit Mode is disabled.
a. Move the cursor to the Disable CU Mode option.
b. If the Disable CU Mode option is displayed in the dotted font, the option is already disabled
and you can skip to the next step.
c. If the Disable CU Mode option is displayed in the bold font, press the 'Enter’ button on the
operator/CE panel to select the Disable CU Mode option. (The panel display will switch
back to the top of the CE Drive Options menu with the arrow pointing to the Cancel option.)

Note: For this option, (and any of the other CE Drv Options selections), to take affect you
must first reset the drive. To do this, select Cancel twice to return to the CE Options
menu, then either press the Reset pushbutton on the Operator/CE panel or power
OFF the drive. The drive can also be reset by selecting Reset Drive from the
operator Services menu.
__ 5. From the CE Drv Options menu, select Drv Features, then select one of the following from the
CE Drv Features menu:
v For a Model B11/E11/H11, select the Model B11/E11/H11 Rack/Frame option or B11/E11/H11
Deskside ACF option.
| v For a Model B1A/E1A in a desk side cover, select B1A/E1A Deskside option.
| v For a Model B1A/E1A/H1A in a 3494 Tape Library, select the B1A/E1A/H1A 3494 RS422 Att
| option. Important: Before you skip to step 6 on page 8-38, check the next step to make sure
| that it does not apply.
v For a Model B1A/E1A/H1A attached to a Model Axx Control Unit, select the B1A/E1A/H1A No
RS422 Attach option.
| v For a Model B1A/E1A/H1A in a tape library other than the 3494 Tape Library, select the
| B1A/E1A/H1A No RS422 Attach option, then select either B1A Interface A or B1A/E1A/H1A
| Interface B depending upon the library or OEM protocol used. See “CE Drive Features Menu”
| on page 5-81.
| v For a Model B1A/E1A/H1A in a 3590 Model C12/C14 installation, select the B1A/E1A/H1A
| C12/C14 option. Continue after the C12/C14 selection to select Auto Clean ON or OFF from
| the B1A/E1A C12/C14 menu.

| Note: Auto Clean should only be enabled (ON) when the Automatic Cartridge System
| consisting of all interconnected LSMs, to which the 3590 Model C12/C14 is attached, is
| populated exclusively by 3590 cartridges. Ask the customer if other than 3590 type of
| cartridges are also stored in the silos.

| Continue by selecting Drv Emulation option from the B1A/E1A C12/C14 menu. Consult with the
| customer to determine how the emulation type should be set.

| Select the appropriate drive emulation option from the Drv Emulation menu.

| Do not select the No Emulation option.

| The C12/C14 host microcode does not interface with the 3590 drive type. All 3590 drives installed
| in a C12/C14 library must emulate one of the STK drive types.

| Select one of the following emulation options:

| – If 4490 drives are present in LSM, select the 9490 option.
| – If 9490 drives are present in LSM, select the 4490 option.
| – If neither type drive is present, select either option.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-37

| Select Yes to save the drive emulation type. Select Cancel.
| __ 6. Select Yes to save the library type and return to the CE Drv Options menu. For a Model B11/B1A,
| E11/E1A, or H11 Desk Side model, select Cancel to return to the CE Drv Options menu.
__ 7. From the CE Drv Options menu, select (No Lrg/Lrg) Disp Attach. If you are attaching a large
operator TDS (Texas Digital Systems, Inc.) display to the drive, select Lrg. The default is No Lrg.

Double Length Tape option

__ 8. Set the Hdwr Present/Not Present for Dbl Lngth Tape option. If this drive has the Extended
High Performance Cartridge feature, there will be a 2X label on the back cover and on the head
guide assembly.
End of Double Length Tape option
__ 9. Set the Autoshr Enabled/Disabled option (Base Model B11/B1A only.) The default for this option
is Disabled.
__ 10. For SCSI attached drives, set the SCSI Config options. See “CE SCSI Config Menu” on
page 5-55 for more information. For fibre channel attached drives, record the World Wide Node
and Port names in the Table 9-14 on page 9-66. See “Fibre Channel World Wide Name History
Log” on page 9-63 for details, then return here.

Note: It is very important that the Node and Port names be recorded if the customer’s fibre
network contains any switches with the “Zoning” function. If the old Node and Port names
are not available when a card pack is replaced, it will be necessary to have the customer
reconfigure the entire fibre network to establish new names for the drive.
__ 11. You may select the H SARS Enabled/Disabled option and the V SARS Enabled/Disabled option
from the CE Drv Options menu.

Note: The default is Enabled (turned ON) for microcode level IA or higher, and Disabled (turned
OFF) for microcode levels I9 and earlier.
Selecting H SARS enables the drive to indicate potential hardware problems. Selecting V SARS
enables the drive to indicate potential tape media problems. Ask for the customer’s preference. If
he has none, we suggest that you Enable the options for better isolation of problems. Refer to “CE
Drive Options Menu” on page 5-52 for more information.
__ 12. Select whether to filter the messages to be displayed on the panel and to be sent to the host via
the SCSI. The default is OFF. Ask for the customer’s preference. See SIM Sev Filt On/Off and
MIM Sev Filt On/Off in the “CE Drive Options Menu” on page 5-52.
__ 13. You may select the Num Repeat SIMs option from the CE Drv Options menu. Selecting this
option allows you to set the number of times that the same SIM may be sent repetitively to the
host. The default value is zero. Ask for the customer’s preference. See “CE Drive Options Menu”
on page 5-52 for more information.
__ 14. Select Cancel to return to the Config/Install menu.
__ 15. Ensure that the “Force Error Log On/Off” option is set OFF.
From the CE Config/Install menu check the current status of the “Force Error Log On/Off” option. If
the option says Force Error Log On, select the option to turn it Off. Otherwise, skip to the next
step.
This option should only be used (turned on) at the request of support personnel.
__ 16. Select Cancel again to return to the CE Options menu.
Ensure that you have returned to the CE Options menu before resetting the drive.

Note: These options will not become active until you either select Reset Drive from the operator
Services menu, press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE panel, or power OFF the
drive, after you have returned to the CE Options menu.

8-38 IBM 3590 MI

 __ 17. Continue with “Run Tests”.

Run Tests
| __ 1. Power ON the drive, and run the cleaner cartridge to automatically adjust pneumatics. If necessary,
| refer to “Cleaning the Tape Path” in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Operator
| Guide.
__ 2. Select Verify Fix from the CE Options menu. “CE Verify Fix Menu” on page 5-39 details the
operation and describes any attention notice.
__ 3. From the Verify Fix menu, select Test Drive. You are prompted to load a cartridge and to verify that
| the tape is loaded (select Process Loaded Tape).
| Notes:
| a. Each Base and Ultra model requires a specific tape format:
| Model B11/B1A
| Requires 128-track format tape
| Model E11/E1A
| Requires 256-track format tape
| Model H11/H1A
| Requires 384-track format tape
| b. If the operator/CE panel shows the file protect icon, the tape is either physically write protected,
| or the wrong format tape has been loaded.
| c. If you are installing a Model B11/E11/H11, put scratch tapes in the middle and bottom cells of
| the ACF and run the test. (If you have only one cartridge, you need to run the test every time
| you put a cartridge in a different cell). If the ACF does not load the tape, select the Start option.
__ 4. When the CE Options menu is displayed, remove the tape by choosing Unload Drive from the
Ending Status menu or by pressing the Change Mode pushbutton to change to the operator
Options menu and choosing Unload Drive.
__ 5. If you are installing a E11/E1A and H11/H1A with fibre channel attachment, go to “Fibre Channel
Ports Wrap Test” on page 9-112 and run the Wrap Test on the fibre channel ports, then return here
to continue the installation.
__ 6. If you are installing a 3590 Model C12/C14, and you have completed the installation checkout
procedure for each drive, return to the “Checkout of the Four Drives in 3590 Model C12/C14
Frame” procedure in the INSTALL section of IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590
Models C12/C14 Maintenance Information.
__ 7. Continue with “Set 3590 Offline”.

Set 3590 Offline

__ 1. Ensure that the drive is unloaded and the tape cartridge is removed.

__ 2. If not displaying the operator Options menu, press the Change Mode pushbutton to change to
the operator Options menu.

Model B11/E11/H11 Only

__ 3. If the requested ACF mode was not Random or Random 2–LUN mode, skip to step 5. For
Random or Random 2–LUN mode, continue with next step.
__ 4. From the operator Options menu, select the Set ACF Mode option. Set the ACF mode per
customer’s direction to Random or Random 2–LUN. See “Modes of Operation” on page 6-19 for
details.
End of Model B11/E11/H11 Only
__ 5. Select Services.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-39

 __ 6. From the Services menu, select Set Offline.
__ 7. From the Offline menu, select Both.
__ 8. If the Confirm Offline menu appears, select Proceed.
__ 9. Power OFF the subsystem.
__ 10. Reinstall the deck cover if it was removed during the installation.
__ 11. Remove and save any wrap tools used for diagnostic wrap tests (for example, SCSI port wrap
tools, fibre channel wrap tools, and Serial RS-422 port wrap tools).
| __ 12. If the Model B1A/E1A (RPQ 8B3190) is being installed in a Desk Side sleeve, go to “Model
| B1A/E1A Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3190)” on page 8-42.
| __ 13. If the Model B11/E11 (RPQ 8B3191) or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200) is being installed in a Desk
| Side sleeve, go to “Model B11/E11 Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3191), or Model
| B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200)” on page 8-41.
__ 14. Go to “SCSI Bus Attachment” on page 8-43 or “Fibre Channel Attachment” on page 8-67.

8-40 IBM 3590 MI

| Model B11/E11 Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3191), or Model
| B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200)
Within Desk Side Sleeve only

See Figure 8-22 for the final install steps of the Model B11/E11/H11 drive.
__ 1. Place the desk side sleeve top cover
1, P/N 05H8347, over the mounted drive (enclosure) and on
top of the lower sleeve
18, P/N 05H8348. A ridge in the sides of the top cover allows the top
cover to rest on top of the lower sleeve with the lip of the top cover on the outside of the lower
sleeve sides.

Note: The rear of the sleeve top cover is indicated by the label and opening
8 on top of the
sleeve (top) cover for the drive’s power On/Off switch.
__ 2. Install the eight screws
19, P/N 05H2734, four screws on each side of the sleeve top cover
1,
to bolt the sleeve top cover to the desk side lower sleeve
18. Snug the screws to secure the top
cover to the lower sleeve.
__ 3. Place the ACF cover
6, P/N 05H3263, over the ACF.
__ 4. Attach the “ON/OFF” label
8, P/N 05H3264, to the top of the desk side sleeve (top cover).
__ 5. Reconnect the power cable to the desk side subsystem.
__ 6. Go to “SCSI Bus Attachment” on page 8-43 or “Fibre Channel Attachment” on page 8-67.

End of Within Desk Side Sleeve only

Figure 8-22. Desk Side Sleeve Installation for Model B11/E11/H11, RPQ 8B3191 (or Model B11/E11/H11, FC 2200)

Chapter 8. Installation 8-41

| Model B1A/E1A Within Desk Side Sleeve (RPQ 8B3190)
Within Desk Side Sleeve only

| See Figure 8-23 for final install steps for the Model B1A/E1A drive.
| __ 1. Place the desk side sleeve top cover
1, P/N 05H8347, over the mounted drive and on top of the
| lower sleeve
17, P/N 05H8348. A ridge in the sides of the top cover allows the top cover to rest
| on top of the lower sleeve with the lip of the top cover on the outside of the lower sleeve.

| Note: The rear of the sleeve top cover is indicated by the label and opening
9 on top of the
| sleeve (top) cover for the drive’s power On/Off switch.
| __ 2. Install the eight screws
18, P/N 05H2734, four screws on each side of the sleeve top cover
1,
| to bolt the sleeve top cover to the desk side lower sleeve
17. Snug the screws to secure the top
| cover to the lower sleeve.
| __ 3. Push the drive into the sleeve until the front cover
3 is flush to the front of the sleeve top cover
|
1 and to the front
16 of the lower sleeve.
| __ 4. Now snug the eight screws
10, P/N 1621371, and washers
10, P/N 05H3348, four screws on
| each side of the lower sleeve to secure the drive in the desk side sleeve.
| __ 5. Attach the “ON/OFF” label
9, P/N 05H3264, to the top of the desk side cover.
| __ 6. Reconnect the power cable to the desk side subsystem.
| __ 7. Go to “SCSI Bus Attachment” on page 8-43 or “Fibre Channel Attachment” on page 8-67.
|
| End of Within Desk Side Sleeve only

|
| Figure 8-23. Desk Side Sleeve Installation for Model B1A/E1A (RPQ 8B3190) or Model B1A/E1A/H1A (FC 2200)

8-42 IBM 3590 MI

 SCSI Bus Attachment
__ 1. Review the following sections for SCSI Bus information, then return here:
v “SCSI Bus Details”
v “SCSI Bus Termination” on page 8-44
v “Examples of SCSI Bus Cabling” on page 8-45
__ 2. Review one or more of the following sections, depending on your application, then return here:
v “pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Controller and SP2 (FC 2416 and FC 2420)” on page 8-48
v “pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Controller and SP2 Other Available Adapters” on page 8-49
v “iSeries (OS/400) System (FC 6501)” on page 8-50
v “iSeries (OS/400) System (FC 6534 or 2729)” on page 8-50
v “Sun System Attachment” on page 8-51
| v “LINUX System Attachment” on page 8-51
v “Sun Solaris 7” on page 8-51
v “HP-UX System Attachment” on page 8-53
v “HP-UX 11.00 System Attachment” on page 8-53
v “Windows NT System” on page 8-54
v “Windows 2000 System Attachment” on page 8-54
v “Cabling Inline SCSI Terminator for Open System Attachment” on page 8-55
__ 3. Go to “SCSI Cables to Device” on page 8-55.

SCSI Bus Details

The 3590 subsystem contains two small computer system interface (SCSI) ports for system attachment.
Each port supports the 2-byte wide SCSI-2, SCSI 2+, and SCSI-3. Each port also supports fast/wide and
ultra/wide attachment. The 3590 also logically supports the one-byte wide protocol. When attaching to a
one-byte SCSI-2 attachment, a one-byte to two-byte interposer is required. The SCSI protocol supports a
maximum 2 MB block size.

The three types of SCSI busses are:

v SCSI-2 — Limited instruction set.
v SCSI 2+ — Mixed instruction set.
v SCSI-3 — Large instruction set.
See IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning Guide for details.

| Note: Before proceeding, ensure that you are not trying to attach the 3590 to an LVD device. The 3590 is
| an HVD device and does not support LVD.

When the Ultra SCSI feature is installed on Model Bxx drives, the protocol used is SCSI 2+ (SCSI-2 and
some SCSI-3 commands are supported). It will communicate over the Ultra SCSI interface.
v All current production 3590 Model B11/B1A drives are Ultra level drives with the Ultra SCSI FC 9790 as
standard equipment.
v All current production 3590 E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives are Ultra level drives.
v All earlier production 3590 Model B11/B1A drives may be updated to the Ultra SCSI level by installation
of Field FC 5790.
v The 3590 can be integrated with any host system that supports a SCSI-2 (or SCSI 2+) attachment and
has the proper software drivers installed.

Multiple systems can be attached to a 3590 tape subsystem; however, the 3590 can be varied ON to only
one system at a time. The two attachments on the 3590 drive requires a shielded, differential driven,
two-byte wide, SCSI-2 P cable with a 68-pin D-connector. The total cable length must not exceed 25 m
(82 ft). Figure 9-43 on page 9-109 shows an example of how to calculate the bus length.

The terminator power is not provided by the 3590.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-43

SCSI Bus Termination
The 3590 has a differential SCSI adapter card installed and has facilities for supporting SCSI bus
termination.

The SCSI bus terminator P/N 61G8324 or P/N 05H4793 is installed on the last drive in a string of multiple
drives. On newer drives, terminator P/N 05H4793 is shipped. Uses for the new terminator are:
v Terminating the unused SCSI port in a 3590. Use the two short screws P/N 05H4782 or the two long
screws P/N 05H8983, as required. The two sets of screws are shipped with the terminator.
v Daisy-chaining a non-IBM device or an IBM device that does not have a hammerhead, to a 3590. Use
the short screws P/N 05H4782 that are shipped with the terminator.
v Using a host cable, which does not have a hammerhead, in a 3495 to connect the library control unit
frame to a drive unit frame that is at the end of the string (no device cables are long enough).

In a single 3590 installation, the terminator is installed in the SCSI bus connector (0 or 1) of this 3590.
Two bus terminators are in the ship group, one for each port. If you do not use all the terminators, keep
them in a safe place for possible future use.

All drive models provide two 68-pin SCSI connectors. The SCSI bus and all of the wires in the SCSI cable
must be properly terminated according to the SCSI standard.

8-44 IBM 3590 MI

Examples of SCSI Bus Cabling
Table 8-6 shows the SCSI cables in order by length. The Key column has references to the following two
figures. Figure 8-24 on page 8-46 shows some examples of rack SCSI cabling and Figure 8-25 on
page 8-47 shows some examples of SCSI cabling in a 3494.
Table 8-6. 3590 SCSI Bus Cables
Key Meters Feet F/C P/N Usage

1 0.6 1.97 5106 05H4644 Device to device (see Note 4)

2 2.8 9.19 5128 05H4647 Device to host (see Note 1)

9 2.9 9.5 5129 05H3221 Device to device

3 3.4 11.15 5134 05H4645 Device to device

10 3.6 11.81 N/A 09L5107 Device to host

4 4.0 13.12 5138 05H4646 Device to device

11 4.0 13.12 N/A 34L2671 Device to host

5 4.5 14.76 5145 05H4648 Device to host (see Note 1)

12 6.0 19.68 N/A 19P0677 Device to host

6 12 39.37 5112 05H4649 Device to host (see Note 1)

7 18 59.06 5118 05H4650 Device to host (see Notes 1 and 2)

8 25 82.02 5125 05H4651 Device to host (see Notes 1 and 3)

SCSI Cable Notes:

1. Do not use host cables for daisy-chaining devices together because these cables do not have screws
long-enough to attach two cables to the device.
2. If feature code 2420 is installed on the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System or the POWERparallel SP2 and a second
drive is daisy-chained to the first drive, you can only use the 0.6 m- (2 ft-) cable to stay under the maximum cable
length of 19 m.
3. This is the maximum distance supported for SCSI attachment to the iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System. It also is
the maximum distance when FC 2416 is installed on the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System or the POWERparallel
SP2. Also, you cannot use this cable when FC 2420 is installed on the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System or the
POWERparallel SP2 because it exceeds the maximum cable length of 19 m (62.3 ft).
4. When using a 0.6 m- (2 ft-) cable to connect adjacent drives, ensure that the cable is routed between the cable
pivot arm and the rack door to avoid damage during drive servicing. See Figure 8-33 on page 8-57 for reference
on routing the cable on the outside of the cable pivot arm.

The 0.6 m- (1.96 ft-) SCSI cable can be used when two 3590s are immediately adjacent to each other and
are attached to the same SCSI I/O controller on a pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System.

When using the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System SCSI controller, FC 9702, the maximum cable length is 25
m (82 ft).

If you are connecting 3490 Models C1A or C2A on the same SCSI bus as 3590 Models B1A, the 3490
models must be first-in-line from the host. Use a device-to-host cable when daisy-chaining from a 3590 to
a 3490.

Figure 9-43 on page 9-109 shows an example of how to calculate the SCSI bus length.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-45

The examples show the shortest available lengths of the cables. For example, if the racks are too far
apart, cable
4 illustrated between the racks may not be long enough, so the configuration illustrated may
not be possible.

Figure 8-24. Rack Cabling Example

See “Examples of SCSI Bus Cabling” on page 8-45.

8-46 IBM 3590 MI

The examples show the shortest available lengths of the cables. For example, if the control unit frame is
too far from the drive unit frame, cable
4 illustrated between the frames may not be long enough, so the
configuration illustrated may not be possible.

Figure 8-25. 3494 Cabling Example

See “Examples of SCSI Bus Cabling” on page 8-45.

3494 Cables
Table 8-6 on page 8-45 shows the cable feature codes for connecting multiple 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A
drives on the same SCSI bus in a 3494 Model D12, D14, L12, and L14.

Note: Library manager RS-422 interface cable (P/N 05H8953) is for control-unit frames and cable (P/N
05H8981) is for drive-unit frames.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-47

SCSI Host Attachment Information
pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Controller and SP2 (FC 2416 and FC 2420)
When attaching to the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System controller or POWERparallel SP2 FC 2416, use
cable interposer (FC 2416). A total of 16 attachments are allowed. For example, one initiator can be
attached to 15 targets.

Note: Some FC 2416 SCSI ports may have a “Y” cable installed. There should be a terminator plugged
into one of the “Y” connectors, and the 3590 SCSI cable should plug directly into the other “Y”
connector. Interposer P/N 50G0460 is not needed with this cable configuration.
v The SCSI bus is properly terminated at each end.
v When using the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System SCSI controller, FC 2416, the maximum cable length is
25 m (82 ft). Figure 9-43 on page 9-109 shows an example of how to calculate the bus length.
v Multiple pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) Systems may be linked to 3590 tape drives, but the systems cannot use
the drives simultaneously.

When attaching 3590 Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, or H11/H1A subsystems to the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX)
System controller or POWERparallel Spy FC 2420, use a 1-byte to 2-byte interposer (FC 9701). If FC
2420 is used, the 3590 must be attached at the end of the SCSI bus.
Notes:
1. One initiator can be attached to seven targets if a 3590 is the last device on the SCSI bus.
2. For the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System SCSI controller, FC 2420, the maximum cable length is 19 m
(62.3 ft). Figure 9-43 on page 9-109 shows an example of how to calculate the bus length.

Figure 8-26 shows the cabling for a pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System.

Figure 8-26. pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Cabling

Table 3-2 on page 3-9 shows the available cable feature codes for attachment to a pSeries/RS6000 (AIX)
System.
Notes:
1. An initiator
1 is a SCSI device that can request an I/O process to be performed by another SCSI
device (a target). A target
2 is a device that can perform an I/O process. An initiator can be a
processor, such as a pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System processor.
2. To ensure maximum performance, the 3590 subsystems must be the only targets on the SCSI bus.
3. The required interposer is supplied by ordering FC 9701 or 9702. The interposer is only to allow a
mechanical connection; the lines do not change.
4. The 0.6 m (1.96 ft.) SCSI cable (FC 5106) can be used when two 3590s are immediately adjacent to
each other and are attached to the same SCSI I/O controller on a pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System.
5. Cable lengths of 18 meters (59 feet), or shorter lengths, can be used with FC 2420; cable lengths
longer than 18 meters cannot be used with FC 2420.

8-48 IBM 3590 MI

pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Controller and SP2 Other Available Adapters
Additional feature codes are now available to attach the 3590 drive to the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System
Controller and SP2:
FC 2412 Enhanced SCSI-2 Differential F/W Adapter/A
FC 2409 PCI SCSI-2 Differential F/W Adapter
FC 6209 PCI SCSI-2 F/W Differential Adapter
FC 6207 PCI Differential Ultra SCSI Adapter

Note: When installing a Ultra level drive, the system must be reconfigured to run at the higher Ultra data
rates on Ultra-capable adapters such as FC 6207. The customer can accomplish this in one of the
following ways:
1. If the customer switches OFF the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System power prior to the upgrade and
the 3590 power is switched ON first after the upgrade, the devices will be automatically
configured when pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System power is switched ON.
2. If the upgrade is done without powering off the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System, the device can
be unconfigured, then reconfigured from the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System console, as follows:
rmdev -l rmtx
mkdev -l rmtx
Where x=number assigned by the system to the drive that contains
the Ultra SCSI feature.

See “3590 Drive Model and Feature Levels” on page 3-34 for more information about the Ultra
drives.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-49

iSeries (OS/400) System (FC 6501)
The following feature codes apply for iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System 9404 and 9406 SCSI bus
attachment of a 3590 Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, or H11/H1A to system FC 6501:
v Each feature code 6501 provides two ports.
v Each iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System port can support a single 3590 Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, or
H11/H1A for a maximum of two 3590 tape drives per feature code 6501.
v No other devices can be supported on a FC 6501-equipped port with a 3590 attached (no
daisy-chaining).
v iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) Systems cannot be interconnected by using the SCSI. Therefore, a Model
B11/B1A, E11/E1A, or H11/H1A can only be attached to one iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System at a time.
v You can connect a 3490 on one port and a 3590 on another port.

Figure 8-27 shows the cabling for an iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System.

Figure 8-27. iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System Cabling

An interposer is required when a Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, or H11/H1A is connected to feature code
6501. The interposer is supplied with feature code 9410.

Table 3-1 on page 3-4 shows the available cable feature codes for the attachment to an iSeries/AS400
(OS/400) System.

Advise customer of the setting of the 6501 IOP options. The setting should be *DEV or *NO.
3590 Drive Address on iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System:
1. When attaching to iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System with feature code 6501 the 3590 drive must be set
to address ‘0’. The iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System will recognize the device as address ‘7’ due to
system design.
2. The address will not become active until you either select Reset Drive from the operator Services
menu, press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE panel, or power OFF the drive.

iSeries (OS/400) System (FC 6534 or 2729)

Feature codes 6534 and 2729 each provide one port. Each port can support one 3590 tape subsystem.
No other devices can be supported on these feature codes. An iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System cannot be
interconnected with any other system (including another iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System) on the same
SCSI bus. When the subsystem is attached to an iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System with FC 6534 or 2729,
one of the SCSI addresses on the 3590 tape subsystem must be set to 0 if the 3590 is to be used as an
alternate IPL device. No interposers are required for these feature codes.

Table 3-1 on page 3-4 shows the cable feature codes for the cable of the appropriate length.

Note: iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System adapter FC 6534 and FC 2729 require new PTFs for proper
operation of Ultra level drives, even if replacing or adding a drive to an operational system. Review
the prerequisite information in “3590 Drive Model and Feature Levels” on page 3-34 for additional
details, or refer to informational APR ii11472.

8-50 IBM 3590 MI

 Sun System Attachment
The 3590 subsystem can be installed on Sun SPARC and Ultra/Enterprise Architecture workstations and
servers that support one of the following:
v Sun SBus Differential Fast/Wide intelligent SCSI-2 Host Adapter
v Sun Bus Ultra Differential Fast/Wide intelligent SCSI-2 Host Adapter
v Sun Dual-Channel Differential Ultra SCSI Host Adapter (PCI)

The SunOS 5.x (Solaris 2.4 or higher) is required to support the 3590 when used with the Sun SBus
Differential Fast/Wide intelligent SCSI-2 Host Adapter. The SunOS 5.x (Solaris 2.5.1 or higher) is required
to support the 3590 when used with the Sun SBus Ultra Differential Fast/Wide intelligent SCSI-2 Host
Adapter or the Sun Dual-Channel Differential Ultra SCSI Host Adapter (PCI). The Open Systems Device
Drivers (FC 9200 and 9211) provides specific tape drive device support. ADSM for Sun Solaris 1.2.1 with
PTFs also supports the 3590.

| LINUX System Attachment

| The 3590 Models B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A are supported on Intel-based platforms running Red
| Hat LINUX with the appropriate adapter card and associated cable. For more information about support,
| see IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Device Drivers; Installation and User’s Guide.

| The Adaptec AHA-2944UW PC1 Differential Ultra SCSI adapter is supported for SCSI attachment.

| Note: See the IBM TotalStorage Device Driver Installation and User’s Guide for detailed information about
| the supported host attachment.

| The maximum SCSI cable length is 25 m (82 ft). See “Cable Feature Codes – SCSI” on page 3-9 and the
| IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning Guide for additional SCSI cable
| planning information.

Sun Solaris 7
The 3590 Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A are supported on selected Sun SPARC and
UltraSPARC Architecture workstations and servers, including the Ultra/Enterprise Server family, running
Solaris 7 that support one of the following:
v Sun SBus Differential Fast/Wide Intelligent SCSI-2 Host Adapter (X1062A)
v Sun SBus Ultra Differential Fast/Wide Intelligent SCSI-2 Host Adapter (X1065A)
v Sun Dual-Channel Differential Ultra SCSI Host Adapter (PCI) (X6541A)

| The Model B11/E11/H11 requires installation in a supported rack or space in an existing customer rack
| (two Model B11/E11/H11 units per 12 EIA positions). The maximum SCSI cable length is 25 m (82 ft). See
| “Cable Feature Codes – SCSI” on page 3-9 and the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590
| Introduction and Planning Guide for additional SCSI cable planning information.

No interposers are required with these attachments.

For SUN attachment, an external terminator is required for use on the SCSI bus. In some multi-host
systems, this may require the removal of internal terminators from one of the host adapters. The part
number for the inline terminator is P/N 19P0378.

Figure 8-28 on page 8-52 shows the cabling for a Sun Solaris 7.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-51

Figure 8-28. Sun Solaris 7 Open System Support Cabling

Table 3-1 on page 3-4 shows the available cable feature codes for the Sun Systems attachment.

8-52 IBM 3590 MI

 HP-UX System Attachment
The Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A drives are supported on Hewlett-Packard (HP) 9000 Series
800 Business Servers. They are also supported in other HP-PB based servers that support a SCSI
Fast/Wide Differential adapter including:
v HP9000 Series /T Class Server (T500, T520, T600)
v HP9000 Series /K Class Server (K4xx, K2xx)
v HP9000 Series /D Class Server (D3xx, D2xx)
v HP9000 Series /E Class Server (E3xx, E2xx)

| The Model B11/E11/H11 requires installation in a support rack or space in an existing customer rack (two
| B11 units per 12 EIA positions). The maximum SCSI cable length is 25 m (82 ft). See “Cable Feature
| Codes – SCSI” on page 3-9 and the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and
| Planning Guide for additional SCSI cable planning information.

HP-UX 10.0x through HP-US 10.3x supports the IBM 3590 subsystem. The Open Systems Device Drivers,
FC 9200 and 9210 provide specific HP device support. For the 3590 Model B1A/E1A, this support is
included in the 3494 FC 9200.

No interposers are required with these attachments.

“Cable Feature Codes – SCSI” on page 3-9 shows the available cable feature codes for the attachment to
the HP system.

HP-UX 11.00 System Attachment

The Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A drives are supported on Hewlett-Packard (HP) 9000 Series
V-Class and N-Class servers running HP-UX 11.0 with the HP F/W Differential SCSI-2 adapter (A4800A).
v HP9000 Series /V Class Server (Vxxx, Vxxx)
v HP9000 Series /N Class Server (Nxxx, Nxxx)
v HP9000 Series /E Class Server (Exxx, Exxx)

The Model B11 requires installation in a support rack or space in an existing customer rack (two B11 units
per 12 EIA positions). The maximum SCSI cable length is 25 m (82 ft). See “Cable Feature Codes –
SCSI” on page 3-9 and the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning
Guide for additional SCSI cable planning information.

HP-UX 11.0 supports the IBM 3590 subsystem. The Open Systems Device Driver (FC 9200) provides
specific HP device support. For the 3590 Model B1A/E1A, this support is included in the 3494 FC 9200.

No interposers are required with these attachments.

When attached to V-Class systems, this adapter requires the Inline SCSI terminator FC 9200 for
attachment to a 3590 Tape Drive. The part number for the inline terminator is P/N 19P0378.

Figure 8-29 shows the cabling for an HP 9000.

Figure 8-29. HP-UX Open System Attach Cabling

Chapter 8. Installation 8-53

Windows NT System
The 3590 Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A are supported in Intel-based processors. These include
Intel 486DX or Pentium processor with sufficient RAM and disk space for operation of Microsoft®’s
Windows NT operating system. An appropriate SCSI F/W Differential adapter and associated cable also is
required.

The Model B11/E11/H11 requires installation in a supported rack or space in an existing customer rack
(two Model B11/E11/H11 units per 12 EIA positions). The maximum SCSI cable length is 25 m (82 ft). See
“Cable Feature Codes – SCSI” on page 3-9 and the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590
Introduction and Planning Guide for additional SCSI cable planning information.

Microsoft’s Windows NT Server Version 4.0, and later releases, support the IBM Model B11/E11/H11. The
Open Systems Device Drivers (FC 9200 and 9212) provide specific tape drive device support. For the
3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A, this support is included on the 3494 FC 9200.

No interposers are required for these attachments.

“Cable Feature Codes – SCSI” on page 3-9 shows the available cable feature codes for the attachment to
a Windows NT system.

Windows 2000 System Attachment

The 3590 Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A is supported in Intel-based processors running
Microsoft Windows 2000 (build 2195 or greater) with sufficient resources to run the Adaptec AHA-2944UW
PCI Differential Ultra SCSI adapter. Use the existing SCSI cables to attach to host system.

The Model B11/E11/H11 requires installation in a supported rack or space in an existing customer rack
(two Model B11/E11/H11 units per 12 EIA positions). The maximum SCSI cable length is 25 meters. See
“Cable Feature Codes – SCSI” on page 3-9 and the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590
Introduction and Planning Guide for additional SCSI cable planning information.

Microsoft’s Windows 2000 and later releases, support the IBM Model B11/E11/H11. The Open Systems
Device Drivers (FC 9200) provide specific tape drive device support. For the 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A,
this support is included on the 3494 FC 9200.

No interposers are required with these attachments.

Figure 8-30 shows the cabling for a Windows 2000.

Figure 8-30. Windows 2000 Open System Support Cabling

8-54 IBM 3590 MI

 Cabling Inline SCSI Terminator for Open System Attachment
Figure 8-31 shows the cabling for a Sun or HP with Open System Cabling feature installed.

Figure 8-31. Open System Cabling

| SCSI Cables to Device

Attention:
v Apply very light torque when tightening the system SCSI cable and terminator screws. Over-tightening
these screws can cause the connector standoffs (that the cable connector screws go into) to loosen and
make removing the cable difficult.
v Do not connect or disconnect any SCSI device while power is ON as this practice may corrupt data or
may damage hardware.
__ 1. If not already done, insert the drive power cables into the 3590 ac connectors and insert the drive
power cables into the ac power sources.
__ 2. Locate the cables from the hosts and route them to the rear of the devices.
__ 3. If you are installing Model B11/E11/H11 devices, including the Desk Side model, go to “SCSI
Cables – Model B11/E11/H11” on page 8-56.
__ 4. If the Model B1A/E1A is being installed in a Desk Side cover as part of RPQ 8B3190, go to “SCSI
Cables – Model B11/E11/H11” on page 8-56.
__ 5. If you are installing Model B1A/E1A/H1A devices, other than the desk side model, go to “SCSI
Cables – Model B1A/E1A/H1A” on page 8-60.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-55

SCSI Cables – Model B11/E11/H11
See Figure 8-32. Port 1 connections are the same as for port 0.
__ 1. Connect the system cable
3 (hammerhead end) straight into the card connector
4. (SCSI port 0
is on the left when you are facing the rear of the device.)
When connecting the SCSI cables and terminators to the ports on the 3590s, use screws P/N
05H8983. One screw is in the ship group and one screw is attached to each cable.
__ 2. If this is the last device on the SCSI bus, install the terminator P/N 61G8324 or 05H4793
1 on
cable connector
3. A set of two short screws (P/N 05H4782) and a set of two long screws (P/N
05H8983) are shipped with terminator P/N 05H4793. Use the appropriate screws, as required.
__ 3. If connecting to the next device in the chain, install the next connector
2 in the female side of
cable connector
3.
__ 4. If the Model B1A/E1A is being installed in a Desk Side sleeve as part of RPQ 8B3190, go to “SCSI
System Cable at Host” on page 8-64.
__ 5. If the Model B11/E11/H11 is being installed in a Desk Side sleeve as part of RPQ 8B3191, go to
“SCSI System Cable at Host” on page 8-64.
__ 6. Go to “Cable Guides – Model B11/E11/H11” on page 8-57.

Figure 8-32. Installing SCSI System Cable into 3590

8-56 IBM 3590 MI

Cable Guides – Model B11/E11/H11
See Figure 8-33.
__ 1. Install the cable guides
6 P/N 45G0179, nuts
5 P/N 1622404, and nut clips
4 P/N 74F1823 in
the eighth hole below each pivot arm.
__ 2. Route the signal cables
1 through the upper snap-on cable retainers
3 of the cable pivot arm.
Do not twist the cables.
__ 3. Route the power cords
2 through the lower sections of the snap-on cable retainers.
__ 4. Go to “Rack, Rear Internal Panel – Model B11/E11/H11” on page 8-58.

Figure 8-33. Cable Retainers for SCSI (Rear View)

Chapter 8. Installation 8-57

Rack, Rear Internal Panel – Model B11/E11/H11
See Figure 8-34.
__ 1. Install the rear internal panel
1 P/N 05H2346 by using two screws
2 P/N 1624778. The internal
panel is required only for the top drives.
__ 2. If you received the shipping plate P/N 05H9822, an additional screw P/N 1624778, and an
additional nut clip P/N 74F1823, keep them in a safe place. They are used when the rack and
devices are moved to another location.
__ 3. Go to “Decorative Covers (2-Drive Cover) – Rack-Mounted Model B11/E11/H11” on page 8-59.

Figure 8-34. Internal Panel

8-58 IBM 3590 MI

| Decorative Covers (2-Drive Cover) – Rack-Mounted Model B11/E11/H11
See Figure 8-35.
1. After you have installed the last 3590, install the 2-drive cover
4 over the drives:
a. Install the blank-out cover
5 over any unused position of the decorative cover
4 (drive 1 or
drive 3 position).

Note: The wider side lip of the cover must be positioned on the left side for installation.
b. Insert the magazine (see “Inserting and Removing Magazine” on page 6-7).

Note: In the next step, if two drives are side-by-side, both displays must be tilted forward.
c. Slide the display forward
2 and then rotate it down
1 to lower the overall height of the display.
d. Align the studs
3 with the mounting holes and snap the decorative cover
4 onto the rack frame.
2. Put the display in the vertical position.
3. Go to “SCSI System Cable at Host” on page 8-64.

Figure 8-35. ACF Decorative (2-Drive) Cover

Chapter 8. Installation 8-59

SCSI Cables – Model B1A/E1A/H1A
Cable Brackets – Model B1A/E1A/H1A
If the brackets are already installed, go to “Cable Routing – Model B1A/E1A/H1A with SCSI Attachment”
on page 8-61.

See Figure 8-36. View the drives from the rear. In this text, front refers to the front of the drive and
left-hand drive refers to the left drive as you face the rear of the drive.
__ 1. Extend the drive to its fully locked service position if it is not already in its service position.
__ 2. Loosely attach the cable clamp P/N 05H2629
2 to the rear cable bracket P/N 45G0193
1 with
screw P/N 1624780.
__ 3. Attach the rear cable bracket
1 to the drive with two screws P/N 1624775.
__ 4. Loosely attach the cable clamp P/N 05H2629
7 to the front cable bracket P/N 45G0178
6 or

8 with screw P/N 1624780.
__ 5. For the right-hand drive, face the cable clamp to the left and attach the front cable bracket
6
with screw P/N 1624765. (If the bottom plate on the drive has only one threaded hole, use the
center hole in the bracket.)

Figure 8-36. Cable Brackets (Bottom View of Drives)

8-60 IBM 3590 MI

__ 6. For the left-hand drive, face the cable clamp
8 to the right and attach the front cable bracket
with screw P/N 1624765. (If the bottom plate on the drive has only one threaded hole, use the
center hole in the bracket.)
__ 7. Loosely attach cable clamps P/N 05H2629
3 to the side frame bracket with screw P/N 1624780
and to the bracket
4 with screws P/N 1624778. For left-hand drives, attach the clamp to the left
frame bracket.
__ 8. Attach the bracket P/N 45G0181
4 below the drive with nut clips
5 and screws P/N 1624778.
Use the 15th and 16th mounting holes below the pin in the slide mounting bracket.
__ 9. Go to “Cable Routing – Model B1A/E1A/H1A with SCSI Attachment”.

Cable Routing – Model B1A/E1A/H1A with SCSI Attachment

In this text, front refers to the front of the drive and left-hand drive refers to the left drive, as you face the
rear of the drive.
Notes:
1. The power cables and the library manager cables are not routed through the cable brackets, they are
attached to the SCSI cables with cable ties.
2. If you are connecting 3490 Models C1A or C2A on the same SCSI bus as 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A,
the 3490 models must be first-in-line from the host. You must use a drive-to host cable because the
hammerhead on the device-to-device cables will not fit in a 3490.

Route the SCSI cables through the cable brackets, as follows:

__ 1. Extend the drive to its fully locked service position if it is not already in its service position.
__ 2. See Figure 8-37 on page 8-63. Connect the SCSI cables and terminators to the ports on the
3590s. Use screws P/N 05H8983
15. One screw is in the ship group and one screw is attached
to each cable.
__ 3. To create the service loop, route the SCSI cables
4 and
5 through the rear bracket clamp and
through the front cable clamp, then tighten these two clamps.
Route the left-hand power cable
2 in the service loop and across the rear slide mounting
bracket.
For the SCSI cables that go side-by-side from drive-to-drive
3, route them through the service
loop and across the rear slide mounting bracket, then attach them and the left-hand drive power
cable with cable ties
8. If the drives in a string are above or below the drive, route the cables
through the service loop and, if necessary, across the rear slide mounting bracket, through the
clamp
7, and then through the service loop in the other drive.
__ 4. Route the SCSI cables so they extend about 115 mm (4.5 in.)
10 past the front of the rear slide
mounting bracket and then route them through the side frame clamp
6 and then through the
rack-mount clamp
7.
__ 5. With the drive in the fully-extended service position, clamp the SCSI cables about 25 mm (1 in.)

13 past the front of the rear slide mounting bracket
14 with clamp P/N 05H2629
11 and
bracket P/N 05H2630
12 by using an M5 screw.

Note: If the drive has less than 3 SCSI cables attached, do not place the clamp as specified in
the next step. Instead, connect it below clamp
7. Then if more SCSI cables are added
later, the clamp can be attached where specified.
__ 6. Route the power cable
2 and the library manager cable
1 next to the SCSI cables and attach
them to the SCSI cables with cable ties
9. Do not route them through the cable brackets. Use as
many cable ties as necessary so the drive can be extended to its service position without
interference.
__ 7. If the frame is a drive unit frame, route the library manager cables through the hole under the front
of the lower drives and clamp them in place on the braided part of the cables. See “Frame to
Frame Cables” in the INST section of IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Maintenance Information.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-61

__ 8. Go to “ARTIC Adapter Cables to Tape Subsystem” in the INST section of IBM 3494 Tape Library
Dataserver Maintenance Information, complete those steps, and then return here. When the drive
is configured run the wrap tests, see “SCSI Ports Wrap Test” on page 9-106.

Note: Tape subsystems must be connected sequentially by library position in the 3494.

If you are adding a drive (inserting a drive within the string) to a 3494 Model L12 or D12, you shift
the existing tape subsystem cables down one position to free the correct ARTIC port for the new
drive. This also applies if you are replacing a 3490E with more than one 3590 Model
B1A/E1A/H1A.
__ 9. Secure the drives in their operating positions by installing the slide locking screws (see Figure 9-4
on page 9-13).
__ 10. Go to “SCSI System Cable at Host” on page 8-64.

8-62 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 8-37. Cable Routing

Chapter 8. Installation 8-63

SCSI System Cable at Host
Install the appropriate interposer at the attachment point of the SCSI cable to the host. Be sure to securely
attach the interposer before attaching the SCSI cable.

Note: If you are connecting 3490 Models C1A or C2A on the same SCSI bus as 3590 Model
B1A/E1A/H1A, the 3490 models must be first-in-line from the host.
Table 8-7. Interposers
Host Description Interposer/Terminator/
iSeries/AS400 Magnetic Media Subsystem Controller (FC 6501) 05H3834 (FC 9410)
(OS/400)
System
pSeries/RS6000 SCSI-2 Differential High Performance I/O Controller (FC 2420) 61G8323 (FC 9701)
(AIX) System
pSeries/RS6000 IBM SCSI-2 Differential Fast/Wide Adapter/A (FC 2416). 50G0460 (FC 9702)
(AIX) System
SUN Sun Dual-Channel Differential Ultra SCSI Host Adapter (PCI). 09L0878 (FC 9799)
SUN Inline SCSI terminator feature. 19P0378 (FC 9798)
HP V–Class Inline SCSI terminator feature. 19P0378 (FC 9798)
only
Note: Some FC 2416 SCSI ports may have a “Y” cable installed. There should be a terminator plugged into one of
the “Y” connectors, and the 3590 SCSI cable should plug directly into the other “Y” connector. Interposer P/N
50G0460 is not needed with this cable configuration.
Note: Refer to your host documentation for the latest information.

8-64 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 8-38. Installing SCSI System Cable at Host

An interposer may be required at the host end of the SCSI cable. See Table 8-7 on page 8-64, Figure 8-38
and Figure 8-39 on page 8-66.

Go to “Online Test” on page 8-78.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-65

Figure 8-39. Installing Open System Cable at Host

8-66 IBM 3590 MI

 Fibre Channel Attachment

Supported Host Attachments

The 3590 drives with fibre channel attachment FC 9510 or FC 3510 support attachment to the following
host systems:
v IBM pSeries (AIX)
v IBM iSeries (OS/400)
v IBM xSeries (NUMA-Q)
v Hewlett-Packard (HP-UX)
v Windows (NT and 2000)
| v LINUX
v Sun PCI/S-bus.

The drives also support attachment to the following fibre channel fabric components:
v IBM 2103 Fibre Channel Storage Hub (for distance only)
v IBM 2109 SAN Fibre Channel Switch
v IBM 2031 McData ES-1000 Fibre Channel Loop Switch
v IBM 2032 McData ED-5000 Fibre Channel Switch (connected through ES-1000 or SAN)
v IBM 2042 InRange FC/9000 Fibre Channel Director.

The host system and fabric component attachments above have unique hardware and software
requirements. Also, new systems and components may be added to the lists from time to time.

See Fibre Support Information for the latest updates on “Web Site Information” on page xxii.

Install 'Read-Me' Sheet

The minimum code requirements for the host system fibre channel attachments are listed on the
'Read-Me' sheet that is shipped with each new fibre channel 3590 drive.

See minimum microcode requirements in “Web Site Information” on page xxii for latest levels.

Fibre Channel Cabling Examples

Each drive has two external fibre channel ports. The cable is a shortwave or multi-mode type (50-micron
cable) for distances up to 500 m (1640 ft). The connection is a duplex SC connector type.

Table 8-8 shows the fibre cables ordered by length.

Table 8-8. 3590 Feature Codes for Fibre Channel Attachment.
Feature Code Cable Length Part Number
5805 5.0 meter (16 feet) 03K9201
5813 13 meters (43 feet) 54G3386
5825 25 meters (82 feet) 03K9203
5861 61 meters (200 feet) 54G3390

If the customer requires cable lengths greater than 61 meters, they can contact IBM Site and Connectivity
Services (I/T Consulting and Implementation Services in the US) for custom cable system design and
installation.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-67

Direct-Attached Direct-Attached
Host Server-1 Host Server-2 Host Server-n
Host Host

Fibre Fibre
Storage Area Network (SAN)
3590 Fibre Channel Switch,
Hub or Hub and Fibre Channel Switch

a14m0053
3590 Drive-1 3590 Drive-2 3590 Drive-n

Figure 8-40. Typical Fibre to Host Cabling

When installing 3590 drives with fibre channel into a rack, a 3494, or a C12 frame, a 3-m (9-ft) cable P/N
19P0160 goes from the drive ports to an interposer connector on a bulkhead at the bottom of the frame.
The customer’s cable attaches to the other side of the bulkhead connector.

8-68 IBM 3590 MI

 Fibre Cables to Device
Attention: Do not connect or disconnect any fibre channel device while power is On as this practice
may corrupt data or may damage hardware.
__ 1. If not already done, insert the drive power cables into the 3590 ac connectors and insert the drive
power cables into the ac power source.
__ 2. Locate the cables from the host/switch/hub and route them to the rear of the device.
__ 3. If you are installing Model E11/H11 devices, including the Desk Side model, go to “Fibre Cables –
Model E11/H11”.
__ 4. If the Model E1A/H1A is being installed in a Desk Side cover as part of RPQ 8B3190, go to “Fibre
Cables – Model E11/H11”.
__ 5. If you are installing Model E1A devices, other than the Desk Side model, go to “Fibre Cables –
Model E1A/H1A” on page 8-74.

| Fibre Cables – Model E11/H11

Note: Be sure all the drives in the rack are offline and powered down.

Refer to Figure 8-40 on page 8-68 and connect the customer supplied cables to the rear of the bulkhead.
Notice how the cables are tied and supported to prevent damage.

In this text, front refers to the front of the drive and left-hand drive refers to the left drive as you face the
rear of the drive.

Note: The fibre channel cables and power cables are not routed through the cable brackets, they are
attached to the support cables with “hook and loop” fasteners.

Overview – Rack Installation

If drives are replacing existing SCSI drives refer to the appropriate MES installation instructions for
procedures.
v The fibre channel cables are not as strong as the SCSI cables and they can be damaged very easily. It
is necessary to use a dummy SCSI cable for support and routing in the rack service loop.
v The dummy cables go inside the cable clamps the same as when installing SCSI cables. The fibre
channel cables are routed outside of the cable clamps so they are not damaged and they are attached
to the dummy cables with “hook and loop” fasteners.
v All of the drives in the rack use the same 3-m (10-ft) length fibre cable. Any excess length should be
coiled up in the bottom of the frame near the bulkhead connectors.
v All of the drive cables are connected to the back of the bulkhead connectors, and the host cables all
plug into the other side of the bulkhead connectors.

| Installing Fibre Cables (Model E11/H11)

__ 1. Connect the system fibre cable straight into the card connector on the drive (Fibre Port 0 is on the
left when facing the rear of the drive).
__ 2. If the model E1A is being installed in a Desk Side sleeve as part of RPQ 8B3190, go to “Fibre
Cable at Host” on page 8-77.
| __ 3. If the model E11/H11 (RPQ 8B3191 or FC 2200) is being installed in a Desk Side sleeve, go to
| “Fibre Cable at Host” on page 8-77.
__ 4. Go to “Cable Guides and Routing – Model E11/H11 (Fibre)”.

Cable Guides and Routing – Model E11/H11 (Fibre)

See Figure 8-41 on page 8-70.
__ 1. Install the cable guides
6 P/N 45G0179, nuts
5 P/N 1622404, and nut clips
4 P/N 74F1823 in
the eighth hole below each pivot arm.
__ 2. Route the dummy support cables
1 P/N 35L2022 through the upper snap-on cable retainers
3
of the cable pivot arm. Do not twist the cables.
__ 3. Route the power cords
2 through the lower sections of the snap-on cable retainers.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-69

__ 4. Route the fibre channel cables along side the dummy support cables, but not through the snap-on
cable retainers, with “hook and loop” fasteners
7, as necessary. See P/N 19P0362 “Hook and
Loop Fastener” on page 3-47.
__ 5. See Figure 8-44 on page 8-73. Route the cables down to the bottom of the frame, then through
cable clamps
2 and
4, as shown. Any excess cable should be coiled through clamps
4, if
necessary.
__ 6. Connect the cables to the back of the appropriate bulkhead connector
3, as shown. The
customers external cables
1 will plug into the outside of the bulkhead connectors.
__ 7. Go to “Rack, Rear Internal Panel – Model E11/H11” on page 8-71.

A14M0065

See “Hook and Loop Fastener” on page 3-47 for fastener illustration.

Figure 8-41. Cable Retainers for Fibre (Rear View)

8-70 IBM 3590 MI

Rack, Rear Internal Panel – Model E11/H11
See Figure 8-42.
__ 1. Install the rear internal panel
1 P/N 05H2346 by using two screws
2 P/N 1624778. The internal
panel is required only for the top drives.
__ 2. If you received the shipping plate P/N 05H9822, an additional screw P/N 1624778, and an
additional nut clip P/N 74F1823, keep them in a safe place. They are used when the rack and
devices are moved to another location.
__ 3. Go to “Decorative Covers (2-Drive Cover) – Rack-Mounted Model E11/H11” on page 8-72.

Figure 8-42. Internal Panel Model E11/H11

Chapter 8. Installation 8-71

Decorative Covers (2-Drive Cover) – Rack-Mounted Model E11/H11
See Figure 8-43.
1. After you have installed the last 3590, install the 2-drive cover
4 over the drives:
a. Install the blank-out cover
5 P/N 05H2343 over any unused position of the decorative cover
4
(drive 1 or drive 3 position).

Note: The wider side lip of the cover must be positioned on the left side for installation.
b. Insert the magazine (see “Inserting and Removing Magazine” on page 6-7).

Note: In the next step, if two drives are side-by-side, both displays must be tilted forward.
c. Slide the display forward
2 and then rotate it down
1 to lower the overall height of the display.
d. Align the studs
3 with the mounting holes and snap the decorative cover
4 onto the rack frame.
2. Put the display in the vertical position.
3. Go to “Fibre Cable at Host” on page 8-77.

Figure 8-43. ACF Decorative (2-Drive) Cover

8-72 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 8-44. Typical Model E11/E1A/H11/H1A Fibre Channel Cable Routing

Chapter 8. Installation 8-73

Fibre Cables – Model E1A/H1A
In this text, front refers to the front of the drive and left-hand drive refers to the left drive as you face the
rear of the drive.

Note: The fibre channel cables, power cables and the library manager cables are not routed through the
cable brackets, they are attached to the support cables with “hook and loop” fasteners.

Overview
v The fibre channel cables are not as strong as the SCSI cables and they can be damaged very easily. It
is necessary to use a support SCSI cable for support and routing in the 3494 service loop.
v The dummy cables go inside the cable clamps the same as when installing SCSI cables. The fibre
channel cables are routed outside of the cable clamps so they are not damaged and they are attached
to the dummy cables with “hook and loop” fasteners.
v All of the drives in the 3494 use the same 3 meter length fibre cable. Any excess length should be
coiled up in the bottom of the frame near the bulkhead connectors.
v All of the drive cables are connected to the back of the bulkhead connectors, and the host cables all
plug into the other side of the bulkhead connectors.
v The service loops for the bottom drives will be slightly longer than those of the upper drives because
the dummy cables can’t be attached to the vertical frame in the same way.

Fibre Channel Cable Brackets – Model E1A/H1A

If the brackets are already installed, go to “Fibre Channel Cable Routing – E1A/H1A” on page 8-76.

See Figure 8-45 on page 8-75. View the drives from the rear. In this text, front refers to the front of the
drive and left-hand drive refers to the left drive as you face the rear of the drive.
__ 1. Extend the drive to its fully locked service position if it is not already in its service position.
__ 2. Loosely attach the cable clamp P/N 05H2629
2 to the rear cable bracket P/N 45G0193
1 with
screw P/N 1624780.
__ 3. Attach the rear cable bracket
1 to the drive with two screws P/N 1624775.
__ 4. Loosely attach the cable clamp P/N 05H2629
7 to the front cable bracket P/N 45G0178
6 or

8 with screw P/N 1624780.
__ 5. For the right-hand drive, face the cable clamp to the left and attach the front cable bracket
6
with screw P/N 1624765. (If the bottom plate on the drive has only one threaded hole, use the
center hole in the bracket.)
__ 6. For the left-hand drive, face the cable clamp
8 to the right and attach the front cable bracket
with screw P/N 1624765. (If the bottom plate on the drive has only one threaded hole, use the
center hole in the bracket.)
__ 7. Loosely attach cable clamps P/N 05H2629
3 to the side frame bracket with screw P/N 1624780
and to the bracket
4 with screws P/N 1624778. For left-hand drives, attach the clamp to the left
frame bracket.
__ 8. Attach the bracket P/N 45G0181
4 below the drive with nut clips
5 and screws P/N 1624778.
Use the 15th and 16th mounting holes below the pin in the slide mounting bracket.
__ 9. Go to “Fibre Channel Cable Routing – E1A/H1A” on page 8-76.

8-74 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 8-45. Cable Brackets (Bottom View of Drives)

Chapter 8. Installation 8-75

 Fibre Channel Cable Routing – E1A/H1A
|

Top
View
A1400437

| Notice “hook and loop”, item
9.

|
| Figure 8-46. Fibre Channel Cable Routing for E1A/H1A

8-76 IBM 3590 MI

Route the support cable through the cable brackets, as follows:
__ 1. Extend the drive to its fully locked service position if it is not already in its service position.
__ 2. To create the service loop, route the support cable
5 through the rear bracket clamp and through
the front cable clamp, then tighten these two clamps.

Note: When tightening the rear bracket clamp, allow approximately 24 mm (1.0 in.) of the cable to
extend beyond the clamp.
__ 3. Route the left-hand power cable
2 in the service loop and across the rear slide mounting
bracket, then attach the left-hand drive power cable with cable ties
8.
__ 4. Route the support cable so it extends about 115 mm (4.5 in.)
10 past the front of the rear slide
mounting bracket and then route them through the side frame clamp
6 and then through the
rack-mount clamp
7.
__ 5. Allow approximately 24 mm (1.0 in.) of the support cable to extend through the rack-mount clamp

7, then tighten the rack-mount clamp and the side frame clamp.
__ 6. Route the power cable
2 and the library manager cable
1 next to the support cable and attach
them to the support cable with cable ties (plastic cable ties
8 in approximate positions illustrated
by
9. Later “hook and loop” cable ties will be added for the fibre cables). Use as many cable ties
as necessary, so the drive can be extended to its service position without interference.
__ 7. Connect the fibre channel cables
3 and
4 to the fibre channel port connectors on the back of
the drive.
__ 8. Route the fibre channel cables next to the support cable and attach them to the support cable with
the “hook and loop” fasteners provided, item
9. Use as many “hook and loop” fasteners as
necessary, so the drive can be extended to its service position without interference.
__ 9. See Figure 8-44 on page 8-73. Route the cables down to the bottom of the frame, then through
cable clamps
2 and
4, as shown. Any excess cable should be coiled through clamps
4, if
necessary.
__ 10. Connect the cables to the back of the appropriate bulkhead connector
3, as shown. The
customers external cables
1 will plug into the outside of the bulkhead connectors.
__ 11. If the frame is a drive unit frame, route the library manager cables through the hole under the front
of the lower drives and clamp them in place on the braided part of the cables. See “Frame to
Frame Cables” in the INST section of IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Maintenance Information.
__ 12. Go to “ARTIC Adapter Cables to Tape Subsystem” in the INST section of IBM 3494 Tape Library
Dataserver Maintenance Information, complete those steps, and then return here.

Note: Tape subsystems must be connected sequentially by library position in the 3494.

If you are adding a drive (inserting a drive within the string) to a 3494 Model L12 or D12, you shift
the existing tape subsystem cables down one position to free the correct ARTIC port for the new
drive. This also applies if you are replacing a 3490E with more than one 3590 Model
B1A/E1A/H1A.
__ 13. Secure the drives in their operating positions by installing the slide locking screws (see Figure 9-4
on page 9-13).
__ 14. Continue with “Fibre Cable at Host”.

Fibre Cable at Host

__ 1. Refer to the customers host or switch documentation for information about attaching the fibre cables
between the drive and the host.
__ 2. Install the appropriate cable from the drive to the host, hub, or switch. Refer to IBM TotalStorage
Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning Guide. Use switch, hub, or other fibre
product service guides, as appropriate. Verify that the levels are supported.
See configuration and software in “Web Site Information” on page xxii for the latest information.
__ 3. Go to “Online Test” on page 8-78.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-77

 Online Test
Note: When the 3590 is powered OFF, wait approximately five seconds before again powering ON the
3590.
__ 1. Set the Power switch to the ON position.
This power-on test takes approximately 2.5 minutes to complete and is automatically performed
when the subsystem is powered ON.
If a failure occurs, a message can be posted in the operator/CE panel or the operator/CE panel can
be blank. If either of these conditions exist, go to the START section for further analysis. When any
faults are corrected, return here.
__ 2. From the Options menu, select Services.
__ 3. From the Services menu, select Set Online.
__ 4. From the Set Online menu, select Port 0 and/or Port 1 to set the interfaces online, depending on
the customer’s choice.
__ 5. Select Cancel twice to return to the Options menu.

3494 Only

If you have completed an install and/or checkout of a 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A in a 3494 library,
locate the next task to perform in the following list:
__ a. If you have more field-installed 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A drives to checkout, return to
“Install Model B1A/E1A/H1A Into 3494 Frame” on page 8-25.
__ b. If you have more factory-installed 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A drives to checkout, return to
“Installation Checkout” on page 8-32 to check the next drive.
__ c. If you have checked out all of the factory-installed 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A drives in a
new 3494 library (new library or new frame), return to “Checkout” in 3494 Tape Library
Dataserver Maintenance Information and complete the library teach and checkout.
__ d. If you are field-installing a 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A in an existing 3494 library frame
(feature code 4630), return to the feature Installation Instructions to complete the library
teach and checkout.
__ e. If you are field-installing a 3590 Model B1A/E1A/H1A in a new 3494 library or new library
frame (feature code 4630), return to “Checkout” in 3494 Tape Library Dataserver
Maintenance Information and complete the library teach and checkout.

End of 3494 Only

__ 6. Perform one of the following procedures depending on your application, then return here:
v “Checking Channel Attachment – AIX” on page 9-91
v “Checking Channel Attachment – iSeries (OS/400)” on page 9-89

Note: Ensure that you have the latest iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System PTFs before performing
this procedure.
v “Checking Channel Attachment – Sun” on page 9-99
| v “Checking Channel Attachment – Linux” on page 9-97
v “Checking Channel Attachment – HP-UX” on page 9-102
| v “Checking Channel Attachment – Windows NT or Windows 2000” on page 9-103
__ 7. Make sure that the latest level of microcode is installed in the drive. If you need to update the
microcode, do so by using the “Microcode update via SCSI” or “Microcode update via SCSI or fibre
channel” entry in the START section, see 1-6.

8-78 IBM 3590 MI

Post Installation Reporting
If the IBM 3590 Operator Quick Reference Guide and the 3590 Training Tape are included in the ship
group, give them to the customer.

Follow this procedure after the drive is installed and tested.

__ 1. Update the account management plan book.
__ 2. Record the drive serial number (from the label) into the machine history log. See “Microcode EC
Level History Log” on page 9-61.

Note: Record this serial number for use when restoring nonvolatile storage. It may be required by
certain repair procedures.
__ 3. Record the installed microcode level into the machine history log. See “Check EC Level” on
page 8-34 and “Microcode EC Level History Log” on page 9-61.
__ 4. For fibre channel attached drives, ensure that the “Fibre Channel World Wide Name History Log” on
page 9-63 is filled out.
__ 5. Save the tools and cartridges in a safe place for later use.
__ 6. Report the installation as complete, using the existing branch office procedure.
__ 7. After successfully completing installation, notify the customer that the subsystem is now available
for use.

Removing 3590
Use this procedure to remove a 3590 from service or to relocate it.
Relocation Notes:
1. For World Trade countries, refer to WT General CEM 257, “General Internal Packaging Instructions for
Replant Machines.”
2. Before attempting to remove a 3590, ensure that you have the relocation kit.
3. If your host system has software aids for system upgrades, installations, or relocations, execute that
software and follow the instructions it provides.
4. If the drive is attached to an Axx Control Unit or Virtual Tape Server (VTS), it is recommended that you
disable the Control Unit Mode option before removing the drive. This will prevent any attachment
problems if the drive is relocated to a non-Control Unit application. See the “CE Drive Options Menu”
on page 5-52 for details.

To remove a 3590, perform the following steps:

__ 1. Before proceeding, check the following:
__ a. Ensure that the drive is unloaded and the tape cartridge has been removed or stored in the
magazine.
__ b. Notify the system operator that you must power OFF the 3590 and that it will not be
available, then vary the drive offline at the operator panel.
__ 2. Set the Power switch to the OFF position. The power switch is at the rear of the device.
__ 3. Open the rear door.
__ 4. Set the circuit protector (CP) to the OFF position for this drive only.
__ 5. Disconnect the power cable for this drive only from the outlet in the rack or the power control
compartment (PCC).
__ 6. Disconnect the ac power cable from the 3590.
__ 7. Disconnect the interface cables from the 3590.

Chapter 8. Installation 8-79

Note: The ac power cable, and any interface cables that are removed with the drive should stay with the
drive.

Remove or Relocate Model B11/E11/H11 in Rack

When removing nut clips, bolts, and screws, put them into the containers provided. Mark the containers
with the correct part number.
__ 1. Remove the rack covers.
__ 2. Slide the 3590 into the service position. See “Service Position” on page 9-11.
__ 3. Remove the 3590 from the drive shelf.
__ 4. If the 3590 Model B11/E11/H11 is to be relocated to a different rack or a different location in the
same rack, perform the installation instructions. If the 3590 is to stay in a rack and the rack is to be
moved, install the shipping plates (see “Install Rack That Contains Model B11/E11/H11 Drives” on
page 8-23).
__ 5. If you are not reinstalling the drive, place the drive in the shipping box. See “Repack Instructions for
3590” on page 8-81.

Remove or Relocate Model B1A/E1A/H1A

When removing nut clips, bolts, and screws, put them into the containers provided. Mark the containers
with the correct part number.
__ 1. Disconnect the interface cables.
__ 2. Disconnect the ac power cord.
__ 3. Move the 3590 to the new location.
OR
__ 4. If you are not reinstalling the drive, place it in the shipping box. See “Repack Instructions for 3590”
on page 8-81.

Note: The ac power cable, and any interface cables that are removed with the drive should stay with the
drive. Any slides and related hardware that are removed with Model B1A/E1A/H1A drives should
stay with the drive also.

8-80 IBM 3590 MI

 Repack Instructions for 3590
Before repacking the 3590, verify that there is no tape cartridge in the 3590. For the ACF, verify there are
no tape cartridges loaded in the magazine. If there are cartridges present, remove them.

Note: The ac power cable, and any interface cables that are removed with the drive should stay with the
drive. Any slides and related hardware that are removed with Model B1A/E1A/H1A drives should
stay with the drive also.

Refer to the relocation kit:

Model Part Number
| B11/E11/H11 7353608
| B1A/E1A/H1A 7353617

Refer to the CE packaging instructions:

Model Part Number
| B11/E11/H11 7353609
| B1A/E1A/H1A 7353618

Chapter 8. Installation 8-81

8-82 IBM 3590 MI
Chapter 9. Procedures
Contents
Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Excessive Clean Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Prepare Tape Drive for Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Powering Device ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Removing Subsystem Power During Normal Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Restoring Drive Power During Normal Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
End of Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Verify Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Setting Device Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Service Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Front Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Pull Device to Service Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Return Device Drawer to Operating Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Rear Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (A14 Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Pull Device to Service Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Return Device to Operating Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Rear Serviced without ACF, Model B1A/E1A/H1A (3494 Library) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Pull Device to Service Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Return Device to Operating Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Prepare Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, or H11/H1A in Desk Side Sleeve for Service . . . . . . . . 9-14
Prepare Model B11/E11 in Desk Side Cover for Service (RPQ 8B3191), or Model B11/E11/H11
(FC 2200). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Return Model B11/E11/H11 Drive to Desk Side Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Prepare Model B1A/E1A in Desk Side Cover for Service (RPQ 8B3190) . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Return Model B1A/E1A Drive to Desk Side Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Prepare Model B11/E11 in Desk Side Sleeve (Removable Top Cover) for Service (RPQ 8B3191),
or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Reinstall Sleeve Top Cover to Desk Side Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Prepare Model B1A/E1A in Desk Side Sleeve (Removable Top Cover) for Service (RPQ 8B3190) 9-22
Reinstall Sleeve Top Cover to Desk Side Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Operator/CE Panel Service Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Deck Enclosure Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Removing Deck Enclosure Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Removing Deck Enclosure Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Removing Deck Enclosure Pneumatic Access Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Removing Deck Enclosure Back Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Replacing Deck Enclosure Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
ACF Decorative Cover (Rack Mount Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
ACF Side Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
ACF Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Bezel (Model B11/E11/H11 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Removing ACF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Replacing ACF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Display Sensors Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Manual Cartridge Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 9-1

 Identifying Cartridge and Tape Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Example 1: Leader Block Separated From Magnetic Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Example 2: Magnetic Tape Pulled Out of Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Example 3: Leader Block and Threader Pin in Machine Reel Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Example 4: Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in Tape Path . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Example 5: Leader Block and Threader Pin at Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Example 6: Operation Stopped with Tape on Machine Reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Example 7: Magnetic Tape Broken in Data Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Example 8: Cartridge Jammed in Loader or Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Leader Block and Threader Pin in Machine Reel Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in Tape Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Leader Block and Threader Pin at Loader Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Leader Block Separated From Magnetic Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Magnetic Tape Attachment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Magnetic Tape Broken in Data Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Removing Destroyed Tape From Tape Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Manual Unloading Loader or Transport (Model B11/E11/H11). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Drive Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Serial Number Change Procedure Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Serial Number Change (Current Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Serial Number Change (Former Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
FMR Tape Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Converting FMR Tape to Scratch Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Updating FMR Tape from Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Making FMR Tape from Scratch Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Updating Microcode from FMR Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Updating Microcode Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
History Log Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Microcode EC Level History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Fibre Channel World Wide Name History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Display WW Names Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Set WW Names Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Dump Maintenance Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Off-loading Dumps to Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Off-loading Dumps to iSeries (OS/400) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Off-loading Dumps to pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Off-loading Dumps to Sun System by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Off-loading Dumps to HP-UX System by Using TAPEUTIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Off-loading Dumps to SP2 by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
Off-loading Dumps to Windows NT or Windows 2000 System by Using NTUTIL. . . . . . . . 9-73
| Off-loading Dumps to Linux System by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Microcode Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76
Updating Microcode from iSeries (OS/400) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76
Updating Microcode from pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . 9-76
| Updating Microcode from LINUX by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Updating Microcode from Sun System by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Updating Microcode from HP-UX System by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82
Updating Microcode from Windows NT or Windows 2000 System by Using NTUTIL . . . . . . 9-83
Updating Microcode From SP2 by Using TAPEUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83
Starting NT UTILITY (ntutil) from Windows NT or Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
Exercising Drive Attached to Windows NT or Windows 2000 by Using NTUTIL . . . . . . . . 9-88
Host Attachment Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
Checking Channel Attachment – iSeries (OS/400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
Checking Channel Attachment – AIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Inquiry Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Read and Write Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95

9-2 IBM 3590 MI

| Checking Channel Attachment – Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
| Tape Device Attachment Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
| Medium Changer Device Attachment Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
| 3494 Enterprise Tape Library Attachment Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98
Checking Channel Attachment – Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
Checking Channel Attachment – HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-102
Checking Channel Attachment – Windows NT or Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-103
Checking Channel Attachment using NTUTIL under Windows NT or Windows 2000 . . . . . . 9-104
SCSI Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Setup SCSI Ports Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
SCSI Ports Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-106
SCSI Cable Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-107
SCSI Bus Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
Solid SCSI Bus Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
Intermittent SCSI Bus Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109
Library Manager Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-111
Setup Library Manager Port Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-111
Library Manager Port Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-111
Fibre Channel Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-112
Fibre Channel Ports Wrap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-112
Fibre Channel Problem Determination Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-113
Common Fibre Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-113
Fibre Bus Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-113
Checking 3494 Control Path by Using MTLIB Command from pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System 9-116
FID E5 – Microcode Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-118
FID E6 or E7– Isolate Fault Between Microcode and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-120
FID E6, E7– Normal FID Display Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-120
FID Currently Displayed on Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-120
FID Not Currently Displayed on Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-121
FID E6 – Small Letters (Abnormal Display Condition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-122
FID FE – Isolate Fault Between Media and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-123
FID FF – Operator Action or Host Program Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125
FID FF Displayed on Drive Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125
FID FF Displayed at Host Only – Not at Drive Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125
Suspected Microcode Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125
Error Log Analysis Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-126
Set Error Match Trap (To Get Dump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-130
Remove Error Match Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-131
Remove NORMAL Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-131
Known Normal Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-131
Unknown Normal Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-131
Remove SAVED Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-132
Known Saved Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-132
Unknown Saved Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-132
No Response from Operator/CE Panel and No Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-133

The symbol identifies an ESD-sensitive part. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-3

Problem Determination
Begin all maintenance action at “Maintenance Starting Point” on page 1-2.

If you have a well-defined or solid failure symptom, (such as a FID, ATTN message, operator/CE panel
indication), use Table 1-1 on page 1-2 to determine the proper service action.

If the problem is intermittent or you are unable to determine the cause of the problem (No Defect Found),
or the symptoms change and you need further assistance, return here and use the following problem
determination procedure:
1. Discuss the problem with the customer.
v Does the failure occur only during certain operations (load, unload, read, or write)?
v Is the failure unique to a certain cartridge, magazine, library, or host?
v Does the failure occur only with certain software applications, or has the microcode level been
changed recently?
2. Analyze the drive error log. See “CE Error Log Menu” on page 5-61 to display the log, and “Error Log
Analysis Procedure” on page 9-126 to analyze the data.
a. Look for FIDs with a time stamp close to the time of the failure.
b. Look for FIDs or associated FRUs in the same functional area as the failure, such as ACF,
pneumatics, or read/write data path.
c. If a FID appears to be associated with the failure, go to “FID Entry Point” on page 1-8.
3. Attempt to recreate the problem.
a. Run diagnostics using the “CE Loop Diag Menu” on page 5-42. Exercise the functional area that
was causing the problem.
b. Have the customer run the failing job or application, if possible.
4. Analyze the host or control unit error logs.
a. Refer to “Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and MIMs)” on page 4-2, “Error Log
Analysis – pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System” on page 4-15, “Error Log Analysis – iSeries/AS400
(OS/400) System” on page 4-26, “Obtaining Error Information from Sun (Solaris) System” on
page 4-35, “Obtaining Error Information from HP/UX System” on page 4-35, or “Obtaining Error
Information from Windows NT or Windows 2000 System” on page 4-36.
b. Look for any SIM/MIM or other error information that may be related to the problem.
5. Analyze the FID FE error log. See “CE FID FE Log Menu” on page 5-63 to display the log and “FID FE
– Isolate Fault Between Media and Hardware” on page 9-123 to analyze the data.
a. Look for FIDs with a time stamp close to the time of the failure.
b. Look for FIDs or associated FRUs in the same functional area as the failure, such as ACF,
pneumatics, or read/write data path.
c. If a FID appears to be associated with the failure, go to “FID Entry Point” on page 1-8.
6. Analyze the Temporary Error Log (see “CE Temp Error Log Menu” on page 5-65).
7. Call your next level of support, if necessary.

9-4 IBM 3590 MI

Excessive Clean Messages
Normal clean messages require running a cleaning cartridge in the machine. Excessive clean messages
indicate that other procedures are necessary.

If you have a clean message with the additional text
CLEAN_REQUIRED, the drive will be unusable until a
clean operation is performed. Load a cleaning cartridge to clear the condition.

If you have excessive clean messages, perform the following procedure:

1. If there has been a recent part replacement in the tape path or head guide assembly, go to “FRU
Replaced Menu” on page 5-41 and select one of the functions to reset the drive statistical data.
2. Try another cleaning cartridge.
3. Replace the cleaning brush. See “FID D4: Head Cleaning Brush Assembly” on page 10-114.
4. Ensure that the new cleaning brush fully contacts the head surface and is not binding.
5. Remove the cleaning blade if one is present on the HGA. Refer to Figure 10-78 on page 10-113 for the
location of the cleaning blade on the HGA. If a cleaner blade is present, use the procedure at “Cleaner
Blade Removal (Model B11/B1A)” on page 10-112 to remove and discard it. When the cleaning blade
has been removed, continue with the next step.
6. Check pneumatics for proper settings. See “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on
page 10-4.
7. Run diagnostics on the drive. See “CE Verify Fix Menu” on page 5-39 for details.
8. If you are still getting excessive clean messages, replace the head guide and brush assembly. See
“FID D0: Head Guide and Brush Assembly” on page 10-105.
9. If you are still getting excessive clean messages, replace the card pack. See “FID E4: Card Pack” on
page 10-67.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-5

Prepare Tape Drive for Service
1. Notify the customer the failing device must be varied offline as the power must be removed from the
device.
Proceed with the following steps after the device is offline.
2. Power OFF the failing device by using the power switch on the back of the device. See Figure 9-1 on
page 9-7 for the location of power switch.

Note: Do not use magnetized tools on this drive!

3. If the failing device is:
v Front serviced with an ACF attached, Model B11/E11/H11 (Rack), go to step 4.
v Rear serviced with an ACF attached, Model B11/E11/H11 (A14 Frame), go to step 9.
v Rear serviced without an ACF attached, Model B1A/E1A/H1A (3494) go to step 14.
Front Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (Rack)
4. Remove the magazine from the failing device. See page 6-7.
5. Remove the ACF decorative cover. See page 9-29.
6. Pull the shelf, with the failing device, to the service position. See “Front Serviced with ACF, Model
B11/E11/H11 (Rack)” on page 9-11.
7. Remove the cartridge, if present. See page 9-37.
8. Return to the removal/replacement procedure that sent you here.
Rear Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (A14 Frame)
9. Pull the failing device to the service position. See “Rear Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (A14
Frame)” on page 9-12.
10. Remove the magazine. See page 6-7.
11. Remove the cartridge, if present. See page 9-37.
12. Power OFF the failing device by using the power switch on the back of the device. See Figure 9-1 on
page 9-7 for location of power switch.
13. Return to the removal/replacement procedure that sent you here.
Rear Serviced without ACF, Model B1A/E1A/H1A (3494)
14. Pull the failing device to the service position. See “Rear Serviced without ACF, Model B1A/E1A/H1A
(3494 Library)” on page 9-13.
15. Remove the cartridge, if present. See page 9-37.
16. Power OFF the failing device by using the power switch on the back of the device. See Figure 9-1 on
page 9-7 for location of power switch.
17. Return to the removal/replacement procedure that sent you here.

Powering Device ON and OFF

Attention: If the covers are removed, be careful of moving parts when power is turned ON.

Removing Subsystem Power During Normal Operations

To power OFF the subsystem during normal operations, perform the following steps:
1. If the device is not varied offline, have the customer vary it offline.

Note: If 3590 drives are attached to a Model Axx Controller, you also need to vary the drive offline
from Axx. Perform the procedure Varying On/Off 3590 drives from A00, A50 or A60
Controller in PROC section of IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Model Axx
Controller Maintenance Information.
2. If a cartridge is in tape drive, select Unload Drive from the operator Options menu.

9-6 IBM 3590 MI

3. Power OFF the subsystem by using the power switch at the back of the device.

Figure 9-1. Subsystem Power Switch

Restoring Drive Power During Normal Operations

Restore power by setting the power switch to ON. Power-on self-test (POST) runs automatically.

Note: Wait approximately 5 seconds after you power OFF the 3590 before you power it ON again.

This POST takes approximately 2.5 minutes to complete. When the test is running, the panel indicates
Diags Running. Communications with the interface are not acknowledged during the POST.

Attention: The device runs diagnostics, which takes approximately 2.5 minutes. Do not insert your
hands in the ACF during this time, even if panel stops displaying Diags Running because the ACF
transport may move up or down.

When the POST is complete, the customer can vary the device online.

If a failure occurs, a message is posted in operator/CE panel or the operator/CE panel will be blank. If
either of these conditions exists, go to “Maintenance Starting Point” on page 1-2 and isolate failure.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-7

 End of Call
Note: After you power OFF the 3590, wait approximately 5 seconds before powering it ON again.

Verify Fix
1. Set the Power switch to the ON position.
This power-on test takes approximately 2.5 minutes to complete and is automatically performed when
the 3590 is powered ON.
If a failure occurs, a message might be posted in the operator/CE panel or the operator/CE panel
| might be blank. If either of these conditions exist, go to “Maintenance Starting Point” on page 1-2 for
further analysis.
2. Insert the cleaning cartridge in the priority cell to automatically clean the tape path.
3. If you replaced the card pack (FID E4):
a. Ensure that the microcode was updated. See step 12 on page 10-72.
b. Ensure that the customer options and drive options are correct. See “Set Customer Options” on
page 8-35 and “Set Drive Options” on page 8-36.
4. If there has been a recent part replacement in the tape path or head guide assembly, go to “FRU
Replaced Menu” on page 5-41 and select one of the menu functions to reset the drive statistical data.

5. Press the Change Mode pushbutton to place the device in CE mode.

6. Select Verify Fix.
7. From the Verify Fix menu, select Test Drive to verify the operation of the components on the deck
and part of the ACF.
v If the problem was intermittent, or if you want to test the drive more thoroughly, select Loop Diag
from the Verify Fix menu.
v If the problem was a RS-422 problem, perform “Library Manager Port Wrap Test” on page 9-111
and return here.
v If the problem was a SCSI problem, perform “SCSI Ports Wrap Test” on page 9-106 or perform
“Fibre Channel Ports Wrap Test” on page 9-112 and return here.

Model B11/E11/H11 Only

To test the ACF:

a. Note the ACF mode, which is displayed on the operator panel the customer is using.
b. Press the Change Mode pushbutton to place the device in CE mode.
c. Select the Verify Fix menu, and select Test ACF.
d. Lock the magazine when prompted, and press Enter.
e. Insert a cartridge into the priority cell when prompted, and press Enter. (This test will cycle the
cartridge to all empty cells in the magazine).
f. Unlock magazine when prompted, and press Enter.
g. Set the ACF mode to the customer’s preference.

End of Model B11/E11/H11 Only

8. If you want to clear the device CE error log, perform the following:

a. Press the Change Mode pushbutton to place the device in CE mode.

b. Select Error Log option from the CE Options menu.
c. Select Clear Error Log option from the CE Error Log menu to clear the error log.
d. Select Cancel to return to the CE Options menu.

9-8 IBM 3590 MI

 9. If the display indicates Offline, perform “Setting Device Online” on page 9-10.
10. If this was a 3590 Model C12/C14 drive problem, go to procedure “Return the Drive to the Operating
Position” in the PROC section of IBM 3590 Tape Subsystem Models C12/C14 Maintenance
Information.
11. If this was a Desk Side Model B11/E11/H11 problem where the desk side sleeve is the ‘old style’
cover without the removable sleeve top cover, go to “Return Model B11/E11/H11 Drive to Desk Side
Sleeve” on page 9-16.
v If this was a Desk Side Model B11/E11/H11 problem where the desk side sleeve has the
removable sleeve top cover, go to “Reinstall Sleeve Top Cover to Desk Side Sleeve” on page 9-21.
v If this was a Desk Side Model B1A/E1A problem where the desk side sleeve is the ‘old style’
cover without the removable sleeve top cover, go to “Return Model B1A/E1A Drive to Desk Side
Sleeve” on page 9-19.
v If this was a Desk Side Model B1A/E1A/H1A problem where the desk side sleeve has the
removable sleeve top cover, go to “Reinstall Sleeve Top Cover to Desk Side Sleeve” on page 9-21.
12. If the problem involved the SCSI bus, fibre channel, or hang conditions, perform one of the following
procedures, depending on your application:
v “Checking Channel Attachment – iSeries (OS/400)” on page 9-89
v “Checking Channel Attachment – AIX” on page 9-91
v “Checking Channel Attachment – Sun” on page 9-99
v “Checking Channel Attachment – HP-UX” on page 9-102
v “Checking Channel Attachment – Linux” on page 9-97
v “Checking Channel Attachment – Windows NT or Windows 2000” on page 9-103
13. If the 3590 drives are attached to a Model Axx Control Unit, you need to close the SIMs at the control
unit. Refer to the PROC section of IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Model Axx
Controller Maintenance Information.
14. If the 3590 drives are attached to a Model Axx Control Unit, you need to vary the drive online from
the Axx. Perform the procedure Varying On/Off 3590 drives from the A00, A50 or A60 Controller
in the PROC section of IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Model Axx Controller
Maintenance Information.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-9

Setting Device Online
__ 1. From the operator Options menu, select Services.
__ 2. From the Services menu, select Set Online.
__ 3. From the Set Online menu, select Port 0 and/or Port 1 to set the interfaces online, depending on
the customer’s choice.
__ 4. Select Cancel twice to return to the Options menu.

Note: If 3590 drives are attached to a Model Axx Controller, you also need to vary drive online
from the Axx. Perform procedure Varying On/Off 3590 drives from A00, A50 or A60
Controller in PROC section of IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Model Axx
Controller Maintenance Information.
__ 5. Notify the customer that the device can now be varied (made) online.

3494 Only

If this drive is in a 3494 library, go to the DIAG section in IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Maintenance
Information to make the drive available.
End of 3494 Only

Call Reporting
Report the FID (example: FID1−E4) in the COMMENT field.

Report the twelve hex characters of support data in the FAULT SYMPTOM CODE (FSC) field.

— or —

Report the first twelve characters of the Supplemental Message data (for example: Move Error, Load
Error) in the FAULT SYMPTOM CODE (FSC) field.

Charge the time and parts to 3590 Drive.

9-10 IBM 3590 MI

Service Position

Front Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (Rack)

See Figure 9-2.

Pull Device to Service Position

Attention: Ensure that the rack stabilizer is installed.
1. If you have not already done so, ensure that the device is varied offline at the host. Remove the ACF
decorative cover. See page 9-29.
2. Press the shelf release latch
1, and pull the shelf far enough so the shelf is latched in the service
position
2.
3. See “Operator/CE Panel Service Position” on page 9-25 to put the operator/CE panel in the service
position.
4. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Return Device Drawer to Operating Position

1. Return the operator/CE panel to the operating position.
2. Press the shelf release latch, and push the shelf to the operating position. Ensure that the latch is
engaged.
3. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-2. Front Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (Rack)

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-11

Rear Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (A14 Frame)
See Figure 9-3.

Pull Device to Service Position

1. If you have not already done so, ensure that the device is varied offline at the host.
2. If the device is in a library, make the device unavailable at the library manager.
3. Open the rear door of the frame with the failing device.
4. Remove the two slide locking screws
1 from the failing device slides.
5. There are two latches on the slides:
a. Press the latches on the large slides
2, and pull the failing device to the rear until it stops.
b. Press the latches on the inner slides
3, and pull the device out until it latches in the service
position
4.
c. See “Operator/CE Panel Service Position” on page 9-25 to put the panel in the service position.
6. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Return Device to Operating Position

1. Return the operator/CE panel to the operating position.
2. When returning the device to the operating position:
a. Press the latches on the inner slides and push the device toward the operating position until it
stops.
b. Press the latches on the large slides and push the device to the operating position.
3. Reinstall the two slide locking screws into the slides.
4. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-3. Rear Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (A14 Frame)

9-12 IBM 3590 MI

Rear Serviced without ACF, Model B1A/E1A/H1A (3494 Library)
See Figure 9-4.

Pull Device to Service Position

1. If not already done, ensure that the device is varied offline at the host.
2. If the device is in a library, make the device unavailable at the library manager.
3. Open the rear door of the frame.
4. Remove the two slide locking screws
2.
5. Press the slide latches
1 and pull the device to the rear until it is locked in the service position
3.
6. See “Operator/CE Panel Service Position” on page 9-25 to put the panel in the service position.
7. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Return Device to Operating Position

1. Return the operator/CE panel to the operating position.
2. Press the slide latches and push the device to the operating position.
3. Reinstall the two slide locking screws
2 into the slides.
4. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-4. Rear Serviced without ACF - Model B1A/E1A/H1A (3494)

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-13

Prepare Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, or H11/H1A in Desk Side Sleeve for
Service
1. Notify the customer that the failing device must be varied offline, as the power must be removed from
the device.
After the device is offline, proceed with the following steps.
2. Power OFF the failing device by using the power switch on the back of the drive enclosure. See
8 in
Figure 9-6 on page 9-16 for location of the power switch.

Note: Do not use magnetized tools on this drive!

3. Remove the power cord from the 3590 drive.
v For service on Model B11/E11/H11 in the “older style” desk side cover without the removable
top, go to “Prepare Model B11/E11 in Desk Side Cover for Service (RPQ 8B3191), or Model
B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200)”.
v For service on Model B1A/E1A/H1A in the “older style” desk side cover without the removable
top, go to “Prepare Model B1A/E1A in Desk Side Cover for Service (RPQ 8B3190)” on page 9-18.
v For service on Model B11/E11/H11 in the newer desk side sleeve with removable sleeve top
cover, go to “Prepare Model B11/E11 in Desk Side Sleeve (Removable Top Cover) for Service
(RPQ 8B3191), or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200)” on page 9-20.
v For service on Model B1A/E1A/H1A in the newer desk side sleeve with removable sleeve top
cover, go to “Prepare Model B1A/E1A in Desk Side Sleeve (Removable Top Cover) for Service
(RPQ 8B3190)” on page 9-22.

Prepare Model B11/E11 in Desk Side Cover for Service (RPQ 8B3191),
or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200)
Notes:
1. This notice is translated into selected languages. See C1 in Chapter 7, “Inspection” on page 7-1.
2. This procedure must be used if the drive is in the “old style” desk side sleeve without the removable
sleeve top cover.

CAUTION:
The 3590 Model B11/E11/H11 with the ACF weighs 40.5 kilograms (89 pounds), so remove the ACF
before lifting the 3590 drive. The 3590 Model B11/E11/H11 (without the ACF) weighs 28.6 kilograms
(63 pounds); it takes two persons to safely lift this unit!
__ 1. Remove the SCSI cable connectors from the back of the drive. Do not separate the terminator or
the daisy-chained cable connector from the SCSI cable connector. Remove these connectors still
plugged together.
__ 2. If a FID or ATTN message is available for the failure, go to “FID Entry Point” on page 1-8 to
determine if it is an ACF failure. Then decide if removal of the ACF and drive from the desk side
cover is warranted. If the ACF can be serviced while attached to the sleeve, remove the ACF
cover
6 in Figure 9-6 on page 9-16 from the ACF and skip to step 11 on page 9-15. Otherwise,
continue with the next step.
__ 3. Refer to Figure 9-6 on page 9-16. Remove the eight screws
5 and eight washers
12 from the
desk side cover 1, four screws and washers from each side of the sleeve to allow removal of the
drive for service.
__ 4. Remove the ACF cover
6 from the ACF.
__ 5. Pull the drive forward slightly in the sleeve to allow removal of the ACF.
__ 6. Go to “Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33 and start at step 4 to remove the ACF.
After completing the procedure, return here. Place the removed ACF on a suitable work surface,
where the drive also will be placed for service.

9-14 IBM 3590 MI

 Note: You may need assistance holding the drive enclosure in place on the work surface while
mounting the ACF to the front of the drive.

Note: See Figure 9-5 for safe placement of the drive and ACF, when the ACF is reattached to the
drive for servicing the device. Ensure the drive
2 is placed on the work surface
1to
avoid the risk of tipping forward or falling off the work surface
3 due to the added
weight of the ACF.

Do not mount the ACF on the drive if the front of the drive protrudes by more than 38 mm
(1.5 in.)
4 over the edge of the work surface.

Figure 9-5. Side View of Model B11/E11/H11 Drive and ACF on Workbench

__ 7. Refer to Figure 9-6 on page 9-16.

__ 8. With assistance, pull the drive out of the desk side sleeve
1 and lift it up to a suitable work
surface.
__ 9. Ensure that the loader door moves freely.
__ 10. Go to step 3 on page 8-19 to install the ACF. Return here after completing the procedure.
Remember to not exceed the maximum dimension of 38 mm (1.5 in.)
4, as shown in Figure 9-5.
__ 11. If a FID or ATTN message is available for the problem, go to “FID Entry Point” on page 1-8.
__ 12. If a FID is not available, return to Table 1-1 on page 1-2 to find the cause of the B11 failure.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-15

 B1135901
Figure 9-6. Desk Side Cover Installation for Model B11/E11 ( RPQ 8B3191), or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200)

Return Model B11/E11/H11 Drive to Desk Side Sleeve

__ 1. If the drive and ACF were not removed from the desk side sleeve, skip to step 11 on page 9-17.
Otherwise, continue to the next step.
__ 2. Go to “Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33, and start at step 4 on page 9-33 to
remove the ACF from the drive. After completing the procedure, return here.
__ 3. Refer to Figure 9-6. With assistance, lift the 3590 drive (without the ACF attached), from the work
surface and slide it into the front of the sleeve
1.
Notes:
a. The rear of the sleeve is indicated by the label and opening
8 on top of the cover for the
drive’s power ON/OFF switch.
b. When sliding the 3590 drive into the desk side cover, ensure you push the drive into the
sleeve far enough to keep the desk side cover from tipping forward!
__ 4. Leave the front of the drive protruding just enough to allow inserting a screw
16 P/N 1621371,
into the right or left screw hole on the drive enclosure closest to the front of the drive. Only turn
the screw two or three revolutions, just enough to assure the screw is seated solidly.
__ 5. Now continue to push the drive into the sleeve until the protruding screw stops further movement.
The drive is now in position for installation of the ACF.
__ 6. Check the loader door moves freely.
__ 7. Go to step 3 on page 8-19 to install the ACF. Complete the procedure and return here.
__ 8. With the ACF installed, pull the drive forward carefully until you have access to the screw,
previously inserted to stop movement of the drive within the sleeve. Remove the screw and save it
with the other seven screws.
__ 9. Push the device back into sleeve until the ACF is flush to the sleeve.
__ 10. Install the eight screws
5 and eight washers
12 to bolt the drive to the desk side cover. Snug
the screws to secure the drive.

9-16 IBM 3590 MI

__ 11. Place the ACF cover
6 over the ACF.
__ 12. Reinstall the SCSI cable connectors to the correct port.
__ 13. Reconnect the power cord to the drive power connector.
__ 14. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-17

 Prepare Model B1A/E1A in Desk Side Cover for Service (RPQ 8B3190)
CAUTION:
| The 3590 Model B1A/E1A weighs 28.6 kilograms (63 pounds); it takes two persons to safely lift this
| unit.
Notes:
| 1. This caution notice is translated into selected languages. See C2 in Chapter 7, “Inspection” on
| page 7-1.
2. This procedure must be used if the B1A drive is in the “old style” desk side sleeve without the
removable sleeve top cover.

See Figure 9-7 for removal of the B1A drive from the desk side sleeve
1.
__ 1. Remove the SCSI cable connectors from the back of the drive. Do not separate the terminator or
the daisy-chained cable connector from the SCSI cable connector. Remove these connectors still
plugged together.
__ 2. Remove the eight screws
10 and washers
10, four screws and washers from each side of the
sleeve to allow removal of the drive for service.

Note: When sliding the 3590 drive out of the desk side cover, be sure to provide enough support to
the front of the drive to keep the desk side cover from tipping forward!
__ 3. With assistance, lift the B1A drive (with front cover
3) out of the desk side sleeve
1 and place
it on a suitable work surface. Ensure the drive is positioned safely on the work surface to avoid
any danger of tipping off the workbench.
__ 4. If a FID is available for the problem, go to “FID Entry Point” on page 1-8.
__ 5. If a FID is not available, return to Table 1-1 on page 1-2 to find the reason of the B1A failure.

B1A35902

Figure 9-7. Desk Side Cover Installation for Model B1A/E1A, RPQ 8B3190

9-18 IBM 3590 MI

Return Model B1A/E1A Drive to Desk Side Sleeve
See Figure 9-7 on page 9-18 for this procedure to reinstall the drive in the desk side cover.
__ 1. With assistance pick up the drive (with attached front cover) from the test/work area and slide the
drive into the sleeve
1. Slide the rear of the device to the rear of the desk side sleeve
1. The
rear of the sleeve is indicated by the label and opening
9 for the drive’s power ON/OFF switch.

Note: When sliding the 3590 drive into the desk side cover, be sure to push the drive into the
sleeve far enough to keep the desk side cover from tipping forward!
__ 2. Push the device into the sleeve until the front cover 3 is flush to the sleeve.
__ 3. Install the eight screws
10 and washers
10, four screws and washers on each side of the
sleeve to bolt the drive to the desk side cover. Snug the screws to secure the drive in the cover.
__ 4. Reconnect the SCSI cable plugs to the correct SCSI port connectors.
__ 5. Reconnect the power cable to the drive power connector.
__ 6. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-19

 Prepare Model B11/E11 in Desk Side Sleeve (Removable Top Cover) for
Service (RPQ 8B3191), or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200)
Note: Use this procedure if the drive is in the “new style” desk side sleeve with the removable sleeve
top cover.

See Figure 9-8 for removal of the sleeve top cover
1 from the desk side lower sleeve.
__ 1. Remove the eight screws
19, P/N 05H2734, four screws from each side of the desk side sleeve
top cover to allow removal of the sleeve top cover.
__ 2. Remove the sleeve top cover
1 to allow service on the Model B11/E11/H11 drive.
__ 3. If necessary, remove the SCSI cable connectors from the back of the drive. Do not separate the
terminator or the daisy-chained cable connector from the SCSI cable connector. Remove these
connectors still plugged together.
__ 4. If a FID is available for the problem, go to “FID Entry Point” on page 1-8.
__ 5. If a FID is not available, return to Table 1-1 on page 1-2 to find the reason for the failure.

|
| Figure 9-8. Desk Side Sleeve Configuration for Model B11/E11 (RPQ 8B3191), or Model B11/E11/H11 (FC 2200)

9-20 IBM 3590 MI

Reinstall Sleeve Top Cover to Desk Side Sleeve
See Figure 9-8 on page 9-20 to reinstall the sleeve top cover over the B11 drive in the desk side sleeve.
__ 1. Place the desk side sleeve top cover
1, P/N 05H8347, over the mounted drive (enclosure) and on
top of the lower sleeve
18, P/N 05H8348. A ridge in the sides of the top cover allows the top
cover to rest on top of the lower sleeve with the lip of the top cover on the outside of the lower
sleeve sides.
__ 2. Reinstall the eight screws
19, P/N 05H2734, four screws on each side of the sleeve top cover.
Snug the screws to secure the sleeve top cover to the lower sleeve.

Note: The rear of the sleeve top cover is indicated by the label and opening
8 for the drive’s
power ON/OFF switch.
__ 3. Reconnect the SCSI cable plugs to the correct SCSI port connectors.
__ 4. Reconnect the power cable to the drive power connector.
__ 5. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-21

Prepare Model B1A/E1A in Desk Side Sleeve (Removable Top Cover)
for Service (RPQ 8B3190)
Note: Use this procedure if the drive is in the “new style” desk side sleeve with the removable sleeve
top cover.

See Figure 9-9 for removal of the sleeve top cover
1 from the desk side lower sleeve.
__ 1. Remove the eight screws
18, P/N 05H2734, four screws from each side of the desk side sleeve
top cover to allow removal of the sleeve top cover.
__ 2. Remove the sleeve top cover
1 to allow service on the Model B1A/E1A drive.
__ 3. If necessary, remove the SCSI cable connectors from the back of the drive. Do not separate the
terminator or the daisy-chained cable connector from the SCSI cable connector. Remove these
connectors still plugged together.
__ 4. If a FID is available for the problem, go to “FID Entry Point” on page 1-8.
__ 5. If a FID is not available, return to Table 1-1 on page 1-2 to find the reason of the B1A failure.

Figure 9-9. Desk Side Sleeve Configuration for Model B1A/E1A, RPQ 8B3190

9-22 IBM 3590 MI

Reinstall Sleeve Top Cover to Desk Side Sleeve
See Figure 9-9 on page 9-22 to reinstall the sleeve top cover over the drive in the desk side sleeve.
__ 1. Place the desk side sleeve top cover
1, P/N 05H8347, over the mounted drive (enclosure) and on
top of the lower sleeve
17, P/N 05H8348. A ridge in the sides of the top cover allows the top
cover to rest on top of the lower sleeve with the lip of the top cover on the outside of the lower
sleeve sides.
__ 2. Reinstall the eight screws
18, P/N 05H2734, four screws on each side of the sleeve top cover.
Snug the screws to secure the sleeve top cover to the lower sleeve.

Note: The rear of the sleeve top cover is indicated by the label and opening
9 for the drive’s
power ON/OFF switch.
__ 3. Reconnect the SCSI cable plugs to the correct SCSI port connectors.
__ 4. Reconnect the power cable to the drive power connector
__ 5. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts

See Figure 9-10 on page 9-24. When wearing the ESD grounding wrist band
1, ensure that the ground
clip
4 remains connected. Failure to do this creates a safety exposure, the same as wearing jewelry
while working on live exposed electrical circuits.

Use the most current IBM part number available when ordering a field ESD kit. In addition to the mat, the
kit P/N 93F2649 contains the following components in a reclosable static-shielding bag:
v Adjustable wrist band P/N 6405959
1
v Wrist band cord P/N 74F9658
2
v Mat cord P/N 93F2652
3
v Large ground clip P/N 93F2654
4
v Cord extension P/N 93F2653
5

All of the logic cards and sensors in the ACF and the drive are ESD-sensitive parts in the 3590.

To prevent damage when working with ESD-sensitive parts, observe the following instructions, and the
instructions printed on the ESD mat. The following instructions are in addition to all the usual precautions:
v Switch OFF power to the 3590 (see “Powering Device ON and OFF” on page 9-6).
v Put on the ESD grounding wrist strap
1 before touching the ESD-sensitive part. This strap has a high
resistance (1 megohm) resistor in series with the grounding clip
4. Use of the ESD grounding wrist
strap is not dangerous to you. It discharges the static electricity from your body. Connect the clip to the
flex ground strap of the gate to the frame. Keep the strap on while you are inserting or removing a logic
card or handling any ESD-sensitive part.
v Keep ESD-sensitive parts in their special ESD shipping bag until ready for installation.
v Do not place ESD-sensitive parts on any machine cover or on a metal table. If you need to put down
the ESD-sensitive part for any reason, place it inside its protective shipping bag or on the ESD
grounded mat provided in the ESD kit. (Large metal objects can be discharge paths without being
grounded.)
v Prevent ESD-sensitive parts from being touched by other personnel.
v Reinstall all covers when not working on the machine.
v Be extra careful when handling ESD-sensitive parts during a period of cold-weather, building heating.
Heating of cold air lowers the relative humidity, which increases the static electricity.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-23

Figure 9-10. Static-Sensitive Device Attention Symbol and Grounding Wrist Strap

9-24 IBM 3590 MI

Operator/CE Panel Service Position
The operator/CE panel can be removed completely, tilted, or relocated for viewing from a different angle.

Model B11/E11/H11 Only

See Figure 9-11.

To Remove Completely
1. Press the two buttons
2 on the rear of the panel and lift the panel out of its holder
6.
2. Disconnect the connector from the rear of the panel
4.
3. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

To Relocate
1. With the ACF decorative cover removed, open the ACF top cover
1. See “ACF Top Cover” on
page 9-31.
2. Press the two buttons
2 on the rear of the panel and lift the panel out of its holder
6.
3. Continue lifting the panel until its cable is out of the slot
5 in the back of the bezel.
4. The two hooks
3 on the back of the operator/CE panel can be used to hold the panel in a
convenient location for viewing
4.

Note: Be careful to not pinch the cables when you lower the top cover.
5. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-11. Operator/CE Panel (Model B11/E11/H11)

End of Model B11/E11/H11 Only

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-25

 Model B1A/E1A/H1A Only

See Figure 9-12.

To Remove Completely
1. Press the two buttons
3 on the rear of the panel and lift the panel out of its holder
4.
2. Disconnect the connector from the rear of the panel
2.
3. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

To Relocate
1. Press the two buttons
3 on the rear of the panel and lift the panel out of its holder
4.
2. Place the panel on a flat surface or use the two hooks
1 on the back of the operator/CE panel to
hold the panel in a convenient location for viewing.
3. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-12. Operator/CE Panel (Model B1A/E1A/H1A)

End of Model B1A/E1A/H1A Only

9-26 IBM 3590 MI

Covers

Deck Enclosure Covers

See Figure 9-13 on page 9-28 and Figure 9-14 on page 9-28.

Removing Deck Enclosure Top Cover

1. Loosen and remove the four top screws
2.
2. Lift off the top cover
1.
3. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Removing Deck Enclosure Back Cover

1. Disconnect the power cord at its source and then at the back of the 3590.
2. Remove the two screws
4 that secure the back cover
3.
3. Slide the cover toward the rear of the drive to disengage the two hooks
5 and lift off the back cover.
4. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Removing Deck Enclosure Pneumatic Access Cover

1. Remove screw
11.
2. Remove the pneumatic access cover
10.
3. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Removing Deck Enclosure Back Plate

1. Remove the SCSI or fibre channel cables from the ports.
v SCSI – Be careful that you do NOT separate the cables that are chain-connected or terminated.
v Fibre – Use the rubber dust cover/plug to protect the connectors after the back plate has been
removed.
2. If the device is in a library, remove the library manager RS-422 cable.
Attention: If the connector mounting studs in the next step are captivated, remove the back plate
retainers before you remove the mounting studs.

Note: On newer devices, the connector mounting studs do not need to be removed from the back
plate.
3. On the early level back plates, remove the connector mounting studs (two each on the SCSI
connectors
7 and two on the library manager connector
8).
4. Remove the back plate
6 by prying upward from the lip on the enclosure bottom with a screwdriver.
Then lift out the back plate.

Note: Removal of the back plate may be easier if you first loosen or remove the card pack mounting
screw. (Be sure to reinstall and tighten it when you are through.)
5. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Replacing Deck Enclosure Covers

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.

Note: If you have removed the deck enclosure back covers from two 3590s, ensure you replace the
back cover on the 3590 from which it was removed so that the serial number
9 on the right
side of the device is the same as the serial number on the back cover
3.
2. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-27

Figure 9-13. Deck Enclosure Covers

Figure 9-14. Deck Enclosure Back Covers

9-28 IBM 3590 MI

ACF Decorative Cover (Rack Mount Only)
See Figure 9-15.

Removal and Replacement Procedures

Removing ACF Decorative Cover:
1. To lower the height of the display, slide the operator/CE panel assembly forward as far as it will go
1,
then rotate the display down as far as it will go
2.

Note: If there are two drives side-by-side, both operator/CE panels must be pulled forward and rotated
down.
2. The ACF decorative cover
4 is held to the rack frame with mounting studs
3
Grasp the ACF cover and pull it away from the frame and over the bezel. Use care not to loosen the
operator/CE panel connector when removing the cover.
3. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Replacing ACF Decorative Cover: Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return to
the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-15. ACF Decorative Cover (Rack Mount Only)

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-29

ACF Side Covers
See Figure 9-16.

Removal and Replacement Procedures

Removing Side Covers:

Note: On machines that have the improved transport ribbon cable, the cable that has no “Z” shape: Use
caution when removing the side covers as the transport ribbon cable will be attached to the inside
of one of the side plates. See “Replace Transport Cable” on page 10-31 and “Replace Transport
Cable” on page 10-33 for old and new style cables.
1. Remove the two screws
3 from the side cover
1.
2. Insert a screwdriver in the hole
2 at the bottom of the side cover.
Attention: In the next step, hold the cover as you disengage the tabs because the cover can fall
and cause damage.
3. Lift the side panel up to disengage the tabs from the frame and pull the panel out at the bottom.

Note: If the transport ribbon cable is attached to the inside of the side cover (newer systems), open
the cable retainers to release the cables from the side cover.
4. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Replacing Side Covers:

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-16. ACF Side Covers

9-30 IBM 3590 MI

ACF Top Cover
See Figure 9-17.

The ACF top cover is hinged.

1. Remove the ACF decorative cover. See page 9-29.
2. Insert the tip of a flat blade screwdriver at each edge of the cover
2 and pry the cover
1 open.
3. Swing the cover to its open position
3.
4. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-17. ACF Top Cover

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-31

Bezel (Model B11/E11/H11 Only)
See Figure 9-18.

Removal and Replacement Procedures

Removing Bezel:
1. Remove the magazine, if installed. See page 6-7.
2. Remove the operator/CE panel
2 by pressing the buttons
3 on the back of the operator/CE panel
and lifting the panel out of the holder.
3. Disconnect the panel cable connector
4.
4. Remove the screw
5 from the bezel. (The bezel
1 is held in place by a screw
5 at the top and
two hooks on the bottom.)
5. Pull the bezel away from the ACF far enough to gain access to the LED-card cable connectors
6.
Attention: The hooks at the bottom of the bezel can now disengage from the ACF. Use care not to
drop the bezel.
6. Carefully rotate the rear of the bezel to the left and disconnect the top, bottom, and then center
LED-card cable connectors
6 from the LED cards
7 and remove the bezel.
7. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Replacing Bezel:
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-18. ACF Bezel

9-32 IBM 3590 MI

Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF)

Removal and Replacement Procedures

Removing ACF
1. Have the customer vary the device offline, if not already done.
2. Remove the ACF decorative cover. See page 9-29.
3. Slide the device into service position. See “Front Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (Rack)” on
page 9-11 or “Rear Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (A14 Frame)” on page 9-12.
4. Remove the magazine, if present. See page 6-7.
5. Remove cartridge if present. See “Manual Cartridge Removal” on page 9-37.
6. Power OFF the device. See “Powering Device ON and OFF” on page 9-6.
7. Remove the left side cover, if not obstructed by another device; otherwise, remove the right side
cover. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.
8. See Figure 9-19 on page 9-34. Disconnect the two cables
2 from the ACF to the deck enclosure.
9. Loosen the thumb screw
1 on the upper-left-rear of the ACF.

ACF side covers are not permanently attached. Use other points to lift the ACF.

Note: Before lifting the ACF, ensure that the side covers are secured by two screws at the bottom
tabs. Side covers can slide off if the screws are not present.
10. Lift the ACF up and pull away from the deck enclosure.

Replacing ACF
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-33

Figure 9-19. ACF and Deck Enclosure

9-34 IBM 3590 MI

Display Sensors Procedure
This procedure is used to display the dynamic settings of the ACF and drive sensors. A delay of
approximately one second is required for the sensor to change state. The Disp Sensor menu and routine
may be accessed from the Figure 5-8 on page 5-17, then select UTILITIES then DISP SENSORS.
Table 9-1 summarizes the Sense routine menu, the meaning of each menu item, and one or more
suggested methods to test each sensor.

Before you continue, it may be easier to remove some access covers. See “Removing Deck Enclosure
Top Cover” on page 9-27 and “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.

Note: Static values shown are the default values that existed on a test Model B11/E11/H11, with no
cartridges loaded in the drive and just after completion of POST. Your machine, if in a different
environment, may show different starting static values.
Table 9-1. ACF and Drive Sensors Menu Display, Meanings, and Test Methods
Menu Display Meaning & How to Test
YCANCEL Select to cancel routine
A:1 B:0 Tape path A and B sensors (Drive Path).
1. For tape path A sensor, slowly move the tape threader arm CCW a short distance until the
sensor changes state. Move it back slowly until it returns to the original state.
2. For tape path B sensor, slowly move the tape threader arm CCW all the way around to near the
end of rotation and watch for the B sensor to change state. After it changes state, move the
tape threader in the opposite direction to have it return to the original state.
3. When this sensor test is completed, return the tape thread arm to its original position.
Note: Move the arm slowly and without forcing it to keep from damaging the drive.
TU:1 DO:0 Loader tray up, door open sensors (Drive Loader).
1. To exercise the loader tray up sensor, place your hand on the loader drive gear located at the
top-left of the drive, and rotate the gear toward the front of the machine. This should move the
loader in and down and cause the loader tray up sensor to change state. Reverse the direction
of the gear rotation to move the loader back up to make the sensor return to its original state.
2. To exercise the door open sensor, use your hand to open and close the loader door while
observing the door open sensor indication.
CP:1 Loader cartridge-present sensor (Drive Loader).
Note: Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in
the area of the strain relief clamp, see “FID CD: Cartridge-Present Sensor” on page 10-101
6.
Verify the sensor operation by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure”. If the
cable is bad, replace the Loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.

Manually move the loader in and down by rotating the loader drive gear located at the top left of
the drive. Rotate the gear toward the front of the machine until the loader is back far enough for
you to reach in and move the loader cartridge present sensor flag. Move the flag toward the back
of the drive to change state, and toward the front to return to the original state. When the loader
cartridge present sensor test is complete, return the loader to its original position (up and forward).
FP:0 CT:0000 Loader file protect, cartridge type sensors (Drive Loader).
1. To exercise the file protect sensor, rotate the loader drive gear toward the front of the machine
to move the loader in and down. As you near the bottom of travel, observe the file protect
sensor indication. It should change its indication. Move the loader back up and the sensor
should return to its original indication.
2. To exercise the four cartridge type sensors, reach into the drive, and press each sensor flag
located just below the drive door. Observe the sensors as they change state.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-35

Table 9-1. ACF and Drive Sensors Menu Display, Meanings, and Test Methods (continued)
Menu Display Meaning & How to Test
PS:0 MP:1 Priority cell, magazine present, magazine locked sensors (ACF Transport).
ML:0 1. Place a cartridge in and out of the priority slot while observing the sensor indication.
2. Raise and lower the magazine handle and observe the sense indication.
3. Lock and unlock the magazine by depressing and releasing the magazine lock pushbutton.
Note: If an ATTN ACF message appears, press Enter to clear the message.
GI:0 GCP:0 Global interference, global cartridge-present sensors (ACF Transport). Reach through the
magazine opening on the front of the ACF and block the global interference path. The sensor
should change state. Use the same procedure for the global cartridge-present sensor.
P1:0 P2:0 IM:0 ACF pinch 1 & 2, import sensors (ACF Transport).
1. For pinch 1 and 2, carefully rotate the square pinch shaft counterclockwise until both sensors
change state. Carefully rotate the shaft clockwise to return it to its original position (no pinch
condition).
Note: If the pinch cams are left in a pinch condition, the elevator may be difficult to raise and
lower for later tests.
2. For import, export, limit 1 and limit 2 sensors, move the elevator to an empty slot in the
magazine, insert a scratch cartridge and rotate the square feed shaft (on the left) in a CCW
direction while pushing the cartridge into the drive slot. The cartridge should move slowly
toward the drive slot. Next, carefully rotate the square pinch shaft CCW to pinch the cartridge,
and continue to rotate the square feed shaft to move the cartridge into the drive. Rotating the
two square shafts in the appropriate directions, move the cartridge back and forth and observe
the four sensors as they change state. An alternate method is to move the cartridge into the
drive slot, then move the square pinch shaft until there is no pinch condition. Then, move the
cartridge back and forth with your fingers and a flat ruler reaching through the ACF slot.
Note: Do not force the pinch or feed shafts as this may damage the ACF.
L1:0 L2:0 EX:0 Limit 1 & 2, export sensors (ACF Transport). See the import sensor procedure above.
A:1 B:1 ACF transport-position sensors (A & B) (ACF Transport). Manually move the elevator up and
down and observe the two sensors.
Note: Both sensors are molded into the same part.
SN:0 Gripper-present sensor (Model B1A/E1A/H1A Drive Loader—library attached only). This sensor is
only on library versions (B1A/E1A/H1A). To exercise this sensor, block the opening for the gripper
present sensor card. The sensor should change states.

9-36 IBM 3590 MI

Manual Cartridge Removal
Note: Find out if the cartridge contains critical customer data. The following removal procedures can
destroy customer data! Use extreme care when handling the customer’s tape to minimize tape
damage and lost data.

Attention: Do Not Touch the magnetic tape or tape path. They are extremely sensitive to the oil and
salt from your skin.
v Use care when handling or removing the magnetic tape. The customer may want to try to recover the
data from the cartridge.
v Use lint-free nylon gloves P/N 461621 when working around magnetic tape or the tape path
components.

Read/write errors can occur where fingerprints have contaminated the magnetic tape surface. When the
tape is contaminated, in either the data or non-data area of the tape, the oil and salt will eventually migrate
to and cause corrosion to the read/write head. Any contamination may cause replacement of the head
guide assembly.

The purpose of this section is to assist you to determine the condition of the cartridge or the magnetic tape
and to direct you to the procedure you must follow to remove the cartridge.

Before You Begin

If you have not already done so, attempt to remove the cartridge with power ON the device.
1. Position the device to the service position. See “Service Position” on page 9-11 and follow the
procedure. Return here after the device is in the service position.
2. Display the Options menu on the operator/CE panel.
3. Select Unload Drive from the Options menu, and press Enter. The cartridge should unload and return
to the priority cell or to the magazine.

Note: It can take up to five minutes for the cartridge to rewind and unload.
4. If the cartridge unloads, inform the operator that the cartridge is unloaded and return to the procedure
that sent you here.
5. If the cartridge did not unload and:
v The failing device is in a library, continue with “Identifying Cartridge and Tape Condition”.
or
v The failing device is not in a library, continue with the following:
a. Remove the ACF decorative cover. See page 9-29.
b. Press the shelf release latch for the shelf with the failing device and pull the shelf to the service
position. See “Front Serviced with ACF, Model B11/E11/H11 (Rack)” on page 9-11 for the release
latch location.
c. Continue with “Identifying Cartridge and Tape Condition”.

Identifying Cartridge and Tape Condition

Perform the following steps to determine the cartridge and tape condition:
1. Ensure that the device is varied offline.
2. If the failing device has an ACF, remove the magazine.
3. Switch OFF power to the failing device at the back of the device power supply. See Figure 9-1 on
page 9-7 for location of power switch.
4. Remove the deck enclosure top cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-37

5. Inspect the drive for the cartridge and tape conditions shown on pages 9-38 through 9-40. Match the
cartridge and the tape condition with the next examples and follow the directions in that example.

Example 1: Leader Block Separated From Magnetic Tape

See Figure 9-20.

If the leader block
1 is separated from the magnetic tape
2, as shown in this example, perform the
“Leader Block Separated From Magnetic Tape” on page 9-45.

Figure 9-20. Example of Leader Block Separated From Magnetic Tape

Example 2: Magnetic Tape Pulled Out of Cartridge

See Figure 9-21.

If the magnetic tape
2 has pulled out of the cartridge and has wound onto the machine reel
1, perform
the “Magnetic Tape Attachment Procedure” on page 9-46.

Figure 9-21. Example of Magnetic Tape Pulled Out of Cartridge

9-38 IBM 3590 MI

Example 3: Leader Block and Threader Pin in Machine Reel Hub
See Figure 9-22.

If the leader block
1 and threader pin
2 are in the machine reel hub
3 and will not disengage from
the hub, perform the procedure “Leader Block and Threader Pin in Machine Reel Hub” on page 9-41.

Figure 9-22. Example of Leader Block and Threader Pin in Machine Reel Hub

Example 4: Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in Tape Path

See Figure 9-23.

If the leader block
2 and the threader pin
1 have stopped in the tape path
3 between the machine
reel hub
4 and the loader assembly
5, perform the procedure “Leader Block and Threader Pin
Stopped in Tape Path” on page 9-43.

Figure 9-23. Example of Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in Tape Path

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-39

Example 5: Leader Block and Threader Pin at Loader
See Figure 9-24.

If the leader block and the threader pin
1 are at the loader assembly
2 (home position), and the
cartridge does not unload, perform the procedure “Leader Block and Threader Pin at Loader Assembly” on
page 9-44.

Figure 9-24. Example of Leader Block and Threader Pin at Cartridge Loader Assembly

Example 6: Operation Stopped with Tape on Machine Reel

See Figure 9-25.

If the operation has stopped with tape
2 on the machine reel
1, perform the procedure “Leader Block
and Threader Pin in Machine Reel Hub” on page 9-41.

Figure 9-25. Example of Operation Stopped with Tape on Machine Reel

9-40 IBM 3590 MI

Example 7: Magnetic Tape Broken in Data Area
See Figure 9-26.

If the tape has broken somewhere in the data area
1, part of the tape
3 will be on the machine reel

2 and the remainder will be attached to the tape cartridge in the loader assembly
4. The data on the
tape cannot be saved, perform the procedure “Magnetic Tape Broken in Data Area” on page 9-48.

Figure 9-26. Example of Magnetic Tape Broken Somewhere in Data Area

Example 8: Cartridge Jammed in Loader or Transport

See Figure 9-27.

If the cartridge is jammed in either the drive loader assembly
1 or the ACF transport assembly
2
perform the procedure “Manual Unloading Loader or Transport (Model B11/E11/H11)” on page 9-49

Figure 9-27. Example of Cartridge Jammed in Loader or Transport

Leader Block and Threader Pin in Machine Reel Hub

Perform the following steps to remove the cartridge when the leader block and the threader pin are in the
machine reel hub.
1. See Figure 9-28 on page 9-42. Attach the tape removal tool
1 P/N 6850663 to your socket wrench
handle
2.
2. Insert the tape removal tool through the hole in the bottom of the drive enclosure, and onto the file
reel motor shaft
3.
3. Turn the tool clockwise (view from the top) to wind the tape into the cartridge.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-41

 Attention: Do not touch the magnetic tape. Finger prints contaminate the tape and can affect tape
guiding. If the machine reel motor binds so that the file reel motor cannot move the tape, place your
finger on the machine reel hub
6.
4. Move the hub counterclockwise, and at the same time turn the file reel motor shaft clockwise to move
the tape.
5. Turn the hub until the file reel motor is free. Continue to turn the hub until the leader block
5 can
leave the machine reel hub, as shown.
6. Rotate the pantocam arm at its pivot point
4 clockwise while you rotate the file reel motor shaft
clockwise until the leader block is in the cartridge. (The threader pin
7 rotates the detent lever
8
as the leader block latches into the cartridge.)
7. Check the hub alignment (see “Replace Pantocam” on page 10-86).
8. Remove the ACF from the drive. See page 9-33.
9. Rotate the loader drive gear
9 (toward the rear) until the cartridge can be removed. Give the
cartridge to the customer.
10. Reattach the ACF to the drive.
11. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-28. Leader Block and Threader Pin in Machine Reel Hub

9-42 IBM 3590 MI

Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in Tape Path
Perform the following steps to remove the cartridge by hand when the leader block and the threader pin
have stopped in the tape path between the machine reel hub and the loader assembly.
1. See Figure 9-29. Attach the tape removal tool
1 (P/N 6850663) to your socket wrench handle
2.
2. Insert the tape removal tool through the hole in the bottom of the drive enclosure, and onto the file reel
motor shaft
3
Attention: Do not touch the magnetic tape. Finger prints contaminate the tape and can affect tape
guiding.
3. Rotate the pantocam arm from its pivot point
4 in a clockwise direction. At the same time, rotate the
file reel motor shaft clockwise (as seen from the top of the drive) to wind the tape into the cartridge.
4. Continue winding the tape into the cartridge.
The threader pin
5 will rotate the detent lever
6 as the leader block latches into the cartridge.
5. Remove the ACF from the drive. See “Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33 for removal
procedure.
6. Rotate the loader drive gear
7 (toward the rear) until the cartridge can be removed. Give the
cartridge to the customer.
7. Reattach the ACF to the drive.
8. Continue the repair action by returning to the procedure that sent your here.

Figure 9-29. Leader Block and Threader Pin Stopped in Tape Path

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-43

Leader Block and Threader Pin at Loader Assembly
See Figure 9-30. The threader pin
2 or
6 can be at one of two positions at the loader assembly.
Perform the appropriate procedure for the position in which the threader pin stopped:
v The threader pin
2 has engaged the detent lever
3, but the detent lever has not rotated clockwise to
latch the leader block into the cartridge. Note the position of the lever to the stop pin
4. Go to step 1
to remove the cartridge.
Or,
v The threader pin
6 has engaged and rotated the detent lever
7 against its stop pin
5 and the
leader block is latched in the cartridge. Go to step 5 to remove the cartridge.
1. Attach the tape removal tool
11 (P/N 6850663) to your socket wrench handle
10.
2. Insert the tape removal tool through the hole in the bottom of the drive enclosure, and onto the file reel
motor shaft
9.
3. Rotate the pantocam arm from its pivot point
1 clockwise just far enough to rotate the detent lever
against its stop and latch the leader block into the cartridge. At the same time, rotate the file reel motor
shaft clockwise (as seen from the top of the drive) to take up the slack in the tape.
4. Remove the ACF from the drive. See “Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33 for removal
procedure.
5. Rotate the loader drive gear
8 (toward the rear) until the cartridge can be removed. Give the
cartridge to the customer.
6. Reattach the ACF to the drive.
7. Continue the repair action by returning to the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-30. Leader Block and Threader Pin at Loader Assembly

9-44 IBM 3590 MI

Leader Block Separated From Magnetic Tape
Note: To save the data on the tape, the leader block must be replaced. Replacement of the leader block
is the customers responsibility. Notify the customer the leader block must be replaced, if it is
necessary to save the data in the cartridge.

Attention: Do not touch the magnetic tape while removing the cartridge. Fingerprints may cause
read/write errors and the contamination may migrate, causing corrosion to the head.

Use this procedure only when data must be copied to another cartridge. The use of this procedure can
affect the performance of the leader block during threading and unloading operations. Recommend that
the customer destroy the cartridge after the data is copied.

The use of any tool to remove the customer’s tape can cause damage to the tape.

Do not damage the edges of the tape because edge damage can affect tape guiding.

Inform the customer before you continue with this procedure. Removing the Cartridge and Leader Block

See Figure 9-31.

1. Remove the leader block
2 from the threader pin
1.
2. Rotate the top of the loader gear
4 toward the back of the 3590. The loader mechanism raises the
cartridge up and moves it toward the front. Continue rotating the gear until the cartridge stops moving.
3. Carefully remove the cartridge, being careful not to damage the edges of the tape
3.
4. Give the cartridge and leader block to the customer.

Note: Inform the customer that the tape must not be touched without the use of protective gloves.
5. Continue the repair action by returning to the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-31. Removing Cartridge Exhibiting Separated Leader Block

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-45

Magnetic Tape Attachment Procedure
Perform the following steps when the end of the magnetic tape has pulled out of the cartridge and has
wound onto the machine reel.

Attention: Use this procedure only when data must be copied to another cartridge. The use of this
procedure can affect the performance of the leader block during threading and unloading operations.
Recommend the customer destroy the cartridge after the data is copied.

The use of any tool to remove the customer’s tape can cause damage to the tape.

Do not damage the edges of the tape because edge damage can affect tape guiding.

Touching the magnetic tape while performing this procedure is unavoidable. Use extreme care and do not
touch the tape any further then 75 mm (3 in.) from the end of the tape. Oil from your fingers may damage
the tape and can migrate to other parts of the 3590 drive.

Inform the customer before you continue with this procedure. See Figure 9-32 on page 9-47
1. Pull the tape by hand along the tape path until it is at the opening to the cartridge.

Note: If the machine reel motor binds and does not allow the tape to move, place your finger on the
machine reel hub
4 and rotate the hub counterclockwise. At the same time move the
magnetic tape.
2. Attach a 50 mm (2 in.) piece of double-stick cellophane tape to the shiny side of the magnetic tape.
Leave a 25 mm (1 in.) overlap of cellophane tape.

Note: All lengths are approximate.

Attach the protruding end of the cellophane tape to the eraser end of a pencil or similar object.

Note: Ensure the cartridge in the loader is in the down (loaded) position.
3. Insert the pencil and the tape with the cellophane tape into the loader and the cartridge opening and
attach the cellophane tape to the cartridge hub
5. Remove the pencil without disturbing the
cellophane tape attached to the hub.
4. Attach the tape removal tool
1 (P/N 6850663) to your socket wrench handle
2.
5. Insert the tape removal tool through the hole in the bottom of the drive, and onto the file reel motor
shaft
3.
6. Turn the tool clockwise (as seen from the top of the drive) to wind the magnetic tape onto the
cartridge.

Note: If the cellophane tape pulls off the hub, attach the cellophane tape again.
7. Rotate the machine reel hub counterclockwise and at the same time rotate the file reel motor shaft
clockwise for several revolutions. Ensure that the tape is secured to the cartridge hub.
8. Switch ON the device power at the back of the device power supply.
9. The tape should automatically unload when power comes ON.
If the tape does not fully wind into the cartridge, request aid from your next level of support.
10. Remove the cartridge from the drive and give it to the customer.
11. Continue the repair action by returning to the procedure that sent you here.

9-46 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 9-32. Attaching Magnetic Tape

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-47

Magnetic Tape Broken in Data Area
Note: Find out if the cartridge contains critical customer data. If there is critical customer data on the
tape, contact your next level of support to minimize data-loss risk. Extreme care must be used to
minimize tape damage and loss of customer data. The following removal procedure will destroy
customer data!

Attention: Do Not Touch the magnetic tape or tape path. They are extremely sensitive to the oil and
salt from your skin.
v Use care when handling or removing the magnetic tape. The customer may want to try to recover the
data from the cartridge. Splicing the tape before removal of the cartridge may be necessary. Contact the
support center for the procedure.
v Use lint-free nylon gloves P/N 461621 when working around magnetic tape or the tape path
components.

The tape cannot be saved and must be removed from the tape path. Inform the customer the tape cannot
be spliced without contaminating the tape and drive. This will result in loss of data if they care to try to
recover the data. Read/write errors may occur where fingerprints have contaminated the magnetic tape
surface and the contamination can eventually migrate to and cause corrosion to the head. Any
contamination will cause replacement of the head guide assembly.

Inform the customer before you continue with this procedure.

Removing Destroyed Tape From Tape Path

See Figure 9-33.
1. Pull the tape
3 out of the machine reel
2 and into a suitable container.
2. When the tape is out of the machine reel, assist rotating the pantocam arm at its pivot point
1 in a
clockwise direction to move the leader block out of the machine reel.
3. Remove the leader block from the threader pin when the leader block is out of the reel and accessible.
4. Rotate the loader gear
4 toward the rear of the drive far enough to remove the cartridge. Give the
cartridge to the customer.
5. Give the cartridge and container of tape to the customer to be disposed of.
6. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-33. Removing Tape from Tape Path

9-48 IBM 3590 MI

Manual Unloading Loader or Transport (Model B11/E11/H11)
Perform the following steps to remove a jammed cartridge in either the drive loader or ACF transport.

If cartridge is in the loader, perform steps 1 through 5.

OR

If cartridge is in the transport assembly, perform steps 6 through 7.

See Figure 9-34.

1. If the tape cartridge is not completely in the loader, reach in through the priority cell and push the
cartridge all the way into the drive loader assembly.
2. Remove the ACF
3 from the drive. See “Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33.
3. Rotate the loader drive gear
2 (toward the rear) until the cartridge
1 is unloaded from the loader

4.
4. Manually remove the tape cartridge from the drive and give the cartridge to the customer.
5. Replace the ACF on the drive, then go to step 8.
See Figure 9-35 on page 9-50.
6. Reach up and behind the cartridge
1 in the transport assembly and push the cartridge forward
2
far enough to be removed from the priority cell
3.
7. Manually remove the tape cartridge from the ACF and give the cartridge to the customer.

Note: After retrieval of a cartridge check transport Limit-1 and Limit-2 sensors are not knocked loose
and still firmly seated. Refer to Figure 6-7 on page 6-11.
8. Continue the repair action by returning to the procedure that sent you here.

Figure 9-34. Removing Jammed Cartridge from Drive Loader

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-49

Figure 9-35. Removing Jammed Cartridge from ACF Transport

9-50 IBM 3590 MI

 Drive Serial Number
All 3590 microcode levels above D0IA_558, D0IB_910, D0ID_22A, or D0IE_32E will use the new ASCII
serial number procedure. Earlier level drives and microcode will use the old hexadecimal serial number
procedure. Perform the following steps to determine which procedure is correct for your drive.

Serial Number Change Procedure Determination

| Use this information to choose between the two serial number change procedures.
1. At the OPTIONS display screen, switch to CE mode by pressing the Mode Change pushbutton.
2. Use the ↓ to select PROCEED, and press Enter.
3. At the CE Options screen, use the ↓ to select CONFIG/INSTALL, and press Enter.
4. At the CE CONFIG/INSTALL screen, use the ↓ to select DRV OPTIONS, and press Enter.
5. At the CE DRV OPTIONS screen, use the ↓ to select DRV SERIAL NO, and press Enter.
6. At the CE DRV SER NO screen, use the ↓ to select ALTER SERIAL NO, and press Enter.
v If the current level serial number procedure is installed the display will show:

CE VPD DATA
CANCEL
0
0
0
X
X

where “X” represents the Hexadecimal 0 – F number field.

(The factory default for a new card pack is set to XXXXX.)

Continue with “Serial Number Change (Current Procedure)” on page 9-52.

v If the former level serial number procedure is installed the display will show:

VPD FIELD OFFSET

CANCEL
OFFSET VALUE
000 XX
001 XX
002 XX
003 XX

where 000 is the Offset and XX is the Value.

See Figure 9-36 on page 9-53 for example.
(The factory default for a new card pack is set to XXXXX.)

Continue with “Serial Number Change (Former Procedure)” on page 9-53.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-51

Serial Number Change (Current Procedure)
__ 1. If the displayed serial number needs to be changed, from the CE DRV SER NO screen select
ALTER SERIAL NO, and press Enter. The CE VPD DATA menu will be displayed, as follows:

CANCEL
0
0
0
X
X
X
X
X
SAVE AND CONTINUE

This menu displays the ASCII value for the last eight digits in the
VPD serial number field.
__ 2. Use the ↑ or ↓ buttons to select the digit to be changed.
__ 3. Press the Enter button to change the number. Continue to press the ENTER button to increment
from 0 to 1, 1 to 2, and so on. Eventually the number will wrap from F back to 0.
__ 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all of the digits are correct.
__ 5. Select SAVE AND CONTINUE, then press Enter. The CE SAVE DATA menu will appear.
__ 6. Select YES, then press Enter to save the changes. The CE DRV SER NO menu will appear.
__ 7. To confirm the changes, select DISP SERIAL NO, and press Enter.
__ 8. When the displayed serial number is correct, select CANCEL, and press Enter as many times as
necessary to return to the CE OPTIONS menu.
__ 9. To return to the OPTIONS screen, press the pushbutton, select PROCEED, and press Enter.

Note: The CE WAIT menu may appear momentarily while the new serial number data is written
into memory.

Note: You must have root authority to perform the following step.

pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Only

__ 10. Update the VPD data in the host pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System by unconfiguring the device
(Example: rmdev -l rmt3) and reconfiguring the device (Example: mkdev -l rmt3).
End of pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Only
__ 11. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

9-52 IBM 3590 MI

Serial Number Change (Former Procedure)
The VPD FIELD OFFSET menu appears, and the display shows the hex values for offsets 000 through
00B. Scroll the cursor up or down to see all of the offset locations. All of the VPD offset field data is
displayed and entered in hex.

The Serial Number Entry procedure varies depending upon the microcode level that is installed on the
3590 drive. If your drive has Link Level D0I9_6F9 or earlier, you should see data similar to that shown in
the example on the left hand side of Figure 9-36. The default ASCII value for that level of microcode is
SequenceNum. The hexadecimal value is X’53455155454E43454E554D00’. If your drive has Link Level
D0I9_7E6 or higher, such as D0IA or D0IB, you should see data similar to the example on the right hand
side of Figure 9-36. The default ASCII value for that level of microcode is 0000000XXXXX. The
hexadecimal value is X’303030303030305858585858’.

Both levels of defaults (in ASCII,
3, and hexadecimal,
2, are shown in Figure 9-36. Also shown are the
VPD Offset positions,
1, where the hexadecimal values are entered (after conversion by the CE from
ASCII to hexadecimal).

Note: The newer default value requires no entries by the CE for the first 7 positions of the VPD offset.
The CE only needs to enter data in the last 5 positions. This should save time when the serial
number must be re-entered.

Figure 9-36. Card Pack Drive Serial Number Factory Defaults

Use the following procedure to enter the drive serial number. The following example shows what entries
would be made if the serial number of the device were 12345. The CE should substitute the real S/N value
for the example shown.

Note: The 7 leading ASCII digits should always be zero in the new defaults, and when all data has been
overwritten on the old defaults.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-53

The example below shows how a typical five-digit (ASCII) serial number, SN 12345, is recorded in
hexadecimal. Note the first seven offsets, fields 000 through 006 should be set to hex 30 (ASCII 0), and
the serial number, once converted into hex, is entered in offsets 007 through 00B. (The first two letters of
the serial number, SN, are not entered.)
CANCEL CANCEL
ASCII Equivalent ASCII Equivalent
OFFSET VALUE (Old) (New) OFFSET VALUE (Final Value)
000 53 S 0 000 30 0
001 45 e 0 001 30 0
002 51 q 0 002 30 0
003 55 u 0 003 30 0
004 45 e 0 004 30 0
005 4E n 0 005 30 0
006 43 c 0 006 30 0
007 45 e x 007 31 1
008 4E N x 008 32 2
009 55 u x 009 33 3
00A 4D m x 00A 34 4
00B 00 Nul x 00B 35 5
1. Starting at offset 007, write down the drive serial number below or on paper. Using the conversion
chart in Table 9-3 on page 9-56, calculate the corresponding hexadecimal values.
Table 9-2. Serial Number Work Sheet
Serial Number VPD Offset Hex Value
0 000 30
0 001 30
0 002 30
0 003 30
0 004 30
0 005 30
0 006 30
007
008
009
00A
00B

2. You will be entering the serial number in three sections of four bytes (eight hex digits) each. Each
data byte contains two hex digits. For example, data byte 0 is equal to hex ’30’.
3. If your drive has the new default values (the first seven ASCII characters are all zero), you can review
the procedure, but you need not enter any data until you reach VPD offset 007.
4. If your drive has the old default values (the first seven ASCII characters are not all zeros), select
offset 000, and press Enter. The CE VPD DATA menu appears and the display shows, vertically, the
four bytes (eight hex digits) for offsets 000 through 003. Scroll the cursor up or down to see all eight
of the hex digits for these four offset locations. The actual screen image will look something like the
following:

9-54 IBM 3590 MI

 Note: The screen will show only one column of hexadecimal characters. Our examples will show
both old and new default versions for your convenience.
CANCEL
(OLD) (NEW)
5 3
3 0
4 3
5 0
5 3
1 0
5 3
5 0

If your drive has the older microcode installed, refer to the column on the left. If your drive has the
newer microcode installed, refer to the column on the right. If your drive has the old defaults, begin
entering at offset 000. If your drive has the new defaults, skip over offsets 000 through 006 (they
should already be set to ’30’ which equals ASCII 0,) and begin entering the serial number at offset
007.
5. The menu displays the first four bytes (eight digits) of the serial number vertically, as follows:
CANCEL
(OLD Defaults) (NEW Defaults)
Offset Hex ASCII Hex ASCII
000 5 3
3 = S 0 = 0
001 4 3
5 = e 0 = 0
002 5 3
1 = q 0 = 0
003 5 3
5 = u 0 = 0
6. These eight digits represent ASCII Sequ, the first four characters of the old default value
(SequenceNum0) or ASCII 0000, the first four characters of the new default value (0000000XXXXX).
7. Move the cursor to the first digit you want to change (if any), and press Enter.
8. The CE CHOOSE VALUE menu appears. This screen allows you to select the desired hex digit.
Select 3, and press Enter. The data is updated and the previous menu (CE VPD DATA) appears.
9. Move the cursor to the next digit to change, and press Enter.
10. The CE CHOOSE VALUE menu appears. Select 0, and press Enter. The data is updated and the
previous menu (CE VPD DATA) appears.
11. Repeat steps 7 through 10 until all eight digits are correct. It should look like this when completed:
CANCEL
3
0
3
0
3
0
3
0
12. When you have finished changing (or reviewing) the data in these four offset fields, select SAVE AND
CONTINUE. Select YES on the CE SAVE DATA? menu. This returns you to the CE DRV SER NO
menu.
13. At the CE DRV SER NO screen, use the ↓ to select ALTER SERIAL NO, and press Enter.
14. To enter the next eight hex digits, select DRV SERIAL NO, and press Enter. At the VPD FIELD
OFFSET menu, select 004. A screen much like the following will appear:
CANCEL
(OLD Defaults) (NEW Defaults)
Offset Hex ASCII Hex ASCII
004 4 3

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-55

 5 = e 0 = 0
005 4 3
E = n 0 = 0
006 4 3
3 = c 0 = 0
007 4 5
5 = e 8 = x
15. Repeat steps 7 on page 9-55 through 10 on page 9-55, alternating 3 and 0 for the next six digits.

Note: The last two digits that you enter in this section (offset 007) are the first two hex digits of the
serial number. In our example, ASCII “1” will be entered as Hex ‘31’.
16. When you have finished changing (or viewing) the data in these four offset fields, select SAVE AND
CONTINUE. Select YES on the CE SAVE DATA? menu.
17. At the CE DRV SER NO screen, use the ↓ to select ALTER SERIAL NO, and press Enter.
18. At the VPD FIELD OFFSET menu select 008. A screen much like the following will appear:
CANCEL
(OLD Defaults) (NEW Defaults)
Offset Hex ASCII Hex ASCII
008 4 5
E = N 8 = x
009 5 5
5 = u 8 = x
00A 4 5
D = m 8 = x
00B 0 5
0 = Null 8 = x
19. Repeat steps 7 on page 9-55 through 10 on page 9-55, beginning with offset 008 to enter the last
eight digits, but instead of entering 3s and 0s, enter the last four digits (eight hex digits) of the serial
number. In our example, ASCII “2345:” is entered as Hex ‘32333435’.
20. When you have finished changing the data in these four offset fields, select SAVE AND CONTINUE.
Select YES on the CE SAVE DATA? menu. This takes you back to the CE DRV SER NO menu.
21. To verify the serial number you entered is correct, select ALTER SERIAL NO, and press Enter. Scroll
through the VPD FIELD OFFSET menu to ensure the hex values you entered are accurate and
match the ones you wrote down. If you make any corrections, be sure to save the changes. Select
CANCEL, as necessary to return to CE OPTIONS menu.

22. To return to the OPTIONS screen, press the pushbutton, select PROCEED, and press Enter.

Note: The CE WAIT menu may appear momentarily while the new serial number data is written into
memory.

Note: You must have root authority to perform the following step.

pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Only

23. Update the VPD data in the host pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System by un-configuring the device
(Example: rmdev -l rmt3) and reconfiguring the device (Example: mkdev -l rmt3).
End of pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Only
24. Return to the procedure that sent you here.
Table 9-3. Hex to ASCII Conversion
Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII
00 Null 30 0 41 A 4A J 54 T
20 Space 31 1 42 B 4B K 55 U
32 2 43 C 4C L 56 V

9-56 IBM 3590 MI

Table 9-3. Hex to ASCII Conversion (continued)
Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII
33 3 44 D 4D M 57 W
34 4 45 E 4E N 58 X
35 5 46 F 4F O 59 Y
36 6 47 G 50 P 5A Z
37 7 48 H 51 Q 5F −
38 8 49 I 52 R
39 9 53 S
Note: Not all codes are shown.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-57

 FMR Tape Maintenance
| The following notes apply to to the following procedures for converting an FMR tape to a scratch tape,
| updating an FMR tape from the drive, and making an FMR tape from a scratch tape:

| Notes:
| v 3590 Model B11/B1A drives require 128-track format tapes.
| v 3590 Model E11/E1A drives require 256-track format tapes.
| v 3590 Model H11/H1A drives require 384-track format tapes.
| If a tape with the wrong track format is loaded, a Tape write prot’d message will be displayed.

Converting FMR Tape to Scratch Tape

This procedure converts an FMR tape to a scratch tape.
1. From the CE Options menu, select FMR Tape.
2. From the CE FMR Tape menu, select Unmake FMR Tape.
3. When prompted, load the FMR tape. When the tape is loaded and at ready point, select Process
Loaded Tape.
4. After the tape has the header information changed, the final status menu indicates whether the
operation was successful.
5. Select Unload Drive.

Updating FMR Tape from Drive

This procedure updates an FMR tape with drive microcode.
1. From the CE Options menu, select FMR Tape.
2. From the FMR Tape menu, select Microcode Update menu.
3. When prompted, load the FMR tape. When the tape is loaded and at ready point, select Process
Loaded Tape.
4. If the EC level of the code is not on the cartridge, the microcode is copied from the drive to the
cartridge.
5. The EC level of the code is displayed via the “Select EC Level” screen.
6. Press Cancel.
7. Select Unload Drive.

Making FMR Tape from Scratch Tape

This procedure creates an FMR tape from a scratch tape that will contain the microcode that is active in
the device.

Note: If you want to replace the microcode in the device from a field microcode replacement (FMR) tape
or want to update the FMR cartridge with the microcode in the drive, go to “Updating Microcode
from FMR Cartridge”.
1. From the CE Options menu, select FMR Tape.
2. From the CE FMR Tape menu, select Make FMR Tape. When you are prompted, load a scratch tape.
When the tape is loaded and at ready point, select Process Loaded Tape.
3. When the EC Levels menu is displayed, select Cancel.
4. Select Unload Drive.
5. If not labeled, label the cartridge as the FMR tape and save the cartridge in a secure place.

Updating Microcode from FMR Cartridge

There are several levels of FMR cartridge available for 3590 drives:

9-58 IBM 3590 MI

 v An FMR cartridge with 128-track format that has microcode levels for Base Model and Ultra Model
B11/B1A drives
v An FMR cartridge with 256-track format that has microcode for the E11/E1A drives
v An FMR cartridge with 384-track format that has microcode levels for the H11/H1A drives

Attention:

The label on the FMR cartridge should clearly state which drive models the cartridge will support.

If a FMR tape with the wrong track format is loaded, a Tape write prot’d message will be displayed.

The 128-track format FMR cartridges ordered as a FRU now contain multiple microcode images for
support of different levels of the Model B11/B1A 3590 drives, as follows:
v D0IA_xxx = Base Model B11/B1A 3590 drives
v D0IB_xxx = Ultra Model B11/B1A 3590 drives
| v D0IF_xxx = Ultra Model B11/B1A 3590 drives with Common Card Pack

A 256-track format FMR cartridges ordered as a FRU now contains microcode images for support of 3590
Model E drives.
| v D0IE_xxx = For all Model E11/E1A 3590 drives.

| The 384-track format FMR cartridges ordered as a FRU now contain microcode images for support of the
| 3590 Model H11/H1A drives, as follows:
| v D0IF_xxx = For all 3590 Model H11/H1A drives

For more information on 3590 levels, see “3590 Drive Model and Feature Levels” on page 3-34.

Updating Microcode Process

1. Set the 3590 to CE mode.
2. From the CE Options menu, select FMR Tape.
3. From the CE FMR Tape menu, select Microcode Update.
4. At the Load FMR Tape menu, load the FMR cartridge.
5. When the tape is loaded and at ready point, select Process Loaded Tape.
| v The device verifies that FMR tape is correct format for the drive model. Base or Ultra Model
| B11/B1A drives require 128-track format FMR tapes and E11/E1A drives require 256-track format
| FMR tapes, and H11/H1A drives require 384-track format FMR tapes.
v If the current EC level of microcode is not already on the FMR cartridge, the 3590 writes the
current level of microcode onto the FMR cartridge. This provides the CE with the option to go back
to the current level, if necessary.
6. When the Select EC Level menu is displayed, select the desired EC level. (The drive will only display
EC levels of microcode that are valid for the EC level of the drive.)

Note: Do not touch the Reset pushbutton while microcode update is in process.
v The microcode in the drive is then automatically updated with the latest level of microcode from the
FMR tape.
v When the update is complete, drive status will be displayed.
7. If the update was not successful, retry with another cartridge.
8. When the update is successful, select Unload drive.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-59

 9. Press the Reset pushbutton to activate the microcode.

pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Only

Note: You must have root authority to perform the following step.
10. Update the VPD data in the host pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System by un-configuring the device
(Example: rmdev -l rmt3) and reconfiguring the device (Example: mkdev -l rmt3).
End of pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Only
11. Record the EC level and link level of the microcode in “Microcode EC Level History Log” on
page 9-61.
12. Save the FMR cartridge in a secure place.

9-60 IBM 3590 MI

History Log Examples

Microcode EC Level History Log

Figure 9-37 shows how to determine the EC level and link level of the microcode from the operator
Services menu. Use the link level
1 to determine the latest EC level. Reference “Identifying Feature
Code Level” on page 3-34.

If you read the EC level and link level from the FMR tape (“Updating Microcode from FMR Cartridge” on
page 9-58), the link level (LL) is displayed as dddd instead of d_ddd. The following example shows that
the second entry is the latest level microcode:
EC=6C56789 LL=4D0D
EC=3C56789 LL=5B02 (highest EC level)

Table 9-4 shows the EC history of the microcode where you write the EC and link levels of the microcode,
the date, and the device serial number. You write the values here when you install the device, replace the
card pack, or update the device to a new microcode level.

Figure 9-37. Microcode Level Menu

Table 9-4. Microcode EC Level History Log

EC Level Link Level
1 Date Drive Serial Number

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-61

Table 9-4. Microcode EC Level History Log (continued)
EC Level Link Level
1 Date Drive Serial Number

9-62 IBM 3590 MI

Fibre Channel World Wide Name History Log
Copy Table 9-5 on page 9-63, and use it as a template to keep a record of the address history of each
device. If a replacement of the card pack is necessary, the service representative will have a permanent
record of the Port and Node names.
Notes:
1. Be sure the drive is offline. See “Set Offline Menu” on page 5-25.
2. If you alter any name you must save or alter all the names. For example, if you alter the Node Name
only, you have to at least save Port 0 and Port 1.
3. For 3590, fibre node names and port names are in the range 5005076300XXXXXX.

Every time a card pack is replaced, record the complete row
5 of entries.

1 The customer serial number of the device

2 World Wide Node name

3 World Wide Port 0 name

4 World Wide Port 1 name

5 Next available entry row
Table 9-5. WWID Log Form Example
This table is only necessary if you use zoning and drive is attached to a fibre channel switch that is using zoning
function.
Drive Serial Number Node Name 0 Port Names 1

1
2
3
4
00010011 5005076300002047 5005076300402047 5005076300802047

5
5
5
5

Display WW Names Procedure

Note: Refer to “Messages and Supplemental Messages (Fibre Channel Only)” in Table 5-2 on page 5-7
for additional fibre addressing information.
__ Step 1. Switch to CE mode by pressing the Mode Change pushbutton.
__ Step 2. At the “Confirm Mode Change” menu select “CE Offline Mode”.
__ Step 3. At the“CE Options” menu, select “Config/Install”.
__ Step 4. Next select “Drv Options” then “Drv Serial No”.

Note: For the following steps, enter the data in the WW Name Log Form, as necessary.
__ Step 5. Next, select “Disp Serial No” and record it in the World Wide Names History Log Table.
Table 9-6. DRV Serial No
CE DRV SERIAL NO RANDOM 2 — LUN
E11FX
YCANCEL
PORT0 ID:––23 OFFLINE
DRV SERIAL
PORT1 ID:—–23 OFFLINE
000000010011

__ Step 6. Select Cancel, as necessary, to return to “CE Config/Install” menu.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-63

__ Step 7. Select the “Fibre Addresses” menu.
__ Step 8. Select “Show Node Name”. Record the Node Name in the World Wide Names History Log
Table.
Table 9-7. Node Name
NODE NAME RANDOM 2 — LUN
E11FX
YCANCEL
PORT0 ID:––23 OFFLINE
NODE NAME
PORT1 ID:—–23 OFFLINE
5005076300002077

__ Step 9. Select Cancel to return to the “Fibre Addresses” menu.

__ Step 10. Select “Show Port Names”. Record Port 0 and Port 1 Names in the World Wide Names
History Log Table.
Table 9-8. Port Names
PORT NAMES RANDOM 2 — LUN
E11FX
YCANCEL
PORT0 ID:––23 OFFLINE
PORT 0 NAME
PORT1 ID:—–23 OFFLINE
5005076300402077
PORT 1 NAME
5005076300802077

__ Step 11. Place the drive online.

__ Step 12. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.

Set WW Names Procedure

Notes:
1. If you alter any name you must save or alter all the names. For example, if you alter the Node Name
only, you have to at least save Port 0 and Port 1.
2. Refer to “Messages and Supplemental Messages (Fibre Channel Only)” in Table 5-2 on page 5-7 for
additional fibre addressing information.
__ Step 1. Be sure the drive is offline.
__ Step 2. At the OPTIONS display screen, switch to CE mode by pressing the Mode Change
pushbutton.

Note: The Drive Serial, the Node Name, Port 0 Name and Port 1 Name should have been recorded. If
not, see “Display WW Names Procedure” on page 9-63. For the following steps, enter the data in
the WW Name Log Form, as necessary.
__ Step 3. At the “Confirm Mode Change” menu select “CE Offline Mode”.
__ Step 4. Select “Config/Install”, then select “Drv Options”.
__ Step 5. At the “CE Drv Options” menu, select “Drv Serial No”.

Note: For the following steps, enter the data in the WW Name Log Form, as necessary.
__ Step 6. Select “Alter Serial No”. Increment each serial number digit, as necessary, to reflect the
recorded serial number.

9-64 IBM 3590 MI

 Table 9-9. Alter Serial No
CE VPD Menu RANDOM 2 — LUN
E11FX
Y0 Z
PORT0 ID:––26 OFFLINE
1
PORT1 ID:—–23 OFFLINE
0
0
1
1
SAVE AND CONTINUE

__ Step 7. Select SAVE AND CONTINUE, then press Enter. This will cause the “CE Save Data?” menu
to appear.
Table 9-10. Alter Serial No
CE SAVE DATA RANDOM 2 — LUN
E11FX
YCANCEL Z Supplemental Message section contents
YES depend of the Data being stored.
NO Serial Sequence Number
Node FC Node Name
Port 0/1
FC Port Name

__ Step 8. Select YES, then press Enter to store the data into VPD memory.
__ Step 9. Select Cancel to return to the “CE Config/Install” menu.
__ Step 10. Select “Fibre Addresses”, then select “Set Node Name”.
__ Step 11. Get the Node Name from the World Wide Names History Log Table, and enter the last 6
digits into VPD memory, as shown in the example above. Increment the Node Name digit
positions to reflect the recorded Node name.
Table 9-11. CE Set Node Name
SET NODE NAME RANDOM 2 — LUN
E11FX
Y0 Z 5005076300002077
2
0
7
7
SAVE AND CONTINUE

__ Step 12. Select SAVE AND CONTINUE, then press Enter. This will cause the “CE Save Data?” menu
to appear.
__ Step 13. At the “Fibre Addresses” menu, select “Set Port 0 Name”.
Table 9-12. Set Port 0 Name
SET PORT 0 NAME RANDOM 2 — LUN
E11FX
Y0 Z 5005076300402077
2
0
7
7
SAVE AND CONTINUE

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-65

__ Step 14. Get the Port 0 Name from the World Wide Names History Log Table, and enter the last 6
digits into VPD memory, as shown in the example above. Increment the Port Name digit
positions to reflect the recorded Port Name.
__ Step 15. Select SAVE AND CONTINUE, then press Enter. This will cause the “CE Save Data?” menu
to appear.
__ Step 16. . Select YES, then press Enter, to store the data into VPD memory and return you to the
“Fibre Addresses” menu.
__ Step 17. At the “Fibre Addresses” menu, select “Set Port 1 Name”.
Table 9-13. CE Set Port 1 Name
SET PORT 1 NAME RANDOM 2 — LUN
E11FX
Y0 Z 5005076300802077
2
0
7
7
SAVE AND CONTINUE

__ Step 18. Get the Port 0 (1) Name from the World Wide Names History Log Table, and enter the last 6
digits into VPD memory, as shown in the example above. Increment the Port Name digit
positions to reflect the recorded Port Name.
__ Step 19. Select SAVE AND CONTINUE, then press Enter. This will cause the “CE Save Data?” menu
to appear.
__ Step 20. Select YES, then press Enter, to store the data into VPD memory and return you to the
“Fibre Addresses” menu.
__ Step 21. Now the Serial, Node, Port 0 and Port 1 Names have been set you can return the machine to
the customer. You may want to check the names with the “Display WW Names Procedure” on
page 9-63 to verify their validity.
__ Step 22. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.

Every time a card pack is replaced, record the complete row of entries.
Table 9-14. WWID Log Form Example
Drive Serial Number Node Name 0 Port Names 1

9-66 IBM 3590 MI

Dump Maintenance Utilities

Off-loading Dumps to Tape Cartridge

The dump icon appears when the dump is available and remains on the screen to indicate that trace
data is stored in the device.

Attention: Trace data is volatile and is lost if you press the Reset pushbutton or switch OFF power to
the device.

1. Press the Change Mode pushbutton to place the drive in CE mode.

2. Select Dump from the CE Options menu.
3. Select Copy Dump to Tape to copy a dump from dynamic random access memory (DRAM) to a tape
cartridge.
4. At the prompt, load a scratch tape and select Process Loaded Tape.
A screen indicates the status of the copy to medium (Successful Copy or Unsuccessful Copy).
5. When the dump to tape has completed, contact your next level of support for further instructions.

The dump icon disappears from the 3590 operator panel when the dump to tape has completed.

Off-loading Dumps to iSeries (OS/400) System

Use the “Off-loading Dumps to Tape Cartridge” procedure.

Off-loading Dumps to pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System by Using

TAPEUTIL
The dump icon appears when the dump is available, and remains on the screen to indicate that
trace data is stored in the device.

Note: Trace data is volatile and is lost if you press the Reset pushbutton or switch OFF power to the
device.

You may require assistance from the customer during this process.

This procedure reads a dump from the 3590 and writes it to a diskette in AIX/UNIX format.
1. On the drive operator panel, verify that the drive is Online.
2. Verify that the drive is unloaded.
3. Verify that the drive is not in use by another host.
4. Insert the diskette that will be used for the dump in the system floppy diskette reader.
5. When the prompt appears, format the diskette by typing format, and pressing Enter.
6. Start the tape utility program by typing tapeutil at the prompt.
7. Select Tape Drive Service Aids option from the menu, and press Enter.
8. Select Read Dump from the following panel, and press Enter.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-67

 IBM Tape Device Service Aid Menu 700000

Select One of the Service Aids to be performed

Force Microcode Dump

Perform a microcode dump of the system. The dump is stored in
the device.
After the dump is performed it must be read using Read Dump.
Read Dump
Transfer a dump from the tape device to a host file, diskette or
a tape cartridge.
Microcode load
Download microcode from host file or diskette to tape device via
SCSI bus.
Error Log Analysis
Analyze system error log for device.
F3=Cancel F10=Exit

9. Select a Device, and press F7=Commit from the following panel. You must press F7=Commit after
selecting the drive.
IBM Tape Device Selection Menu. 900000

Select One of the devices listed below.

NAME LOCATION TYPE

rmt2 00-05-01-10 IBM 3590 Tape Drive and Medium Changer

rmt3 00-05-01-30 IBM 3590 Tape Drive and Medium Changer

F3=Cancel F7=Commit F10=Exit

10. At the next screen press F7=Commit to write the file to the diskette.
Prompting for Srce File for Operation on rmt3 located at 00-05-01-30
B00000

Please enter the following fields...

Enter Filename: /dev/rfd0 +/

F1=Help F2=Refresh F3=Cancel F4=List

F5=Reset F7=Commit F10=Exit

11. Press F10 to exit the read dump.

9-68 IBM 3590 MI

 The dump icon disappears from the 3590 operator panel when the dump to tape has
completed.
12. Press q to quit tapeutil.
13. Remove the diskette from the diskette reader. The dump diskette created above is in AIX/UNIX
format.

Off-loading Dumps to Sun System by Using TAPEUTIL

TAPEUTIL
Refer to IBM SCSI Tape Drive, Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s
Guide, for details of the tapeutil program in the Sun (Solaris) system.

The 3590 supports forcing a diagnostic dump and storing that dump to a mounted tape cartridge or to a
host system file via the SCSI bus.

The dump icon appears when the dump is available, and remains on the screen to indicate that
trace data is stored in the device.
Notes:
1. Trace data is volatile and is lost if you press the Reset pushbutton or switch OFF power to the device.

2. If you force a dump when the dump icon is already displayed, the existing trace data will be
overlaid by the new trace data.

You may require information from the customer during this process.

To force and store a diagnostic dump on these devices, perform the following steps:
1. Verify that the IBM tape subsystem is powered ON and online.
2. Verify that the drive is not in use by another host.
3. Verify that the drive has no customer cartridges loaded. Scratch cartridge is OK.
4. Enter the following command to force the dump, substituting n with the actual value from the device
special file associated with the target device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/nst -o fdp -v
5. Determine the location for the dump to be stored (that is, floppy diskette such as
/vol/dev/aliases/floppy0 or host file such as /tmp/diag_dump.file).
6. Enter the following command, substituting file with the actual path and filename of the dump
destination file, and substituting n with the actual value from the device special file associated with the
dump device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/nst -o sdp -z file -v
7. The dump may also be written to a tape cartridge mounted in the dump device by using tapedrive for
file

Note: The diagnostic dump procedure may also be performed using the menu-driven interface of the
tapeutil program. To invoke the tapeutil program in this format, enter the following command, and
then choose option 1 to open the device, followed by option 5 to force a dump, and option 6 to
store the dump:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-69

Off-loading Dumps to HP-UX System by Using TAPEUTIL

TAPEUTIL
Refer to IBM SCSI Tape Drive, Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s
Guide, for details of the tapeutil program in the HP-UX system.

The 3590 supports forcing a diagnostic dump and storing that dump to a mounted tape cartridge or to a
host system file via the SCSI bus.

The dump icon appears when the dump is available, and remains on the screen to indicate that
trace data is stored in the device.
Notes:
1. Trace data is volatile and is lost if you press the Reset pushbutton or switch OFF power to the device.

2. If you force a dump when the dump icon is already displayed, the existing trace data will be
overlaid by the new trace data.

You may require information from the customer during this process.

To force and store a diagnostic dump on these devices, perform the following steps:
1. Verify that the IBM tape subsystem is powered ON and online.
2. Verify that the drive is not in use by another host.
3. Verify that the drive has no customer cartridges loaded. Scratch cartridge is OK.
4. Enter the following command to force the dump, substituting n with the actual value from the device
special file associated with the target device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/nst -o fdp -v
5. Determine the location for the dump to be stored (that is, floppy diskette such as
/vol/dev/aliases/floppy0 or host file such as /tmp/diag_dump.file).
6. Enter the following command, substituting file with the actual path and filename of the dump
destination file, and substituting n with the actual value from the device special file associated with the
dump device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/nst -o sdp -z file -v
7. The dump may also be written to a tape cartridge mounted in the dump device by using tapedrive for
file

Note: The diagnostic dump procedure may also be performed using the menu-driven interface of the
tapeutil program. To invoke the tapeutil program in this format, enter the following command, and
then choose option 1 to open the device, followed by option 5 to force a dump, and option 6 to
store the dump:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil

9-70 IBM 3590 MI

Off-loading Dumps to SP2 by Using TAPEUTIL
The dump icon appears when the dump is available, and remains on the screen to indicate that
trace data is stored in the device.

Note: Trace data is volatile and is lost if you press the Reset pushbutton or power OFF the device.

You may require assistance from the customer during this process.

This procedure reads a dump from the 3590 and writes it to a file and then to a diskette in AIX/UNIX
format.
1. On the drive operator panel, verify that the drive is Online.
2. Verify that the drive is unloaded.
3. Insert the diskette that will be used for the dump in the Control Work Station (CWS) diskette reader.
4. Format the diskette by typing format at the prompt, and pressing Enter.
5. Connect to the target node by typing telnet nodeid.
Enter a login id and a password when prompted.
6. Start the tape utility program by typing tapeutil at the prompt.
7. Choose Tape Drive Service Aids from the menu, and press Enter.
8. Choose Read Dump from the following panel, and press Enter.
IBM Tape Device Service Aid Menu 700000

Select One of the Service Aids to be performed

Force Microcode Dump

Perform a microcode dump of the system. The dump is stored in
the device.
After the dump is performed it must be read using Read Dump.
Read Dump
Transfer a dump from the tape device to a host file, diskette or
a tape cartridge.
Microcode load
Download microcode from host file or diskette to tape device via
SCSI bus.
Error Log Analysis
Analyze system error log for device.

9. Select a Device, and press F7=Commit from the following panel. You must press F7=Commit after
selecting the drive.
IBM Tape Device Selection Menu. 900000

Select One of the devices listed below.

NAME LOCATION TYPE

rmt2 00-05-01-10 IBM 3590 Tape Drive and Medium Changer

rmt3 00-05-01-30 IBM 3590 Tape Drive and Medium Changer

F3=Cancel F7=Commit F10=Exit

10. Enter the filename /tmp/3590.dmp in the destination field.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-71

 You must press F7=Commit after entering the filename.
Prompting for Dest File for Operation on rmt3 located at 00-05-01-30
B00000

Please enter the following fields...

Enter Filename: /tmp/3590.dmp

F1=Help F2=Refresh F3=Cancel F4=List

Esc+5=Reset F7=Commit F10=Exit

11. Press F10 to exit the read dump.

The dump icon disappears from the 3590 operator panel when the dump to file has completed.
12. Press q to quit tapeutil.
13. Press Ctrl+] to get a telnet> prompt, then type quit to stop the TELNET session.
14. Copy the file /tmp/3590.dmp from the SP2 node that has the 3590 attached.
a. Connect to the target node by typing ftp nodeid.
Enter a Name and a Password when prompted.
b. Set Binary mode by typing binary.
c. Transfer the file by typing get /tmp/3590.dmp /tmp/3590.dmp.
d. Quit the connection by typing quit.
15. Copy the contents of the file to the diskette on the CWS by typing
dd if=/tmp/3590.dmp of=/dev/rfd0 bs=18k conv=sync at the prompt.
16. Remove the diskette from the diskette reader. The dump diskette created above is in AIX/UNIX
format.

9-72 IBM 3590 MI

 Off-loading Dumps to Windows NT or Windows 2000 System by Using
NTUTIL

NTUTIL
Refer to “Appendix A” on page B-1 for more information on using ntutil in a Windows NT or Windows
2000 environment. For a complete update on device driver software, see the IBM SCSI Tape Drive,
Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide.

Note: The dump procedure may be performed using the menu-driven interface of the ntutil program. To
invoke the ntutil program in this format, enter the common commands and option 80 to Force
Dump:

Remember the dump goes to the default drive/directory.

1. Verify that the IBM tape subsystem is powered ON and online.
2. Verify that the tape drive has a tape cartridge loaded.
3. Start ntutil and open the drive (see step 1 on page 9-86).
4. Determine the version of microcode present on the device by entering the following command 85 (Get
Version).
5. Force the dump by entering the following command 80 (Force Dump).
If the operation completed successfully (Message Error_Success), go to end of test 11 on page 9-86,
or go to the Start Page of “SCSI Bus Problem Determination” on page 9-108.

| Off-loading Dumps to Linux System by Using TAPEUTIL

| The dump icon appears when the dump is available, and remains on the screen to indicate that
| trace data is stored in the device.

| Note: Trace data is volatile and is lost if you press Reset or power off the device.
| 1. On the drive operator panel, verify that the drive is Online.
| 2. Verify that the drive is unloaded.
| 3. Verify that the drive is not in use by another host.
| 4. Start the tape utility program by typing IBMtapeutil at the prompt.
| IBMtapeutil for Linux
| ==============================
| 1. Tape
| 2. Chager
| 3. Quit
| ==============================
|
| Enter your choice:
||
| 5. Select 1 (Tape).

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-73

| Hit <enter> to continue...
|
| -------------------- General Commands: ----------------------------
| 1. Open a Device 7. Request Sense
| 2. Close a Device 8. Log Sense Page
| 3. Inquiry 9. Mode Sense Page
| 4. Test Unit Ready 10. Switch Tape/Changer Device
| 5. Reserve Device 11. Create Special Files
| 6. Release Device 12. Query Driver Version
| Q. Quit IBMtapeutil
| ------------------- Medium Changer Commands: ----------------------
| 60. Element Information 65. Load/Unload Medium
| 61. Position To Element 66. Initialize Element Status
| 62. Element Inventory 67. Prevent/Allow Medium Removal
| 63. Exchange Medium 68. Initialize Element Status Range
| 64. Move Medium 69. Read Device Identifiers
| -------------------- Service Aid Commands: ------------------------
| 70. Dump Device 72. Load Ucode
| 71. Force Dump 73. Reset Drive
| -------------------------------------------------------------------
| 99. Back To Main Menu
|
| Enter Selection: :
|
|
| 6. Enter 1 (Open a Device).
| 7. Enter /dev/IBMtape0 when prompted for the device name.
| 8. Enter 1 (Read/Write) (not shown).

9-74 IBM 3590 MI

| -------------------- General Commands: ---------------------------
| 1. Open a Device 7. Request Sense
| 2. Close a Device 8. Log Sense Page
| 3. Inquiry 9. Mode Sense Page
| 4. Test Unit Ready 10. Switch Tape/Changer Device
| 5. Reserve Device 11. Create Special Files
| 6. Release Device 12. Query Driver Version
| Q. Quit IBMtapeutil
| --------------------- Tape Commands: ------------------------------
| 20. Rewind 33. Set Block Size
| 21. Forward Space Filemarks 34. Retension Tape
| 22. Backward Space Filemarks 35. Query/Set Tape Position
| 23. Forward Space Records 36. Query Tape Status
| 24. Backward Space Records 37. Load Tape
| 25. FSFM 38. Unload Tape
| 26. BSFM 39. Lock Tape Drive Door
| 27. Space to End of Data 40. Unlock Tape Drive Door
| 28. Read and Write Tests 41. Take Tape Offline
| 29. Write Filemarks 42. Enable/Disable Compression
| 30. Read or Write Files 43. Flush Driver’s Buffer
| 31. Erase 44. Self Test
| 32. Reset Drive 45. Display Message
| --------------------- IBMtape Commands: -----------------------------
| 46. Query Sense 52. Locate Tape Position
| 47. Query Inquiry 53. Read Tape Position
| 48. Query/Set Tape Parameters 54. Query Mtdevice Number
| 49. Query/Set Tape Position 55. Synchronize Buffers
| 50. Query/Set MT/ST Mode 56. List Tape Filemarks
| 51. Report Density Support
| --------------------- Service Aid Commands: -----------------------
| 70. Dump Device 72. Load Ucode
| 71. Force Dump 73. Reset Drive
| -------------------------------------------------------------------
| 99. Back To Main Menu
|
| Enter Selection:
||
| 9. Select 70 (Dump Device).
| 10. Specify the file name from which the dump is to be read, then press Enter.
| 11. Enter Q to quit the program.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-75

 Microcode Maintenance

Updating Microcode from iSeries (OS/400) System

Microcode load for the 3590 tape drives directly attached to an iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System with the
SCSI is obtained from the iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System using the program temporary fix (PTF) process.
1. Notify the customer that a microcode load for the 3590 is available via a PTF.
2. The customer will apply the PTF.
3. Before the customer IPLs the input/output processor (IOP):
v Verify that the drive is unloaded.
v On the drive operator panel, verify that the drive is online. The PTF indicates that the drive must be
varied on with a reset.
4. The customer can now IPL the IOP. The IPL causes the microcode load to proceed.
5. When the microcode load is complete, the drive performs a soft power-on reset (restarts the code).
6. Update the account FMR cartridge. See “Updating Microcode from FMR Cartridge” on page 9-58.

Updating Microcode from pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System by Using

TAPEUTIL
You may require assistance from the customer during this process.
Notes:
| 1. Do not use this procedure if the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System is in a VTS, 3494, or 3590 A60/A50.
| Go to the B16/B18 VTS MI.
2. If you were provided two FMR diskettes, you are loading microcode at the D0IF_xxx level. For all
other levels, you will load microcode from one FMR diskette.

This procedure downloads microcode to the tape drive from a file or from diskettes via the SCSI bus or
fibre channel. These diskettes must be in AIX/UNIX format. The Microcode Load utility is only supported
on the IBM 3590 tape drive.
1. On the drive operator panel, verify that the drive is Online.
2. Verify that the drive is unloaded.
3. Verify that the drive is not in use by another host.
Notes:
| a. If you are loading microcode at D0IF_xxx, go to step 5.
| b. If you are loading microcode at all levels other than D0IF_xxx, go to step 4.
| 4. Insert the diskette with the microcode load in the pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System diskette reader.
| Continue with the remainder of this procedure beginning with step 9.
| 5. Find a directory (such as /tmp or /etc/microcode) in the AIX file system that is at least large enough
| to accommodate a 2MB image:
| cd/tmp # or cd/etc/microcode
| 6. Insert the first AIX FMR diskette (Disk 1 of 2) into the diskette reader.
| 7. Use the following tar command to restore an FMR image:
| tar -xvf /dev/rfd0

| The tar command will prompt you to to insert the second AIX FMR diskette (Disk 2 of 2) to complete
| the image extraction.
| 8. The FMR image (D0IF_xxx.fmrz) will be extracted and restored in the current directory (such as /tmp
| or /etc/microcode, for this example), and can be used for FMR.
9. Start the tape utility program by typing tapeutil at the prompt.

9-76 IBM 3590 MI

 10. Select Tape Drive Service Aids from the menu by selecting Tape Drive Service Aids option, and
pressing Enter.
11. Select Microcode load from the following panel, then press Enter.
IBM Tape Device Service Aid Menu 700000

Select One of the Service Aids to be performed

Force Microcode Dump

Perform a microcode dump of the system. The dump is stored in
the device.
After the dump is performed it must be read using Read Dump.
Read Dump
Transfer a dump from the tape device to a host file, diskette or
a tape cartridge.
Microcode load
Download microcode from host file or diskette to tape device via
SCSI bus.
Error Log Analysis
Analyze system error log for device.
F3=Cancel F10=Exit

12. Select a Device, and press F7=Commit from the following panel. You must press F7=Commit after
selecting the drive.
IBM Tape Device Selection Menu. 900000

Select One of the devices listed below.

NAME LOCATION TYPE

rmt2 00-05-01-10 IBM 3590 Tape Drive and Medium Changer

rmt3 00-05-01-30 IBM 3590 Tape Drive and Medium Changer

F3=Cancel F7=Commit F10=Exit

13. If loading the microcode from the diskette reader, press F7=Commit from the following panel.
Otherwise, enter the path and filename, and press F7=Commit.
Enter the filename ./xxx.yyyy in the source field where xxx.yyyy is the filename of the microcode file
to be loaded. For example, type ./762.fmrz.
Important: Be sure to select the proper code file for the type of drive to be updated.
| v Base 3590 Model B11/B1A = D0I9_xxx.fmrz, or D0IA_xxx.fmrz
| v Ultra 3590 Model B11/B1A =
| – D0IB_xxx.fmrz
| – D0ID_xxx.fmrz
| – D0IE_xxx.fmrz
| OR

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-77

| – D0IF_xxx.fmrz (with Common Card Pack)
| v 3590 Model E11/E1A =
| – D0IC_xxx.fmrz
| – D0ID_xxx.fmrz
| – D0IE_xxx.fmrz
| OR
| – D0IF_xxx.fmrz
| v 3590 Model H11/H1A = D0IF_xxx.fmrz

| Note: For more information about microcode compatibility, see Table 3-5 on page 3-30.

To determine the type of drive you are updating, refer to “3590 Drive Model and Feature Levels” on
page 3-34.

You must press F7=Commit after entering the filename.

Prompting for Srce File for Operation on rmt3 located at 00-05-01-30
B00000

Please enter the following fields...

Enter Filename: D0IF_xxx.fmrz

F1=Help F2=Refresh F3=Cancel F4=List

F5=Reset F7=Commit F10=Exit

Note: Use the full path name for the file (such as, /tmp/D0IF_xxx.fmrz in the example) if you are in
a different directory.
14. While the microcode load takes place, the display shows:
“Operation running, please stand by”

The drive display shows the loading status messages at the bottom of the display.
15. When the microcode load completes, the initiator display shows:
Operation completed successfully!

The drive performs a soft power-on reset (restart the code).

16. Press F10 to exit the microcode load.
17. Press q to quit tapeutil.
18. Remove the diskette from the diskette reader.

Note: You must have root authority to perform the following step.
19. Update the VPD data in the host pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System by unconfiguring the device
(Example: rmdev -l rmt3) and reconfiguring the device (Example: mkdev -l rmt3).
20. Update the account FMR cartridge. See “Updating Microcode from FMR Cartridge” on page 9-58.

9-78 IBM 3590 MI

| Updating Microcode from LINUX by Using TAPEUTIL
| You may require assistance from the customer during this process.
| 1. On the drive operator panel, verify that the drive is Online.
| 2. Verify that the drive is unloaded.
| 3. Verify that the drive is not in use by another host.
| 4. Start the tape utility program by typing IBMtapeutil at the prompt.
| IBMtapeutil for Linux
| ==============================
| 1. Tape
| 2. Chager
| 3. Quit
| ==============================
|
| Enter your choice:
||
| 5. Select 1 (Tape).
| Hit <enter> to continue...
|
| ----------------------- General Commands: ---------------------
| 1. Open a Device 7. Request Sense
| 2. Close a Device 8. Log Sense Page
| 3. Inquiry 9. Mode Sense Page
| 4. Test Unit Ready 10. Switch Tape/Changer Device
| 5. Reserve Device 11. Create Special Files
| 6. Release Device 12. Query Driver Version
| Q. Quit IBMtapeutil
| ---------------------- Medium Changer Commands: ---------------
| 60. Element Information 65. Load/Unload Medium
| 61. Position To Element 66. Initialize Element Status
| 62. Element Inventory 67. Prevent/Allow Medium Removal
| 63. Exchange Medium 68. Initialize Element Status Range
| 64. Move Medium 69. Read Device Identifiers
| ----------------------- Service Aid Commands: -----------------
| 70. Dump Device 72. Load Ucode
| 71. Force Dump 73. Reset Drive
| ---------------------------------------------------------------
| 99. Back To Main Menu
|
| Enter Selection: :
||
| 6. Enter 1 (Open a Device).
| 7. Enter /dev/IBMtape0 when prompted for the device name.
| 8. Enter 1 (Read/Write) (not shown).

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-79

| ---------------------- General Commands: ---------------------
| 1. Open a Device 7. Request Sense
| 2. Close a Device 8. Log Sense Page
| 3. Inquiry 9. Mode Sense Page
| 4. Test Unit Ready 10. Switch Tape/Changer Device
| 5. Reserve Device 11. Create Special Files
| 6. Release Device 12. Query Driver Version
| Q. Quit IBMtapeutil
| ---------------------- Tape Commands: ------------------------
| 20. Rewind 33. Set Block Size
| 21. Forward Space Filemarks 34. Retension Tape
| 22. Backward Space Filemarks 35. Query/Set Tape Position
| 23. Forward Space Records 36. Query Tape Status
| 24. Backward Space Records 37. Load Tape
| 25. FSFM 38. Unload Tape
| 26. BSFM 39. Lock Tape Drive Door
| 27. Space to End of Data 40. Unlock Tape Drive Door
| 28. Read and Write Tests 41. Take Tape Offline
| 29. Write Filemarks 42. Enable/Disable Compression
| 30. Read or Write Files 43. Flush Driver’s Buffer
| 31. Erase 44. Self Test
| 32. Reset Drive 45. Display Message
| ----------------------- IBMtape Commands: --------------------
| 46. Query Sense 52. Locate Tape Position
| 47. Query Inquiry 53. Read Tape Position
| 48. Query/Set Tape Parameters 54. Query Mtdevice Number
| 49. Query/Set Tape Position 55. Synchronize Buffers
| 50. Query/Set MT/ST Mode 56. List Tape Filemarks
| 51. Report Density Support
| ----------------------- Service Aid Commands: ----------------
| 70. Dump Device 72. Load Ucode
| 71. Force Dump 73. Reset Drive
| --------------------------------------------------------------
| 99. Back To Main Menu
|
| Enter Selection:
||
| 9. Select 72 (Load Ucode).
| 10. Specify the file name from which the microcode image is to be read, then press Enter.
| 11. Enter Q to quit the program.
|

9-80 IBM 3590 MI

Updating Microcode from Sun System by Using TAPEUTIL

TAPEUTIL
Refer to IBM SCSI Tape Drive, Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s
Guide, for details of the tapeutil program in the Sun (Solaris) system.

You may require assistance from the customer during this process.

The 3590 supports downloading a new microcode image from the host system via the SCSI bus. This
procedure downloads microcode to the tape drive from a file or diskette. This diskette must be in AIX/UNIX
format.

To download microcode to these devices, perform the following steps:

1. Verify that the IBM tape subsystem is powered ON and online.
2. Verify that the tape drive does not currently have a tape cartridge loaded.
3. Verify that the drive is not in use by another host.
4. Determine the current version of microcode present on the device by entering the following command,
substituting n with the actual value from the device special file associated with the target device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/nm -o qmc -v
5. Determine the source of the new microcode image file (that is, floppy diskette such as
/vol/dev/aliases/floppy0 or host file such as /tmp/ucode_image.file).
6. Enter the following command, substituting file with the actual path and filename of the microcode
image file, and substituting n with the actual value from the device special file associated with the
destination device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/nm -o dmc -v -z file

Note: The microcode download procedure may also be performed using the menu-driven interface of the
tapeutil program. To invoke the tapeutil program in this format, enter the following command, and
then choose option 1 to open the device, followed by option 4 to query the current device
microcode level, and option 7 to download new microcode.
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-81

Updating Microcode from HP-UX System by Using TAPEUTIL

TAPEUTIL
Refer to IBM SCSI Tape Drive, Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s
Guide,, for details of the tapeutil program in the HP-UX system.

You may require assistance from the customer during this process.

The 3590 supports downloading a new microcode image from the host system via the SCSI bus. This
procedure downloads microcode to the tape drive from a file or diskette. This diskette must be in AIX/UNIX
format.

To download microcode to these devices, perform the following steps:

1. Verify that the IBM tape subsystem is powered ON and online.
2. Verify that the tape drive does not currently have a tape cartridge loaded.
3. Verify that the drive is not in use by another host.
4. Determine the current version of microcode present on the device by entering the following command,
substituting n with the actual value from the device special file associated with the target device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/nst -o qmc -v
5. Determine the source of the new microcode image file (that is, floppy diskette such as
/vol/dev/aliases/floppy0 or host file such as /tmp/ucode_image.file). Be sure to select the proper file for
the EC level of the drive (Ultra or Base 3590) that you are attempting to update. For more information,
see “3590 Drive Model and Feature Levels” on page 3-34.
6. Enter the following command, substituting file with the actual path and filename of the microcode
image file, and substituting n with the actual value from the device special file associated with the
destination device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/nst -o dmc -z file -v

Note: The microcode download procedure may also be performed using the menu-driven interface of the
tapeutil program. To invoke the tapeutil program in this format, enter the following command, and
then choose option 1 to open the device, followed by option 4 to query the current device
microcode level, and option 7 to download new microcode.
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil

9-82 IBM 3590 MI

Updating Microcode from Windows NT or Windows 2000 System by
Using NTUTIL

NTUTIL
Refer to APPENDIX A for more information on using ntutil in the Windows NT or Windows 2000
system environment. For a complete update on device driver software, see the IBM SCSI Tape Drive,
Medium Changer, and 3590 Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide.

You may require assistance from the customer during this process.

The 3590 supports downloading a new microcode image from the host system via the SCSI bus. This
procedure downloads microcode to the tape drive from a file or diskette.

Note: The microcode download procedure may be performed using the menu-driven interface of the ntutil
program. To invoke the ntutil program in this format, go to the common start: followed by
commands: option 20 to open the device, followed by option 85 to query the current device
microcode level, and option 82 to download new microcode:
1. Verify that the IBM tape subsystem is powered ON and online.
2. Verify that the tape drive does not have a tape cartridge loaded.
3. Start ntutil and open the drive (see step 1 on page 9-86).
4. Determine the version of microcode present on the device by entering the following command 85 (Get
Version).
5. Update the code by entering the following command 82 (Update Code).
Ntutil will prompt you for the code level.
6. Enter the code level (D0IA_2FC, for example).
This command will call the device driver DeviceIoControl ( ) entry point, and will load the new
microcode.
7. Go to the Close routine, and complete step 10 on page 9-86.

Updating Microcode From SP2 by Using TAPEUTIL

You may require information/assistance from the customer during this process.

This procedure downloads microcode to the tape drive from a file or diskette via the SCSI bus fibre
channel. This diskette must be in AIX/UNIX format. The Microcode Load utility is only supported on the
IBM 3590 Tape Drive.
1. Insert the diskette with the microcode load in the Control Work Station (CWS) diskette reader. Be
sure to select the proper EC level of diskette for the drive that is being updated. To determine the EC
level of the drive, see “3590 Drive Model and Feature Levels” on page 3-34.
2. Copy the contents of the diskette to a file on the CWS by typing
cp /dev/rfd0 /tmp/3590.fmr at the prompt.
3. Copy the file /tmp/3590 to the SP2 node that has the 3590 attached.
a. Connect to the target node by typing ftp nodeid.
Enter a Name and a Password when prompted.
b. Set Binary mode by typing binary.
c. Transfer the file by typing put /tmp/3590.fmr /tmp/3590.fmr.
d. Quit the connection by typing quit.
4. On the drive operator panel, verify that the drive is Online.
5. Verify that the drive is unloaded.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-83

 6. Verify that the drive is NOT IN USE by another host.
7. Connect to the target node by typing telnet nodeid.
Enter a login id and a password when prompted.
8. Start the tape utility program on the target node by typing tapeutil at the prompt.
9. Choose Tape Drive Service Aids from the menu, and press Enter.
10. Choose Microcode load from the following panel, then press Enter.
IBM Tape Device Service Aid Menu 700000

Select One of the Service Aids to be performed

Force Microcode Dump

Perform a microcode dump of the system. The dump is stored in
the device.
After the dump is performed it must be read using Read Dump.
Read Dump
Transfer a dump from the tape device to a host file, diskette or
a tape cartridge.
Microcode load
Down-load microcode from host file or diskette to tape device via
SCSI bus.
Error Log Analysis
Analyze system error log for device.

11. Select a Device, and press F7=Commit from the following panel. You must press F7=Commit after
selecting the drive.
IBM Tape Device Selection Menu. 900000

Select One of the devices listed below.

NAME LOCATION TYPE

rmt2 00-05-01-10 IBM 3590 Tape Drive and Medium Changer

rmt3 00-05-01-30 IBM 3590 Tape Drive and Medium Changer

F3=Cancel F7=Commit F10=Exit

12. Enter the filename /tmp/3590.fmr in the source field.

You must press F7=Commit after entering the filename.

9-84 IBM 3590 MI

 Prompting for Srce File for Operation on rmt3 located at 00-05-01-30
B00000

Please enter the following fields...

Enter Filename: /tmp/3590.fmr

F1=Help F2=Refresh F3=Cancel F4=List

F5=Reset F7=Commit F10=Exit

13. While the microcode load takes place the display shows
“Operation running, please stand by”

The drive display shows the loading status messages at the bottom of the display.
14. When the microcode load completes the initiator display shows
Operation completed successfully!

The drive performs a soft power-on reset (restart the code).

15. Press F10 to exit the microcode load.
16. Press q to quit tapeutil.

Note: You must have root authority to perform the following step.
17. Update the VPD data in the host pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System by unconfiguring the device
(Example: rmdev -l rmt3). and reconfiguring the device (Example: mkdev -l rmt3).
18. Press Ctrl+] to get a telnet> prompt, then type quit to stop the TELNET session.
19. Remove the diskette from the diskette reader.
20. Update the account FMR cartridge. See “Updating Microcode from FMR Cartridge” on page 9-58.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-85

Starting NT UTILITY (ntutil) from Windows NT or Windows 2000

NTUTIL
Refer to APPENDIX A for more information on using ntutil in the Windows NT or Windows 2000
system environment. For a complete update on device driver software, see the IBM SCSI Tape Drive,
Medium Changer, and 3590 Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide.

You may require assistance from the customer during this process.
1. This is a common start, open, and close procedure.
2. Click the Start icon.
3. Click on the Program.
4. Click on the Command Prompt
The cursor will be at the right of the default prompt C:\> Any data that is read will be stored in that
drive/directory and any data written will try to originate from the same drive/directory. If you wish to
read or write to or from a different drive/directory, enter cd newdir (where newdir is a fully qualified
valid drive and dir) to change to the new directory.
5. Enter ntutil
6. The following menu will appear on the screen.
Manual Test:
Batch Test:
Exit ntutil:
Enter Command:
7. Select Manual Test
The Manual menu will appear (see Figure 9-38 on page 9-87).
8. Select Open by its number 20 open.
SYNTAX: open device-file RW
$D RO

where RW means read/write

RO means read only

for example,
open RW means open default device tape0
open $D RO means open device specified by -d option
open tape0 RO means open device tape0

If the special file $D is specified, the -d value must be given on the

command line, and will be substituted for $D.
9. * * * Select the desired test to run by its number. * * *
Run the appropriate tests and complete the necessary tasks.
* * * Return here to finish the call. * * *
10. Select Close 21, then press Enter.
11. After tests are complete, quit the Command Prompt window by clicking on the X in the upper right
hand corner of the screen.
12. Call completed: see “End of Call” on page 9-8.

9-86 IBM 3590 MI

BASE MODE
Test tool version x.x.x.x
Variable settings
==================== BASE MODE ========================================
gp->fd0=-1 gp->fd1=-1 block size=1024 block count=1
hex block id = 0000000000000000
return_error_when_fail 1 exit_on_unexpected_result 0 trace_flag 0

manual test menu:

=======================================================================
1: set device special file 2: display symbols
3: set block size R/W (now !0 fixed) 4: set block count (R/W)
5: set return error when fail 6: set/reset trace
7: set exit on unexpected result 8: Library Mode
=======================================================================
20: open 21: close
22: read 23: write
24: read and display block 25: flush (buffer->media)
26: read block id 27: erase
28: locate block id 29: display block data
=======================================================================
30: write filemark(s) 31: rewind
32: forward space filemark(s) 33: unload
34: reverse space filemark(s) 35: load (3590 System Mode)
36: forward space record(s) 37: return error
38: reverse space record(s) 39: test unit ready
43: set media parms (block size) 44: set dev parms (compression)
46: get device information
48: get medium information 49: inquiry
53: space EOD 54: display message
=======================================================================
70: system command

=======================================================================
80: Force Dump 81: Read Dump
82: Update Code 83: Log Sense
84: Get Last Sense 85: Get Version
86: Associative/Persistent WProtect 87: Read/Write Test
88: Find Devices 89: Get MTDevice info
=======================================================================
99: return to main menu

=======================================================================
enter selection:

Figure 9-38. Base Mode

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-87

Exercising Drive Attached to Windows NT or Windows 2000 by Using
NTUTIL

NTUTIL
Refer to “Appendix A” on page B-1 for more information on using ntutil in the Windows NT or
Windows 2000 system environment. For a complete update on device driver software, see the IBM
SCSI Tape Drive, Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide.

Note: The drive exercise procedure may be performed using the menu-driven interface of the ntutil
program. To invoke the ntutil program in this format, enter the common commands and option 87 to
Read/Write Test:

Remember the read/write test writes on the tape. Use a scratch tape.
1. Verify that the IBM tape subsystem is powered ON and online.
2. Verify that the tape drive has a scratch tape cartridge loaded.
3. Start ntutil and open the drive (see 1 on page 9-86).
4. Perform either a rewind (31) or a test unit ready (39) to clear not-ready to ready status. If status is
present, NTUTIL will issue a 1110 (ERROR_MEDIA_CHANGED) message.
5. Read and write on the tape by using the following command 87 (Read/Write Test).
If the operation completed successfully (Message Error_Success), go to the end of test, step 11 on
page 9-86, or go to the Start Page of “SCSI Bus Problem Determination” on page 9-108.

9-88 IBM 3590 MI

Host Attachment Checkout

Checking Channel Attachment – iSeries (OS/400)

To verify that a 3590 is attached properly to an iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System, perform the following:
1. Type WRKCFGSTS *DEV *TAP ASTLVL(*BASIC) at the prompt. The following screen appears, which
shows all of the attached tape device names. In this example, TAP13
1 is the device name to use
for VFYTAP.
Work with Tape Devices
System: 12345678
Type options below, then press Enter.
1=Make available 2=Make unavailable 5=Display details
7=Display message 8=Work with controller 9=Rename
13=Change description

Opt Device Type Status

TAPM1.B1 3590 Unavailable (use Opt 1)
TAP01 6380 Unavailable (use Opt 1)
TAP02 3490 Unavailable (use Opt 1)
TAP03 3490 Unavailable (use Opt 1)
TAP09 6390 Unavailable (use Opt 1)
TAP10 3480 Unavailable (use Opt 1)
TAP11 3480 Unavailable (use Opt 1)
TAP13
1
3590 Available to use
TAP14 6390 Unavailable (use Opt 1)
TAP15 6380 Unavailable (use Opt 1)
TAP16 6390 Available to use
TAP17 6380 Available to use
Bottom

F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Command line F11=Display descriptions

F12=Cancel F17=Top F18=Bottom F21=Select assistance level

2. Type VFYTAP (the Verify Tape command) on the iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System command line.
3. Type tap13, the device associated with the 3590 tape device.
4. Select the Basic read/write test
2 option on the Tape Device Test menu and follow the instructions
provided.
AJCUHQV2 Tape Device Test Menu

Select one of the following:

1. Basic read/write test
2

2. Read/write reliability test
3. Exit test menu
3

Selection
_

F3=Exit

The following screen is displayed when the verification test completes successfully:

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-89

 AJCUHQV3 Tape Problem Analysis

The verification test completed successfully.

Press Enter to continue.

5. When the Tape Device Test menu is displayed, select Exit test menu
3.

9-90 IBM 3590 MI

Checking Channel Attachment – AIX
The devices must be fully installed and the host device driver must be configured and available. See IBM
SCSI Tape Drive, Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide, for
information about installing and using the IBM tape drive, medium changer, and library device drivers.
Also, “Installation and Configuration Instructions” in the above guide describes the smit and cfgmgr
commands. Figure 9-39 shows an example of software and hardware paths that are used in the following
tests. The figure below illustrates unique initiator addresses for a configuration with more than one initiator
sharing a SCSI bus or fibre channel.

Note: Port 1 of a 3590 is connected to two hosts. Host drivers are configured so that one initiator is at
SCSI or Fibre ID address 7 and one initiator is at SCSI or Fibre ID address 6. Tape special file
names on each host are independent and may be different.
Figure 9-39. Host Attachment Example

Inquiry Command
The following are two sequence of events when we inquiry our tape devices. The first is for SCSI only and
the second is for mixed SCSI and fibre channel operation.

SCSI Inquiry Sequence:

1. To check installed tape devices, type lsdev -Cc tape command. From the listing of devices, remember
the ones you are to test. In the following example, device rmt0 is defined
1 to host, but is not
configured. Device rmt1 is available, which indicates it can communicate with host. The SCSI port
address of devices
2 are also shown. The format is “address,0”. In the below figure rmt0 (2,0) is
SCSI address 2 and rmt1 (1,0) is SCSI address 1.

Figure 9-40. Device SCSI Addresses

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-91

 The example in the following text refers to the device rmt1. If you do not know which devices to test,
ask the customer’s system administrator.
2. Type tapeutil and the following menu appears:

Note: Your tapeutil menus may vary from the examples, depending on the level of Atape.driver
installed in your system. The following examples are using Atape.driver at 2.5.1.0.
General Commands:
1. Open a Device 5. Inquiry 9. Log Sense Page
2. Close a Device 6. Test Unit Ready 10. Mode Sense Page
3. Device Info 7. Reserve Device 11. Release Device
4. Tape Drive Service Aids 8. Request Sense Q. Quit Program

Medium Changer Commands:

12. Element Information 16. Move Medium
13. Position To Element 17. Load/Unload Medium
14. Element Inventory 18. Initialize Element Status
15. Prevent Medium Removal 19. Allow Medium Removal

Tape Commands:
20. Query/Set Parameters 30. Read and Write Tests
21. Load Tape 31. Unload Tape
22. Rewind 32. Erase
23. Erase Gap 33. Write Filemarks
24. Forward Space Filemarks 34. Backward Space Filemarks
25. Forward Space Records 35. Backward Space Records
26. Space to End of Data 36. Query/Set Tape Position
27. Log Sense 37. Library Sequence Number
28. Display Message 38. Read or Write Files
29. Synchronize Buffers 39. Recover Buffer Data

Enter Selection:

3. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select the Open a Device option, and press Enter.
4. At the Enter the device special file name: prompt, type /dev/rmt1 (or your actual device).
5. At the Select mode (1=Read/Write, 2=Read Only, 3=Write Only, 4=Append): prompt, type 1 to
receive the Opening device... prompt.
6. At the Hit any key to continue... prompt, press Enter.
General Commands:
1. Open a Device 5. Inquiry 9. Log Sense Page
2. Close a Device 6. Test Unit Ready 10. Mode Sense Page

7. At the Enter Selection for /dev/rmt1: prompt, select the Inquiry option to receive the Issuing
inquiry... and the following data:
Inquiry Data, Length 127
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D
E F 0123456789ABCDEF
0000 - 0180 0202 3300 0038 4942 4D20 2020
2020 ..3..8IBM
0010 - 3033 3539 3045 3031 3033 3539 3042
3131 03590B1103590B11
0020 - 3344 3201 4353 3030 3030 3030 3030
3031 3D2.CS0000000001
0030 - 3632 2041 C000 0180 04D0 6101 82D0
6101 62 A.....Pa..Pa.
0040 - 80D0 6101 .Pa.. a..Pa..Pa.
0050 - 02D0 Example 0000 .Pa..Pa.........
0060 - 0000 0000 ................
0070 - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 ...............
8. At the Hit any key to continue... prompt, press Enter.

9-92 IBM 3590 MI

 General Commands:
1. Open a Device 5. Inquiry 9. Log Sense Page
2. Close a Device 6. Test Unit Ready 10. Mode Sense Page

9. At the Enter Selection for /dev/rmt1: prompt, select the Close a Device option.
The system response is Device closed...

Fibre Inquiry Sequence:

1. To check installed tape devices, type lsdev -Cc tape command. From the listing of devices,
remember the ones you are going to test. In the following example, fibre devices rmt0 and rmt1 are
available, which indicates they can communicate with host. The fibre address is not shown via this
command.
The SCSI devices rmt2 and rmt3 are available and at port addresses (2,0) and (1,0) respectively.
These are SCSI addresses 2 and 1.

$ lsdev -Cc tape [enter]

rmt0 Available 30-70-01 IBM 3590 Tape Drive and Medium Changer (FCP)
rmt1 Available 30-70-01 IBM 3590 Tape Drive and Medium Changer (FCP)
rmt2 Available 10-70-00-2,0 IBM 3590 Tape Drive and Medium Changer
rmt3 Available 10-70-00-1,0 IBM 3590 Tape Drive and Medium Changer

Figure 9-41. Device Fibre and SCSI Addresses

Figure 9-42. Device Fibre Addresses

Perform the following to determine the port address (FCP ID) and port name (FCP World Wide
Name). The example in the following text refers to the device rmt1. Its port address is 0x26 (with
leading 0s not shown) and the port name is “0x500507630040202a”. If you do not know which
devices to test, ask the customer’s system administrator.
2. To find out the “unique identifier” use the following:
a. Enter the following:
$ tapeutil -f /dev/rmt0 qrypath
b. The following will display on the console:

Querying SCSI paths...

Logical Device................. rmt0

SCSI Parent.................... fscsi0
FCP SCSI ID.................... 0x26
FCP Logical Unit............... 0x0
FCP World Wide Name............ 0x500507630040202a
Drive Port Number.............. 0
Path Enabled................... Yes
Alternate Path Configured...... No

3. Type tapeutil and the following menu appears:

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-93

 Note: Your tapeutil menus may vary from the examples, depending on the level of your Atape.driver
installed in your system. The following examples are using Atape.driver at 2.5.1.0.
General Commands:
1. Open a Device 5. Inquiry 9. Log Sense Page
2. Close a Device 6. Test Unit Ready 10. Mode Sense Page
3. Device Info 7. Reserve Device 11. Release Device
4. Tape Drive Service Aids 8. Request Sense Q. Quit Program

Medium Changer Commands:

12. Element Information 16. Move Medium
13. Position To Element 17. Load/Unload Medium
14. Element Inventory 18. Initialize Element Status
15. Prevent Medium Removal 19. Allow Medium Removal

Tape Commands:
20. Query/Set Parameters 30. Read and Write Tests
21. Load Tape 31. Unload Tape
22. Rewind 32. Erase
23. Erase Gap 33. Write Filemarks
24. Forward Space Filemarks 34. Backward Space Filemarks
25. Forward Space Records 35. Backward Space Records
26. Space to End of Data 36. Query/Set Tape Position
27. Log Sense 37. Library Sequence Number
28. Display Message 38. Read or Write Files
29. Synchronize Buffers 39. Recover Buffer Data

Enter Selection:

4. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select the Open a Device option, and press Enter.
5. At the Enter the device special file name: prompt, type /dev/rmt1 (or your actual device).
6. At the Select mode (1=Read/Write, 2=Read Only, 3=Write Only, 4=Append): prompt, type 1 to
receive the Opening device... prompt.
7. At the Hit any key to continue... prompt, press Enter.
General Commands:
1. Open a Device 5. Inquiry 9. Log Sense Page
2. Close a Device 6. Test Unit Ready 10. Mode Sense Page

8. At the Enter Selection for /dev/rmt1: prompt, select the Inquiry option to receive the Issuing
inquiry... and the following data:
Inquiry Data, Length 127
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D
E F 0123456789ABCDEF
0000 - 0180 0202 3300 0038 4942 4D20 2020
2020 ..3..8IBM
0010 - 3033 3539 3045 3031 3033 3539 3042
3131 03590B1103590B11
0020 - 3344 3201 4353 3030 3030 3030 3030
3031 3D2.CS0000000001
0030 - 3632 2041 C000 0180 04D0 6101 82D0
6101 62 A.....Pa..Pa.
0040 - 80D0 6101 .Pa.. a..Pa..Pa.
0050 - 02D0 Example 0000 .Pa..Pa.........
0060 - 0000 0000 ................
0070 - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 ...............
9. At the Hit any key to continue... prompt, press Enter.
General Commands:
1. Open a Device 5. Inquiry 9. Log Sense Page
2. Close a Device 6. Test Unit Ready 10. Mode Sense Page

10. At the Enter Selection for /dev/rmt1: prompt, select the Close a Device option.
The system response is Device closed...

9-94 IBM 3590 MI

Read and Write Tests
Load a scratch cartridge in the 3590 before you start this test. (See “Mount specified volume to specified
drive” step 4 on page 9-117 if the device is in a 3494 library.)

Attention: This test overwrites any data or tape label on the tape.
1. If the response from the previous test is Hit any key to continue..., press Enter. Otherwise, type
tapeutil to restart.

Note: Your tapeutil menus may vary from the examples, depending on the level of your Atape.driver
installed in your system The following examples are using Atape.driver at 2.5.1.0.
General Commands:
1. Open a Device 5. Inquiry 9. Log Sense Page
2. Close a Device 6. Test Unit Ready 10. Mode Sense Page

2. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select the Open a Device option, and press Enter.
3. At the Enter the device special file name: prompt, type /dev/rmt1 (or your specific device).
4. At the Select mode (1=Read/Write, 2=Read Only, 3=Write Only, 4=Append): prompt. type 1.
At the Hit any key to continue.... prompt, press Enter.
General Commands:
1. Open a Device 5. Inquiry 9. Log Sense Page
2. Close a Device 6. Test Unit Ready 10. Mode Sense Page
3. Device Info 7. Reserve Device 11. Release Device
4. Tape Drive Service Aids 8. Request Sense Q. Quit Program

Medium Changer Commands:

12. Element Information 16. Move Medium
13. Position To Element 17. Load/Unload Medium
14. Element Inventory 18. Initialize Element Status
15. Prevent Medium Removal 19. Allow Medium Removal

Tape Commands:
20. Query/Set Parameters 30. Read and Write Tests

5. At the Enter Selection for /dev/rmt1: prompt, select the Read and Write Tests option, and press
Enter.
6. At the Select test (1=Read/Write, 2=Read Only, 3=Write Only): prompt, type 1.
7. At the Hit <Enter> for default 10240 block size or enter new block size:, press Enter.
8. At the Hit <Enter> for default 20 blocks per read/write or enter new blocks: prompt, press Enter.
9. At the Hit <Enter> for default 1 repetition or enter new repetition: prompt, press Enter.
The following data is displayed:
Read/Write test, blocksize 10240 count 20 repetition 1
Setting block size...
Read/Write test pass 20
Writing 10240 bytes, 20 blocks...
Write complete, bytes written 204800, blocks 20
Writing 2 file marks...
Backward spacing 2 file marks...
Backward spacing 1 records...
Reading 204800 bytes, 20 blocks...
Read complete, bytes read 204800, blocks 20
Forward spacing file mark...
Data verification complete, no discrepancies found
Read/Write test completed, total bytes written 204800
10. At the Hit any key to continue... prompt, press Enter.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-95

 General Commands:
1. Open a Device 5. Inquiry 9. Log Sense Page
2. Close a Device 6. Test Unit Ready 10. Mode Sense Page

11. Unload the drive before closing the device in the next step.
12. At the Enter Selection for /dev/rmt1: prompt, select the Close a Device option, and press Enter.
At the Device closed...
Hit any key to continue... prompt, press Enter.
General Commands:
1. Open a Device 5. Inquiry 9. Log Sense Page
2. Close a Device 6. Test Unit Ready 10. Mode Sense Page
3. Device Info 7. Reserve Device 11. Release Device
4. Tape Drive Service Aids 8. Request Sense Q. Quit Program

13. At the Enter Selection: prompt, type q to stop the tapeutil program.

9-96 IBM 3590 MI

| Checking Channel Attachment – Linux
| The devices must be fully installed, and the host device driver must be configured and available. See IBM
| TotalStorage Tape Device Drivers Installation and User’s Guide, for information about installing and using
| the IBM tape drive, medium changer, and library device drivers. Also, “Installation and Configuration
| Instructions” in the above guide describes the smit and cfgmgr commands.

| Tape Device Attachment Test

| This procedure, which tests the attachment of a tape device to a Linux system, assumes that:
| v Your device is attached at /dev/IBMtape0.
| v There is no cartridge in the drive.

| When the Hit<Enter>to Continue... message displays or when you are told to enter information, press
| Enter after following the instruction. When the utility displays information, use the appropriate hardware
| manual to verify that the information is reasonable.
| 1. Open a Linux window.
| 2. If you want to perform a more complete test, mount a writable scratch cartridge manually into the
| driver, or if your device has an autoloader attached, use the “Medium Changer Device Attachment
| Test” to mount a writable scratch cartridge.
| 3. Enter IBMtapeutil. A menu displays.
| 4. Enter 1 (Open a Device).
| 5. Enter /dev/IBMtape0 when prompted for the device name.
| 6. Enter 1 (Read/Write).
| 7. Enter 3 (Inquiry). Specify 0 when prompted for an inquiry page. This concludes a basic test of the
| device, SCSI connection, and the device driver. You may stop the test here or continue with the
| following steps to perform a more complete test.
| 8. Enter 4 (Test Unit Ready) until no error occurs.
| 9. Enter 20 (Rewind).
| 10. Enter 28 (Read and Write Tests).
| 11. Enter 1 (Read and Write). Press Enter three times to accept the defaults and to run the test.
| 12. Enter 38 (Unload Tape).
| 13. Enter 2 (Close a Device).
| 14. Enter Q to quit the program.

| Medium Changer Device Attachment Test

| This procedure, which tests the attachment of a medium changer device to a Linux system, assumes that:
| v Your device is attached at /dev/IBMchanger0.
| v You have a cartridge in at least one of the slots.

| When the Hit<Enter>to Continue... message displays or when you are told to enter information, press
| Enter after following the instruction. When the utility displays information, use the appropriate hardware
| manual to verify that the information is reasonable.
| 1. Open a Linux window.
| 2. Enter IBMtapeutil. A menu displays.
| 3. Enter 1 (Open a Device).
| 4. Enter /dev/IBMchanger0 when prompted for the device name.
| 5. Enter 3 (Inquiry). Specify 0 when prompted for an inquiry page. This concludes a basic test of the
| device, SCSI connection, and the device driver. You may stop the test here or continue with the
| following steps to perform a more complete test.
| 6. Enter 4 (Test Unit Ready).
| 7. Enter 60 (Element Information).

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-97

| 8. Enter 62 (Element Inventory).
| 9. From the output of the previous step, select a writable, scratch cartridge, and determine its element
| ID. Also, select the element ID of an unoccupied slot.
| 10. Enter 64 (Move Medium), then supply the address of the cartridge, followed by the address of the
| unoccupied slot. Verify that the cartridge moved.
| 11. Enter 62 (Element Inventory). Verify that the inventory was updated correctly.
| 12. Enter 2 (Close a Device).
| 13. Enter Q to quit the program.

| 3494 Enterprise Tape Library Attachment Test

| The following procedure tests the attachment of a 3494 Enterprise Tape Library to a Linux system. The
| procedure assumes that your device is defined in /etc/ibmat1.conf as L3494.
| 1. Bring up a shell prompt.
| 2. Enter mtlib -l L3494 -ql (ends with a lowercase L).
| 3. Enter mtlib -l L3494 -qL (ends with an uppercase L).
|

9-98 IBM 3590 MI

Checking Channel Attachment – Sun
The devices must be fully installed and the host device The diagram below shows an example of the software and
driver must be configured and available. hardware paths that are used in the following tests.

TAPEUTIL
Refer to IBM SCSI Tape Drive, Medium Changer,
and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s
Guide, GC35-0154, for details of the tapeutil
program in the Sun (Solaris) system.

You may require assistance from the customer during this

process.

To verify that the device driver and the devices are

functional, use the tapeutil program, which is provided
with the IBM SCSI Tape Device Driver for SunOS.

Note: Port 1 of a 3590 is connected to two hosts. The

host drivers are configured so that one initiator is at SCSI
or Fibre ID address 7 and one initiator is at SCSI or Fibre
ID address 6. The tape special file names on each host
are independent and may be different.

1. Load a scratch tape cartridge in the IBM 3590.

Attention: This test overwrites any data or label existing on the tape cartridge.
2. Type /opt/IBMtape/tapeutil. The following menu is displayed: (This menu reappears at the
completion of each command.)

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-99

 +---------------------------------------------------+
| TEST UTILITY |
| IBM SCSI Tape Device Driver for SunOS |
+---------------------------------------------------+
1: Open Device 17: Forward Space File
2: Close Device 18: Backward Space File
19: Forward Space Record
3: Inquiry 20: Backward Space Record
4: Request Sense 21: Locate End Of Data
5: Test Unit Ready
6: Reserve 22: Off-line
7: Release 23: Load Tape
24: Unload Tape
8: Element Information
9: Move Medium 25: Sync Buffer
10: Inventory 26: Display Message

11: Read Data 27: Get Device Status

12: Write Data 28: Get Device Info
29: Get Media Info
13: Write File Mark 30: Get Position
14: Erase Tape 31: Set Position
15: Rewind 32: Get Parameter
16: Retention 33: Set Parameter
Q: Quit Program

3. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 1 to open the device.

4. At the Enter device special file name: prompt, type /dev/rmt/1st (or the actual device special file for
your device).
5. At the Select mode (1=read-write, 2=read, 3=write, 4=append): prompt, type 1. The Device
opened response is displayed.
6. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 3 to receive the device inquiry data. The inquiry data follows:
The IOC_INQUIRY ioctl succeeded. (EXAMPLE)

The inquiry data is:

1 80 2 2 33 0 0 38 49 42 4d 20 20 20 20 20
30 33 35 39 30 42 31 31 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
34 44 30 33 54 55 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 30 30
32 39 30 20 3 0 0 81 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 5 to verify device test-unit ready. The response is:
The IOC_TEST_UNIT_READY ioctl succeeded.

8. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 12 to perform write verification.

9. At the Enter block size: prompt, type 1024.
10. At the Enter blocking factor: prompt, type 256.
11. At the Enter megabytes to write: prompt, type 10.
12. At the Enter pattern file name: prompt, press Enter.

9-100 IBM 3590 MI

13. At the Enter random seed: prompt, type 0. The response is:
Generated 262144 bytes of random data using seed 7892.
********************************
********
Transferred 10MB in 1.98 seconds for rate of 5.16MB/second.

14. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 15 to rewind the tape. The response is:
The STIOC_TAPE_OP ioctl succeeded.

15. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 11 to perform read verification.

16. At the Enter block size: prompt, type 1024.
17. At the Enter blocking factor: prompt, type 256.
18. At the Enter megabytes to write: prompt, type 10. The response is:
********************************
********
Transferred 10MB in 2.19 seconds for rate of 4.69MB/second.

19. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 15 to rewind the tape. The response is:
The STIOC_TAPE_OP ioctl succeeded.

20. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 2 to close the device. The Device closed response is
displayed.
21. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select Q to exit the tapetest program.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-101

Checking Channel Attachment – HP-UX
The devices must be fully installed and the host device driver must be configured and available. See IBM SCSI Tape
Drive, Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide, for information about installing and
using the IBM SCSI tape drive, medium changer, and library device drivers. Also, “Installation and Configuration
Instructions” in the above guide describes the smit and cfgmgr commands.

Refer to “Host Attachment Example” diagram below at the right for an example of the software and hardware paths
that are used in the following tests. The figure illustrates unique initiator addresses for a configuration with more than
one initiator sharing a SCSI bus.
__ 1. Load a scratch tape cartridge in the IBM 3590.
Attention: This test overwrites any data or label
existing on the tape cartridge.
__ 2. Type /opt/IBMtape/tapeutil.
__ 3. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 1 to open
the device.
__ 4. At the Enter device special file name: prompt,
type /dev/rmt/0st (or the actual device special file Host Attachment Example
for your device).
__ 5. At the Select mode (1=read-write, 2=read,
3=write, 4=append): prompt, type 1. The Device
opened response is displayed.
__ 6. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 10 to
receive the device inquiry data. Valid data
indicating the device is a 3590 should be
displayed.
__ 7. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 9 to verify
the device test-unit is ready.
__ 8. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 21 to
perform write verification.
__ 9. At the Enter block size: prompt, type 1024.
__ 10. At the Enter blocking factor: prompt, type 256.
__ 11. At the Enter megabytes to write: prompt, type
10.
__ 12. At the Enter pattern file name: prompt, press
Enter.
__ 13. At the Enter random seed: prompt, type 0.
__ 14. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 24 to
rewind the tape.
__ 15. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 20 to
perform read verification. Note: Port 1 of a 3590 is connected to two hosts. The
__ 16. At the Enter block size: prompt, type 1024. host drivers are configured so that one initiator is at SCSI
__ 17. At the Enter blocking factor: prompt, type 256. address 7 and one initiator is at SCSI address 6. The tape
__ 18. At the Enter megabytes to write: prompt, type special file names on each host are independent and may
10. be different.
__ 19. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 24 to
rewind the tape.
__ 20. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 2 to close
the device. The Device closed response is
displayed.
__ 21. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select Q to exit
the tapetest program.

9-102 IBM 3590 MI

Checking Channel Attachment – Windows NT or Windows 2000
The devices must be fully installed and the host device driver must be configured and available. See IBM SCSI Tape
Drive, Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide, for information about installing and
using the IBM SCSI tape drive, medium changer, and library device drivers. Also, “Installation and Configuration
Instructions” in the above guide describes the smit and cfgmgr commands.

Refer to “Host Attachment Example” diagram below at the right for an example of the software and hardware paths
that are used in the following tests.
__ 1. Load a scratch tape cartridge in the IBM 3590.
Attention: This test overwrites any data or label
existing on the tape cartridge.
__ 2. Type ntutil.
__ 3. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 1 to open
the device.
__ 4. At the Enter device special file name: prompt,
type tape0 (or the actual device special file for
your device).
__ 5. At the Select mode (1=read-write, 2=read,
3=write, 4=append): prompt, type 1. The Device Host Attachment Example
opened response is displayed.
__ 6. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 49 to
receive the device inquiry data. Valid data
indicating the device is a 3590 should be
displayed.
__ 7. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 39 to verify
the device test-unit is ready.
__ 8. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 23 to
perform write verification.
__ 9. At the Enter block size: prompt, type 1024.
__ 10. At the Enter blocking factor: prompt, type 256.
__ 11. At the Enter megabytes to write: prompt, type
10.
__ 12. At the Enter pattern file name: prompt, press
Enter.
__ 13. At the Enter random seed: prompt, type 0. The
PC will write data to the tape and status will be
displayed.
__ 14. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 31 to
rewind the tape.
__ 15. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 22 to
perform read verification.
__ 16. At the Enter block size: prompt, type 1024.
__ 17. At the Enter blocking factor: prompt, type 256.
__ 18. At the Enter megabytes to write: prompt, type
10. Data will be read from the tape and status will
be displayed.
__ 19. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 31 to
rewind the tape.
__ 20. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select 2 to close
the device. The Device closed response is
displayed.
__ 21. At the Enter Selection: prompt, select Q to exit
the tapetest program.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-103

Checking Channel Attachment using NTUTIL under Windows NT or
Windows 2000

NTUTIL
Refer to APPENDIX A for more information on using ntutil in the Windows NT or Windows 2000
system environment. For a complete update on device driver software, see the IBM SCSI Tape Drive,
Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide.

Notes:
1. The 3590 must be powered ON before the Windows NT or Windows 2000 device is powered ON.
If the 3590 power is not ON when the Windows NT or Windows 2000 is powered ON, the Windows
NT or Windows 2000 device will not recognize the 3590. If the 3590 is powered ON after the Windows
NT or Windows 2000 device has been powered ON, the Windows NT or Windows 2000 device will still
not recognize the 3590.
2. The sense procedure may be performed using the menu-driven interface of the ntutil program. To
invoke the ntutil program in this format enter the common commands, item 83 to Force the Log of
Sense, and item 84 Get Last Sense.

To check out the SCSI interface, execute a Force Sense, followed by a Get Last Sense command:
1. Verify that the IBM tape subsystem is powered ON and is online.
2. Verify that the tape drive has a tape cartridge loaded.
3. Start ntutil and open the drive (see 1 on page 9-86).
4. Execute the following command 83 (Log Sense).
5. Read the sense information by executing the following command 84 (Get Last Sense).
If the operation completed successfully (Message Error_Success), go to the end of test, step 11 on
page 9-86. If the operation did not complete successful perform one of the following:
v Go to “SCSI Bus Problem Determination” on page 9-108.
v Go to “Fibre Channel Problem Determination Procedure” on page 9-113.

9-104 IBM 3590 MI

SCSI Testing

Setup SCSI Ports Wrap Test

__ 1. Refer to “Installing SCSI Wrap Tool” diagram at
right. Be sure that the power switch
1 is in the
OFF position.
__ 2. Install the SCSI wrap tool in SCSI port 0
2. As
viewed from the rear, port 0 is on the left. If your Use only P/N 62G1324 or P/N 05H9163 for the SCSI
account has another SCSI wrap tool, install it in wrap test; using the wrong wrap tool may cause the 3590
SCSI port 1, you can check both ports at the same to not run the wrap test.
time.
Installing SCSI Wrap Tool (Rear View)
Notes:
a. There are 2 SCSI wrap tools available for the
3590 — the old style black SCSI wrap tool (P/N
62G1324) and the new style grey SCSI wrap
tool (P/N 05H9163).
If you have access to both tools, you should
use the grey tool for the SCSI Ports Wrap Test.
You must use the black tool for the SCSI Cable
Wrap Test.
b. The Black SCSI wrap tool (P/N 62G1324) can
be plugged directly into the drive connector
2,
as shown, or it can be plugged into the
hammerhead connector on the SCSI cable. The
grey SCSI wrap tool (P/N 05H9163) MUST be
plugged directly into the drive connector
2, as
shown. It will not be detected by the Power On
Self Test if it is plugged into the hammerhead
connector on the SCSI cable.
c. When you switch OFF power to the 3590, wait
approximately 5 seconds before you switch ON
power again.
__ 3. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-105

SCSI Ports Wrap Test
__ 1. Refer to “Installing SCSI Wrap Tool ” diagram at
right. Be sure that the power switch
1 is in the
OFF position.
__ 2. Install the SCSI wrap tool in SCSI port 0
2. As
viewed from the rear, port 0 is on the left. If your
account has another SCSI wrap tool, you can
check both ports at the same time.
Notes:
a. There are 2 SCSI wrap tools available for the
3590 — the old style black SCSI wrap tool (P/N
Use only P/N 62G1324 or P/N 05H9163 for the SCSI
62G1324) and the new style grey SCSI wrap
wrap test; using the wrong wrap tool may cause the 3590
tool (P/N 05H9163).
to not run the wrap test.
If you have access to both tools, you should
use the grey tool for the SCSI Ports Wrap Test Installing SCSI Wrap Tool (Rear View)
and you must use the black tool for the SCSI
Cable Wrap Test.
b. The Black SCSI wrap tool (P/N 62G1324) can
be plugged directly into the drive connector
2,
as shown. Or it can be plugged into the
hammerhead connector on the SCSI cable. The
grey SCSI wrap tool (P/N 05H9163) MUST be
plugged directly into the drive connector
2, as
shown. It will not be detected by the Power On
Self Test if it is plugged into the hammerhead
connector on the SCSI cable.
c. When you switch OFF power to the 3590, wait
approximately 5 seconds before you switch ON
power again.
__ 3. Set the power switch to the ON position. The wrap
test runs automatically. When the drive detects that
the wrap tool is installed in a port, the drive enters
CE mode rather than operator mode during the
power-on sequence.
This power-on test takes approximately 2.5 minutes
to complete.
If a failure occurs, a message can be posted in the
operator/CE panel, or the operator/CE panel can
be blank. If any of these conditions exist, go to the
START section for further analysis.
__ 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for SCSI port 1.
__ 5. Set the power switch to the OFF position and
remove the SCSI wrap tool.
__ 6. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

9-106 IBM 3590 MI

SCSI Cable Wrap Test
The entire SCSI bus cabling can be tested using this procedure. By moving the SCSI wrap tool to various
locations along the bus, a bad cable or poor connection can be isolated.

Notes:
1. This cable wrap test requires the black SCSI wrap tool (P/N 62G1324). The grey SCSI
wrap tool (P/N 05H9163) will not be detected if it is plugged into one of the cable
connectors. The grey wrap tool is only effective for the SCSI Port Wrap Test and must
be plugged directly into the drive SCSI connector to work properly.
2. The SCSI bus terminator must be removed from the SCSI bus string that you are
testing or the wrap test will not detect the wrap tool.
3. The SCSI wrap test does not check for duplicate addresses. Ensure that all drives on
this SCSI bus string have unique addresses. This could be causing your SCSI problem.

__ 1. Remove the host cable connection from the 3590 SCSI bus string you will be testing. This will
prevent any host interference during the wrap test.
__ 2. Remove the SCSI terminator and install the SCSI wrap tool. As viewed from the rear, port 0 is on
the left. If you have another SCSI wrap tool, you can check both ports at the same time.
__ 3. Press reset on all 3590s in this SCSI bus string, or if the 3590s were powered OFF, then turn
power ON. The wrap test runs automatically. When the drive detects that the wrap tool is installed
in one of the ports, the drive enters CE mode, rather than operator mode during the power-on
sequence.
v If any of the drives fail to enter CE mode during the power-on sequence, you can verify the
SCSI wrap tool connection with the following procedure:
From the CE menu,
a. Select CONFIG/INSTALL.
b. Select DRV OPTIONS.
c. Select WRAP TOOLS.
d. The port you are testing will show PRSNT if the wrap tool was detected.
v If a failure occurs on one or more of the 3590 drives, an error message can be posted on the
operator/CE panel, or the operator/CE panel can be blank. If you have a SCSI cable problem
and the wrap test fails, a FID message should be displayed. Go to the START section for that
FID to isolate the problem.
v The SCSI wrap tool can be moved anywhere on the SCSI bus to help in further problem
isolation. The drives must be reset, or powered OFF then ON, each time the wrap tool is moved
to a different location. You do not have to disconnect cables, just plug the wrap tool into the
hammerhead cable. Once you have isolated the problem to a single cable or drive, you will have
to disconnect the cable at the drive to test the cable or drive.
v It is important to know how your drives are cabled and how the cables are stacked at the drive
SCSI port. Refer to the cable diagrams in Figure 8-24 on page 8-46 and Figure 8-25 on page
8-47 for cabling examples. Your cabling may vary from the examples, so use them for reference
only.
v To test the host to 3590 SCSI cable, you will have to plug the wrap connector into the cable at
the host end of the cable. If the cable does not have a hammerhead connector at the host end, it
may be necessary to install an interposer to change the connector from male to female so the
wrap tool can be plugged in. Run the wrap test from the same drive that the host cable is
connected into.
__ 4. After the defective cable has been isolated and replaced, remove the SCSI wrap tool and reinstall
the SCSI terminator in the same location that you removed it from previously. Restore the cabling
back to its normal state.
__ 5. Run tapeutil or tapetest, depending on the host system, on all drives to verify the SCSI bus. Then
return the drives to the customer, or return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-107

SCSI Bus Problem Determination
Use the “Solid SCSI Bus Errors” or the “Intermittent SCSI Bus Errors” on page 9-109 procedure.

Attention: Notify the customer that the devices on the SCSI bus must be varied offline before the
problem determination procedure can be performed.

Solid SCSI Bus Errors

Determine the number of drives on the SCSI bus.

Single Tape Drive on SCSI Bus:

1. Ensure that the drive power is ON.
2. Ensure that the drive SCSI address is the same as the SCSI address being used by the host
program.
3. Ensure that the CE SCSI Config menu options are set correctly. Some SCSI configurations must be
set to Slow and Narrow to prevent SCSI time-out errors. See “CE SCSI Config Menu” on page 5-55
for more information.
4. If steps 1, 2, and 3 are OK, run the SCSI wrap test. See “SCSI Ports Wrap Test” on page 9-106.

Note: Refer to “SCSI Bus Attachment” on page 8-43 to ensure that all of the SCSI cables,
interposers and terminators are installed correctly.
5. If the SCSI wrap test fails, replace the card pack. See “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67.
6. If the SCSI wrap test runs successful you can test the SCSI cable only if you have the Black SCSI
wrap tool P/N 62G1324. See “SCSI Cable Wrap Test” on page 9-107 and install the wrap tool on the
end of the cable to be tested. Run the SCSI Cable wrap test. If the test fails, replace the bad cable.
7. If the SCSI Ports wrap test and the SCSI cable wrap test both run successfully, check the SCSI
attachment at the host to confirm that a problem still exists.

Note: Be sure to remove the wrap connector and restore the SCSI cable connections.
Perform one of the following procedures, depending upon which host system you have:
v AIX, see “Checking Channel Attachment – AIX” on page 9-91
v iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System, see “Checking Channel Attachment – iSeries (OS/400)” on
page 9-89
v HP-UX, see “Checking Channel Attachment – HP-UX” on page 9-102
v Windows NT or Windows 2000, see “Checking Channel Attachment – Windows NT or Windows
2000” on page 9-103
v a, see “Checking Channel Attachment – Sun” on page 9-99

This will verify that the drive is available and properly configured at the host.
8. If the problem still exists, check the SCSI attachment at the drive. Refer to “SCSI Bus Attachment” on
page 8-43 to ensure that all of the SCSI cables, interposers and terminators are installed correctly.
9. If the problem still exists after checking the SCSI attachment at the host and the drive, replace the
SCSI terminator (first), then the SCSI cable and the interposer (if installed).
10. If the problem still exists after replacing the SCSI terminator, cable and interposer, tell the customer
that the fault is probably with the host hardware or software.
11. When the problem is corrected (or determined to be a host problem), restore all of the SCSI cables,
interposers, and terminators to their correct position, then return to the procedure that sent you here,
or go to “End of Call” on page 9-8.

Multiple Tape Drives on SCSI Bus:

1. Use one of the following procedures for host system you have, to determine if all of the drives on the
SCSI bus have the problem.
v iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System, see “Checking Channel Attachment – iSeries (OS/400)” on
page 9-89

9-108 IBM 3590 MI

 v AIX, see “Checking Channel Attachment – AIX” on page 9-91
v Linux, see “Checking Channel Attachment – Linux” on page 9-97
v Hewlett-Packard (HP-UX), see “Checking Channel Attachment – HP-UX” on page 9-102
v Windows NT or Windows 2000, see “Checking Channel Attachment – Windows NT or Windows
2000” on page 9-103
v Sun, see “Checking Channel Attachment – Sun” on page 9-99
2. If all of the drives on the SCSI bus have the problem, either the bus is hung or the SCSI cable from
the host to the first device on the bus is defective.
Ensure that the SCSI cable from the host to the first device is connected correctly. Replace the cable, if
necessary.
3. If the problem exists on one or more, but not all, of the drives on the bus, it will be necessary to
determine the first failing drive on the bus.
a. Disconnect all except the first drive on the SCSI bus and move the terminator to the first SCSI
drive.
b. Test the bus operation to determine if a failure occurs on that drive.
c. Continue to connect one drive at a time onto the bus until the first failing drive is located.
4. When you have located the first failing drive on the bus, use the procedure “Single Tape Drive on SCSI
Bus” on page 9-108 to correct the problem.
5. When the problem is corrected, restore all of the SCSI cables, interposers, and terminators to their
correct position, then return to the procedure that sent you here, or go to “End of Call” on page 9-8.

Intermittent SCSI Bus Errors

1. Get the layout of failing SCSI bus. The maximum SCSI bus length for a differential SCSI bus is 25 m
(82 ft.), minus 0.2 m (0.66 ft.) per connection. Figure 9-43 shows an example of how to calculate the
bus length. Figure 9-43 shows the cable part numbers for each length. Ensure that the total length
does not exceed the maximum of 25 m (82 ft.).

Figure 9-43. SCSI Bus Cable Lengths

Table 9-15. Part Numbers for the 3590 SCSI Bus Cables
Key Meters Feet P/N Usual Connection

1 0.6 1.97 05H4644 Devices side-by-side in rack

2 2.8 9.19 05H4647 Device in same rack as processor

3 3.4 11.15 05H4645 Device is horizontal with another device in a 3494

4 3.8 12.47 05H4646 Device is vertical with another device in a 3494

5 4.5 14.76 05H4648 Device connection to the host

6 12.0 39.37 05H4649 Device connection to the host

7 18.0 59.06 05H4650 Device connection to the host

8 25.0 82.02 05H4651 Device connection to the host

2. Obtain the errors that the device reported to the host. Refer to the Message Section for details, if
necessary. For example, if the device is attached to a pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System, run tapeutil.
Select option 9, Error Log Analysis. Gather all possible error information.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-109

If Single Drive on SCSI Bus:

Note: This procedure defines using a trace tool. The trace tool is used under direct assistance from your
next level of support.
1. Replace or swap the SCSI bus cable and the terminator.
2. Start a host trace of the next failure. For example, if you are using the AIX Tape Device Driver, type
atrc to start the trace. See device driver documentation for more information.
3. Get a 3590 microcode dump and send it to your next level of support for analysis.
4. Connect the SCSI bus trace tool if a failure occurs. On the next failure, get a 3590 microcode dump
and a SCSI bus trace. Send the dump and trace to your next level of support for analysis.

If Multiple Drives on SCSI Bus:

Notes:
1. This procedure defines using a trace tool. The trace tool is used under direct assistance from your next
level of support.
2. If you run a SCSI bus trace tool and you have more than one drive running, the non-failing drives may
overlay the error.
v If all drives fail:
1. Replace or swap the SCSI bus cable between the host and the first device and terminator.
2. Get a 3590 microcode dump and send it to your next level of support for analysis.
3. Start a host trace of the next failure. For example, if you are using the AIX Tape Device Driver, type
atrc to start the trace. See device driver documentation for more information.
4. Attach the SCSI bus trace tool if a failure occurs. On the next failure, get a 3590 microcode dump
and a SCSI bus trace. Send the dump and the device driver trace to your next level of support for
analysis.
v If end drives fail:
1. Replace or swap the SCSI bus cable and the terminator between the last drive that works and the
first drive that fails.
2. Get a 3590 microcode dump and send it to your next level of support for analysis.
3. Start a host trace of the next failure. For example, if you are using the AIX Tape Device Driver, type
atrc to start the trace. See device driver documentation for more information.
4. Connect the SCSI bus trace tool if a failure occurs. On the next failure, get a 3590 microcode dump
and a SCSI bus trace. Send the dump and the trace to your next level of support for analysis.
v If only one drive (not end drive) fails:
1. Get a 3590 microcode dump and send it to your next level of support for analysis.
2. Connect the SCSI bus trace tool.
3. Start a host trace of the next failure. For example, if you are using the AIX Tape Device Driver, type
atrc to start the trace. See device driver documentation for more information.
4. On the next failure, get a 3590 microcode dump and a SCSI bus trace. Send the dump and trace to
your next level of support for analysis.

9-110 IBM 3590 MI

Library Manager Testing

Setup Library Manager Port Wrap Test

Use only P/N 39F3884 (a 3494 or 3495 special tool) for the wrap test; using the wrong wrap tool may cause the 3590
to not run the wrap test.
Installing Wrap Tool (Rear View)

__ 1. Refer to “Installing Wrap Tool ” diagram at right. Be

sure that the power switch
1 is in the OFF
position.
__ 2. Plug the 9-pin to 25-pin interposer
2 P/N
05H3895 in the back of the drive
4 (library
manager connector), and then plug the terminator

3 P/N 39F3884 in the interposer.
__ 3. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Library Manager Port Wrap Test

Use only P/N 39F3884 (a 3494 or 3495 special tool) for the wrap test; using the wrong wrap tool may cause the 3590
to not run the wrap test.

__ 1. Refer to “Installing Wrap Tool ” diagram at right. Set

the power switch
1 to the OFF position.
Note: When you switch OFF power to the 3590,
Installing Wrap Tool (Rear View)
wait approximately 5 seconds before you switch
ON power again.
__ 2. Plug the 9-pin to 25-pin interposer
2 P/N
05H3895 in the back of the drive
4 (library
manager connector), and then plug the terminator

3 P/N 39F3884 in the interposer.
__ 3. Set the power switch to the ON position. The wrap
test runs automatically. When the drive detects that
the wrap tool is installed in the port, the drive
enters CE mode rather than operator mode during
the power-on sequence.
This power-on test takes approximately 2.5 minutes
to complete.
If a failure occurs, a message can be posted in the
operator/CE panel, or the operator/CE panel can
be blank. If any of these conditions exist, go to the
START section for further analysis.
__ 4. Set the power switch to the OFF position and
remove the wrap tool.
__ 5. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-111

 Fibre Channel Testing

Fibre Channel Ports Wrap Test

Attention: Notify the customer that all of the devices on the fibre channel must be varied offline before
the Wrap Test procedure can be performed.

Since the channel is an active device, the preferred and safest method to work on a drive is to take all of
the fibre channel ports offline first.

To run the fibre channel ports wrap test, perform the following steps:
__ 1. Quiesce all activity to the drives.
__ 2. Remove any cartridges left in the drive.
__ 3. Vary the drive offline.
__ 4. Power OFF the drive.
__ 5. Unplug the fibre channel cable connector. This might open the fibre loop connection.
| __ 6. Plug the fibre wrap tool. See Table 3-11 on page 3-48 for usage information, and return here.

Note: Do not run the wrap test without the wrap tool installed. This could disturb the fibre channel
| loop, causing performance or I/O problems on the fibre loop.
__ 7. Power ON the drive.
__ 8. Select fibre wrap option on the operator/CE panel. See “CE Verify Fix Menu” on page 5-39 and
“CE Fibre Wrap Menu” on page 5-60.
v If wrap test fails, a FID message should be displayed. Go to the START section to isolate the
problem.
v If wrap test passes, continue.
| __ 9. Move the wrap tool to the end of the connecting cable at the bulkhead. This will test the drive and
| all the cable to the bulkhead. See Table 3-11 on page 3-48 for usage information, and return here.
__ 10. Run the wrap test again.
v If wrap test fails, replace the cable from the drive to the bulkhead.
v If wrap test passes, continue with this procedure.
__ 11. The 3590 can be ordered with several lengths of fibre cabling. See Table 3-3 on page 3-11. Plug
the fibre cable into the bulkhead. Insert the wrap tool and fibre wrap duplex adapter at the host or
switch end of the cable. Go to the drive and run the Wrap Test. This will test the drive and all the
cabling.
v If the Wrap Test fails, replace the cabling.
v If the Wrap Test passes, the drive and the cable are good.
Notes:
a. The tests can be looped at any point. See “CE Loop Diag Menu” on page 5-42.
b. The wrap test can only be run on cable lengths up to 250 m (820 ft). For cable lengths greater
than 250 m, verify the cable using the fibre cable tool kit (contact your next level of support for
details of test and location of tools).
__ 12. If you still have a fibre channel failure, the problem may be at the host. Go to the service manual
for the host or contact your next level of support.
__ 13. Remove the wrap tool and Fibre wrap duplex adapter and restore the fibre channel connection.

Note: At completion of activity, be sure to have the customer do a reconfiguration on all systems
to update the configuration.

9-112 IBM 3590 MI

Fibre Channel Problem Determination Procedure
Common Fibre Messages
See items 4 and 5, Messages and Supplemental Message (Fibre Channel Only) in Table 5-2 on page 5-7
for fibre channel messages displayed on the operator/CE panel.

Fibre Bus Problem Determination

Use the “Solid Fibre Channel Errors” procedure or the “Intermittent Fibre Channel Errors” on page 9-114
procedure.

Attention: Notify the customer that the devices on the fibre channel must be varied offline before the
problem determination procedure can be performed.

Before starting, verify the fibre channel topology. Verify that a problem exists between the drive, drive
cable, and the device to which it is attached. Use switch, hub, or other fibre product service guides as
appropriate. Verify that the switch hub configuration, host adapter, host software levels, and device drivers
are supported.

See IBM Storage Area Network (SAN) Guide on “Web Site Information” on page xxii for the latest
information.

See “SAN Failover Capability” on page 3-14 for information about the Failover function if the drive is
attached to a pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System through a SAN device.

Note: Refer to “Fibre Channel Attachment” on page 8-67 to ensure that all of the fibre channel cables are
installed correctly.

Solid Fibre Channel Errors: Determine the number of drives on the fibre channel.

Single Tape Drive on Fibre Channel Loop:

1. Ensure that the drive is powered ON.
2. Ensure that the drive serial number is the same as the drive serial number being used by the host
program.
3. Ensure that the Operator fibre channel address menu is set correctly. See “Fibre Addresses Menu” on
page 5-28.
4. Ensure that the drive is seeing light and is communicating (the status area should not have “-- -- --”
or “?? ?? ??”). Ensure that the AL_PA is valid (status area does not display “CONFLICT” or
“OFFLINE”).
5. If steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 are OK, run the fibre channel wrap test. See “Fibre Channel Ports Wrap Test”
on page 9-112.

Note: Refer to “Fibre Channel Attachment” on page 8-67 to ensure that all of the fibre channel cables
are installed correctly.
6. If the fibre channel wrap test fails, replace the card pack. See “FID E4: Card Pack” on page 10-67.
7. If the fibre channel wrap test runs successfully you can test the fibre channel cable. See “Fibre
Channel Ports Wrap Test” on page 9-112 and install the wrap tool and duplex adapter on the end of
the cable to be tested. Run the Fibre Cable wrap test. If the test fails, replace the bad cable.
8. If the fibre channel Ports wrap test and the Fibre cable wrap test both run successfully, check the
Fibre attachment at the host to confirm that a problem still exists.

Note: Be sure to remove the duplex wrap tool and restore the fiber cable connections.

9. Perform one of the following:

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-113

 v “Checking Channel Attachment – iSeries (OS/400)” on page 9-89
v “Checking Channel Attachment – AIX” on page 9-91
v “Checking Channel Attachment – HP-UX” on page 9-102
v “Checking Channel Attachment using NTUTIL under Windows NT or Windows 2000” on page 9-104
v “Checking Channel Attachment – Sun” on page 9-99
This will verify that the drive is available and properly configured at the host.
10. If the problem still exists, check the fibre channel attachment at the drive. Refer to “Fibre Cables –
Model E1A/H1A” on page 8-74 to ensure that all of the fibre channel cables are installed correctly.
11. If the problem still exists after checking the Fibre attachment at the host and the drive, replace the
Fibre cable.
12. If the problem still exists after replacing the Fibre cable, tell the customer that the fault is probably
with the host hardware or software.
13. When the problem is corrected (or determined to be a host problem), restore all of the fibre channel
cables to their correct position, then return to the procedure that sent you here, or go to “End of Call”
on page 9-8.

Multiple Tape Drives on Fibre Channel:

1. Use the following procedure to determine if all of the drives on the fibre channel have the problem.
v “Checking Channel Attachment – iSeries (OS/400)” on page 9-89
v “Checking Channel Attachment – AIX” on page 9-91
v “Checking Channel Attachment – HP-UX” on page 9-102
v “Checking Channel Attachment using NTUTIL under Windows NT or Windows 2000” on page 9-104
v “Checking Channel Attachment – Sun” on page 9-99
2. Verify the fibre topology and try to isolate which part of the fibre channel network is experiencing
problems. Verify that the switch hub configuration, host adapter, host software levels, and device
drivers are supported.
See IBM Storage Area Network (SAN) Guide on “Web Site Information” on page xxii for the latest
information.
3. If the problem exists on a small number of drives, use the “Single Tape Drive on Fibre Channel Loop”
procedure, Otherwise:
a. Disconnect all except one failing drive on the fibre channel.
b. Test the fibre connection to determine if a failure occurs on that drive. If it does, use the “Single
Tape Drive on Fibre Channel Loop” procedure.
c. Continue to connect one drive at a time onto the fibre loop.
4. When the problem is corrected, restore all of the fibre channel cables to their correct position, then
return to the procedure that sent you here, or go to “End of Call” on page 9-8.

Intermittent Fibre Channel Errors:

1. Verify the fibre channel topology. Check the maximum length of the cables. Verify that a problem exists
between the drive, drive cable, and the device to which it is attached. Use switch, hub, or other fibre
product service guides as appropriate. Verify that the switch hub configuration, host adapter, host
software levels, and device drivers are supported.
See IBM Storage Area Network (SAN) Guide on “Web Site Information” on page xxii for the latest
information.

Note: Refer to “Fibre Channel Attachment” on page 8-67 to ensure that all of the fibre channel cables
are installed correctly.
2. Obtain the errors reported by the drive to the host. Refer to Message Section for details. For example,
if the drive is attached to a pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System, run tapeutil. Select option 9, Error Log
Analysis. Gather all possible error information.

9-114 IBM 3590 MI

3. If appropriate, refer to other fibre products documentation to try to isolate which part of the Storage
Area Networks (SAN) is experiencing problems. Verify SAN configurations are correct (such as switch
zoning for drive sharing).
4. Start a device driver trace to capture more information. For example, if you are using the AIX Tape
Device driver, type atrc to start the trace. See device driver documentation for more information.
5. On the next failure, get a 3590 microcode dump. Send the dump and the Device Driver trace to your
next level of support for analysis.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-115

Checking 3494 Control Path by Using MTLIB Command from
pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System
The devices must be fully installed and the host device driver must be configured and available. See IBM
SCSI Tape Drive, Medium Changer, and Library Device Drivers: Installation and User’s Guide, for
information about installing and using the 3590 in a tape library. Also, “Tape Library Support Programs” in
the above guide describes the mtlib program.

Figure 9-44 shows an example of the software and hardware paths that are used in the following test.

Figure 9-44. Tape Library Control Path Example

This procedure verifies the control path,
1 which connects the host through the RS-232 port or the LAN
to the library manager. This path is where the host sends commands to the library manager to perform
tasks that do not require the 3590.

To verify the library manager to the 3590 connections
2, see “Library Manager Port Wrap Test” on
page 9-111.

To verify the SCSI connections
3, see “Checking Channel Attachment – AIX” on page 9-91 or “Checking
Channel Attachment – Sun” on page 9-99.

The following responses to the commands are examples only.

1. Determine the library manager control points for the installation by typing
lsdev -Cc tape and you will receive the following response:
...
lmcp0 Available LAN/TTY Library Management Control Point
rmt2 Available 00-01-01-2,0 IBM SSD 3590 Tape Drive
...

Use the following commands to exercise the control path to the device. Run these commands for each
control path. The examples use library control point device /dev/lmcp0, tape device /dev/rmt2, and
volume id CS2201.
2. Display the library inventory by typing
mtlib -l /dev/lmcp0 -qI and you will receive the following response:
...
CS2200 FF00
CS2201 FF00
...

9-116 IBM 3590 MI

3. Audit a specified volume by typing
mtlib -l /dev/lmcp0 -v -a -V CS2201 and you will receive the following response:
Performing Audit of volume CS2201 using /dev/lmcp0
Audit was performed for volser: CS2201

Use the following commands to mount and eject a scratch volume through the convenience
input/output (CIO) station.

The examples use library control point device /dev/lmcp0, tape device /dev/rmt2, and volume id
CS2201.
4. Type mtlib -l /dev/lmcp0 -m -f /dev/rmt2 -V CS2201 to mount the specified volume on the specified
drive. (No output response is produced when the mount is successful.)
5. Go to “Read and Write Tests” on page 9-95 if you want to perform read/write tests, then return here.
6. Demount the volume from the specified drive (demount may be automatic) by typing:
mtlib -l /dev/lmcp0 -d -f /dev/rmt2 to demount the volume. (No output response is produced when
demount is successful.)
7. Eject the specified volume from the library through the convenience input/output (CIO) station by typing
mtlib -l /dev/lmcp0 -v -C -t FF10 -V CS2201 and you will receive the following response:
Performing Change volume category of CS2201 to FF10.
8. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-117

FID E5 – Microcode Problem
If FID E5 is currently displayed on the drive, go to step 1. If FID E5 is not currently displayed on the drive,
go to step 2.
1. If FID E5 is currently displayed on the drive:
a. From FID display, write down the support data (12 characters).
b. Call your next level of support with the FID and support data to determine if this problem is a new
or known microcode problem.
c. For known microcode problems, ask your next level of support to see if a fix exists on latest EC
Level. If a fix exists, update the device to latest EC level.
If a fix is not yet available, tell the customer that engineering is aware of problem and is working on
a fix. Install the fix when available. For known microcode problems, use TAC M01.

New Microcode Problem

d. For new microcode problems, you must provide a microcode dump, the reported FID, and FID
support data to your next level of support.

e. For certain failures, the drive automatically collects dump information. If the dump icon is
displayed when FID E5 is displayed, retrieve the dump via SCSI or cartridge and provide it to your
next level of support. See START section entry point for microcode dump procedures. For new
microcode problems, use TAC M02.
f. If the dump icon is not displayed when FID E5 is displayed, a dump must be forced:
1) Check with the customer to determine if they collected a dump via SCSI for this problem (this
could be the reason why no dump icon is displayed).
2) If the customer has the dump data, provide it to your next level of support.
3) If the customer does not have dump data or is not sure, go to CE Main Dump menu, and select
Force Dump. A dump is available when the dump icon is displayed.
4) Retrieve the dump via SCSI, 3591 Control Unit, or cartridge and provide it to your next level of
support. Go to START section for the entry point to microcode dump procedures. For new
microcode problems, use TAC M02.

End of New Microcode Problem

2. If FID E5 is not currently displayed on the drive:
a. Look at the FID log for most recent FID E5 entry. From the FID log, write down the support data
(twelve characters). Call your next level of support with the FID and support data to determine if
this problem is a new or known microcode problem.
b. For known microcode problems, ask your next level of support to see if a fix exists on latest EC
Level. If one exists, update customer to latest EC level.
If a fix is not available, tell the customer that engineering is aware of problem and working on fix.
Install the fix when available. For known microcode problems, use TAC M01.
c. For new microcode problems, a dump is needed. Check with customer to determine if they had
collected a dump via SCSI for this problem when the FID and the dump icon was displayed. Go to
START section for the entry point to microcode dump procedures.
If the customer has the dump information, provide the dump, the FID, and the FID support data to
your next level of support.
If no dump exists, go to step 3. For new microcode problems, use TAC M02.
3. Determine if the customer can easily recreate the FID E5 message.
If the customer can easily perform operations and/or run job that caused the E5 message, wait until it
occurs and follow the procedure starting at step 1.

9-118 IBM 3590 MI

 If the customer cannot easily recreate the message or it is an inconvenient time, the following options
exist to acquire the dump for the next level of support:
a. Allow the problem to reoccur and customer to take the initiative.
1) The customer can leave the drive with FID E5 message displayed and then call for service.
2) If the dump icon is also displayed, the customer can retrieve the dump via SCSI/fibre channel
| (if host device driver software supports the dump function). Go to “Maintenance Starting Point”
| on page 1-2 for entry point to microcode dump procedures.
3) If the dump icon is not displayed, the customer can force an error dump (Op Services menu),
which provides a FID FF and the dump icon. The FID FF indication means that a dump was
forced (information message). The icon is for the FID E5, so now the customer can retrieve a
dump via SCSI/fibre channel (if the host device driver software supports the dump function). Go
| to “Maintenance Starting Point” on page 1-2 for entry point to microcode dump procedures.
b. If the customer does not take the initiative, you can set a microcode trap. From the 12-character
support data, do the following:
1) Use the first four characters (if not starting with ‘A’ such as Axxx). If the first four characters are
Axxx, use the second set of four characters.
2) Take the four characters (FSC) and select Microcode Trap under the CE Service Utilities
menu. Select the four FSC characters. Use the Saved Traps option, so that POR or Reset
cannot reset the trap. Then select Add Saved FSC Trap from the CE Saved Traps menu. With
this trap set, a dump will automatically be taken when this FSC is encountered, and the dump
icon is displayed.
3) The customer can retrieve the dump via SCSI/fibre channel for you or call you when the dump
| icon appears. Go to “Maintenance Starting Point” on page 1-2 for entry point to microcode
dump procedures.
4. Return to the procedure that sent you here or go to “End of Call” on page 9-8.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-119

 FID E6 or E7– Isolate Fault Between Microcode and Hardware
FID E6 can be displayed in large letters (normal FID) or in small letters with several lines of support data
(abnormal condition). If FID E6 is displayed in large letters, use “FID E6, E7– Normal FID Display
Procedure”.

If FID E6 is displayed in small letters, use “FID E6 – Small Letters (Abnormal Display Condition)” on
page 9-122.

FID E6, E7– Normal FID Display Procedure

Use either the “FID Currently Displayed on Drive” or the “FID Not Currently Displayed on Drive” on
page 9-121 procedure.

FID Currently Displayed on Drive

1. From FID display, write down the support data (12 characters). Call your next level of support with the
FID and support data to determine if this problem is a new or a known microcode problem.

Known Microcode Problem

2. For known microcode problems, see if fix exists on latest EC Level. If a fix exists, update the drive to
the latest EC level. For known microcode problems, use TAC M01.
3. If a fix does not exist, tell the customer that engineering is aware of problem and working on a fix.
Install the fix when it is available.
End of Known Microcode Problem

Possible New Microcode Problem

4. At this point it could be a new microcode problem or a hardware problem. Because it could be a
potential new microcode problem, get a microcode dump.

Dump Icon Also Displayed

For certain failures, the drive automatically collects dump information. Retrieve the dump via SCSI/fibre
channel or cartridge (save for now).

Dump Icon Not Displayed

For certain failures, the drive automatically collects dump information, other failures require you to
force a microcode dump.
5. Check with the customer to determine if they collected a dump via SCSI/fibre channel for this problem
(could be why no dump icon is displayed).
6. If the customer has the dump data, save it for now.
7. If the customer does not have the dump data, or is not sure, go to the CE Main Dump menu, and
select the Force Dump option. Dump exists when dump icon is displayed.
8. Retrieve a dump via SCSI/fibre channel or cartridge or 3591 Control Unit; save it for now.
9. Press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE panel.
10. Run Verify Fix diagnostics.
| a. If you get a new or a different FID, go to “FID Entry Point” on page 1-8 with that information.
b. If you get the same FID (E6 or E7), a hardware problem exists. Do not save the microcode dump.
Perform actions for next FRU in the FID List.

9-120 IBM 3590 MI

 c. If an error does not occur, the fault could be a new microcode problem or an intermittent
electronics problem. Call your next level of support and provide them with dump and the
12-character support data. For new microcode problems, use TAC M02. For electronic problems,
use TAC T21.
d. Go to “End of Call” on page 9-8.

End of Possible New Microcode Problem

FID Not Currently Displayed on Drive

1. Look at the Error Log for most recent FID E6 or FID E7 entry.
2. From the Error Log, record the support data (12 characters). Call your next level of support with the
FID and support data to determine if this problem is a known microcode problem.
3. For known microcode problems:
a. From support, see if fix exists on latest EC Level. If a fix exists, update the drive to latest EC
level.
b. If a fix does not exist, tell customer that engineering is aware of problem and working on a fix.
Install the fix when it is available. For known microcode problems, use TAC M01.
4. At this point it could be a new microcode problem or a hardware problem.
a. Press the Reset pushbutton on the operator/CE panel.
b. Run Verify Fix from the CE Options menu.
| c. If you get a new or a different FID, go to “FID Entry Point” on page 1-8 with that information.
d. If you get the same FID (E6 or E7), a hardware problem exists. Perform the actions for next FRU
in FID List.
5. If an error does not occur, the fault could be a new microcode problem or an intermittent electronics
problem. You need to get a dump.
a. A dump may already exist. Check with the customer to determine if they had collected a dump via
SCSI/fibre channel for this problem when the FID and the dump icon were displayed.
If the customer has the dump data, provide the dump, the FID, and the FID support data to your
next level of support.
b. If no dump exists, go to step 6.
6. Determine if the customer can easily recreate the FID message.
7. If the customer can easily perform operations and/or run the job that caused the message, wait until it
occurs and follow the procedure for the FID currently displayed.
8. If the customer cannot easily recreate the message, or if this is an inconvenient time, the following
options exist to acquire the dump for your next level of support.
Allow the problem to reoccur and have the customer take the initiative (go to step 8a) or you can take
the initiative (go to step 9).
a. The customer can leave the drive with FID message displayed and then call for service.
b. If the dump icon is also displayed, the customer can retrieve a dump via SCSI/fibre channel (if
host device driver software supports).
c. If the dump icon is not displayed, the customer can select Force Error Dump (operator Services
menu), which will provide a FID FF and the dump icon. FID FF indicates that a dump was forced
(information message). The icon is for the FID E6, so now the customer can retrieve a dump via
SCSI/fibre channel (if the host device driver software supports dumps)
9. You can take the initiative and Set a Microcode Trap, as follows:
a. From the 12-character support data, use the first four characters (if it does not start with ‘A’ such
as Axxx). Use the second set of four characters if the first four are Axxx.
b. Take the four characters (FSC) and use the Microcode Trap facility under CE Utilities menu. Use
the Add FSC Trap function. With this trap set, a dump will automatically be taken when this FSC
is encountered, and the dump icon is displayed. The customer can retrieve the dump via
SCSI/fibre channel for you or can call for service when the dump icon appears.
10. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8 or return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-121

FID E6 – Small Letters (Abnormal Display Condition)
FID1 E6 is presented in small letters followed by four lines of support data. As the following example
shows, each line contains eight characters:
FID1 E6
FSC AAAA BBBB
FSC CCCC DDDD
FSC EEEE FFFF
FSC F020 EEEE

When the above is displayed (EEEE is repeated), the operator panel is frozen (you cannot select another
menu, and the pushbuttons do not respond). Therefore, you cannot use the panel or cannot get dumps
from either the host or the panel.
1. Obtain as much information as possible regarding the job being run, any drive operations, and the
failure scenario. Record the information displayed on the panel (including the four lines of support
data). Save this information for now.
2. Switch OFF power, wait 5 seconds and then switch ON power. The drive automatically runs the
power-on self-test (POST).
3. See Figure 9-45.

Did POST complete No

without an error?
CE Options menu
will be displayed. Did you get a No Go to START
FID E6 in small
Yes letters? section
Select
"Verify Fix" Yes
and
"Test Drive" Use FID E4 as
reference in
START section.
Yes Go to
Did test fail START section.
with a FID
or Attn msg? No

Can customer
No
recreate the
problem?

Yes
Record information Use TAC M01 for
displayed on panel known microcode
(Include all four problems, or
lines of support TAC M02 for new
data.) microcode problems

Call next level

A14M0030

of support Go to "End of Call"

Figure 9-45. Flow Diagram for FID E6 in Small Letters

9-122 IBM 3590 MI

FID FE – Isolate Fault Between Media and Hardware
A FID FE will be generated when the drive experiences an error and cannot determine if the error was
caused by the tape cartridge or by a problem in the drive hardware. The FID FE is not displayed on the
drive, but is logged in the sense information that is returned to the host system. If the customer receives
errors when reading or writing to the drive and there is no FID displayed on the drive, a FID FE was
probably returned in the sense information to the host. If needed, refer to the Message Section to
determine how to obtain service information from the host system.

To determine the cause of the read or write errors, follow the steps below:
1. Determine which VOLSER numbers or cartridges are potential problems:
a. Ask the customer to note which cartridges (VOLSER numbers) fail during the operation. (It is
possible to have multiple bad cartridges.)
b. If the customer received MIM Messages at the host, get the “Message Code” and associated
VOLSER number, if available. Refer to “Message Codes” on page 4-8 and Figure 4-2 on page 4-5.
If a bad cartridge cannot be identified at the time of failure, the VOLSER field of the MIM will be
blank and the VOLSER Valid Flag will be 00; VOLSER not Valid.
c. Examine the FID FE log using the “LOGS” option of the CE menu on the operator panel. Collect
both FIDs and associated VOLSER numbers. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-17 and “CE FID FE Log
Menu” on page 5-63. The FE log will display entries for up to 10 of the most recent occurrences of
the FE error. Each entry consists of four lines of information that pertain to the error:
1) The first line provides an alternate FID number that you can use to isolate the problem.
2) The second line displays the first and last FSC’s and the microcode link.
3) The third line provides a power-on date/time stamp which can be correlated with power-on
hours in the “Show Statistics” menu, or a “Current Time Stamp” option (if present).
4) The fourth line provides VOLSER number of the suspect cartridge, if available.
d. If the customer received SIM messages at the host, get VOLSER numbers if available from Sense
Data which accompanied the SIM. Refer to Message Section for details.
2. Determine if the cartridges are bad:
a. If you have a MIM Message Code for the suspect VOLSER number cartridge, perform the action
stated in the “Message Codes” on page 4-8.
b. Examine cartridge for damage, for example, leader block not attached or cracked cartridge. If
damaged, ask customer to repair or replace cartridge.

Note: A repaired cartridge may be used long enough to recover data on that cartridge. When the
data has been recovered, the cartridge should be taken out of service by the customer and
discarded.
c. If the cartridges look OK and you have access to another 3590 try the operation with the suspect
cartridges in another 3590.
d. Have the customer replace any cartridges that have failed in more than one 3590.
3. If the cartridges are not bad, isolate the problem to a drive FRU:
a. Examine the log entries and, using the alternate FID numbers provided, try to determine the cause
of the FE errors.

Note: A FID FE with a Fault Symptom Code (FSC) of 3541 may be caused by an intermittent file
protect switch or a faulty cable in the loader. If the FSC is 3541, install a new loader
assembly, FRU BC.
b. Use the “Error Log Analysis Procedure” on page 9-126 as an approach to problem isolation.
c. Test the drive:

1) Press the Change Mode pushbutton to place the drive in CE mode.

2) Select Verify Fix.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-123

 3) From the Verify Fix menu, select Test Drive. Use the CE scratch tape when you are prompted
to load a tape.
If the test fails with the same FID as the one reported or logged, go to “FID Entry Point” on
page 1-8 to fix the fault. Continue with the FRU list for this FID.
If the test fails with a different FID from the one reported or logged, use the new FID and go to
“FID Entry Point” on page 1-8 to fix the fault.

Note: Before replacing any FRUs, check the head cable connections. Ensure that the head
cables are not loose.
4. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8 or return to the procedure that sent you here.

9-124 IBM 3590 MI

FID FF – Operator Action or Host Program Error
FID FF is always presented to the host. Some types of problems are also presented on the operator
panel.

The “CE FID FF Log Menu” on page 5-64 provides a log of a filtered subset of all sense data sent to the
host with a FID of FF. Use this log to assist you in diagnosing a FID FF problem.

FID FF Displayed on Drive Panel

FID FF is displayed on drive panel (it also went to host).
v FID FF is automatically displayed when the operator selects Force Error Dump from the operator
Services menu. This causes a FID1 FF with expert systems data of E009 XXXX XXXX.
Action: Remove the dump icon and the FID message by pressing the Reset pushbutton or by powering
the drive OFF, and then ON.
v The FID message can be removed without removing the dump icon by selecting Reset Drive on the
operator Services menu.

FID FF Displayed at Host Only – Not at Drive Panel

FID FF is not displayed on drive panel (it went to host only).
v The host receives this FID, but it is not presented on the drive operator panel. If FID ‘FF’ was reported
in host error log via a SIM message, then perform action indicated in SIM message codes (for example
clean drive). Refer to MSG section.
v This FID is presented for an invalid and unsupported SCSI command or parameter, which is a SCSI
application program software problem. Sense data exists at the host.
v This FID can also be presented for a drive operator procedural problem. For example, FID FF is
presented when a magazine is not in the ACF and the host issues a Load command. Another example
is when the operator tries to switch to random mode and the magazine is not locked.

The service representative should look in the drive error log for any ATTN DRIVE or ATTN ACF messages
(which may have caused the FID FF to be sent to the host via sense data). If any of these ATTN
messages are present in the error log, use that data to perform further isolation for the FID FF cause.

Suspected Microcode Problem

1. Press Reset on the operator/CE panel.
2. Run Verify Fix test.
3. If you get a FID, go to Table 1-2 on page 1-9 with that FID.
4. If the drive tests work OK, the fault could be a microcode problem or an intermittent hardware problem.
Go to “Problem Determination” on page 9-4 or “FID E5 – Microcode Problem” on page 9-118 to assist
with the problem determination.
5. If the failure still occurs, collect as much information as you can from the customer and contact your
next level of support.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-125

 Error Log Analysis Procedure
The Error Log Analysis Procedure is designed to assist the service representative in isolation of
intermittent failures, or chronic problems that seldom happen but occur often enough to cause a concern.
An example of using the error log to demonstrate how one might look for possible leads on which FRUs to
replace in such a case follows. The example does not use real data, and is intended for demonstration
only.

Figure 9-46 on page 9-128 shows a blank Error Log Analysis Work Sheet that you can make a copy of and
use to write down FIDs with the following procedure. Figure 9-47 on page 9-129 shows the same Error Log
Analysis Work Sheet with a sample extraction from the 3590 error log.

Following is a sample of how you might gather and analyze error log data. The following list is a summary
of what you might find in the 3590 error log:

Note: Only 10 positions are shown in this example. You may prefer to use the most recent 10 or the
entire error log in your analysis. The first (top) errors are the most current, as shown by the relative
time stamp.
Entry 1 FID 98
Entry 2 FID A7
Entry 3 FID 9F
Entry 4 FID C6
Entry 5 FID 95
Entry 6 FID CA
Entry 7 FID C6
Entry 8 FID A8
Entry 9 FID 9F
Entry 10 FID A9

Fill out the blank sheet, as follows (note that our example has all the sample data already there for your
information):
1. Take the FID from the most recent error log entry and put it in the first column (FID 98 in our example).
Continue listing FIDs that you find in the error log until you get to the last one you choose to use in the
analysis.

Note: If the time stamp shows a long duration between one entry and the next, you may want to
ignore any of the older entries for the purpose of this exercise.
| 2. Go to “FID Entry Point” on page 1-8 and look up each FID listed in the left column of your work sheet,
and list horizontally each FID listed in START in the order that they are listed (in our example, we
found FIDs 98, 99, 95, 97 and 9A).
3. Next, look first in the left two or three columns of your ERROR LOG ANALYSIS WORK SHEET, under
the START SECTION FID ENTRIES and draw a circle around the FID that appears most often (in our
example we circled FID 99 five times).
4. Next, look in the left two or three columns and draw a square around the next FID that occurs the
most often (in our example we drew a square around FID A9, five times).
5. Now, look at the overall entries, and draw a diamond around any FID that occurs most often (in our
example, we drew a diamond around FID 97.)

Note: The error log analysis procedure is intended to show the limitations of the logging process and
to minimize the affect. In the example, FID 97s only occur in the lower priority columns on the
right-hand portion of the work sheet. They are low priority because failure priority are based on
one FID at a time. If a FID occurs often and always falls in a low probability position the FID
may still be causing the problem. The error log procedure will still isolate the failure overcoming
the limitations of the error logging.
6. Last, look up the FID number and associated names of the FRUs they represent (in our example, the
three FIDs are listed under Legend). Now use your training, intuition, or experience to decide which

9-126 IBM 3590 MI

 FRU is most likely to be causing the problem. In our example, the likely failing FRU might be the
transport cable, the feed motor assembly, or the Motor control card. A decision at this time might be to
replace the FID 97 FRU (the motor control card) for the following reasons:
v FID 99 and A9 occurred very often, but with too large a variation in the ERROR LOG FID ENTRIES.

Note: Variation here is used as a measure of how often an error occurred exactly the same
(contained identical error data) in a sample of error log entries. Low variation (similar to high
correlation) points to components that are more likely to have failed, while high variation
(similar to low correlation) tends to point to less likely failing components.
v The FID 97 seems to be a low probability, but occurs too often to ignore.

Had the FID 99 or A9 occurred with similar or identical ERROR LOG FID ENTRIES, it might have been
better to replace these FRUs first. These kind of decisions must rely heavily on your experience and
knowledge of the device, the timing of the errors that occurred, error history of this device, and your
customer environment.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-127

Figure 9-46. Blank Error Log Analysis Work Sheet

9-128 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 9-47. Example – Error Log Analysis Work Sheet

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-129

Set Error Match Trap (To Get Dump)
The dump icon appears when the dump is available, and this icon remains on the screen to indicate
that trace data is stored in the device. In addition, when the error match trap is hit, an ATTN DRV FSC
Trap Taken message is displayed on the operator panel. If a FID1 E5 occurs, it may overlay the ATTN
DRV message. The dump icon will still be displayed, with the ATTN DRV message existing behind the
dump icon.

Note: Normal error match traps are volatile and are lost if you press the Reset pushbutton, power OFF
the device, or the microcode recovery occurs (via Check-1, FMR, and so on). Saved error match
traps cannot be lost by a Reset, and require a special procedure for removal. Please see procedure
“Remove Error Match Trap” on page 9-131 for details.

To set an error match trap:

1. Press the Change Mode pushbutton to place the drive in CE mode.

2. Select Proceed.
3. Select Utilities from the CE Options menu.
4. Select Microcode Trap from the CE Utilities menu.
After the CE Microcode Trap menu is displayed, four characters matching the desired error code
(FSC) must be entered. Select each character and modify to the desired value.
5. With the CE Microcode Trap menu still selected there will be 4 options presented:
v Add FSC Trap
v Remove FSC Trap
v List FSC Traps
v Saved Trap

There are two options available to set the trap:

Use option a - Select Add FSC Trap which saves the normal trap until the next code reset. Selection
of this option ends the procedure. Skip to step 9 for completion of the procedure.

Or use option d - Select Saved Trap to save the saved trap in the drive until it is manually removed.
A code reset will not eliminate a saved trap from the drive. See procedure “Remove Error Match
Trap” on page 9-131 for removal of a saved FSC trap.
6. Selection of the Saved Trap option from the CE Microcode Trap menu will cause the CE Saved
Traps menu to be displayed next.
7. Select Add Saved FSC Trap from the CE Saved Traps menu to save the trap.
8. Select Cancel when the status screen comes up.
9. Select Cancel to return to the previous CE menu. Repeat this step as needed to return to previous
CE menus.
10. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8 or return to the procedure that sent you here.

Note: Only three saved traps can be active at a time. If more than three are selected, the procedure will
not be successful. To see how many saved traps are active, select Saved Trap from the CE
Microcode Trap menu, and select the List Saved FSC Traps option.

9-130 IBM 3590 MI

Remove Error Match Trap
Note: This procedure is similar to procedure “Set Error Match Trap (To Get Dump)” on page 9-130, except
that it removes the trap(s) set in the previous procedure. See the definition of normal trap versus
saved trap in procedure “Set Error Match Trap (To Get Dump)” on page 9-130.

1. Press the Change Mode pushbutton to place the drive in CE mode.

2. Select Proceed.
3. Select Utilities from the CE Options menu.
4. Select Microcode Trap from the CE Utilities menu.
At this point it is necessary to distinguish between removal of a normal trap or a saved trap. If the trap
is known to be normal, go to heading “Remove NORMAL Trap”. If the trap is known to be saved, go to
heading “Remove SAVED Trap” on page 9-132. If the type of trap is unknown, but the error code is
known, proceed, as follows:
a. Select Saved Trap from the CE Microcode Trap menu.
b. Select List Saved FSC Traps from the CE Saved Traps menu. The list is displayed.
c. Check the list of Saved FSC traps for a match of the error code.
d. If there is no match, the trap is presumed to be normal. Select Cancel twice to return to the CE
Microcode Trap menu. Skip to heading “Remove NORMAL Trap”.
e. If there is a match, then select the appropriate error code.
f. Select Remove Saved FSC Trap from the CE Remove Saved FSC Trap menu. Success or failure
of the CE action will be indicated on the operator/CE panel.
g. Select Cancel twice to return to CE Microcode Trap menu. Repeat this step as needed to return to
previous CE menus.
This completes removal of a known, saved FSC trap.
5. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8 or return to the procedure that sent you here.

Remove NORMAL Trap

Known Normal Error Code
If the error code is unknown, go to heading “Unknown Normal Error Code”. With the error code known,
proceed:
1. With the CE Microcode Trap menu still selected, four characters matching the error code (FSC) must
be set. Select each character and modify to the desired value.
2. Select the Remove FSC Trap option from the CE Microcode Trap menu. The Op panel will indicate
success or failure of the CE action.
3. Select Cancel to return to CE Utilities menu and repeat this step as needed to return to the previous
CE menu.
This completes removal of a known, normal FSC trap.
4. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8 or return to the procedure that sent you here.

Unknown Normal Error Code

1. With the CE Microcode Trap menu displayed, select List FSC Traps. The list is displayed.
2. Select the error code to be removed (from the list).
3. Select Remove FSC Trap from the CE Remove FSC Trap menu. The Op panel will indicate success
or failure of the CE action.
4. Select Cancel to return to the CE Microcode Trap menu. Repeat this step as needed to return to
previous CE menus.
This completes removal of an unknown, normal FSC trap.
5. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8 or return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-131

Remove SAVED Trap
Known Saved Error Code
If the error code is unknown, go to “Unknown Saved Error Code”. With the error code known, proceed:
1. From the CE Microcode Trap menu (still displayed), select Saved Trap.
2. The CE Saved Traps menu is selected. Four characters matching the error code (FSC) must be set.
Select each character and modify to the desired value.
3. Select the Rmv Saved FSC Traps option from the CE Saved Traps menu. The Op panel will indicate
success or failure of the CE action.
4. Select Cancel to return to CE Microcode Trap menu. Repeat this step as needed to return to previous
CE menus.
This completes removal of a known, saved FSC trap.
5. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8 or return to the procedure that sent you here.

Unknown Saved Error Code

1. From the CE Microcode Trap menu (still displayed), select Saved Trap.
2. Select List Saved FSC Traps from the CE Saved Traps menu. The list is displayed.
3. Select the error code to be removed (from the list).
4. Select Rmv Saved FSC Trap from the CE FSC Trap List menu. The Op panel will indicate success or
failure of the CE action.
5. Select Cancel to return to the CE Saved Traps menu. Repeat this step as needed to return to previous
CE menus.
This completes removal of an unknown, saved FSC trap.
6. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8 or return to the procedure that sent you here.

9-132 IBM 3590 MI

 No Response from Operator/CE Panel and No Message
Note: The Reset pushbutton is active, but do not press it until instructed.
1. If hung/frozen panel was reported by customer but does not currently exist on drive, ask the
customer if they can easily recreate the failure. If they cannot recreate the failure or it is an
inconvenient time for the customer, have them call for service when the fault reoccurs. When the fault
occurs, ask them to leave the drive in that condition and call for service.

Note: An attempt to unfreeze the panel may be made, as follows:

Force microcode recovery and a dump by pressing the Change Mode pushbutton ten times
consecutively.

If the host software supports microcode dumps, ask the customer to force a dump via SCSI/fibre
channel and retrieve dump via SCSI/fibre channel because this type of fault prevents dumps via the
panel.

When the problem is recreated, with or without a dump, contact your next level of support.

2. If hung/frozen panel currently exists on the drive, check to see if the dump icon is displayed.
a. If the dump icon is not displayed and the host software supports microcode dumps, ask the
customer to force a SCSI/fibre channel dump and retrieve the dump via SCSI/fibre channel.
b. Get the dump and contact your next level of support.
3. If the dump icon is displayed and the host software supports microcode dumps, ask the customer to
retrieve the dump via SCSI/fibre channel.
Take a microcode dump and contact your next level of support.
4. If the host does not support SCSI/fibre channel retrieval of dump:
a. Press Change Mode (wrench) to try to get into service mode.
b. If you cannot get into service mode, contact your next level of support.

Note: An attempt to unfreeze the panel may be made, as follows:

Force microcode recovery and a dump by pressing the Change Mode pushbutton ten
times consecutively.
c. If you can get into service mode, copy dump to cartridge and save it for now.
1) Press Reset Button on the operator/CE panel.
2) Run the Verify Drive diagnostic.
| 3) If a failure occurs with a new FID, use the new FID and go to “FID Entry Point” on page 1-8.
4) If no error occurs, the problem can be a microcode problem or an intermittent hardware
problem. Call your next level of support and provide them with the microcode dump.
5. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8 or return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 9. Procedures 9-133

9-134 IBM 3590 MI
 Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and
Replacements
Contents
Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
| ACF Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
FID 90: Operator/CE Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Model B11/E11/H11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Model B1A/E1A/H1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
FID 91: Operator/CE Panel Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
(Model B11/E11/H11 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
FID 92: Leadscrew Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Both Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
FID 95: Elevator Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Remove Elevator Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Replace Elevator Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
FID 96: Pinch Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Remove Pinch Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Replace Pinch Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
FID 97: Motor Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Remove Motor Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Replace Motor Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
FID 98: Transport Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Remove Transport Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Replace Transport Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
FID 99: Transport Cable (Former Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Remove Transport Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Replace Transport Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
FID 99: Transport Cable (Current Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Remove Transport Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Replace Transport Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
FID 9A: Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Remove Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Replace Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
FID 9B: Global/Interference Sensor Assembly (Upper and Lower) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Remove Upper Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Replace Upper Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Remove Lower Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Replace Lower Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
FID 9E: Priority Cell Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Remove Priority Cell Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Replace Priority Cell Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
FID A0: Magazine-Present Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Remove Magazine-Present Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Replace Magazine-Present Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
FID A1: Motor Cable Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Remove Motor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Replace Motor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Remove Drive/ACF Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Replace Drive/ACF Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
FID A4: LED Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Remove LED Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 10-1

 Replace LED Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
FID A5: Sensor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Remove Sensor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Replace Sensor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
FID A6: LED Cards and Random Lock Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Remove LED Cards and Random Lock Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Replace LED Card and Random Lock Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
FID A9: Feed Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Remove Feed Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Replace Feed Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
FID AA: Transport Pinch Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Removal and Replace Transport Pinch Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
FID AB: Leadscrew Drive Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Remove Leadscrew Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Replace Leadscrew Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
FID B1: Pneumatic Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Remove Pneumatic Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Replace Pneumatic Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
FID B2: Pneumatic Hose Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Removal and Replace the Pneumatic Hoses and Hose Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
FID BF: Fan (Card Pack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Remove Fan (Card Pack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Replace Fan (Card Pack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
FID C1: Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Remove Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Replace Power Supply (Former and Current Levels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
FID E3: Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Remove Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Replace Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
FID E4: Card Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Card Pack Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Before Removing Card Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Remove Card Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Replace Card Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
FID B5: Tape-Lifter Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Remove Tape-Lifter Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Replace Tape-Lifter Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
FID B6: Decoupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Remove Decoupler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Replace Decoupler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
FID B7: Tension Transducer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Remove Tension Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Replace Tension Transducer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Adjustment of Tension Transducer Plastic Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
FID BB: Pantocam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Remove Pantocam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Replace Pantocam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
FID BC: Loader Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Remove Loader Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Replace Loader Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Replace Loader Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92
FID C6: Machine Reel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Remove Machine Reel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Replace Machine Reel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

10-2 IBM 3590 MI

 FID C7: File Reel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Remove File Reel Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Replace File Reel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
FID C8: File-Protect Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Remove File-Protect Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Replace File-Protect Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
FID C9: Door-Open Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Remove Door-Open Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Replace Door-Open Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
FID CA: Tray-Up Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Remove Tray-Up Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Replace Tray-Up Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
FID CC: Cartridge-Type Sensor Card Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
Remove Cartridge-Type Sensor Card Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
Replace Cartridge-Type Sensor Card Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
FID CD: Cartridge-Present Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
Remove Cartridge-Present Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
Replace Cartridge-Present Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
FID CE: Tape Path A Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
Remove Tape Path A Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
Replace Tape Path A Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103
FID CF: Tape Path B Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
Remove Tape Path B Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
Replace Tape Path B Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
FID D0: Head Guide and Brush Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
Before You Replace the Head Guide Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
Remove Head Guide and Brush Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
Replace Head Guide and Brush Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-110
Test the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111
Cleaner Blade Removal (Model B11/B1A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112
FID D4: Head Cleaning Brush Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-114
Remove Head Cleaning Brush Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-114
Replace Head Cleaning Brush Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-116
Drive Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-116
FID D6: Motor Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117
Remove Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117
Replace Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117
FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-118
Remove Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-118
Replace Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-118
FID DB: Power Supply Cable (New Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120
Remove Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120
Replace Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120
FID DC: ACF and Operator/CE Panel Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-121
Remove Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-121
Replace Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-121
Locations and Removal Procedures – Model B1A/E1A/H1A (Library) Components . . . . . . . 10-123
FID 93: Library Interface Cover (Model B1A/E1A/H1A Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-124
Removing Library Interface Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-124
Replace Library Interface Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-124
FID 94: Operator Panel Cable (Model B1A/E1A/H1A Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-126
Remove Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-126
Replace Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-126

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-3

 Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System
Note: Remove the cleaner blade (if installed) from the drive or HGA before beginning this procedure. See
Figure 10-78 on page 10-113 to determine the location of the cleaner blade on the HGA. Also, see
“Cleaner Blade Removal (Model B11/B1A)” on page 10-112 for the cleaner blade removal
procedure.

Attention: When the cleaner blade is removed the cleaner blade vacuum hose must be either removed
or plugged to prevent vacuum system leaks. See “Cleaner Blade Removal (Model B11/B1A)” on
page 10-112 for details.

The pneumatic system vacuum adjustment is done by adjusting a bleed valve with a scratch cartridge
loaded in the drive. The gauge in the Pressure/Vacuum Kit is used to measure the vacuum at the
pneumatic assembly vacuum test port.

The pressure is adjusted by the microcode when the Adjust Pressure routine is run from the
Config/Install menu. While this routine is running, the microcode senses the output of the pressure
transducer, then adjusts the compressor speed to ensure the pressure is within specification.

The vacuum and pressure specifications are listed here for reference only:
v Vacuum: -4.1 to -6.6 kilopascals (-16.0 to -26.0 inches of water).
v Pressure: 29.5 to 36.6 kilopascals (116 to 144 inches of water).

Important Hints
1. The vacuum and pressure adjustments have an affect on each other. The Adjust Pressure
routine changes the compressor speed, which will affect the vacuum. The vacuum bleed valve
adjustment changes the overall load on the pneumatic system, which will affect the pressure.
Consequently, it will be necessary to repeat the Adjust Pressure routine after each adjustment of
the vacuum bleed valve. It may be necessary to repeat the vacuum and pressure adjustment
routines 3 or 4 times before the Adjust Pressure routine no longer changes the vacuum.
2. The pneumatic system compressor is very temperature sensitive. The compressor does not start
to run until a tape is loaded. It takes a minimum of 2 minutes for the compressor to be warm
enough to adjust.
3. Use Table 10-1 with Figure 10-1 on page 10-6 and Figure 10-2 on page 10-6.

Note: There are two levels of deck enclosure back cover. See Figure 10-1 on page 10-6. The old style
back cover is one piece and must be removed to perform the pneumatic system check and
adjustment. The new style back cover has a small, removable access cover
10 over the
pneumatic system test ports and adjustment screw. With the new style cover, it is not necessary to
power OFF and remove the deck enclosure rear cover before performing the pneumatic system
check and adjustment.
1. If you have the new style deck enclosure rear cover, remove screw
11 and the small access cover

10 over the pneumatic system and go to step 7 on page 10-6.
2. If you have the old style one-piece deck enclosure rear cover, switch OFF the 3590 power
2 and
continue with step 3.
3. Disconnect the power cord at its source, then at the back of the 3590
3.
4. Remove the deck enclosure back cover.
5. Connect the power cord
3 to the back of the 3590, then to the power source.
6. Power ON the 3590
2. Wait for the power-on diagnostics to run.
| Table 10-1. Pneumatic System Components
| Figure Item # Component Name
| 1 Test Port

10-4 IBM 3590 MI

| Table 10-1. Pneumatic System Components (continued)
| 2 Power Switch
| 3 Power Cord
| 4 Bleed Valve Lock Nut
| 5 Bleed Valve
| 6 Pressure/Vacuum Gauge
| 10 Access Cover
| 11 Access Cover Screw
|

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-5

 Figure 10-1. Deck Enclosure Back Cover

Figure 10-2. Measuring and Adjusting Pneumatic System

7. Remove the pneumatic system vacuum test-port cap
1 and attach the pressure/vacuum gauge
6
to the vacuum test port by using the CE vacuum gauge adapter P/N 05H9895.
| 8. Clean the wholes (not shown) that are located below the bleed valve adjustment shaft
5 to ensure
| adequate air flow.
9. Load a scratch cartridge, supplied with the ship group, into the 3590. Wait for the Ready-At
Loadpoint message.

Note: Do not use a cleaner cartridge for this adjustment. The vacuum and pressure will vary due to
the surface texture of the tape. Use only a scratch data cartridge.
10. Press the Change Mode pushbutton. Select Proceed, and press Enter.
11. Select Config/Install from the CE Options menu, and pressEnter.
Attention: The pneumatic system is temperature sensitive. The compressor should run for a
minimum of 2 minutes before you start the Adjust Pressure routine.
12. Select Adjust Pressure from the Config/Install menu, and press Enter.
Attention: There are two levels of microcode for the Pneumatic System adjustment routine.

10-6 IBM 3590 MI

 v If the message UNLOAD DRIVE FIRST appears, you have the new level of microcode. Skip to
step 22.
v If the CE Wait menu and the message RUNNING appears, you have the early level of microcode.
Continue with step 13.

Early Level Microcode Procedure

13. The program will run until you stop it. Allow the program to run for at least 10 seconds, select Stop
Running, and press Enter.
14. Ensure the message Pump OK is displayed. If Pump OK is displayed, skip to 15.
If any of the following messages are displayed, run the Adjust Pressure routine again.
If any of the following messages are displayed again, continue with this step.
No Air -- leak in pneumatic hose
Pump Fast -- leak in pneumatic hose
Pump Slow -- blockage in pneumatic hose
Pump Not Set -- the pressure is out of
specification. Continue
with the next step to
adjust vacuum. If this
message repeats, go to
Pneumatic Problems MAP.
Unknown Results -- microcode problem

For any problem related to hoses go to“Pneumatic Problems” on page 2-3. For microcode problems,
get a microcode dump by selecting Dump from the CE Options menu. Select the appropriate dump
option and call your next level of support.
15. Check the vacuum measurement on the gauge
6. The required range is -4.1 to -6.6 kilopascals
(-16.0 to -26.0 inches of water). The optimum setting is -5.4 kilopascals (-21 inches of water).
16. If the vacuum is within the required range after the Adjust Pressure routine has completed, no
further adjustment is necessary. Select Cancel, as necessary, to return to the CE Options menu, then
go to step 34 on page 10-8.
17. If the vacuum is not within the required range, continue with step 18.
18. Loosen the locking nut
4 on the bleed valve adjustment shaft
5. Turn the adjustment shaft until
the gauge indicates a reading close to the optimum setting given above.
19. Tighten the locking nut while using a screwdriver to hold the position of the bleed valve adjustment
shaft. Ensure the vacuum measurement remains within the required range while tightening the lock
nut.
20. Return to 12 on page 10-6 and run the Adjust Pressure routine again. Repeat step 12 on page 10-6
through step 19 until the vacuum does not require adjustment after the Adjust Pressure routine has
been run.
It may be necessary to repeat the vacuum and pressure adjustment routines 3 or 4 times before the
Adjust Pressure routine no longer changes the vacuum.
If vacuum cannot be set, see “Pneumatic Problems” on page 2-3.
21. Select Cancel, as necessary, to return to the CE Options menu, then go to step 34 on page 10-8.
End of Early Level Microcode Procedure

New Level Microcode Procedure

22. Unload the drive and select Adjust Pressure again to restart the new procedure. The Load Scratch
Tape message will be displayed.
23. Load a scratch tape, supplied with the ship group, into the 3590. Wait for the Ready-At-Loadpoint
message.

Note: Do not use a cleaner cartridge for this adjustment. The vacuum and pressure will vary due to
the surface texture of the tape. Use only a scratch data cartridge.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-7

 Attention: The pneumatic system is temperature sensitive. The compressor should run for a
minimum of 2 minutes before you start the Adjust Pressure routine.
24. Select Process Loaded Tape, and press Enter. This will start the Adjust Pressure routine. Allow the
routine to run for at least 10 seconds to ensure that the microcode has enough time to adjust the
pressure.

Note: If you get an Attention Drive error message during this procedure, select the Set Pressure to
Default option, then unload the drive and start over.
25. Select Stop Running, and press Enter. Ensure the message PUMP OK--CHK VACUUM is
displayed.
If PUMP OK--CHK VACUUM is displayed, skip to 26.
If any of the following messages are displayed, run the Adjust Pressure routine again.
If any of the following messages are displayed again, continue with this step.
No Air -- leak in pneumatic hose
Pump Fast -- leak in pneumatic hose
Pump Slow -- blockage in pneumatic hose
Pump Not Set -- the pressure is out of
specification. Continue
with the next step to
adjust vacuum. If this
message repeats, go to
Pneumatic Problems MAP.
Unknown Results -- microcode problem

For any problem related to hoses go to “Pneumatic Problems” on page 2-3. For microcode problems,
get a microcode dump by selecting Dump from the CE Options menu. Select the appropriate dump
option and call your next level of support.
26. Check the vacuum measurement on the gauge
6. The required range -4.1 to -6.6 kilopascals
(-16.0 to -26.0 inches of water). The optimum setting is -5.4 kilopascals (-21 inches of water).
27. If the vacuum is within the required range after the Adjust Pressure routine has completed, no
further adjustment is necessary. Go to step 31.
28. If the vacuum is not within the required range, continue with step 29.
29. Loosen the locking nut
4 on the bleed valve adjustment shaft
5. Turn the adjustment shaft until
the gauge indicates a reading close to the optimum setting given above.
30. Tighten the locking nut while using a screwdriver to hold the position of the bleed valve adjustment
shaft. Ensure the vacuum measurement remains within the required range while tightening the lock
nut.
31. Select PUMP OK--CHK VACUUM, and press Enter. The message WAS VAC ADJUSTED? will be
displayed.
32. Select YES or NO, and press Enter.
If you selected NO, skip to step 33.
If you selected YES, the Adjust Pressure routine will automatically start and run again. Return to
step 25 and repeat steps 25 through 31 until the vacuum does not require adjustment after the
Adjust Pressure routine has been run.

Note: It may be necessary to repeat the vacuum and pressure adjustment routines 3 or 4 times
before the Adjust Pressure routine no longer changes the vacuum.

If vacuum cannot be set, see the Pneumatic Problems MAP.

33. When the vacuum no longer requires adjustment and you answer NO in step 32, select Cancel, as
necessary, to return to the CE Options menu, then continue with step 34.
End of New Level Microcode Procedure

34. To ensure the SCSI ports are on-line, press the Change Mode pushbutton, then select Proceed,
and press Enter to return to the operator Options menu.

10-8 IBM 3590 MI

35. Select Unload Drive, and press Enter. Remove the scratch cartridge from the drive.
36. Load a cleaner cartridge to ensure that automatic pressure adjustment works correctly.
37. Remove the pressure/vacuum gauge and adapter hose
6 from vacuum test port and install the test
port cap back onto the test port.
38. If you have a new style back cover, reinstall the small access cover over pneumatic system, then
return to procedure that sent you here.
39. If you have an old style back cover, switch OFF power from the back of drive
2, then continue with
step 40.
40. Remove the power cord, first from the power source, then from the back of the drive.
41. Reinstall the deck enclosure back cover.
42. Reinstall the power cord to the back of the drive, then to the power source.
43. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-9

| ACF Component Locations
The FRUs in Figure 10-3 are identified by their FID number; for example, 90 is FID 90, the operator/CE
panel. The list following the figure shows the locations of the ACF cables.

Figure 10-3. ACF Component Locations

10-10 IBM 3590 MI

FID FID Name FID FID Name
Number Number
90 Operator/CE panel 9B Global/interference sensor assembly
92 Leadscrew assembly 9E Priority cell sensor pair
95 Elevator motor assembly A0 Magazine-present sensor assembly
96 Pinch motor assembly A6 LED cards and random lock sensor
97 Motor control card A9 Feed motor assembly
98 Transport position sensor AA Transport Pinch Rollers
9A Transport assembly AB Leadscrew Drive Belt

See the following for the ACF cable locations:

FID Name and FRU Location
91 Operator/CE Panel Cable 10-14
99 (old) Transport Cable 10-31
99 (new) Transport Cable 10-33
A1 Motor Cable Assembly 10-42
A2 Drive/ACF Cable 10-44
A4 LED Cable 10-45
A5 Sensor Cable 10-46

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-11

FID 90: Operator/CE Panel
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier 90.

Model B11/E11/H11
Remove Operator/CE Panel:
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. See Figure 10-4. Press the two buttons
2 on the rear of the panel
1.
3. Lift the panel out of the holder.
4. Disconnect the operator/CE panel cable connector
3.

Replace Operator/CE Panel:

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) V08 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-4. Operator/CE Panel, Model B11/E11/H11

10-12 IBM 3590 MI

Model B1A/E1A/H1A
Remove Operator/CE Panel:
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. See Figure 10-5. Press the two buttons
2 on the rear of the panel
1.
3. Lift the panel out of the holder.
4. Disconnect the operator/CE panel cable connector
3.

Replace Operator/CE Panel:

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) V08 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-5. Operator/CE Panel, Model B1A/E1A/H1A

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-13

FID 91: Operator/CE Panel Cable
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier 91.

(Model B11/E11/H11 Only)

Remove Operator/CE Panel Cable:
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the ACF left side cover if not obstructed by another device; otherwise, you will use the
magazine opening for access to the cables. See page 9-30.
3. Open the ACF top cover. See page 9-31.
4. Lift the operator/CE panel from its holder. See page 9-25.
5. See Figure 10-6. Disconnect the operator/CE panel cable connector from the panel
1.
6. Move the elevator up or down (turn the leadscrew) to access the cable connected to the deck
enclosure.
7. Disconnect the panel cable
2 from the lower connector on the deck enclosure and remove the cable.

Replace Operator/CE Panel Cable:

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) C09 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-6. Operator/CE Panel Cable

10-14 IBM 3590 MI

 FID 92: Leadscrew Assembly
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier 92.

Note: Do not attempt to lubricate the ACF leadscrew. Lubricants will ruin the leadscrew coating.

Attention: The transport assembly card and sensors are ESD sensitive. See “Working with
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.

Engineering Change
There are two levels of leadscrew drive. See Figure 10-7 on page 10-16 and Figure 10-8 on
page 10-17. The former level is gear-driven,
6, and the current level is belt-driven,
7 and
8.

| The former level gear-drive parts are no longer available for field replacement use. If you have to
| replace any of the gear-drive parts, it will be necessary to upgrade the leadscrew drive mechanism to
| a belt-driven system. See Chapter 11, “Parts Catalog” on page 11-1 for additional information.

Both Styles
Remove Leadscrew Assembly:
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
This procedure can be done with the ACF attached to the drive; however, it may be easier if the ACF
is removed and put on a work surface. If you have a work surface available, continue with step 2. If
you do not have a work surface available, skip to step 3.
2. Remove the ACF from the drive and place it on a work surface. See “Automatic Cartridge Facility
(ACF)” on page 9-33 for ACF removal, then return here.
3. Remove the ACF side covers. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.

Note: Ensure the pinch rollers are open before moving the elevator assembly. If not, rotate the pinch
shaft by hand to open the pinch rollers.
4. See Figure 10-7 on page 10-16. Rotate the elevator leadscrew
1 to position the elevator assembly all
the way to the bottom of the ACF.
Attention: Ensure that the elevator assembly is all the way to the bottom of the ACF before
removing the lower leadscrew bearing in the next step. This will ensure that the elevator assembly
does not drop to the bottom of the ACF and damage the assembly.
5. Remove the two screws
5 from the lower leadscrew bearing and remove the bearing
4 from the
leadscrew.
6. Lower the leadscrew by rotating it clockwise (from the top) far enough to disengage it from the upper
bearing and gear
6 (gear-driven leadscrew) or gear
7 and belt
8 (belt-driven leadscrew).
7. Remove the gear
6 (gear-driven leadscrew) or gear
7 and belt
8 (belt-driven leadscrew).
8. Continue rotating the leadscrew out of the elevator assembly.
9. Remove the four screws
3 and remove the leadscrew nut and retainer assembly
2.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-15

 A1400347
Gear Driven Leadscrew Belt Driven Leadscrew

Figure 10-7. Gear-driven and Belt-driven Leadscrew Assembly

Replace Leadscrew Assembly:

HINT
If you are upgrading an ACF from a gear-driven leadscrew to a belt-driven leadscrew, it will be easier
if you install the new elevator motor before installing the new leadscrew assembly.

Go to “FID 95: Elevator Motor Assembly” on page 10-20. Perform steps 9 on page 10-21 through 12
on page 10-21 to remove the gear-drive motor, then do the same steps in the reverse order to install
the new level belt-drive motor. Then return here to install the new leadscrew.

Note: Do not reinstall the intermediate gear. It is not used on the belt-drive system.

Figure 10-8 on page 10-17 shows the differences between the former level and new level leadscrew
assemblies.

Note: Do not attempt to lubricate the ACF leadscrew. Lubricants will destroy the leadscrew
coating.
1. See Figure 10-9 on page 10-17. If a new leadscrew assembly is being installed, it will be necessary to
remove the nut from the new leadscrew and install it in the new retainer before the retainer is
installed in the ACF.
Hold the leadscrew nut
1 with one hand, keeping the spring compressed, while you unscrew the
leadscrew
2 from the nut assembly.
2. Continue to hold the spring compressed while you install the nut assembly
3 into the new retainer

4.
3. Install the retainer and nut assembly
5 on the elevator plate with the four screws
6.

10-16 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 10-8. Differentiating Between Former Level and Current Level Leadscrew

Figure 10-9. Leadscrew, Nut, and Retainer

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-17

 4. See Figure 10-10 (gear-driven leadscrew) or, Figure 10-11 on page 10-19 (belt-driven leadscrew). The
D-shaped end of the leadscrew must be up for this step. Insert the leadscrew up through the
leadscrew bearing hole
1.
The leadscrew nut spring
2 must be held compressed during the remainder of this step.
Insert the end of the leadscrew into the leadscrew nut
3 on the elevator and rotate the leadscrew
upward in a counterclockwise direction (from the top). Continue rotating the leadscrew until the
leadscrew extends through the nut approximately 75 mm (3 in.), then release the compression spring.

Note: If you have the gear-driven leadscrew, continue with steps 5 through 9, then skip to step 14 on
page 10-19.

Note: If you have the belt-driven leadscrew, skip to steps 10 on page 10-19 through 13 on
page 10-19, then continue with step 14 on page 10-19.

Gear-driven Leadscrew ONLY

5. See Figure 10-10. Continue rotating the leadscrew counterclockwise until the top of the leadscrew
8
is just below the bottom of the feed shaft gear
4, as shown.
6. Hold the leadscrew shaft gear
5 (with the long collar up) in position above the feed shaft gear
4
and meshed with the elevator motor idler gear
6.
7. Lift the leadscrew up, without rotating it, until the top of the leadscrew shaft
8 enters the D-shaped
hole in the gear
7.
8. With the top of the shaft in the gear, hold the gear and rotate the shaft clockwise (from the top) until
the D-shaped shaft aligns with the D-shaped hole in the gear.
9. Continue raising the leadscrew to engage it with the gear and bearing in the top of the ACF, then
rotate the leadscrew shaft counter clockwise to lower the transport all the way to the bottom of the
ACF. This will hold the leadscrew gear, shaft, and transport assembly in place while you install the
bearing. Skip to step 14 on page 10-19.
End of Gear-driven Leadscrew ONLY

Figure 10-10. Gear-driven Leadscrew, Gears, and Bearing

10-18 IBM 3590 MI

 Belt-driven Leadscrew ONLY

10. See Figure 10-11. Install the belt
4 over the leadscrew
5.
11. Install the gear
6, (with the long collar up), onto the D-shaped shaft of the leadscrew.
12. Continue rotating the leadscrew counterclockwise until the shaft on top of the leadscrew enters the
bearing
7 in the top of the ACF.
13. Lift the belt
4 and install it, first on the motor pulley
8, then onto the leadscrew gear
6.
End of Belt-driven Leadscrew ONLY
14. Install the bottom leadscrew bearing
10 with the two screws
11 removed earlier. Ensure the outer
bearing race
9 is inserted up into the frame and the bearing housing is flat against the frame.
15. Manually move the elevator assembly (by rotating the leadscrew) to its upper and lower limits to
ensure there are no binds in the elevator or cables catching on the mechanism.
16. The alignment of the transport assembly to the priority cell must be checked after this procedure. Go
to “Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor” on page 10-28 to check and adjust the
transport position sensor, then return here.
17. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
18. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T03 for the area of failure.

A1400346
Figure 10-11. Belt-driven Leadscrew, Gears, Belt, and Bearing

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-19

FID 95: Elevator Motor Assembly
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier 95.

Note: Do not attempt to lubricate ACF leadscrew. Lubricants will ruin the leadscrew coating.

Engineering Change
There are two levels of leadscrew drive. See Figure 10-13 on page 10-21 and Figure 10-15 on
page 10-22. The former level uses a gear-driven leadscrew
6 and the current level uses a
belt-driven leadscrew
7 and
8.

The former level gear-driven parts are no longer available for field replacement use. If you have to
replace any of the gear-driven parts, it will be necessary to upgrade the leadscrew drive mechanism
to a belt-driven system. See Chapter 11, “Parts Catalog” on page 11-1 for the necessary ordering
information.

Remove Elevator Motor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
This procedure can be done with the ACF attached to the drive; however, it may be easier if the ACF
is removed and put on a work surface. If you have a work surface available, continue with step 2. If
you do not have a work surface available, skip to step 3.
2. Remove the ACF assembly from the drive and place it on the work surface. See “Automatic Cartridge
Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33 for ACF removal, then return here.
3. Remove the ACF side covers. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.

Note: Ensure the pinch rollers are open before moving the elevator assembly. If not, turn the pinch
shaft by hand in the clockwise direction to open the pinch rollers.
4. See Figure 10-12. Rotate the elevator leadscrew
7 to position the elevator assembly all the way to
the bottom of the ACF.
Attention: Ensure that the elevator assembly is all the way to the bottom of the ACF before
removing the lower leadscrew bearing in the next step. This will ensure that the elevator assembly
does not drop to the bottom of the ACF and damage the assembly.
A1400345

Figure 10-12. Elevator Motor Assembly

5. See Figure 10-13 on page 10-21. Remove the two screws
5 from the lower leadscrew bearing and
remove the bearing
4 from the leadscrew.
6. Lower the leadscrew by rotating it clockwise (from the top) far enough to disengage it from the upper
bearing and gear
6 (gear-driven leadscrew) or gear
7 and belt
8 (belt-driven leadscrew).

10-20 IBM 3590 MI

 7. Remove the gear
6 (gear-driven leadscrew) or gear
7 and belt
8 (belt-driven leadscrew).
8. Lower the leadscrew by rotating it clockwise (from the top) far enough to allow access to the elevator
motor mounting screws.
9. See Figure 10-12 on page 10-20. Open the ACF top cover
1. See “ACF Top Cover” on page 9-31.
10. Remove the following wires from the elevator shaft motor
3:
a. Yellow wire from the front terminal
4 (post 2).
b. Black wire from the rear terminal
2 (post 1).

See Figure 10-14. The view is looking up at the underside of the motor mounting plate.

Gear-driven Leadscrew ONLY

11. Remove the screw
1 and nut on the top side of the motor mounting plate. Remove the intermediate
gear
2.
End of Gear-driven Leadscrew ONLY
12. Remove the three motor-mounting screws
3 and remove the motor from the top.

A1400347
Gear Driven Leadscrew Belt Driven Leadscrew

Figure 10-13. Gear-driven and Belt-driven Leadscrew

Figure 10-14. Intermediate Gear and Motor

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-21

Replace Elevator Motor
Engineering Change
If the Elevator Motor assembly is being replaced for any reason, it should be replaced with a
belt-drive motor only.

Figure 10-15 shows the differences between the former level and current level elevator motor assemblies.
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
Notes for Reassembly:
a. Do not reinstall the intermediate gear. It is not used on the belt-driven leadscrew system.
b. If you are replacing the Elevator Motor as part of an upgrade from a gear-driven leadscrew to a
belt-driven leadscrew, you should return to “Replace Leadscrew Assembly” on page 10-16 to install
the new leadscrew.
c. Motor terminal post 2 is oriented to the front, comparable to the 5:30 position on an analog clock
face.
d. The yellow motor wire is connected to the front terminal (post 2).
e. The black motor wire is connected to the rear terminal (post 1).
2. The alignment of the transport assembly to the priority cell must be checked after this procedure. Go to
“Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor” on page 10-28 to check and adjust the transport
position sensor, then return here.
3. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
4. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T03 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-15. Differentiating Between Former Level and Current Level Elevator Motor

10-22 IBM 3590 MI

FID 96: Pinch Motor Assembly
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier 96.

Remove Pinch Motor Assembly

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the ACF side covers. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.

Note: Ensure the pinch rollers are open before moving the elevator assembly. If not, turn the pinch
shaft by hand in the clockwise direction to open the pinch rollers.
3. Rotate the leadscrew to lower the elevator assembly to the bottom.
This procedure can be done with the ACF attached to the drive; however, it may be easier if the ACF
is removed and put on a work surface.
If you do not have a work surface available, proceed with step 5.
Or, if you have a work surface available, continue with step 4.
4. Remove the ACF assembly from the drive and place it on its left side (pinch shaft up) on the work
surface. See “Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33 for ACF removal, then return here.
See Figure 10-16.
5. Open the ACF top cover
1. See “ACF Top Cover” on page 9-31.
6. Remove the wires from the pinch shaft motor
3.
a. Yellow wire from the front terminal
4 (post 2).
b. Black wire from the rear terminal
2 (post 1).
7. Remove the lower (cross) bearing
6 from the pinch shaft
7 and lower or pull the shaft through the
elevator assembly until the gear is against the transport
5.

Figure 10-16. Motor Wires and Pinch Shaft

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-23

 See Figure 10-17. The view is looking upward at the underside of the motor mounting plate.
8. Remove the global cartridge present sensor cover to get access to the nut in the next step.
9. Remove the screw
1 and nut on the top side of the motor mounting plate. Remove the intermediate
gear
2.
10. Remove the three motor-mounting screws
3 and remove the motor from the top.

Replace Pinch Motor Assembly

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. When reinstalling or replacing the motor, use the ACF motor alignment tool P/N 05H4724 to set the
gear mesh gap. This procedure is easier if you remove the ACF and put it on a work surface.
3. When the motor has been reinstalled, leave the screws
3 loose enough so the motor can be
adjusted.
4. Position the ACF so that the motor gears face up.
5. Place the tool
5 dowel pin into the intermediate gear threaded hole
4 while aligning the tool hole
over the motor gear
6. Orient the tool
5, as shown. While holding the tool
5 firmly in position,
tighten the 3 screws
3 that hold the motor in place.
Notes for Reassembly:
a. Motor terminal post 2 is oriented to the front.
b. The intermediate gear
2 is a two-step gear, oriented with the smaller diameter gear down, as
shown.
c. The yellow motor wire is connected to the front terminal (post 2).
d. The black motor wire is connected to the rear terminal (post 1).
6. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
7. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T03 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-17. Intermediate Gear and Motor

10-24 IBM 3590 MI

FID 97: Motor Control Card
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier 97.

Remove Motor Control Card

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Open the top cover
1. See “ACF Top Cover” on page 9-31.
3. See Figure 10-18 on page 10-25. Disconnect the seven connectors (CD1, CD5, CD6, CD7, P2, P3,
and P4
3 from the motor control card.

4. The motor control card is ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.
5. Carefully pull the motor control card
2 off its six mounting studs.

Replace Motor Control Card

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T02 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-18. Motor Control Card

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-25

FID 98: Transport Position Sensor
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier 98.

Poor sensor connection, sensor cable connection, or debris on the sensor may be causing the problem.
1. If access is possible, try to check the sensor connection, reseat the sensor cable, and clean the sensor
with a brush (standard tool kit soft bristle brush). Verify that the problem remains prior to replacing the
FRU.
2. If access to the sensor is too difficult, then replace the sensor.

Remove Transport Position Sensor

1. Go to “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. If you cannot access the left side of the ACF, remove the ACF from the drive. See “Automatic Cartridge
Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33 for ACF removal, then return here.
3. Remove the ACF left side cover. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.
Notes:
a. Ensure the pinch rollers are open before moving the elevator assembly. If not, turn the pinch shaft
by hand in the clockwise direction to open the pinch rollers.
b. See Figure 10-19 on page 10-27.
4. Position the elevator and transport
7 to gain access to the transport position sensor
4.
5. Disconnect the sensor connector
3 and remove cable ties, as necessary.

6. The sensor and transport board are ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge
(ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.
Remove the sensor mounting screw
5 and carefully lift the sensor up to remove the sensor from
both the groove
6 in the elevator plate and from the sensor bar.

Replace Transport Position Sensor

See Figure 10-19 on page 10-27.
1. Position the sensor around the edge of the sensor bar and slide the sensor mounting bracket into the
elevator groove. Fasten the sensor to the elevator plate with the screw removed earlier
5.

Note: When fastening the early level transport position sensor with the side adjust screw, align the top
edge of the sensor bracket
2 to the top edge of the elevator plate
1.
2. Connect the new transport-position-sensor cable connector to the transport assembly board
3. Route
the cable under the Import/Export sensor cable
8.
3. Reinstall new cable ties in the same locations from which the old ties were removed.
4. If you were required to remove the ACF unit, reinstall the ACF unit now. See “Automatic Cartridge
Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33.
5. The alignment of the transport assembly to the priority cell must be checked anytime the transport
position sensor is loosened or removed. See “Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor” on
page 10-28 to check and adjust the transport position sensor, then return here.
6. Check that transport Limit-1 and Limit-2 sensors were not accidentally knocked loose and that they are
firmly seated in the transport assembly. Refer to Figure 6-7 on page 6-11 for location of these sensors.
7. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
8. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T01 for the area of failure.

10-26 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 10-19. Transport Position Sensor

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-27

Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor
This procedure is used to verify and adjust the alignment of the ACF transport. Result of this check is that
the alignment is correct or that an adjustment is needed.

See Figure 10-20 on page 10-30.

The top of the transport rails
2 must be aligned with the bottom of the priority cell
5. Adjusting the
transport-position sensor up causes the transport assembly to stop at a lower position in relationship to
the priority cell.

With ACF Transport Position Adjustment Tool ( P/N 05H3388):

1. Lift the operator/CE panel out of its holder.
2. Power ON the tape drive. See page 9-6. During the power-on sequence, the ACF positions the
transport at the priority cell.
3. Ensure the power-on diagnostics have successfully completed and the transport is located at the
priority cell before continuing. If you get a FID at this point, do not continue with this procedure, use
the FID and go to “FID Entry Point” on page 1-8.

4. Press the Change Mode pushbutton, and select Proceed, if the display is not already in CE Mode.
5. Select Config/Install from the CE Options menu.

Note: If ATTN ACF displays, the priority-cell sensor was activated. Ensure that the priority cell is
empty. Press Enter to reset the condition and return to the menu.
6. Select Align ACF from the Config/Install menu.

The transport position sensor is ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge
(ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.
Attention: To prevent damage to the transport drive mechanism and the adjustment tool — always
remove the adjustment tool from the priority cell before running the Align Low test.
7. Select Align Low from the CE Align ACF menu.

Note: On some levels of microcode, the Align Low test will not run if the adjustment tool, or a
cartridge, is in the priority cell. If ATTN ACF - Clear Picker Path displays, the priority-cell
sensor was activated. Ensure that the priority cell is empty. Press Enter to reset the condition
and return to the menu. Allow the test to complete. The transport should be located at the
priority cell and the display should read Aligned Low.
8. Use the ACF Transport Position Adjustment Tool, P/N 05H3388, to check the transport alignment to
the priority cell floor. See “ACF Transport Position Adjustment Tool” on page 3-45.
Place the tool
3 on the priority cell floor, as shown in Figure 10-20 on page 10-30.
9. Slide the tool into the priority cell until it contacts the stops
4.

Note: Do not force it in too hard, and do not touch the tool while you are reading the gauge.

Hint
a. If the adjustment tool pointer slowly drifts up (towards 1 on the scale) when the tool is first
inserted into the priority cell, it will be necessary to hold the transport leadscrew to prevent it
from turning.

b. Remove the adjustment tool.

c. Rerun the Align Low test, then hold the leadscrew, and slide the tool into the priority cell.
Read the gauge while still holding the leadscrew.

10-28 IBM 3590 MI

10. See Figure 10-20 on page 10-30.
The distance (in millimeters) from the priority cell floor
5 to the top of the transport rail
2 is
indicated on the gauge.
The gauge should read 0 to 0.25, as shown.

Note: Slide the tool out and back in two or three times to ensure that the readings are consistent.

Engineering Change
There are two levels of position sensor adjustments. The former level has a locking screw
1
on the side, and the sensor assembly slides up and down in a slot. The current level has an
adjusting screw
6 in the bottom of the sensor, that is accessed from the front. See
Figure 10-20 on page 10-30.

Use bristol tool P/N 9900103 to adjust the new level. One turn of the screw equals a change of
0.5 on the transport adjust tool scale.

Attention: Do not turn the screw beyond the end of it’s travel. The plastic housing may break.

11. If the gauge reads below 0, the transport is too high.

Adjust the transport position by loosening screw
1 and raising the position sensor (former level, side
adjust) — — or — —
Turn the adjusting screw
6 counterclockwise, as viewed from the bottom (current level, front adjust).
Remove the adjustment tool from the priority slot.
Rerun the Align Low test to ensure that the adjustment is correct. Repeat the adjustment procedure,
if necessary.
12. If the gauge reads above 0.25, the transport is too low.
Adjust the transport position by loosening screw
1 and lowering the position sensor (former level,
side adjust).
— — OR — —
Turn the adjusting screw
6 clockwise, as viewed from the bottom, (current level, front adjust).
Remove the adjustment tool from the priority slot.
Rerun the Align Low test to ensure the adjustment is correct and repeat the adjustment, if
necessary.
13. After rerunning Align Low, complete the following:
a. Select Done from the CE Align ACF menu.
b. Select Cancel from the Config/Install menu.
c. Select Verify Fix from the CE Options menu.
d. Select Test ACF from the CE Verify Fix menu.
e. After the test completes successfully, select Cancel.
14. Return to the procedure which sent you here or perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-29

Figure 10-20. Transport Position Check (Using ACF Transport Adjust Tool)

10-30 IBM 3590 MI

FID 99: Transport Cable (Former Style)
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier 99.

Note: The former style transport cable has a “Z” bend in the cable. If your machine has the former style
transport cable, replace it with the new style transport cable shown on Figure 10-22 on page 10-34.
The new style transport cable has a smooth shape instead of the “Z” shape, and uses two cable
retention brackets that are riveted to one of the side covers. The new cable will come as a FRU kit
that will include a new side cover. Discard the old cable and cover; use the new parts. The new
style transport cable replacement procedure is at “FID 99: Transport Cable (Current Style)” on
page 10-33.

Remove Transport Cable

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the side covers. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.
3. Open the top cover of the ACF. See “ACF Top Cover” on page 9-31.

Note: Ensure the pinch rollers are open before moving the elevator assembly. If not, turn the pinch
shaft by hand in the clockwise direction to open the pinch rollers.
4. Lower the elevator assembly approximately half way by turning the leadscrew.
5. See Figure 10-21 on page 10-32. Disconnect the transport ribbon cable from P4 connector
1 on the
motor control card.
6. Disconnect the lower transport ribbon cable connector
4 from the transport card.
7. Open the cable retainer
2 and remove the cable
3.
8. Remove and discard any foam from underside of motor mount plate, if it exists.

Replace Transport Cable

Install a new style cable and side cover FRU kit. See “FID 99: Transport Cable (Current Style)” on
page 10-33.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-31

Figure 10-21. Transport Cable (Former Style)

10-32 IBM 3590 MI

FID 99: Transport Cable (Current Style)
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier 99.

Remove Transport Cable

1. Perform the procedure in “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the side covers. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.

Note: The new style transport cable has a smooth surface instead of the “Z” shape found in the
former style transport cable. It also uses two cable retention brackets that are riveted to one of
the side covers. Use care when you remove this cover, as it will be attached to the ribbon
cable. The new cable will come as a FRU kit that will include a new side cover. Discard the old
cable and cover; use the new assembly.
3. Open the top cover of the ACF. See “ACF Top Cover” on page 9-31.

Note: Ensure the pinch rollers are open before moving the elevator assembly. If not, turn the pinch
shaft by hand in the clockwise direction to open the pinch rollers.
4. Lower the elevator assembly approximately two-thirds of the way down by turning the leadscrew.
5. See Figure 10-22 on page 10-34. Disconnect the transport ribbon cable connector, item
2 from the
motor control card.
6. Disconnect the lower transport ribbon cable connector, item
6 from the transport card.
7. Open the top cable retainer, item
1 and remove the cable, item
5.
8. Remove and save two screws and washers
7 from the transport, then remove the cable from the
ACF.

Replace Transport Cable

1. Install the new cable bracket to the transport with two screws and washers
7.
2. Connect the cable to the transport card
6.
3. Connect the upper end of the cable to the Motor Control card
2.
4. Using the two marks on the cable as a guide, close the upper cable retainer
1 over the cable.
5. Install the side covers on the ACF. The left side cover
4 has two cable retainers
3.
6. Using the four marks on the cable as a guide, close the cable retainers
3 over the cables.
7. Close the top cover.
8. Ensure that neither the transport cable or any other cable is not obstructing movement of the
transport assembly.
9. Perform the procedure “End of Call” on page 9-8.
10. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID, and use technical area code
(TAC) T04 for the area of failure.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-33

Figure 10-22. Transport Cable (Current Style)

10-34 IBM 3590 MI

FID 9A: Transport
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier 9A.

Prior to replacing the transport:

1. Check that the transport Limit 1 and Limit 2 sensors are firmly connected to the transport assembly.
See Figure 6-7 on page 6-11.
2. Debris may be causing the problem, try to clean the Limit 1, Limit 2, Import, Export and Transport
Position Sensors with a brush (standard tool kit soft bristle brush). Verify problem remains prior to
replacing the Transport. If access to the sensors is too difficult, then replace the Transport.

Remove Transport
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the ACF side covers. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.
3. Lower the elevator assembly approximately half way.
4. See Figure 10-23 on page 10-36. Disconnect the ribbon cable connector
2 from the transport card.

5. The transport position sensor is ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge
(ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.
Disconnect the transport position sensor connector
14 and remove cable ties, as necessary to
position the cable and connector out of the way (away from the transport).
6. Lower the elevator assembly to the bottom.
This procedure can be done with the ACF attached to the drive; however, it may be easier if the ACF
is removed and put on a work surface. If you do not have a work surface available, proceed with step
8. If you have a work surface available, continue with step 7.
7. Remove the ACF from the drive:
See Figure 9-19 on page 9-34 for the next step.
a. Disconnect the two ACF cables
2 from the deck enclosure and loosen the thumb screw
1 on
the upper-left-rear of the ACF.
b. Lift the ACF assembly off the drive and place it on its right side (leadscrew is up) onto a work
surface.
8. See Figure 10-23 on page 10-36 and remove the pinch shaft
3:
a. Remove the bottom (cross) bearing
12.
b. Lower or pull the shaft toward the bottom and remove the top E-clip
4 from the shaft and
remove the gear
5. Observe the orientation of the gear to the shaft (the longer gear hub is
toward the transport).
c. Remove the other E-clip
6 from the shaft and remove the shaft through the bottom of the ACF.
9. Repeat steps 8a through 8c to remove the feed shaft
1.
10. Raise the elevator plate up far enough to gain access to the 2 transport mounting screws
15 on the
bottom of the elevator plate.
11. Ensure the ribbon cable is out of the way.

12. The transport board and transport position sensor are ESD sensitive. See “Working with
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.
Remove the two transport mounting screws
15 from the bottom of the elevator plate.
If the ACF is attached to the drive, go to step 13.
Or, if the ACF is being repaired on a work surface, go to step 14.
13. Lower the elevator plate far enough to remove the transport assembly out through the right side of
the ACF.
14. Remove the transport assembly out through the large hole in the back of the ACF.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-35

Figure 10-23. Transport

Replace Transport
1. Install the new transport assembly onto the elevator plate.
Attention Items:
a. Ensure the sensor wires are not between the transport and elevator plate.
b. The transport assembly can be mounted on the elevator plate 180 out from its correct position.
Ensure the notch in the transport board
8 is on the far end of the transport from the leadscrew.
c. Ensure the guide pins on the elevator plate are seated into their holes on the bottom of the
transport assembly. Then reinstall the two transport mounting screws
15 from the bottom of the
elevator plate to fasten transport to the elevator plate.
2. Lower the elevator to the bottom of the ACF.
3. Replace the pinch shaft:
a. Reinsert the shaft through the hole in the bottom of the ACF
11 and through the elevator plate
and transport (the end of the shaft with two grooves
7 is inserted first).
b. Install an E-clip in the groove nearest to the transport
6.
c. Reinstall the gear
5 on the shaft and slide it against the E-clip. Ensure the longer gear hub is
next to the transport.
d. Install the other E-clip
4 in the groove next to the gear.
e. Insert the upper end of the shaft into the top (cross) bearing and ensure the gears are properly
meshed.
f. In this step, ensure the small protrusions
13 on the (cross) bearing
12 will be on the outside of
the frame. Insert the lower (cross) bearing
12 onto the end of the shaft and through the slot
11
in the frame. Rotate the bearing (cross member with the protrusions) in the direction of the small
holes in the frame
10, until the protrusions snap into the holes in the frame.
4. Repeat steps 3a through 3f to reinstall the feed shaft.
5. Reinstall the ACF onto the drive if it was removed earlier.

10-36 IBM 3590 MI

 6. Rotate the pinch shaft clockwise (from the top) to ensure the cartridge release lever
9 is fully
retracted.
7. Raise the elevator assembly approximately half way.
8. Reconnect the transport position sensor connector
14 to the transport board and ensure the sensor
is properly positioned over the transport position bar. The (transport position) sensor mounting bracket
should still be positioned so its top edge is even with the top surface of the elevator plate.
9. Reconnect the ribbon cable connector
2 to the transport card.
10. The alignment of the transport assembly to the priority cell must be checked anytime the transport
position sensor is loosened or removed. Go to “Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor”
on page 10-28 to check and adjust the transport position sensor, then return here.
11. Reinstall all covers removed in this procedure.
12. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
13. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T03 for the area of failure.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-37

FID 9B: Global/Interference Sensor Assembly (Upper and Lower)
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier 9B.

Debris may be causing the problem. Clean the top and bottom pair of sensors with a brush (standard
tool kit soft bristle brush). Verify that the problem remains before you replace the FRU.

Remove Upper Sensor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Open the ACF top cover. See “ACF Top Cover” on page 9-31.
See Figure 10-24. The cable cover
1, the sensor board
4, and the sensor cover
5 (under the
sensor board), are all held in place by the same mounting screw
2.
3. Remove the mounting screw
2 and remove the covers.

Note: For correct reinstallation of the sensor assembly, note the orientation of the sensor cover
5
relative to the sensor board
4 and the ACF mounting surface.

4. The sensor is ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts”
on page 9-23.
Disconnect the sensor connector SC2
3 and remove the sensor.

Replace Upper Sensor

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Go to “Remove Lower Sensor” and remove and replace the lower sensor.

Figure 10-24. Global/Interference Sensor Assembly (Upper)

Remove Lower Sensor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the ACF side covers. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.
3. See Figure 10-25 on page 10-39. Remove the sensor mounting screw
2, the sensor cover
5, and
the spacer
4. Notice the spacer
4 has locating pins for the sensor board
3 and the base. Also
note the orientation of the sensor cover
5 relative to the sensor board
3.

4. The sensor is ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts”
on page 9-23.
Disconnect the sensor connector, SC2
1.

Replace Lower Sensor

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.

10-38 IBM 3590 MI

 Notes:
a. When installing the sensor, ensure the spacer
4 locating pins are seated correctly in the base
and the sensor card.
b. Reseat the sensor cover
5 over the sensors on top of the sensor board
3, as shown in
Figure 10-25.
c. Route the sensor cable to the front side of the ACF, so it will not block the sensor.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T01 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-25. Global-Interference Sensor Assembly (Lower)

FID 9E: Priority Cell Sensor

See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier 9E. The sensors are ESD
sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.

Debris may be causing the problem, clean the sensor with a brush (standard tool kit soft bristle brush).
Verify problem remains prior to replacing the FRU.

Remove Priority Cell Sensor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the operator/CE panel. See page “Operator/CE Panel Service Position” on page 9-25.
3. Remove the bezel. See page “Bezel (Model B11/E11/H11 Only)” on page 9-32.

Note: The left and right priority cell sensors are different. The new sensors must be installed in their
correct positions.
4. See Figure 10-26 on page 10-40. Remove the mounting screw
3 from the emitter card
2.
Disconnect the emitter (PSBE) connector
1 from the emitter card.
5. Remove the mounting screw
5 from the detector card
4 (left side).

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-39

 Disconnect the detector (PSBD) connector
6 from the detector card.

Replace Priority Cell Sensor

The left priority cell sensor is the detector and the right priority cell sensor is the emitter. They must be
installed in their correct locations.
1. Reconnect the detector (PSBD) connector
6 to the detector card. The connector receptacle is
mounted at a 90 angle to the card surface.
2. Install the detector sensor
4 on the left side of the priority cell by using the screw removed earlier.
3. Reconnect the emitter (PSBE) connector
1 to the detector card. The connector receptacle is
mounted parallel to the card surface.
4. Install the emitter sensor
2 on the right side of the priority cell by using the screw removed earlier.
5. Reinstall the bezel and operator/CE panel.
6. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
7. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T01 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-26. Priority Slot Sensor

10-40 IBM 3590 MI

FID A0: Magazine-Present Sensor Assembly
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier A0.

Debris may be causing the problem, clean the sensor with a brush (standard tool kit soft bristle brush).
Verify problem remains prior to replacing the FRU.

Remove Magazine-Present Sensor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the bezel. See “Bezel (Model B11/E11/H11 Only)” on page 9-32.
3. See Figure 10-27. Disconnect the magazine-present sensor connector MP
3.

4. The magazine-present sensor is ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.
Remove the sensor mounting bracket screw
2 and remove the sensor assembly
1.
5. Remove the sensor from the mounting bracket.

Replace Magazine-Present Sensor

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T01 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-27. Magazine Present Sensor

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-41

FID A1: Motor Cable Assembly
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier A1.

Remove Motor Cable

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Open the top cover. See “ACF Top Cover” on page 9-31.
3. See Figure 10-28 on page 10-43. Remove the pinch motor connector from CD6
1, the feed motor
connector from CD5;
2, and the elevator motor connector from CD7
3.
4. From the three motors, remove the yellow wires from the front terminals
6 (post 2), and the black
wire from the rear terminals
5 (post 1).
5. Remove the cable cover/sensor mounting screw
8 and remove the cable cover
7, which allows
you to remove the wires on the pinch motor.

Note: The cable cover
7 and the upper global/interference sensor are held in place by the same
mounting screw
8.
6. Open the cable retainer
4 and remove the cable.

Replace Motor Cable

Notes for Replacement

1. Motor terminal post 2 is to the front on all three motors
6.

2. The yellow wire on the motors is connected to the front terminal (post 2) and the black motor wires are
connected to the rear terminal (post 1)
5.
3. Ensure the connections on the motors are correct:
v Yellow wire (T1) goes to pinch motor.
v Yellow wire (T2) goes to feed motor.
v Yellow wire (T3) goes to elevator motor.
4. Ensure the connectors on the motor control card are correct:
v The pinch motor connector attaches to CD6
1.
v The feed motor connector attaches to CD5
2.
v The elevator motor connector attaches to CD7
3.

End of Notes for Replacement

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T04 for the area of failure.

10-42 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 10-28. Motor Cable

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-43

FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier A2.

Remove Drive/ACF Cable

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the ACF left side cover, if not obstructed by another device; otherwise, remove the right side
cover. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.

Note: Use caution when removing the left side cover when the new style transport cable is present on
your ACF. The new style transport cable is attached to the left side cover by two cable clamps
mounted on a small plate. This plate is riveted to the side cover. See Figure 10-22 on
page 10-34 for an illustration of the new style transport cable.
3. Open the ACF top cover. See “ACF Top Cover” on page 9-31.
4. See Figure 10-29. Disconnect the drive/ACF cable connector from the CD1 connector
1 on the motor
control card.
5. Move the elevator up or down (turn the leadscrew) to access the cable in the deck enclosure.
6. Disconnect the cable
2 from the upper connector on the deck enclosure.
7. Remove the cable.

Replace Drive/ACF Cable

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T04 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-29. Drive/ACF Cable

10-44 IBM 3590 MI

FID A4: LED Cable
Remove LED Cable
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the ACF side covers. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.
3. Open the top cover
1. See “ACF Top Cover” on page 9-31.
4. See Figure 10-30. Disconnect the LED ribbon cable connector from connector P2
1 on the motor
control card.
5. Remove the bezel. See “Bezel (Model B11/E11/H11 Only)” on page 9-32.
6. Remove the cable
2.

Replace LED Cable

Note: When reconnecting the cable connector
3 to the bezel, ensure that the two connectors
4
remain strongly in place.
1. Fold the new LED cable like the old one that was removed.
2. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
3. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
4. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T04 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-30. LED Cable

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-45

FID A5: Sensor Cable
The sensors are ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts” on
page 9-23.

Remove Sensor Cable

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the ACF side covers. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.

Note: Use caution when removing the left side cover when the new style transport cable is present
on your ACF. The new style transport cable is attached to the left side cover by two cable
clamps mounted on a small plate. This plate is riveted to the side cover. See Figure 10-22 on
page 10-34 for an illustration of the new style transport cable.
3. Open the top cover
1. See page “ACF Top Cover” on page 9-31.
4. Remove the bezel. See page “Bezel (Model B11/E11/H11 Only)” on page 9-32.
5. See Figure 10-31 on page 10-47. Disconnect the sensor cable connector P3
1 from the top cover
(the round cable).
6. Disconnect the cables from the global/interference sensors
5 and
4 (SC2 lower and SC2 upper).
7. Disconnect the cable from the priority cell connectors
7 (PSBD) and
2 (PSBE).
8. Disconnect the cable from the magazine-present sensor
3.
9. Disconnect the cable connectors
8 from the LED card.
10. Open the cable retainers
6 and remove the cable.

Replace Sensor Cable

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T04 for the area of failure.

10-46 IBM 3590 MI

ATTENTION Static-Sensitive
Figure 10-31. Sensor Cable

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-47

FID A6: LED Cards and Random Lock Sensor
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier A6.

Debris may be causing the problem, clean the sensor with a brush (standard tool kit soft bristle brush).
Verify problem remains prior to replacing the FRU.

Remove LED Cards and Random Lock Sensor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the operator/CE panel. See “Operator/CE Panel Service Position” on page 9-25.
3. Remove the bezel. See “Bezel (Model B11/E11/H11 Only)” on page 9-32.

4. The LED cards and random lock sensor are ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic
Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.
The random lock sensor is mounted to and is part of the upper LED card.
See Figure 10-32. Remove the mounting screws
1 from the two LED cards
2 and
3 then remove
the cards.

Replace LED Card and Random Lock Sensor

Attention: The LEDs fit into slots in the bezel. Do not damage (bend) the LEDs when replacing the LED
card.
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T02 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-32. LED Cards (Rear View of Bezel)

10-48 IBM 3590 MI

FID A9: Feed Motor Assembly
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier A9.

Remove Feed Motor Assembly

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the ACF side covers. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.
Notes:
a. Use caution when removing the left side cover when the new style transport cable is present on
your ACF. The new style transport cable is attached to the left side cover by two cable clamps
mounted on a small plate. This plate is riveted to the side cover. See Figure 10-22 on page 10-34
for an illustration of the new style transport cable.
b. Ensure the pinch rollers are open before moving the elevator assembly. If not, turn the pinch shaft
by hand in the clockwise direction to open the pinch rollers.
3. Rotate the leadscrew to lower the elevator assembly to the bottom.
This procedure can be done with the ACF attached to the drive; however, it may be easier if the ACF
is removed and put on a work surface.
If you do not have a work surface available, proceed with step 5.
Or, if you have a work surface available, continue with step 4.
4. Remove the ACF assembly from the drive and place it on its left side (pinch shaft up) onto the work
surface to allow access to the feed shaft and feed motor assembly from the right side of the ACF.
See “Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33 for ACF removal, then return here.
See Figure 10-33.

Figure 10-33. Feed Motor, Feed Shaft, and Pinch Shaft

5. Open the ACF top cover
1. See “ACF Top Cover” on page 9-31.
6. Remove wires from feed shaft motor
3:
a. Yellow wire from front terminal
4 (post 2).
b. Black wire from rear terminal
2 (post 1).
7. For easier access to the feed shaft and feed motor assembly, remove the lower (cross) bearing
8
from the pinch shaft
9 and lower or pull the shaft through the elevator assembly until the gear is
against the transport
7.
8. Remove the lower (cross) bearing
6 from the feed shaft
5 and lower or pull the shaft through the
elevator assembly until the gear is against the ribbon cable on the transport board
10.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-49

 Note: When reinstalling the pinch and feed shafts, ensure that the protrusions on one arm of the
lower cross bearings rest against the outside frame of the bottom of the ACF.

See Figure 10-34. The view is looking upward at the underside of the motor mounting plate.
9. Remove the screw
1 and nut on the top side of the motor mounting plate. Remove the intermediate
gear
2.
10. Remove the three motor-mounting screws
3 and remove the motor from the top.

Replace Feed Motor Assembly

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. When reinstalling or replacing motor use the ACF motor adjustment tool P/N 05H4724 to set the gear
mesh gap. This procedure is easier if you remove the ACF and put it on a work surface.
3. When the motor has been reinstalled, leave the screws
3 loose enough so that the motor can be
adjusted.
4. Position the ACF so that the motor gears face up.
5. Place the tool
5 dowel pin into the intermediate gear threaded hole
4 while aligning the tool hole
over motor gear
6. Orient the tool
5, as shown. While holding the tool
5 firmly in position, tighten
the three screws
3 that hold the motor in place.
Notes for Reassembly:
a. Motor terminal post 2 is oriented to the front.
b. The intermediate gear
2 is a 2-step gear, oriented with the smaller diameter gear down, as
shown.
c. The yellow motor wire is connected to the front terminal (post 2).
d. The black motor wire is connected to the rear terminal (post 1).
6. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
7. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T03 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-34. Intermediate Gear and Motor

10-50 IBM 3590 MI

FID AA: Transport Pinch Rollers
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier AA.

Attention: The transport assembly card and sensors are ESD sensitive. See “Working with
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.

Removal and Replace Transport Pinch Rollers

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the ACF assembly from the drive and place it on a work surface. See “Automatic Cartridge
Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33 for ACF removal, then return here.
3. See Figure 10-35. Ensure the pinch roller arms
1 and
2, and the cartridge release lever
4, are
open before moving the elevator assembly. If not, turn the pinch shaft
3 in the clockwise direction,
as shown, to open the pinch rollers.
CAUTION:
The cartridge release lever
4 can be broken if the elevator assembly is moved while the
release lever is in the closed (extended) position.

Figure 10-35. Pinch Roller Arm Positions

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-51

 4. See Figure 10-36. Rotate the elevator leadscrew to position the elevator assembly
1 about half way
between the top and bottom, as shown.

Figure 10-36. Transport Pinch Roller Assembly

5. Remove and Replace the rear transport pinch rollers as follows:

Note: The rear rollers are easier to remove and replace if the pinch roller arms are open (retracted).
a. See Figure 10-36. Use a spring hook or small screwdriver to remove the 3 rollers
4 from the
gears
2.
b. Install the new rollers, one at a time, by squeezing them into the gap between the bottom of the
gear shaft and the top of the ridge
3 on the elevator tray, then push the roller up onto the gear
shaft.
c. Observe the rollers while you rotate the pinch roller drive shaft. Ensure the rollers are properly
seated on the gear shaft.

10-52 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 10-37. Front Transport Pinch Rollers

6. Remove and replace the front transport pinch rollers as follows:

a. Rotate the pinch shaft counterclockwise to close the roller arms.
b. See Figure 10-37. Use a spring hook or small screwdriver to remove the first and second rollers

4 from the front pinch roller arm.
c. Rotate the pinch shaft clockwise to open the pinch roller arms so the third roller
3 can be
removed.
d. Use a spring hook or small screwdriver to remove the third roller
3 from the front pinch roller
arm.
e. Install a new roller
3 on the third gear shaft
2.
f. Rotate the pinch shaft counterclockwise to close the pinch roller arms so the first and second
rollers
4 can be installed.
g. Install the new rollers
4 on the first and second gear shafts
1.
h. Observe the rollers while you rotate the pinch roller drive shaft. Ensure the rollers are properly
seated on the gear shaft.
7. See Figure 10-35 on page 10-51. Rotate the pinch shaft clockwise to ensure the pinch rollers arms

1 and
2, and the cartridge release lever
4, are open before installing the ACF on the drive.
CAUTION:
The cartridge release lever can be broken if the elevator assembly is moved while the release
lever is in the closed (extended) position.
8. Reinstall the ACF onto the drive. See “Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33.
9. Reinstall all covers removed in this procedure.
10. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
11. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T03 for the area of failure.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-53

FID AB: Leadscrew Drive Belt
See “ACF Component Locations” on page 10-10 for FRU identifier AB.

Note: Do not attempt to lubricate the ACF leadscrew. Lubricants will ruin the leadscrew coating.

Attention: The transport assembly card and sensors are ESD sensitive. See “Working with
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.

Remove Leadscrew Drive Belt

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
This procedure can be done with the ACF attached to the drive; however, it may be easier if the ACF
is removed and put on a work surface. If you have a work surface available, continue with step 2 on
page 10-15. If you do not have a work surface available, skip to step 3 on page 10-15.
2. Remove the ACF from the drive and place it on a work surface. See “Automatic Cartridge Facility
(ACF)” on page 9-33 for ACF removal, then return here.
3. Remove the ACF side covers. See “ACF Side Covers” on page 9-30.

Note: Ensure the pinch rollers are open before moving the elevator assembly. If not, rotate the pinch
shaft by hand to open the pinch rollers.
4. See Figure 10-38. Rotate the elevator leadscrew
1 to position the elevator assembly all the way to
the bottom of the ACF.
Attention: Ensure that the elevator assembly is all the way to the bottom of the ACF before
removing the lower leadscrew bearing in the next step. This will ensure that the elevator assembly
does not drop to the bottom of the ACF and damage the assembly.
5. Remove the two screws
5 from the lower leadscrew bearing and remove the bearing
4 from the
leadscrew.
6. Lower the leadscrew by rotating it clockwise (from the top) far enough to disengage it from the upper
bearing, gear
6 and belt
7.
7. Remove the belt
7.

Figure 10-38. Leadscrew and Leadscrew Drive Belt

Replace Leadscrew Drive Belt

1. See Figure 10-39 on page 10-55. Install the belt
1 over the leadscrew
2.
2. Install the gear
3, (with the long collar up), onto the D-shaped shaft of the leadscrew.
3. Rotate the leadscrew counterclockwise until the shaft on top of the leadscrew enters the bearing
4 in
the top of the ACF.
4. Lift the belt
1 and install it, first on the motor pulley
5, then onto the leadscrew gear
3.
5. Install the bottom leadscrew bearing
7 with the two screws
8 removed earlier. Ensure the outer
bearing race
6 is inserted up into the frame and the bearing housing is flat against the frame.

10-54 IBM 3590 MI

6. Manually move the elevator assembly (by rotating the leadscrew) to its upper and lower limits to
ensure there are no binds in the elevator or cables catching on the mechanism.
7. The alignment of the transport assembly to the priority cell must be checked after this procedure. Go to
“Check and Adjustment of Transport Position Sensor” on page 10-28 to check and adjust the transport
position sensor, then return here.
8. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
9. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T03 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-39. Leadscrew Drive Belt Replacement

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-55

Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck Enclosure
The FRUs in Figure 10-40 are identified by their FID number, for example, C1 is FID C1, the power supply.
The list following the figure shows the FID names. For the deck enclosure cables, see the appropriate FID.

Figure 10-40. Deck Enclosure Locations

FID Number FID Name FID Number FID Name

B1 Pneumatic assembly B2 Pneumatic hose kit
BF Card pack fan C1 Power supply
E3 Pressure sensor assembly E4 Card pack

10-56 IBM 3590 MI

FID B1: Pneumatic Assembly
This assembly contains the compressor and filter assembly. See “Locations and Removal Procedures for
Deck Enclosure” on page 10-56 for FRU identifier B1.

Remove Pneumatic Assembly

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover and back plate. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
4. See Figure 10-41 on page 10-58. Label and disconnect the vacuum
3 and pressure
2 hoses from
the rear of the pneumatic assembly. The vacuum and pressure hose positions are marked with a letter
on top of the assembly; V for vacuum and P for pressure.
5. Disconnect the pneumatic motor-control connector
4 from the rear of the card pack and carefully pull
the cable free.
Attention: Observe the correct cable routing for reassembly.
6. Loosen the power supply mounting screws
8 and slide the power supply forward.
7. Remove the two mounting screws
5.
8. Slide the pneumatic assembly
1 forward to disengage the locking tabs
6 from the front of the
assembly.
9. Lift the pneumatic assembly off the enclosure.

Replace Pneumatic Assembly

Note: Ensure that the pneumatic motor-control cable is routed so that it is always outside of the Card
Pack metal enclosure. If the cable is routed near the two large modules on the top card in the Card
Pack, intermittent data errors can occur.

The recommended cable routing is straight down from the pneumatic assembly
7, past the library
manager connector
9, then across the bottom of the enclosure to the card pack connector
4.
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. The pressure and vacuum for the new pneumatic assembly must be checked and adjusted. Go to
“Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4, then return here. Both pressure
and vacuum are adjusted in this procedure. Return here after the adjustment.
3. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
4. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T63 for the area of failure.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-57

Figure 10-41. Pneumatic Assembly

FID B2: Pneumatic Hose Kit

Removal and Replace the Pneumatic Hoses and Hose Connectors
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.

Both sides of the drive must be accessible to replace the components of the pneumatic hose kit.

If your configuration is two Model B11/E11/H11 drives on a rack mounted shelf, it will be necessary to
remove the failing drive from the shelf. Go to step 4.

Or,

If your drive is individually mounted on shelf slides, go to step 8 on page 10-59.

4. Remove the SCSI or fibre channel cable connector or connectors from the back of the drive.

Note: For SCSI drives, do not separate the terminator or the daisy-chained cable connector from the
back of the SCSI cable connector.

CAUTION:
The 3590 Model B11/E11/H11 with the ACF weighs 40.5 kilograms (89 pounds) so remove the
ACF before lifting the 3590. The 3590 weighs 28.6 kilograms (63 pounds) without the ACF
attached; it takes two persons to safely lift this unit.

Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See C1 in the INSP section.
5. Remove the ACF assembly from the drive. Go to “Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33,
then return here.
6. Remove the two screws securing the failing drive to the shelf.
7. Remove the drive and put on a work surface.
See Figure 10-42 on page 10-60.

10-58 IBM 3590 MI

 8. Start the hose replacement procedure with the vacuum
11 and pressure
12 hoses. Disconnect
these hoses from the pneumatic assembly and the other ends from hose connectors
13 and
14.
9. Pull both hoses out the back of the drive.
10. Select the new vacuum and pressure hoses from the hose kit, place them side-by-side, and feed
them through the channel from which the old hoses were removed.
11. Connect the vacuum
11 and pressure
12 to the vacuum and pressure ports at the rear of the
pneumatic assembly.
12. While observing the hose routing, remove and replace the remaining vacuum hoses and hose
connectors one at a time until all the new vacuum hoses are installed.
No Cleaner Blade:
a. The cleaner blade is no longer used on the 3590. See “Cleaner Blade Removal (Model B11/B1A)”
on page 10-112.
b. The new hose kit will not have a cleaner blade vacuum hose and connector
13 will be a
straight, inline connector instead of a tee connector.
13. Next, connect the remaining pressure hoses and hose connectors one-at-a-time until all the new
pressure hoses are installed.

14. The pressure sensor assembly and VPD card are ESD sensitive. Use care when connecting
hoses in these areas. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.
Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4, then return here.
15. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
16. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T64 for the area of failure.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-59

 Vacuum
Pressure

Vacuum
Pressure

ATTENTION
Static-Sensitive

Pneumatic
Hose Kit

A1400006

Figure 10-42. Pneumatic Hose Kit

10-60 IBM 3590 MI

FID BF: Fan (Card Pack)
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck Enclosure” on page 10-56 for FRU identifier BF.

Remove Fan (Card Pack)

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Unplug the power cord from the drive.
Attention: Support the fan plate when removing the mounting screws. The fan assembly can drop
and damage parts.
3. See Figure 10-43. Remove three screws
4 from the plate.
4. Lower the fan assembly
3 and disconnect the fan connector
2.
5. Remove four fasteners (or screws)
1 from the fan bracket and remove the fan.

Replace Fan (Card Pack)

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) A03 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-43. Fan (Card Pack)

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-61

FID C1: Power Supply
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck Enclosure” on page 10-56 for FRU identifier C1.

Remove Power Supply

There are two levels of power supplies used on the 3590. See Figure 10-44. The New Level is used on all
E11/E1A and H11/H1A drives and also on the new built Model B11/B1A drives with Common Card Pack.
The Former Level is used on all Base Model B11/B1A drives and on the Model B11/B1A drives with the
Ultra Card Pack (P/N 35L0818) or older.

Figure 10-44. Power Supplies

Old Level Power Supply

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the 3590.
3. Remove the Library Manager (LM) connector, if present and the SCSI or fibre channel cable connector
or connectors from the back of the drive.

Note: For SCSI drives, do not separate the terminator or the daisy-chained cable connector from the
back of the SCSI cable connector.
4. Remove the deck enclosure back cover and back plate. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
5. See Figure 10-45 on page 10-63. Disconnect the power supply connector
2.

Note: Observe the power supply cable routing for later reassembly.

Before removing the power supply, free the power supply cable from the card pack and pneumatic
assembly:
a. Carefully pull the connector end of the power supply cable up and out of the card pack area.
b. Remove the two screws
1 from the rear of the power supply.
c. Remove the two pneumatic assembly mounting screws. See Figure 10-41 on page 10-58
5.
d. Slide the pneumatic assembly forward to disengage the locking tabs from the front of the assembly.
e. Lift the pneumatic assembly up enough to remove the power supply cable from under the
pneumatic assembly so the cable will not become caught as the power supply is removed.

10-62 IBM 3590 MI

 Note: To allow more room for power supply removal, the cleaner brush mechanical assembly (left tape
guide) can be removed. See “FID D4: Head Cleaning Brush Assembly” on page 10-114.
6. Slide the power supply forward to disengage the locking tabs from the front of the power supply.
Lift the power supply carefully off the enclosure, taking care not to damage the cable.

Figure 10-45. Power Supply (Former Level)

Note: Prior to replacement of the power supply check the part number of the pneumatic assembly
on the side of the pneumatic assembly filter
7 in Figure 10-41 on page 10-58.

If the part number is not 05H4802, it will be necessary to remove the spiral wrapping
1 in
Figure 10-46 from the power supply cable of the new power supply, before installing the new
power supply.

If the pneumatic assembly part number is 05H4802, then do not remove the spiral wrap from
the power supply cable before installing the new power supply.
End of Old Level Power Supply

Figure 10-46. Power Supply Cable Spiral Wrap

New Level Power Supply

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-63

2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
4. See Figure 10-47. Disconnect the power distribution cable
1 from the power supply at connector J2.
5. Remove the two screws
2 from the rear of the power supply.
6. Slide the power supply forward to disengage the locking tabs from the front of the power supply.
Lift the power supply carefully off the enclosure.
End of New Level Power Supply

Figure 10-47. Power Supply (New Level only)

Replace Power Supply (Former and Current Levels)

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4, then return here.
3. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
4. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) P04 for the area of failure.

10-64 IBM 3590 MI

FID E3: Pressure Sensor
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck Enclosure” on page 10-56 for FRU identifier E3.

Remove Pressure Sensor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the 3590.
3. Remove the Library Manager (LM) connector, if present and the SCSI or fibre cable connector or
connectors from the back of the drive.

Note: For SCSI drives, do not separate the terminator or the daisy-chained cable connector from the
back of the SCSI cable connector.

CAUTION:
The 3590 Model B11/E11/H11 with the ACF weighs 40.5 kilograms (89 pounds) so remove the ACF
before lifting the 3590. The 3590 weighs 28.6 kilograms (63 pounds) without the ACF attached; it
takes two persons to safely lift this unit.

Note: This notice is translated into selected languages. See C1 in the INSP section.
4. If the drive has an ACF, remove the ACF. See “Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33.
5. Remove the drive from the rack and place it on a work surface.
6. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
7. Position the drive on its left side so you can work from the bottom and right sides.
8. Remove the card pack fan-plate from the bottom of the drive. See “FID BF: Fan (Card Pack)” on
page 10-61.

9. See Figure 10-48 on page 10-66. From the bottom access hole, remove the screw
2 that
secures the pressure sensor card assembly
4.
10. Carefully move the card assembly out of the sensor mounting bracket slot
5 and pull the assembly
out the bottom of the drive.
11. Disconnect the cable connector
1 from the card.
12. Disconnect the pressure hose from the hose connection
3 and remove the card.

Replace Pressure Sensor

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4, then return here.
3. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
4. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T62 for the area of failure.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-65

Figure 10-48. Pressure Sensor. (View Rotated 90°)

10-66 IBM 3590 MI

 FID E4: Card Pack
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck Enclosure” on page 10-56 for FRU identifier E4.

Attention: The card pack is ESD sensitive. Special care must be used when handling ESD parts.
See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.

Card Pack Part Numbers

There are multiple card pack part numbers that can be used on the 3590 drives, but they are not all
interchangeable. Before you order a replacement card pack, ensure that you are ordering the correct part
number. If you order the part number from the Card Pack that is being removed, the ordering system will
automatically ship the correct replacement part. See Table 10-2 on page 10-67 below or the Parts Catalog,
“Assembly 3: Deck Enclosure” on page 11-10.
Table 10-2. Card Pack Part Numbers
Part Drive SCSI/ Power uCode Ship Comments
Number Model Fibre Supply Increment Through
Level Date
45G0100 Base SCSI 05H9098 D0IA_xxx 02/1995
05H4453 B11/B1A 03/1995
05H8916 12/1996
05H9074 04/1998
05J9895 03/2000

06J0015 Ultra SCSI 05H9098 D0IB_xxx 11/1998

35L0818 B11/B1A 03/2000

09L4673 E11/E1A SCSI 05J9721 D0IC_xxx 03/2000 * Can be field upgraded to D0ID or D0IE
*
35L1856 Ultra SCSI 05J9721 D0ID_xxx 07/2000 Common Card Pack
B11/B1A * * Can be field upgraded to D0IE
or
E11/E1A
19P0174 Ultra SCSI 05H9098 * D0ID_xxx, 04/2001 Common Card Pack with Load Resistor
B11/B1A or D0IE_xxx * Approx 1000 shipped with
05J9721 Power Supply P/N 09H9098
E11/E1A SCSI 95J9721 D0ID_xxx, 04/2001 Common Card Pack with Load Resistor
D0IE_xxx
19P3431 Ultra SCSI 05J9721 D0IE_xxx Current
B11/B1A
or
E11/E1A
| 19P6251 E11/E1A SCSI 05J9721 D0IF_xxx Current First Hxx support level card pack (includes
| or ReadMe information)
| H11/H1A

35L1986 E11/E1A Fibre 05J9721 D0IE_xxx 07/2000 First Fibre Channel Card Pack
19P0175 E11/E1A Fibre 05J9721 D0IE_xxx 04/2001 Second Fibre Channel Card Pack
19P3432 E11/E1A Fibre 05J9721 D0IE_xxx Current Third Fibre Channel Card Pack

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-67

 Table 10-2. Card Pack Part Numbers (continued)
Part Drive SCSI/ Power uCode Ship Comments
Number Model Fibre Supply Increment Through
Level Date
| 19P6252 E11/E1A Fibre 05J9721 D0IF_xxx Current Fourth Fibre Channel Card Pack (includes
| or ReadMe information)
| H11/H1A

Before Removing Card Pack

| Note: Before proceeding, ensure that you are not trying to attach the 3590 to an LVD device. The 3590 is
| an HVD device and does not support LVD.

Attention: Handle card packs by the side of the card pack frame. Do not handle at the ends.
Damage to components and the internal card assembly solder joints will occur if packs are handled at the
ends.

Card Pack Replacement Notes

v Do not push on fibre connectors! Push on the edge of the card between the connectors, if necessary.
Use the metal bar and handle.
v Before replacing a card pack to correct a drive failure, try reseating all of the connectors to see if that
will correct the problem.
1. Attempt to recover the microcode EC level and link level of the failing card pack before replacing it with
a new card pack.
a. Press the Change Mode pushbutton if the operator Options menu is not displayed.
b. Select Services from the Options menu, and press Enter.
c. Select Microcode Level from the Services menu, and press Enter.
2. If the microcode EC level was obtained from the previous step:
a. Write the EC level, link level and date in “Microcode EC Level History Log” on page 9-61.
b. Go to Figure 5-2 on page 5-6 and Table 5-2 on page 5-7. Record the ACF Mode
1, Drive Type

2 and SCSI or fibre channel address information from Supplemental Messages
5.
c. Go to “CE Drive Options Menu” on page 5-52. Record the Drive Serial Number, Drive Features and
any other CE Drive Options that will be lost when the card pack is replaced.
3. For fiber attachment only, attempt to display and record the fibre channel world wide node and port
names of the failing card pack before replacing it with a new card pack.
a. For fibre channel attached drives, perform the “Display WW Names Procedure” on page 9-63.
b. Record the World Wide Node and Port Names in the “Fibre Channel World Wide Name History
Log” on page 9-63.

Note: It is very important to record the Node and Port Names from the failing card pack if the
customer’s Fibre Network contains any switches with the “Zoning” function. These names
will have to be set into the VPD memory of the new card pack. If the old Node and Port
names are not available, it will be necessary to have the customer reconfigure the entire
Fibre Network to establish new names for the drives.
4.

OEM Drive Only

If the failing card pack is in an OEM drive that does not report to the host as an IBM 3590, it will be
necessary to update the Manufacturer, Drive Type, and Drive Model Number fields in VPD memory
after the new card pack is installed.

If possible, recover the Manufacturer, Drive Type, and Drive Model Number information from the failing
card pack before it is removed.

10-68 IBM 3590 MI

 This procedure requires a password and is normally done by OEM support personnel.

See “OEM Use Only Menu” on page 5-78 for details.

End of OEM Drive Only

Remove Card Pack

Attention: The head guide assembly cables, which attach to the card pack, interfere with the card pack
when it is being removed or installed. Use extreme care when removing or installing the card pack to
avoid damaging the head guide assembly cables.
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the 3590.
Attention: Support the fan plate when removing the mounting screws. The fan assembly can drop
and damage parts.
3. See Figure 10-49 on page 10-70. Remove the screws
19 that secure the card pack fan
18 to the
bottom of the deck enclosure and lower the fan assembly.
4. Disconnect the fan connector and remove the fan.

5. Disconnect the two head cables
6 (from the top card in the card pack):

Note: Each head cable connector
3 is locked to the card receptacle
4 with a sliding retaining bar

1. The retaining bar has a tab at the front
2 and rear
5 that engage slots in the
receptacle to lock the connector in place.
a. Reach into the fan opening and pull the retaining bar
1 toward the front of the drive until it
stops, approximately 6 mm (1/4 in.).
b. With the retaining bar disengaged, pull upward on the retaining bar while carefully tilting the front
and rear of the connector until it is disconnected from the card receptacle (rock it several times).
c. Repeat this procedure to disconnect the other head cable connector.
6. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
7. Remove the Library Manager (LM) connector, if present and the SCSI or fibre channel cable
connector or connectors from the back of the drive.
Notes:
a. For SCSI drives, do not separate the terminator
17 or the daisy-chained cable connector
16
from the back of the SCSI cable connector
15.
b. For Fibre drives, do not expose the ends to dust and moisture, use caps if available.
21 Handle
the cables and connectors with care or damage will occur.
8. Remove the deck enclosure back plate. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
9. Disconnect the following internal cable connectors from the card pack
7:
v Motor drive connector
11
v Pneumatic motor drive connector
12
v Power input connector
14 (behind the library manager connector). On drives with the new level
power supply, the cable can be disconnected from the power supply also.
Attention: Observe the correct cable routing for reassembly.
10. Remove the card pack retaining screw
8.
Attention: To protect the head guide assembly cables while the card pack is being removed, insert
a punch card or similar object between the top of the card pack and the head guide assembly cables.
Ensure the card remains between the card pack and cables while the card pack is pulled from the
enclosure.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-69

 Note: On some library installations there may be a cable mounting bracket attached to the bottom of
the drive enclosure. The screws for this bracket may be long enough to interfere with the
bottom of the card pack
9 as it is being removed. Loosen these screws and back them part
of the way out, if necessary.

11. Carefully pull the card pack out the rear of the deck enclosure, ensuring the head cables do not
become caught on the card pack.

Figure 10-49. Card Pack Showing SCSI and Fibre Cables

Note: As you pull the card pack out, raise it to clear the bottom
9 of the enclosure.

Replace Card Pack

Note: Do not push on fibre connectors! Push on the edge of the card between the connectors, if
necessary.

10-70 IBM 3590 MI

| 1. Remove the card pack from the packaging by removing the foam from the side. Hold the card pack
| by the side while using the handle to lift it out of the package.

SCSI Channel Only

2. See Figure 10-50. There is a selectable mode switch
1 on the bottom of the SCSI card in the
E11/E1A and H11/H1A Card Pack and also in the Common Card Pack. Future microcode releases
may use this switch for model or mode selection. This switch should always be set to the “F” position.

Note: Use the Potentiometer Adjusting tool P/N 1864853, to set this switch. See Figure 3-27 on
page 3-46.
End of SCSI Channel Only

Figure 10-50. SCSI Card Mode Switch

Attention
a. Ensure that the metal tab on top of the card pack is bent straight up. If it is bent toward the front
of the drive, it may prevent the card pack connectors from seating correctly.
b. Ensure the head cables do not become caught on the card pack. Use a punch card or similar
object between the card pack and head guide assembly cables while the card pack is being
inserted.
c. Lift the power supply if you need more space to install the card pack.
d. Ensure that the head connectors and the power transistors that protrude through the sheet metal
casing of the card pack do not get bent or otherwise damaged.
e. Ensure that the pneumatic motor-control cable is routed so that it is always outside of the Card
Pack metal enclosure. If the cable is routed near the two large modules on the top card in the
Card Pack, intermittent data errors can occur.
The recommended cable routing is straight down from the pneumatic assembly, past the library
manager connector, then across the bottom of the enclosure to the card pack connector. See .

Note: Do not push on the connectors when installing the card! Use the metal bar and handle.
3. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-71

Note: DO NOT connect the external SCSI or fibre channel cables at this time. They will be connected in a
later step, after the Customer and Drive Options have been set.
4. After installing the new card pack, restore power to the 3590.
Attention: If any of FIDs 00 - 04 (Configuration Errors) are displayed on the operator/CE panel
after power-on, do not try to repair, as indicated in next step, but continue to step 6.
5. If the power-on test did not complete successfully, repair as needed, then go to step 6.

Or

If the power-on test completed successfully, go to step 6.

6. Perform procedure “Drive Serial Number” on page 9-51.
7. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4.
8. Perform the “Set Customer Options” on page 8-35 procedure.
9. Perform the “Set Drive Options” on page 8-36 procedure.
10. Perform the “SCSI Ports Wrap Test” on page 9-106 or the “Fibre Channel Ports Wrap Test” on
page 9-112.
11. Connect the external SCSI or fibre channel cables.
12. To ensure the EC level of the microcode on the new card pack is not down level, do the following:

a. Press the Change Mode pushbutton if the operator Options menu is not already displayed.
b. Select Services from the Options menu, and press Enter.
c. Select Microcode Level from the Services menu, and press Enter to display the EC level and
link level of the microcode on the new card pack.
d. Look at the latest EC level and link level written in “Microcode EC Level History Log” on
page 9-61.

Note: The latest EC level is determined by the link level (LL), as the EC level may not always
increment to a higher number. The following example shows that the second entry is the
latest level microcode.
EC Level Link Level
6C56789 4D0D
3C56789 5B02 (highest EC level)

Compare the displayed EC level (new card pack) to latest written EC level and link level
previously installed. If they compare, go to step 18.
v If the card pack is up-level from the FMR tape, perform steps 13 through 15, then go to step 18.
v If the card pack is down-level from the previously-installed level, go to step 13.
13. Select Cancel to return to the CE Options menu.
14. Select Microcode Update from the CE options menu, and press Enter. (See “Updating Microcode
from FMR Cartridge” on page 9-58 for details.)
15. After you load the FMR tape when prompted, the Select EC Level menu displays a series of EC
levels.

Note: If the card pack has a different EC level than that which is on the FMR tape, the microcode is
automatically written on the FMR tape and is also displayed.
16. Find the EC level on the menu that matches the EC level written in “Microcode EC Level History Log”
on page 9-61.
17. Select the EC level and link level from the menu that matches the written level, and press Enter.
18. After the microcode is written into the card pack, unload the tape, and press Reset to activate the
code.

pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Only

10-72 IBM 3590 MI

a. You must have root authority to do the following step. If you do not have root authority, ask your
customer to enter these commands.
b. Update the VPD data in the host pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System by unconfiguring the device (Example:
rmdev -l rmt3) and reconfiguring the device (Example: mkdev -l rmt3).
c. In this example, the 3 in rmt3 is the drive number.
End of pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System Only

OEM Drive Only

If you are replacing the card pack in an OEM drive that does not report to the host as an IBM 3590, it will
be necessary to update the Manufacturer, Drive Type, and Drive Model Number fields in VPD memory
after the new card pack is installed.

This procedure requires a password and is normally done by OEM support personnel.

See “OEM Use Only Menu” on page 5-78 for details.

End of OEM Drive Only
19. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
20. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T21 for the area of failure.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-73

Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck
The FRUs in Figure 10-51 are identified by their FID number for example, C6 is FID C6, the machine reel
motor. The list following part 2 of the figure shows the FID names.

For the locations of the deck cables, see the list following the figures.

Figure 10-51. Deck Locations (Part 1 of 2)

10-74 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 10-52. Deck Locations (Part 2 of 2)

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-75

FID FID Name FID FID Name
Number Number
B5 Tape-lifter solenoid C9 Door-open sensor
B6 Decoupler CA Tray-up sensor
B7 Tension transducer assembly CC Cartridge-type sensor
BB Pantocam CD Cartridge-present sensor
BC Loader assembly CE Tape path A sensor
C6 Machine reel motor CF Tape path B sensor
C7 File reel motor D0 Head guide and brush assembly
C8 File-protect sensor D4 Head cleaning brush assembly

See the following for the deck cable locations:

FID Cable FRU Name and Location
D6 Motor Power Cable 10-117.
DA Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable 10-118.
DB Power Supply Cable ( E11/E1A and H11/H1A only) 10-120
DC ACF and Operator/CE Panel Cable 10-121.

10-76 IBM 3590 MI

FID B5: Tape-Lifter Solenoid
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier B5.

Remove Tape-Lifter Solenoid

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
4. See Figure 10-53 on page 10-78. Remove the large hose
1 from the tape-lifter solenoid.

Attention: The VPD card is ESD sensitive and care must be used not to touch the card when
disconnecting the VPD cable connector or disconnecting the hoses from the tape-lifter solenoid.

Disconnect the VPD cable connector
2.

5. Loosen the tape-lifter solenoid mounting screw
3.
6. Remove the tape-lifter solenoid mounting bracket screw
5.
Attention: When disconnecting the small tape-lifter solenoid hose, do not pull the other end of the
hose out of the head guide.

Carefully disconnect the small hose
4 from the tape-lifter solenoid (under the tape-lifter solenoid
mounting bracket) and move the tape-lifter solenoid out of the way.
7. Disconnect the tape-lifter solenoid connector (J4)
7 as follows:

Note: Connector J4 is located under the deck casting
6 and can be reached two ways, depending
on access to the drive.

If you have access to the left side of the drive, the J4 connector can be reached through the opening

8 in the left side.

or, if you do not have access to the left side of the drive, remove the 3 screws
9 that secure the
cooling fan to the bottom of the deck enclosure.

Attention: Support the fan plate when removing the mounting screws. The fan assembly can drop
and damage parts. Lower the fan and disconnect the fan connector
10. The J4 connector can now
be reached through the fan opening.
8. Remove the tape-lifter solenoid.

Replace Tape-Lifter Solenoid

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4, then return here.
3. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
4. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T41 for the area of failure.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-77

Figure 10-53. Tape Lifter Solenoid

10-78 IBM 3590 MI

FID B6: Decoupler
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier B6.

Remove Decoupler
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
4. See Figure 10-54 on page 10-80. Position the pantocam arm
3 so the arm is out of the way of the
decoupler
5.

Note: When positioning the pantocam, always grip the arm next to the pantocam motor shaft
2.
Never grip the outer pantocam arm to reposition the pantocam.
5. Remove the two screws
1 and
4 from the right tape guide and remove the guide.
6. Disconnect the tape-path-A sensor connector
8.
7. Disconnect the two hoses
7 from the decoupler.
8. Remove the three decoupler mounting screws
6 and
9 then remove the decoupler.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-79

Replace Decoupler
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
Attention: When reinstalling the right tape guide with screws
1 and
4, make sure that the
horizontal surfaces of the right and left tape guides are exactly level to each other where the two
edges meet. Check this with the edge of a small metal ruler.
2. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4, then return here.
3. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
4. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T41 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-54. Decoupler

10-80 IBM 3590 MI

FID B7: Tension Transducer Assembly
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier B7.

Remove Tension Transducer

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
Attention: If this FRU is in the right hand drive and it is installed in a rack with a second drive next
to it, the left tape guide cannot be removed with the head guide protector installed. Use extreme
care not to damage the read/write head when removing the tape guide assembly.
4. See Figure 10-55. Install the orange head protector P/N 45G0145 on the head
6.
5. Remove the left tape guide screws
5 and remove the guide.
6. If tension transducer screws
1 cannot be accessed with plastic shield
8 in place, loosen the
internal socket head cap screw
7 and rotate the plastic shield
8 to gain access to pressure hose

2 and screws
1.

Note: You must follow “Adjustment of Tension Transducer Plastic Shield” on page 10-83 during the
replacement of this part.
7. Disconnect the pressure hose
2.
8. Remove the two clamp screws
3 from the transducer mounting.
9. Remove the three transducer mounting screws
1.

10. The tension transducer card is ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.
Lift the transducer assembly off the base casting far enough to disconnect the transducer connector,
P14
4 and remove the assembly.

Figure 10-55. Tension Transducer Assembly

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-81

Replace Tension Transducer Assembly
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. See Figure 10-56.
Attention:
If the plastic shield
6 was moved, or if the center hex head screw
7 was loosened, perform
“Adjustment of Tension Transducer Plastic Shield” on page 10-83, then return here.
When reinstalling the left tape guide
3, make sure that the horizontal surfaces of the right
4
and left
3 tape guides are exactly level to each other where the two edges meet. Check this
with the edge of a small metal ruler.
3. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4, then return here.
4. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
5. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T41 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-56. Tension Transducer Plastic Shield

10-82 IBM 3590 MI

Adjustment of Tension Transducer Plastic Shield
See Figure 10-56 on page 10-82.

Note: There are two levels of Tension Transducer assemblies. The newer level is adjusted at the factory,
and the screw
7 is sealed. DO NOT adjust the newer level assembly.
1. Attention: If screw
7 is loosened for any reason, there are two conditions that must be met when it
is tightened:
a. The gap between the plastic shield
6 and the take-up reel flange
1 must be set. See step 2.
b. The position of the black plastic guide
8 must be set in relation to the teeth on the lower ceramic
guide. See step 3.
2. Ensure that the gap between the edge of the shield
6 and the take-up reel flange
1 is 4 mm (0.156
in.) at a point approximately 6 mm (0.250 in.) from the corner of the shield, as shown
2. You can use
a 4 mm or 5/32 in. hex wrench to check the gap.
3. Ensure that the first four teeth on the lower ceramic guide do not extend beyond the top edge of the
inner hub of the black plastic guide
8. See the Good and Bad illustrations in Figure 10-56 on
page 10-82.
4. If either of the above conditions are not correct, perform the adjustment as follows:
a. Loosen screw
7 just enough so the lower black plastic guide
8 can be moved easily.
b. Move the lower black plastic guide
8 outward along a line that runs from the center of the
pantocam through the center of the tension transducer. See the grey shaded arrows in
Figure 10-56 on page 10-82.

Note: You should be able to move the lower black plastic guide so that all or most of the ceramic
teeth do not extend beyond the top edge of the inner hub of the black plastic guide. See the
Good and Bad illustrations in Figure 10-56 on page 10-82. The most important area is the
first four teeth that the leader block will pass on a load operation.
c. Tighten screw
7 just enough to allow the shield
6 to move, but be held in place (snug).
d. Hold a 4 mm or 5/32 in. hex wrench vertically in the gap at a point approximately 6 mm (0.25 in.)
from the corner of the shield
2.
e. Move the shield towards the take-up reel until it just touches the hex wrench.
f. Tighten screw
7.

Do NOT overtighten the screw. The ceramic guides break easily.

g. After the gap is set, rotate the pantocam arm
5 all the way around the transducer in both
directions. Ensure the cross-pin on the pantocam does not touch the transducer plastic shield
6.
h. Check again to ensure that the teeth on the lower ceramic guide do not extend beyond the top
edge of the inner hub of the black plastic guide. See the Good and Bad illustrations in
Figure 10-56 on page 10-82.
5. Return to the procedure that sent you here.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-83

FID BB: Pantocam
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier BB.
Reel Hub Assemblies:
1. There are 3 levels of machine reel hub assemblies. See Figure 10-57.
2. The new style (green) parts have different dimensions and tolerances than the old style (grey or black)
parts. The new style upper
3 and lower
5 flanges have a groove near the hub to prevent damage
to the edge of the tape. The new style also adds a retainer plate
2 at the top to prevent distortion of
the hub when the screws are tightened.
3. The old style (black or grey) parts are no longer available. The new style (green) parts are available as
a FRU kit. (See the Chapter 11, “Parts Catalog” on page 11-1 for P/N and ordering information).
Attention: DO NOT mix the old style (grey or black) and new style (green) parts. The dimensions
are different and they are not interchangeable. If you are replacing the old style grey or black parts
with the new style green parts, be sure to remove any shims. There are no shims used with the new
style green parts.

Note: The new style retainer plate
2 is black anodized metal and is flat on both sides.

6
A1400369

Old Style New Style

(Black or Grey) (Green)

Figure 10-57. Machine Reel Hub Assembly

When removing the pantocam you will be working very close to the head guide and brush assembly
components.

Attention: Do not touch the read/write surface or the circuit board on the head guide assembly.
See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.

Remove Pantocam
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the 3590.

10-84 IBM 3590 MI

 3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
4. See Figure 10-58. Disconnect the two pantocam motor leads:
v Black motor lead: right terminal
2
v Yellow motor lead: left terminal
1

Figure 10-58. Pantocam Motor Connectors

See Figure 10-59 on page 10-86.

5. Remove the left tape guide screws
2 and
8 then remove the guide.
6. Loosen the machine-reel guide screw
3.
7. Remove the large hose
5 from the tape-lifter solenoid and the tee connection
4.
8. Remove the right D-bearing hose
16 and the rear decoupler hose
15.
9. Loosen the tape-lifter solenoid mounting screw
7.
10. Remove the tape-lifter solenoid mounting bracket screw
10.

11. Disconnect VPD cable connector
6.

Attention: When disconnecting the small solenoid hose, do not pull the other end of the hose out
of the head guide.

Carefully disconnect the small hose from the tape-lifter solenoid (under the tape-lifter solenoid
mounting bracket
9) and move the tape-lifter solenoid out of the way.
12. Position the pantocam arm so the threader pin
13 is away from the loader. When positioning the
pantocam, always grip the arm next to the pantocam motor shaft. Never grip the outer pantocam arm
to reposition the pantocam.
13. Position the machine reel
12 to gain access to the front pantocam-base mounting screw (located
under the edge of the pantocam).
14. Remove the three pantocam-base mounting screws
11 and carefully lift the pantocam assembly up
approximately 13 mm (1/2 in.) and let it rest at this position.
15. Remove the two screws
22 in the top of the upper flange
1 and remove the flange and retainer
plate, if present.
16. Rotate the hub
18 so the opening is toward you. Use both thumbs to spread the opening apart
19
and lift off the hub.

Note: Do not use tools to remove the hub. Damage to the hub may result.
17. Remove the lower flange
20.
18. Unsnap the machine reel guide from the center tape guide and rotate the machine reel guide
17
away from the pantocam.
19. Carefully lift the pantocam out of the drive, taking care not to damage the head cable wiring.
20. Disconnect tape-path-B sensor connector
14.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-85

 9 10
17
8

6 ATTENTION
Static-Sensitive 16
5
4
15
3
2 14
11
1
13

12

22 1

18
20 23
21 20
19

A1400070
18

Figure 10-59. Pantocam

Replace Pantocam
Note: The new pantocam FRU kit should contain a ferrite ring, see Figure 10-60 on page 10-87. It should
be installed on the pantocam lead when the new pantocam is installed. This ferrite reduces
electrical noise in the cable. Follow the instructions in the FRU kit.

10-86 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 10-60. Pantocam Motor Leads Ferrite

See Figure 10-59 on page 10-86.

1. Place the new pantocam in position so it is raised up approximately 13 mm (1/2 in.) and let it rest in
this position.
2. Connect the tape-path-B sensor connector
14.
3. Rotate the machine reel guide
17 toward the pantocam and snap it into the center tape guide.
4. Place the lower flange
20 onto the motor hub.

Note: The new style green lower flange has a groove on one side of the flange. See item
5
Figure 10-57 on page 10-84. Ensure the groove is on the top, as shown.
5. Install the take-up hub
18 onto the motor hub. Ensure that the keys
19 at the bottom of the hub

18 are set into the cutouts
21 in the lower flange
20. The hub should sit flat on the lower flange
with no gaps between the two parts. Rotating the lower flange may be required to ensure proper
seating.
6. Insert the gap set tool
23 (PN 05H4671) into the gap in the hub
18.
7. Install the upper flange
1, retainer plate, and the two screws
22.
Notes:
a. Some of the retainers have a ridge on one side of the part. This ridge is non-functional and
should be on the top side of the retainer. The flat side of the retainer should be against the top
flange.
b. The screw tightening procedure is very important. If it is not done correctly the hub gap will not be
adjusted properly.
8. With the gap set tool inserted all the way into the hub, tighten the two screws
22 enough to ensure
the hub and flanges are seated all the way down on the motor hub.
9. Loosen the screws and retighten them so they are finger–tight against the retainer plate.
10. Tighten the two screws a minimum of 1/4 turn (maximum of 3/8 turn) each.

Note: If the screws are not tight enough, the pressure of the tape wrapped around the machine reel
hub will cause the hub gap to close up tight on the leader block. This may result in load or
unload errors.
11. After the screws are tightened, ensure the gap set tool slides in and out of the hub with just a slight
amount of drag or the leader block on the tape will bind in the slot. If the gap set tool is still tight, the
screws may not have been tightened correctly. Loosen the screws and repeat steps 8 through 11.

Grey Hubs Only

12. If the gap set tool is still tight after two attempts, perform the following procedure:

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-87

 a. Loosen two screws
22.
b. Insert the gap set tool into the hub
18 part way, as shown in the bottom of Figure 10-59 on
page 10-86. Do not insert it all the way into the motor hub.
c. Hold the top flange
1 while using the gap set tool to rotate the hub
18 left (clockwise). Refer
to the arrow that indicates the direction of rotation at the bottom of Figure 10-59 on page 10-86.
The hub will only move a small distance.
d. Tighten the screws again and ensure that the tool slides in and out freely.

End of Grey Hubs Only

13. Reinstall the Pantocam assembly on the locating pins.
14. Reinstall and tighten the pantocam screws
11.
15. Connect the small hose from the tape-lifter solenoid (under the tape-lifter solenoid mounting bracket

9). Allow the solenoid to rest in place under the pantocam for VPD connector access.

16. Reconnect the VPD cable connector
6.

17. Reinstall the tape-lifter solenoid mounting bracket screw
10.
18. Tighten the tape-lifter solenoid mounting screw
7.
19. Reinstall the right D-bearing hose
16 and the rear decoupler hose
15.
20. Reinstall the large hose
5 to the tape-lifter solenoid and the tee connection
4.
21. Tighten the machine reel guide screw
3.
22. Reinstall the left tape guide, using screws
2 and
8.
Attention: When reinstalling the left tape guide with screws
2 and
8, make sure that the
horizontal surfaces of the right and left tape guides are exactly level to each other where the two
edges meet. Check this with the edge of a small metal ruler.
23. See Figure 10-58 on page 10-85. Reconnect the two pantocam motor leads, if not already done as
part of the ferrite ring installation.
24. The pressure must be adjusted after replacing the pantocam. Go to “Measurement and Adjustment of
Pneumatic System” on page 10-4 and perform the adjustment, then return here.
25. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
26. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T45 for the area of failure.

10-88 IBM 3590 MI

FID BC: Loader Assembly
Notes:
1. There are two styles of loaders present in the field; one with the old style loader cable shown on
Figure 10-61 on page 10-90 and one with a new, more reliable loader cable shown in Figure 10-62 on
page 10-91. If you are asked to determine which loader is present, as part of the FRU isolation, refer
to the cable in the area of screw items
2 and
3 to see the subtle difference. The new cable has a
built-in loop with improved cable restraint for longer life.
2. The new loader FRUs will be shipped with loader spring kit. Discard them if they are not necessary on
your loader.

Note:

See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier BC.

Attention: All of the sensors in the loader assembly are ESD sensitive. See “Working with
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.

Remove Loader Assembly

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.

Note: When you replace the loader assembly of a drive in the 3590 Model C12/C14 drive frame,
you must follow the Model B1A/E1A/H1A drive replacement instructions starting in step 5.

Model B11/E11/H11 Only

4. Remove the ACF assembly. See “Automatic Cartridge Facility (ACF)” on page 9-33, then return here.
End of Model B11/E11/H11 Only

Model B1A/E1A/H1A Only

5. See Figure 10-61 on page 10-90. Insert a cartridge
10 in the loader before you turn the loader gear
to prevent bending the file-protect sensor.
6. Turn the loader gear
4 to expose the two cartridge-present sensor screws, then remove the screws
from the sensor and remove the loader spring
1. Replace the sensor and save the loader spring
for installation in the new loader.

Note: Skip the next step and go to step 8 on page 10-90, if you are replacing the loader of a drive in a
Model C12/C14 drive frame.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-89

 Figure 10-61. Loader Assembly (Former Cable)

7. For better access, remove the “FID 93: Library Interface Cover (Model B1A/E1A/H1A Only)” on
page 10-124 (you may not have to disconnect the cables). Remove and save the fiducial bracket
9
by removing the screw. Then skip to step 9.
8. If you are replacing the loader of a drive in a Model C12/C14, remove the fiducial bracket, screw, and
lockwasher. Refer to “Begin Model B1A/E1A/H1A Drive Installation” in the INST section of IBM 3590
Tape Subsystem Models C12/C14 Maintenance Information for the correct procedure, if necessary.
Save the fiducial bracket, screw and lockwasher for reinstallation on the new loader.
End of Model B1A/E1A/H1A Only
9. Position the pantocam arm so the threader pin is away from the loader. When positioning the
pantocam, always grip the arm next to the pantocam motor shaft. Never grip the outer pantocam arm
to reposition the pantocam.
10. See Figure 10-61. Disconnect cable
5.
11. Remove screws
2 and
3.
12. Remove screw
8 by inserting a narrow-shaft screwdriver through hole
6. Do not force the
screwdriver against the hex-shaped shaft
7 when removing or replacing this screw as damage to
the shaft and to the FRU may occur.
13. Carefully remove the loader assembly (tilt it to remove). Use care not to damage the cables.

Replace Loader Assembly

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here. If the loader spring (
1 in
Figure 10-61 or Figure 10-62 on page 10-91) was removed from a Model B1A/E1A/H1A loader.

Note: Be sure the cable (see Figure 10-62 on page 10-91, between
2 and
3) is tucked between
the loader assembly (under the file protect sensor) and the machine reel tape guide assembly.
Hand cycle the loader to ensure no interference between the cable and other assemblies exist.
2. Important Note: Whenever the loader assembly or fiducial bracket are removed or replaced on a
Model B1A/E1A/H1A, it will be necessary to run the Teach Selected Devices routine from the Teach
pull down on the library controller. See IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Maintenance Information for
details.
| 3. If you are replacing the loader of a drive in a Model C12/C14, make sure to install the fiducial bracket,
| screw, and lockwasher that were saved in an earlier step. The fiducial alignment with respect to the
| loader is critical. Refer to “Begin B1A/E1A/H1A Drive Installation” in the INST section of IBM 3590
| Tape Subsystem Models C12/C14 Maintenance Information for the fiducial installation procedure. For

10-90 IBM 3590 MI

| correct alignment of the fiducial, refer to procedure “Align the Fiducial” in the PROC section of IBM
| 3590 Tape Subsystem Models C12/C14 Maintenance Information.
4. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
5. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T42 for the area of failure.

|
| Figure 10-62. Loader Assembly (Newer Cable)
|

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-91

Replace Loader Spring
1. For replacement of the loader spring, perform the following steps:
__ a. Refer to Figure 10-63
__ b. Check that the loader door moves freely.
__ c. Rotate the top of the loader gear
4 towards the rear of the device to move the loader’s tray to
the front of the drive.
__ d. Insert a cartridge
5 in the loader to prevent bending the file-protect sensor’s flag
7.
__ e. Rotate the top of the loader gear
4 to the front of the device to expose the cartridge-present
sensor
1, which is the top sensor at the rear of the loader.
__ f. Remove the two screws
2 that hold the sensor.
__ g. Install the loader spring
3 under the sensor and reinstall the screws
2.

Note: The old style used both spring
3and stiffener
8. Stiffener
8 is no longer used.
__ h. Rotate the top of the loader gear
4 towards the rear of the device to move the loader’s tray to
the front of the drive.
__ i. Remove and reinsert the cartridge while observing the cartridge-present flag
6. It should freely
exit and enter the cartridge-present sensor
1.
__ j. Remove and save the cartridge.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T42 for the area of failure.

ATTENTION Static-sensitive
Figure 10-63. Cartridge-Present Loader Spring

10-92 IBM 3590 MI

FID C6: Machine Reel Motor
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier C6.

Remove Machine Reel Motor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the back of the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
4. Remove the pantocam. See “FID BB: Pantocam” on page 10-84.
5. See Figure 10-64. Remove the center-tape-guide mounting screw
3 and remove the guide.
6. Rotate the machine reel guide
5 out of the way of the machine reel motor.
7. Remove the three machine-reel-motor mounting screws
6.
8. If needed, remove the card pack fan to access the motor connectors. See “FID BF: Fan (Card Pack)”
on page 10-61, then return here.
9. Disconnect motor connector MMP1
1.
10. Disconnect the motor connector on the bottom of the motor
2 (the connector has a locking tab on
the bottom).
11. Carefully pull the motor
4 up and out of the drive.

Replace Machine Reel Motor

Note: You will use the gap set tool P/N 05H4671 to adjust the motor hub clearance (see “Replace
Pantocam” on page 10-86).
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4, then return here.
3. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
4. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T54 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-64. Machine Reel Motor

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-93

FID C7: File Reel Motor
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier C7.

Remove File Reel Motor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the back of the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
4. Remove the loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
5. If needed, remove the card pack fan to get access the motor connectors. See “FID BF: Fan (Card
Pack)” on page 10-61, then return here.
6. See Figure 10-65 on page 10-95. Disconnect connector MT1
2.
7. Disconnect the motor connector on the bottom of the motor
3 (the connector has a locking tab on
the bottom).
8. The two spade connectors
4 will interfere with removing the motor. Remove the two spade
connectors
4 from the motor terminals (one on each side of the motor).
v Plus (+) lead to the red
5 terminal
v Minus (-) lead to the black terminal

It is not necessary to remove the ground lead now.

9. Remove the three motor-mounting screws
1.
10. Carefully lift the motor out of the casting, taking care not to damage the wiring.

Replace File Reel Motor

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.

Note: When reinstalling motor, red (+) motor terminal
5 should be toward the front.
2. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4, then return here.
3. Important Note: Whenever the loader assembly or fiducial bracket are removed or replaced on a
Model B1A/E1A/H1A, it will be necessary to run the Teach Selected Devices routine from the Teach
pull down on the library controller. See IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Maintenance Information for
details.
4. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
5. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T54 for the area of failure.

10-94 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 10-65. File Reel Motor

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-95

FID C8: File-Protect Sensor
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier C8.

Debris may be causing the problem, clean the sensor with a brush (standard tool kit soft bristle brush).
Verify problem remains prior to replacing the FRU.

Remove File-Protect Sensor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the deck enclosure top cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
3. See Figure 10-66. Remove two screws
3 securing the file-protect sensor
2.

4. The file-protect sensor is ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.
Disconnect the connector
1 from the file-protect sensor and remove the sensor.

Replace File-Protect Sensor

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T32 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-66. File-Protect Sensor

10-96 IBM 3590 MI

FID C9: Door-Open Sensor
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier C9.

Check the sensor and sensor cable connections, reseat if needed.

Debris may be causing the problem, clean the sensor with a brush (standard tool kit soft bristle brush).
Verify problem remains prior to replacing the FRU.

Remove Door-Open Sensor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the deck enclosure top cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
3. See Figure 10-67. Remove two screws
3 holding door-open sensor
2.

4. The door-open sensor is ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.
Disconnect the connector
1 from the sensor and remove the sensor.

Replace Door-Open Sensor

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T33 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-67. Door-Open Sensor

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-97

FID CA: Tray-Up Sensor
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier CA.

A bind in the loader can cause this FID to be presented. So before you replace this FRU, check for a bind
by inserting a cartridge in the loader and turning the loader gear (see Figure 10-61 on page 10-90 keys

10 and
4). If a bind exists, go to “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.

Debris may be causing the problem, clean the sensor with a brush (standard tool kit soft bristle brush).
Verify problem remains prior to replacing the FRU.

Remove Tray-Up Sensor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the deck enclosure top cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
3. See Figure 10-68. Remove two screws
2 holding tray-up sensor
3.

4. Tray-up sensor is ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive
Parts” on page 9-23.
Disconnect the connector
1 from the sensor and remove the sensor.

Replace Tray-Up Sensor

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T33 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-68. Tray-Up Sensor

10-98 IBM 3590 MI

FID CC: Cartridge-Type Sensor Card Assembly
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier CC.

Debris may be causing the problem, clean the sensor with a brush (standard tool kit soft bristle brush).
Verify problem remains prior to replacing the FRU.
Notes:
1. When cleaning this sensor also check flags for sticking.
2. New style loaders have a sensor guard
5 to protect the sensors from damage during a cartridge load
operation.

Remove Cartridge-Type Sensor Card Assembly

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the deck enclosure top cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
3. See Figure 10-69 on page 10-100. Remove the cartridge loader assembly to gain access to the
cartridge-type sensor card assembly
3. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.
4. Remove two screws
4 holding the sensor guard
5 (if present) and the sensor card
3, by inserting
a screwdriver through the two holes
2 in the top of the loader.

5. The cartridge type sensor card assembly is ESD sensitive.

See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23. Disconnect the
connector
1 from the sensor card and remove the sensor.

Replace Cartridge-Type Sensor Card Assembly

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Important Note: Whenever the loader assembly or fiducial bracket are removed or replaced on a
Model B1A/E1A/H1A, it will be necessary to run the Teach Selected Devices routine from the Teach
pull down on the library controller. See IBM 3494 Tape Library Dataserver Maintenance Information for
details.
3. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
4. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T33 for the area of failure.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-99

Figure 10-69. Cartridge-Type Sensor Card

10-100 IBM 3590 MI

 FID CD: Cartridge-Present Sensor
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier CD.

Note: Before replacing the cartridge-present sensor, check for broken wires in the sensor cable in the
| area of the strain relief clamp
6 (see Figure 10-70 on page 10-102). Verify the sensor operation
by flexing the cable while running “Display Sensors Procedure” on page 9-35. If the cable is bad,
replace the Loader assembly. See “FID BC: Loader Assembly” on page 10-89.

Debris may be causing the problem, clean the sensor with a brush (standard tool kit soft bristle brush).
Verify problem remains prior to replacing the FRU.

Remove Cartridge-Present Sensor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the deck enclosure top cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
3. Insert a cartridge
5 in the loader before you turn the loader gear to prevent bending the
file-protect sensor.
4. See Figure 10-70 on page 10-102. If the cartridge-present sensor
2 is not accessible, rotate the
loader gear
4 to the front to expose the sensor.
5. Remove the two screws
3 that hold the sensor.

The cartridge-present sensor is ESD sensitive. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.
6. Disconnect the connector
1 to remove the sensor.

Replace Cartridge-Present Sensor

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T33 for the area of failure.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-101

Figure 10-70. Cartridge-Present Sensor

10-102 IBM 3590 MI

FID CE: Tape Path A Sensor
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier CE.

Remove Tape Path A Sensor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the deck enclosure top cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
3. See Figure 10-71. Position the pantocam arm
2 so the arm is away from the tape path A sensor
5.
Attention: When positioning the pantocam, always grip the arm next to the pantocam motor shaft

1. Never grip the outer pantocam arm to reposition the pantocam.
4. Remove two screws
3 securing tape path A sensor retaining bracket
4 to the decoupler.
5. Remove the sensor retaining bracket
4.
6. Remove the sensor
5 from the decoupler.
7. Disconnect the sensor connector
7 from the sensor
5.

Replace Tape Path A Sensor

Attention: Ensure that the positive sign (+) located on the leading end of the sensor and positive sign
(+) on the cable are aligned when plugging the sensor cable.
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order. Return here before tightening the screws
3.
2. Ensure that the front edge of the sensor
5 is flush with the front edge of the sensor mounting surface

6, then tighten screws
3.
3. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
4. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T33 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-71. Tape Path A Sensor

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-103

FID CF: Tape Path B Sensor
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier CF.

Remove Tape Path B Sensor

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the deck enclosure top cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
3. See Figure 10-72. Position the pantocam arm
2 so the arm is away from the tape path B sensor
4.
Attention: When positioning the pantocam, always grip the arm next to the pantocam motor shaft

1. Never grip the outer pantocam arm to reposition the pantocam.
4. Remove the bracket screw
3 that clamps the sensor to the pantocam and remove the bracket.
5. From under the pantocam, push the sensor
4 and its connector (in the direction of the arrow
5) out
of the pantocam.
6. Disconnect the sensor connector.

Replace Tape Path B Sensor

Attention: Ensure that the positive sign (+) located on the leading end of the sensor and positive sign
(+) on the cable are aligned when plugging the sensor cable.
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T33 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-72. Tape Path B Sensor

10-104 IBM 3590 MI

 FID D0: Head Guide and Brush Assembly
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier D0.

Attention:
1. Handle the head guide assembly (HGA) very carefully to prevent movement of the actuator calibration,
the head actuator beam, and the flexures on top and at the bottom. Ensure that they are not touched
or bumped in any way. The flexures are susceptible to handling damage with the bottom flexure the
most exposed.
2. Handle the HGA by the casting and the compliant guide screw-heads only.
3. Avoid bumping the HGA against any hard surfaces.
4. Never drop the HGA from heights even as low as 3.175 mm (1/8 in.).
5. Never strike the HGA with your hand or any object. For example do not tap on the HGA to move it into
position.
6. Always keep the HGA in the protective shipping container when it is not installed in a tape deck. The
HGA should be taken directly from the shipping container at installation and placed directly into a
shipping container after removal.
7. Do not use any magnetized tools on or near the head assembly, as they will destroy the head!

Before You Replace the Head Guide Assembly

If the 3590 has a failure that requires the head guide assembly to be replaced, do the following to
determine if cleaning the heads will correct the fault before you replace the head.

Attention: Do not perform any manual cleaning of the read/write head because any solvents,
minerals, or oils in the tape path will cause the head guide assembly to become unusable.
1. Load the cleaning cartridge into the drive; the cleaning procedure is done automatically.
2. Perform “Test the Drive” on page 10-111 to see if cleaning the tape path corrected the fault.
3. If cleaning the heads and tape path corrected the fault, the clean brush may not be cleaning the heads
properly. Go to “FID D4: Head Cleaning Brush Assembly” on page 10-114 and replace the clean brush.
4. If the above cleaning did not correct the fault, continue with this procedure.

See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier D0.

Note: Be sure you have the correct replacement part number HGA assembly. The HGA for E11/E1A and
H11/H1A drive is not interchangeable with the HGA for the Model B11/B1A drive. The only visual
difference between the two HGAs is the serial number on the bar code label on top of the R/W
head. Each model has a discrete identifier:
| v Model B11/B1A serial numbers begin with a “B”
| v Model E11/E1A serial numbers begin with a “T”
| v Model H11/H1A serial numbers begin with an “M”

Drives with the Extended High Performance Cartridge feature require an HGA assembly with the 2X
label. The 2X HGAs are downward compatible and will work on drives without the Extended High
Performance Cartridge feature.

Attention: The head guide assembly has ESD-sensitive components. Do not touch the circuit
board on the head guide assembly. Also, do not touch the surface of the read/write head or the bristles on
the cleaning brush as finger prints cause corrosion on the head. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge
(ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-105

Remove Head Guide and Brush Assembly
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the back of the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.

See Figure 10-73.

Attention: Use extra care when installing (or removing) the head protector as to not damage the head
assembly. Do NOT push down hard on the head protector as this may destroy the springs in floating
head!
4. Install the orange head protector
1 P/N 45G0145 on the head guide assembly
3.
a. Squeeze the head protector at positions
1 and
2.
b. Insert the head protector into the head guide assembly, as shown
4.

Figure 10-73. Head Protector

See Figure 10-74 on page 10-107.

5. Remove the screws
1 that secure the card pack fan
2 to the bottom of the deck enclosure.
6. Disconnect the fan connector and remove the fan.
7. The head cable receptacles
3 are part of the card pack assembly
4 and are accessible through
the electronics fan hole. Disconnect the two head cables as follows:

Note: Each head cable connector
6 is locked to its receptacle
7 with a sliding retaining bar
9.
The retaining bar has a tab at the front
5 and rear
8 that engage slots in the receptacle to
lock the connector in place.

8. Reach into the fan opening and pull the retaining bar
9 toward the front of the drive until it
stops, approximately 6 mm (1/4 in.).
9. With the retaining bar disengaged, lift the retaining bar upward while carefully tilting the front and rear
of the connector until it is disconnected.
10. Repeat this procedure to disconnect the other head cable connector.

10-106 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 10-74. Head Cable Connectors

See Figure 10-75 on page 10-108.

Attention: If this FRU is in the right hand drive and it is installed in a rack with a second drive next
to it, the left tape guide cannot be removed with the head guide protector installed. Use extreme
care not to damage the read/write head when removing the tape guide assembly.
11. Remove the left tape guide screws
1 and remove the guide.

Note: If another tape drive is installed to the left of the drive you are working on, the clearance to
remove the tape guide is restricted. Do the following:
a. With the mounting screws removed, move the rear of the tape guide to the left to disengage the
tab, then move the tape guide to the rear (toward the power supply).
b. Carefully lift the front of the tape guide up while keeping the hose and cable away from the front
tape guide support.

See Figure 10-74.

12. Note: Do not touch the bristles on the brush so that it can be analyzed when you return it with the
head guide assembly. Use lint-free gloves P/N 461621 to handle the cleaning brush.
Remove the head-cleaning brush
12 by removing the clip
10, lift the arm off the stud, and remove
the clip
11.
See Figure 10-75 on page 10-108.
13. Remove the right tape guide screws
2 and remove the guide.
14. Remove the large hose
3 from the tape-lifter solenoid.
15. Remove the left D-bearing hose
4.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-107

16. Disconnect IPS cable connector
5.

17. Disconnect VPD cable connector
6.

18. Loosen tape-lifter solenoid mounting screw
7.
19. Remove the tape-lifter solenoid mounting bracket screw
9.
Attention: Do not disconnect the small hose from the head guide assembly. Remove the small
hose
8 from the tape-lifter solenoid (under the tape lifter solenoid mounting bracket) and move the
tape-lifter solenoid out of the way.
20. If this HGA has a cleaner blade installed, disconnect the vacuum hose
11 from the bottom of the
cleaner blade.
21. Remove the right D-bearing hose
10 (under the cleaner blade).

Figure 10-75. Tape Guides, Tape-Lifter Solenoid, Hoses, and Connectors

See Figure 10-76 on page 10-109.

22. Remove the three head guide assembly mounting screws
4.
23. Position the pantocam arm so the threader pin
5 is away from the loader.
24. Loosen the rear pantocam base mounting screws
3, but do not remove them from the pantocam
base casting.
25. Position the machine reel
2 to gain access to the front pantocam base mounting screw
1 (located
under the edge of the pantocam).
26. Loosen the front pantocam base mounting screw
1, but do not remove it from the pantocam base
casting.
Attention: In the next two steps, do not rub the head cables on the casting as the wires are very
fragile. Lift the pantocam until it clears the locating pins, then tilt the pantocam assembly to the front

6 while removing the head guide assembly.
27. Carefully lift the head guide assembly
7 off its locating pins
8. Continue lifting the head guide
assembly and tilting the pantocam until the head guide assembly can be removed, and at the same
time, carefully guiding the head cables and connectors through the opening in the casting.

10-108 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 10-76. Pantocam Assembly, and Head Guide and Brush Assembly

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-109

Replace Head Guide and Brush Assembly
Cleaner Blade
Notes:
1. The cleaner blade is no longer used in the 3590 drive.
2. All of the E11/E1A and H11/H1A Head Guide Assemblies (HGAs) and most of the Model B11/B1A
HGAs will not have a Cleaner Blade, shown as item
2 in Figure 10-77.
3. If the replacement part you just received does have a cleaner blade installed, carefully remove it
using the procedure at “Cleaner Blade Removal (Model B11/B1A)” on page 10-112.
4. New HGA FRU kits for Model B11/B1A will contain a new inline connector
6 to be used in place
of the tee connector
5 when the cleaner blade vacuum hose
4 is removed.
5. If you do not have a new inline connector
6, the hose
4 can be plugged with a 4 mm screw,
or the end of the hose can be folded over and tied with a cable tie-wrap.

Attention: When the cleaner blade has been removed, the vacuum hose
4 must be either
removed or plugged to prevent vacuum system leaks.

Figure 10-77. Cleaner Blade Removal – During Head Guide and Brush Removal

When the cleaner blade has been removed, continue the Head Guide and Brush Assembly installation.

Note: The head guide assembly (HGA) is awkward to install because the flex cables must be fed through
a hole in the deck at the same time that the HGA is being mounted; there is only 6 mm (1/4-in.)
clearance between the side of the deck opening and the flexure. In addition, care must be used so
as not to allow the cables to drag on the edge of the casting. The cables can be easily damaged.

10-110 IBM 3590 MI

 Do not bump the flexure into the deck frame while moving the HGA to locate it on the two
dowel pins.

Hints on Reinstallation

Use extreme care when installing the HGA; use the following pointers to help you install this fragile
assembly:

Note: To prevent head contamination, do not touch the bristles on the brush or the air bearing surface.
Use lint-free gloves P/N 461621 to handle the automatic cleaning brush. Return the cleaning-brush
with the head guide assembly.
1. Loosen the pantocam by tilting it away from the head guide assembly or removing it completely.
2. Install the HGA with the end facing the pantocam position tilted downward so that the two rear bottom
posts are inserted into the triangular opening of the deck first.
3. Lightly press these posts against the side of the opening toward the pantocam as the head guide
assembly is tilted back to a horizontal position and gently lower it onto the deck.
4. As the assembly nears the two locating dowels on the deck, move the HGA slightly away from the
pantocam position until the HGA is lined up with the dowel pins, then gently lower it into the final
position.

End of Hints on Reinstallation

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
Attention: When reinstalling the right tape guide and the left tape guide with screws
2 and
1, as
indicated in Figure 10-75 on page 10-108, make sure that the horizontal surfaces of the right and left
tape guides are exactly level to each other where the two edges meet. Check this with the edge of a
small metal ruler.
2. Remove the head protector before switching ON the device power. Damage may occur if the
protector remains on the head. Save the head protector for later use.
3. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4, then return here.
4. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
5. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T22 for the area of failure when you replace the head guide and brush assembly. Use TAC D08
if you only clean the read/write head.

Test the Drive

After the head cleaning procedure is completed, run the verify fix diagnostic:
1. If the CE Options menu is not displayed, press the Change Mode pushbutton.
2. Select Verify Fix from the CE Options menu, and press Enter.
3. Select Test Drive from the CE Verify Fix menu, and press Enter.
4. If the test did not complete successfully, return to the procedure that sent you here and complete the
repair action.
5. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
6. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) D08 for the area of failure when you perform a cleaning operation.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-111

 Cleaner Blade Removal (Model B11/B1A)
v The cleaner blade is no longer used in the 3590 drive.
v All of the E11/E1A and H11/H1A Head Guide Assemblies (HGAs) and most of the Model B11/B1A HGAs
will not have a Cleaner Blade, as shown in Figure 10-78 on page 10-113, item
2. If you are replacing
a Head Guide and Brush Assembly, and the replacement part does have a cleaner blade attached to it,
follow this procedure to remove it.
v If you were sent here from another section of the MI, perform this procedure, install a new head
cleaning brush assembly, and return to the procedure that sent you here.

To remove the cleaner blade from the HGA, perform the following:
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the back of the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.

Note: You may remove the cleaner blade without removing the HGA.
4. Referring to Figure 10-78 on page 10-113, remove two screws,
3 holding the cleaner blade
assembly, item
2 onto the Head Guide and Brush Assembly, item
1.
5. Remove or plug the cleaner blade vacuum hose
4 to prevent vacuum system leaks.
v If you have a new, inline connector
6 (included with new HGA FRU kits for (Model B11/B1A) you
can remove the hose and install the inline connector in place of the connector
5.
v If you do not have a new inline connector
6, the hose
4 can be plugged with a 4 mm screw, or
the end of the hose can be folded over and tied with a cable tie-wrap.
6. Discard the used parts that were removed.
7. If you are removing the cleaner blade from an HGA that is already installed in the drive, it also will be
necessary to install a new head cleaning brush. Refer to “FID D4: Head Cleaning Brush Assembly” on
page 10-114, install a new head cleaning brush assembly, then return here.
| 8. Perform the “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4, and return to the
| procedure that sent you here.

10-112 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 10-78. Cleaner Blade Removal – Models B11/B1A

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-113

FID D4: Head Cleaning Brush Assembly
See “Locations and Removal Procedures for Deck” on page 10-74 for FRU identifier D4.

Attention: The head guide assembly (HGA) has ESD-sensitive components. Do not touch the
circuit board on the HGA. Also, do not touch the surface of the read/write head or the bristles on the
cleaning brush as finger prints cause corrosion on the head. See “Working with Electrostatic Discharge
(ESD) Sensitive Parts” on page 9-23.

Remove Head Cleaning Brush Assembly

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the back of the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
See Figure 10-79.
Attention: Use extra care when installing (or removing) the head protector so you do not damage
the head assembly. Do NOT push down hard on the head protector as this may destroy the springs
in the floating head!
4. Install the orange head protector
1 P/N 45G0145 on the head guide assembly (HGA)
3.
a. Squeeze the head protector at positions
1 and
2.
b. Insert the head protector into the HGA, as shown
4.

Figure 10-79. Head Protector

10-114 IBM 3590 MI

 See Figure 10-80.

Attention: If this FRU is in the right hand drive and it is installed in a rack with a second drive next
to it, the left tape guide cannot be removed with the head guide protector installed. Use extreme care
not to damage the read/write head when removing the tape guide assembly.
5. Remove the left tape guide screws
1 and remove the guide.

Note: If another tape drive is installed to the left of the drive you are working on, the clearance to
remove the tape guide is restricted. Perform the following:
a. With the mounting screws removed, move the rear of the tape guide to the left to disengage the
tab, then move the tape guide to the rear (toward the power supply).
b. Carefully lift the front of the tape guide up while keeping the hose and cable away from the front
tape guide support.

Note: Do not touch the bristles on the brush. Use lint-free gloves P/N 461621 to handle the
cleaning brush.

Remove the head-cleaning brush
3 by removing the clip
2, lift the arm off the stud, and remove
the clip
4.

Figure 10-80. Head Cleaning Brush (In-Place)

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-115

Replace Head Cleaning Brush Assembly
Note: To prevent head contamination, do not touch the bristles on the brush. Use lint-free gloves P/N
461621 to handle the automatic cleaning brush.
1. Refer to Figure 10-81 for the location of the identifying mark
1 on the new level of brush. Also notice
the correct orientation for installing the brush.
2. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
Attention: When reinstalling the left tape guide, make sure that the horizontal surfaces of the right
and left tape guides are exactly level to each other where the two edges meet. Check this with the
edge of a small metal ruler.
3. Remove the head protector before switching ON the device power. Damage may occur if the
protector remains on the head. Save the head protector for later use.
Attention: Perform the heads and tape path cleaning procedure before loading a data tape.
4. Load the cleaning cartridge into the drive; the cleaning procedure is done automatically.
5. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
6. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T49 for the area of failure when you replace the head cleaning brush assembly. Use TAC D08 if
you only clean the read/write head.

Figure 10-81. Head Cleaning Brush (Detail)

Drive Test
After the head cleaning procedure is completed, run the verify fix diagnostic:

1. If the CE Options menu is not displayed, press the Change Mode pushbutton.
2. Select Verify Fix from the CE Options menu, and press Enter.
3. Select Test Drive from the CE Verify Fix menu, and press Enter.
4. If the test did not complete successfully, return to the procedure that sent you here and complete the
repair action.
5. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
6. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) D08 for the area of failure when you perform a cleaning operation.

10-116 IBM 3590 MI

FID D6: Motor Power Cables
Remove Cables
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
4. See Figure 10-82. Disconnect the motor cables at the rear of the drive
1.
5. Disconnect the two motor cables
2 and
4 under the deck.
6. Remove the cable from the cable clamp
3.
7. Extract the cables through the cable trough toward the front.

Replace Cables
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4, then return here.
3. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the
FID and use technical area code (TAC) C09 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-82. Motor Cables

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-117

FID DA: Motor, Loader, and Sensor Cable
Remove Cable

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the back of the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.

Hint
It is easier to perform this procedure if the drive is removed from the rack and placed on a work
surface.

Refer to Figure 10-73 on page 10-106 for installing the head protector in the next step.
4. Install the orange head protector
1 P/N 45G0145 onto the head guide assembly (HGA)
3.
a. Squeeze the head protector at positions
1 and
2.
b. Insert the head protector into the HGA, as shown
4.
5. Remove the card pack. Refer to for the removal procedure.
6. See Figure 10-83 on page 10-119. Remove cable clamps
1,
6, and
9.
7. Disconnect connectors
2,
3,
7,
8,
10,
11,
12, and
13.
8. Disconnect the cable connections from the pantocam motor
5.
9. Remove the two screws from the cable docking connector.
10. Remove the cable
4.

Replace Cable
Notes:
When replacing the Cable, the following information applies to the Tape Path Sensors:
1. When connecting the tape path A sensor connector, ensure that the + on the cable connector and the
sensor are aligned.
2. When connecting the tape path B sensor connector, ensure that the + on the cable connector and the
sensor are aligned.
3. The new Cable FRU kit should contain a ferrite ring which should be installed on the pantocam motor
leads. It reduces electrical noise in the cable. Follow the instructions in the FRU kit, see Figure 10-60
on page 10-87.

Follow this procedure to replace the cable:

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “Measurement and Adjustment of Pneumatic System” on page 10-4, then return here.
3. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
4. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) C09 for the area of failure.

10-118 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 10-83. Tach, Motor, and Loader Cable

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-119

FID DB: Power Supply Cable (New Level)
Remove Cable
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from the source, then from the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover and back plate. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27
4. See Figure 10-84. Disconnect the power supply cable
1 from the power supply at connector J2.
5. Disconnect the other end of the power supply cable from the card pack connector.
6. Remove the cable from the drive.

Replace Cable
1. Perform the removal procedure in reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) CA for the area of failure.

Figure 10-84. Power Supply Cable

Note: This FID is removable on the New Level Power Supplies only.

10-120 IBM 3590 MI

FID DC: ACF and Operator/CE Panel Cable
Remove Cable
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. Remove the power cord from its source, then from the back of the 3590.
3. Remove the deck enclosure back cover. See “Deck Enclosure Covers” on page 9-27.
4. See Figure 10-85 on page 10-122.
5. Remove the cable from the clamps
1 and
3.
6. Unplug the cable from connector
2.
7. Remove the four screws
4 from the two connectors.
8. Remove any necessary parts to obtain access to the cable and connectors. Refer to the appropriate
procedures in this section.
9. Note the routing and remove the cable.

Replace Cable
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) C09 for the area of failure.

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-121

Figure 10-85. ACF and Operator/CE Panel Cable

10-122 IBM 3590 MI

Locations and Removal Procedures – Model B1A/E1A/H1A (Library)
Components
The FRUs in Figure 10-86 are identified by their FID number for example, 90 is FID 90, the operator/CE
panel. The list following the figure shows the FID names.

Figure 10-86. Locations for Model B1A/E1A/H1A Components

FID Number FID Name

90 Operator/CE Panel (See “Model B1A/E1A/H1A” on page 10-13
93 Library Interface Cover
94 Operator panel cable

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-123

FID 93: Library Interface Cover (Model B1A/E1A/H1A Only)
See “Locations and Removal Procedures – Model B1A/E1A/H1A (Library) Components” on page 10-123
for FRU identifier 93.

Debris may be causing the problem, clean the sensor with a brush (standard tool kit soft bristle brush).
Verify problem remains prior to replacing the FRU.

Hint
Before you change this FRU, ensure you have the proper setting in the “CE Drive Options Menu” on
page 5-52. For example, FID 93 occurs if the configuration reflects the drive being in a library and
the library interface cover is not installed.

Removing Library Interface Cover

1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. See Figure 10-87 on page 10-125. Lift the display panel
2 out of its holder
3 by pressing on the
release tabs at each end of the panel.
3. Disconnect the display panel connector
1 and set the panel aside.
4. Remove the two cover mounting screws
5 and remove the cable retaining bracket
6.
5. Rotate
7 the cover away from the drive far enough to get access to the two connectors
8.
6. Disconnect the connectors
8, and remove the cover.

Replace Library Interface Cover

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T33 for the area of failure.

10-124 IBM 3590 MI

Figure 10-87. Library Interface Cover

Chapter 10. Locations, Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and Replacements 10-125

FID 94: Operator Panel Cable (Model B1A/E1A/H1A Only)
See “Locations and Removal Procedures – Model B1A/E1A/H1A (Library) Components” on page 10-123
for FRU identifier 94.

Remove Cable
1. “Prepare Tape Drive for Service” on page 9-6, then return here.
2. See Figure 10-88. Remove the library interface cover
1. See “FID 93: Library Interface Cover (Model
B1A/E1A/H1A Only)” on page 10-124, then return here.
3. Remove the cable
2 by pulling it away from the cover.

Replace Cable
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order, then return here.
2. Perform “End of Call” on page 9-8.
3. Use your local procedures to report the FRU part number for the FID and use technical area code
(TAC) T33 for the area of failure.

Figure 10-88. Operator Panel Cable

10-126 IBM 3590 MI

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog
How to Use This Parts Catalog
v SIMILAR ASSEMBLIES: If two assemblies contain a majority of identical parts, they are broken down on the same list. Common
parts are shown by one index number. Parts peculiar to one or the other of the assemblies are listed
separately and identified by description.
v AR: (As Required) in the Units column indicates the quantity of the part is used as required.
v NP: (Non-Procurable) in the Units column indicates that the part is non-procurable and that the individual
parts or the next higher assembly should be ordered.
v NR: (Not Recommended) in the Units column indicates that the part is procurable but not recommended for
field replacement, and that the next higher assembly should be ordered.
v R: (Restricted) in the Units column indicates the part has a restricted availability.
v INDENTURE: The indenture is marked by a series of dots located before the parts description. The indenture indicates
the relationship of a part to the next higher assembly. For example:

Indenture Relationship of Parts

(No dots) MAIN ASSEMBLY
(One dot) v Detail parts of a main assembly
(One dot) v Subassembly of the main assembly
(Two dots) vv Detail part of a one-dot subassembly
(Two dots) vv Subassembly of a one-dot subassembly
(Three dots) vvv Detail part of a two-dot subassembly

Assembly 1: Cover Assembly (Sample)

Asm- Part Units Description
Index Number
1– 2512667 1 Cover Asm, Rear, Red
- 2512668 1 Cover Asm, Rear, Yellow
- 2512669 1 Cover Asm, Rear, Blue
- 2512670 1 Cover Asm, Rear, Gray
- 2513714 1 Cover Asm, Rear, White
For Next Higher Assembly, See 1–2 on page 15
-1 5373637 1 v Seal, Top
-2 5356429 2 v Clip, Retaining
-3 2513013 3 v Liner, Cover
-4 5373727 1 v Seal, Left Side
-5 5356429 3 v Clip, Retaining
-6 513668 2 v Catch,Cover
-7 81693 4 v Screw, Mach Bind Hd- 6-32 X 0.375 in.
-8 1847630 R v Finger Stock Asm
-9 1847602 NR vv Channel, Finger Stock
-10 1847604 NR vv Finger Stock, 2.00 Long
-11 5373639 AR v Seal, Bottom
-12 5356429 2 v Clip, Retaining

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 11-1

Assemblies List
ACF Final Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Cable List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Deck Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Installation Parts and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Model B1A/E1A/H1A Final Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Visual Index, Model B11/E11/H11

11-2 IBM 3590 MI

Visual Index, Model B1A/E1A/H1A

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog 11-3

Assembly 1: ACF Final Assembly

11-4 IBM 3590 MI

 Assembly 1: (continued)

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
1– NA NP ACF Final Assembly (Sheet 1 of 2)
–1 05H2960 1 v Kit, Leadscrew Asm
NOTE: If the ACF has a gear-driven leadscrew (below EC C88823), also order
“Kit, Elevator Motor, Pulley and Belt Set, P/N 05H2959” to convert to a-belt driven
leadscrew.
–2 39F3447 NP v v Bearing Asm
–3 50G0551 NP v v Retainer, Nut
–4 50G0545 NP v v Leadscrew and Nut
–5 1621197 4 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 6 mm
–6 1621192 4 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 12 mm
–7 1622304 4 v Washer, Metric-Flat 4.3 ID X 9 OD X 0.8 Thick
–8 05H2388 1 v Kit, Feed Motor and Gear Set
–8A 39F3433 NP v v Motor, Feed
–8B 39F3449 NP v v Screw
–8C 05H4676 NP v v Bearing
–8D 39F3435 NP v v Gear
–8E 39F3436 NP v v Gear
–8F 1126831 NP v v E-Ring
–9 05H2959 1 v Kit, Elevator Motor, Pulley and Belt Set
NOTE: If the ACF has a gear-driven leadscrew (below EC C88823), also order
“Kit, Leadscrew Asm, P/N 05H2960” to convert to a belt-driven leadscrew.
–10 50G0547 NP v v Motor, Elevator
–11 39F3449 NP v v Screw
–12 50G0544 NP v v Pulley
–13 50G0546 1 v v Belt
–15 05H2388 1 v Kit, Pinch Motor and Gear Set
–16 39F3433 NP v v Motor, Pinch
–17 39F3449 NP v v Screw
–18 05H4676 NP v v Bearing
–19 39F3435 NP v v Gear
–20 39F3436 NP v v Gear
–21 1126831 NP v v E-Ring
–23 62G2630 NP v Cover, Cable
–24 05H9041 1 v Kit, Global and Interference Sensor
–25 05H9038 NP v v Sensor, Global Upper and Lower
–25A 05H2692 NP v v Cover, Global Sensor, Upper and Lower
–26 62G2597 NP v Standoff - Spacer
–27 1621177 1 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M3 X 25 mm
–28 1621177 1 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M3 X 25 mm
–29 62G2540 NP v Cover, Right
–29A 1621170 2 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M3 X 6 mm
–30 39F3431 NP v Cover
–32 50G0574 1 v Card, ACF Motor Control
–33 05H9839 1 v Transport Asm
–34 50G0552 NP v v Cartridge Transport Asm
–34A 19P2840 1 v v v Kit, Transport Pinch Rollers (Qty 6)
–34B 05H4719 NP v v v Transport Pinch Rollers
–35 50G0566 NP v v Spring

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog 11-5

Assembly 1: (continued)

11-6 IBM 3590 MI

 Assembly 1: (continued)

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
1– NA NP ACF Final Assembly (Sheet 2 of 2)
–37 50G0542 1 v Vertical Position Sensor Asm
–38 1621192 1 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 12 mm
–39 1622304 1 v Washer, Metric-Flat 4.3 ID X 9 OD X 0.8 Thick
–40 39F3450 1 v Display, Operator/CE Panel
–41 62G2542 1 v Base Asm
–42 05H4465 NR v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 16 mm
–43 05H4459 NR v Washer, Spring
–44 05H4460 NR v Spring, Compression
–45 39F3456 NR v Bezel Asm
–46 1621194 1 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 20 mm
–47 05H2452 1 v Kit, LED Cards
–48 05H4441 NP v v Card, Bld2
–49 05H9921 NP v v Card, Bld3
–50 05H4447 4 v Screw, M4 X 8 mm
–51 39F3445 NP v Plate, Elevator
–52 1621190 2 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 8 mm
–53 39F3438 NP v Shaft
–54 39F3444 NP v Support Asm, Magazine
–55 1621197 NP v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 6 mm
–56 05H8970 NP v Retainer, Cable
–57 05H2451 1 v Kit, Priority Cell Sensor Pair
–58 05H8925 NP v v Card, BDT1 Detector
–59 62G2620 NP v v Card, BEM1 Emitter
–60 1621844 2 v Screw, Metric-Thd Form Slot Pan Hd M3 X 6 mm
–60A 39F4761 1 v Base Asm, Priority Slot
–61 62G2609 NP v Sensor Asm, Magazine Present
–61A 62G2611 NP v v Bracket
–61B 45G0277 1 v v Sensor
–61C 1621172 NP v v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M3 X 10 mm
–62 08L5760 1 v Kit, Cover and Cable Asm
–62A 06J0056 NP v Cable Asm, ACF Transport (new style)
–62B 06J0057 NP v Cover, Left
–63 1621170 2 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M3 X 6 mm
–64 62G2615 NP v Seal
–65 39F3430 NP v Frame
–67 50G0548 NR v Button, Magazine Lock
–70 05H4721 NR v Spring, Shaft Magazine Lock
–71 05H4445 NR v Pin, Detent
–72 05H4450 NR v Spring, Detent Magazine Lock
–73 1126829 NR v Ring, Retaining M4
–74 1126828 NR v Ring, Retaining M3

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog 11-7

Assembly 2: Model B1A/E1A/H1A Final Assembly

11-8 IBM 3590 MI

 Assembly 2: (continued)

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
2– NA NP Model B1A/E1A/H1A Final Assembly
–1 45G0275 1 v Cable Asm, Operator Panel
–1A 05H4756 NP v Bracket, Cable Retention
–2 39F3450 1 v Display, Operator/CE Panel
–3 05H4255 1 v Cover Asm, Library Interface
–3A 05H4254 NP v v Weldment, Front Cover
–4 05H4678 NP v v Card Asm, Gripper Present Sensor
–5 1621019 NP v v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M3 X 4 mm
–6 1621197 2 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 6 mm
–7 05H3143 1 v Bracket Asm, Fiducial
–7 05H2689 1 v Bracket Asm, Fiducial (3590 A14 in 3495 library only)
–8 1621019 1 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M3 X 4 mm
–9 1622332 1 v Lockwasher, Metric-Int Tooth 3.2 mm ID X 6 mm OD
–10 NP v Deck Enclosure
For detail breakdown, see “Assembly 3: Deck Enclosure” on page 11-10.
–11 05H4256 2 v Slides (3494 only)
–12 1621197 8 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 6 mm

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog 11-9

Assembly 3: Deck Enclosure

11-10 IBM 3590 MI

 Assembly 3: (continued)

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
3– NA NP Deck Enclosure (Sheet 1 of 5)
For next higher assembly, see 2–10 on page 11-9
–1 05H3294 NP v Cover Asm
–2 45G0152 NP v v Cover, Top
–3 1624765 4 v v Screw, Metric-Thd Form Hex Flng Hd M4 X 8 mm
–4 05H4716 NP v v Label
–5 21F7954 NP v v Label
–6 31F7453 2 v v Label, Serial Plate
–7 05H3281 1 v v Cover, Pneumatic Access
–8 1624765 1 v v Screw, Metric-Thd Form Hex Flng Hd M4 X 8 mm
–9 45G0151 NP v v Cover, Back
–10 05H3183 NP v Plate, Back (SCSI)
–10 35L1671 NP v Plate, Back (Fibre)
–11 1624765 2 v Screw, Metric-Thd Form Hex Flng Hd M4 X 8 mm
–15 1 v Label, FCC
NOTE: To order this Part Number, see assembly index 21B, 21C, or 21D for
appropriate Model on this page
–16 1 v Label, Canada EMC
NOTE: To order this Part Number, see assembly index 21B, 21C, or 21D for
appropriate Model on this page
–17 1 v Label, Manufactured in USA
Order by P/N in Asm Index 3–21B, 21C, or 21D
–18 94F9116 2 v Label, Bar Code
–19 1 v Label, Power Rating UL/CSA
Order by P/N in Asm Index 3–21B, 21C, or 21D
–20 1 v Label, CE
Order by P/N in Asm Index 3–21B, 21C, or 21D
–21A 1 v Label, Weight
Order by P/N in Asm Index 3–21B, 21C, or 21D
| –21B 19P5279 1 v Multi-Label, Model B11/B1A
| –21C 19P5280 1 v Multi-Label, Model E11/E1A
| –21D 19P5281 1 v Multi-Label, Model H11/H1A
–21E 1621308 1 v Screw, Metric-Slot Flat Hd M4 X 8 mm

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog 11-11

Assembly 3: (continued)

11-12 IBM 3590 MI

 Assembly 3: (continued)

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
3– NA NP Deck Enclosure (Sheet 2 of 5)
–22 19P0916 1 v Loader Asm (Kit)
–22A 05H4804 1 v v Loader
–27A 19P0721 1 v v Kit, Latch Spring
–27B 08L6060 1 v v v Spring, Latch
–27C 1621172 2 v v v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M3 X 10 mm
Used on Model B1A/E1A/H1A (all)
–23 1621190 3 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 8 mm
–24 49G8239 2 v Sensor, Cartridge Type
–24A 05H7137 1 v Guard, Sensor
–24B 1621171 2 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M3 X 8 mm
–25 45G0277 1 v Sensor, Door Open
–26 45G0277 1 v Sensor, Tray Up
–27 45G0277 1 v Sensor, Cartridge Present
–27A 19P0721 1 v Kit, Latch Spring
–27B 08L6060 1 v v Spring, Latch
–27C 1621172 2 v v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M3 X 10 mm
Used on Model B1A/E1A/H1A (all)
–28 45G0277 1 v Sensor, File Protect
–29 35L1566 1 v Mechanical Asm, Cleaner Brush
–29A 05J9553 NP v v Tape Guide, Left
–29B 35L1445 NP v v Brush Asm, Cleaning
See also 11-18
See also 11-18
–29C 1126828 NP v v Retainer, E-Clip
–29D 05J9601 NP v v Arm, Cleaning Brush
–30 1621191 2 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 10 mm
–31 05H9015 NP v Strap, Ground
–32 1621191 1 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 10 mm
–32A 1621308 1 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 12 mm
–33 1622346 2 v Lockwasher, Metric-Ext Tooth 4.3 ID X 8 OD
–34 05J9554 NP v Tape Guide, Right
–35 1621191 1 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 10 mm
–36 45G0047 NP v Shockmount
–37 05H4438 NP v Strap, Ground High Frequency
–38 257189 NP v Nut, Hex 8-32 X 0.344 Flat W
–38A 05H9898 NP v Shim, 0.5 mm Thick
–38A 05H9899 NP v Shim, 1 mm Thick
–38B 55901 NP v Washer, Lock-Ext Tooth 0.168 ID X 0.381 OD

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog 11-13

Assembly 3: (continued)

11-14 IBM 3590 MI

 Assembly 3: (continued)

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
3– NA NP Deck Enclosure (Sheet 3 of 5)
–41 09G5418 NP v Label, Safety
–42 05H9098 1 v Power Supply (old level)
Used on all base Model B11/B1A and on Ultra Model B11/B1A with Ultra Card
Pack (P/N 35L0818) or older
–42 05J9721 1 v Power Supply (new level)
Used on all E11/E1A and H11/H1A and on Ultra Model B11/B1A with Common
Card Pack
–42A 08L6082 1 v Cable, Power Supply-to-Card Pack
Used on E11/E1A and H11/H1A only
–43 1624765 2 v Screw, Metric-Thd Form Hex Flng Hd M4 X 8 mm
–44 05H4802 1 v Pneumatic Asm
–44A 45G0110 2 v Cap, Pressure and Vacuum
–45 05H4469 NP v Bracket, Power Supply Cable
–46 1624765 2 v Screw, Metric-Thd Form Hex Flng Hd M4 X 8 mm
– Card Pack – Be sure to order the correct Part Number
(If you order the part number from the Card Pack that is being removed, the
ordering system will automatically ship the correct replacement part.)
–47 05J9895 1 v Card Pack Asm–
Used on Base 3590, Model B11/B1A. See Table 10-2 on page 10-67.
–47 35L0818 1 v Card Pack Asm–
Used on Ultra level 3590, Model B11/B1A, with FC 9790/5790
| –47 19P3431 1 v Card Pack Asm–
| Used on SCSI 3590 Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A
| –47 19P3432 1 v Card Pack Asm
| – Used on Fibre Channel 3590 Model E11/E1A, with FC 9510/3510
| –47 19P6251 1 v Card Pack Asm–
| Used on SCSI 3590 Model H11/H1A
| –47 19P6252 1 v Card Pack Asm–
| Used on Fibre Channel 3590 Model H11/H1A
–48 1624765 1 v Screw, Metric-Thd Form Hex Flng Hd M4 X 8 mm
–49 94F9116 NP v Label, Bar Code
–50 05H2423 NP v Label, Caution
–51 45G0288 1 v Fan Asm
–52 62G0632 NP v v Fan
–53 05H9155 NP v v Bracket, Fan
–54 1621308 3 v Screw, Metric-Slot Flat Hd M4 X 8 mm
–55 05H2454 1 v BTD0 Card Asm, Transducer
–56 1621170 1 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M3 X 6 mm
–57 45G0131 NP v Hose, Vacuum Switch 4.76 ID X 235 mm
Part of Pneumatic Hose Kit, part number 05H3203.
See Item 3–59 on page 11-17.
–58 05H2428 NP v Weldment, Deck Enclosure
–58A 1621161 4 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M2.5 X 6 mm

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog 11-15

Assembly 3: (continued)

77

64
63 65
62 66
59 61
60

68

69

70

A1480A2D
63 REF 62 REF
C 61 REF
71 REF 64 REF
60 REF 65 REF

75 72 66 REF

57 REF

69 REF

73
76 74
71

DETAIL C

11-16 IBM 3590 MI

 Assembly 3: (continued)

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
3– NA NP Deck Enclosure (Sheet 4 of 5)
–59 05H3203 1 v Kit, Pneumatic Hose
–60 45G0129 NP v v Hose, Transducer 4.76 ID X 100 mm
–61 45G0116 NP v v Tee, Modified Cross
–62 45G0126 NP v v Hose, Head Casting 4.76 ID X 25 mm
–63 45G0128 NP v v Hose, Puffer 4.76 ID X 62 mm
–64 45G0127 NP v v Hose, Decoupler 4.76 ID X 32 mm
–65 49G0117 NP v v Tee
–66 45G0127 NP v v Hose, Head Casting 4.76 ID X 32 mm
Used for HGAs w/cleaner blade. Not used if HGA has no cleaner blade
–68 62G2557 NP v v Hose, Pressure 6.35 ID X 610 mm
–69 45G0134 NP v v Hose, Vacuum 6.35 ID X 580 mm
–70 45G0130 NP v v Hose, Cross Tee 4.76 ID X 115 mm
–71 05H3202 NP v v Hose, Vacuum Switch 4.76 ID X 235 mm
–72 45G0129 NP v v Hose, 4.76 ID X 100 mm
–73 09L4687 NP v v Connector, In-line, Vacuum
–74 45G0116 NP v v Tee, Modified Cross
–75 05H2263 NP v v Elbow
–76 6857796 NP v v Clamp, Hose
–77 45G0110 2 v v Cap, Pressure and Vacuum

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog 11-17

Assembly 3: (continued)

11-18 IBM 3590 MI

 Assembly 3: (continued)

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
3– NA NP Deck Enclosure (Sheet 5 of 5)
–79 09L5446 1 v Kit, Machine Reel Motor Hub Asm
–79A 1621192 NP v v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 12 mm
–79B 09L5117 NP v v Retainer
–79C 35L0814 NP v v Flange, Upper
–79D 34L2659 NP v v Hub
–79E 35L0815 NP v v Flange, Lower
–80 45G0009 1 v Machine Reel Motor Asm
–81 1621194 3 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 20 mm
–82 65F3709 1 v Guide, Machine Reel
–83 1621191 1 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 10 mm
–84 05J9577 1 v Kit, Pantocam Asm
–84A 09G7781 NP v v Ferrite Ring
–85 512508 1 v Screw, Mach-Flat Hd 6-32 X 0.500
–86 1621191 3 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 10 mm
— Head Guide Kit, Model B11/B1A only —
–87 35L1063 1 v Kit, Head, Guide and Brush Asm (w/o cleaner blade)
–87A 35L1040 NP v v Head Guide Asm
–87B 35L1569 1 v v Kit, Brush Asm, In Protective Tube, (see also on page 11-12)
–87C 35L1445 NP v v v Brush Asm, Cleaning
–87D 1126828 NP v v v Retainer, E-Clip
–87E 45G0145 NP v v Head Protector, (Orange)
–87F 09L4687 NP v v Connector, Inline, Vacuum
— Head Guide Kit, E11/E1A only —
–87 35L0586 1 v Kit, Head, Guide and Brush Asm (w/o cleaner blade)
–87A 35L1175 NP v v Head Guide Asm
–87B 35L1569 1 v v Kit, Brush Asm in protective tube (see also on page 11-12)
–87C 35L1445 NP v v v Brush Asm, Cleaner
–87D 1126828 NP v v v Retainer, E-Clip
–87E 45G0145 NP v v Head Protector, (Orange)
| — Head Guide Kit, H11/H1A only —
| –87 19P5779 1 v Kit, Head, Guide and Brush Asm (w/o cleaner blade)
| –87A 19P5014 NP v v Head Guide Asm
| –87B 35L1569 1 v v Kit, Brush Asm in protective tube (see also on page 11-12)
| –87C 35L1445 NP v v v Brush Asm, Cleaner
| –87D 1126828 NP v v v Retainer, E-Clip
| –87E 45G0145 NP v v Head Protector, (Orange)
–88 1621490 3 v Screw, Metric-Spln Cap Hd M4 X 25 mm
–89 45G0094 1 v Decoupler Asm
–90 1621191 3 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 10 mm
–91 4780523 1 v Sensor A, Tape Path
–92 45G0130 NP v Hose Decoupler, 4.76 ID X 115 mm
Part of Pneumatic Hose Kit, part number 45G0286
–93 45G0007 NP v Deck Press Asm
–94 45G0010 1 v Motor Asm, File Reel
–95 1621200 3 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 35 mm
–96 05J9807 1 v Transducer Asm
–97 1621194 3 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 20 mm
–98 356742 3 v Clamp, Cable 1/4 in.
–99 1621190 3 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 8 mm
–100 4780540 1 v Tape Guide, Center
–101 1621191 1 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 10 mm
–102 05H2406 1 v Solenoid Asm

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog 11-19

Assembly 3: (continued)

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
–103 45G0258 NP v Bracket
–104 316807 1 v Screw, Mach-Flat Hd 6-32 X 0.375
–105 4780523 1 v Sensor B, Tape Path
–106 2102365 1 v Clamp, Cable 3/8 in.
–107 1621190 1 v Screw, Metric-Slot Pan Hd M4 X 8 mm

11-20 IBM 3590 MI

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog 11-21
Assembly 4: Cable List

11-22 IBM 3590 MI

 Assembly 4: (continued)

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
4– NA NP Cable List
– 05H3226 AR v Cable, ACF and Operator/CE Panel/IPS Sensor
| – 19P5017 AR v Cable, Motor/Loader/Sensors
– 05H4647 AR v Cable, SCSI, 2.8 m
– 05H8911 AR v Cable Asm AC Power (Drive-to-PCC)
– 05J9535 AR v Cable, ACF Drive
For illustration, see “FID A2: Drive/ACF Cable” on page 10-44
– 06J0056 AR v Cable, ACF Transport (new style)
For illustration, see Figure 10-22 on page 10-34
– 08L6082 AR v Cable, Power Supply-to-Card Pack
Used on new level power supplies only
– 45G0273 AR v Cable, Motors (Power)
– 45G0275 AR v Cable, Operator Panel
Used on Model B1A/E1A/H1A. For illustration, see “FID 94: Operator Panel Cable
(Model B1A/E1A/H1A Only)” on page 10-126.
– 46F4593 AR v Cable, Line Cord, Watertight 6 ft
– 46F4594 AR v Cable, Line Cord, Watertight 14 ft
– 46F6063 AR v Cable, WTC Hardware
– 62G0681 AR v Cable, ACF Operator Panel to Drive
Used on Model B11/E11/H11. For illustration, see “FID 91: Operator/CE Panel
Cable” on page 10-14.
– 62G1012 AR v Cable, ACF LED
For illustration, see “FID A4: LED Cable” on page 10-45.
– 62G1013 AR v Cable, ACF Sensor
For illustration, see “FID A5: Sensor Cable” on page 10-46.
– 62G1024 AR v Cable, ACF Motors
For illustration, see “FID A1: Motor Cable Assembly” on page 10-42.
For SCSI cable information, see “SCSI Bus Attachment” on page 8-43.

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog 11-23

Assembly 5: Installation Parts and Tools

11-24 IBM 3590 MI

 Assembly 5: (continued)

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
5– NA NP Part Listing
– 05H4724 AR v ACF Motor Alignment Tool (see page 8-4)
– 05H3388 AR v ACF Transport Position Adjustment Tool (see page 8-4)
– 05H9895 AR v Adapter, Vacuum Gauge (see page 8-4)
– 39F3884 AR v Block, RS-422 Wrap (see page 8-4)
– 05H2630 AR v Bracket (see page 8-61)
– 45G0181 AR v Bracket (see page 8-61)
– 45G0178 AR v Bracket, Cable (see page 8-60)
– 45G0193 AR v Bracket, Cable (see page 8-61)
– 05H4756 AR v Bracket, Cable Retaining (see page 8-27)
– 05H3143 AR v Bracket, Fiducial (see page 8-27)
– 05H4645 AR v Cable, Device-to-Device (see page 8-45)
– 05H4646 AR v Cable, Device-to-Device (see page 8-45)
– 05H4647 AR v Cable, Device-to-Host (see page 8-45)
– 05H4648 AR v Cable, Device-to-Host (see page 8-45)
– 05H4649 AR v Cable, Device-to-Host (see page 8-45)
– 05H4650 AR v Cable, Device-to-Host (see page 8-45)
– 05H4651 AR v Cable, Device-to-Host (see page 8-45)
– 45G0275 AR v Cable, Display (see page 8-25)
| – 11P1345 AR v Cable, Fibre, 7 m (23 ft) - LC/SC (see page 3-9)
| – 11P1346 AR v Cable, Fibre, 13 m (42.6 ft) - LC/SC (see page 3-9)
| – 11P1347 AR v Cable, Fibre, 22 m (72 ft) - LC/SC (see page 3-9)
| – 11P1350 AR v Cable, Fibre 61 m (200 ft) - LC/SC (see page 3-9)
| – 19P0160 AR v Cable, Fibre, 3 m (10 ft) - SC/SC (see page 3-9)
| – 03K9201 AR v Cable, Fibre, 5 m (16.4 ft) - SC/SC (see page 3-9)
| – 54G3386 AR v Cable, Fibre, 13 m (42.6 ft) - SC/SC (see page 3-9)
| – 03K9203 AR v Cable, Fibre, 25 m (82 ft) - SC/SC (see page 3-9)
| – 54G3390 AR v Cable, Fibre, 61 m (200 ft) - SC/SC (see page 3-9)
– 05H8953 AR v Cable, RS-422 (see page 8-48)
– 05H8953 AR v Cable, RS-422 (see page 8-47)
– 05H8981 AR v Cable, RS-422 (see page 8-48)
– 05H8981 AR v Cable, RS-422 (see page 8-47)
– 05H4644 AR v Cable, SCSI Device-to-Device (see page 8-45)
– 05H4435 AR v Cartridge, Cleaner (see page 8-3)
– 05H4434 AR v Cartridge, Scratch (see page 8-3)
– 05H2629 AR v Clamp, Cable (see page 8-60)
– 05H2629 AR v Clamp, Cable (see page 8-61)
– 74F1823 AR v Clip, Nut (see page 8-13)
– 74F1823 AR v Clip, Nut (see page 8-16)
– 74F1823 AR v Clip, Nut (see page 8-57)
– 74F1823 AR v Clip, Nut (see page 8-58)
– 05H2342 AR v Cover, 2-drive (see page 8-59)
– 05H2343 AR v Cover, Blank-out (see page 8-59)
– 05H4255 AR v Cover, Front (see page 8-27)
– 05H4671 AR v Gap Set Tool (see page 8-4)
– 45G0188 AR v Guide, Cable (see page 8-16)
– 45G0179 AR v Guide, Cable (see page 8-57)
– 45G0188 AR v Guide, Cable Pivot Arm, Cable (see page 8-14)
– 05H3834 AR v Interposer, AS/400 with FC 9410 (see page 8-3)
– 05H3834 AR v Interposer, AS/400 with FC 9410 (see page 8-64)
– 50G0460 AR v Interposer, RS/6000 with FC 9702 (see page 8-3)
– 50G0460 AR v Interposer, RS/6000 with FC 9702 (see page 8-64)
– 61G8323 AR v Interposer, RS/6000 with FC 9701 (see page 8-3)

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog 11-25

 Assembly 5: (continued)

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
– 61G8323 AR v Interposer, RS/6000 with FC 9701 (see page 8-64)
– 05H3895 AR v Interposer Wrap Tool, Library Attachment (see page 8-4)
– 05H8904 AR v Label, Address (see page 8-20)
– 44F0904 AR v Label, Serial Number (see page 8-20)
– 44F0904 AR v Label, Serial Number (see page 8-25)
– 1622332 AR v Lockwasher (see page 8-27)
– 05H2347 AR v Mount, Rack (see page 8-13)
– 05H2347 AR v Mount, Rack (see page 8-16)
– 1622404 AR v Nut (see page 8-57)
– 39F3450 AR v Panel (see page 8-61)
– 05H2346 AR v Panel, Rear Internal (see page 8-58)
– 05H8922 AR v Plate, Shipping (see page 8-23)
– 05H9822 AR v Plate, Shipping (see page 8-58)
– 05H7539 AR v Scratch Cartridge (see page 8-4)
– 05H4782 AR v Screw (see page 8-4)
– 05H4782 AR v Screw (see page 8-44)
– 05H4782 AR v Screw (see page 8-56)
– 05H8983 AR v Screw (see page 8-6)
– 05H8983 AR v Screw (see page 8-44)
– 05H8983 AR v Screw (see page 8-56)
– 05H8983 AR v Screw (see page 8-61)
– 1621197 AR v Screw (see page 8-25)
– 1621197 AR v Screw (see page 8-27)
– 1621308 AR v Screw (see page 8-13)
– 1621308 AR v Screw (see page 8-14)
– 1621537 AR v Screw (see page 8-14)
– 1621537 AR v Screw (see page 8-16)
– 1624765 AR v Screw (see page 8-60)
– 1624775 AR v Screw (see page 8-60)
– 1624778 AR v Screw (see page 8-13)
– 1624778 AR v Screw (see page 8-13)
– 1624778 AR v Screw (see page 8-14)
– 1624778 AR v Screw (see page 8-16)
– 1624778 AR v Screw (see page 8-58)
– 1624778 AR v Screw (see page 8-60)
– 1624780 AR v Screw (see page 8-60)
– 45G0236 AR v Shelf, Drive (see page 8-13)
– 45G0236 AR v Shelf, Drive (see page 8-16)
– 05H2340 AR v Slide, Rack Left (see page 8-12)
– 05H2340 AR v Slide, Rack Left (see page 8-16)
– 05H2341 AR v Slide, Rack Right (see page 8-12)
– 05H2341 AR v Slide, Rack Right (see page 8-16)
– 05H4256 AR v Slide, 3494 (see page 8-25)
– 6850663 AR v Tape Removal Tool (see page 8-4)
– 05H4793 AR v Terminator, SCSI (see page 8-6)
– 05H4793 AR v Terminator, SCSI (see page 8-44)
– 05H4793 AR v Terminator, SCSI (see page 8-56)
– 61G8324 AR v Terminator, SCSI (see page 8-4 )
– 61G8324 AR v Terminator, SCSI (see page 8-44)
– 61G8324 AR v Terminator, SCSI (see page 8-56)
| – 05N6766 AR v Wrap Duplex Adapter, LC/LC Fibre (see page 8-4)
| – 19P0913 AR v Wrap Duplex Adapter, SC/SC Fibre (see page 8-4)
– 34L2629 AR v Wrap Tool, SC Fibre (see page 8-4.

11-26 IBM 3590 MI

 Assembly 5: (continued)

Asm– Part
Index Number Units Description
| – 08L9459 AR v Wrap Tool, SC Fibre (see page 8-4.
| – 11P3847 AR v Wrap Tool, LC Fibre (see page 8-4.
– 62G1324 AR v Wrap Tool, SCSI (see page 8-4)
– 05H9163 AR v Wrap Tool, SCSI (see page 8-4)
– 62G1324 AR v Wrap Tool, SCSI (see page 8-4)

Chapter 11. Parts Catalog 11-27

11-28 IBM 3590 MI
Part Number Index
Part Asm– Part Asm–
Number Index Page Number Index Page
03K9201 5– 11-25 05H4450 1–72 11-7
03K9203 5– 11-25 05H4459 1–43 11-7
05H2263 3–75 11-17 05H4460 1–44 11-7
05H2340 5– 11-26 05H4465 1–42 11-7
05H2340 5– 11-26 05H4469 3–45 11-15
05H2341 5– 11-26 05H4644 5– 11-25
05H2341 5– 11-26 05H4645 5– 11-25
05H2342 5– 11-25 05H4646 5– 11-25
05H2343 5– 11-25 05H4647 4– 11-23
05H2346 5– 11-26 05H4647 5– 11-25
05H2347 5– 11-26 05H4648 5– 11-25
05H2347 5– 11-26 05H4649 5– 11-25
05H2388 1–15 11-5 05H4650 5– 11-25
05H2388 1–8 11-5 05H4651 5– 11-25
05H2406 3–102 11-19 05H4671 5– 11-25
05H2423 3–50 11-15 05H4676 1–18 11-5
05H2428 3–58 11-15 05H4676 1–8C 11-5
05H2451 1–57 11-7 05H4678 2–4 11-9
05H2452 1–47 11-7 05H4716 3–4 11-11
05H2454 3–55 11-15 05H4719 1–34B 11-5
05H2629 5– 11-25 05H4721 1–70 11-7
05H2629 5– 11-25 05H4724 5– 11-25
05H2630 5– 11-25 05H4756 2–1A 11-9
05H2689 2–7 11-9 05H4756 5– 11-25
05H2692 1–25A 11-5 05H4782 5– 11-26
05H2959 1–9 11-5 05H4782 5– 11-26
05H2960 1–1 11-5 05H4782 5– 11-26
05H3143 2–7 11-9 05H4793 5– 11-26
05H3143 5– 11-25 05H4793 5– 11-26
05H3183 3–10 11-11 05H4793 5– 11-26
05H3202 3–71 11-17 05H4802 3–44 11-15
05H3203 3–59 11-17 05H4804 3–22A 11-13
05H3226 4– 11-23 05H7137 3–24A 11-13
05H3281 3–7 11-11 05H7539 5– 11-26
05H3294 3–1 11-11 05H8904 5– 11-26
05H3388 5– 11-25 05H8911 4– 11-23
05H3834 5– 11-25 05H8922 5– 11-26
05H3834 5– 11-25 05H8925 1–58 11-7
05H3895 5– 11-26 05H8953 5– 11-25
05H4254 2–3A 11-9 05H8953 5– 11-25
05H4255 2–3 11-9 05H8970 1–56 11-7
05H4255 5– 11-25 05H8981 5– 11-25
05H4256 2–11 11-9 05H8981 5– 11-25
05H4256 5– 11-26 05H8983 5– 11-26
05H4434 5– 11-25 05H8983 5– 11-26
05H4435 5– 11-25 05H8983 5– 11-26
05H4438 3–37 11-13 05H8983 5– 11-26
05H4441 1–48 11-7 05H9015 3–31 11-13
05H4445 1–71 11-7 05H9038 1–25 11-5
05H4447 1–50 11-7 05H9041 1–24 11-5

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 A-1

Part Asm– Part Asm–
Number Index Page Number Index Page
05H9098 3–42 11-15 1621172 1–61C 11-7
05H9155 3–53 11-15 1621172 3–27C 11-13
05H9163 5– 11-27 1621172 3–27C 11-13
05H9822 5– 11-26 1621177 1–27 11-5
05H9839 1–33 11-5 1621177 1–28 11-5
05H9895 5– 11-25 1621190 1–52 11-7
05H9898 3–38A 11-13 1621190 3–107 11-20
05H9899 3–38A 11-13 1621190 3–23 11-13
05H9921 1–49 11-7 1621190 3–99 11-19
05J9535 4– 11-23 1621191 3–101 11-19
05J9553 3–29A 11-13 1621191 3–30 11-13
05J9554 3–34 11-13 1621191 3–32 11-13
05J9577 3–84 11-19 1621191 3–35 11-13
05J9601 3–29D 11-13 1621191 3–83 11-19
05J9721 3–42 11-15 1621191 3–86 11-19
05J9807 3–96 11-19 1621191 3–90 11-19
05J9895 3–47 11-15 1621192 1–38 11-7
05N6766 5– 11-26 1621192 1–6 11-5
06J0056 1–62A 11-7 1621192 3–79A 11-19
06J0056 4– 11-23 1621194 1–46 11-7
06J0057 1–62B 11-7 1621194 3–81 11-19
08L5760 1–62 11-7 1621194 3–97 11-19
08L6060 3–27B 11-13 1621197 1–5 11-5
08L6060 3–27B 11-13 1621197 1–55 11-7
08L6082 3–42A 11-15 1621197 2–12 11-9
08L6082 4– 11-23 1621197 2–6 11-9
08L9459 5– 11-27 1621197 5– 11-26
09G5418 3–41 11-15 1621197 5– 11-26
09G7781 3–84A 11-19 1621200 3–95 11-19
09L4687 3–73 11-17 1621308 3–21E 11-11
09L4687 3–87F 11-19 1621308 3–32A 11-13
09L5117 3–79B 11-19 1621308 3–54 11-15
09L5446 3–79 11-19 1621308 5– 11-26
1126828 1–74 11-7 1621308 5– 11-26
1126828 3–29C 11-13 1621490 3–88 11-19
1126828 3–87D 11-19 1621537 5– 11-26
1126828 3–87D 11-19 1621537 5– 11-26
1126828 3–87D 11-19 1621844 1–60 11-7
1126829 1–73 11-7 1622304 1–39 11-7
1126831 1–21 11-5 1622304 1–7 11-5
1126831 1–8F 11-5 1622332 2–9 11-9
11P1345 5– 11-25 1622332 5– 11-26
11P1346 5– 11-25 1622346 3–33 11-13
11P1347 5– 11-25 1622404 5– 11-26
11P1350 5– 11-25 1624765 3–11 11-11
11P3847 5– 11-27 1624765 3–3 11-11
1621019 2–5 11-9 1624765 3–43 11-15
1621019 2–8 11-9 1624765 3–46 11-15
1621161 3–58A 11-15 1624765 3–48 11-15
1621170 1–29A 11-5 1624765 3–8 11-11
1621170 1–63 11-7 1624765 5– 11-26
1621170 3–56 11-15 1624775 5– 11-26
1621171 3–24B 11-13 1624778 5– 11-26

A-2 IBM 3590 MI

Part Asm– Part Asm–
Number Index Page Number Index Page
1624778 5– 11-26 39F3436 1–8E 11-5
1624778 5– 11-26 39F3438 1–53 11-7
1624778 5– 11-26 39F3444 1–54 11-7
1624778 5– 11-26 39F3445 1–51 11-7
1624778 5– 11-26 39F3447 1–2 11-5
1624780 5– 11-26 39F3449 1–11 11-5
19P0160 5– 11-25 39F3449 1–17 11-5
19P0721 3–27A 11-13 39F3449 1–8B 11-5
19P0721 3–27A 11-13 39F3450 1–40 11-7
19P0913 5– 11-26 39F3450 2–2 11-9
19P0916 3–22 11-13 39F3450 5– 11-26
19P2840 1–34A 11-5 39F3456 1–45 11-7
19P3431 3–47 11-15 39F3884 5– 11-25
19P3432 3–47 11-15 39F4761 1–60A 11-7
19P5014 3–87A 11-19 44F0904 5– 11-26
19P5017 4– 11-23 44F0904 5– 11-26
19P5279 3–21B 11-11 45G0007 3–93 11-19
19P5280 3–21C 11-11 45G0009 3–80 11-19
19P5281 3–21D 11-11 45G0010 3–94 11-19
19P5779 3–87 11-19 45G0047 3–36 11-13
19P6251 3–47 11-15 45G0094 3–89 11-19
19P6252 3–47 11-15 45G0110 3–44A 11-15
2102365 3–106 11-20 45G0110 3–77 11-17
21F7954 3–5 11-11 45G0116 3–61 11-17
257189 3–38 11-13 45G0116 3–74 11-17
316807 3–104 11-20 45G0126 3–62 11-17
31F7453 3–6 11-11 45G0127 3–64 11-17
34L2629 5– 11-26 45G0127 3–66 11-17
34L2659 3–79D 11-19 45G0128 3–63 11-17
356742 3–98 11-19 45G0129 3–60 11-17
35L0586 3–87 11-19 45G0129 3–72 11-17
35L0814 3–79C 11-19 45G0130 3–70 11-17
35L0815 3–79E 11-19 45G0130 3–92 11-19
35L0818 3–47 11-15 45G0131 3–57 11-15
35L1040 3–87A 11-19 45G0134 3–69 11-17
35L1063 3–87 11-19 45G0145 3–87E 11-19
35L1175 3–87A 11-19 45G0145 3–87E 11-19
35L1445 3–29B 11-13 45G0145 3–87E 11-19
35L1445 3–87C 11-19 45G0151 3–9 11-11
35L1445 3–87C 11-19 45G0152 3–2 11-11
35L1445 3–87C 11-19 45G0178 5– 11-25
35L1566 3–29 11-13 45G0179 5– 11-25
35L1569 3–87B 11-19 45G0181 5– 11-25
35L1569 3–87B 11-19 45G0188 5– 11-25
35L1569 3–87B 11-19 45G0188 5– 11-25
35L1671 3–10 11-11 45G0193 5– 11-25
39F3430 1–65 11-7 45G0236 5– 11-26
39F3431 1–30 11-5 45G0236 5– 11-26
39F3433 1–16 11-5 45G0258 3–103 11-20
39F3433 1–8A 11-5 45G0273 4– 11-23
39F3435 1–19 11-5 45G0275 2–1 11-9
39F3435 1–8D 11-5 45G0275 4– 11-23
39F3436 1–20 11-5 45G0275 5– 11-25

Part Number Index A-3

Part Asm– Part Asm–
Number Index Page Number Index Page
45G0277 1–61B 11-7 6857796 3–76 11-17
45G0277 3–25 11-13 74F1823 5– 11-25
45G0277 3–26 11-13 74F1823 5– 11-25
45G0277 3–27 11-13 74F1823 5– 11-25
45G0277 3–28 11-13 74F1823 5– 11-25
45G0288 3–51 11-15 94F9116 3–18 11-11
46F4593 4– 11-23 94F9116 3–49 11-15
46F4594 4– 11-23 NA 1– 11-5
46F6063 4– 11-23 NA 1– 11-7
4780523 3–105 11-20 NA 2– 11-9
4780523 3–91 11-19 NA 3– 11-11
4780540 3–100 11-19 NA 3– 11-13
49G0117 3–65 11-17 NA 3– 11-15
49G8239 3–24 11-13 NA 3– 11-17
50G0460 5– 11-25 NA 3– 11-19
50G0460 5– 11-25 NA 4– 11-23
50G0542 1–37 11-7 NA 5– 11-25
50G0544 1–12 11-5
50G0545 1–4 11-5
50G0546 1–13 11-5
50G0547 1–10 11-5
50G0548 1–67 11-7
50G0551 1–3 11-5
50G0552 1–34 11-5
50G0566 1–35 11-5
50G0574 1–32 11-5
512508 3–85 11-19
54G3386 5– 11-25
54G3390 5– 11-25
55901 3–38B 11-13
61G8323 5– 11-25
61G8323 5– 11-26
61G8324 5– 11-26
61G8324 5– 11-26
61G8324 5– 11-26
62G0632 3–52 11-15
62G0681 4– 11-23
62G1012 4– 11-23
62G1013 4– 11-23
62G1024 4– 11-23
62G1324 5– 11-27
62G1324 5– 11-27
62G2540 1–29 11-5
62G2542 1–41 11-7
62G2557 3–68 11-17
62G2597 1–26 11-5
62G2609 1–61 11-7
62G2611 1–61A 11-7
62G2615 1–64 11-7
62G2620 1–59 11-7
62G2630 1–23 11-5
65F3709 3–82 11-19
6850663 5– 11-26

A-4 IBM 3590 MI

 Appendix A
Contents
TAPEUTIL in a Sun (Solaris) System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
TAPEUTIL in HP-UX System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Interactive Menu-Driven Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Command-Line Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Command-Line Commands and Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Flag Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
TAPEUTIL in Windows NT or Windows 2000 System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
NT Utility Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Invoking NTUTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Interactive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Base Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Library Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
| TAPEUTIL in Linux System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 B-1

TAPEUTIL in a Sun (Solaris) System Environment
A SCSI Tape and Medium Changer Utility Program called tapeutil is provided with the IBM SCSI Tape and
Medium Changer Device Driver for Solaris and installed in the /opt/IBMtape directory as part of the
IBMtape package. This program fulfills several purposes:
v It provides the following service aids for IBM tape subsystems:
– Query Device Type/Verify Device Attachment
– Query Device Serial Number
– Query Device Microcode Level
– Force Device Diagnostic Dump
– Store Device Diagnostic Dump
– Download Device Microcode
v It provides a menu-driven test tool for exercising or testing IBM tape and medium changer devices with
a full suite of supported operations:
– Reading/Writing Data
– Tape Motion Commands
– Setting/Displaying Device Information/Status
– Mounting/Demounting Cartridges
– Cartridge Inventory
v In addition to the menu-driven front end, the tapeutil program provides a command-line interface that is
convenient for use in shell scripts.

Note: When using the command-line calls to the tapeutil program, the tape device is opened and
closed for each invocation. Configuration parameters that are changed in one call to the tapeutil
program are returned to default values when the device is closed.
v The source code for the tapeutil program is provided for example purposes, and is installed in the
/opt/IBMtape directory during the IBMtape package installation. This source code is commented and
demonstrates calls to all of the supported device driver entry points and ioctl commands, thus giving the
application developer a starting point for interfacing to the IBMtape device driver.

The tapeutil program provides both an interactive menu-driven interface as well as a command-line
interface. If the tapeutil program is invoked with no command-line parameters, the menu-driven version will
be started. In the menu-driven version, the device to be operated on should first be opened using option 1.
Other options may then be selected.

The user will be prompted for additional information if required for the specific options selected. The
results of a command are displayed after it is executed. If an error occurs for the command, error
information and device sense data are displayed. The device can be closed using option 2, or it will
automatically be closed when the Quit option is selected. The menu is automatically displayed once when
the program is first invoked. To prevent unnecessary scrolling of the screen, the menu is not automatically
displayed again after each command, but is instead refreshed only after the M (menu refresh) command is
entered.

Figure B-1 on page B-3 shows the menu that is displayed by the tapeutil program.

B-2 IBM 3590 MI

 +-----------------------------------------------------------+
| IBM SCSI TAPE & MEDIUM CHANGER UTILITY PROGRAM |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| GENERAL COMMANDS | BASIC SCSI COMMANDS |
| 1: Open Device | 9: Test Unit Ready |
| 2: Close Device | 10: Inquiry |
| D: Device Type | 11: Request Sense |
| M: Menu Refresh | 12: Reserve |
| Q: Quit Program | 13: Release |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| SERVICE COMMANDS | MEDIUM CHANGER COMMANDS |
| 3: Query Serial Number | 14: Move Medium |
| 4: Query Microcode Level | 15: Position To Element |
| 5: Force Dump | 16: Element Information |
| 6: Store Dump | 17: Inventory |
| 7: Download Microcode | 18: Audit |
| 8: Format Cartridge | 19: Lock/Unlock Door |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| TAPE DRIVE COMMANDS |
| 20: Read Data 32: Locate End Of Data |
| 21: Write Data 33: Get Record Size |
| 22: Write File Mark 34: Set Record Size |
| 23: Erase Tape 35: Get Device Status |
| 24: Rewind 36: Get Device Info |
| 25: Retension 37: Get Media Info |
| 26: Offline 38: Get Position |
| 27: Load/Unload Tape 39: Set Position |
| 28: Forward Space File 40: Get Parameter |
| 29: Backward Space File 41: Set Parameter |
| 30: Forward Space Record 42: Sync Buffer |
| 31: Backward Space Record 43: Display Message |
+-----------------------------------------------------------+

Figure B-1. TAPEUTIL Program Menu

If command-line parameters are provided when the program is invoked, the command-line mode will be
started. For each command-line execution of the program, the device is first opened, the specific
command is issued, and the device is then closed. The program can be driven from within a shell script if
desired. Results of the operation will be displayed only when executed in verbose mode. No information is
displayed when not in verbose mode. This is particularly useful for quiet shell script implementations. A
completion code, as defined in /usr/include/sys/errno.h for the operation requested is always returned from
the program upon exit (in both verbose and quiet mode).

Note: Options 4 through 8 of the tapeutil program supported only by the IBM 3570 Magstar MP Tape
Subsystem and the IBM 3590 High Performance Tape Subsystem.

The usage of the tapeutil program in command-line mode is as follows:

tapeutil -f device -o operation [options]

where device is the name of the tape device special file (for example: /dev/rmt/1st) and operation is one
of the values listed below. The device special file and the operation are required. The specific options
associated with a particular operation are indicated in Table B-1 on page B-4, Table B-2 on page B-4,
Table B-3 on page B-4 and Table B-4 on page B-4. Parameters enclosed in square brackets are optional.
All others are required.

Appendix A B-3
Table B-1. Service Commands and Syntax
Service Commands Syntax
Query Serial Number tapeutil -f f.-o qsn [-w w][-v]
Query Microcode Level tapeutil -f f.-o qmc [-w w][-v]
Force Dump tapeutil -f f.-o fdp [-w w][-v]
Store Dump tapeutil -f f.-o sdp [-w w][-v] -z z
Download Microcode tapeutil -f f.-o dmc [-w w][-v] -z z
Format Cartridge tapeutil -f f.-o fmt [-w w][-v]
Query Device Type tapeutil -f f.-o chk [-w w][-v]

Table B-2. Basic SCSI Commands and Syntax

Basic SCSI Commands Syntax
Test unit Ready tapeutil -f f.-o tur [-w w][-v]
Inquiry tapeutil -f f.-o inq [-w w][-v]
Request Sense tapeutil -f f.-o req [-w w][-v]
Reserved tapeutil -f f.-o res [-w w][-v]
Reserved tapeutil -f f.-o rel [-w w][-v]

Table B-3. Medium Changer Commands and Syntax

Medium Changer Commands Syntax
Move Medium tapeutil -f f.-o mov [-w w][-v] -s s -d d
Position To Element tapeutil -f f.-o pos [-w w][-v] -s s
Element Information tapeutil -f f.-o ele [-w w][-v]
Inventory tapeutil -f f.-o inv [-w w][-v]
Audit tapeutil -f f.-o aud [-w w][-v]
Lock/Unlock Door tapeutil -f f.-o lck [-w w][-v] -x x

Table B-4. Tape Drive Commands and Syntax

Tape Drive Commands Syntax
Read tapeutil -f f.-o rea [-w w][-v] -b b -n n -m m
Write tapeutil -f f.-o wri [-w w][-v] -b b -n n -m m [-r r] [-z z]
Write File Mark tapeutil -f f.-o eof [-w w][-v] -c c
Erase Tape tapeutil -f f.-o era [-w w][-v]
Rewind tapeutil -f f.-o rew [-w w][-v]
Retension tapeutil -f f.-o ret [-w w][-v]
Offline tapeutil -f f.-o off [-w w][-v]
Load/Unload Tape tapeutil -f f.-o lod [-w w][-v] -x x
Forward Space File tapeutil -f f.-o fsf [-w w][-v] -c c
Backward Space File tapeutil -f f.-o bsf [-w w][-v] -c c
Forward Space Record tapeutil -f f.-o fsr [-w w][-v] -c c
Backward Space Record tapeutil -f f.-o bsr [-w w][-v] -c c
Locate End of Data tapeutil -f f.-o eod [-w w][-v]

B-4 IBM 3590 MI

Table B-4. Tape Drive Commands and Syntax (continued)
Tape Drive Commands Syntax
Get Record Size tapeutil -f f.-o grs [-w w][-v]
Set Record Size tapeutil -f f.-o srs [-w w][-v]
Get Device Status tapeutil -f f.-o gds [-w w][-v]
Get Device Information tapeutil -f f.-o gdi [-w w][-v]
Get Media Information tapeutil -f f.-o gmi [-w w][-v]
Get Position tapeutil -f f.-o gpo [-w w][-v] -t t
Set Position tapeutil -f f.-o spo [-w w][-v] -t t -x x
Get Parameter tapeutil -f f.-o gpa [-w w][-v] -t t
Set Parameter tapeutil -f f.-o spa [-w w][-v] -t t -x x
Sync Buffer tapeutil -f f.-o syn [-w w][-v]
Display Message tapeutil -f f.-o msg [-w w][-v] -t t -y y1,y1

Note: Invoking the tapeutil program with the -h flag (for example, tapeutil -h) or the -? flag (for example,
tapeutil -?) will display the usage help information.

The supported flags, their meanings, their associated operations, and their acceptable ranges are as
follows:
Flag Description
-? Usage Help (stand-alone flag) {no value required}
-b Block Size (rea, wri) {0 < (block size x blocking factor) <2097152}
-c Operation Count (eof, fsf, fsr, bsf, bsr) {0 - 65535}
-d Destination Address (mov) {device specific, determine range from Element Info}
-f Device Special File Name (always required) {/dev/rmt/0mn or similar}
-h Usage Help (stand-alone flag) {no value required}
-m Multiples to Read or Write (rea, wri) {0 - 2097152}
-n Blocking Factor (rea, wri) {0 > (block size x blocking factor) <2097152}
-o Operation (always required) {refer to previous list}
-r Random Seed (wri) {0 - 65535}
-s Source Address (mov, pos) {device specific, determine range from Element Info}
-t Type of Parameter Value
v (gpo) {1=logical block, 2=physical block}
v (spo) {1=logical block, 2=physical block}
v (gpa) {1=block size, 2=compression, 3=buffering, 4=immediate, 5=trailer, 6=write protect, 7=acf
mode, 8=capacity, 9=sili}
v (spa) {1=block size, 2=compression, 3=buffering, 4=immediate, 5=trailer, 6=write protect,
8=capacity, 9=sili}
v (msg) {1=display msg0, 2=display msg1, 3=flash msg0, 4=flash msg1, 5=alternate msg1/msg2}
-v Verbose Mode (optional for all commands, stand-alone flag) {no value required, absence of flag
means quiet mode}

Appendix A B-5
-w Open Mode (optional for all commands) {1=read/write, 2=read only (default), 3=write only,
4=append}
-x Parameter Value
v (lck) {1=lock, 2=unlock}
v (lod) {1=load, 2=unload}
v (srs) {0 - 65536}
v (spo) {0 - 65535}
v (spa) {0 - 65535}
-y Messages (msg) {message1,message2}
-z Input/Output File Name
v (sdp) {path and name of the file in which to store dump}
v (dmc) {path and name of the microcode image file}
v (wri) {path and name of the file containing write data pattern}
Notes:
1. For read and write operations, the size of one buffer of data transferred during a single SCSI read or
write command is determined by the product of the Block Size value and the B Factor value. The
number of these buffers transferred is determined by Multiplier value. The actual total number of bytes
transferred is then (Block Size) x (Blocking Factor) x (Multiplier). If the device is set to fixed block
mode (block size not equal to zero), the product of Block Size and Blocking Factor must be a multiple
of the device block size setting.
2. For further information on the Get Parameter (gpa) and Set Parameter (spa) operations, refer to the
STIOC_GET_PARM and STIOC_SET_PARM ioctl commands described in the Programming
Reference.

The following examples should help to demonstrate and clarify the command-line usage of the tapeutil
program. For all examples, substitute the actual value of the special file associated with the target device.
v To query the serial number of the device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0st -o qsn -v
v To request inquiry data from the device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0st -o inq -v
v To move a cartridge from cell 32 to the tape drive (16):
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0smc -o mov -s 32 -d 16 -v
v To set the block size of the device to 64K:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0st -o spa -t 1 -x 65535 -v
v To write 100 64K blocks of data to the tape device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0stn -w 1 -o wri -b 65535
-n 1 -m 100 -v
v To write two file marks to the tape device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0stn -w 1 -o eof -c 2 -v
v To rewind the tape device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0stn -o rew -v
v To read 100 64K blocks of data from the tape device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0stn -o rea -b 65535 -n 1 -m
100 -v

B-6 IBM 3590 MI

TAPEUTIL in HP-UX System Environment

Introduction
A SCSI Tape and Medium Changer Utility Program called tapeutil is provided with the IBM SCSI Tape and
Medium Changer Device Driver for HP-UX and installed in the /usr/bin directory. The tapeutil program
fulfills several purposes:
v It provides the following service aids for IBM tape subsystems:
– Query Device Type/Verify Device Attachment
– Query Device Serial Number
– Query Device Microcode Level
– Force Device Diagnostic Dump
– Store Device Diagnostic Dump
– Download Device Microcode
v It provides a menu-driven test tool for exercising or testing IBM tape and medium changer devices with
a full suite of supported operations:
– Reading/Writing Data
– Tape Motion Commands
– Setting/Displaying Device Information/Status
– Mounting/Demounting Cartridges
– Cartridge Inventory
v In addition to the menu-driven front end, the tapeutil program provides a command-line interface which
is convenient for use in shell scripts.
v The source code for the tapeutil program is provided for example purposes, and is installed in the
tapeutil directory during the tapeutil package installation. This source code is commented and
demonstrates calls to all of the supported device driver entry points and ioctl commands, thus giving the
application developer a starting point for interfacing to the HP-UX device driver.

The tapeutil program provides both an interactive menu-driven interface as well as a command-line
interface. If the tapeutil program is invoked with no command-line parameters, the menu-driven version will
be started. In the menu-driven version, the device to be operated on should first be opened using option 1.
Other options may then be selected. The user will be prompted for additional information if required for the
specific options selected. The results of a command are displayed after it is executed. If an error occurs
for the command, error information and device sense data are displayed. The device can be closed using
option 2, or it will automatically be closed when the Quit option is selected. The menu is automatically
displayed once when the program is first invoked. To prevent unnecessary scrolling of the screen, the
menu is not automatically displayed again after each command, but is instead refreshed only after the M
(menu refresh) command is entered.

Interactive Menu-Driven Interface

Figure B-2 on page B-8 shows the menu that is displayed by the tapeutil program when the program is
invoked, and no command-line parameters are entered:

Appendix A B-7
 +-----------------------------------------------------------+
| IBM SCSI TAPE & MEDIUM CHANGER UTILITY PROGRAM |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| GENERAL COMMANDS | BASIC SCSI COMMANDS |
| 1: Open Device | 9: Test Unit Ready |
| 2: Close Device | 10: Inquiry |
| D: Device Type | 11: Request Sense |
| M: Menu Refresh | 12: Reserve |
| Q: Quit Program | 13: Release |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| SERVICE COMMANDS | MEDIUM CHANGER COMMANDS |
| 3: Query Serial Number | 14: Move Medium |
| 4: Query Microcode Level | 15: Position To Element |
| 5: Force Dump | 16: Element Information |
| 6: Store Dump | 17: Inventory |
| 7: Download Microcode | 18: Audit |
| 8: Format Cartridge | 19: Lock/Unlock Door |
+-----------------------------+-----------------------------+
| TAPE DRIVE COMMANDS |
| 20: Read Data 32: Locate End Of Data |
| 21: Write Data 33: Get Record Size |
| 22: Write File Mark 34: Set Record Size |
| 23: Erase Tape 35: Get Device Status |
| 24: Rewind 36: Get Device Info |
| 25: Retension 37: Get Media Info |
| 26: Offline 38: Get Position |
| 27: Load/Unload Tape 39: Set Position |
| 28: Forward Space File 40: Get Parameter |
| 29: Backward Space File 41: Set Parameter |
| 30: Forward Space Record 42: Sync Buffer |
| 31: Backward Space Record 43: Display Message |
+-----------------------------------------------------------+

Figure B-2. TAPEUTIL Program Menu

Command-Line Mode
If command-line parameters are provided when the tapeutil program is invoked, the command-line mode
will be started. For each command-line execution of the program, the device is first opened, the specific
command is issued, and the device is then closed. The program can be driven from within a shell script if
desired. Results of the operation will be displayed only when executed in verbose mode. No information is
displayed when not in verbose mode. This is particularly useful for quiet shell script implementations. A
completion code, as defined in /usr/include/sys/errno.h for the operation requested is always returned from
the program upon exit (in both verbose and quiet mode).

Command-Line Commands and Syntax

The usage of the tapeutil program in command-line mode is as follows:
tapeutil -f device -o
operation [options]

where device is the name of the tape device special file (for example: /dev/rmt/1m) and operation is one
of the values listed below. The device special file and the operation are required. The specific options
associated with a particular operation are indicated in Table B-5, Table B-6 on page B-9, Table B-7 on
page B-9 and Table B-8 on page B-10. Parameters enclosed in square brackets are optional. All others are
required.
Table B-5. Service Commands and Syntax
Service Commands Syntax
Query Serial Number tapeutil -f f.-o qsn [-w w][-v]
Query Microcode Level tapeutil -f f.-o qmc [-w w][-v]
Force Dump tapeutil -f f.-o fdp [-w w][-v]

B-8 IBM 3590 MI

Table B-5. Service Commands and Syntax (continued)
Service Commands Syntax
Store Dump tapeutil -f f.-o sdp [-w w][-v] -z z
Download Microcode tapeutil -f f.-o dmc [-w w][-v] -z z
Format Cartridge tapeutil -f f.-o fmt [-w w][-v]
Query Device Type tapeutil -f f.-o chk [-w w][-v]

Table B-6. Basic SCSI Commands and Syntax

Basic SCSI Commands Syntax
Test unit Ready tapeutil -f f.-o tur [-w w][-v]
Inquiry tapeutil -f f.-o inq [-w w][-v]
Request Sense tapeutil -f f.-o req [-w w][-v]
Reserved tapeutil -f f.-o res [-w w][-v]
Reserved tapeutil -f f.-o rel [-w w][-v]

Table B-7. Medium Changer Commands and Syntax

Medium Changer Commands Syntax
Move Medium tapeutil -f f.-o mov [-w w][-v] -s s -d d
Position To Element tapeutil -f f.-o pos [-w w][-v] -s s
Element Information tapeutil -f f.-o ele [-w w][-v]
Inventory tapeutil -f f.-o inv [-w w][-v]
Audit tapeutil -f f.-o aud [-w w][-v]
Lock/Unlock Door tapeutil -f f.-o lck [-w w][-v] -x x

Appendix A B-9
Table B-8. Tape Drive Commands and Syntax
Tape Drive Commands Syntax
Read tapeutil -f f.-o rea [-w w][-v] -b b -n n -m m
Write tapeutil -f f.-o wri [-w w][-v] -b b -n n -m m [-r r] [-z z]
Write File Mark tapeutil -f f.-o eof [-w w][-v] -c c
Erase Tape tapeutil -f f.-o era [-w w][-v]
Rewind tapeutil -f f.-o rew [-w w][-v]
Retension tapeutil -f f.-o ret [-w w][-v]
Offline tapeutil -f f.-o off [-w w][-v]
Load/Unload Tape tapeutil -f f.-o lod [-w w][-v] -x x
Forward Space File tapeutil -f f.-o fsf [-w w][-v] -c c
Backward Space File tapeutil -f f.-o bsf [-w w][-v] -c c
Forward Space Record tapeutil -f f.-o fsr [-w w][-v] -c c
Backward Space Record tapeutil -f f.-o bsr [-w w][-v] -c c
Locate End of Data tapeutil -f f.-o eod [-w w][-v]
Get Record Size tapeutil -f f.-o grs [-w w][-v]
Set Record Size tapeutil -f f.-o srs [-w w][-v]
Get Device Status tapeutil -f f.-o gds [-w w][-v]
Get Device Information tapeutil -f f.-o gdi [-w w][-v]
Get Media Information tapeutil -f f.-o gmi [-w w][-v]
Get Position tapeutil -f f.-o gpo [-w w][-v] -t t
Set Position tapeutil -f f.-o spo [-w w][ -v] -t t -x x
Get Parameter tapeutil -f f.-o gpa [-w w][ -v] -t t
Set Parameter tapeutil -f f.-o spa [-w w][ -v] -t t -x x
Sync Buffer tapeutil -f f.-o syn [-w w][ -v]
Display Message tapeutil -f f.-o msg [-w w][ -v] -t t -y y1,y1

Note: Invoking the tapeutil program with the -h flag (for example, tapeutil -h) or the -? flag (for example,
tapeutil -?) will display the usage help information.

Flag Descriptions
The supported flags, their meanings, their associated operations, and their acceptable ranges are as
follows:
Flag Description
-? Usage Help (stand-alone flag) {no value required}
-b Block Size (rea, wri) {0 < (block size x blocking factor) <2097152}
-c Operation Count (eof, fsf, fsr, bsf, bsr) {0 - 65535}
-d Destination Address (mov) {device specific, determine range from Element Info}
-f Device Special File Name (always required) {/dev/rmt/0mn or similar}
-h Usage Help (stand-alone flag) {no value required}
-m Multiples to Read or Write (rea, wri) {0 - 2097152}
-n Blocking Factor (rea, wri) {0 > (block size x blocking factor) <2097152}

B-10 IBM 3590 MI

-o Operation (always required) {refer to previous list}
-r Random Seed (wri) {0 - 65535}
-s Source Address (mov, pos) {device specific, determine range from Element Info}
-t Type of Parameter Value
v (gpo) {1=logical block, 2=physical block}
v (spo) {1=logical block, 2=physical block}
v (gpa) {1=block size, 2=compression, 3=buffering, 4=immediate, 5=trailer, 6=write protect, 7=acf
mode, 8=capacity, 9=sili}
v (spa) {1=block size, 2=compression, 3=buffering, 4=immediate, 5=trailer, 6=write protect,
8=capacity, 9=sili}
v (msg) {1=display msg0, 2=display msg1, 3=flash msg0, 4=flash msg1, 5=alternate msg1/msg2}
-v Verbose Mode (optional for all commands, stand-alone flag) {no value required, absence of flag
means quiet mode}
-w Open Mode (optional for all commands) {1=read/write, 2=read only (default), 3=write only,
4=append}
-x Parameter Value
v (lck) {1=lock, 2=unlock}
v (lod) {1=load, 2=unload}
v (spo) {0 - 65535}
v (spa) {0 - 65535}
-y Messages (msg) {message1,message2}
-z Input/Output File Name
v (sdp) {path and name of the file in which to store dump}
v (dmc) {path and name of the microcode image file}
v (wri) {path and name of the file containing write data pattern}
Notes:
1. For read and write operations, the size of one buffer of data transferred during a single SCSI read or
write command is determined by the product of the Block Size value and the B Factor value. The
number of these buffers transferred is determined by Multiplier value. The actual total number of bytes
transferred is then (Block Size) x (Blocking Factor) x (Multiplier). If the device is set to fixed block
mode (block size not equal to zero), the product of Block Size and Blocking Factor must be a multiple
of the device block size setting.
2. For further information on the Get Parameter (gpa) and Set Parameter (spa) operations, refer to the
STIOC_GET_PARM and STIOC_SET_PARM ioctl commands described in the Programming
Reference.

Appendix A B-11
Examples
The following examples should help to demonstrate and clarify the command-line usage of the tapeutil
program. For all examples, substitute the actual value of the special file associated with the target device.
v To query the serial number of the device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0m -o qsn -v
v To request inquiry data from the device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0m -o inq -v
v To move a cartridge from cell 32 to the tape drive (16):
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0smc -o mov -s 32 -d 16 -v
v To write 100 64K blocks of data to the tape device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0mn -w 1 -o wri -b 65535
-n 1 -m 100 -v
v To write two file marks to the tape device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0mn -w 1 -o eof -c 2 -v
v To rewind the tape device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0mn -o rew -v
v To read 100 64K blocks of data from the tape device:
/opt/IBMtape/tapeutil -f /dev/rmt/0mn -o rea -b 65535
-n 1 -m 100 -v

B-12 IBM 3590 MI

TAPEUTIL in Windows NT or Windows 2000 System Environment

NT Utility Program
The Magstar device is supported on Intel-based processors with a minimum processor level of Intel 486DX
or Pentium with sufficient RAM and disk space for operation of the Microsoft Windows NT or Windows
2000 operating system.

The utility has these general characteristics:

v Can be driven interactively or from a file (batch mode).
v Allows specification of desired results from each step of the test so that the test can be self-checking.
v Allows testing of all device driver interfaces with both valid and invalid parameters.

Invoking NTUTIL
The tool can be invoked as a command from the command line or from within a shell script:
ntutil <-f input-file> <-o output-file> <-t tape-path-special-file-name>
<-c changer-path-special-file-name> <-l library-mode-on>
<-d debug-trace-on>

The options are:

-f input-file Specifies the input file for batch mode.
If a file is specified, NTUTIL will execute in
batch mode and read input from this file.
The default for this file is NTUTIL.in.

-o output-file Specifies the output file.

The default for this file is NTUTIL.out.

-t tape-path-special-file-name
Specifies the special file value
(for example, tape0) to substitute on the
"open" statement in the input file.

-c changer-path-special-file-name
Specifies the changer device special file value
(for example, 1b0.1.2.3) to substitute when
executing an open (for both batch and
interactive mode). The special value
def_lun_1 specifies that an open uses the
default lun associated with the
tape-special-file-name.

-l library-mode-on Specifies that an ope will open both the tape

path special file and the changer path special
file (for both batch and interactive mode).

-d debug-trace-on Turns on internal tracing printouts in the

output file. Used only to debug the tool
itself.

Note: If no parameters are specified, NTUTIL will operate in interactive mode.

Interactive Mode
When NTUTIL is invoked without the -f flag, it defaults to running in interactive or manual mode. This
mode allows a developer to interactively determine the kind of testing to be done. When in interactive
mode, NTUTIL provides a menu of functions that can be performed.

For a description of interactive modes, see “Interactive Mode”.

The two modes are:

v Base mode (LUN0) commands such as open/close/read/write

Appendix A B-13
v Library mode (LUN0 and LUN1) that supports open/close/read/write plus media mover commands such
as read element status and move media.

The 3590 must be in Random 2 LUN mode and the other devices must be in Random mode both when
booted and to operate NTUTIL in library mode.

Base mode (only LUN 0 is accessed) is shown in Figure B-3

Library mode (LUN 0 and LUN 1 are accessed) is shown in Figure B-4 on page B-15

Base Mode
The Base Mode menu follows:

MANUAL TEST MENU:

+----------------------------------------------------------------+
| 1: set device special file 2: display symbols |
| 3: set block size R/W (now !0 fixed) 4: set block count (R/W)|
| 5: set return error when fail 6: set/reset trace |
| 7: set exit on unexpected result 8: Library Mode |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|20: open 21: close |
|22: read 23: write |
|24: read and display block 25: flush (buffer->media)|
|26: read block id 27: erase |
|28: locate block id 29: display block data |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|30: write filemark(s) 31: rewind |
|32: forward space filemark(s) 33: unload |
|34: reverse space filemark(s) 35: load (3590 Sys Mode) |
|36: forward space record(s) 37: return error |
|38: reverse space record(s) 39: test unit ready |
|43: set media parms (block size) 44: set dev parms (comp. |
|46: get device information |
|48: get medium information 49: inquiry |
|53: space EOD 54: display message |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|70: system command |
| |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|80: Force Dump 81: Read Dump |
|82: Update Code 83: Log Sense |
|84: Get Last Sense 85: Get Version |
|86: Associative/Persistant WProtect 87: Read/Write Test |
|88: Find Devices 89: Get MTDevice info |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|99: return to main menu |
| |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
enter selection:

Figure B-3. Base Mode

B-14 IBM 3590 MI

Library Mode
The Library Mode menu follows:

MANUAL TEST MENU:

+----------------------------------------------------------------+
| 1: set device special file 2: display symbols |
| 3: set block size R/W (now !0 fixed) 4: set block count (R/W)|
| 5: set return error when fail 6: set/reset trace |
| 7: set exit on unexpected result 8: Base Mode |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|10: ioctl return library inventory 11: ioctl move medium |
|12: ioctl initialize element status |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|20: open 21: close |
|22: read 23: write |
|24: read and display block 25: flush (buffer->media)|
|26: read block id 27: erase |
|28: locate block id 29: display block data |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|30: write filemark(s) 31: rewind |
|32: forward space filemark(s) 33: unload |
|34: reverse space filemark(s) 35: load (3590 Sys Mode) |
|36: forward space record(s) 37: return error |
|38: reverse space record(s) 39: test unit ready |
|43: set media parms (block size) 44: set dev parms (comp.)|
|46: get device information |
|48: get medium information 49: inquiry |
|53: space EOD 54: display message |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|70: system command |
| |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|80: Force Dump 81: Read Dump |
|82: Update Code 83: Log Sense |
|84: Get Last Sense 85: Get Version |
|86: Associative/Persistant WProtect 87: Read/Write Test |
|88: Find Devices 89: Get MTDevice info |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|99: return to main menu |
| |
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
enter selection:

Figure B-4. Library Mode

Appendix A B-15
| TAPEUTIL in Linux System Environment
| The 3590 device is supported on Linux operating system. See “LINUX System Attachment” on page 8-51.

B-16 IBM 3590 MI

Appendix B
Notices
References in this publication to IBM programs or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these
available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is
not intended to state or imply that only IBM’s product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of IBM’s intellectual property rights may
be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. Evaluation and verification of operation in
conjunction with other products, except those expressly designed by IBM, is the user’s responsibility.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM
may make improvements and/or changes in the products and/or programs described in this publication at
any time.

This document contains general information, as well as requirements, for use on IBM and third-party
products. IBM makes no warranty, express or implied, as to its completeness or accuracy, and the data
contained herein is current only as of the date of publication. It assumes that the user understands the
relationship among any affected systems, machines, programs, and media.

IBM or third parties may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in
this document, including appearance design patents or applications. The furnishing of this document does
not constitute or imply a grant of any license under any patents, patent applications, trademarks, copyright,
or other rights of IBM or of any third party, or any right to refer to IBM in any advertising or other
promotional or marketing activities. IBM assumes no responsibility for any infringement of patents or other
rights that may result from use of this document or from the manufacture, use, lease, or sale of apparatus
described herein.

Licenses under IBM’s utility patents are available on reasonable and non-discriminatory terms and
conditions. IBM does not grant licenses under its appearance design patents. You can send license
inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood
NY 10594, U.S.A.

For online versions of this book, we authorize you to:

v Copy, modify, and print the documentation contained on the media, for use within your enterprise,
provided you reproduce the copyright notice, all warning statements, and other required statements on
each copy or partial copy.
v Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related IBM product
(which may be either machines you own, or programs, if the program’s license terms permit a transfer).
You must, at the same time, destroy all other copies of the documentation.

You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from this
authorization.

THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not apply
to you.

Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization. Upon termination, you must
destroy your machine readable documentation.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 C-1

Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries, or both:

9076 SP2 AIX® AIX 6000 Application System/400

iSeries/AS400 Enterprise System/9000® ES/9000® ESCON
(OS/400)
System
IBM POWERparallel RISC System/6000 pSeries/RS6000 (AIX)
System
pSeries/RS6000
Scalable POWERparallel Systems SP2 zSeries (S/390)®
(AIX) System

The following terms are trademarks of other companies:

StorageTek is a registered trademark of Storage Technology Corporation.

Sun, Solaris, and SunOS are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

Pentium® is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.

TDS is a registered trademark of Texas Digital Systems, Inc.

3M is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co.

UNIX® is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through
X/Open Company Limited.

Windows, Windows NT, and Windows 2000 are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

HP/UX is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Corporation.

Symbols
The following symbols are used in this manual:
Symbol Description
Imprinted on the panel to indicate that the device requires service if the Processor Check
LED is on. Also imprinted on the Change Mode switch to allow the CE to change between
the operator menus and the CE menus.

Displayed on the panel to indicate that trace data is stored in the device. Also printed in
text as an attention notice.

Printed in text and in figures to indicate an ESD-sensitive part.

Printed in text and in figures to indicate a Class I Laser device is installed.

Displayed on the panel to indicate that the thumbwheel on the cartridge is set to the
file-protected position. Also imprinted on the magazine of the ACF to indicate the position
where the magazine door is locked.

Displayed on the panel to indicate that the host file-protected the volume.

Displayed on the panel to indicate that the thumbwheel on the cartridge is set to the not
file-protected position. Also imprinted on the magazine of the ACF to indicate the position
where the magazine door is unlocked.

C-2 IBM 3590 MI

Communication Statements
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A Statement: Note: This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission
limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

European Union (EU) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive: This product is in conformity with the
protection requirements of EU Council Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to
satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product,
including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information Technology
Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for
commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential for
causing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment. Such
cables and connectors are available from IBM authorized dealers. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors.

Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement: This Class A digital apparatus complies
with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada: Cet appareil numérique de la classe A

est conform à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission Statement:

Appendix B C-3
Laser Information
These products comply with the performance standards set by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration for
a Class I laser product.

Figure C-1. Laser Safety Label – Class I

This means that these products belong to a class of laser products that do not emit hazardous laser
radiation. This classification was accomplished by providing the necessary protective housings and
scanning safeguards to ensure that laser radiation is inaccessible during operation or is within Class I
limits. These products have been reviewed by external safety agencies and have obtained approvals to
the latest standards as they apply to this product type.

C-4 IBM 3590 MI

 Glossary
This glossary defines the special terms, attention (notice). A word for calling attention to the
abbreviations, and acronyms that are used in this possibility of danger to a program, device, or system, or
publication. If you do not find the term you are to data. Contrast with caution and danger
looking for, refer to the index or to the Dictionary
ATTN. Attention
of Computing,ZC20-1699.

Italicized text indicates terms found elsewhere in B

this glossary.
backhitch. Magnetic tape that makes a slight
backward motion just prior to moving forward
A
backup. To make additional copies of documents or
ac. Alternating current software for safekeeping

access method. A technique for moving data between BCR. Buffer channel remainder register
main storage and input or output devices
BCSE. Buffer channel status/error register
ACF. Automatic cartridge facility
BDSE. Buffer device status/error register
adj. Adjustment
beginning-of-tape (BOT). The location on a magnetic
AEN. Asynchronous event notification tape that indicates the start of the permissible recording
area
AIX. Advanced Interactive Executive. IBM’s
implementation of the UNIX operating system. The bezel. Decorative and safety cover
RS/6000 system, among others, runs the AIX operating
system bicolored. Having two colors

AL_PA. Arbitrated Loop Physical Address BM or bill of materials. A list of specific types and
amounts of direct materials expected to be used to
alter. To change produce a given job or quantity of output

ANSI. American National Standards Institute BOB. Beginning-of-block

ARTIC. A real time interface processor. In a tape BOT. Beginning-of-tape

library, the RS-422 communication path between the
3590 and the library manager buffer. A routine or storage used to compensate for a
difference in rate of flow of data or time of occurrence of
ASCII. American National Standard Code for events, when transferring data from one device to
Information Interchange. A 7-bit coded character set (8 another
bits including parity check) that consists of control
characters and graphic characters bus . A facility for transferring data between several
devices located between two end points, only one
| asm. Assembly device being able to transmit at a given moment

assigning a device. The establishing of the

relationship of a device to a running task, process, job, C
or program
caution (notice). A word to call attention to possible
assignment. The naming of a specific device to personal harm to people. Contrast with attention and
perform a function danger

assistance. Aid CCW. Channel command word

asynchronous. Pertaining to two or more processes CCW chain. A list of channel command words to be
that do not depend upon the occurrence of specific performed in sequence
events such as common timing signals
CE. Customer engineer; field engineer; service
representative

CEM. customer engineering memorandum

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 D-1

 CER. Channel error register degradation. A decrease in quality of output or
throughput or an increase in machine error rate
cfgmgr. Configuration manager
degraded. Decreased in quality of output or
channel command. An instruction that directs a data throughput or increased machine error rate
channel, control unit, or device to perform an operation
or set of operations deserialize. To change from serial-by-bit to
parallel-by-byte
char. Character
detented. A part being held in position with a catch or
CHK. Check lever

| CICS. Customer information control system DEV. Device

command. A control signal that initiates an action or | DIAG. (1) Diagnostics (2) Diagnostic section of
the start of a sequence of actions | maintenance information manual

concurrent. Refers to diagnostic procedures that can direct access storage. A storage device in which the
be run on one control unit while the rest of the access time is independent of the location of the data
subsystem remains available for customer applications
DLR. Device level register
contingent connection. A connection between a
channel path and a drive caused when a unit check DLX. Device configuration register (hexadecimal 13)
occurs during an I/O operation
DRAM. Dynamic random-access memory
controller. A device that provides the interface
between a system and one or more tape drives drive (magnetic tape). A mechanism for moving
magnetic tape and controlling its movement
cm . Centimeter
DRV. Drive
CP. Circuit protector
DSE. (1) Data security erase (2) Device status and
CRC. Cyclic redundancy check error register

CRR. Channel request register DSH. Control unit serial high register

| CSU. Customer set-up DSL. Control unit serial low register

ctrl. Control DSP. Digital signal processor

CU. Control unit

E
| CUM. Cumulative fix tape
EBCDIC. Extended binary-coded decimal interchange
| CWS. Control work station code

EC. (1) Edge connector (2) Engineering change

D
| ECA. Engineering change announcement
danger (notice). A word to call attention to possible
lethal harm to people. Contrast with attention and ECC. Error correction code
caution
| errpt. error report
data . Any representations such as characters or
analog quantities to which meaning is or might be EEPROM. Electrically erasable programmable
assigned read-only memory

data buffer. The storage buffer in the control unit. This EIA. Electronics Industries Association
buffer is used to increase the data transfer rate between
the control unit and the channel EIA unit. A unit of measure, established by the
Electronic Industries Association, equal to 44.45 mm
data check. A synchronous or asynchronous (1.75 in.)
indication of a condition caused by invalid data or
incorrect positioning of data | electrostatic discharge. An undesirable discharge of
| static electricity that can damage equipment and
dc. Direct current | degrade electrical circuitry

D-2 IBM 3590 MI

end-of-block (EOB). A code that marks the end of a fibre channel (FC). A communications system
block of data characterized by a large bandwidth, shared bus and
optical fibre connections
end-of-file (EOF). A code that marks the end of a file
of data fibre channel arbitrated loop (FCAL). A type of FC
network in which the hosts and devices are in a loop
end-of-tape (EOT). The end of the recording area on configuration, with each node communicating with the
a tape next node and messages being passed along to the
target
Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON) . A set of
IBM products and services that provide a dynamically fibre channel for SCSI protocol (FCP). An
connected environment within an enterprise. The implementation of the SCSI interface command set for
ESCON channel connection allows the 3590 Model A00 FC networks
to communicate directly with a System/390
FID. FRU identifier (may be more than one FRU)
EOB. End-of-block
fiducial. A target used for teaching a physical location
EOD. End-of-data to a robot

EOF. End-of-file field replaceable unit (FRU). An assembly that is

replaced in its entirety when any one of its components
EOT. End-of-tape fails
EPO. Emergency power off file. A named set of records stored or processed as a
unit. Also referred to as a dataset
EPROM. Erasable programmable read only memory
file protection. The processes and procedures
EQC. Equipment check
established in an information system that are designed
equipment check. An asynchronous indication of a to inhibit unauthorized access to, contamination of, or
malfunction deletion of a file

EREP. Environmental recording, editing, and printing flash EEPROM. An electrically erasable programmable
read-only memory (EEPROM) that can be updated
Error log. A dataset or file in a product or system
where error information is stored for later access FM . Field mark

ESCON. Enterprise Systems Connection FMR . Field microcode replacement

ESD . Electrostatic discharge format . The arrangement or layout of data on a data

medium

F formatter. Part of a magnetic tape subsystem that

performs data conversion, speed matching, encoding,
fabric . The term used to describe a routing structure first level error recovery, and interfaces to one or more
that receives addressed information and routes it to its tape drives
appropriate destination. The set of cascaded switches is
commonly called a fabric FP . File protect.

fault symptom code (FSC). A hexadecimal code frayed . Damaged, as if by an abrasive substance
generated by the drive or the control unit microcode in
response to a detected subsystem error FRU . Field replaceable unit

FC. (1) Feature code (2) Fibre channel FSC . Fault symptom code

FCAL. Fibre channel arbitrated loop FSI . Fault symptom index

FCC. Federal communications commission full-duplex . Communications mode that allows

transmission or reception of data blocks at the same
FCP. fibre channel for SCSI protocol time

FE. Field engineer, customer engineer, or service functional microcode . Microcode that is resident in
representative the machine during normal customer operation

Glossary D-3
 G initial microprogram load (IML) . The action of
loading a microprogram from an external storage to
writable control storage
g . Gram
initiator . The component that executes a command.
gnd . Ground
The initiator can be the host system or the tape control
unit
H
INST . Installation
half-duplex . Communications mode that allows
transmission or reception of data blocks but not at the interblock gap (IBG) . An area on a data medium to
same time indicate the end of a block or physical record

hard address . A physical address assigned through interface . A shared boundary. An interface might be a
arbitration to the fibre card by the loop initialization hardware component to link two devices or it might be a
sequence portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more
computer programs
hertz (Hz) . Unit of frequency. One hertz equals one
cycle-per-second interposer . The part used to convert a 68-pin
connector to a 50-pin D-shell connector
hex. Hexadecimal
intervention required . Manual action is needed
| HGA. Head guide assembly
INTRO . Introduction
| HSARS. Hardware statistical analysis and reporting
| system I/O . Input/output

| HSGC. High speed generic component tester IOP . Input/output processor

Hz . Hertz (cycles-per-second) IPL . Initial program load

| iSeries. IBM term for OS/400 products

I
ITST . Idle-time self-test
| IBMLZ1 . The 3590 improved compression algorithm,
| which furnishes hardware execution efficiency by using K
| as few machine cycles as possible to compress or
| decompress a byte. The algorithm achieves good km . kilometer
| coding efficiency for broad applications and provides
| data compression with less performance loss.
L
ID . Identifier
LAN . Local area network. A computer network within
identifier (ID) . (1) In programming languages, a a limited area
lexical unit that names a language object; for example,
the names of variables, arrays, records, labels, or LED . Light-emitting diode
procedures. An identifier usually consists of a letter
optionally followed by letters, digits, or other characters. | LIC . Library interface card
(2) One or more characters used to identify or name
data element and possibly to indicate certain properties LIP . Loop initiated primitive
of that data element. (3) A sequence of bits or
loadable . Having the ability to be loaded
characters that identifies a program, device, or system
to another program, device, or system LUN . Logical Unit
IDRC . Improved Data Recording Capability LZ-1 . Lempel-Ziv electronic data compactor
IML . Initial microprogram load
M
Improved Data Recording Format . An improved
data recording mode that can increase the effective magnetic tape . A tape with a magnetical surface
data capacity and the effective data rate when enabled layer on which data can be stored by magnetic
and invoked recording

MAP . Maintenance analysis procedure

D-4 IBM 3590 MI

| MAQ . Maintenance agreement qualification | MP . (1) Microprocessor (2) Metal particle
mask . A pattern of characters that controls the ms . Millisecond
retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of
characters. To use a pattern of characters to control the MSG . Message
retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of
characters | MTM . Media test mode

master file . A file used as an authority in a given job multipath . Pertaining to using more than one path
and that is relatively permanent, even though its
contents may change. Synonymous with main file N
MB . Mega Byte (usually expressed as data rate in N/A . Not applicable.
MB/s or MB/second)
| NDF. No defect found
media capacity . The amount of data that can be
contained on a storage medium, expressed in bytes of node . In a network, a point at which one or more
data functional units connect channels or data circuits
mega . Prefix for ’million’ NVS . Nonvolatile storage. A storage device whose
contents are not lost when power is removed
| MES . Miscellaneous equipment specification

| MI . Maintenance information O
micro . Prefix for ’millionth of’ offline . Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit
without the continual control of a computer. Contrast
microcode . (1) One or more micro instructions. (2) A
with online
code, representing the instructions of an instruction set,
implemented in a part of storage that is not online . Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit
program-addressable. (3) To design, write, and test one that is under the continual control of a computer.
or more micro instructions. (4) See also microprogram Contrast with offline
microdiagnostic routine . A program that runs under OPER . Operation
the control of a supervisor, usually to identify field
replaceable units ov . Over voltage

microdiagnostic utility . A program that is run by the overrun . Loss of data because a receiving device is
customer engineer to test the machine unable to accept data at the rate it is transmitted

microinstruction . A basic or elementary machine overtightening . To tighten too much

instruction

microprogram . A group of microinstructions that, P

when executed, performs a preplanned function.
p bit . Parity bit
The term microprogram represents a dynamic
arrangement or selection of one or more groups of parameter . A variable that is given a constant value
microinstructions for execution to perform a particular for a specified application and that may denote the
function. The term microcode represents application
microinstructions used in a product as an alternative to
hard-wired circuitry to implement certain functions of a PC . Parity check
processor or other system component.
PCC . Power control compartment
| MI . Maintenance information
PE . Parity error. Product engineer
MIM . Media information message
PGID . Path group identification
mm . Millimeter
PM . Preventive maintenance
modifier . That which changes the meaning
PNEU . Pneumatics
mount a device . To assign an I/O device with a
request to the operator pneumatic . The parts of the subsystem that control
the pressurized air and vacuum

Glossary D-5
 POR . Power-on reset R/W . Read/write

port . A physical connection for communication

between the 3590 and the host processor. The 3590 S
has two SCSI ports
s . Seconds of time
POST . Power-on self-test
SAN . Storage Area Networks. A SAN permits
power-on self-test (POST) . A series of diagnostic information to be accessed, managed, and shared
tests that are run automatically by a device when the among various storage devices and servers over a
power is turned on network

| PROC. Shortened term for the Procedures section of a SARS . Statistical analysis and reporting system. The
| service manual like Maintenance Information microcode in the drive that assists in determining if read
and write errors are caused by the tape or the hardware
PROM . Programmable read only memory
SCSI . Small computer system interface
PS . Power supply
segment . A part
| pSeries. IBM term for AIX-type (RS6000) products
sel . Select
PTF . Program temporary fix
serialize . To change from parallel-by-byte to
PVPD . Privileged vital product data. The data serial-by-bit
contained within the tape drive that requires special
passwords to access serializer . A device that converts a space distribution
of simultaneous states representing data into a
PWR . Power corresponding time sequence of states

servo. A shortened form of the term servomechanism

R
servomechanism . A feedback control system in
RAM . Random access memory which at least one of the system signals represents
mechanical motion
Random access memory . A storage device into
which data is entered and from which data is retrieved SIM . Service information message
in a nonsequential manner
| SLIC . System licensed internal code
RAS . Reliability, availability, and serviceability
| SM . Service memorandum
record . A collection of related data or words, treated
as a unit small computer system interface (SCSI) . An input
and output bus that provides a standard interface
recording density . The number of bits in a single between the host system and the 3590
linear track measured per unit of length of the recording
medium | smit. System management interface tool
recoverable error . An error condition that allows SNS . Sense
continued execution of a program
soft address . A physical address assigned to the
ref . Reference fibre card by the loop initilazation sequence

reg . Register special feature . A feature that can be ordered to

enhance the capability, storage capacity, or performance
reinventory . To inventory again of a product, but is not essential for its basic work

retension . The process or function of tightening the SR . Service representative. See also CE
tape onto the cartridge, if it is sensed that the tape has
a loose wrap on the cartridge SRAM . Static random access memory

| RISC. Reduced instruction-set computer SS . Status store

| ROM . Read-only memory ST . Store

RPQ . Request for price quotation

D-6 IBM 3590 MI

standard feature . The significant design elements of
a product that are included as part of the fundamental
U
product
UART . Universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
START . Start maintenance
unload . Prepare the tape cartridge for removal from
stoplock . A position-hold mode used when the tape is the drive
in a stopped position and under tension
utilities . Utility programs
subsystem . A secondary or subordinate system,
utility programs . A computer program in general
usually capable of operating independently of, or
support of the processes of a computer; for instance, a
asynchronously with, a controlling system
diagnostic program
SUPP . Support
uv . Under voltage
sync . Synchronous, synchronize. Occurring with a
regular or predictable time relationship V
T | vary. To change the status of a device, as from online
| to offline, or offline to online. This action makes the
TAC . Technical area code | device available to systems or other using devices.

tachometer, tach . A device that emits pulses that are | VCR. Volume control region
used to measure/check speed or distance
VOLSER . Volume serial number
tape cartridge . A container holding magnetic tape
volume . A certain portion of data, together with its
that can be processed without separating it from the
data carrier, that can be handled conveniently as a unit
container
VPD . Vital product data. The information contained
tape void . An area in the tape in which no signal can
within the tape drive that requires nonvolatile storage
be detected
used by functional areas of the drive, and information
TCP/IP . Transmission Control Protocol/Internet required for manufacturing, RAS, and engineering
Protocol. When in a tape library, the LAN
| VSARS. Volume statistical analysis and reporting
communication path between the host and the library
| system
manager. This communication path is used for tape
library commands that do not require the 3590, while VTS. Virtual tape server
the SCSI bus is used for commands, data, and
responses that require the 3590. All SCSI-attached
processors require an RS-232 or a LAN attachment for W
library control.
word . A character string that is convenient for some
TCU . Tape control unit purpose to consider as an entity

TH . Thermal WORM. Write-once read-many

thread/load operation . A procedure that places tape Write . Write command

along the tape path
WT . World Trade
TM . (1) Tapemark (2) Trademark
| WTC . World Trade Corporation. An indication of a
topology . The spacial arrangement of communication | segment of the IBM Corporation
nodes in a distributed computing environment

tty . When in a tape library, the RS-232 X

communication path between the host and the library
manager. This communication path is used for tape XR . External register
library commands that do not require the 3590, while
XRA . External register address register
the SCSI bus is used for commands, data, and
responses that require the 3590. All SCSI-attached | xSeries. IBM term for Linux-type products
processors require an RS-232 or a LAN attachment for
library control.

Glossary D-7
D-8 IBM 3590 MI
Index
Numerics ACF (continued)
cable (continued)
3494
motor 10-42
cable feature codes 3-9
sensor 10-46
control path checking (AIX) 9-116
transport (current) 10-33
install drive into 8-25
transport (former) 10-31
port wrap test 9-111
cards, LED 10-48
tools 8-4
cell status LEDs 6-27
3590
components
hardware overview 3-19
listing 6-4
introduction 3-3
locations 10-10
maintenance strategy 3-8
cover
overview 3-4
bezel 9-32
publications xxi
decorative 9-29
reliability, availability, and serviceability
side 9-30
characteristics 3-6
top 9-31
remove from service 8-79
description 6-2
repack 8-81
door 6-7
3591 cable feature codes 3-9
drive/ACF cable 10-44
36-volt power supply, remove 10-62
elevator motor 10-20
90, FID 10-12
export sensor 6-12
91, FID 10-14
feed motor 10-49
92, FID 10-15
functions 6-3
93, FID 10-124
global/interference sensor
94, FID 10-126
about 6-12
95, FID 10-20
FID 9B 10-38
96, FID 10-23
import sensor 6-12
97, FID 10-25
initiator control of 6-20
98, FID 10-26
install 8-19
99, FID
introduction 3-31
current 10-33
leadscrew
former 10-31
drive belt 10-54
9A, FID 10-35
remove 10-15
9B, FID 10-38
LED
9E, FID 10-39
cable 10-45
cards 10-48
cell status indicator 6-27
A limit sensor 6-12
A0, FID 10-41 load test 5-42
A1, FID 10-42 locations 10-10
A2, FID 10-44 magazine
A4, FID 10-45 about 3-31
A5, FID 10-46 lock 6-7
A6, FID 10-48 positions 6-5
A9, FID 10-49 present sensor FID 10-41
AA, FID 10-51 present sensor, about 6-12
AB, FID 10-54 procedures 6-2
ac grounding diagram 7-3 manual mode 6-21
accumulate mode, ACF 6-22 mech (mechanism) test 5-42
ACF modes of operation 6-19
accumulate mode 6-22 motor
align adjustment tool, about 3-45
CE menu 5-55 adjustment tool, using 10-50
option 5-51 cable 10-42
automatic mode 6-23 control card 10-25
cable elevator 10-20
drive/ACF 10-44 feed 10-49
LED 10-45 pinch 10-23

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2002 X-1

ACF (continued) AIX
notes 6-19 checking attachment 9-91
pinch controller FC 2416 and 2420 8-48
motor 10-23 off-load dump 9-67
rollers (transport) 10-51 publications xxi
sensor 6-12 updating microcode using tapeutil from 9-76
priority cell using tapeutil
about 6-9 to check channel attachment 9-91
sensor FID 9E 10-39 to off-load dumps 9-67
sensor purpose 6-12 AL_PA 3-10
random align ACF
2-LUN mode 6-26 menu 5-55
lock sensor 6-27 option 5-51
lock sensor (FID A6) 10-48 alter
mode, about 6-25 serial No menu 5-35
remove and replace 9-33 status menu (CE modes)
sensor cable 10-46 CE DRV serial No 5-35
sensors CE show statistics menu 5-37
listing of 6-12 VPD menu 5-68
locations 6-11 AS/400
set mode menu 5-23 attachment 8-50
system mode 6-24 cable feature codes 3-9
test option 5-39 error log analysis 4-26
transport feature code 6534 or 2729 8-50
about 6-9 off-load dump 9-67
cable (former) 10-31 problem determination 4-26
FID 9A 10-35 publications xxi
mechanism 3-32 rack 8-6
position adjustment tool 3-45 service aid programs 4-26
position sensor adjustment 10-28 system FC 6501 8-50
position sensor FID 10-26 updating microcode 9-76
position sensor, about 6-12 ASC 4-10
address ASCII conversion, hex
CE control store select, menu 5-70 iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System
comments to ii with CISC Processor 4-27
control store select, menu 5-80 with RISC Processor 4-34
device pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System 4-18
fibre 3-10 serial number change (current procedure) 9-52
setting 3-10 serial number change (former procedure) 9-53
fibre menu 5-28 ASCQ 4-10
fibre names, menu 5-56 attachment
information web site xxii 3494 3-9
licensing questions C-1 3494 cable feature codes 3-9
menu, CE 5-46 3591 3-9
return mailing ii checking channel (Windows) 9-103
set from operator/CE panel 8-33 ESCON 3-12
set hard 5-30 ESCON, Extended High Performance
set menu (SCSI) 5-26 Cartridge 3-12
set port 0 (fibre) menu 5-29 fibre
set port 0 (SCSI) menu 5-27 AIX 9-91
set port 1 (fibre) menu 5-30 HP-UX 9-102
set port 1 (SCSI) menu 5-27 iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) 9-89
use soft 5-31 Linux 9-97
adjustment Sun 9-99
ACF motor gear 10-50 Windows, using ntutil 9-104
compressor 10-4 fibre channel
pneumatic system 10-4 about 3-13
tension transducer shield 10-83 feature codes 3-11
transport position sensor 10-28 host 3-12
vacuum 10-4 HP-UX cable feature codes 3-9

X-2 IBM 3590 MI

attachment (continued) cables (continued)
iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System cable feature drive/ACF 10-44
codes 3-9 feature codes
NT cable feature codes 3-9 3591 attachment 3-9
pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System cable feature fibre channel cables 3-11
codes 3-9 various host systems 3-9
SCSI fibre channel
HP-UX 9-102 install 8-67
iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) 9-89 routing (E1A/H1A) 8-74
Sun 9-99 wrap test setup 9-112
system attachment 3-12 LED (ACF) 10-45
Windows 9-103 length restrictions for fibre channel 3-13
Sun cable feature codes 3-9 lengths, SCSI bus 9-109
attention messages motor (ACF) 10-42
ACF 1-37 motor power 10-117
drive 1-32 operator panel
ATTN B11 (FID 91) 10-14
ACF messages 1-37 B1A/E1A/H1A 10-126
DRV messages 1-32 part numbers, SCSI bus 9-109
autoclean option 5-82 power supply 10-120
automatic mode (ACF) 6-23 problem determination, fibre channel 9-113
routing
fibre channel (E11/H11) 8-69
B fibre channel (E1A/H1A) 8-74
B1, FID 10-57 SCSI (B1A/E1A/H1A) 8-60
B2, FID 10-58 SCSI
B5, FID 10-77 examples 8-45
B6, FID 10-79 routing (B1A/E1A/H1A) 8-61
B7, FID 10-81 SCSI wrap test 9-107
BB, FID 10-84 sensor (ACF) 10-46
BC, FID 10-89 tach, motor, and loader 10-118
belt, leadscrew drive (ACF) 10-54 transport
bezel, ACF 9-32 ACF (current) 10-33
BF, FID 10-61 ACF (former) 10-31
brush, automatic head cleaning call, end of 9-8
FID D4 10-114 card
remove and replace 10-107 gripper-present sensor 10-124
bus, SCSI LED (ACF) 10-48
cabling examples 8-45 motor control (ACF) 10-25
termination 8-44 card pack
fan
FID BF 10-61
C remove 10-61
C1, FID 10-62 replacement 10-61
C12/C14 microcode EC level 5-48
CE DRV emulation, menu 5-83 part numbers 10-67
menu options 5-82 remove 10-69
model number 5-83 replace 10-70
model number (CE) 5-82 cartridge
C1x wrap test cleaning 3-41
CE loop diag menu 5-42 description 3-17
verify fix menu 5-39 magazine position 6-5
C6, FID 10-93 manual
C7, FID 10-94 removal 9-37
C8, FID 10-96 unloading 9-49
C9, FID 10-97 cartridge type sensor card, remove 10-99
CA, FID 10-98 cartridge-present sensor, remove 10-101
cables CC, FID 10-99
ACF and operator panel CD, FID 10-101
FID DC 10-121 CE
remove and replace 10-121 address menu 5-46

Index X-3
CE (continued) connectivity
display sensors menu 5-36 fibre channel 3-10
DRV serial No menu (CE modes) 5-35 SCSI 3-9
dump options menu 5-45 control store
fibre wrap menu 5-60 alter menu 5-80
FID 10-103 display menu 5-71
FMR tape menu 5-47 introduction 3-19
logs menu (CE modes) 5-34 select address menu (data in) 5-80
loop diag menu 5-42 select address menu (data out), CE 5-70
main dump menu 5-44 controller
object alias menu 5-45 feature codes 2409, 2412, 6207 6209
offline mode menu 5-38 (pSeries/RS6000 - AIX) 8-49
online mode feature codes 2416 and 2420 (AIX) 8-48
options menu 5-34 model numbers 3-4
panel menus 5-34 convert
options menu 5-38 FMR tape to scratch tape 9-58
save data (serial) menu 5-36 hex to ASCII
save data menu (node port) 5-59 in VPD 9-56
select EC level menu 5-48 message codes 4-8
set port 0 name menu 5-58 MIM exception messages 4-9
set port 1 name menu 5-58 SIM exception messages 4-9
show drive statistics menu (CE modes) 5-37 SIM service messages 4-9
show statistics menu (CE modes) 5-37 SIM/MIM severity 4-10
show tape statistics menu (CE modes) 5-38 cords, power 3-30
verify fix menu 5-39 covers
cell status indicator LEDs (ACF) 6-27 ACF bezel 9-32
cell, priority 6-9 ACF decorative 9-29
CF, FID 10-104 ACF side 9-30
change language menu 5-31 ACF top 9-31
characteristics deck enclosure 9-27
device 3-9 library interface 10-124
RAS 3-6 safety inspection 7-13
checkout, install 8-32 customer options, set 8-35
clean
icon 5-9
messages 9-5 D
mounts 5-53 D0, FID 10-105
usage 5-53 D4, FID 10-114
cleaning D6, FID 10-117
blade 9-5 DA, FID 10-118
brush 9-5 data, erase 3-17
brush (head) 10-114 DB, FID 10-120
cartridge 3-41 DC, FID 10-121
code deck
identifying level of feature 3-34 enclosure
table, ASCII to hex 9-56 cover removal procedure 9-27
command locations 10-56
fibre inquiry 9-93 remove and replace 10-56
inquiry 9-91 locations 10-74
SCSI inquiry 9-91 remove and replace 10-74
completion report, safety inspection 7-17 tach, motor, and loader cable 10-118
compressor decoupler, remove and replace 10-79
adjusting 10-4 degaussing, tape 3-17
remove and replace 10-57 description
config/install menu 5-51 3590 3-3
configure menu 5-51 automatic cartridge facility and magazine 3-31
confirm device characteristics 3-9
mode change menu 5-33 FID strategy 3-8
offline menu 5-26 fiducials 3-23
confirm mode change menu 5-33 hardware differences 3-35
head guide assembly 3-20

X-4 IBM 3590 MI

description (continued) drive (continued)
host messages 3-8 features
operator panel message types 3-25 menu 5-81
pantocam assembly 3-21 option 5-52
pneumatic system 3-25 loader sensors 6-11
power specifications 3-30 model
power supplies 3-28 differences 3-35
power switch and sequence 3-30 number 5-81
tape drive 3-19 options
transport mechanism 3-32 menu (CE) 5-52
determining set 8-36
excessive clean messages problem 9-5 read/write test 5-42
SCSI bus problem 9-108 sensors, location of ACF 6-11
service problem 9-4 serial number
device change (current procedure) 9-52
activity messages 5-13 change (former procedure) 9-53
address 3-10 choosing change method 9-51
characteristics 3-9 determining 9-51
power-on procedure 9-6 entering 5-52
set online 9-10 test option 5-39
device driver driver, device
AIX 9-91 AIX 9-91
error code description 4-19 error code description 4-19
HP-UX 9-102 HP-UX 9-102
Linux 9-97 Linux 9-97
publications xxii publications xxii
Sun 9-99 Sun 9-99
Windows NT or Windows 2000 Windows NT or Windows 2000
checking channel attachment 9-103 checking channel attachment 9-103
updating microcode from 9-83 updating microcode from 9-83
diagnostics dump
C1x wrap test 5-39 CE options menu 5-45
description 3-33 data menu 5-44
loop icon 5-9
diag 5-39 maintenance utilities 9-67
test 5-39 to AIX 9-67
loop diag menu 5-42 to cartridge 9-67
POR 3-33 to HP-UX system 9-70
self test 3-33 to iSeries system 9-67
test ACF 5-39 to Linux system 9-73
test drive 5-39 to OS/400 9-67
test head 5-39 to pSeries system 9-67
test media 5-39 to RS/6000 9-67
test panel 5-39 to SP2 9-71
verify fix menu 5-39 to Sun system 9-69
diagrama de aterramento 7-12 to Windows NT or Windows 2000 9-73
diagrama de toma de tierra 7-10 Dvolser message 5-13
differences
drive model 3-35
hardware 3-35 E
display E3, FID 10-65
sensors menu 5-67 E4, FID 10-67
sensors menu (CE online mode) 5-36 E5, FID 9-118
serial No menu 5-35 E6, FID (normal display) 9-120
status menu (CE modes) 5-35 E6, FID (small letters) 9-122
VPD menu 5-68 E7, FID 9-120
door-open sensor 10-97 EC level
drive check 8-34
ACF cable 10-44 microcode history log 9-61
belt, leadscrew (ACF) 10-54 select menu 5-48

Index X-5
EIA unit fibre (continued)
allocation 8-7 CE show port names 5-57
holes template 8-8 checking attachment
locations 8-7 AIX 9-91
elevator motor (ACF), remove and replace 10-20 HP-UX 9-102
end of call procedure 9-8 iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) 9-89
engr use only menu 5-76 Linux 9-97
erase data 3-17 Sun 9-99
error Windows 9-103
forcing log 5-51 Windows, using ntutil 9-104
information, Sun 4-35 duplex adapter, wrap 3-48
intermittent host cable, install 8-77
fibre channel 9-114 message terms 9-113
SCSI bus 9-109 names
log menu 5-56
analysis procedure 9-126 port 5-29
analysis, iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) 4-26 world wide identification 3-10
analysis, pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System 4-15 node name
display 4-7 set 5-57
menu 5-61 show 5-28
menu (CE modes) 5-34 show menu 5-56
time stamp 5-62 problem determination 9-113
logging, force 5-51 set port 0
match trap 9-130 address menu 5-29
ERRPT commands 4-20 name menu 5-58
ESD set port 1
kit 3-42 address menu 5-30
procedures 9-23 name menu 5-58
excessive clean messages (problem wrap tool 3-47
determination) 9-5 fibre channel
exercise drive on Windows NT or 2000 9-88 bus problem determination 9-113
export cable
cartridge position 3-31 feature codes 3-11
magazine position 6-5 install 8-67
sensor 6-12 connectivity 3-10
intermittent errors 9-114
ports wrap test 9-112
F problem determination 9-113
fan, card pack publications xxii
FID BF 10-61 testing 9-112
remove 10-61 world wide identification (names) 3-10
replace 10-61 world wide name history log 9-63
fastener, hook and loop 3-47 FID
FE, FID 9-123 90 10-12
feature code 91 10-14
2409, 2412, 6207, 6209 8-49 92 10-15
2416 8-48 93 10-124
2420 8-48 94 10-126
6501 8-50 95 10-20
cables 3-9 96 10-23
fibre channel cables 3-11 97 10-25
for 3591 attachment 3-9 98 10-26
level, identifying 3-34 99 (current) 10-33
features menu, drive 5-81 99 (former) 10-31
feed motor (ACF), remove and replace 10-49 9A 10-35
FF, FID 9-125 9B 10-38
fibre 9E 10-39
addresses A0 10-41
about 3-10 A1 10-42
menu 5-28 A2 10-44
cable hook and loop 3-47 A4 10-45

X-6 IBM 3590 MI

FID (continued) FMR (continued)
A5 10-46 instructions (continued)
A6 10-48 update from cartridge 9-58
A9 10-49 make tape 5-47
AA 10-51 microcode update
AB 10-54 menu 5-47
B1 10-57 using cartridge 9-58
B2 10-58 support description 3-40
B5 10-77 tape menu 5-47
B6 10-79 using cartridge to support microcode 3-40
B7 10-81 force error logging 5-51
BB 10-84 FRU replaced menu 5-41
BC 10-89
BF 10-61
C1 10-62 G
C6 10-93 gauge, pressure/vacuum 3-43
C7 10-94 global/interference sensor
C8 10-96 about 6-12
C9 10-97 remove and replace 10-38
CA 10-98 glossary D-1
CC 10-99 gloves, lint-free nylon
CD 10-101 for cartridge removal 9-37
CE 10-103 for handling head guide and brush
CF 10-104 assembly 10-107
D0 10-105 for removing head-cleaning brush assembly 10-115
D4 10-114 green LEDs 6-27
D6 10-117 gripper present sensor card 10-124
DA 10-118 grounding diagram 7-3
DB 10-120 group name menu, VPD 5-68
DC 10-121 guide assembly and head, remove and replace 10-105
E3 10-65
E4 10-67
E5 9-118 H
E6 (normal display) 9-120 H SARS config menu 5-76
E6 (small letters) 9-122 hardware differences 3-35
E7 9-120 head
entry point 1-8 cleaning brush
FE 9-123 FID D4 10-114
FE log menu 5-63 remove and replace 10-114
FF 9-125 FID D0 10-105
FF log menu 5-64 guide and brush assembly 10-105
FID2 5-11 guide assembly
FID3 5-11 about 3-20
FID4 5-12 remove and replace 10-105
messages 5-11 read/write, remove and replace 10-105
severity 4-10 hex conversion, ASCII
strategy 3-8 iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System
fiducial with CISC Processor 4-27
bracket, Model B1A 8-27 with RISC Processor 4-34
description 3-23 pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System 4-18
field offset menu, VPD 5-69 serial number change (current procedure) 9-52
file protect serial number change (former procedure) 9-53
icon 5-9 HGA 10-105
sensor 10-96 history log
file reel motor 10-94 microcode EC level 9-61
FMR names 9-63
copy tape to card pack 5-47 hose kit, pneumatic 10-58
instructions host
convert to scratch tape 9-58 attachments supported 8-67
make FMR tape from scratch tape 9-58 install cable (fibre) 8-77
update FMR tape from drive 9-58 messages 3-8

Index X-7
HP-UX install (continued)
checking channel attachment 9-102 reporting 8-79
updating microcode from 9-82 SCSI cable
host 8-64
Model B1A/E1A/H1A 8-60
I tools 8-4
icon unpack 8-6
3590E 5-10 interface, SCSI 3-9
clean 5-9 interference sensor, global
drive type 5-10 about 6-12
dump 5-9 remove and replace 10-38
file protected 5-9 intermittent
Ultra 5-10 fibre channel error 9-114
identifying feature code level 3-34 SCSI bus errors 9-109
IML 3-33 intervention required
import message 5-13
cartridge position 3-31 screen 5-10
magazine position 6-5 introduction, 3590 3-3
sensor 6-12 iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System
indicators attachment 8-50
file protected 5-9 checking attachment
operator/CE panel 5-9 fibre 9-89
processor check SCSI 9-89
about 5-9 FC 6501 8-50
description 5-5 publications xxi
tape position 5-9 rack 8-6
initial microprogram load 3-33 updating microcode 9-76
inquiry command
about 9-91
fibre 9-93 J
SCSI 9-91 J-type media 3-17
inspection, safety
about 7-2
ac grounding 7-3 K
checklist 7-2 K-type media 3-17
completion report 7-17 kit, pressure/vacuum gauge 3-43
covers 7-13
education 7-2
grounding diagram 7-3 L
labels 7-14 labels
materials 7-2 newer drives 7-15
procedures 7-3 older drives 7-14
rack slides 7-16 language
install change 5-23
ACF 8-19 operator menu 5-31
cable select 5-31
fibre (E1A/H1A) 8-74 leader block replacement kit 3-42
guides (E11/H11 fibre) 8-69 leadscrew
SCSI (B1A/E1A/H1A) 8-61 drive belt (ACF) 10-54
checkout 8-32 remove and replace 10-15
choose correct procedure 8-5 LED
fibre channel cable 8-67 cable (ACF) 10-45
host fibre cable 8-77 cards (ACF) 10-48
in rack 8-6 cell status (ACF) 6-27
intermittent flashing yellow 6-27
fibre channel errors 9-114 indicators, operation, power supply 3-29
SCSI bus errors 9-109 processor check 5-9
menu 5-51 steady green 6-27
Model B1A/E1A/H1A 8-25 steady yellow 6-27
preparation 8-3 level, identifying feature code 3-34
read-me sheet 8-67

X-8 IBM 3590 MI

library magazine (continued)
component locations (B1A/E1A/H1A) 10-123 present sensor (continued)
interface cover, remove 10-124 FID 10-41
manager, port wrap test 9-111 remove and replace 10-41
port wrap test manager 9-111 removing 6-8
limit sensor 6-12 unlock 6-7
Linux main dump menu 5-44
checking attachment 9-97 maintenance strategy 3-8
off-loading dumps to 9-73 manual
system attachment 8-51 cartridge removal 9-37
updating microcode from 9-79 cartridge unloading (B11/E11/H11) 9-49
using tapeutil 9-97 mode (ACF) 6-21
load MAPs
FMR tape menu 5-50 pneumatic problems 2-3
magazine 6-7 power problems 2-7
scratch tape menu 5-49 measurement
loader assembly pneumatic system 10-4
introduction 3-22 pressure 10-4
remove 10-89 vacuum 10-4
locations media
ACF 10-10 test mode menu 5-77
deck 10-74 type indicator 3-17
deck enclosure 10-56 media information message (MIM)
library components (B1A/E1A/H1A) 10-123 definition 4-2
log description 4-2
data filter on/off 5-52
iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System 4-26 introduction 3-8
RS/6000 4-15 severity
error log codes 4-4
analysis 9-126 filter 5-54
display 4-7 menu
menu 5-61 align ACF (CE) 5-55
FID alter serial No 5-35
FE menu 5-63 C12/C14 emulation 5-83
FF menu 5-64 C12/C14 options 5-82
force error logging 5-51 CE address 5-46
menu (CE) 5-60 CE control store display 5-71
menu, error (CE modes) 5-34 CE control store select address 5-70
microcode EC level history 9-61 CE disp/alt menu (CE modes) 5-35
name history 9-63 CE disp/alt VPD menu 5-68
temp error log menu 5-65 CE display sensors 5-67
loop diag CE display sensors (CE online mode) 5-36
menu 5-42 CE drive features 5-81
test 5-39 CE DRV serial No 5-35
LZ-1 3-3 CE dump options 5-45
CE FSC trap list 5-85
CE group name, VPD 5-68
M CE logs 5-60
machine reel CE logs (CE modes) 5-34
hub gap, tool 10-87 CE loop diag 5-42
motor 10-93 CE microcode trap 5-71
magazine CE offline mode options 5-38
cartridge import/export positions 3-31 CE online mode options 5-34
description 3-31 CE online mode panel 5-34
inserting 6-7 CE read tape 5-72
load 6-7 CE remove FSC trap 5-86
lock 6-7 CE remove saved FSC trap 5-85
operator procedures 6-6 CE save data (serial) 5-36
part number 6-2 CE saved FSC trap list 5-84
present sensor CE saved traps 5-72
about 6-12 CE set node name (fibre) 5-57

Index X-9
menu (continued) menu (continued)
CE show port names 5-57 set port 0 address (SCSI) 5-27
CE show statistics 5-37 set port 0 fibre address 5-29
CE utilities 5-66 set port 1 address (SCSI) 5-27
CE VPD data 5-69 set port 1 fibre address 5-30
change language 5-31 show drive statistics 5-37
config/install 5-51 show node name 5-56
configure 5-51 show node name (fibre) 5-28
confirm mode change 5-33 show statistics 5-32
confirm offline 5-26 show tape statistics (on-line) 5-38
control store alter 5-80 space tape 5-74
control store select address 5-80 statistics 5-79
description 5-14 statistics, operator 5-31
display serial No 5-35 temp error log 5-65
drive options 5-52 use soft address 5-31
engr use only 5-76 V SARS config 5-76
error log 5-61 verify data, VPD 5-70
error log (CE modes) 5-34 verify fix 5-39
fibre addresses 5-28 message
fibre names 5-56 ATTN ACF 1-37
fibre port names 5-29 ATTN DRV 1-32
fibre wrap (CE) 5-60 clean 9-5
FID FE log 5-63 code descriptions 4-8
FID FF log 5-64 Dvolser 5-13
field offset, VPD 5-69 exception description 4-9
flow charts 5-15 exception, description 4-9
FMR tape 5-47 fibre, code 5-7
FRU replaced 5-41 fibre, common 9-113
H SARS config 5-76 FID2 5-11
indicators 5-9 FID3 5-11
install 5-51 FID4 5-12
load FMR tape 5-50 intervention required 5-13
load scratch tape 5-49 intervention screen 5-10
main dump 5-44 obtain from HP/UX 4-35
media test mode 5-77 obtain from Sun system 4-35
microcode trap 5-71 obtain from Windows NT or Windows 2000 4-36
next block id 5-75 options and status screen format 5-5
no response 9-133 service description 4-9
object alias 5-45 supplemental line, fibre 5-7
OEM use only 5-78 types, operator/CE panel 3-25
operator 5-22 microcode
operator/CE panel 5-14 CE FSC trap list menu 5-85
options CE remove FSC trap menu 5-86
CE drive 5-52 CE remove saved FSC trap menu 5-85
CE offline 5-38 CE saved FSC trap list menu 5-84
CE online mode 5-34 CE saved traps menu 5-72
operator 5-22 download 3-39
password 5-75 download from host 3-39
port 0 name, set, fibre 5-58 EC level history log 9-61
port 1 name, set, fibre 5-58 EC level, card pack 5-48
process tape 5-73 error match trap 9-130
read block 5-74 field support using FMR 3-39
save node/port data 5-59 problem, FID E5 9-118
SCSI configure 5-55 support using FMR 3-40
select EC level 5-48 suspected problem 9-125
services 5-23 trap menu 5-71
set ACF mode 5-23 updating from
set address (SCSI) 5-26 FMR 9-58
set hard address 5-30 FMR tape menu 5-47
set offline 5-25 HP-UX 9-82
set online 5-25 iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System 9-76

X-10 IBM 3590 MI

microcode (continued)
updating from (continued)
O
object alias menu 5-45
Linux system 9-79
OEM use only menu 5-78
pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System 9-76
off-load dump
SP2 9-83
to AIX 9-67
Sun system 9-81
to HP-UX system 9-70
Windows NT or Windows 2000 9-83
to iSeries system 9-67
microprocessor introduction 3-19
to Linux system 9-73
MIM
to OS/400 9-67
definition 4-2
to SP2 9-71
description 4-2
to Sun system 9-69
filter on/off 5-52
to tape cartridge 9-67
introduction 3-8
to Windows NT or Windows 2000 9-73
severity
offline
codes 4-4
description 5-24
filter 5-54
set (services menu) 5-24
mode
online
accumulate, ACF 6-22
description 5-23
automatic (ACF) 6-23
mode (CE) 5-34
CE online 5-34
set
EC level, card pack 5-48
device 9-10
manual, ACF 6-21
services menu 5-23
random (ACF) 6-25
test 8-78
random 2-LUN (ACF) 6-26
operation modes (ACF) 6-19
system (ACF) 6-24
operator menus 5-22
model number drive 5-81
operator/CE panel
modes of operation (ACF) 6-19
cable (B11) FID 91 10-14
motor adjustment tool (ACF)
change language menu 5-31
using 10-50
description 5-4
motor adjustment tool, ACF 3-45
flow charts 5-15
motors
indicators 5-9
cable assembly 10-42
introduction 3-24
cables, remove and replace 10-117
menu 5-14
control card (ACF) 10-25
message types 3-25
elevator (ACF) 10-20
no response 9-133
feed (ACF) 10-49
relocate
file reel 10-94
model B11 9-25
machine reel 10-93
model B1A 9-26
pinch (ACF) 10-23
remove
mtlib command 9-116
cable (B1A/E1A/H1A) 10-126
FID 90 10-12
FID DC 10-121
N model B11 9-25
name history log 9-63 model B1A 9-26
next block id menu 5-75 service position 9-25
node name set address 8-33
menu, show 5-56 test
set (fibre) 5-57 CE loop diag menu 5-42
node name menu, show (fibre) 5-28 CE verify fix menu 5-39
ntutil program options
base mode B-14 customer 8-35
ineractive mode B-13 drive 8-36
invoking B-13 menu
library mode B-15 CE drive 5-52
off-loading to Windows NT or Windows 2000 9-73 CE offline 5-38
running 4-36 CE online 5-34
starting from Windows NT or Windows 2000 9-86 operator 5-22
symbolic error and error number 4-37 options and status
updating microcode from Windows NT/2000 9-83 message format 5-5
using to check channel attachment 9-104 screen format 5-5
OS/400, updating microcode 9-76

Index X-11
overview, 3590 3-4 panel (continued)
H SARS config menu 5-76
indicators 5-9
P install 5-51
panel introduction to operator/CE 3-24
align ACF (CE) 5-55 load FMR tape 5-50
C12/C14 emulation 5-83 load scratch tape 5-49
C12/C14 options 5-82 main dump 5-44
CE address 5-46 media test mode 5-77
CE control store display 5-71 microcode trap 5-71
CE control store select address 5-70 next block id 5-75
CE disp/alt menu (CE modes) 5-35 no response 9-133
CE disp/alt VPD menu 5-68 object alias 5-45
CE display sensors 5-67 OEM use only 5-78
CE display sensors (CE online mode) 5-36 operator
CE drive features 5-81 description 5-4
CE DRV serial No 5-35 MAP 2-2
CE dump options 5-45 menus 5-22
CE FSC trap list 5-85 message types 3-25
CE group name, VPD 5-68 operator options 5-22
CE logs 5-60 options
CE logs (CE modes) 5-34 CE drive 5-52
CE loop diag 5-42 CE offline 5-38
CE microcode trap 5-71 CE online mode 5-34
CE offline mode options 5-38 operator 5-22
CE online mode 5-34 password 5-75
CE online mode options menu 5-34 port 0 name, set, fibre 5-58
CE read tape 5-72 port 1 name, set, fibre 5-58
CE remove FSC trap 5-86 process tape 5-73
CE remove saved FSC trap 5-85 read block 5-74
CE save data (serial) 5-36 save node/port data 5-59
CE saved FSC trap list 5-84 SCSI configure 5-55
CE saved traps 5-72 select EC level 5-48
CE set node name (fibre) 5-57 services 5-23
CE show port names 5-57 set ACF mode 5-23
CE show statistics menu 5-37 set address (SCSI) 5-26
CE utilities 5-66 set hard address 5-30
CE VPD data 5-69 set offline 5-25
change language 5-31 set online 5-25
config/install 5-51 set port 0 address (SCSI) 5-27
configure 5-51 set port 0 fibre address 5-29
confirm mode change 5-33 set port 1 address (SCSI) 5-27
confirm offline 5-26 set port 1 fibre address 5-30
control store alter 5-80 show drive statistics 5-37
control store select address 5-80 show node name 5-56
description 5-14 show node name (fibre) 5-28
display serial No menu 5-35 show statistics 5-32
drive options 5-52 show tape statistics (on-line) 5-38
engr use only 5-76 space tape 5-74
error log 5-61 statistics 5-79
error log (CE modes) 5-34 statistics, operator 5-31
fibre addresses 5-28 temp error log 5-65
fibre names 5-56 use soft address 5-31
fibre port names 5-29 V SARS config 5-76
fibre wrap (CE) 5-60 verify data, VPD 5-70
FID FE log 5-63 verify fix 5-39
FID FF log 5-64 pantocam
field offset, VPD 5-69 ferrite 10-86
flow charts 5-15 introduction 3-21
FMR tape 5-47 remove and replace 10-84
FRU replaced menu 5-41 password menu 5-75

X-12 IBM 3590 MI

pinch motor (ACF), remove and replace 10-23 pSeries/RS6000 (AIX)
pinch sensor 6-12 checking channel attachment using 9-91
pneumatic system controller FC 2416 and 2420 8-48
adjustment 10-4 off-load dump 9-67
assembly, remove 10-57 publications xxi
hose kit 10-58 updating microcode using tapeutil from 9-76
introduction 3-25 publications
MAP 2-3 3590 xxi
measurement 10-4 9076 SP2 xxii
POR diagnostic 3-33 device drivers xxii
port 0 name menu, set 5-58 fibre channel xxii
port 1 name menu, set 5-58 iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System xxi
port address, fibre 3-10 RISC/pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) xxi
POST (power on self test) 5-42
potentiometer adjusting tool 3-46
power Q
cord 3-30 questions
MAP 2-7 licensing C-1
remove 9-6
restore 9-7
sequence R
functions 3-33 rack, AS/400 8-6
steps 3-30 random lock sensor (ACF)
specifications 3-30 FID A6 10-48
power off procedure 9-6 FID AB 10-54
power on random mode (ACF)
procedure 9-6 2-LUN 6-26
self test (POST) 5-42 using 6-25
switch 3-30 RAS
power supply characteristics 3-6
description 3-28 definition 3-6
function 3-28 read block menu 5-74
LED indicators, operation 3-29 read tape menu 5-72
MAP 2-7 read/write head, remove and replace 10-105
remove 10-62 remote power control 3-28
preface xxi remove and replace
prepare tape drive for service 9-6 3590 from service 8-79
pressure sensor, remove 10-65 ACF and operator/CE panel cable 10-121
pressure/vacuum kit/gauge 3-43 ACF components 10-10
priority cell ACF decorative cover (rack mount only) 9-29
description 6-9 ACF side covers (rack mount only) 9-30
sensor ACF top cover (rack mount only) 9-31
FID 9E 10-39 cable
purpose 6-12 drive/ACF 10-44
remove and replace 10-39 LED (ACF) 10-45
problem determination motor cable (ACF) 10-42
excessive clean messages 9-5 motor power 10-117
fibre channel 9-113 motor, loader, and sensor 10-118
SCSI 9-108 operator/CE panel 10-14
service 9-4 power supply 10-120
process tape menu 5-73 sensor (ACF) 10-46
processor check indicator transport (current style) 10-33
description 5-5 transport (former style) 10-31
using 5-9 card pack 10-67
product cartridge present sensor 10-101
availability 3-7 cartridge-type sensor card 10-99
introduction 3-3 cleaner blade (B11) 10-112
maintenance strategy 3-8 deck 10-74
overview 3-4 deck enclosure 10-56
reliability 3-6 deck enclosure covers 9-27
serviceability 3-7 decoupler 10-79

Index X-13
remove and replace (continued) RPQ (continued)
door-open sensor 10-97 8B3191 (continued)
drive/ACF cable 10-44 parts (with desk side sleeve) 8-41
elevator motor (ACF) 10-20 prepare model B11/E11/H11 in desk side
fan (card pack) 10-61 cover 9-14
feed motor (ACF) 10-49 RS-422 port wrap test
file reel motor 10-94 performing 9-111
file-protect sensor 10-96 setting up 9-111
global/interference sensor 10-38 RS/6000
head cleaning brush 10-114 cable feature codes 3-9
head guide and brush assembly 10-105 controller FC 2416 and 2420 8-48
leadscrew 10-15 controller FCs 2409, 2412, 6207, 6209 8-49
leadscrew drive belt (ACF) 10-54 error log analysis 4-15
LED cable 10-45 error logs, description 4-15
LED cards and random lock sensor (ACF) 10-48 off-load dump 9-67
library components (B1A/E1A/H1A) 10-123 problem determination 4-15
library interface cover (B1A/E1A/H1A) 10-124 updating microcode 9-76
loader assembly 10-89
machine reel motor 10-93
magazine present sensor (ACF) 10-41 S
motor cable (ACF) 10-42 safety inspection
motor control card (ACF) 10-25 about 7-2
motor power cables 10-117 ac grounding 7-3
motor, loader, and sensor cable 10-118 checklist 7-2
operator panel ( (B1A/E1A/H1A)) 10-126 completion report 7-17
operator/CE panel 10-12 covers 7-13
operator/CE panel cable (B11) 10-14 education 7-2
pantocam 10-84 grounding diagram 7-3
pinch motor (ACF) 10-23 labels 7-14
pneumatic assembly 10-57 materials 7-2
pneumatic hose kit 10-58 procedures 7-3
power supply 10-62 rack slides 7-16
power supply cable 10-120 SARS
pressure sensor 10-65 description 4-6
priority cell sensor (ACF) 10-39 enable/disable 5-53
sensor cable (ACF) 10-46 traps 5-53
tape path A sensor 10-103 Schéma de mise à la terre 7-6
tape path B sensor 10-104 SCSI
tape-lifter solenoid 10-77 AS/400 8-50
tension transducer 10-81 attachment 3-12
transport 10-35 bus
transport cable (current) 10-33 cable lengths 9-109
transport cable (former) 10-31 cabling examples 8-45
transport pinch rollers (ACF) 10-51 errors 9-109
transport position sensor (ACF) 10-26 termination 8-44
tray up sensor 10-98 cable routing 8-61
repack 3590 8-81 checking attachment
report, safety inspection 7-17 AIX 9-91
rollers, transport pinch (ACF) 10-51 HP-UX 9-102
RPQ iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) 9-89
8B3190 Sun 9-99
install 8-29 using ntutil under Windows 9-104
parts 8-29 Windows NT or Windows 2000 9-103
parts in desk side cover 8-42 configure menu 5-55
prepare model B1A/E1A in desk side cover 9-18 connectivity 3-9
prepare model B1A/E1A in desk side differential attachment (-2) 8-43
sleeve 9-22 hp-ux 11.00 8-53
8B3191 hp-ux system 8-53
install 8-21 install cable, host 8-64
Model B11/E11/H11 in desk side sleeve 9-20 Linux system 8-51
parts 8-21 NT system 8-54

X-14 IBM 3590 MI

SCSI (continued) sensors (continued)
problem determination transport position (ACF)
intermittent errors 9-109 about 6-12
solid errors 9-108 check and adjust 10-28
RS/6000 remove and replace 10-26
FCs 2416 and 2420 8-48 tray up 10-98
other adapters 8-49 serial No menu, alter 5-35
set address 5-23 serial number change, drive
set address menu 5-26 about 5-52
set port 0 address 5-27 current procedure 9-52
set port 1 address 5-27 former procedure 9-53
Sun systems 8-51 serial number, drive, determining 9-51
Sun, Solaris 7 8-51 service
trace failure 9-110 3590 in Windows NT or Windows 2000
Windows 2000 system 8-54 environment 9-86
wrap test prepare drive for 9-6
about 9-105 problem determination 9-4
ports 9-106 service position
problem determination 9-107 operator/CE panel 9-25
set-up 9-106 pull to
wrap tool front serviced (with ACF) 9-11
about 3-43 front serviced (without ACF) 9-13
SCSI set port 1 address menu 5-27 rear serviced (with ACF) 9-12
select EC level menu 5-48 return from
self test, diagnostic 3-33 front serviced (with ACF) 9-11
sense key 4-10 front serviced (without ACF) 9-13
sensor card, gripper present 10-124 rear serviced (with ACF) 9-12
sensor checkout procedure 9-35 services
sensors menu 5-23
ACF and drive loader, location of 6-11 option 5-22
cable (ACF) 10-46 servo tracks 3-17
cable, tach, motor, and loader 10-118 set
card, cartridge type 10-99 ACF mode menu 5-23
cartridge present 10-101 address menu (SCSI) 5-26
CE display, menu 5-67 hard address 5-30
CE display, menu (CE online mode) 5-36 offline menu 5-25
description (ACF) 6-12 online menu 5-25
display procedure 9-35 port 0 address menu
door open 10-97 fibre 5-29
export (ACF) 6-12 SCSI 5-27
file protect 10-96 port 1 address menu
function (ACF) 6-12 fibre 5-30
global/interference (ACF) SCSI 5-27
about 6-12 set ACF mode option 5-22
remove and replace 10-38 ship group tools 8-4
gripper present 10-124 show
import (ACF) 6-12 drive statistics menu 5-37
limit (ACF) 6-12 statistics menu 5-32
magazine present (ACF) statistics menu (CE modes) 5-37
FID A0 10-41 tape statistics menu (on-line) menu 5-38
function 6-12 SIM
pinch (ACF) 6-12 definition 4-2
pressure 10-65 description 4-2
priority cell (ACF) introduction 3-8
about 6-12 severity 4-4
remove and replace 10-39 severity filter, set 5-54
random lock (ACF) 10-48 SMIT commands 4-20
tape path A, remove 10-103 socket, tape removal tool 9-41
tape path B, remove 10-104 solenoid, tape-lifter 10-77
test procedure 9-35 SP2
off-load dump 9-71

Index X-15
SP2 (continued) tapeutil program
publications xxii command-line mode B-8
updating microcode 9-83 in a Sun system environment B-2
space menu 5-74 in HP-UX environment B-7
specifications, power 3-30 in Linux environment B-16
start here 1-2 in Windows NT or Windows 2000 environment B-13
starting ntutil, Windows NT or Windows 2000 interactive menu-driven interface B-7
environment 9-86 off-loading to
static, ESD procedures 9-23 HP-UX 9-70
statistics Linux 9-73
CE menu 5-79 pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) 9-67
CE show, menu 5-37 SP2 9-71
operator menu 5-31 Sun system 9-69
show drive menu 5-37 tape cartridge 9-67
show menu 5-32 pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System 4-15
show tape statistics menu 5-38 updating microcode from
status HP-UX 9-82
CE disp/alt menu (CE modes) 5-35 iSeries/AS400 (OS/400) System 9-76
CE DRV serial No 5-35 Linux 9-79
strategy, maintenance 3-8 pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) 9-76
Sun SP2 9-83
cable feature codes 3-9 Sun system 9-81
checking attachment 9-99 using 9-102
checking channel attachment 9-99 temp error log menu 5-65
error information 4-35 tension transducer shield, adjust 10-83
off-load dumps to 9-69 test
systems attachment 8-51 ACF
tapetest program 9-99 load 5-42
updating microcode from 9-81 mech 5-42
supported host attachments 8-67 option 5-39
suspected microcode problem 9-125 C1x wrap
switch CE loop diag menu 5-42
operator panel 5-5 verify fix menu 5-39
power on 3-30 diagnostic description 3-33
symbol drive option 5-39
3590E 5-10 head 5-39
clean 5-9 loop diag 5-39
dump 5-9 media 5-77
file protected 5-9 online 8-78
Ultra 5-10 panel option
system mode (ACF) 6-24 CE loop diag menu 5-42
CE verify fix menu 5-39
POR 3-33
T POST (power on self test) 5-42
tape power on self test (POST) 5-42
attachment procedure 9-46 read/write 5-42
convert FMR tape to scratch tape 9-58 sensor 9-35
degaussing 3-17 test media menu 5-39
FMR menu 5-47 wrap
make FMR tape from scratch tape 9-58 fibre channel 9-112
path A sensor 10-103 library manager port 9-111
path B sensor 10-104 problem determination 9-107
position indicator 5-9 SCSI port procedure 9-106
refresh (services menu) 5-23 SCSI port setup 9-105
removal tool 9-41 SCSI ports 9-106
supplies 3-47 tools check 8-34
update FMR tape from drive 9-58 tools status (from CE drive options) 5-52
updating microcode from FMR 9-58 time stamp for error log 5-62
tape unit cleaner 3-46 tool
tape-lifter solenoid 10-77 3494 8-4
tapetest, using 9-99

X-16 IBM 3590 MI

tool (continued) updating microcode (continued)
ACF motor adjustment menu 5-47
about 3-45 off-load dump to Linux system 9-73
using 10-50 off-load dump to Windows NT or Windows
ACF transport position adjustment 3-45 2000 9-73
cleaning cartridge 3-41 use soft address (fibre) 5-31
ESD kit 3-42 utilities
FC 9798 inline terminator 3-48 menu (CE) 5-66
fibre wrap 3-47 off-loading to SP2 9-71
fibre wrap duplex adapter 3-48 tapeutil
gap set, machine reel hub off-load dumps to Linux 9-73
about 3-45 running on pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System 4-18
using 10-87 updating microcode from HP-UX 9-82
hook and loop fastener 3-47 updating microcode from Linux 9-79
hub 3-45 updating microcode from pSeries/RS6000
inline terminator 3-48 (AIX) 9-76
interposer, library attachment wrap 3-44 updating microcode from SP2 9-83
leader block replacement kit 3-42 updating microcode from Sun system 9-81
library attachment wrap using with pSeries/RS6000 (AIX) System 4-15
about 3-44
using 9-111
using library manager port 9-111 V
potentiometer adjusting 3-46 V SARS config menu 5-76
pressure gauge 3-43 vacuum, adjusting 10-4
SCSI wrap verify fix
cable test 9-107 menu 5-39
problem determination 3-43 selection 9-8
setup 9-105 VPD
special 3-41 CE disp/alt menu 5-68
tape removal 9-41 CE group name menu 5-68
tape supplies 3-47 data menu 5-69
tape unit cleaner 3-46 field offset menu 5-69
vacuum gauge 3-43 verify data menu 5-70
trace
failure 9-110
procedure 9-130 W
transducer, tension 10-81 Windows NT or Windows 2000
transport checking channel attachment 9-104
cable (current) 10-33 exercise drive attached to 9-88
cable (former) 10-31 ntutil program 9-104
function 6-9 off-loading dumps to 9-73
mechanism 3-32 starting ntutil from 9-86
pinch rollers (ACF) 10-51 updating microcode from 9-83
position adjustment tool (ACF) 3-45 world wide
position sensor (ACF) display names 9-63
about 6-12 identification (names), fibre channel 3-10
FID 98 10-26 name history log 9-63
position sensor adjustment 10-28 set names 9-64
remove and replace 10-35 wrap test
trap, error match 9-130 SCSI port 9-105
tray-up sensor 10-98 setup fibre channel 9-112
wrap tool
duplex adapter 3-48
U fibre port 3-47
unit address 3-10 library
unload attachment interposer 3-44
drive option 5-22 attachment tool 3-44
from menu 5-4 manager port 9-111
unpacking 8-6 library manager port 9-111
updating microcode RS-422 port 9-111
from FMR cartridge 9-58 SCSI port 3-43

Index X-17
wrap tool (continued)
problem determination 9-107
status test 5-52
ww
display names 9-63
identification (names), fibre channel 3-10
name history log 9-63
set names 9-64

Y
yellow LEDs 6-27

X-18 IBM 3590 MI

Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You
IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Drive 3590
Maintenance Information
Model B11/B1A, E11/E1A, and H11/H1A

Publication No. SA37-0301-05

Overall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book?

Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied Very Dissatisfied

Overall satisfaction h h h h h

How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:

Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied Very Dissatisfied

Accurate h h h h h
Complete h h h h h
Easy to find h h h h h
Easy to understand h h h h h
Well organized h h h h h
Applicable to your tasks h h h h h

Please tell us how we can improve this book:

Thank you for your responses. May we contact you? h Yes h No

When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Name Address

Company or Organization

Phone No.
 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You Cut or Fold
SA37-0301-05
 Along Line

_ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ _Tape
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Please
_ _ _ _ _do
_ _not
_ _ staple
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ Tape
______

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

International Business Machines Corporation

RAS Package Development
Department 4WUA
9000 South Rita Road
Tucson, AZ 85744-0001

_________________________________________________________________________________________
Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape

Cut or Fold
SA37-0301-05 Along Line



Part Number: 19P5395

Printed in U.S.A.

EC H28177

(1P) P/N: 19P5395

SA37-0301-05
Spine information:

IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Model B11/B1A,

 Drive 3590 IBM 3590 MI E11/E1A, and H11/H1A